Routledge History of Philosophy Volume VIII Twentieth-Century Continental Philosophy - Richard Ke

Routledge History of Philosophy Volume VIII Twentieth-Century Continental Philosophy - Richard Ke

1 Pages 1-10

▲back to top

1.1 Page 1

▲back to top

1.2 Page 2

▲back to top
Routledge History of Philosophy, Volume VIII
Continental philosophy, as it has emerged in the twentieth century, is less a seamless
fabric than a patchwork of diverse strands. Phenomenology, hermeneutics, existentialism,
structuralism, critical theory, deconstruction—these are some of the salient movements
which have developed in continental Europe between 1900 and the 1990s, though their
influence is by no means confined to geographical location. Continental thought has
proved highly exportable, circulating far beyond the frontiers of Europe to provoke
strong responses in the intellectual world at large.
The fourteen articles in this volume outline and assess some of the issues and
experiments of continental philosophy. The first five span the twin movements of
phenomenology and existentialism, running from Husserl and Heidegger to Sartre,
Merleau-Ponty and Levinas. Subsequent essays deal with specific currents of continental
thought in such areas as science, Marxism, linguistics, politics, aesthetics, feminism and
hermeneutics. A final chapter on postmodernism highlights the manner in which so many
concerns of continental thought culminate in a radical anti-foundationalism.
This volume provides a broad, scholarly introduction to this period for students of
philosophy and related disciplines, as well as some original interpretations of these
authors. It includes a glossary of technical terms and a chronological table of
philosophical, scientific and other cultural events.
Richard Kearney is a Professor of Philosophy at University College, Dublin and a
Visiting Professor at Boston College. He is the author of Poetics of Modernity (1994),
Poetics of Imagining (1991), The Wake of Imagination (1988), Modern Movements in
European Philosophy (1986) and Dialogues with Contemporary Continental Thinkers
(1984).

1.3 Page 3

▲back to top
Routledge History of Philosophy
General editors—G.H.R.Parkinson and S.G.Shanker
The Routledge History of Philosophy provides a chronological survey of the history of
Western philosophy, from its beginnings in the sixth century BC to the present time. It
discusses all major philosophical developments in depth. Most space is allocated to those
individuals who, by common consent, are regarded as great philosophers. But lesser
figures have not been neglected, and together the ten volumes of the History include
basic and critical information about every significant philosophy of the past and present.
These philosophers are clearly situated within the cultural and, in particular, the scientific
context of their time.
The History is intended not only for the specialist, but also for the student and the general
reader. Each chapter is by an acknowledged authority in the field. The chapters are
written in an accessible style and a glossary of technical terms is provided in each
volume.

1.4 Page 4

▲back to top
Routledge History of Philosophy
Volume VIII
Twentieth-Century
Continental Philosophy
EDITED BY
Richard Kearney
London and New York

1.5 Page 5

▲back to top
First published 1994
by Routledge
11 New Fetter Lane, London EC4P 4EE
Simultaneously published in the USA and Canada
by Routledge
29 West 35th Street, New York, NY 10001
Routledge is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group
This edition published in the Taylor & Francis e-Library, 2005.
“To purchase your own copy of this or any of Taylor & Francis or Routledge’s
collection of thousands of eBooks please go to www.eBookstore.tandf.co.uk.”
© 1994 Richard Kearney and individual contributors
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reprinted or reproduced or
utilized in any form or by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now
known or hereafter invented, including photocopying and recording, or in any
information storage or retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
Twentieth-Century Continental Philosophy—Routledge History of Philosophy
Series;
Vol. 8
I. Kearney, Richard
190.9
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Twentieth-century Continental philosophy/edited by Richard Kearney.
p. cm.—(Routledge history of philosophy: v. 8)
Includes bibliographical references and index.
1. Philosophy, Modern-20th century. 2. Philosophy, European.
I. Kearney, Richard. II. Series.
B804.T884 1994
190’.9’04–dc20
93–15763
ISBN 0-203-03067-2 Master e-book ISBN
ISBN 0-203-06010-5 (Adobe ebook Reader Format)
ISBN 0-415-05629-2 (Print Edition)

1.6 Page 6

▲back to top
Contents
General editor’s preface
vi
Notes on contributors
viii
Chronology
xi
Introduction
Richard Kearney
1
1 The beginnings of phenomenology: Husserl and his predecessors
Richard Cobb-Stevens
5
2 Philosophy of existence 1: Heidegger
Jacques Taminiaux
32
3 Philosophy of existence 2: Sartre
Thomas R.Flynn
61
4 Philosophy of existence 3: Merleau-Ponty
Bernard Cullen
86
5 Philosophies of religion: Marcel, Jaspers, Levinas
William Desmond
108
6 Philosophies of science: Mach, Duhem, Bachelard
Babette E.Babich
144
7 Philosophies of Marxism: Lenin, Lukács, Gramsci, Althusser
Michael Kelly
184
8 Critical theory: Horkheimer, Adorno, Habermas
David Rasmussen
210
9 Hermeneutics: Gadamer and Ricoeur
G.B.Madison
240
10 Italian idealism and after: Gentile, Croce and others
Giacomo Rinaldi
289
11 French structuralism and after: de Saussure, Lévi-Strauss, Barthes,
Lacan, Foucault
Hugh J.Silverman
322
12 French feminist philosophy: de Beauvoir, Kristeva, Irigaray, Le
Doeuff, Cixous
Alison Ainley
338
13 Deconstruction and Derrida
Simon Critchley and Timothy Mooney
365
14 Postmodernist theory: Lyotard, Baudrillard and others
Thomas Docherty
392
Glossary
418
Index
423

1.7 Page 7

▲back to top
General editors’ preface
The history of philosophy, as its name implies, represents a union of two very different
disciplines, each of which imposes severe constraints upon the other. As an exercise in
the history of ideas, it demands that one acquire a ‘period eye’: a thorough understanding
of how the thinkers whom it studies viewed the problems which they sought to resolve,
the conceptual frameworks in which they addressed these issues, their assumptions and
objectives, their blind spots and miscues. But as an exercise in philosophy, we are
engaged in much more than simply a descriptive task. There is a crucial aspect to our
efforts: we are looking for the cogency as much as the development of an argument, for
its bearing on questions which continue to preoccupy us as much as the impact which it
may have had on the evolution of philosophical thought.
The history of philosophy thus requires a delicate balancing act from its practitioners.
We read these writings with the full benefit of hindsight. We can see why the minor
contributions remained minor and where the grand systems broke down: sometimes as a
result of internal pressures, sometimes because of a failure to overcome an insuperable
obstacle, sometimes because of a dramatic technological or sociological change, and,
quite often, because of nothing more than a shift in intellectual fashion or interests. Yet,
because of our continuing philosophical concern with many of the same problems, we
cannot afford to look dispassionately at these works. We want to know what lessons are
to be learnt from the inconsequential or the glorious failures; many times we want to
plead for a contemporary relevance in the overlooked theory or to reconsider whether the
‘glorious failure’ was indeed such or simply ahead of its time: perhaps even ahead of its
author.
We find ourselves, therefore, much like the mythical ‘radical translator’ who has so
fascinated modern philosophers, trying to understand author’s ideas in their and their
culture’s eyes, and at the same time, in our own. It can be a formidable task. Many times
we fail in the historical undertaking because our philosophical interests are so strong, or
lose sight of the latter because we are so enthralled by the former. But the nature of
philosophy is such that we are compelled to master both techniques. For learning about
the history of philosophy is not just a challenging and engaging pastime: it is an essential
element in learning about the nature of philosophy—in grasping how philosophy is
intimately connected with and yet distinct from both history and science.
The Routledge History of Philosophy provides a chronological survey of the history of
Western philosophy, from its beginnings up to the present time. Its aim is to discuss all
major philosophical developments in depth, and, with this in mind, most space has been
allocated to those individuals who, by common consent, are regarded as great
philosophers. But lesser figures have not been neglected, and it is hoped that the reader
will be able to find, in the ten volumes of the History, at least basic information about any
significant philosopher of the past or present.
Philosophical thinking does not occur in isolation from other human activities, and this

1.8 Page 8

▲back to top
History tries to situate philosophers within the cultural, and in particular the scientific,
context of their time. Some philosophers, indeed, would regard philosophy as merely
ancillary to the natural sciences; but even if this view is rejected, it can hardly be denied
that the sciences have had a great influence on what is now regarded as philosophy, and it
is important that this influence should be set forth clearly. Not that these volumes are
intended to provide a mere record of the factors that influenced philosophical thinking;
philosophy is a discipline with its own standards of argument, and the presentation of the
ways in which these arguments have developed is the main concern of this History.
In speaking of ‘what is now regarded as philosophy’, we may have given the
impression that there now exists a single view of what philosophy is. This is certainly not
the case; on the contrary, there exist serious differences of opinion, among those who call
themselves philosophers, about the nature of their subject. These differences are reflected
in the existence at the present time of two main schools of thought, usually described as
‘analytic’ and ‘continental’ philosophy respectively. It is not our intention, as general
editors of this History, to take sides in this dispute. Our attitude is one of tolerance, and
our hope is that these volumes will contribute to an understanding of how philosophers
have reached the positions which they now occupy.
One final comment. Philosophy has long been a highly technical subject, with its own
specialized vocabulary. This History is intended not only for the specialist but also for the
general reader. To this end, we have tried to ensure that each chapter is written in an
accessible style; and since technicalities are unavoidable, a glossary of technical terms is
provided in each volume. In this way these volumes will, we hope, contribute to a wider
understanding of a subject which is of the highest importance to all thinking people.
G.H.R.Parkinson
S.G.Shanker

1.9 Page 9

▲back to top
Notes on contributors
Alison Ainley is Lecturer in Philosophy at Anglia Polytechnic University, Cambridge,
and author of a forthcoming book on Luce Irigaray.
Babette Babich is Professor of Philosophy at Fordham University, New York, and
author of several studies on continental thought.
Richard Cobb-Stevens is Head of the Philosophy Department at Boston College and
author of James and Husserl (1974) and Husserl and Analytic Philosophy (1989).
Simon Critchley is Lecturer in Philosophy at the University of Essex and author of The
Ethics of Deconstruction (1992) and co-editor of Re-Reading Levinas (1991).
Bernard Cullen is a Professor of Philosophy at Queen’s University, Belfast, editor of the
Irish Philosophical Journal and author of Hegel and Political Theory.
William Desmond is Chair of Philosophy at Loyola College, Baltimore, visiting
professor at Louvain University and author of Desire, Dialectic and Otherness (1988),
Art and the Absolute (1986) and Philosophy and its Others (1991).
Thomas Docherty is Chair of the Department of English at Trinity College, Dublin and
author of On Modern Authority (1987), Reading (Absent) Character (1983), John
Donne, Undone (1986) and After Theory (1991).
Thomas R.Flynn is Professor of Philosophy at Emory University and author of several
studies of modern continental thought.
Michael Kelly is Professor of French at the University of South-hampton, and author of
several books including Modern French Marxism (1982).
Gary Madison is Professor of Philosophy at McMaster University, Canada and founder-
director of the Canadian Society of Hermeneutics and Postmodern Thought. He is the
author of Phénoménologie de Merleau-Ponty (1973), Understanding (1982), Logic of
Liberty (1986) and Hermeneutics of Postmodernity (1988).
Timothy Mooney is a Lecturer in Philosophy at University College, Dublin, and author
of several studies of modern European thought.
Mara Rainwater is a Lecturer in Philosophy at University College, Dublin. Her special
areas of interest include Critical Theory, Nietzsche, and Communicative Ethics.
David Rasmussen is Professor of Philosophy at Boston College, founder-editor of the
journal Philosophy and Social Criticism and author of Reading Habermas (1991).
Giacomo Rinaldi is Professor of Philosophy at the University of Urbino and an expert in
German and Italian idealist philosophy.
Hugh J.Silverman is Professor of Philosophy and Comparative Literature at the State
University of New York at Stony Brook and author of Inscriptions: Between
Phenomenology and Structuralism (1987), editor of Philosophy and Non-Philosophy
since Merleau-Ponty (1988) and Executive Director of the International Association
for Philosophy and Literature.
Jacques Taminiaux is Professor of Philosophy at the University of Louvain and Boston
College, Director of the Centre d’études phénoménologiques at Louvain University,

1.10 Page 10

▲back to top
and author of many books on continental philosophy including Dialectic and Difference
(1985), Heidegger’s Project of Fundamental Ontology (1991) and Poetics,
Speculations and Judgment (1994).

2 Pages 11-20

▲back to top

2.1 Page 11

▲back to top
This page intentionally left blank.

2.2 Page 12

▲back to top
Chronology
Mara Rainwater, University College Dublin
Unless otherwise specified, the dates assigned to books or articles are the dates of
publication, and the dates assigned to musical or stage works are those of first
performance. The titles of works not written in English have been translated, unless they
are better known in their original form.
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1755Rousseau, Discourse on the Origin of
Inequality
1756
Voltaire, ‘Poem on the Disaster at
Lisbon’ (1755 earthquake)
1759Hamann, Socratic Memorabilia
Sterne, Tristram Shandy
Voltaire, Candide
1762Rousseau, Emile
Diderot, Rameau’s Nephew
Rousseau, The Social Contract
1764
Voltaire, Philosophical Dictionary
1765
1766
Lessing, Laöcoon
‘Sturm und Drang’ Movement to
1787 (Goethe, Schiller, Herder)
1772Herder, On the Origin of Language
1774
Goethe, The Sorrows of Young
Werther
1779
Lessing, Nathan the Wise
1781Kant, Critique of Pure Reason (‘A’ Schiller, The Robbers
edition)
1783Kant, Prolegomena to any Future
Metaphysics
1784Herder, Outlines of the Philosophy of the Beaumarchais, The Marriage of
History of Mankind (4 vols, 1784–91) Figaro
Kant, ‘Idea for a Universal History’
1785Kant, Foundations of the Metaphysics of
Morals
1787Jacobi, ‘On the Transcendental Idealism’ Mozart, Don Giovanni
Kant, Critique of Pure Reason (‘B’ Schiller, Don Carlos

2.3 Page 13

▲back to top
edition)
Science and technology
Politics
Magnesium discovered (Davy) War between French and British in North 1755
America
Lisbon earthquake kills 35,000
Seven Years War in Europe (1756–63) 1756
French defeated in Quebec by British
1759
Catherine II (The Great); Tsarina 1762–96 1762
Spinning jenny (Hargreaves)
1764
Condensing steam engine Joseph II of Austria; Holy Roman Emperor 1765
(Watt)
until 1790
Hydrogen discovered
1766
(Cavendish)
Nitrogen discovered
Poland partitioned among Russia, Prussia, 1772
(Rutherford)
and Austria
Oxygen (Priestly and Scheele) Louis XVI; King of France (to 1792)
1774
First cast-iron bridge at
Spain joins French and Americans against 1779
Coalbrookdale, Shropshire Britain
British surrender to French and American 1781
forces at Yorktown, Virginia
First successful hot-air balloon Treaty of Paris ending American War of 1783
(Montgolfier brothers)
Independence
1784
Power loom (Cartwright)
Frederick the Great establishes League of 1785
German Princes against Joseph II of Austria
French Assembly dismissed for refusal to 1787
introduce financial reforms
Continental philosophy: roots and dialogue The arts
1788Kant, Critique of Practical Reason
Goethe, Egmont
1789
Blake, Songs of Innocence
1790Kant, Critique of Judgment
1791
Mozart, The Magic Flute
1792Fichte, Attempt at a Critique of All Revelation
Wollstonecraft, Vindication of the Rights of
Women
1793
1794Condorcet, Sketch for a Historical Picture of the Blake, Songs of Experience
Human Mind Fichte, Jena Wissenschaftslehre
1795Schelling, Philosophical Letters on Dogmatism Goethe, Wilhelm Meister’s

2.4 Page 14

▲back to top
and Criticism
von Humboldt, On Thought and Language
1796
1797Kant, Metaphysics of Morals
Schelling, Ideas for a Philosophy of Nature
1798
1799Schleiermacher, ‘On Religion’
von Humboldt, Aesthetic Essays
1800Fichte, The Vocation of Man
Schelling, System of Transcendental Idealism
Schleiermacher translates Plato into German
(1800–28)
1802
1804
1807Hegel, Phenomenology of Spirit (Jena)
Apprenticeship
Schiller, On the Aesthetic
Education of Mankind
Goethe and Schiller,
Ballads
Hölderlin, Hyperion
Wordsworth and Coleridge,
Lyrical Ballads
Goya, Los Caprichos
Schiller, Wallenstein’s
Death
Schlegel, Lucinde
Beethoven, First Symphony
Novalis, Hymn to the Night
Mme. de Stael, Delphine
Novalis, Heinrich von
Ofterdingen
Schiller, Wilhelm Tell
Beethoven, Fourth
Symphony
Science and technology
Theory of Combustion
(Lavoisier)
Metric system proposed by
France
Cotton gin (Whitney)
Lithography invented
(Senefelder) Laplace, System
of the World
Politics
First convicts shipped from Britain to
Australia
Storming of the Bastille, Paris; the French
Revolution begins
Louis XVI and family captured; he affirms
new French Constitution
France declared a Republic; Austria and
Prussia unite against France
Louis XVI and Marie Antoinette executed;
Reign of Terror under Robespierre
Danton and Robespierre executed; ends
Reign of Terror
France makes peace with Spain and Prussia
Napoleon Bonaparte leads French army to
conquer Italy
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796

2.5 Page 15

▲back to top
1797
Malthus, Essay on the
French occupy Rome, Switzerland, Egypt; 1798
Principle of Population
Vinegar Hill Rebellion in Ireland for
separation from Britain
Napoleon rules France as Consulate until 1799
1804
First electric battery (Volta)
1800
Bonaparte created First Consul for life
1802
Steam locomotive (Trevithick) Napoleon crowns self Emperor ‘Napoleon I’ 1804
and the First Empire begins
The Clermont, first steamship British abolish slave trade throughout their 1807
(Fulton)
empire
Continental philosophy: roots and dialogue The arts
1808
Goethe, Faust (Pt I)
1809Schelling, Philosophical Inquiries into the Chateaubriand, Les Martyrs
Nature of Human Freedom
1811
1812Hegel, Science of Logic (3 vols, 1812–16)
1813Schopenhauer, On the Fourfold Root of the
Principle of Sufficient Reason
1814
Goya, Executions of 3rd May
1815de Tracy, Elements of Ideology (4 vols, 1801–
15)
Schopenhauer, On Vision and Colours
1817Hegel, Encyclopedia of the Philosophical
Sciences
1818Schopenhauer, The World as Will and
Grillparzer, Sappho
Representation
1820
Lamartine, Meditations
1821Hegel, Philosophy of Right
De Quincey, Confessions of
Schleiermacher, The Christian Faith (2 vols) an Opium Eater
Heine, Poems
1822
1825Saint-Simon, The New Christianity
1826
Hölderlin, Lyrical Poems
1827
1830Comte, Positive Philosophy (6 vols, 1830–42) Berlioz, Symphonie
Feuerbach, Thoughts Concerning Death and Fantastique
Immortality
Stendhal, The Red and the
Black

2.6 Page 16

▲back to top
1831
1832
1837Bolzano, Scientific Writings (4 vols)
Goethe, Faust (Pt II)
Balzac, Lost Illusions (1837–
43)
Science and technology
Politics
French occupy Spain; Joseph Bonaparte 1808
becomes King of Spain
1809
Avogadro’s Molecular Hypothesis Luddite riots in England against
1811
mechanization in the textile industry
500,000 of Napoleon’s army die in 1812
retreat from Moscow
Coalition of Austria, Prussia, Russia, 1813
Britain and Sweden invades France
Laplace, A Philosophical Essay on Treaty of Paris ends Napoleonic Wars; 1814
Probabilities
Napoleon abdicates and is exiled to Elba;
Congress of Vienna
Napoleon escapes Elba; marches on 1815
Paris; Battle of Waterloo; Napoleon
exiled to St Helena
Kaleidoscope (Brewster)
1817
Aix-la-Chapelle: France joins great 1818
powers in Quintuple Alliance
Electromagnetism (Oersted)
Liberal revolutions in Spain, Portugal, 1820
and Italy
1821
Camera (Niepce)
1822
Electromagnet (Sturgeon)
In Russia, Decembrist Rising against 1825
Tsar
Laws of Electromagnetism
1826
(Ampère) First permanent
photograph (Niepce)
Ohm’s Law of Electromagnetic
1827
Conduction
Lyell, Principles of Geology (3 Paris July Revolution
1830
vols)
Charles X overthrown; Louis-Philippe
King (to 1848)
Electromagnetic induction
Mazzini forms ‘Young Italy’ movement; 1831
(Faraday and Henry)
Polish revolution crushed by Russians
Reform Act passed in Britain
1832

2.7 Page 17

▲back to top
Telegraph (Morse)
Victoria Queen of England (to 1901) 1837
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1839Feuerbach, Towards a Critique of
Hegelian Philosophy
1841Feuerbach, The Essence of Christianity Emerson, Essays (1841–4)
Proudhon, What Is Property?
Turner, Snowstorm—Steamboat off a
Harbour’s Mouth
1842
Gogol, Dead Souls
G.Sand, Consuelo
1843Feuerbach, Provisional Theses
Ruskin, Modern Painters
Kierkegaard, Fear and Trembling
Kierkegaard, Repetition
Kierkegaard, Either/Or
Marx, Critique of Hegel’s Philosophy
of Right
1844Kierkegaard, The Concept of Dread Chateaubriand, Life of Rancé
Marx, The Paris Manuscripts
Stirner, The Ego and Its Own
1845Marx, Theses on Feuerbach
Gautier, España
Marx and Engels, The Holy Family
1846Kierkegaard, Concluding Unscientific Michelet, The People
Postscript
Marx and Engels, The German
Ideology
1848Marx and Engels, Communist
Manifesto
1851Proudhon, General Idea of the
Sainte-Beuve, Lundis
Revolution in the 19th Century
1852
Grimm, German Dictionary (vol. 1,
1852–4)
1854
Nerval, Aurélia
1855
Transformation of Paris by
Haussmann
1857Marx, drafts Grundrisse
Flaubert, Madame Bovary
Baudelaire, Les Fleurs du mal
1859
1862Brentano, On the Manifold Sense of Hugo, Les Misérables
Being in Aristotle
Turgenev, Fathers and Sons
1863Proudhon, On the Federal Principle Salon des Refusés—Paris
Tolstoy, War and Peace (1863–9)

2.8 Page 18

▲back to top
Science and technology
Politics
Vulcanized rubber (Goodyear)
Opium War between China 1839
Ozone discovered (Schönbein)
and Britain
1841
‘Doppler Effect’ predicted the apparent change Hong Kong ceded to Britain 1842
in wavelength when the observer and wave
source are in relative motion (C.Doppler)
Natal becomes British 1843
colony
1844
1845
Planet Neptune discovered (Galle)
Potato famine in Ireland (a 1846
Sewing machine (Howe)
million dead by 1851)
Revolutions throughout 1848
Europe
Louis-Philippe abdicates in
Paris
Bakunin imprisoned by Tsar 1851
(1851–7)
Gyroscope (L.Foucault)
1852
Crimean War: France, 1854
Britain, and Turkey against
Russia (to 1856)
Celluloid (Parkes)
1855
Conversion process for steel (Bessemer)
Indian mutiny (Lucknow) 1857
against Britain
Darwin, The Origin of Species
1859
Internal combustion engine (Lenoir)
Rapid repeat-fire gun (Gatling)
Bismarck becomes Prime 1862
Minister in Prussia
French occupation of
1863
Mexico City
Lincoln emancipates slaves
Continental philosophy: roots and dialogueThe arts
1864
Dostoyevsky, Notes from
Underground
1865Taine, Philosophy of Art
Wagner, Tristan and Isolde
1866
Dostoyevsky, Crime and
Punishment

2.9 Page 19

▲back to top
1867Marx, Das Kapital
Ibsen, Peer Gynt
1869
Wagner, Ring Series produced
1869–76
1870Dilthey, The Life of Schleiermacher
Rosetti, Poems
1871
Zola, Rougon-Macquart
Series
1873Nietzsche, Untimely Meditations
Rimbaud, A Season in Hell
Stumpf, On the Psychological Origin of the
Idea of Space
1874Brentano, Psychology from an Empirical First Impressionist Exhibition
Standpoint
in Paris
1876
Turgenev, Virgin Soil
1877
Rodin, Age of Bronze
1879Frege, The Foundations of Arithmetic
Ibsen, A Doll’s House
1880
French Symbolist Movement
(1880–95)
Mallarmé, Verlaine
1882Nietzsche, The Gay Science
Wagner, Parsifal
1883Dilthey, Introduction to the Human Sciences
Mach, The Science of Mechanics
1885
Cézanne, Mont S.Victoire
Van Gogh, The Potato-Eaters
Van Gogh, The Sunflowers
1886Nietzsche, Beyond Good and Evil
Pointillism (Seurat, Signac,
Luce)
1887Husserl, On the Concept of Number: A
Strindberg, The Father
Psychological Analysis
Nietzsche, On the Genealogy of Morals
Science and technology
Maxwell’s Electromagnetic
Theory of Light
Dynamite invented (Nobel)
Typewriter (Scholes)
Periodic arrangement of
elements (Mendeleev)
Politics
Marx founds First International in London;
Bakunin challenges his leadership
End of American Civil War; Lincoln
assassinated
Treaty of Paris ends Austro-Prussian War
Prussian leadership of North German
Confederation
1864
1865
1866
1867
1869
Kingdom of Italy annexes Papal States
French Third Republic begins
1870

2.10 Page 20

▲back to top
Darwin, ‘The Descent of Man’ Paris Commune crushed
1871
German Empire declared by Wilhelm I
First Republic of Spain (to 1874)
1873
1874
Telephone (Bell)
Britain and France take joint control of
1876
Egypt’s finances
Phonograph (Edison)
Queen Victoria as Empress of India
1877
Incandescent lamp (Edison) Irish Land League under Parnell
1879
Boers revolt against British control in South 1880
Africa
Triple Alliance: Germany, Austria, Italy (to 1882
1914)
Health insurance introduced in Germany 1883
First rabies innoculation
French protectorate over Indochina
1885
(Pasteur)
Electric transformer (Stanley)
Electromagnetic waves
Gladstone’s Irish Home Rule Bill defeated in 1886
discovered (Hertz)
Parliament
Gramophone (Berliner)
Italy and Ethiopia at war
1887
Motor car engine (Daimler and
Benz)
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1888Natorp, Introduction to the
Psychology of Critical Method
1889Bergson, Time and Free Will
Hauptmann, Before Sunrise
1890Frazer, The Golden Bough
Van Gogh, Road with Cypress Trees
Guyau, The Origin of the Idea of Time
1891Husserl, Philosophy of Arithmetic Gauguin leaves France for Tahiti
1893Durkheim, The Division of Labour in Art Nouveau in architecture: Horta’s
Society
‘Tassel House’ (Brussels)
Mach, Popular Scientific Lectures
1894Husserl, Psychological Studies on Monet, Rouen Cathedral Series
Elementary Logic
Wilde, Salomé, with Beardsley
illustrations
1895Freud, Studies on Hysteria
Munch, The Cry
1896Bergson, Matter and Memory
Santayana, The Sense of Beauty
1897Durkheim, Suicide
1898

3 Pages 21-30

▲back to top

3.1 Page 21

▲back to top
1899
Tolstoy, Resurrection
1900Freud, The Interpretation of Dreams Chekhov, Uncle Vanya
Husserl, Logical Investigations (vol. Mahler, Fourth Symphony
1)
Sibelius, Finlandia
1901Husserl, Logical Investigations (vol. T.Mann, Buddenbrooks
2)
Strindberg, The Dance of Death
1902Croce, Aesthetics as a Science of Gide, The Immoralist
Expression and General Linguistics Monet, Waterloo Bridge
Poincaré, Science and Hypothesis
1903
Schoenberg begins teaching in
Vienna
Salon d’Automne in Paris
1904Duhem, The Aim and Structure of Isadora Duncan performs in Berlin
Physical Theory (1904–6)
Puccini, Madame Butterfly
Meinong, On the Theory of the Object
Science and technology
Politics
Kodak camera (Eastman)
Wilhelm II German Emperor (to
Pneumatic tyre (Boyd)
1918)
French collapse of Panama Canal
Company in financial scandal
Rotogravure process (Klic)
Cinema history: Edison patents the
Kinetoscope and Kinetograph
French protectorate over Ivory
Coast
Dreyfus Affair in France
Nicholas II last Russian Tsar (to
1918)
Marconi’s wireless (radio)
Discovery of X-Ray (Roentgen)
Edison patents Kinetophone for sound
Radioactivity discovered (Becquerel) France annexes Madagascar
‘Cinematographie’ in France (Lumière) Boundaries of Siam (Thailand)
settled by British and French
Diesel engine (Diesel)
Discovery of electron (Thomson)
Radium discovered (P. & M.Curie) Treaty of Paris: Cuban
independence from Spain
Tape recorder (Poulsen)
First Hague Peace Conference to
settle international disputes
Max Planck’s Quantum Theory
German Navy Law begins arms
1888
1889
1890
1891
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900

3.2 Page 22

▲back to top
increase with Britain
Boxer Rebellion in China
Increasing terrorist activity in
Russia
Radio-Telephone invented (Fessenden)
Wright Brothers first aeroplane flight Bolshevik-Menshevik split
Emmeline Pankhurst forms
Women’s
Social and Political Union
Diode (Fleming)
Entente-Cordiale between France
and Britain
1901
1902
1903
1904
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1905Mach, Knowledge and Error
Matisse, Woman with a Hat (Fauvism)
Weber, The Protestant Ethic and the German artists (Kirchner, Bleyl) form
Spirit of Capitalism
Die Brücke (The Bridge)
Debussy, La Mer
1906Santayana, The Life of Reason
1907Bergson, Creative Evolution
Picasso, Les Demoiselles d’Avignon
Husserl, The Idea of Phenomenology Stefan George, The Seventh Ring
W.James, Pragmatism
1908Poincaré, Science and Method
Brancusi’s sculpture, The Kiss
1909Croce, Pragmatic Philosophy
Diaghilev and Fokine, Ballets Russes
W.James, A Pluralistic Universe in Paris
Marinetti, Futurist Manifesto
1910Husserl, Philosophy as a Rigorous Rilke, The Notebooks of Malte Laurids
Science (1910–11)
Brigge
Russell and Whitehead, Principia Stravinsky, The Firebird for Diaghilev
Mathematica (3 vols, 1910–13)
1911Bergson, ‘Philosophical Intuition’ German Expressionism: Der Blaue
Reiter (Blue Rider) group, 1911–14
(Klee, Marc, Kandinsky)
1912Durkheim, The Elementary Forms of Duchamp, Nude Descending a
Religious Life
Staircase
Nijinsky performs Afternoon of a Fawn
for Diaghilev’s company
1913Husserl, Ideas, General Introduction Apollinaire, Alcools
to Pure Phenomenology
Proust, Remembrance of Things Past
Jung, Psychology of the Unconscious Stravinsky, Rites of Spring
R.Luxemburg, The Accumulation of
Capital

3.3 Page 23

▲back to top
Unamuno, The Tragic Sense of Life
1914Ortega y Gasset, Meditations on Joyce, Dubliners
Quijote
1915
D.W.Griffith, Birth of a Nation
Kafka, The Metamorphosis
Pound begins Cantos
1916Gentile, General Theory of Spirit as Dada Movement in Zurich (Arp,
Pure Act
Tzara)
Saussure, Course in General
Linguistics
Scheler, Formalism in Ethics
1917Lenin, State and Revolution
Satie, Parade for Ballets Russes
Picasso, designs costumes for Parade
1918Masaryk, The New Europe
Tzara, Dada Manifesto
Malevich, White Square on a White
Background
Science and technology Politics
Einstein’s Special Theory St Petersburg ‘Bloody Sunday’: troops fire on
of Relativity
crowd resulting in general strike and revolt
Triode (DeForest)
First Russian Duma meets but is dissolved
Second Hague Peace Conference
Austria annexes Bosnia-Herzegovina
Henry Ford begins
Old-age pensions introduced in Britain
‘Assembly-Line’
production
Peary reaches North Pole
Suffragette movement increases demands
Combine harvester (Holt) German-French confrontation in Morocco
Amundsen reaches South Manchu Dynasty falls to Sun Yat-sen
Pole
French protectorate in Morocco
Atomic Number (Moseley) Third Irish Home Rule Bill defeated
Bohr’s Model of the Atom
Tank (Swinton)
Archduke Franz Ferdinand of Austria
assassinated in Sarajevo
First World War begins
Einstein publishes General Sinking of the Lusitania
Theory of Relativity
Easter Rising in Ireland suppressed
German offensive on Western Front
October Revolution in Russia;
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917

3.4 Page 24

▲back to top
Bolsheviks victorious
Automatic rifle (Browning) Armistice ending First World War
1918
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1919Wittgenstein, Tractatus Logico- Bauhaus Architecture and Design
Philosophicus
(1919–33): Kandinsky, Albers, Klee;
Wieve, The Cabinet of Dr. Caligari;
German Expressionist films (1919–30)
1920Freud, Beyond the Pleasure
Principle
1921Mach, The Principles of Physical Pirandello, Six Characters in Search of
Optics
an Author
Rosenzweig, The Star of
Man Ray, Rayographs
Redemption
1922Bergson, Duration and Simultaneity Eliot, The Waste Land
Joyce, Ulysses
1923Buber, I and Thou
Le Corbusier, Vers une architecture
Cassirer, The Philosophy of
Rilke, Duino Elegies
Symbolic Forms (3 vols, 1923–9) Yeats receives Nobel Prize
Korsch, Marxism and Philosophy
Lukács, History and Class
Consciousness
1924N.Hartmann, Ethics
A.Breton, Surrealist Manifesto
T.Mann, The Magic Mountain
Schoenberg, 12-tone Suite for Piano
1925
Eisenstein, Battleship Potemkin
1926Scheler, Forms of Knowledge
Lang, Metropolis
1927Heidegger, Being and Time
Artaud & Vitrac, Théâtre Alfred Jarry
Santayana, Realms of Being (4 vols, V.Woolf, To the Lighthouse
1927–40)
1928Bachelard, The New Scientific Spirit Brecht & Weill, The Threepenny Opera
1929Dewey, Experience and Nature Bakhtin, Problems of Dostoyevsky’s
Heidegger, What is Metaphysics? Poetics
Heidegger, Kant and the Problem of Rivera, Workers of the Revolution
Metaphysics
Vertov, Man with a Movie Camera
Husserl, Formal and Transcendental
Logic
Mannheim, Ideology and Utopia
Piaget, The Child’s Concept of the
World
Volosinov, Marxism and the

3.5 Page 25

▲back to top
Philosophy of Language
1930Freud, Civilization and Its
Discontents
Ortega y Gasset, The Revolt of the
Masses
Buñuel & Dali, Surrealist film, L’Age
d’or
Empson, Seven Types of Ambiguity
Science and technology
Politics
Discovery of proton (Rutherford)
Treaty of Versailles sets 1919
reparations Rosa
Luxemburg murdered in
Germany
Mussolini’s fascist
movement in Italy League
of Nations founded
Weimar Republic in
1920
Germany
Civil War in Ireland
Irish Free State established 1921
March on Rome by
1922
Mussolini
Hitler imprisoned after 1923
abortive Munich ‘putsch’
Wave nature of electron (de Broglie)
Lenin dies; succeeded by 1924
Stalin
First working television (Baird)
1925
Rocket (liquid) fuel (Goddard) Schrödinger’s Germany admitted to
1926
Wave Mechanics
League of Nations
Heisenberg’s ‘Uncertainty Principle’ that
Civil War in China:
1927
position and momentum of a body cannot be Communists against
simultaneously determined; First transatlantic Nationalists
flight (Lindbergh)
Kellogg-Briand Pact: Major 1928
powers renounce war
Zworykin’s electronic television system adopted Collapse of Wall Street 1929
as standard
leads to worldwide
economic depression
Jet engine (Whittle)
London Naval Conference: 1930
failure to agree on arms
limitation
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue

3.6 Page 26

▲back to top
1931Husserl, Cartesian Meditations
Gide, Oedipus
Jaspers, Man in the Modern Age Ravel, Piano Concerto for the Left
Hand
1932Bergson, Two Sources of Morality Céline, Journey to the End of Night
and Religion
Maritain, The Degrees of Knowledge
1933Kojève, Paris Seminars on Hegel’s Malraux, The Human Condition
Phenomenology (1933–9)
1934
René Char, The Hammer without a
Master
H.Miller, Tropic of Cancer
Webern, Concerto for Nine
Instruments
1935Berdyaev, The Fate of Man in the Canetti, Auto-da-Fé
Modern World
Marcel, Being and Having
1936W.Benjamin, ‘The Work of Art in theInternational Surrealist Exhibition
Age of Mechanical Reproduction’
Husserl, Crisis of European Sciences
and Transcendental Phenomenology
1937C.Caudwell, Illusion and Reality Picasso, Guernica
J.Renoir, The Grand Illusion
1938Bachelard, The Psychoanalysis of Artaud, The Theatre and Its Double
Fire
Beckett, Murphy
Husserl Archives established at Brecht, Mother Courage
Louvain
Sartre, Nausea
1939Sartre, Sketch for a Theory of
Joyce, Finnegans Wake
Emotions
Saurraute, Tropisms
1940Marcel, Creative Fidelity
Picasso, Woman Dressing Her Hair
Sartre, Psychology of Imagination
1941Bultmann, The New Testament and Maltese Falcon; cinematic style (film
Mythology
noir) influenced by Cain, Hammett,
Marcuse, Reason and Revolution Chandler
Whorf, Language, Thought and
Reality (1941–56)
1942Merleau-Ponty, The Structure of Anouilh, Antigone
Comportment
Camus, Myth of Sisyphus
Camus, The Outsider
1943Hjelmslev, Prolegomena to a Theory Musil, The Man Without Qualities
of Language
Sartre, The Flies
Sartre, Being and Nothingness

3.7 Page 27

▲back to top
Science and technology
Pauli’s predicts massless neutrino
Gödel’s Incompleteness Theorum
claiming the unprovability of
mathematical first principles
Neutron discovered (Chadwick)
Radar discovered (Watson-Watt)
Electron microscope (Zworykin)
Plutonium discovered (Seaborg)
Politics
Britain abandons gold standard
Japanese aggression in Manchuria
1931
Geneva Disarmament Conference
1932
Hitler appointed Chancellor by von 1933
Hindenburg; Reichstag burned;
Germany withdraws from League of
Nations
Hitler becomes Führer
1934
Stalin purges Communist Party
Hitler renounces Treaty of Versailles 1935
Mao Tse-tung: The Long March
Spanish Civil War (1936–9) Germany 1936
reoccupies Rhineland
1937
Anschluss: Hitler annexes Austria 1938
Munich Pact: Germany, Italy, Britain,
and France
Second World War begins Germany 1939
invades Poland
Nazi occupation of Paris
1940
Trotsky assassinated in Mexico
Japan joins Axis Powers
Germany invades Russia; Leningrad 1941
siege
Pearl Harbor bombed by Japan;
American entry into Second World War
Battle of Stalingrad; Germany defeated 1942
Rommel defeated by Allies in North
Africa
Italian government surrenders
1943
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1944Adorno and Horkheimer, Dialectic Bartok, Violin Concerto
of Enlightenment
Eliot, Four Quartets
Marcel, Homo Viator
Sartre, No Exit
1945Bataille, On Nietzsche
Broch, The Death of Virgil
Merleau-Ponty, Phenomenology of Sartre, Roads to Freedom; vol. 1—The
Perception
Age of Reason; vol. 2—The Reprieve

3.8 Page 28

▲back to top
1946Collingwood, The Idea of History Italian Neo-Realism in film (1946–54)
Sartre, Existentialism and
De Sica, Fellini, Rossellini, Visconti
Humanism
Rossellini, Rome Open City
1947de Beauvoir, Ethics of Ambiguity Pollock, Full Fathom Five
Gramsci, Letters from Prison
Camus, The Plague
Heidegger, ‘Letter on Humanism’
Horkheimer, Eclipse of Reason
Levinas, Existence and Existents
1948Adorno, Philosophy of Modern René Char, Fury and Mystery
Music
De Sica, Bicycle Thieves
Gramsci, Prison Notebooks (6 vols, Orwell, 1984
1948–51)
R.Strauss, Four Last Songs
Merleau-Ponty, Sense and Non-
Sense
1949de Beauvoir, The Second Sex
Genet, Death-watch
S.Weil, The Need for Roots
Sartre, Iron in the Soul (vol. 3 of trilogy
Roads to Freedom)
1950Austin, How to Do Things with Blanchot, The Space of Literature
Words
Ionesco, The Bald Soprano
Marcel, The Mystery of Being
1951Adorno, Minima Moralia
Beckett, Molloy; Malone Dies
Arendt, The Origins of
Dali, Christ of St. John of the Cross
Totalitarianism
Camus, The Rebel
1952Goldmann, The Human Sciences andBoulez, Structures
Philosophy
Buñuel, El
1953Barthes, Writing Degree Zero
Beckett, Waiting for Godot
Dufrenne, The Phenomenology of Milosz, The Usurpers
Aesthetic Experience
Heidegger, Introduction to
Metaphysics
Lacan, ‘Rome Discourse’ (‘Function
of Language in Psychoanalysis’)
Lacan, Seminar I (1953–78:XXVI
Seminars)
Wittgenstein, Philosophical
Investigations
1954Heidegger, Discourse on Thinking Balthus, Nude Playing with a Cat
Fellini, La Strada
Science and technology
Automatic digital computer
(Aikin)
Politics
Allied Normandy Landing
Paris and Brussels liberated
1944

3.9 Page 29

▲back to top
Atomic Bomb on Hiroshima and Nagasaki 1945
Mussolini assassinated
Hitler suicide
Yalta Conference
Electronic computer (Eckert & UN replaces League of Nations
1946
Mauchly)
Nuremburg trials
French Indo-China War begins
Polaroid camera (Land)
Marshall Aid Program for Europe
1947
UN approves partition of Palestine
Xerography invented (Carlson) Soviet blockage of West Berlin
1948
Long-playing record
State of Israel declared
(Goldmark)
Transistor (Bardeen, Brattain,
Schockley)
von Neumann, ‘Recent Theories Germany divided: Federal Republic and 1949
of Turbulence’
German Democratic Republic
Mao Tse-tung Communist victory in China
Einstein’s Unified Field Theory Korean War begins
1950
Turing, ‘Computing Machinery
and Intelligence’
West Germany admitted to the Council of 1951
Europe
Schuman Plan proposes Coal and Steel
Community
European Coal and Steel Community
1952
implemented
Crick & Watson’s Double Helix Stalin dies
1953
Theory for DNA
Solar battery (Fuller, Pearson) French defeat at Dien Bien Phu
1954
Continental philosophy: roots and
dialogue
1955Canguilhem, The Formation of the
Concept of Reflex in the XVII and XVIII
Centuries
de Chardin, The Phenomenon of Man
Lévi-Strauss, Tristes Tropiques
Marcuse, Eros and Civilization
Merleau-Ponty, Adventures of the
Dialectic
1956
The arts
Béjart choreography, Symphony
for a Lone Man
Durrenmatt, The Visit
Camus, The Fall

3.10 Page 30

▲back to top
1957Barthes, Mythologies
Stockhausen, Gruppen (for three
Bataille, Eroticism
spatially arranged orchestras)
Chomsky, Syntactic Structures
Bergman, The Seventh Seal
1958Arendt, The Human Condition
Beckett, Krapp’s Last Tape
Lévi-Strauss, Structural Anthropology Primo Levi, If This Is a Man
Winch, The Idea of a Social Science and
Its Relationship to Philosophy
1959Bloch, The Principle of Hope
French ‘New Wave’ (Nouvelle
Vague) in film, 1959–64
Goddard, Breathless
Truffaut, The 400 Blows
Duras, Hiroshima Mon Amour
1960Gadamer, Truth and Method
Fellini, La Dolce Vita
Ingarden, The Literary Work of Art
Penderecki, Threnody to the
Merleau-Ponty, Signs
Victims of Hiroshima
Ricoeur, The Symbolism of Evil
1961Fanon, The Wretched of the Earth
Miró, Blue II
Heidegger, Neitzsche (2 vols)
Robbe-Grillet, Last Year in
Levinas, Totality and Infinity
Marienbad
1962S.Breton, Essence and Existence
Fellini, 8½
Deleuze, Neitzsche and Philosophy
Solzhenitsyn, One Day in the Life
Derrida, Husserl’s Origin of Geometry of Ivan Denisovitch
Warhol, Campbells Soup Cans
200
1963Arendt, On Revolution
Paul Celan, Die Niemandsrose
Habermas, Theory and Praxis
(The No One’s Rose)
Richardson, Through Phenomenology to G.Grass, Dog Years
Thought
1964Barthes, Elements of Semiology
Pasolini, The Gospel According to
Lacan, Seminar XI; The Four
St. Matthew
Fundamental Concepts of Psychoanalysis
Lévi-Strauss, The Raw and the Cooked
Marcuse, One-Dimensional Man
Science and technology
The Contraceptive Pill (Pincus)
Antiproton (Segré, Chamberlain)
Discovery of neutrino predicted by Pauli
in 1931
Videotape recording (Poniatoff)
Sputnik launched (USSR)
Politics
Warsaw Pact for Eastern Bloc
Hungarian uprising crushed by
Soviets
Treaty of Rome establishes
Common Market (EEC)
1955
1956
1957

4 Pages 31-40

▲back to top

4.1 Page 31

▲back to top
Radiation belts surrounding the earth (Van De Gaulle elected first President 1958
Allen)
of French Fifth Republic
Space race escalates with launch of
Explorer 1 (US)
Luna space probes (USSR) enter solar Fidel Castro overthrows Batista 1959
orbit; photograph far side of the moon government in Cuba
Laser (Maiman)
EFTA (European Free Trade 1960
Pioneer 5 (US): first deep-space probe Assn)
First ‘Cosmonaut’ in space Vostok 1
Berlin Wall constructed
1961
(USSR)
Mariner 2 (US): first successful flybys of Algeria gains independence from 1962
Venus
France
Cuban Missile Crisis
Quasars discovered (Matthews &
John F.Kennedy assassinated 1963
Sandage)
Mariner 4 (US): first successful flybys of US enters Vietnam War in
1964
Mars
support of South Vietnam
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1965Althusser, For Marx
Postmodernist architecture (1965–
Bachelard, The Poetics of Space
85) Venturi, Jencks
Foucault, Discipline and Punish
H.Miller, The Rosy Crucifixion
Foucault, Madness and Civilization S.Plath, Ariel
Ricoeur, Freud and Philosophy: An
Essay on Interpretation
1966Adorno, Negative Dialectics
China’s Cultural Revolution; Red
Beneviste, Problems in General
Guard formed
Linguistics
Moravia, The Lie
Chomsky, Cartesian Linguistics
Foucault, The Order of Things
Greimas, Structural Semantics
Lacan, Ecrits
Macherey, A Theory of Literary
Production
1967Derrida, Speech and Phenomena
Garcia-Marquez, One Hundred
Derrida, Of Grammatology
Years of Solitude
Derrida, Writing and Difference
Kundera, The Joke
Horkheimer, Critique of Instrumental
Reason
Jauss, Toward an Aesthetic of
Reception
1968Althusser and Balibar, Reading Capital Berio, Sinfonia

4.2 Page 32

▲back to top
Dumézil, Myth and Epic (2 vols, 1968– C.Metz, Film Language: Semiotics
71)
of the Cinema (1968–72)
Habermas, Knowledge and Human Solzhenitsyn, Cancer Ward
Interests
1969Blanchot, Infinite Conversation
Beckett receives the Nobel Prize
S.Breton, Philosophy and Mathematics
in Proclus
Foucault, The Archaeology of
Knowledge
Kristeva, Semeiotiké
Ricoeur, The Conflict of
Interpretations: Essays in
Hermeneutics
Serres, Hermès (vols 1–5, 1969–80)
1970Barthes, S/Z
Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific
Revolutions
1971de Man, Blindness and Insight
Tarkovsky, Solaris
Habermas, Legitimation Crisis
Hassan, The Postmodern Turn
Lefort, Elements of a Critique of
Bureaucracy
Rawls, A Theory of justice
Science and technology
Politics
Gabor’s Holography using laser
Malcolm X assassinated
1965
Surveyor 1 (US): probe returns with UN imposes economic sanctions on 1966
detailed photographs of lunar surface Rhodesia
Pulsars discovered (Cambridge)
Six-Day Arab-Israeli War
1967
Venera 4 (USSR): first successful entry France vetoes British application to
of Venus atmosphere
enter Common Market
Paris Riots
1968
N.Ireland Civil Rights Movement
Soviet troops to Czechoslovakia to
halt reforms (Prague Spring)
Astronauts land on moon (US)
British troops to Northern Ireland 1969
Venera 7 (USSR): first probe to surviveUS announces invasion of Cambodia 1970
Venusian surface
EMI Scanner (Hounsfield)
Independence of East Pakistan as 1971
Bangladesh
Communist China joins UN—
Taiwan expelled

4.3 Page 33

▲back to top
Continental philosophy: roots and The arts
dialogue
1972Baudrillard, For a Critique of the Bertolucci, Last Tango in Paris
Political Economy of the Sign
Heinrich Böll receives Nobel Prize
Bourdieu, Outline of a Theory of
Practice
Deleuze and Guattari, Anti-Oedipus
Derrida, Dissemination
Genette, Figures III: Narrative
Discourse
Girard, Violence and the Sacred
S.Kofman, Nietzsche and Metaphor
Marcuse, Counter-revolution and
Revolt
1973Apel, Towards a Transformation of Calvino, The Castle of Crossed
Philosophy
Destinies
Bataille, Inner Experiences
Solzhenitsyn, Gulag Archipelago (3
Bloom, The Anxiety of Influence vols, 1973–8)
Geertz, The Interpretation of
Cultures
Jay, The Dialectical Imagination
1974Derrida, Glas
D.Lessing, The Memoirs of a Survivor
Irigaray, Speculum of the Other
Woman
Kristeva, Revolution in Poetic
Language
1975Barthes, The Pleasure of the Text Havel, Audience
Castoriadis, The Social Imaginary
Cixous and Clément, The Newly Born
Woman
Feyerabend, Against Method
G.Hartman, The Fate of Reading
Patočka, Heretical Essays
Ricoeur, The Rule of Metaphor
Steiner, After Babel
1976Dufrenne, Aesthetics and Philosophy Twyla Tharp choreographs Push
(2 vols)
Comes to Shove for Baryshnikov
Eco, A Theory of Semiotics
Foucault, The History of Sexuality (3
vols, 1976–84)
Gadamer, Philosophical
Hermeneutics
Iser, The Act of Reading: A Theory of

4.4 Page 34

▲back to top
Aesthetic Response
1977Derrida, Limited, Inc.
Nouveaux Philosophes Movement
Irigaray, This Sex Which Is Not One (Levy, Benoist, and Glucksmann)
Stockhausen, Licht Cycle
1978Castoriadis, Crossroads in the
Labyrinth
Derrida, Truth in Painting
Lefort, The Forms of History
Marcuse, The Aesthetic Dimension
Science and technology
Politics
Apollo Lunar Rover used on lunar surface Britain takes over direct rule in 1972
(US)
Northern Ireland
Mars 6 (USSR): first probe to enter
Britain, Ireland, and Denmark 1973
Martian atmosphere
join EC
Paris Peace Settlement ending
Vietnam War
Oil crisis—OPEC Nations
restrict supply
Former Portuguese colonies 1974
gain independence (Angola,
Mozambique)
Watergate Scandal
First international docking in space: Apollo General Franco dies in Spain 1975
18 (US) and Soyuz 19 (USSR)
S.Vietnam surrenders to
N.Vietnam
Mandelbrot’s Fractal Geometry claims Mao Tse-tung dies
1976
mathematical order exists in apparently
random phenomena
Prigogine awarded Nobel Prize
Czech ‘Charta 77’ Movement 1977
Feigenbaum, ‘Quantitative Universality for UN Peace Force to Lebanon 1978
a Class of Non-Linear Transformations’
Continental philosophy: roots and
dialogue
1979Baudrillard, Seduction
de Man, Allegories of Reading
Lyotard, The Postmodern Condition
Lyotard, Just Gaming (Au Juste)
1980Kristeva, Powers of Horror
Le Doeuff, The Philosophical Imaginary
Olsen, Silences
The arts
Fassbinder, Lili Marlene
Balthus, Sleeping Nude
Eco, The Name of the Rose
Kundera, The Book of

4.5 Page 35

▲back to top
Rorty, Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature Laughter and Forgetting
Vattimo, Adventure of Difference
R.Williams, Problems in Culture and
Materialism
1981Baudrillard, Simulations
Rushdie, Midnight’s Children
Habermas, Theory of Communicative Action
(2 vols)
Jameson, The Political Unconscious:
Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act
MacIntyre, After Virtue
1982Girard, The Scapegoat (Le Boucémissaire) Herzog, Fitzcarraldo
Rorty, The Consequences of Pragmatism Garcia-Marquez receives
Nobel Prize
1983Habermas, Moral Consciousness and
Murdoch, The Philosopher’s
Communicative Action
Pupil
Lyotard, The Differend
Rushdie, Shame
Ricoeur, Time and Narrative (3 vols, 1983–5)
Said, The World, the Text, and the Critic
1984Eco, Semiotics and the Philosophy of
Kundera, The Unbearable
Language
Lightness of Being
Giddens, The Constitution of Society: Outline
of a Theory of Structuration
Parfit, Reasons and Persons
Prigogine and Staengers, Order out of Chaos
1985Benhabib, Critique, Norm and Utopia
Habermas, The Philosphical Discourse of
Modernity
Havel, The Power of the Powerless
Honneth, The Critique of Power
Taminiaux, Dialectic and Difference
Vattimo, The End of Modernity
1986de Certeau, Heterologies
Eco, Foucault’s Pendulum
Dworkin, Law’s Empire
Magris, Danube
Science and technology
Voyager Spacecraft flies by Saturn
First US Space Shuttle flight
Politics
First direct elections for European 1979
Parliament held in all nine member
states
Lech Walesa: Solidarity trade union 1980
confronts Communist government
in Poland
Greece accepted as tenth member of 1981
Common Market

4.6 Page 36

▲back to top
British force reoccupies Falklands 1982
Indira Ghandi assassinated
1983
Hao Bai-Lin, Chaos (first attempt to Chernenko becomes leader of
1984
collect the scientific literature on chaos Soviet Communist Party
and complexity)
Reagan re-elected by landslide in
US elections
Gorbachev succeeds Chernenko in 1985
Soviet Union
Spain and Portugal join Common
Market
Challenger (US) Space Shuttle explodesPhilippine President Marcos
1986
on take-off
overthrown
Chernobyl nuclear disaster in USSR
Continental philosophy: roots and dialogue The arts
1987Derrida, Psyché: Inventions of the Other
Calvino, The Literature
Derrida, The Post Card
Machine
Derrida, Schibboleth
Vargas-Llosa, The
Storyteller
1988S.Breton, Poetics of the Sensible
Habermas, Postmetaphysical Thinking
Lyotard, The Inhuman
Vattimo, The Transparent Society
1989C.Taylor, Sources of the Self
C.J.Cela receives Nobel
Prize
1990Nussbaum, Love’s Knowledge: Essays on Kristeva, Les Samuraïs
Philosophy and Literature
Ricoeur, Oneself as Another
1991Derrida, Given Time/Counterfeit Money
Enzensberger, Europe in
Jameson, Postmodernism, or the Cultural Ruins
Logic of Late Capitalism
Murdoch, Message to the
Kristeva, Strangers to Ourselves
Planet
Rorty, Philosophical Papers
Said, Musical Elaborations
1992Benhabib, Situating the Self
Jordan, The Crying Game
Habermas, Facticity and Validity
Koslowski, Imagine Europe
Honneth, The Struggle for Recognition
Schmidt/Cohn-Bendit,
Murdoch, Metaphysics as a Guide to Morals Heimat Babylon
Ricoeur, Lectures I and II (1991–2)
1993Derrida, Spectres of Marx
G.Grass, Novemberland
Derrida, Khôra
S.Kofman, Explosion 2

4.7 Page 37

▲back to top
Lyotard, The Postmodern Contradiction
J.-L.Nancy, The Sense of the World
Levinas, God, Death and Time
Science and technology
Politics
Minsky’s ‘Mental Kollectivs’: The
USSR and US agree to cut nuclear 1987
Society of Mind
arsenals and reduce nuclear
missiles
Neurocomputing (Anderson and
Lockerbie: Terrorist sabotage of a 1988
Rosenfeld)
jumbo jet kills 270
Prigogine/Grégoire, Exploring
Fall of Berlin Wall
1989
Complexity
Havel elected Czech President
Santa Fe Institute studies on chaos,
Nelson Mandela freed after 27 1990
entropy and complexity
years imprisoned in South Africa
Saddam Hussein annexes Kuwait
Soviet Union dissolved
1991
Gulf War drives Iraq from Kuwait
S.Kauffman, Origins of Order: Self- Break-up of Yugoslavia
1992
Organization and Selection in Evolution Croats, Serbs, Bosnians at war
Ratification of Maastricht Treaty 1993
on European Union

4.8 Page 38

▲back to top
This page intentionally left blank.

4.9 Page 39

▲back to top
Introduction
Richard Kearney
Continental philosophy, as it has emerged in the twentieth century, is less a seamless
fabric than a patchwork of diverse strands. Phenomenology, hermeneutics, existentialism,
structuralism, critical theory, deconstruction—these are some of the salient movements
which have developed in continental Europe between 1900 and the 1990s, though their
influence is by no means confined to their area of origin. Continental thought has proved
highly exportable, circulating far beyond the frontiers of Europe to provoke strong
responses in the intellectual world at large.
It is worth recalling at the outset that the term ‘continental’ philosophy was coined not
by European thinkers themselves but by academic philosophy departments in the Anglo-
American world eager to differentiate it from ‘analytic’ thought. It was initially more a
label of convention than a category corresponding to a given essence of thought. But
whatever the origin or accuracy of the distinction, what became known as ‘continental
philosophy’ has managed to exert a decisive impact on contemporary thought over the
decades—an impact which exceeds the specialized discipline of academic philosophy and
embraces such diverse fields as sociology, political science, literary theory, theology, art
history, feminism and a variety of cultural studies.
Some view this protean character of continental thought as a defect—a sign that it
cannot be rigorous or reliable. If it can be applied to anything in general it must be saying
nothing in particular! More an art (Kunst) than a science (Wissenschaft)! More an
exercise in poetic intuition than ratiocinative inquiry! What these objections tend to
ignore, however, is that most founding fathers of continental thought were committed to a
view of philosophy as science and saw themselves as guided by a basic notion of critical
reason. Edmund Husserl, for instance, spoke of phenomenology as a ‘rigorous science’,
while his disciple Heidegger regarded it as a transcendental science of thecategories of
Being. Even Sartre, the combative pioneer of French existentialism, sought to apply
phenomenology to an historical ‘critique of dialectical reason’.
Similar scruples operate in other major currents of continental thought. Ferdinand de
Saussure, founder of structuralism, spoke of semiology as a ‘science of signs’; and the
works of such disciples as Lévi-Strauss, Foucault, Althusser, Lacan or the early Barthes
were each marked by a determination to apply the structural model of language to a
variety of disciplines (anthropology, historiography, historical materialism,
psychoanalysis, sociology). One even finds critical theory and hermeneutics combining
philosophical inquiry with other human sciences—with Paul Ricoeur calling for a
creative dialogue between a historical ‘understanding’ (Verstehen) alert to the
contingencies of human circumstance, and scientific ‘explanation’ (Erklären) committed
to goals of universal objectivity. Many continental thinkers have sought to redefine and
reinterpret reason, but few would claim to jettison it altogether.

4.10 Page 40

▲back to top
Introduction 2
Perhaps the most persistent feature of continental philosophy, through all its multiple
mutations, is a commitment to the questioning of foundations. From phenomenology to
deconstruction, one encounters the persuasion that the old foundationalist arguments no
longer suffice. Meaning is not some metaphysical essence or substance; it is a task of
intersubjective and intertextual relations. Truth cannot be grounded on a given system of
being (realism) or mind (idealism); it must be radically rethought as an interplay of
differences (perspectives, Abschattungen, intentionalities, situations, structures,
signifiers, etc.). Continental philosophy thus finds itself renouncing the metaphysical
quest for absolute grounds, even if some of its proponents—Husserl in particular—found
this renunciation vexed and regrettable. Kant’s claim to ‘lay the foundation of
knowledge’, Hegel’s appeal to Absolute Spirit, Kierkegaard’s recourse to a Transcendent
Deity, Marx’s call for a Total Science, are largely superseded (albeit often reinterpreted)
by continental thinkers in the twentieth century.
But if metaphysical foundationalism is one adversary, positivism is another.
Reductionist attempts to explain away meaning in terms of facts are invariably resisted
by phenomenologists, existentialists, critical theorists and postmodernists. Philosophical
questioning, they argue, requires the specific methodology of a human science
(Geisteswissen-schaft); and while remaining in critical dialogue with the empiricometric
procedures of natural sciences (Naturwissenschaft), it must not be reduced to the latter.
Both methods are valid. It is the effort to confound or conflate them that leads to
misunderstanding.
This is not to suggest that the critique of positivism is an exclusively continental
concern. Analytic thinkers inspired by the laterWittgenstein, Ryle, Davidson or Dummett,
show equal resolve in disentangling such category mistakes. But the reasons for doing so
are different in each case. Generally speaking, analytic thinkers seek to avoid such error
in the interests of clarity, evidence, verification and coherence; continentals appear more
impelled by ontological scruples to keep thought open to ‘irreducibles’ and
‘undecidables’—that is, to questions which surpass the limits of ‘pure reason’—questions
of being and nothing, of transcendence and difference, of alterity and historicity.
The reference to Kant here is perhaps useful. Continental philosophers have often
tended to privilege the moral and aesthetic questioning of the Second and Third Critiques
over the strictly epistemological reading of the First. This is not to say that they ignore
the First but that they read it in a particular way. For example, while both analytic and
continental thinkers share a common commitment to Kant’s transcendental aesthetic,
(the origination of all experience in sensible time and space), the former tend to show
preference for the transcendental analytic (dealing with objective categories of
understanding), whereas the latter incline more towards the ‘limit ideas’ of World, Soul
and Freedom contained in the transcendental dialectic. To put this more succinctly,
continental thought is on balance more likely than analytic thought to bypass the confines
of pure reason, venturing into the liminal areas of noumenal experience and dialectic.
Indeed Husserl’s repudiation of the Kantian distinction between phenomenal and
noumenal in his Logical Investigations (1900–1) already signalled this direction.
Continental philosophy, it could be said, favours dialectical and practical reason over
‘pure’ reason. It holds that being is ultimately irreducible to verification, meaning to
evidence, truth to coherence, time to measurement, paradox to problem.

5 Pages 41-50

▲back to top

5.1 Page 41

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 3
This raises the controversial subject of style. Continental philosophy is marked by
distinctive signatures of thinking and writing. Its practitioners would claim, for instance,
that extraordinary questions of experience cannot always be expressed in ordinary
language. Ideas of ‘dialectical’ reason (as both Kant and Hegel realized in their different
ways) cannot be translated into categories of ‘pure’ reason. And the attendant surplus of
meaning requires that standard criteria of correspondence and coherence have to be
occasionally transgressed. This is by no means unprecedented in philosophy. As
Heidegger points out in his introduction to Being and Time, Aristotle’s innovative use of
language to express his discovery of being was far from transparent to his original Greek
readers. This line of reasoning could be construed as an ‘anything goes’ argument; but
there is more to it than that. A certain experimental style de pensée is the risk certain
philosophers are prepared to take in order to say the unsayable (or, in Beckett’s ludic
phrase, to ‘eff the ineffable’). Adorno, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Lacan, Levinas,
Derrida, Kristeva—each has his or her own inimitable voices.
Finally, it must be acknowledged that continental philosophy does not arise in a
vacuum. True to its conviction that thought is always situated, the predominant mood of
such philosophy, from existentialism to postmodernism, is one deeply committed to
moral and political questions. Thinking is no longer regarded as some neutral exercise in
cognition but an intervention in the ‘lived world’ of history and society. This
responsiveness of ideas to the Lebenswelt was, in the case of modern continental thought,
radically informed by the experience of two world wars on European soil—and the
corresponding horrors of Auschwitz and the Gulag. Husserl was one of the first to
register this sense of breakdown and disorientation when, fleeing from Nazi Germany, he
called for a fundamental rethinking of the western intellectual tradition. And most
continental philosophers after him have shared this persuasion, advancing forms of
inquiry that are increasingly exploratory, tentative, iconoclastic, engagé. Critical theorists
from Horkheimer to Habermas, existentialists from Merleau-Ponty to de Beauvoir,
structuralists from Barthes to Foucault, not to mention postmodernist thinkers like
Lyotard and Vattimo, all demonstrate a keen preoccupation with social and political
issues. The common challenge is to start all over again, seeking alternative modes of
questioning. Totalizing Archimedean principles are renounced. Meaning and value are to
be reinterpreted from first to last. Recurrent crises call for perpetual revision. And it is
perhaps this urgency to respond to the trauma of historical change that has compelled so
many continentals to abandon the metaphysical obsession with foundations in favour of
post-metaphysical experiments of thought.
The fourteen essays in this volume outline and assess some of these experiments. The
first five span the twin movements of phenomenology and existentialism, running from
Husserl and Heidegger to Sartre, Merleau-Ponty and Levinas. Subsequent essays deal
with specific currents of continental thought in such areas as science, Marxism,
linguistics, politics, aesthetics, feminism and hermeneutics, while a final essay on
postmodernism highlights the manner in which so many concerns of continental thought
culminate in a radical anti-foundation-alism. Each study speaks for itself; but I wish to
thank the contributors, drawn from six different countries, for their co-operation and
collegiality in putting this volume together. It has been a gratifying reminder that for all
the controversies surrounding continental philosophy, it remains a forum of debate where

5.2 Page 42

▲back to top
Introduction 4
critical intelligence, scholarly expertise and a passionate commitment to the burning
issues of our time are still alive and well.

5.3 Page 43

▲back to top
CHAPTER 1
The beginnings of phenomenology
Husserl and his predecessors
Richard Cobb-Stevens
Edmund Husserl was the founder of phenomenology, one of the principal movements of
twentieth-century philosophy. His principal contribution to philosophy was his
development of the concept of intentionality. He reasserted and revitalized the premodern
thesis that our cognitional acts are intentional, i.e., that they reach out beyond sensa to
things in the world. When we think or speak about things, and when we perceive them,
we deal with those things and not with mental intermediaries. Intentionality is our
openness to the world, our transcending mode of being. Husserl also developed the
implications of this fundamental thesis. He repudiated Locke’s interpretation of ‘mind’ as
an inner space set off from the rest of nature, and he rejected Kant’s distinction between
phenomena and things-in-themselves. He also rejected the view that the task of
philosophy is to guarantee that our concepts and theories somehow mirror the world.
These themes brought a sense of liberation to many philosophers who by the early
decades of the twentieth century had become weary of the insoluble problems generated
by the modern account of cognition. Husserl’s analysis of signs and semantic systems had
a similar effect in the fields of linguistics and logic which had been dominated by
associationist and psychologistic accounts of the production of meaning. His
interpretation of the complementarity of pre-scientific and scientific modes of rationality
contributed to the demise of positivism and inspired new and fruitful approaches in the
social sciences. His theories of time and ego-identity provided much-needed correctives
to reductionist tendencies in psychology. Finally, his balanced interpretation of the
interplay between historical horizons and the drive fortruth offers a reasonable alternative
to the contemporary tendency to regard all truths as relativized by their historical
conditions.
It is unfortunate that Husserl’s writings had little influence on the development of the
tradition of analytic philosophy, the other major movement of twentieth-century
philosophy. Husserl himself engaged in spirited but amicable debate with Gottlob Frege,
who is generally considered to be the proximate founder of analytic philosophy.
However, such exchanges became increasingly rare among their followers who have
tended on the whole to ignore one another’s works. This breakdown of communication
was due in part to an early misunderstanding. Frege thought that Husserl was a proponent
of psychologism, i.e., the view that numbers, propositions and logical laws are reducible
to mental states. Frege’s critique of Husserl’s alleged psychologism was decisive for a
whole generation of analytic philosophers whose goal was to defend rationality from
relativism by detaching logic and semantics from all dependence on what they took to be

5.4 Page 44

▲back to top
The beginnings of p6henomenology 6
irremediably subjective intuitions. On the other hand, Frege’s decision to divorce logical
analysis entirely from cognitive intuition alienated philosophers within the
phenomenological tradition who saw in this strategy only a revival of Hobbes’s
preference for an exclusively calculative rationality. Ironically, Husserl’s critique of
psychologism was in fact more coherent and more complete than that of Frege and his
followers, for he showed how propositions are grounded in cognitive intuitions without
thereby being reduced to merely subjective phenomena. In recent years both
phenomenological and analytic traditions have found themselves increasingly vulnerable
to contemporary forms of historicism and relativism. This situation has had the felicitous
effect of encouraging within both traditions a reappraisal of the reasons for their mutual
distrust. Considerable progress has been made of late in restoring a climate conducive to
renewed dialogue.
In the judgment of many, the originality of Husserl’s thought and the rigour of his
analyses guarantee him a place among the greatest of philosophers. However, his writings
tend to be excessively abstruse and technical. As a result, his readership has generally
been limited to professional philosophers. By contrast, Martin Heidegger’s more
evocative philosophical style and Jean-Paul Sartre’s literary brilliance assured for the
subsequent phenomenological tradition a wider audience and an unusually immediate
cultural influence. This is not to say that these thinkers were merely commentators on
Husserl (indeed, many regard Heidegger as a more profound and original thinker), but
only that they often succeeded in communicating the basic insights of Husserl’s
phenomenology more clearly and forcefully than did Husserl himself. There is another
reason why Husserl’s writings often failed to convey to his readers the full force of his
criticism of the modernepistemological perspective. It seems clear, in retrospect, that he
was not sufficiently sensitive to the gravitational pull that the language of modern
philosophy exercised on his thought. He explicitly modified the senses of such key
modern terms as ‘presentation’, ‘content’, ‘immanence’, ‘subjectivity’, ‘phenomenon’,
but he never completely jettisoned the lexicon of modern philosophy. Indeed, he always
maintained a conservative stance with regard to innovative philosophic language,
preferring to take familiar terms to their limits rather than to introduce unusual metaphors
and neologisms. He therefore failed to appreciate the extent to which the familiar
linguistic matrix of modern philosophy conceals a long history of accumulated premises
which determine the kinds of questions that readers would bring to his texts. His goal was
to call those premises into question, but his philosophical vocabulary tended too often to
reinforce them. It is unfortunate, too, that Husserl seems to have had little first-hand
familiarity with ancient and medieval philosophic texts. He was always more at home
with the traditions of British empiricism and Kantian criticism. Had he been more attuned
to the weight of words in the development of philosophic concepts, and better informed
about the ancient and medieval traditions, his breakthrough would no doubt have been
less plagued by ambiguities and less subject to misinterpretations.
Husserl was born in Prossnitz, a town then located in Austria. He took courses in
mathematics at the universities of Leipzig, Berlin and Vienna. In Berlin, he studied with
the renowned mathematicians Leopold Kronecker and Karl Weierstrauss, and also
attended occasional lectures in philosophy by Wilhelm Wundt. He received his Ph.D. in
1882 from the University of Vienna for a dissertation entitled ‘Contributions to the

5.5 Page 45

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 7
Theory of the Calculus of Variations’. After a year in Berlin as assistant to Weierstrauss,
he returned to Vienna to study philosophy with Franz Brentano, who had recently
resigned his chair of philosophy. In 1886, on Brentano’s recommendation, Husserl went
to Halle to work with Karl Stumpf, who supervised the thesis submitted for his
Habilitation, a study of the concept of number. From 1887 to 1928, Husserl held teaching
positions at Halle, Göttingen, and Freiburg im Breisgau.
As a Jew, Husserl was increasingly the subject of harassment during his retirement
years in Freiburg. It must have been an especially cruel blow to have found himself
denied access to the library of the university he had served so well. After his death in
1938, Husserl’s unpublished manuscripts were saved from destruction by Hermann Van
Breda, a Belgian priest and philosopher, who also arranged for Husserl’s wife and
daughter to be sheltered in a Belgian convent during the occupation. Van Breda
subsequently founded the Husserl Archives at Louvain.
Husserl was a person of high moral character and of impeccable intellectual integrity.
He looked upon philosophy as a vocation, and felt personally called upon to defend
reason against the various forms of relativism prevalent in his day. However, his was
never a merely defensive or narrowly conservative project. Indeed, he often expressed
admiration for the sceptical tradition in philosophy, and thought that Hume’s radical
critique of presuppositions made him the greatest of modern philosophers. He also
rejected the arrogance and chauvinism of those who claimed that philosophy had
achieved its culmination in German thought and expression. Philosophy, he argued,
cannot be the exclusive property of any single culture or language, for the emergence of
the philosophic spirit introduced a new mode of teleology characterized by the
complementary traits of universality and infinity. The telos of philosophy is universal in
that it strives to attain an identical truth which is valid for all who are no longer blinded
by traditions, and infinite in that this goal of truth can never be fully realized and thus
remains always a regulative idea. By reason of its universality, therefore, philosophy
cannot be limited to a particular period or people, and by reason of its infinity philosophy
remains always an unending process ([1.33], 286; [1.89], 151–60).
During his lifetime Husserl published several books and also left an extraordinary
number of manuscripts, lecture notes and working papers. Both the published works and
the unpublished materials contain many repetitive passages, tantalizingly unfinished
descriptions, and agonizing reappraisals of earlier positions. As a result, it is often
difficult to co-ordinate earlier and later works, or even to be sure of the direction
ultimately taken by his thought. Husserl would not be entirely displeased by this
situation, for he concluded finally that there can be no totalizing syntheses. We must
strive for objectivity, and hope for progress towards that goal, but we must also
acknowledge all the while that the goal of truth functions always as ‘the idea of an
infinite task’ ([1.33], 291).
EARLY WORKS: INFLUENCE OF FREGE BRENTANO, HERBART,
STUMPF AND LOTZE
Husserl’s first published work, Philosophy of Arithmetic (1891), was a revised version of

5.6 Page 46

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 8
his earlier analysis of the concept of number. Adopting a distinction first made by
Brentano, Husserl distinguishes between intuitive presentation and symbolic intention of
numbers. He describes how our primitive intuitions about numbers and their
interrelationships are based upon the experiences of counting, comparing and collecting,
and how we think in symbols of more complex numbers for whichthere can be no such
authenticating intuitions. Unfortunately, he makes several remarks which give the
impression that he conflated numbers and their presentations. For example, he refers to
the unity of a number as a psychic relation, and claims that understanding the concept of
a number requires reflection on its presentation in relevant acts of collective combination.
In 1894, Frege called attention to these compromising remarks in a critical review of
Husserl’s book. He objected that Husserl’s analysis blurs the distinction between
subjective and objective domains, and concluded that his work was a typical example of
psychologism ([1.65], 200–1). While Frege’s critique finds some justification in
Husserl’s text, this extreme conclusion is unwarranted. Frege was inclined to regard as
psychologistic any attempt to relate the status of numbers to the activities of counting and
collecting. Hence, he was not likely to be attuned to the nuances of Husserl’s intention
which was surely not to collapse the objectivity of numbers into their acts of presentation
but rather to describe just how their objectivity manifests itself to us. At any rate, Husserl
later distinguished clearly between numbers and their presentations, and between the
concept of number and the concept of collective combination ([1.35], 784; [1.86], 24).
Frege also criticized Husserl for holding the view that numbers are totalities (determinate
multitudes) comprised of mere ‘somethings’ having no specific content and yet somehow
differing from one another. However, this is a caricature of Husserl’s position, for he
clearly maintains that objects are always identified by way of their features. His point is
simply that, once we have identified objects to be counted, we prescind from the
determinate content of those objects in the instance numbering them.
It took some time, however, for Husserl to clarify the ambiguities generated by his
continued dependence on the linguistic and conceptual framework of the empiricist
tradition, which was the remote forerunner of late nineteenth-century psychologism. In
his essay ‘Psychological Studies in the Elements of Logic’ (1894), he makes the
unequivocal claim that our cognitive intuitions truly present the things intended by our
speech acts. Moreover, he distinguishes clearly between mental acts and their contents, a
distinction that had been blurred by the empiricist notion of a mental ‘process’, which in
effect reduces cognitive acts to the mere having of associatively modified impressions.
Nevertheless, he constantly uses the term ‘contents’ in an ambiguous fashion, sometimes
to refer to ill-defined mental representations and sometimes to refer to things in the world
in so far as they are known. Hence he does not yet make it clear that the intended objects
of both our signitive and intuitive acts are, ordinarily at least, things in the world rather
than mental substitutes ([1.40], 126–42; [1.122], 34–8).
These ambiguities testify to the influence of Brentano on the earlyHusserl. Brentano
rejected the empiricists’ reduction of mental acts to associative reactions, reaffirmed at
least vaguely the medieval distinction between acts and contents, and retrieved in part the
ancient thesis that cognitive acts reach out to the intended objects themselves. He is
therefore rightly celebrated for having revived the theory of intentionality. However, his
interpretation of this notion intermingled modern and premodern themes. His early

5.7 Page 47

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 9
writings described intentional contents in ways that evoke the modern notion that
impressions and ideas function as intra-mental substitutes for inaccessible real objects of
reference. He said, for example, that every intentional experience ‘contains something as
its object within itself, and referred also to this ‘immanent objectivity’ as the ‘intentional
in-existence of an object’ ([1.45], 88–9).
Although Brentano explicitly related his account of intentionality to the scholastic
tradition, and traced its origin to Aristotle’s books on the soul, he unfortunately tended to
read the modern interpretation of immanence into the medieval theme of esse
intentionale. It is true that the Scholastics used the term ‘intentional’ (and more
frequently the term ‘objective’) to refer to the mode of being had by things known, in so
far as they are present in the knower. The point of the medieval distinction between
intentional (objective) being and real being was to clarify Aristotle’s claim that the
knower ‘is somehow’ the form of the thing known, without thereby entering into physical
identity with the thing. It was thought that the intentional object (‘inner word’, ‘formal
concept’, ‘expressed species’) functions as a unique sort of intermediary, i.e., as a
transparent sign through which the mind is related to reality ([1.101], 62 n. 3). Although
this emphasis on the mediating function of formal concepts may well have prepared the
way for the modern thesis that to know is to have a representation of something (its ‘idea’
or ‘concept’) within the mind’s interiority, the medieval thinkers themselves clearly
maintained that the intentional object is the very thing itself, considered as known
(Aquinas, De Veritate, iv, 2 ad 3).
Aristotle does not seem to have thought it necessary to postulate any intermediary,
however special, between intellect and thing known. Indeed, he suggests that the intellect
must itself be free of formal structure, and hence empty of content, so that it can become
the forms of all things. The intellect, says Aristotle, possesses the same son of
adaptability as the human hand. It takes on the forms of things in the way that the human
hand grasps tools (Aristotle, De Anima, 423a 1–3; [1.90], 132–7). Thus, the intellect
operates within the realm of nature itself rather than within some subjective enclosure. Its
mode of being is its transcending function. Aristotle further describes a thing’s form as its
sortal feature, its ‘look’ (eidos). The look is what we know when we know this particular
thing. Although there is a difference between intuiting an individual qua individual (the
primary substance), and intuiting its species-look (the secondary substance), these modes
of intuition are complementary and interdependent. We grasp the species-look both as a
surplus whose sense exceeds the particularity of this instance and as a condition for the
manifestation of the particular (Aristotle, Metaphysics, 1042a 17–49). Aristotle also
emphasizes the continuity between perception and predication. Predicative discourse
gives syntactical articulation to the inarticulate nuances of intuition (Aristotle, On
Interpretation, 16b 25–6). Judging is therefore directed primarily upon things and their
perceived features, not upon propositions as such.
Brentano revived the Aristotelian notion that the intellect’s intentional targets are
things in the world, but he imagined the intellect’s grasp of forms as taking place within
the mind’s inner space. He therefore concluded that the intellect could never effectively
reach those targets. Brentano also subscribed wholeheartedly to the modern interpretation
of perception. He claimed that our perceptions yield merely subjective appearances, and
he appealed to physical causality alone in order to account for the relationship between

5.8 Page 48

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 10
these appearances and real objects. Corresponding to perceived colours, he claimed, there
are only the ‘vibrations’ which emanate from the interaction of atoms, molecules and
forces. A thing’s true being, therefore, is its hidden quantifiable reality accessible only to
the methods of the natural sciences. Perceived objects do not exist really outside of us;
they are mere phenomena ([1.45], 9–10). In his later works, Brentano nevertheless
claimed that linguistic references are ordinarily directed upon transcendent real entities,
rather than upon mental contents. However, there is no indication that this new position
entailed a critique of the empiricist account of intuition. Everything suggests a
compromise: we refer to real things, but we see only phenomena. Moreover, Brentano
adopted the modern interpretation of the relationship between assertive and predicative
moments of judgment. Judgment, he says, is an act of acceptance or denial directed upon
some presentation. This definition implies that judging is not primarily directed upon
things and their perceived features, but upon intra-mental or ideal contents ([1.45], 198–
9).
Dallas Willard’s historical research has demonstrated how the influence of Johann
Friedrich Herbart, Karl Stumpf and Hermann Lotze helped Husserl to make a more
decisive break with the empiricist tradition than that achieved by Brentano ([1.122], 30–
4). Herbart defined ‘apperception’ as the ‘awareness of what is going on in us’, and
subsequently distinguished clearly between awareness of the activity of thinking and
awareness of its content ([1.72], v, 43). Stumpf, to whom Husserl dedicated his Logical
Investigations, held that second-order representations (such as the idea of a causal nexus)
may arise out of first-order representations, and that the former are not reducible to
associative manipulations of the latter. In short, he held that we somehow perceive causal
connections ([1.112], 5). Lotze broke away even more completely from the empiricist
position. Whereas Hume had claimed that the impression of the mind’s transition (which
accounts for the idea of necessary connection) is reducible to the process of transition
itself, Lotze asserted unequivocally that ideas of relations depend on a reflexive
awareness of the mind’s transitions. Moreover, he drew a distinction between the object
of the reflexive act (a second-order mental content) and the relationship represented as
obtaining between the transcendent objects of the first-order impressions ([1.78], 537–8).
Willard points out that these distinctions are unthinkable within the context of the usual
empiricist account of cognition. There is no way, for example, of reducing Lotze’s
relating activities to the mere having of automatic transitional processes, or of reducing
his second-order contents to faded and less forceful copies of impressions. On the other
hand, these authors continue to interpret mental activities as purely inner psychological
happenings, and they do not explicitly call into question the empiricist description of
mind as a theatre of representations. Hence, their modifications of the Humean account
do not constitute a full fledged revival of the premodern notion of cognition. None the
less, once the distinction between activity and content had been re-established, and once
the notion of irreducible second-order operations and contents had been elaborated, the
stage was set for a comprehensive reappraisal of the modern thesis that the terminus of
our knowing is located within the mind’s inner space.
LOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS

5.9 Page 49

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 11
Husserl was the first to challenge the modern position squarely. During the period from
1894 to 1900, further reflection on the incoherence of psychologism and on the need for a
new foundation for logic led him to make a more decisive break with the modern
epistemological model for mind. There is no evidence that he engaged during these years
in any prolonged study of medieval or later scholastic literature on the topic of cognition,
or that he was markedly influenced by a reading of the relevant texts of Aristotle. Yet he
was able to achieve what amounts to a reconstruction of the premodern notion of the
intentional continuity between mind and nature. His reflections during this period
culminated in the publication of his greatest work, Logical Investigations (1900–1). This
book begins with a series of prolegomena which make a powerful critique of the tenets of
psychologism. The rest of the work develops a more positive account of how our
cognitive acts have the capacity to yield access to objective truths. Its six investi-gations
are devoted to the following related topics: signs and signification, universals and
particulars, parts and wholes, logical grammar, intentionality, evidence and truth.
In the prolegomena, Husserl demonstrates the incoherence of trying to reduce the
objectivity of numbers, propositions, and truth itself to subjective states or activities. Like
Frege, he calls attention to the self-contradiction involved in every attempt to defend the
thesis that truth is reducible to our acceptance of it. One cannot coherently propose a
theory that subjectivizes truth and then go on to make objective claims for that theory. To
make any statement whatsoever, including a statement in defence of relativism, is to
make a claim that something is the case independently of one’s making that claim. Like
Frege, Husserl also contends that the principles of logic cannot be regarded as provisional
generalizations because inductively derived laws could never serve as standards for
adjudicating between valid and invalid arguments. It would make no sense to criticize
some individual’s thinking as illogical or inconsistent on the basis of inductive
generalizations about how thinking occurs. The idiosyncratic thinking in question might
legitimately be characterized as unusual, but not as invalid. Husserl holds that
psychologism also fails to account for the kind of evidence belonging to principles of
logic, such as the laws of the syllogism. He criticizes John Stuart Mill’s description of
logical laws as inductive generalizations on the grounds that the evidence for logical laws
is absolutely certain rather than merely probable and provisional ([1.35], 187–96). This
sort of argument would be unacceptable to Frege, who insisted that any appeal to
evidence blurs the distinction between a proposition’s truth and its being recognized as
true. According to Frege, a proposition is simply true or false in itself. He argued that
genetic accounts of how people come to think of propositions as true are irrelevant to the
issue of truth ([1.64], vi; [1.66], 133; [1.86], 32–8). Husserl contends, on the contrary,
that there is no reason why an appeal to evidence should email the reduction of truth to its
recognition. When the objective truth of a proposition makes itself manifest to the seeker
of truth, it does not thereby become subjective.
The first investigation opens with a discussion of two kinds of signs: indications and
expressions. Indications either stand for what they signify (a flag as the sign of a nation)
or point to the existence of some absent reality (smoke as a sign of fire). In both cases,
association provides the link between sign and signified. As opposed to indications,
linguistic expressions introduce a stratum of meaning. Their use requires acts of
interpretation on the part of speakers and listeners. A speaker’s words ordinarily

5.10 Page 50

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 12
accomplish three functions: they express meanings, refer to objects, and ‘intimate’ to a
listener the intellectual activity of the speaker. Husserl observes that the ‘intimating’
function of expression is a kind of indication, in the sense that spoken or written words
are indices of the existence of the speaker’s hidden and therefore ‘absent’ thoughts. He
adds that many philosophical errors arise from the failure to distinguish properly between
indication and expression. He takes Mill’s account of naming as an example. Mill held
that proper names denote but do not connote. They point to an object without in any way
presenting or conveying information about the object. Proper names, he added, are like
the distinctive chalk-marks made by the robber (of a popular tale) on a house that he
intended to plunder at a later hour. Husserl observes that this comparison unfortunately
suggests that proper names function only as indications. It is true that when the robber
later sees the chalk-marks, he recalls by association his earlier thought ‘This is the house
I must rob’. But in relation to its object a name does not function as an indication or
signal. An indication always motivates belief in the existence of whatever it indicates.
However, a names does not similarly entail the existence of the object named ([1.35],
295–8). Named objects may be real, ideal, imaginary or even impossible. Thus,
meaningful reference to an object does not perforce entail the existence of the object. The
context of its use determines the kind of ontological commitment entailed by a linguistic
expression. Husserl thus elegantly avoids the paradoxes that Bertrand Russell later
discovered were implicit in Mill’s view that names are like purely indexical signs.
The second investigation makes a convincing critique of the empiricist reduction of
universals to blurred particulars. Husserl contends that recognition of some particular
feature requires a grasp of the primitive relationship between species and instances. We
could not discern a distinctive particular feature as such (e.g., this particular red) if we did
not also intuit the corresponding universal (the species, Red). The two modes of intuition
are interdependent. We grasp the particular feature as an instance of a range of similar
instances in which the species is realized, and we grasp the identity of the species as the
condition for the possibility of identifying the particular as such an instance.
The third investigation deals with the relationships between parts and wholes. Husserl
first distinguishes between independent parts, or ‘pieces’, and non-independent parts, or
‘moments’. Pieces are parts that are separable from their wholes. Moments are parts that
are so interrelated with one another, or with their wholes, that they cannot be given
separately. We learn to recognize the various relationships between parts and wholes by
attempting successfully or unsuccessfully to vary these relationships in imagination. For
example, we may conclude that the colour of a thing is inseparable from its surface (or
extension) because we cannot successfully imagine eliminating one without also
eliminating the other.
The fourth investigation discusses the relationship between grammar and logic. Husserl
contends that grammatical laws governing distinctions between complete and incomplete
expressions, and senseless and absurd expressions, are grounded in ontological structures.
Laws governing the compounding of meanings are also similarly grounded in the way
things are. All such rules have their origins in the interplay of parts and wholes given in
perception. Husserl acknowledges that various languages may organize perceptual part-
whole complexes differently. He suggests, however, that a study of the different ways in
which various languages accomplish this task will reveal common categorial structures

6 Pages 51-60

▲back to top

6.1 Page 51

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 13
concealed by empirical differences ([1.35], 526; [1.100], 206).
In the fifth investigation, Husserl objects to the above-mentioned expressions that
Brentano had used to describe the status of intentional objects (‘immanent objectivity’,
‘intentional in-existence’). He points out that these phrases suggest that the intentional
object enters into consciousness as a component of the flux of experience and that it
functions within the enclosure of the mind as a substitute for the object of reference.
Husserl insists, on the contrary, that the intentional object and the object of reference are
one and the same: ‘It need only be said to be acknowledged that the intentional object of
a presentation is the same as its actual object…it is absurd to distinguish between
them’ ([1.35], 595). He thus affirms unequivocally that our intentional acts target things
in the world. Husserl also clarifies the relationship between intentional contents and
intentional objects. He says that the term ‘intentional content’ may legitimately be
interpreted in the following ways: (1) as the intentional object (either the object tout
court, or the object considered as it is intended); (2) as that feature (the act’s ‘matter’) in
virtue of which the act achieves determinate reference; (3) as the ‘intentional essence’ of
the act, i.e., the ‘matter’ combined with its ‘quality’. The term ‘quality’ refers in this
context to the type of intentional act, e.g., question, wish, statement, etc. ([1.35], 578–80,
589, 657; [1.54], 26–36). These distinctions are consistent with Husserl’s claim, in the
first investigation, that propositions are related to the acts in which they are expressed in
a manner comparable to the way in which species are related to their instances.
Considered as an intentional essence, the intentional content (matter and quality) is an
ideal proposition that is independent of particular intentional acts. Taken as instantiated,
the matter and quality are non-independent ‘moments’ of a particular act ([1.35], 330).
Many commentators have rejected this thesis on the grounds that it seems to commit
Husserl to the questionable view that ideal propositions may somehow be particularized
as moments of individualintentional acts. John Drummond has called attention to two
passages that suggest that Husserl eventually modified his position. A note in the second
edition (1913) strongly implies that the intentional content should not be regarded as a
particularized feature of the intentional act ([1.35], 576; [1.54], 26–36, 39–42). Moreover,
in Ideas Pertaining to a Pure Phenomenology and to a Phenomenological Philosophy
(1913), Husserl adds that what he had formerly taken to be a property of acts was really a
property of the ‘meant as such’ ([1.41], 308; [1.54], 41). In other words, Husserl finally
identifies intentional matter and intentional object (in the sense of the ‘object considered
as it is intended’). This is an important statement, for it effectively eliminates any residue
of the medieval notion that we must postulate some son of intermediary content in
between intentional acts and their objects.
Husserl agrees with Brentano that we must distinguish between predication and
judgmental assent. However, he disagrees with Brentano’s view that judgment is the
acceptance or rejection of a neutralized presentation. According to Husserl, judgment is
an assertive attitude which pervades the achievement of predication. This attitude is
determined by anticipated or concomitantly experienced intuitions of things and their
features, rather than by some sort of appraisal of the sense of the sentence. Husserl also
agrees with Frege, as opposed to Brentano, that judgment is always a positive attitude,
even when the content to which it assents includes a negation. In the context of discourse,
assertoric statements make truth claims by reason of their form, not by reason of their

6.2 Page 52

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 14
predicative content as such, nor by reason of some tacit prefixed existential proposition
([1.35], 612–16). He thus firmly rejects the modern view that judgments are appraisals of
nominalized propositional contents. In our straightforward dealings with the world, we
are ordinarily preoccupied with things and their properties, rather than with what we are
saying. Our speech is guided not by a scan of meanings but rather by anticipated or
achieved intuitions of the essential structures of things. It follows that we need not
postulate mediating structures (ideas or concepts) between words and things, nor do we
need to speculate about a ‘place’ in which they dwell. To know something is simply to
possess its form, to intuit it through its essence, i.e., its intelligible structure. Speech acts
express meanings as ideal objects, but meanings are not grasped as such in the instance of
articulation.
Husserl also develops more in detail the guiding metaphor of his account of
intentionality. He contrasts the ‘emptiness’ of symbolic intentions with the ‘fullness’ of
intuitive presentations. An empty act is directed toward an object in its absence. A
fulfilling act registers its presence. Symbolic intentions may be either nominal (simple) or
propositional (complex). A nominal act is single-rayed and directed towards a whole. A
propositional act is multi-rayed, since it articulates discrete parts within a complex object.
Intuitive presentations may be either perceptual or categorial.
These distinctions prepare the way for a discussion of truth in the sixth investigation.
According to Husserl, the experience of truth occurs when we recognize the identity of an
object in the transition from empty intention to fulfilling intuition ([1.35], 621–4, 765–
70). This description displaces the problem of truth from its traditional locus in the
judgment, since the identity-synthesis may occur both in nominal and propositional
contexts. Truth is achieved on the pre-predicative level in the identity-synthesis of an
empty nominal intention and its correlative perceptual intuition. If judgments achieve
truth in a comparable sense, it is not by reason of their propositional structure but by
reason of a parallel intuitive fulfillment of their emptily intended objects ([1.76], 68).
The sixth investigation also offers a more extensive critique of the restrictive account
of intuition proposed by British empiricism. Husserl approaches this issue indirectly by
first criticizing the interpretation that the empiricist tradition had given to the role of
those components of a proposition that belong to its categorial form, e.g., prepositions,
conjunctions, cases and the copula. According to Locke and Hume, these syntactical
operators refer to intra-mental processes rather than to aspects of the world. Husserl
dismisses this thesis on the grounds that, when we use such expressions, we are directed
towards things rather than towards inner processes. For example, if we say ‘This paper is
white’, it is because we find that the property ‘white’ belongs to the paper. Hence we
surely use the term ‘is’ in such a sentence to refer to the objective situation rather than to
some inner psychological happening. Besides syntactical terms, he adds, there are other
formal components of propositions that cannot find their fulfillment in ordinary simple
intuitions. Nouns, verbs and even adjectival expressions introduce senses which cannot
be fulfilled by simple intuitions: ‘The intention of the word “white” only partially
coincides with the colour-aspect of the appearing object; a surplus of meaning remains
over, a form which finds nothing in the appearance itself to confirm it’ ([1.35], 775).
Husserl concludes that we must acknowledge the role of nonsensuous or ‘categorial’
intuitions which function in conjunction with simple perceptions and which bring the

6.3 Page 53

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 15
formal components of predication to intuitive fulfillment. The fulfilling intuition of any
expression describing a particular thus involves the intuition of formal senses that exceed
what is intuited in the simple perception of the particular. These expressions refer to
particular things by way of accidental or essential descriptive features whose surplus
senses function as conditions for the manifestation of the particulars as such ([1.114], 70–
1). Categorial intuition is therefore the first step in the process of discernment of
essences, for to grasp the essence of some thing or situation is first of all to grasp its
sortal property, i.e., its specific form. Translated into Aristotelian terms, intuition of the
looks of things (secondary substances) is the condition for the presentation of particulars
(primary substances).
THE TRANSCENDENTAL TURN
During the period from 1900 to 1913, Husserl developed more fully his criticism of the
modern account of cognition. He spelled out his new position in a series of five lectures
which introduce the theme of transcendental phenomenology for the first time. Given in
Göttingen in 1907 and later published as The Idea of Phenomenology, these lectures are
devoted to a clarification of the notions of immanence and transcendence. According to
Husserl, modern descriptions of the relationship between immanence and transcendence
tend to invoke two complementary themes: inside versus outside and accessibility versus
inaccessibility. When immanence is described as an enclosure containing mental
processes and impressions, transcendence is correspondingly defined as whatever
remains outside of that enclosure. When immanence is described as a region of
indubitable givenness, transcendence is defined as a region populated by unknowable
things-in-themselves. Most epistemologies combine these two senses of the relationship
between immanence and transcendence. They first conflate mental acts and their contents
by describing both as ‘contained’ within the mind’s psychic processes. They then
construe the enigma of cognition as a problem of how to establish a connection between
intra-mental representations and extra-mental things. The ‘unspoken assumption’ of these
theories is that our cognitive processes are devoid of intentional import. This, according
to Husserl, is the ‘fatal mistake’ of modern philosophy. Husserl praises Hume for
acknowledging that this way of formulating the problem would in the end lead only to
scepticism, but he adds that Hume’s scepticism is itself riddled with contradictions. On
the one hand, Hume degrades to the status of fictions everything that transcends
impressions and ideas. On the other hand, he ascribes to the processes of mind the same
sort of reality as the transcendent things that we would reach if we could somehow break
out of the circle of immanence. Husserl concludes that whenever philosophers ask about
the possibility of cognition in a way that implies that ‘cognition is a thing apart from its
object’, or that ‘cognition is given but the object of cognition is not given’, they introduce
an inappropriate notion of transcendence, which in turn entails an inappropriate
interpretation of immanence ([1.34], 27–30).
According to Husserl, philosophy needs to adopt a new way of thinking and a new
critique of reason: ‘philosophy lies in a wholly new dimension. It needs an entirely new
point of departure and an entirely new method distinguishing it in principle from any

6.4 Page 54

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 16
“natural” science’ ([1.34], 19). He therefore proposes a new and radical method which
requires the bracketing (epoche) or suspension of natural convictions: ‘At the outset of
the critique of cognition the entire world of nature, physical and psychological, as well as
one’s own human self together with all the sciences which have to do with these
objective matters, are put into question’ ([1.34], 22). Husserl immediately distinguishes
his new method from Descartes’ doubt. Descartes’ goal was to establish certitude about
the existence of the thinking self and transcendent things. Husserl has no interest in such
a project. His goal is simply to uncover the essence of cognition. He points out that
Descartes failed to grasp the essence of cognition because he defined himself, qua,
inquirer, as a ‘thinking thing’ having the same status as the transcendent things whose
existence he had called into doubt ([1.34], 5–7). The purpose of the new method is to free
us from this incoherent interpretation of transcendence, and consequently to enable us to
redefine both transcendence and immanence. When we bracket everything within the
realm of transcendence (as it is understood by Descartes and Hume), we in fact exclude
nothing more than the incoherent interpretation of transcendent being as a region situated
beyond the range of our knowledge. In so far as the mind’s ‘inside’ is interpreted as
having the same sort of ontological status, it too must be bracketed. This approach
permits us to redefine immanence, in a broader sense, as the zone of all manifestation,
wherein both immanent objects (considered now, in a narrower sense, as reflectively
intuited experiences) and their intentional correlates (transcendent things) appear to us.
Immanent and transcendent objects are now distinguished in terms of their different
styles of appearing, rather than by appeal to the difference between intra-mental
appearance and extra-mental being.
In the first volume of Ideas, Husserl describes this broader field of immanence as a
realm of transcendental consciousness. He distinguishes in this work between the ‘natural
attitude’, in which we are preoccupied by things in the world, and the ‘phenomenological
attitude’, in which we reflect on the intentions at work in the natural attitude and on the
objective correlates of those intentions. We achieve the latter transcendental point of
view by suspending our natural attitude of belief in the reality of things and the world.
Husserl emphasizes once again that the purpose of this procedure is not to call natural
convictions into doubt but rather to achieve a distance that will enable us to reflect upon
them. He adds that the method may also be called ‘reduction’, for it ‘leads back’ from
lived acts and attitudes to reflective consideration of those acts and attitudes. After the
reduction, we no longer live in our intentions. We step back from them in order to reflect
on them in their full concreteness. For example, we step back from our participation in
the positing of things as real, but continue to maintain that positing as something upon
which we reflect. We also maintain our contact with things. The same things in the world
are still there for our consideration, but the change in focus initiated by the reduction now
permits us to appreciate them precisely as intended objects. We now notice them as
perceived, as judged, as posited, as doubted, as imagined. Husserl calls any object so
considered a noema, and he calls the correlative intention a noesis ([1.41], 214; [1.54],
46–56, 256–7).
Many commentators equate the phenomenological reduction with the reflective turn of
consciousness away from things and facts towards concepts and propositions. They
contend that the purpose of the reduction is to orient philosophical analysis towards

6.5 Page 55

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 17
semantic issues. Proponents of this view find striking similarities between Husserl’s
concept of the noema and Frege’s concept of ‘sense’ (Sinn). They hold that both Fregean
senses and Husserlian noemata ordinarily serve as intermediaries between our linguistic
expressions and their referents ([1.61], 680–7). Frege claimed that the sense conveyed by
an expression shapes or determines its reference. Certain passages from Ideas seem to
assign an analogous role to the noema. For example, in one passage Husserl speaks
enigmatically of a ‘determinable X’ that functions as a centre for the noematic contents
which present an object in diverse ways ([1.41], 313–14, 320–2). Proponents of the
Fregean interpretation of the noema suggest that Husserl meant to say that the noematic
‘X’ functions like the sense conveyed by a demonstrative pronoun. It identifies the object
of reference not through its properties but as the bearer of properties ([1.95], 195–219).
On this interpretation, the role of the phenomenological reduction is to disclose the
semantic entities through which intentional direction to objects is achieved.
Robert Sokolowski points out that this interpretation fails to take into account the later
Husserl’s remarks, in Formal and Transcendental Logic (1929), on the difference
between the kind of reflection that yields access to propositions and the properly
philosophical reflection made possible by the reduction ([1.31, 110–27; [1.100], 45–7).
Husserl makes it clear in this work that there is nothing specifically philosophical about
propositional reflection, i.e., the reflective turn away from the ‘ontological’ realms of
things and facts towards the ‘apophantic’ realm of concepts and propositions. This shift
in focus occurs quite naturally whenever we reflect on what we ourselves or others have
said, in such a way as to take what has been said as a mere supposition or proposal, i.e.,
as a proposition. It also occurs regularly in the context of scientific inquiry. Scientific
verification requires a constant oscillation between investigation of facts and reflection
on propositions. Both ordinary and scientific forms of prepositional reflection take place
within the natural attitude, and therefore do not require the phenomenological reduction
as their condition.
What then is the difference between prepositional reflection and philosophical
reflection? Prepositional reflection turns our attention from things and facts to concepts
and propositions. Philosophical reflection focuses on the correlation between intentional
acts and attitudes (noeses) and the ways in which things are presented (noemata). It
considers things and facts as the correlates of the attitude of straightforward involvement
in the world, and it considers propositions as the correlates of the intentional attitude of
prepositional reflection. We may therefore conclude that, for Husserl, the noema is
simply the object itself, considered under the reduction as presented. It follows that the
‘determinable X’ is not a semantic entity that functions as a medium of reference. It is the
intentional object itself considered as an identity genuinely given in each of its
presentations ([1.54], 181–91).
Husserl’s description of the relationship between the ontological and apophantic
domains reinforces his thesis that concepts and propositions do not function as mental
intermediaries. Concepts and propositions emerge only when we shift from an
ontological to an apophantic focus. Hence, they do not serve as mediating entities that
somehow link speech acts to their intentional referents. As we have seen, Husserl
explicitly rejected Locke’s view that concepts are mental representations, and implicitly
rejected the medieval view that concepts are transparent media of reference. Moreover,

6.6 Page 56

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 18
he never claimed, as does Frege, that concepts and propositions belong to a ‘third
realm’ (the first realm is the outer world of physical things; the second realm is the inner
world of psychic processes) that functions as a non-subjective medium of reference.
Robert Sokolowski suggests that the tendency to regard concepts and propositions as
reified intermediaries is probably due to a confusion between object-oriented and
reflective stances of consciousness. We enjoy a marginal awareness of what we are
saying in the process of saying it. However, we do not at that moment objectify what we
are saying as a proposition, for our consciousness remains directed towards the world.
We can, none the less, easily shift back and forth between ontological and prepositional
attitudes. The very mobility of our consciousness inculcates a forgetfulness of the change
in attitude requisite for the manifestation of concepts and propositions. Concepts and
propositions then easily come to be thought of as having a status analogous to things and
facts. We thus come to think of them as separate entities situated in some psychic or
semantic realm. For those who are looking for a solution to the modern epistemological
problem of establishing a link between our speech acts and their targets, it is then
perfectly natural to assign this mediating role to concepts and propositions. According to
Husserl, however, there is no such need for mediation. Our consciousness is intentional
by its very nature ([1.101],110–11; [1.106], 451–63).
This does not mean, of course, that there is no mediating role for language. Husserl
draws a distinction between genuinely thoughtful speech and routine linguistic
performances. He observes that when we speak, we ordinarily focus upon what we see, or
anticipate seeing, and only marginally upon what we are saying. Though marginal, our
consciousness of the meanings of linguistic expressions testifies to a familiarity with a
vast network of culturally established distinctions and nuances whose ultimate
justification lies in the intuitive disclosure of the looks of things. Once in command of the
standardized senses of words, we need no longer focus on those senses. When we speak
about things, we let ourselves be guided only by our categorial intuitions. Our choice of
words is governed directly by the looks of the things we struggle to describe. Sometimes
we simply repeat standard formulae. We then fail to exercise the potential for clarity or
distinctness provided by the linguistic code. Sometimes we are more conscious of making
linguistic choices. At such moments, we shift our focus away from things towards the
senses of words ([1.31], 56–60). Husserl thus suggests that our ability to shift back and
forth easily between these orientations accounts for the interdependence of intuitive and
linguistic discriminations. Finding the appropriate word, therefore, is not just a matter of
familiarity with the rules of a language-game. An exclusively pragmatic account of
linguistic use amounts to a nominalism that rejects any link between predicates and the
intuited forms of things. Thoughtful speech is the product of an artful integration of
seeing and saying. Mastery of an extensive linguistic repertoire makes for more nuanced
perceptions, which in turn call for more nuanced linguistic options.
In the first volume of Ideas, Husserl takes up again the effort to redefine the notions of
immanence and transcendence. He attempts to bring the reader gradually to the
realization that the new dimension revealed by the reduction is not a region comparable
to other regions of being. He first defines a region of being as a specific domain of
objects (e.g., the regions ‘material thing’ and ‘culture’) whose unity is determined by
some maximally broad genus. He notes that empirical sciences which deal with a given

6.7 Page 57

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 19
region of being ought to be grounded in a corresponding science of essences which he
calls a ‘regional ontology’. The task of a regional ontology is to specify the essences that
structure all objects in its domain, and to spell out the hierarchically ordered relationships
between them. In addition to the various regional ontologies, Husserl proposes that there
should be a new science, called ‘formal ontology’, devoted to the study of the
fundamental categories that govern the relations and arrangements between objects in any
region whatsoever. He then criticizes the thesis, common to most epistemological
accounts, that consciousness is confined within a psychic region, opposed to the region of
things. Whenever consciousness is described in this manner, there is a tendency, he
argues, to reduce intentionality to representation within the enclosure of the mind.
Repeating the themes developed earlier in The Idea of Phenomenology, he then describes
the transcendence of things as a mode of givenness within immanence, now more broadly
understood as the range of intentionality’s transcending power. He again stresses that the
reduction does not exclude anything that is genuinely given. Finally, he points out that
this new dimension of immanence cannot coherently be understood as situated within the
co-ordinates of a pre-given world. Even the horizon of the world is given as such within
the sphere of immanence. Unlike all other regions, therefore, the transcendental domain
is absolute and all-inclusive. It has no perimeters, no outside. Husserl thus takes the
metaphor of ‘region’ to its limits, in order to demonstrate that it is, in fact, incoherent to
think of immanence as a sector within a broader whole. Any attempt to conceive of a
dimension of being beyond the zone of possible consciousness is nonsensical.
Consciousness and being belong together. Their ranges are co-extensive. There can be no
outside for a being whose mode of being is to be open to all things.
EGO AND WORLD
One of the most controversial theses of Husserl’s transcendental phenomenology is his
claim that both ego and world may be considered as noemata by the transcendental
inquirer. He frequently distinguishes between the ego considered as part of the world and
the transcendental ego for whom the world itself is a noema. He contends that our
capacity to function as transcendental subjects permits us to achieve a reflective distance
from our own natural way of being in the world, and therefore to understand that way of
being more fully. Husserl develops these themes in Ideas II, Cartesian Meditations, and
in a manuscript published posthumously under the title The Crisis of European Sciences
and Transcendental Phenomenology.
Ideas II introduces the theme of the human ego in an oblique fashion by first
describing the role of corporeal orientation and intellectual perspective in the presentation
of things. Things appear to us in quite different ways, depending on the condition of our
sense organs, on variations in our kinesthetic orientation, and especially on whether we
take a pragmatic or theoretical attitude towards them. Husserl situates his analysis within
the context of an understanding of nature that has been substantially affected by modern
science. The contemporary sense of nature, he contends, is the intentional correlate of an
attitude which he describes as both ‘doxic’ and ‘theoretical’. It is doxic because it is
permeated by an unthematic belief in the existence of its objects; it is theoretical because

6.8 Page 58

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 20
it prescinds from the practical, aesthetic and ethical features of its objects. While ordinary
experience does not constantly maintain an exclusively theoretical stance, none the less
the influence of science has generated the everyday conviction that the true sense of the
thing is what remains when we bracket the useful, the beautiful and the good ([1.5], 1–11;
[1.89], 39–40). Further analysis of the presentation of things reveals that the full sense of
their objectivity is dependent upon a recognition of intersubjectivity. For example, a
sense of relatively fixed spatial positions is essential to our sense of objectivity. It would
surely be difficult to develop this notion from an exclusively private perspective. We
manage eventually to locate ourselves within a public system of co-ordinates by first
recognizing that one individual’s ‘here’ may be another’s ‘there’, and then agreeing upon
some convention for relating all positions to a stable network of places. This is a typical
example of phenomenological analysis. Husserl’s goal is always to unpack the layers of
meaning sedimented in the senses of various types of objects, and thus to reveal the
intentional acts and attitudes tacitly at work in the presentation of these objects.
In Cartesian Meditations (1931), Husserl continues his analysis of intersubjectivity by
introducing a modification of the bracketing technique that he calls ‘reduction to the
sphere of ownness’. He proposes to abstract from everything in our experience that
testifies to the presence of others. The purpose of this strategy is not to describe the
production of meaning by a subjectivity actually cut off from others and the world, or to
assure us that we are really in contact with other people. Despite its title, Cartesian
Meditations is not motivated by any such epistemological concern. On the contrary,
Husserl’s purpose is simply to uncover the contribution of the sense that there are other
selves to the individual’s sense of self and of world. Phenomenological analysis is a
reconstruction, not a creation of meaning.
In his Lectures on the Phenomenology of Inner Time-Consciousness (1928), Husserl
claims that a second-order reflection reveals a level of time-consciousness that accounts
for the identity of the transcendental ego. He first distinguishes between transcendent
temporal objects, such as musical performances or public lectures, and immanent
temporal objects, such as our perceptions of these events. He then points out that the
perception of a temporal object may itself be taken as temporal object. Whenever we
perceive the elapsing of a speaker’s words into the past, we also experience the fading of
our perceptions of those words into the past. We thus learn to situate transcendent
happenings within the context of objective time, and also to locate our perceptions of
those events within the horizon of immanent time. Finally, he claims that reflection on
the correlation between the flux of immanent temporal objects and our experience of that
flux reveals that we are conscious of a deeper level of time which accounts for our sense
of the temporal flow of our intentional acts. We experience this primal flux as the basic
form within which all experience occurs. This form is composed not of the basic
temporal phases (past, present and future), but of the conditions for their possibility, i.e.,
a primal impression, ‘retention’ of the just-past, and ‘protention’ of the just-about-to-be.
Awareness of the concatenation of these components makes it possible for us to
experience our own intentional life as temporal, and to grasp intentional objects as the
same again throughout their successive presentations ([1.14], 378–82; [1.46], 298–326;
[1.100], 138–68).

6.9 Page 59

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 21
ESSENCES
Husserl claims that we are sometimes able to discern the essential structures of things. In
Experience and Judgment, he distinguishes between the grasp of empirical universals and
the fully-fledged intuition of essences. A preliminary awareness of empirical universals
occurs when we make the transition from merely associative judgments, which express
perceived likenesses among things, to those judgments which explicitly identify
particulars as instances of some category. Once we have discerned what is the same
among many individuals, we may then thematize the universal itself and begin to make
scientific judgments about it. The goal of science is to specify ever more completely the
characteristics of such empirical universals. According to Husserl, however, science
never fully realizes this ideal, for it is impossible to achieve a truly exhaustive and
definitive determination of all of the features of any empirical universal. The
determination of every empirical concept is ‘always in progress, always being further
fashioned, and also refashioned’ ([1.35], 116; [1.36], nos 80–98; [1.100], 58–62).
We make the transition from the grasp of an empirical universal to the intuition of an
essence when we move from the perceptual to the imaginary mode of consciousness by
submitting the universal to a process of ‘free variation’ designed to reveal an invariant
structure. Husserl describes this technique as follows. We attempt to imagine
successively the subtraction of one after another of the various features of the object
under consideration. In this way we eventually isolate those invariant features without
which the object in question wouldcease to be what it is. We need not consider every
conceivable variation. Indeed, in most cases it would be impossible to carry out an
exhaustive survey of every possibility. What matters is that the manner of variation
should be such that not only do we have the sense that the process could go on
indefinitely, but also that it would in fact be fruitless to continue. As Husserl puts it, the
process of variation should have a character of ‘exemplary arbitrariness’ ([1.36], no.
87b). Eidetic intuition is therefore a product of method. As Husserl puts it: ‘The inward
evidence on which all knowledge ultimately reposes is no gift of nature, appearing
together with the idea of states of affairs without any methodically artful set-up’ ([1.35],
63; [1.110].
Husserl does not, like some contemporary philosophers, extend the method of free
variation to the consideration of improbable scenarios imagined as taking place within
possible worlds. His imaginative variations, like Aristotle’s, are generally guided and
limited by our ordinary intuitions of things in this world. Moreover, he never attempts to
provide anything like a clear-cut rule for deciding when the process of ‘free variation’
ought to come to an end. He tells us only that there comes a point in any enquiry when it
is reasonable to conclude that there are no further pertinent questions to be asked. It is
then imprudent or even pathological to consider additional alternative possibilities. In
short, discernment of essences requires both method and judgment. A sense of the mean
between extremes is as necessary in intellectual enquiry as it is in practical affairs.
Husserl claims, moreover, that the kind of certainty that we should assign to the results
of this procedure varies in proportion to the type of access that we have to the objects

6.10 Page 60

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 22
under investigation. Our apperceptive access to the basic structures of consciousness
yields a different son of evidence than is available in our perceptions of things in the
world. Ordinary perceptions are perspectival and therefore necessarily incomplete.
However, the philosophic recognition that all such perceptions are perspectival is not
itself perspectival or incomplete in the same fashion. Ordinary perceptions are
perspectives in the sense that they present only one side of their objects at a time.
Philosophic descriptions of the structure of perception are ‘perspectives’ in the sense that
they are influenced by historically conditioned questions and methods. Husserl suggests
that it is just as inappropriate to blur these differences by asserting that all forms of
cognition are similarly perspectival, as it is to look for mathematical certitudes in the
ethical and political domains.
Husserl at first held that the relative immediacy of access to the structures of cognition
provided by our tacit awareness of intentional performances makes for apodictic
certainty. He eventually acknowledged, however, that even the privileged access of
consciousness to its own structures does not guarantee the perfect accuracy of reflective
descriptions of those structures. Given the oblique and unthematic character of our tacit
awareness of intentional acts and attitudes, and given the distorting influence of prevalent
philosophic categories, our reflective descriptions are often vague and confused. Indeed,
the history of philosophy testifies convincingly to the fact that no philosophic reflection
can dissipate all vagueness. In any case, Husserl adds, philosophic differences are never
settled by sweeping refutations, but rather by the elaboration of strategic distinctions that
reveal the partial, vague or confused character of opposing positions. This is why
philosophy must be a co-operative effort of a community of investigators.
LIFE-WORLD AND HISTORY
Husserl’s later works are largely devoted to the themes of life-world and history. He
hoped that his phenomenological analyses of these topics would serve as correctives to
the naturalism and historicism which he recognized as two of the most powerful themes
of modernity. Naturalism is a philosophic position consequent upon the mathematization
of nature achieved by the new scientific method at the beginning of the modern era. Its
thesis is that the entire realm of nature, including human nature, is comprised only of
entities and processes susceptible of such quantitative analysis. Historicism may be
defined as the tendency to regard the conceptual systems of both the natural and the
human sciences as world views whose presuppositions are determined by contingent
historical transformations.
Husserl traces the drift of modern science towards reductionism to Galileo’s failure to
relate scientific truths adequately to their sources in the life-world, the pre-scientific
world in which we live. He calls attention, in particular, to the ambiguous implications of
Galileo’s bold decision to overcome the obstacle which perceived qualities presented to
calculative rationality by treating them as subjective indices of objective quantities. This
decision had the effect of concealing the priority of perceived over mathematical objects.
Husserl contends that two factors contributed to this concealment ([1.33], 21–60; [1.89],
162–7).

7 Pages 61-70

▲back to top

7.1 Page 61

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 23
In the first place, he observes, we must not forget that Galileo was heir to a relatively
advanced tradition of ‘pure geometry’, which by reason of its very advances had already
lost contact with the fundamental insights on which it was first constructed. Geometry
most likely had its origins in the invention of practical techniques of surveying and
measuring. Its ideal figures were thus first derived by abstraction and progressive
idealization from the perceived forms of things. Once having acquired the notion of a
field of pure ‘limit-shapes’, mathematical praxis was able to achieve an exactness and a
freedom that is denied to us in empirical praxis. This ideal geometry was subsequently
translated into applied geometry in the field of astronomy, where it became possible to
calculate ‘with compelling necessity’ the relative positions and even the existence of
events that were never accessible to direct empirical measurement. This achievement
constituted a partial fulfillment of the dream of the ancient Pythagoreans who had
observed the functional dependency of the pitch of a tone on the length of a vibrating
string which produced it, and had therefore evoked the possibility of a generalized theory
of correlations between perceived properties and measurable changes in geometrical
properties. All of this, Husserl speculates, inclined Galileo to bracket the problem of the
original derivation of geometry from the perceived qualities of things, and to interpret
such qualities as merely subjective indicators of the true quantitative being of the world
([1.33], 29).
In the second place, Husserl continues, we must take into account the ‘portentous’
influence on Galileo’s thinking of the new algebraic formalization of geometry. The
development of algebra in effect liberated geometry from all intuited actuality and even
from the concept of number. Although it was only with Descartes’ invention of analytic
geometry that the full implications of this move would be realized, Galileo had already
clearly understood that Euclid’s geometry could now be interpreted as a general logic of
discovery rather than as a theory limited to the realm of pure shapes ([1.33], 44–6).
Husserl’s argument may be confirmed by considering the role of Galileo’s diagrams for
his theorems about uniformly accelerated bodies. It is clear that the lines and angles of
these diagrams no longer refer literally to spatial shapes created by geometric relations
between linear magnitudes but rather to a sequence of ratios between time and velocity.
Galileo therefore implicitly considered such ‘geometric’ diagrams as expressive of
relationships among any magnitudes whatever. Although this realization contributed
significantly to the advance of modern physics, it also initiated a process of further
alienation of scientific method from its roots in the perceived world. Unlike traditional
geometry, which requires insight into the reasons for every step in its demonstrations,
algebra lends itself to the development of techniques of calculation which no longer
demand such comprehension but require instead only the blind implementation of
procedural rules.
Galileo himself continued to employ the more traditional geometrical style of
demonstration, and hence demanded of his readers conscious insight into the point of
each transition. Nevertheless, his method took modernity further along the road towards
the reductionist interpretation of reason as an adaptive power whose operations are
mechanistic processes devoid of intuitive insight. Husserl cites as an example of this
account of reason the tendency of some twentieth-century logicians to conflate
computing procedures with authentic deductions, and even to interpret the rules

7.2 Page 62

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 24
governing such procedures as a genuine logic ([1.37], 117). He concludes that the great
discovery of modernity, i.e., the emancipation of mathematics from the constraints
imposed by the intuition of Euclidean shapes, was both an advance and a setback. On the
one hand, freedom from servitude to intuited forms would give to the geometer a greater
potential for mastery over nature. On the other hand, it also further promoted the modern
forgetfulness of the priority of insight into perceived structures over technical virtuosity.
This forgetfulness would eventually lead to a bracketing of those acts and attitudes of the
human spirit that render scientific and other modes of cognition possible. Naturalism
forgets the role of the inquiring subject whose intentional acts remain inaccessible to
empirical observation.
Husserl calls attention to the irony implicit in this history of modernity. He observes
that it is unlikely that Galileo was ever aware of the hidden ‘motivation’ of his project.
The seeds of reductionism and even of scepticism were, of course, already present in
Hobbes’s rationalistic exaltation of the power of reckoning. Hobbes had dismissed the
whole sphere of pre-scientific experience and discourse. Whatever cannot be quantified
he assigned to the realm of illusion. Moreover, Hobbes clearly regarded reason’s calculus
as an outgrowth of our biological drives and needs. For a long time, however, the success
of the new sciences obscured the implications of this naturalism. Hobbes thought that
calculative procedures could succeed where the ancient and medieval quest for essences
had failed. Reckoning would reveal the hidden structures of reality. It required a genius
such as Hume, says Husserl, to take the naturalism initiated by Hobbes to its logical
conclusions. Hume realized that if cognitive intuition cannot break out of the circle of
impressions and ideas, there is no justification for supposing that reckoning can yield any
less fanciful results. The fundamental categories requisite for a mathematicized version of
nature must somehow be derivable from information provided by the manifold of
impressions. According to Hobbes, however, sensory impressions yield only illusions. It
follows that scientific theories too are productions of fancy. This realization is the key to
Hume’s scepticism: ‘Hume goes on to the end. All categories of objectivity—the
scientific ones through which an objective extra-psychic world is thought in scientific
life, and the pre-scientific ones through which it is thought in everyday life—are
fictions’ ([1.33], no. 23). Scientific descriptions are useful fictions, but they nevertheless
remain fictions. The high hopes of modernity thus culminated finally in a thoroughgoing
pragmatism. It seems clear in retrospect that the hidden intent of Galileo’s
fatefuldecision, and indeed of the entire project of modernity, was to give up on truth and
settle for power.
Husserl therefore thought that the most urgent task of philosophy was to restore
confidence in the rationality of our ordinary intuitions about the life-world. We must
demonstrate how scientific accounts of nature are always dependent upon the evidences
of ordinary experience, and show how the success of Galileo’s method in some areas
does not justify an unlimited application in all fields of enquiry. Phenomenological
analysis reveals, for example, that human acts have a conscious dimension that cannot be
reduced to quantifiable processes, or explained as a product of causal sequences. This is
especially true of the procedures of scientific discovery which require a disciplined
detachment from biological needs and environmental stimuli. In short, the acts
prerequisite for the emergence of things as empirical objects cannot coherently be taken

7.3 Page 63

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 25
as exclusively empirical processes.
Husserl also makes some interesting remarks on the implications of his own method of
historical interpretation, as exemplified in the above analysis of the unintended project
concealed by Galileo’s manifest intentions and accomplishments. He observes that
whenever we engage in an historical analysis of this type we always find ourselves in a
sort of circle. We can only understand the past in the light of the present, and yet the
present has meaning only in the light of the past. ‘Relative clarification’ in one direction
brings about ‘some elucidation’ in the other, and vice versa. There is no tone of
pessimism in Husserl’s description of this methodological predicament ([1.33], 58). He
suggests that his ‘zigzag’ method of historical interpretation makes it possible to achieve
ever more comprehensive historical understanding, but he never claims that it will yield
definitive truths. He does not lament this situation. He simply calls attention to the kind
of truth that is available to historical interpretation.
These remarks suggest that, in his later works at least, Husserl was sensitive to the
hermeneutic circle implicit in all human enquiry. His comments on the historicity of the
life-world confirm this impression. Although he sometimes describes the life-world as a
horizon of experience common to human beings in every historical epoch, at other times
he speaks of multiple life-worlds and hints that every life-world is conditioned by layered
sedimentations of meaning produced by forgotten cultural achievements. He even goes so
far as to say that we must look for truth ‘not as falsely absolutized, but rather, in each
case, as within its horizons’ ([1.20], 279). This passage suggests that all evidence is
subject to correction by further evidence. Husserl adds, moreover, that it is in accordance
with the nature of a horizon that ‘it leaves open the possibility that conflicting
experiences may supervene and lead to corrections in the form of a determining as
otherwise or else in the form of a complete striking out (as illusion)’ ([1.20], 281;
[1.110], 50).
Husserl’s reflections on these issues did not cause him to repudiate the original project
of phenomenology. Indeed, in the same passages which call attention to the role of
intentional horizons he constantly reaffirms the phenomenological goal of uncovering
and ‘explicating’ the sedimented senses of these horizons. Husserl therefore apparently
saw no conflict between this goal and his properly hermeneutic discovery that all inquiry
takes place within an historical context. Jacques Derrida contends that this attitude
indicates that the entire enterprise of phenomenology was founded on an uncontrolled
presupposition. Husserl tacitly took for granted the trans-historical validity of the ideal of
universal truth, even though his own historical interpretation established that commitment
to this ideal is an historically conditioned attitude. His description of this ideal as a
regulative idea effectively exempted him from the task of justifying it ([1.51], 154). It
seems more likely, however, that Husserl always understood that the ideal of universal
truth functions more as a moral imperative than as a demonstrable or self-evident
principle. He was convinced that our experience of the world yields enough intelligibility
and direction to encourage the expectation that further investigation will yield further
progress in truth. However, his choice of the Kantian notion of a regulative idea to
describe the telos of philosophy suggests that he regarded the expectation of progress in
truth as a postulate of rationality rather than as a metaphysical principle.

7.4 Page 64

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 26
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Primary texts
Where pertinent, references are to the more recent critical editions (the ‘Husserliana’
series published by the Husserl Archives at Louvain) rather than to the original German
editions.
1.1 ‘Besprechung: E.Schröder, Vorlesungen über die Algebra der Logik, I’, Göttingische
gelehrte Anzeigen (1891):243–78.
1.2 ‘Die Folgerungskalkül und die Inhaltslogik’, Vierteljahrsschrift für wissenschaftliche
Philosophie, 15 (1891):168–89, 351–6.
1.3 ‘Psychologische Studien zur elementaren Logik’, Philosophische Monatshefte, 30
(1894):159–91.
1.4 Die Idee der Phänomenologie, ed. W.Biemel (Husserliana II), The Hague: Nijhoff,
1950.
1.5 Ideen zu einer reinen Phänomenologie und phänomenologischen Philosophie, Buch
II, ed. M.Biemel (Husserliana IV), The Hague: Nijhoff, 1952.
1.6 Ideen zu einer reinen Phänomenologie und phänomenologischen Philosophie, Buch
III, ed. M.Biemel (Husserliana V), The Hague: Nijhoff, 1952.
1.7 Erfahrung und Urteil, ed. L.Landgrebe, Hamburg: Claassen, 1954.
1.8 Die Krisis der europäischen Wissenschaften und die transzendentale
Phänomenologie, ed. W.Biemel (Husserliana VI), The Hague: Nijhoff, 1954.
1.9 Erste Philosophie, Band I, Kritische Ideengeschichte, ed. R.Boehm (Husserliana VII),
The Hague: Nijhoff, 1956.
1.10 Cartesianische Meditationen, ed. S.Strasser (Husserliana I), The Hague: Nijhoff,
1959.
1.11 Erste Philosophie, Band II, ed. R.Boehm (Husserliana VIII), The Hague: Nijhoff,
1959.
1.12 Phänomenologische Psychologie, ed. W.Biemel (Husserliana IX), The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1962.
1.13 Cartesianische Meditationen, 2nd edn. S.Strasser (Husserliana I), The Hague,
Nijhoff, 1963.
1.14 Analysen zur passiven Synthesis: Aus Vorlesungs und Forschungsmanuskripten
(1918–1926), ed. M.Fleischer (Husserliana XI), The Hague: Nijhoff, 1966.
1.15 Phänomenologische Psychologie: Vorlesungen Sommersemester 1925, ed. W.
Biemel (Husserliana IX), The Hague: Nijhoff, 1968.
1.16 Philosophie der Arithmetik, 2nd edn, ed. L.Eley (Husserliana XII), The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1970.
1.17 Erfahrung und Urteil: Untersuchungen zur Genealogie der Logik, ed. L. Landgrebe,
Hamburg: Felix Meiner, 1972.
1.18 Die Idee der Phänomenologie: Fünf Vorlesungen, ed. U.Melle (Husserliana II), The
Hague: Nijhoff, 1973.
1.19 Ding und Raum: Vorlesungen 1907, ed. U.Claesges (Husserliana XVI), The Hague:

7.5 Page 65

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 27
Nijhoff, 1973.
1.20 Formale und transzendentale Logik, ed. P.Janssen (Husserliana XVII), The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1974.
1.21 Logische Untersuchungen, Band I, ed. E.Hollenstein (Husserliana XVIII), The
Hague: Nijhoff, 1975.
1.22 Ideen zu einer reinen Phänomenologie und phänomenologischen Philosophie, Buch
I, ed. K.Schumann (Husserliana III/1 and III/2), The Hague: Nijhoff, 1976.
1.23 Aufsätze und Rezensionen (1890–1910), ed. B.Rang (Husserliana XXII), The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1979.
1.24 Studien zur Arithmetik und Geometrie: Texte aus dem Nachlass (1886–1901), ed.
I.Strohmeyer (Husserliana XXI), The Hague: Nijhoff, 1983.
1.25 Einleitung in der Logik und Erkenntnistheorie: Vorlesungen 1906–7, ed. U. Melle
(Husserliana XIV), Dordrecht: Nijhoff, 1984.
1.26 Logische Untersuchungen, Band II, ed. U.Panzer (Husserliana XIX/1), The Hague :
Nijhoff, 1984.
1.27 Logische Untersuchungen, Band III, ed. U.Panzer (Husserliana XIX/2), The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1984.
1.28 ‘Philosophie als strenge Wissenschaft, in Aufsätze und Vorträge (1911–21)’, ed.
T.Nenon and H.R.Sepp (Husserliana XXV), Dordrecht: Nijhoff, 1987.
Translations
1.29 On the Phenomenology of the Consciousness of Internal Time (1893–1917), trans.
J.B.Brough, Holland: Dordrecht Kluwer, 1990.
1.30 ‘Philosophy as a Rigorous Science’, trans. Q.Lauer, in Phenomenology and the
Crisis of Philosophy, New York: Harper & Row, 1965, pp. 71–147.
1.31 Formal and Transcendental Logic, trans. D.Cairns, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1969.
1.32 Cartesian Meditations, trans. D.Cairns, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1970.
1.33 The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology, trans. D.Carr,
Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1970.
1.34 The Idea of Phenomenology, trans. W.Alston and G.Nakhnikian, The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1970.
1.35 Logical Investigations, 2 volumes, rev. edn, trans. J.N.Findlay, London: Routledge
& Kegan Paul, 1970.
1.36 Experience and Judgment, trans. J.Churchill and K.Americks, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1970.
1.37 ‘A Review of Volume I of Ernst Schröder’s Vorlesungen über die Algebra der
Logik’, trans. D.Willard, The Personalist, 59 (1978):115–43.
1.38 ‘The Deductive Calculus and the Logic of Contents’, trans. D.Willard, The
Personalist, 60 (1979):7–25.
1.39 Ideas Pertaining to a Pure Phenomenology and to a Phenomenological Philosophy,
Book III, trans. T.Klein and W.Pohl, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1980.
1.40 ‘Psychological Studies for Elementary Logic’, in P.McCormick and F.Elliston (eds),
Husserl: Shorter Works, South Bend: Notre Dame University Press, 1981, pp. 126–42.
1.41 Ideas Pertaining to a Pure Phenomenology and to a Phenomenological Philosophy,

7.6 Page 66

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 28
Book I, trans. F.Kersten, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1983.
Other works and criticism
1.42 Aristotle, Aristotelis Opera, ed. I.Bekker, Berlin: Reimer, 1860–70.
1.43 Bell, D. Husserl, London and New York: Routledge, 1990.
1.44 Boehm, R. ‘Immanenz und Transzendenz’, in Vom Gesichtspunkt der
Phänomenologie: Husserl-Studien, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1968.
1.45 Brentano, F. Psychology from an Empirical Standpoint, trans. A.C.Rancurello,
D.B.Terrell and L.L.McAlister, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1973.
1.46 Brough, J. ‘The Emergence of an Absolute Consciousness in Husserl’s Early
Writings on Time-Consciousness’, Man and World, 5 (1972):298–326.
1.47 Carr, D. Interpreting Husserl: Critical and Comparative Studies, The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1987.
1.48 Cobb-Stevens, R. ‘Logical Analysis and Cognitive Intuition’, Etudes
phénoménologiques, 7 (1988):3–32.
1.49 Cobb-Stevens, R. Husserl and Analytic Philosophy, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1990.
1.50 de Boer, T. The Development of Husserl’s Thought, trans. T.Plantinga, The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1978.
1.51 Derrida, J. Speech and Phenomena, and Other Essays on Husserl’s Theory of Signs,
trans. D.Allison, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1973.
1.52 Derrida, J. Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry: An Introduction, trans. J.Leavey,
Stony Brook: Nicholas Hays, 1978.
1.53 Dreyfus, H. ‘Husserl’s Perceptual Noema’, in H.Dreyfus and H.Hall (eds), Husserl:
Intentionality and Cognitive Science, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1982.
1.54 Drummond, J. Husserlian Intentionality and Non-Foundational Realism: Noema
and Object, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1990.
1.55 Dummett, M.A.E. Frege: Philosophy of Language, London: Duckworth, 1973.
1.56 Dummett, M.A.E. The Interpretation ofFrege’s Philosophy, London: Duckworth,
1981.
1.57 Elliston, F., and McCormick, P. (eds) Husserl: Expositions and Appraisals, South
Bend: Notre Dame University Press, 1977.
1.58 Fink, E. ‘Operative Begriffe in Husserl’s Phänomenologie’, Zeitschrift für
philosophische Forschung, 2 (1957):321–37.
1.59 Fink, E. ‘The Phenomenological Philosophy of Edmund Husserl and Contemporary
Criticism’, in R.O.Elverton (ed.) The Phenomenology of Edmund Husserl: Selected
Critical Readings, Chicago: Quadrangle Books, 1970, pp. 73–147.
1.60 Føllesdal, D. Husserl and Frege, Oslo: Aschehoug Press, 1958.
1.61 Føllesdal, D. ‘Husserl’s Notion of the Noema’, The journal of Philosophy, 66
(1969):680–7.
1.62 Føllesdal, D. ‘Brentano and Husserl on Intentional Objects of Perception’, Grazer
Philosophische Studien, 5 (1978):83–94.
1.63 Frege, G. ‘Rezension von E.Husserl, Philosophie der Arithmetik’, Zeitschrift für
Philosophie und philosophische Kritik, 103 (1894):313–32.
1.64 Frege, G. The Foundations of Arithmetic: A Logico-Mathematical Enquiry into the

7.7 Page 67

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 29
Concept of Number, trans. J.L.Austin, Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1959.
1.65 Frege, G. ‘Review of Dr. E.Husserl’s Philosophy of Arithmetic’, trans. E.W.Kluge,
in J.N.Mohanty (ed.) Readings on Husserl’s Logical Investigations, The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1977.
1.66 Frege, G. Posthumous Writings, trans. P.Lang and R.White, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1979.
1.67 Frege, G. Collected Papers on Mathematics, Logic, and Philosophy, ed. B.
McGuinness, trans. M.Black et al., Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1984.
1.68 Gadamer, H.G. ‘The Science of the Life-World’, in Philosophical Hermeneutics,
trans. D.Linge, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972.
1.69 Hall, H. ‘Was Husserl a Realist or an Idealist?’, in H.L.Dreyfus (ed.) Husserl,
Intentionality and Cognitive Science, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1984.
1.70 Heelan, P. ‘Natural Science and Being-in-the-World’, Man and World, 16
(1983):207–19.
1.71 Heelan, P. Space-Perception and the Philosophy of Science, Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1983.
1.72 Herbart, J.F. Sammtliche Werke, Leipzig: Leopold Voss, 1850.
1.73 Hintikka, J. The Intentions of Intentionality and Other New Models for Modalities,
Dordrecht: Reidel, 1975.
1.74 Holmes, R. ‘An Explication of Husserl’s Theory of the Noema’, Research in
Phenomenology, 5 (1975):143–53.
1.75 Langsdorf, L. ‘The Noema as Intentional Entity: A Critique of Føllesdal’, Review of
Metaphysics, 37 (1984):757–84.
1.76 Levinas, E. The Theory of Intuition in Husserl’s Phenomenology, trans. A. Orianne,
Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1973.
1.77 Lotze, H. Logic, trans. B.Bosanquet, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1888.
1.78 Lotze, H. Metaphysik, Leipzig: Hirzel, 1897.
1.79 McKenna, W. ‘The “Inadequacy” of Perceptual Experience’, Journal of the British
Society for Phenomenology, 12 (1981):125–39.
1.80 Mill, J.S. A System of Logic, London: Longmans, Green, 1843.
1.81 Miller, J.P. Numbers in Presence and Absence: A Study of Husserl’s Philosophy of
Mathematics, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1982.
1.82 Mohanty, J.N. ‘On Husserl’s Theory of Meaning’, The Southwestern Journal of
Philosophy, 5 (1974):240.
1.83 Mohanty, J.N. ‘Husserl’s Theory of Meaning’, in F.Elliston and P.McCormick (eds)
Husserl: Expositions and Appraisals, South Bend: Notre Dame University Press, 1977,
pp. 18–37.
1.84 Mohanty, J.N. Readings on E.Husserl’s Logical Investigations, The Hague: Nijhoff,
1977.
1.85 Mohanty, J.N. ‘Intentionality and the Noema’, The Journal of Philosophy, 78
(1981):706–17.
1.86 Mohanty, J.N. Frege and Husserl, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1982.
1.87 Mohanty, J.N. Transcendental Phenomenology, Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1989.
1.88 Natanson, M. Edmund Husserl: Philosopher of Infinite Tasks, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1966.

7.8 Page 68

▲back to top
The beginnings of phenomenology 30
1.89 Ricoeur, P. Husserl: An Analysis of his Phenomenology, trans. G.Ballard and
L.Embree: Evanston, Northwestern University Press, 1967.
1.90 Rosen, S. ‘Thought and Touch: A Note on Aristotle’s De Anima’, Phronesis, 6
(1961):127–37.
1.91 Rosen, S. The Limits of Analysis, New York: Basic Books, 1984.
1.92 Schröder, E. Vorlesungen über die Algebra der Logik, Leipzig: Teubner, 1890.
1.93 Schutz, A. ‘Type and Eidos in Husserl’s Late Philosophy’, Philosophy and
Phenomenological Research, 20 (1959):154.
1.94 Smith, D.W. and McIntyre, R. ‘Intentionality via Intensions’, Journal of Philosophy,
68 (1971):541–61.
1.95 Smith, D.W. and McIntyre, R. Husserl and Intentionality: A Study of Mind, Meaning
and Language, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1983.
1.96 Smith, Q. ‘On Husserl’s Theory of Consciousness in the Fifth Logical
Investigation’, Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, 37 (1977):356–67.
1.97 Sokolowski, R. ‘The Logic of Parts and Wholes in Husserl’s Investigations’,
Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, 38 (1968):537–53.
1.98 Sokolowski, R. The Formation of Husserl’s Concept of Constitution, The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1970.
1.99 Sokolowski, R. ‘The Structure and Content of Husserl’s Logical Investigations’,
Inquiry, 14 (1971):318–47.
1.100 Sokolowski, R. Husserlian Meditations: How Words Present Things, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1974.
1.101 Sokolowski, R. Presence and Absence: A Philosophical Investigation of Language
and Being, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1978.
1.102 Sokolowski, R. ‘Husserl’s Concept of Categorial Intuition’, Phenomenology and
the Human Sciences (formerly Philosophical Topics), 12 (1981): 127–41.
1.103 Sokolowski, R. ‘Intentional Analysis and the Noema’, Dialectica, 38 (1984): 113–
29.
1.104 Sokolowski, R. ‘Quotation’, Review of Metaphysics, 37 (1984):699–723.
1.105 Sokolowski, R. ‘Exorcising Concepts’, Review of Metaphysics, 60 (1987): 451–63.
1.106 Sokolowski, R. ‘Husserl and Frege’, The Journal of Philosophy, 84 (1987): 521–8.
1.107 Sokolowski, R. ‘Natural and Artificial Intelligence’, Daedalus, 142 (1988): 45–64.
1.108 Sokolowski, R. ‘Referring’, Review of Metaphysics, 42 (1988):27–49.
1.109 Spiegelberg, H. The Phenomenological Movement: A Historical Introduction, 2
vols, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1971.
1.110 Ströker, E. ‘Husserl’s Principle of Evidence’, in The Husserlian Foundations of
Science, Washington, DC: University Press of America, 1987.
1.111 Ströker, E. Husserls transzendentale Phänomenologie, Frankfurt am Main: Vittorio
Klostermann, 1987.
1.112 Stumpf, K. Über den psychologischen Ursprung der Raumvorstellung, Leipzig:
Hirzel, 1873.
1.113 Taminiaux, J. Le Regard et l’excédent, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1977.
1.114 Taminiaux, J. ‘Heidegger and Husserl’s Logical Investigations: In Remembrance
of Heidegger’s Last Seminar (Zähringen, 1973)’, in Dialectic and Difference: Finitude
in Modern Thought, trans. R.Crease and J. Decker, Atlantic Highlands: Humanities

7.9 Page 69

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 31
Press, 1985, pp. 91–114.
1.115 Taminiaux, J. ‘Immanence, Transcendence, and Being in Husserl’s Idea of
Phenomenology, in J.Sallis, G.Moneta and J.Taminiaux (eds), The Collegium
Phaenomenologicum: the First Ten Years, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1989, pp. 47–75.
1.116 Taminiaux, J. Heidegger and the Project of Fundamental Ontology, trans M.
Gendre, Albany: SUNY Press, 1991.
1.117 Tragesser, R. Husserl and Realism in Logic and Mathematics, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1984.
1.118 Welton, D. The Origins of Meaning: A Criticial Study of the Thresholds of
Husserlian Phenomenology, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1983.
1.119 Willard, D. ‘The Paradox of Logical Psychologism: Husserl’s Way Out’, American
Philosophical Quarterly, (1972):94–100.
1.120 Willard, D. ‘Concerning Husserl’s View of Number’, The Southwestern Journal of
Philosophy, 5 (1974):97–109.
1.121 Willard, D. ‘Husserl’s Critique of Extensionalist Logic: A Logic that Does not
Understand Itself, Idealistic Studies, 9 (1979):143–64.
1.122 Willard, D. Logic and the Objectivity of Knowledge, Athens: Ohio University
Press, 1984.

7.10 Page 70

▲back to top
CHAPTER 2
Philosophy of existence 1
Heidegger
Jacques Taminiaux
At the very outset and up to the end, the long philosophical journey of Martin Heidegger
(1889–1976) remained oriented by a single question, the question of Being, the
Seinsfrage. This does not mean, however, that the question preserved the same meaning
or ruled an identical field of investigation throughout the whole journey. Indeed,
Heidegger himself repeatedly claimed that at some point a turn (Kehre) occurred in his
thought. Moreover, thanks to the current publication of his entire corpus
(Gesamtausgabe), it is now possible to draw a fair picture of the vicissitudes of the
journey. For the purpose of this chapter, I propose to divide Heidegger’s work into two
phases. The first covers publications and lecture courses devoted to setting out the project
of what Heidegger, at that time, called ‘fundamental ontology’. The later phase covers
writings which are all characterized by a meditation on the history of Being. Whereas the
project of fundamental ontology aimed at completing metaphysics as the science of
Being, the later meditation consistently aimed at overcoming metaphysics.
FUNDAMENTAL ONTOLOGY
After a few years of study in theology the young Heidegger, who first wanted to become
a Catholic priest, had decided for reasons both personal and theoretical to dedicate his life
to philosophy.
At the turn of the century, the burning area for philosophical research in Germany was
logic. Two major trends were in conflict as far as the approach to the basic problems of
epistemology and the philosophy of science is concerned. On the one hand under the
influence of British empiricism, John Stuart Mill predominantly, many German scholars
in those fields were convinced that the foundations of knowledge in general were strictly
empirical. Accordingly they were looking for the roots of all cognitive principles in
observable facts such as those which are investigated by psychology taken as an
empirical science. On the other hand, in a reaction against empiricism, several scholars
were attempting to revive in the disciplines at stake the transcendental orientation of
Kant’s criticism. In the history of ideas this conflict is known as the quarrel about
psychologism between empiricism and transcendentalism. Whereas the former claims that
thinking and knowing are a matter of facts occuring in the mind, the latter claims that
thought and knowledge, however much they may depend on facts, could not exist without
the help of a transcendental cogito. In 1900–1 a book appeared which had a decisive

8 Pages 71-80

▲back to top

8.1 Page 71

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 33
influence in the quarrel: Edmund Husserl’s Logical Investigations. Like neo-Kantianism,
the book was a refutation of all empiricist reductionism. But unlike neo-Kantianism it
vindicated a new and original method which was altogether intuitive and a priori:
phenomenology.
Heidegger’s early writings were contributions to the new phenomenological trend. His
doctoral dissertation (1914) was entitled The Doctrine of Judgment in Psychologism. His
Habilitationsschrift (1916), The Theory of Categories and Meaning in Duns Scotus was
inspired by Husserl’s idea of a pure a priori grammar. Heidegger’s genuine project
emerged after these academic exercises, when he came to realize that he was less
interested in logic for its own sake than in the link between logic and ontology or even in
the ontological foundation of the logical. Indeed he repeatedly claimed that the influence
on him of the Logical Investigations was at that time on a footing with the impact of a
book by one of Husserl’s masters, Brentano’s dissertation On the Manifold Meaning of
Being in Aristotle (1862). Brentano showed that in Aristotle the Being of beings is
expressed in at least four basic ways: as substance (ousia), as potentiality (dunamis) and
actuality (energeia), as truth (alētheia), according to the categories such as quality,
quantity, relation and so on. While meditating upon this manifoldness in the meanings of
Being, Heidegger raised the following question: is there a unique focus of intelligibility
which illuminates these various meanings, a common source for understanding them, and
how and where is it to be found? Such is the Seinsfrage, the question of Being.
The reappropriation of Husserl and Aristotle
On the basis of his early dissertations, Heidegger was already convinced that the
phenomenological method was to be his way to address the question. When he became
Husserl’s personal assistant at the University of Freiburg-im-Breisgau, thereby gaining
the opportunity to become familiar with all aspects of phenomenological research, he
came to realize that the work of his master provided him not only with a method but also
with basic discoveries thanks to which he was able to transform his ontological question
into a genuine field of investigation. On the basis of the posthumous publication of
several drafts and lecture courses, it is now possible to draw a fair picture of Heidegger’s
early attempts to articulate his own field of ontological investigations thanks to a peculiar
retrieval or reappropriation of both Aristotle and Husserl. It could even be demonstrated
that Heidegger’s project of fundamental ontology is the outcome of an overlapping of
what he considered to be the basic discoveries of Husserl with what he took to be the
basic discoveries of Aristotle. This means that, with the help of Husserl’s teaching,
Heidegger was able to find in Aristotle’s teaching an authentic phenomenology while,
with the help of Aristotle’s teaching, he discovered the possibility of transforming
phenomenology into a field of ontological investigation. This ontological overlapping of
Aristotle and Husserl is already noticeable in the short manuscript Phenomenological
Interpretations of Aristotle [2.27] that Heidegger wrote in the autumn of 1922 at the
request of P.Natorp in order to support his application for a teaching position at the
University of Marburg. The overlapping pervades the teaching of Heidegger from the
time of his appointment at Marburg until the publication of Being and Time.
Heidegger credited Husserl with three basic discoveries useful for articulating his own

8.2 Page 72

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 34
field of investigation. The first discovery is intentionality. According to Husserl,
intentionality is the very structure of consciousness in all its modes (perception,
imagination, conceptualization, judgment, reasoning and so on). In every form of
consciousness there is a specific relatedness between a specific way of intending and a
specific correlate which has its way of appearing qua intended. Already in the 1922
manuscript, Heidegger makes clear that for him this structural relatedness is much more
than a basic feature of consciousness. It is the fundamental character of the very life of
each human being. De facto, or factically, the life of an existing human being is
essentially related. In Heidegger’s language of that time, this means that such relatedness
is an ontological character of ‘factical life’. This is why he writes:
the complete intentionality (the relatedness to, that towards which there is a
relation, the accomplishment of the self-relating, the temporalism of it, the
preservation of temporalisation) is nothing but the intentionality of the object
which has the ontological character of factical life. Intentionality, merely taken
as relatedness to, is the first phenomenal character, proximally noticeable of the
fundamental mobility of life, that is of care. ([2.27], 17)
Whereas Husserl’s discovery of intentionality was confined within the limits of a theory
of consciousness, i.e., within the framework of a theory of knowledge, Heidegger’s
peculiar retrieval of the discovery results very early in another philosophical project
aiming at an ontology of factical life, or of facticity. Along with this alteration, the new
philosophical project entails an alteration in the very notion of logic. In Husserl, logic
was another name for the theory of knowledge, i.e., of the basic categories making
cognition possible. As a result of the shift from consciousness to factical life, logic
becomes a name for the investigation of the ways in which factical life expresses and
understands itself as a result of specific categories.
This second shift is at the core of Heidegger’s reinterpretation of what he viewed as the
second major discovery of Husserl, i.e., the doctrine of categorial intuition. According to
this doctrine, the meaning of human discourse (Rede) depends on a complex set of
structures, forms and basic concepts which are all of an ideal nature. In spite of the fact
that, precisely because they are ideal, these idealities are in a position of excess or surplus
vis-à-vis any sensuous content given to sensible perception, they are none the less, claims
Husserl in the sixth Logical Investigation, offered to an intuition or insight that is no
longer sensible, but ideal: the so-called categorial intuition.
Among the categorial intuitions mentioned by Husserl, one stood out as having a
decisive relevance for the project to which Heidegger had subscribed from the outset: the
problem of the meaning of Being. Indeed in the context of the sixth Logical Investigation
Husserl was developing a twofold thesis about Being. First, he stated, in agreement with
Kant, that ‘Being is not a real predicate’. Second, he maintained, in contradistinction to
Kant, that ‘Being’ is given to categorial intuition. Heidegger took advantage of this
double thesis and transformed it for his own ontological purpose. ‘Being is not a real
predicate’ meant for both Kant and Husserl that it is not to be found among the predicates
which define the quiddity or realitas of beings: what they are. This thesis turned out to
mean for Heidegger that Being is not in any sense a being. In other words the thesis

8.3 Page 73

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 35
amounted to stating a difference between beings and Being, an ontico-ontological
difference. Likewise, the thesis according to which ‘Being’ is given to a categorial
intuition, which in Husserl was an element of his transcendental logic, turned out to mean
for Heidegger that in its factical life the human being has an understanding of Being. In
other words, factical life interprets itself in terms of Being. This is to say that the
ontology of those factical beings who understand Being is an hermeneutics, or a theory of
interpretation.
But, by the same token, Husserl’s twofold thesis about Being, thus reappropriated in an
ontological framework, induced Heidegger to search in the de facto life of the human
being for the unique ground for an intelligibility of the various meanings of Being. It
induced him to search for the focus of intelligibility within what he was to call, a little
later, the human Dasein.
In this search, Heidegger availed himself of a third discovery made by Husserl: the
discovery of the a priori, a word with an obvious temporal connotation. Husserl often
claimed that time consciousness was the most fundamental consideration of his
phenomenology. In order for consciousness to be intentional at all, it has to be temporal.
This means for Husserl that in order to be able to intend any intentional correlate,
consciousness has to be a ‘living present’, a present which constantly articulates the
‘retention’ of what is just past with the anticipation (or ‘protention’) of what is going to
happen. Heidegger, who was to edit in 1928 Husserl’s The Phenomenology of Internal
Time-consciousness, took advantage of this third discovery. His ontology of human
Dasein aims at demonstrating that temporality is the only horizon within which we
understand the meanings of Being. This is condensed in the very title of his masterwork
of 1927, Being and Time [2.2, 2.45], a book in which the three Husserlian discoveries
operate in a peculiar way along with an Aristotelian inspiration. The link between this
inspiration and Husserl’s legacy is already noticeable in the fact that Heidegger, in his
Introduction, characterizes the phenomenological method at work in the book by using
the very language of Aristotle.
What Heidegger discovered very early, as he puts it in a later survey of his ‘way to
phenomenology’ is that ‘what occurs for the phenomenology of the acts of consciousness
is thought more originally by Aristotle and in all Greek thinking and existence as
alētheia’ (On Time and Being [2.70], 78). In its traditional definition, truth is an
adequation between the mind and the real, and it occurs in a specific place: the
predicative judgment. In one way, Husserl’s phenomenology contributed to overcoming
the classical notion of truth. For Husserl indeed, prior to the so-called adequatio
intellectus ad rem (of the mind to the thing), the touchstone of truth is evidence, i.e., the
self-manifestation of the object qua phenomenon to intentionality. Moreover, Husserl
claimed that the locus of truth is in no way restricted to the predicative judgment: it is
intentionality itself, or consciousness in all its forms. Heidegger took advantage of this
breakthrough in his phenomenological interpretation of Aristotle. As far as truth is
concerned, the Greek philosopher, he claims, is more original than Husserl on two
accounts: first because he understands truth as the unconceal-ment of beings for an
unconcealing being, the human being; second because this unconcealing, instead of being
restricted to consciousness, is attributed by him to the human comportment as such, more
precisely to the human way of being. In other words, for Aristotle, claims Heidegger,

8.4 Page 74

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 36
alētheia, or truth, is a matter of bios, of life or of existence. It is in the context of this
phenomenological reading of Aristotle that Heidegger was led to replace the words
‘factical life’ by the key word Dasein in order to characterize the human way of being. In
German the word is both a verb meaning ‘to be present’, or to exist, and a noun meaning
‘presence’, or existence. Moreover, da the prefix of the word, means both there and then;
it points to a place and time for something to happen. Heidegger’s use of the word to
characterize the human way of being is an attempt to suggest that the concrete existence
of a human being is a phenomenon which is there, thrown into a place and a time in
which an unconcealment happens.
But in addition to a concept of truth in terms of existence, Heidegger also discovered in
Aristotle a concrete analysis of human existence as an unconcealing way of being. The
ontological reappropriation of Husserl’s discovery of intentionality taught him that
human existence as such is a relatedness to. The reappropriation of Husserl’s discovery
of categorial intuition taught him that human existence, in its relatedness to, understands
Being. Likewise, the appropriation of Husserl’s discovery of the a priori taught him that
time is at the core of the understanding of Being. Since those three ontological
reappropriations were oriented by a single question—where is the source for the
understanding of Being to be found?—they all required an analysis of Dasein as the
being who understands Being. In other words they required an analysis of Dasein’s way
of being, i.e., for an ontology of Dasein. And here Heidegger discovered very early that
Aristotle’s description of human comportment paved the way to the ontology of Dasein
that he was attempting to articulate. His lecture courses of the Marburg period
demonstrate that, in his view, the Nicomachean Ethics was such an ontology. It is in such
terms that Heidegger deals with Aristotle’s Ethics in the introduction to his celebrated
lecture course of 1924–5 on Plato’s Sophist [2.29], which had a deep influence on those
who originally heard it, including Hannah Arendt, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Hans Jonas.
The Nicomachean Ethics scrutinizes the dianoetic excellences or intellectual virtues
and establishes them in a hierarchy. According to Aristotle these virtues have two levels:
the lower are the deliberative excellences, the higher are the epistemic excellences. At the
lower level two deliberative virtues take place: technē and phronēsis. In Greek technē
means art, in the sense of knowhow. Heidegger insists that in Aristotle technē is an
intellectual excellence because it is a matter of truth, of alētheia as unconcealment. It is a
peculiar way of disclosing, or discovering, what is required for a specific comportment:
the productive comportment called poiēsis. In other words, it is a way of knowing truth,
or even of being in truth, linked with a peculiar way of being: the production of such and
such a work or result. However, claims Heidegger, the reason why Aristotle puts technē
on the lowest rank among the deliberative excellences is to be understood in terms of an
ontology of Dasein. Indeed, in the productive way of being which is ruled by technē,
Dasein is busy with, and concerned by, products or results out there. To that extent the
pair technē-poiēsis suffers an ontological deficiency. To be sure, the principle for the
productive activity informed by an unconcealing knowhow is within the agent, hence
within the Dasein and of the same nature as Dasein itself: it is the model conceived by
the agent and held in view by him. But the telos or end of productive activity is in no way
within Dasein or of its nature: it occurs outside of Dasein.
This ontological deficiency, claims Heidegger, is no longer the case in the second

8.5 Page 75

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 37
deliberative excellence, namely phronēsis, also conceived by Aristotle as a peculiar way
of disclosing, or of being in truth, adjusted to a specific comportment or active way of
being. This active way of being is no longer poiēsis but praxis, i.e., action in the sense of
the conduct by an individual of his or her own life. Phronēsis discloses to Dasein the
potentiality of its own existence. Here again, according to Heidegger, the reason why
Aristotle puts phronēsis on the highest level among the deliberative excellences is to be
understood in terms of an ontology of Dasein. Indeed neither the principle of phronēsis
nor its goal falls outside the human being. The principle here is a prior option of the
Dasein for well-doing, while the end is the very way of being of Dasein, its own praxis.
Phronēsis is nothing but the resoluteness to exist in the highest possible manner.
Thus understood in ontological terms, Aristotle’s distinction between the technē-
poiēsis and the phronēsis-praxis distinctions allowed Heidegger to set up the framework
of his own ontology of Dasein, as a being who understands Being. This ontology, which
was to be developed in Being and Time, describes the existence of Dasein in terms of a
tension between an everyday way of Being in which the Dasein is not authentically who
it is, and an authentic way of Being in which Dasein is properly itself. The description
shows that in everydayness Dasein cannot be its ownmost Being, because it lives in a
condition of preoccupation or concern for ends to be attained by a variety of means or
tools, a condition which is enlightened by a specific circumspection about surroundings.
To that extent everydayness is ruled by Das Man, the ‘They’. In it everybody is nobody,
because such a condition never confronts Dasein’s own existence. This description is the
outcome of a peculiar reappropriation of Aristotle’s doctrine concerning technē and
poiēsis. On the other hand, the analytic of Dasein shows that Dasein authentically
becomes a Self by confronting its ownmost potentiality for Being. It does so by accepting
existence in its finitude, as a Being-unto-death. This description, with the exception of the
emphasis put on anxiety, is again the result of a peculiar reappropriation of Aristotle’s
analysis of phronēsis and praxis. Aristotle indeed insists that phronēsis, as a dianoetic
virtue, has its proper realm in the perishable. On the other hand, Heidegger occasionally
suggested when he was teaching Aristotle that the latter’s concept of phronēsis somehow
anticipates the notion of conscience (Gewissen). And conscience in Heidegger’s analytic
of Dasein is the phenomenon in which Dasein listens to a call from it own depths
summoning it to confront its finitude.
But the Aristotelian inspiration in Heidegger’s ontology of Dasein is not restricted to
technē and phronēsis. It also includes a peculiar reappropriation of Aristotle’s doctrine of
the epistemic virtues. In the Nicomachean Ethics these virtues are epistēmē (science) and
sophia (wisdom). Both are adjusted to theoria, i.e., to a purely contemplative attitude,
which bears upon a realm which is no longer perishable, a realm which is forever what it
is and how it is. For Aristotle that realm is higher than the realm of human affairs
precisely because it is not perishable as they are. And in his view it is at this level only,
specifically at the level of sophia, that a true concern with Being can take place, as a
contemplation of the ontological structure of the totality of beings and of the prime mover
which is the principle for all movements of physis (nature). Heidegger insists, in his
Marburg lectures, that, according to Aristotle, the contemplation of that immutable realm
is the most authentic way of being that a mortal can attain, because as long as such
contemplation lasts, the mortal spectator lives in the proximity of the divine.

8.6 Page 76

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 38
According to Heidegger’s teaching in the Marburg period, there is in the Aristotelian
concept of sophia an equivocation between ontology as the science of the Being of beings
and theology as the science of the divine. There is also an indeterminacy, because for
Aristotle the only meaning of Being is limited to what he calls ousia, i.e., in Heidegger’s
interpretation, presence in the sense of presence-at-hand (Vorhandenheit). This meaning
of Being, Heidegger says, is adjusted to nature, but it is not relevant as far as the Being of
Dasein is concerned. Moreover, considering presence as the only meaning of Being
amounts to understanding Being in the light of a temporality in which only the present is
important. This temporality, considered as a succession of present moments, is in fact the
concept of time that Aristotle develops in his Physics. Heidegger raised objections to the
predominance of this concept. In the case of the Being of Dasein, putting the emphasis
only on the present is one-sided and misleading. In order for Dasein to be authentically
present, it has to retrieve who it was as thrown in its own Being as well as to anticipate its
own end. Whereas the temporality of nature is ruled by the exclusive privilege of the
present, the temporality of Dasein not only is determined by a triad, in which three ec-
stasis—past, present, and future—co-operate, but also is ruled by the privilege of the
future.
Accordingly, Heidegger, who agrees with Aristotle in considering the contemplation
(theoria) of Being as the authentic accomplishment of Dasein, reorients that
contemplation exclusively towards the finite being of Dasein and its finite temporality.
As a result, fundamental ontology claims to be able to overcome both the onto-
theological equivocation and the ontological indeterminacy which characterized the
ancient ontology and its legacy. The overcoming includes a deconstruction (Destruktion)
of the ancient concepts along with a reversal of the old hierarchy between the perishable
and the immutable. This deconstruction aims at demonstrating that for the most part the
basic concepts of ancient philosophy and consequently of the entire western tradition of
metaphysics—concepts such as matter (hulē) and form (morphē), potentiality (dunamis)
and actuality (energeia), idea (eidos), substance (hupokeimenon), and so on—find their
phenomenal origin in the activity of production, an activity which in order to be possible
at all presupposes the permanence of nature, and liberates its products from their link to
the producer to bestow on them a permanence similar to the natural one. Consequently
these ontological concepts, instead of being coined after the authentic ontological
experience that Dasein has of its own Being, were coined in the inauthentic framework of
everydayness. In such a framework Dasein, while coping with entities which are ready-
to-hand, pays attention to a meaning of Being—presence-at-hand (Vorhandenheit)—
which is not adjusted to finite existence as its own way of Being. In other words, the
genealogy carried out by deconstruction aims at showing that Greek ontology, in its
concern for the eternal features of nature, was mistaken in believing that the
contemplation of those features allowed the philosopher to go beyond the finitude and
reach the proximity of the divine. Quite the contrary; it remained trapped within
everydayness. Here appears the reversal: the so-called overcoming of finitude was a
falling away from it. The falling away from the authentic towards the inauthentic explains
the predominance of the notion of presence-at-hand in traditional ontology.
As a result of this reversal, the notion of transcendence, which traditionally defined the
position of the divine above the lower realm of immanence, was transformed by

8.7 Page 77

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 39
Heidegger to designate the process through which the Dasein goes beyond beings
towards Being: only the Dasein properly transcends, and it transcends beings towards
Being.
The articulation of the project
Heidegger’s project, inspired by a singular appropriation of Husserl and Aristotle, of
fundamental ontology, designed as a reply to the question of the meaning of Being,
included two tasks which provide the structure of Being and Time [2.2; 2.45].
The first part of the treatise was supposed to be devoted to ‘the interpretation of Dasein
in terms of temporality, and the explication of time as the transcendental horizon for the
question of Being’ (pp. 39; 63). The book, which came out in 1927, announced three
divisions of Part One: (1) ‘the preparatory fundamental analysis of Dasein’; (2) ‘Dasein
and temporality’ (Zeitlichkeit); (3) ‘time and Being’ (pp. 39; 64). The third division never
appeared.
Part Two of the treatise was supposed to deal with the ‘basic features of a
phenomenological destruction of the history of ontology, with the problematic of
Temporality [Temporalität] as our clue’ (pp. 39; 63). This part, which also never
appeared, was designed to have three divisions: the first one dealing with Kant’s doctrine
of schematism, the second with the ontological foundation of Descartes’ cogito sum, the
third with Aristotle’s essay on time.
The published portion of Part One (which made Heidegger instantly famous)
proceeded in two steps, corresponding to divisions one and two. If Part One starts with an
analysis of Dasein, it is because the leading question of the meaning of Being rebounds
as it were on the one who poses it. Indeed Dasein is the only being for whom Being is a
question or an issue. If such analysis has to be fundamental, it is because, instead of
restricting itself to the teachings of disciplines such as anthropology, psychology or
biology, it must treat Dasein as a being for whom Being itself is the question, and not
‘what is man?’, ‘what is mind?’ or ‘what is life?’ If such analysis is preparatory,
however, it is because it is carried out not for its own sake but in order to provide an
answer to the question of the meaning of Being.
But even leaving aside the problem of what is prepared by it, the analysis of Dasein is
not governed at all by the traditional question ‘what?’ Instead of addressing the question
‘what is Dasein?’ the analysis has to address the question ‘who is Dasein?’ Indeed the
question ‘what?’ is not adjusted to Dasein for the reason that, in its de facto existence,
Dasein is such that its very essence lies in its ‘to be’ (Zusein), or in its ‘existence’, a word
which indicates an openness to a task, a possibility, and which is allotted by Heidegger
solely to Dasein in order to avoid any confusion with the traditional use of existentia as
equally valid for designating the Being of any entity whatsoever. In Heidegger’s
terminology the meaning of the word existentia, in its traditional use, is ‘presence-at-
hand’, and is appropriate only to entities which are precisely not of Dasein’s character.
Dasein is thus the only entity in which existence has a priority over essence. Moreover if
the question ‘what?’ has to be replaced by the question ‘who?’, it is because there is no
Dasein in general, because an individual Dasein is not a special instance of some genus.
Dasein as an entity for which Being is an issue in its very Being, is ‘in each case

8.8 Page 78

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 40
mine’ (pp. 42; 67–8). As an entity which is its own possibility or existence and which is
in each case mine, Dasein, in its very Being, can win or lose itself. ‘Mineness’ grounds
either authenticity or inauthenticity. The German words, Eigentlichkeit and
Uneigentlichkeit, have no moral connotation. Eigentlichkeit designates a condition in
which someone is its own Being; Uneigentlichkeit refers to a condition in which someone
is not properly its own Being.
As a result of the priority of existence over essence, the fundamental analysis of
Dasein has to treat it from the existentiality of its existence. The access to the basic
characters of that existentiality is given in the condition in which Dasein is ‘proximally
and for the most part’—everydayness. These basic characters of existentiality are called
existentialia.
Because mineness grounds either authenticity or inauthenticity, all existentialia have an
authentic and inauthentic modality. They all have a transcendental status, which means
that they are a priori conditions of possibility for Dasein’s existence. They are factors or
items of a constitutive state of Dasein that Heidegger calls ‘being-in-the-world’.
Being-in-the-world is the primordial phenomenon which has to be analysed in order to
uncover the existentialia. Though the phenomenon is unitary, it is possible to look at it in
three ways, by putting the emphasis on the ‘world’ as such, or on the ‘being-in’ as such,
or on the one ‘who’ is in the world.
The world is neither the total amount of entities composing what is usually called the
universe nor a framework for those entities. It is neither a global container nor an addition
of contents. It is not nature. In order for nature to appear, a world is presupposed. The
world must be understood a priori in terms of existentiality. Properly speaking, only
Dasein is in the world, and there would be no world without Dasein intimately open to it.
And since Dasein is not present-at-hand but existing, the world is not a global presence-
at-hand that constantly encircles Dasein. Because Dasein’s existence is its own ‘can be’
or possibility, the world which is at issue in the phrase ‘being-in-the-world’ must be
described in terms of possibility, but a possibility which is already given. It is an
existentiale.
If we take as clue our everyday way of Being, we must admit that our comportment is
characterized as a concern with an environment. Within that concern we do not merely
observe things present-at-hand. Instead we are constantly busy dealing with entities of a
pragmatic nature endowed with a pragmatic meaning that we understand. Each of these
entities is essentially ‘something in-order-to’, it is an instrument adjusted to this or that
purpose. None of those entities is isolated. They are all interrelated, and in order for them
to appear as ‘in-order-to’, they all presuppose as backdrop a context of involvement, with
which we are familar. Such involvement is that ‘wherein’ we understand our ways and
that ‘for which’ we let entities be encountered and used. But the involvement
presupposed by our everyday concern itself refers to a deeper a priori which is the very
relatedness of Dasein to its own potentiality for Being. This ultimate ‘for the sake of
which’ is not a possibility within the world, it is the world itself as Dasein’s own
potentiality. World is another name for Being as that for the sake of which Dasein is
transcending.
Similarly ‘Being-in’ has to be understood in terms of existentiality. And since
existence as such is a disclosing process, the ‘Being-in’ is better captured as a lighting or

8.9 Page 79

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 41
as an openness than as an insertion. Three existentialia constitute the ‘Being-in’:
disposition, comprehension and discourse.
Disposition (Befindlichkeit) is the state in which Dasein finds itself. That Dasein
essentially finds itself in some state is revealed by the moods or humours making
manifest how one is. In terms of existentiality, moods reveal that Dasein has been
delivered over to the Being is has to be. Heidegger calls ‘thrownness’ the facticity of
being delivered over to Being. Hence disposition discloses Dasein in its thrownness.
Comprehension (Verstehen) is also to be conceived in terms of existentiality. In order
to comprehend or understand the significance of the utensils it deals with in
everydayness, Dasein has to project itself upon this or that possibility. In any act of
understanding, there is some projection. But the de facto projections pervading Dasein’s
ordinary comportment have their ontological foundation in Dasein’s projection upon its
own ‘can be’. As an existentiale, comprehension discloses Dasein itself in its own
potentiality-for-Being.
‘Discourse is existentially equiprimordial with disposition and comprehension’ (161).
The German word for discourse is Rede, which is Heidegger’s translation of the Greek
logos. In terms of existentiality, discourse is the disclosing articulation of the
intelligibility of Being-in-the-world.
The reply to the question ‘“who” is in the world?’ shows that Dasein in its everyday
mode of Being is not properly a Self. Most of the time it loses itself in what it is busy
with. In other words it understands itself in terms of what is ready-to-hand within the
world. On the other hand it essentially belongs to Dasein to be with other Daseins. But
here again the everyday mode of Being-with-one-another is such that Dasein is absorbed
in the neutrality of the ‘They’ (das Man), instead of confronting its own Dasein. In both
cases the inauthentic prevails over the authentic. Heidegger calls ‘fallenness’ the
tendency Dasein has to forget its own Self or to move away from it. Fallenness is an
existentiale. As a result of such a tendency, all the existentialia have two modalities: an
authentic and an inauthentic one. For example, discourse in its inauthentic form is idle
talk. Likewise comprehension in its inauthentic form is curiosity.
We can readily see that a temporal connotation is involved in the description of all
these items. Already pre-given as a ‘wherein’, the world is a past. But as constantly
anticipated as a ‘for which’, it is a future as well.
A temporal dimension is also involved in the three interconnected modes of disclosure
which constitute ‘Being-in’. Since disposition discloses the facticity of Dasein’s
thrownness, it reveals that it belongs to existence to have already been. It is also obvious
in the case of comprehension as a project: if Dasein itself is a project, this means that
structurally it throws itself forwards in the direction of a future. Discourse as an
existentiale also shows a temporal dimension. By articulating ‘Being-in-the-world’ it
expresses both the thrownness and the self-projection of Dasein.
Likewise, if the ontological answer to the question ‘who?’ has to be expressed in terms
of a tension between authenticity and inauthenticity, the answer itself either emphasizes a
future or, concerning the rule of the ‘They’ and of the everyday equipment, the
predominance of what is currently the case.
Once Being-in-the-world is analysed in its constitutive items, there must be a synthetic
return to the unitary character of the phenomenon. Heidegger characterizes the

8.10 Page 80

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 42
ontological unity of Dasein’s Being-in-the-world with a single word, Sorge, usually
translated by the word ‘care’. Care is the transcendental structure at the root of all the
existential features mentioned so far. Care, as the ontological unifying structure of
Dasein, is revealed in the fundamental disposition of anxiety, thanks to which Dasein
realizes that it is already thrown in the world, that it has to be its own Being, and that it is
thus thrown and projecting itself in a condition of proximity to inner-worldly beings
whose Being is not its own Being. In the experience of anxiety the three intercon-nected
dimensions of care are disclosed: facticity, possibility, fallenness among other beings.
This is a turning point in the existential analytic: it opens the way to the second
division of Part One: Dasein and temporality.
The phenomenon of care is now manifest in its unity. However, the question remains:
what about its totality? A phenomenon appears as a whole when its limits are made
visible. Hence the problem is: what are the limits of care as the basic structure of
existence? Clearly the limits of existence are birth and death. If we consider both limits as
terms of a process which is not intrinsically determined by them, then we might say that,
as soon as we exist, birth is over and that until we cease to exist, death is not there. But
this view does not fit with Dasein’s mode of Being: a project which is thrown. Precisely
because Dasein’s project is thrown, birth is not a mere moment which is over as soon as
Dasein exists. Dasein cannot be who it is without having been thrown in the world with
the limited possibilities which from the outset condition its Being. Likewise death is not
the other external limit of existence. Existence as a project includes in itself, i.e., in its
potentiality, its own end. This means that Dasein’s death is not restricted to its Being-at-
the-end. It is rather a manner of Being that Dasein takes over as soon as it is. It
thoroughly permeates existence. It makes Dasein’s project essentially finite and turns it
into a Being-towards-the-end.
Because of such finitude, a negative feature, a negativity determines care in relation to
both thrownness and project. What about the third dimension of care, i.e., the proximity
with other beings? Is it also determined by negativity? The answer is ambiguous. It can
be if and only if Dasein resolutely takes over its own mortality. But for the most part,
because the proximity with other beings entails a predominance of pragmatic
preoccupation over care, Dasein covers up its own finitude and thinks of death as a
contingent event occurring to everybody and to nobody. They die, I don’t.
This description allows us to understand how temporality is the ground of the
ontological constitution of Dasein. According to ordinary views and a philosophical
tradition going back to Aristotle, time is an unlimited sequence of moments, including the
moments which once were but no longer are, those which are not yet and the one which is
now. The sequence is considered to be irreversible and measurable. Heidegger claims that
such a concept of time was shaped not on the basis of a phenomenal analysis of Dasein
but on the basis of the experience of nature. Instead, the original concept of time has to be
articulated in conformity with the ontological constitution of Dasein. A clue for the
articulation is provided by the structure of care: Being-ahead-of-itself and already-being-
in-a-world as well as falling and Being-alongside entities within-the-world. This structure
points to the originary time. The ‘Being-ahead-of-itself’ indicates an anticipatory
dimension. Since such anticipation is already there, it includes a retrieval of what and
who the Dasein already is or has been. The anticipation is Dasein’s future. It is the

9 Pages 81-90

▲back to top

9.1 Page 81

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 43
existential future, whereas the retrieval is Dasein’s existential past. Finally, the proximity
with other beings points towards Dasein’s present. Since that proximity is properly finite
if and only if Dasein resolutely takes over its own Being-towards-the-end, the existential
present can only be the instantaneous vision (Augenblick) by Dasein of the situation of its
finite existence. Such vision includes a glimpse of the difference between the mode of
Being called existence and modes of Being such as readiness-to-hand and presence-at-
hand.
Heidegger claims that the foundation of care on the triadic structure of existential time
is not at all a philosophical construct. It is ontically or pre-ontologically revealed to each
one in the phenomenon of conscience (Gewissen), a phenomenon which is not itself
moral in the first place, and demands a description in terms of existentiality. A specific
call belongs to the phenomenon of conscience. The structure of such a call reveals a
temporal foundation. The call is addressed to a fallen Dasein currently captivated by
entities in-the-world. The call comes from Dasein itself in its facticity, a condition in
which Dasein as thrown is in the mode of having been. And the message of the call is
addressed to Dasein again in its ownmost potentiality-for-Being, i.e., in the mode of a
future.
Heidegger insists that ‘the primordial meaning of existentiality is the future’ (324).
However, neither the existential future (anticipation) nor the existential past (retrieval)
nor the existential present (instant of vision) has the traditional character of a discrete
entity. Because the existential future is a coming-to-oneself, it is a dimension and not at
all a not-yet-present moment nor a sequence of not-yet-present moments. In Heidegger’s
language it is an ecstasis. Likewise the existential past and the existential present. The
word ecstasis, which in Greek means ‘standing outside’, is used by Heidegger in order to
emphasize a connotation of stretching towards, or openness to. With this Heidegger
associates the notion of horizon. The horizon is that to which each ecstasis is open in a
specific way. Existential temporality is ecstatico-horizontal. Now, because the ecstases
are interconnected under the primacy of the future, because they belong together
intrinsically, temporality is an ecstatic unity of future, past and present. Such unity has
itself a horizon which is the condition of possibility of the world as existential and of
Dasein’s transcendence.
Because of its existentiality, temporality is essentially finite, instead of being an
infinite sequence wherein existence would take place. It is the very process through
which an intrinsically finite mode of Being opens itself to its own potentiality for Being
and to other modes of Being. For the same reason, it is not enough to say that Dasein’s
existence is temporal. Rather, Dasein temporalizes. Genuine time is temporalization and
even self-temporalization. In its ownmost Being, Dasein exists in such a way that it runs
ahead towards its own end (Vorlaufen), retrieves its own thrownness (Wiederholung), and
renders present its own situation (Gegenwärtigung).
In the light of all this, it turns out that common time, as an infinite sequence, is derived
from existential time. According to the common concept of it, time is a sequence of now-
moments revealing itself in counting, a counting done in reference to a motion (the sun or
the hands of a clock). In fact, Heidegger says, this reckoning of time is guided by and
based upon a reckoning with time: time is already disclosed to us before we use a clock.
The disclosure occurs in our daily comportment. Hence our daily reckoning with time is

9.2 Page 82

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 44
what deserves analysis, if we want to define common time fully. As soon as we approach
common time in these terms, we realize that the ‘now’ we check on the clock every day is
never a naked and discrete entity given as an object at hand (vorhanden). Now is always
‘now that’ I am doing this or that. When I say now, in daily life, I am always expressing
myself as attending to something, as presentifying it. Likewise, when I say ‘at that time’,
I display myself as retaining something bygone, either in the mode of recollecting it or in
the mode of forgetting it. Similarly, when I say ‘then’, I show that I am expecting
something to happen, on its own or by reason of my own deeds. Hence counting time
leads back to a reckoning-with-time articulated according to presentification, retention
and expectation. But this triad presupposes the existential triad mentioned above. While
presupposing the original temporality, however, it also covers it up because of the falling
character of everydayness, in which inner-worldly entities tend to prevail upon the
existential world. As a result of our fallenness, time becomes an infinite sequence,
whereas the original temporality is essentially finite. For the same reason, time becomes
irreversible whereas authentic temporality is an ever-renewed encroachment of the past
upon the future and vice versa. For the same reason, time gets bound to the motion of
things whereas authentic temporality is the ownmost mobility of Dasein.
The entire analysis involves an explicit criticism of Aristotle, whose concept of time is
indeed a free-floating sequence of nows, and an implicit criticism of Husserl’s notion of
time-consciousness which, as an articulation of retentions, living impressions and
protentions, does not go beyond the level of everyday preoccupation.
The deconstructive reappropriation of the history of ontology
As far as Greek philosophy is concerned, there are in fundamental ontology several traces
of a ‘deconstructive’ retrieval of Plato. Heidegger agrees with Plato that human beings
are naturally philosophers although most of the time people do not care about philosophy.
He also agrees with Plato’s characterization of philosophy as a way of Being, a form of
existence: the bios theoretikos. The distinction between the ‘They’ (Das Man) and the
authentic Self owes much to Plato’s demarcation between the multitude (the polloi) and
the philosopher. The description of everydayness in terms of a productive preoccupation
owes much to Plato’s condescending characterization of active life in terms of poiēsis.
The description of everyday language as empty talk is obviously indebted to Plato’s
contempt for doxa (opinion) and sophistry. Above all the Heideggerian hierarchy
between three levels of seeing—the immediate intuition (Anschauung) of entities merely
present-at-hand; the awareness that the mere presence of those entities is an abstraction
deriving from a loss and fall in relation to their readiness-to-hand (Zuhandenheit) open to
a practical circumspection; and finally the awareness, reached in the silence of
conscience, that the everyday surrounding world (Umwelt) is in a position of falling away
from one’s authentic world, a world transparent (durchsichtig) to conscience only—that
hierarchy is obviously an echo to the levels of seeing mentioned by Plato in the parable of
the cave.
As far as medieval thought, with which Heidegger became acquainted during his early
theological studies, is concerned, it is possible to recognize in his analytic of Dasein a
discreet reappropriation of the scholastic concept of analogia entis (analogy of being).

9.3 Page 83

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 45
Just as the medieval theologians determined what they called the degrees of Being in
terms of an analogy between the kinds of beings and the summum ens (highest being), a
divine being whose actuality is devoid of any potentiality and whose essence is identical
with its existence, Heidegger determines analogically an hierarchy of the ways of Being,
in reference to the Dasein. Thus he characterizes the being of the stone as ‘worldless’ and
the being of the animal as ‘poor in world’ on the basis of a unique analogy with Dasein,
whose essence, once it is thrown in its Being, is to exist, or to be in the world.
Likewise the very distinction between an everyday world in which the Dasein feels at
home, and an authentic world in which it is homeless is not without a secularized
reminiscence of Augustine’s notion that the world is an exile, and that the Christians do
not belong to it.
For modern philosophy, fundamental ontology includes a reappropriation and
deconstruction of several major authors, such as Leibniz, Kant and Hegel.
In Leibniz the ‘principle of ground’ (Satz vom Grund), also for-mulated as the
principle of Sufficient Reason which is supposed to provide an ultimate answer to the
question ‘why?’, is based on the nature of truth. For Leibniz truth is to be found primarily
in judgment, and judgment ultimately consists in an identity between subject and
predicate, an identity such that it can be demonstrated that any P is analytically derived
from S. But for Leibniz this analytical concept of truth is not simply a matter of logic. It
has an ontological basis. Ultimately all the logical propositions ‘S is P’ have their
ontological foundation in the monads that harmoniously compose reality, each of them
having in itself the reason or ground for what happens to it. At the time of fundamental
ontology, Heidegger discussed Leibniz in the published essay The Essence of Reasons
(Vom Wesen des Grundes [2.4]), but also in posthumously edited lecture courses such as
The Metaphysical Foundations of Logic [2.34, 2.48]. Though rejecting the traditional
privilege of judgment shared by Leibniz, he agrees with him that the problem of ground
has to be dealt with in terms of the problem of truth. He also agrees that any ontic truth
presupposes an ontological foundation of a monadic nature. But whereas Leibniz inserts
such a foundation into an onto-theological framework, Heidegger attributes it to the
transcending process through which the Dasein, as a Self, overcomes beings towards
Being. That process of transcendence which is the ontico-ontological difference itself is
the foundational coming-to-pass of truth as unconcealment.
Kant’s philosophy was also the topic of a deconstructive appropriation. The major
proof of this is offered by Heidegger’s book Kant and the Problem of Metaphysics [2.3,
2.47]. The book is an attempt to demonstrate that the Critique of Pure Reason, at least in
its first edition, somehow anticipates the project of fundamental ontology in its reply to
the question ‘How are synthetic judgments possible?’ Heidegger insists that according to
Kant the question makes sense only if it stems from a knowing being which is essentially
finite. Kant finds the sign of that finitude in the fundamental receptivity of sensibility.
Sensible receptivity means that we, human beings, can know only beings that we do not
create. However the ontic knowledge of those beings, which for Kant takes place in the
experience of natural entities, requires an a priori synthesis which has, Heidegger claims,
the nature of an ontological knowledge, i.e., of an a priori comprehension of the Being of
those beings. In Kant, that a priori synthesis is the union of pure intuition (the a priori
forms of space and time) with the pure categories of the understanding, a union carried

9.4 Page 84

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 46
out by transcendental imagination through the protection of transcendental schemata
characterized as transcendental determinations of time. By recognizing the decisive role
of time—more precisely of a temporalizing process performed in the depths of the
knowing subject, at the core of a synthetic or ontological knowledge enabling ontic
access to beings as objects—Kant would have anticipated Heidegger’s own attempt to
show that our openness to beings presupposes a comprehension of their Being, i.e., a
transcendence happening in the horizon of temporality. However, in its deconstructive
aspect, this reappropriation of Kant also emphasizes the limitations of his endeavour: (1)
a framework which is the legacy of Christian metaphysics with its distinction between
metaphysica generalis and metaphysica specialis (psychology, cosmology, theology); (2)
a one-sided concept of Being as presence-at-hand, therefore a one-sided concept of time,
as a sequence of present moments, although Kant’s notion of self-affection partially
overcomes this one-sidedness; and (3) also the fact that Kant himself, as evinced by the
second edition of the Critique of Pure Reason, seems to have withdrawn from his own
discovery of finite transcendence in the operation of transcendental imagination.
Heidegger in Being and Time is entirely critical of Hegel, and at several places in the
book he carefully discards any semblance of a proximity between the Hegelian
conceptions and his own position. He claims, for example, that the Hegelian definition of
time merely maintains traditional views leading back to Aristotle’s Physics, and is one-
sidedly focused on presence-at-hand. Moreover, he insists on the abstraction and
formalism of Hegel, compared to the concreteness of his own fundamental ontology. And
against the Hegelian thesis according to which Spirit falls into time, he objects that the
very meaning of a ‘fall’ is left in the dark by Hegel. Instead of claiming that Spirit falls
into time, the meaningful thesis about the fall should be expressed in this way: ‘factical
existence “falls” as falling from primordial, authentic temporality’ ([2.2] 486; [2.45],
435–6). In spite of this apparent discarding of Hegel, readers of Being and Time are
allowed to suspect, in relation to the history of ideas, that Heidegger’s analysis of anxiety
as a crucial experience which is not to be confused with ordinary fear, and the
characterization of Being in terms of ‘no being’ or Nothingness, are not without some
relation to Hegelian topics. One is inclined to suspect that there is indeed some
reappropriation of Hegel in fundamental ontology.
Such a reappropriation comes to the fore in Heidegger’s essay of 1929, What is
Metaphysics? [2.5, 2.50], the text of his inaugural lecture at the University of Freiburg on
the occasion of his accession to the Chair of Philosophy left vacant by the retirement of
Husserl. At the outset of this essay, Heidegger states that he is in accord with Hegel’s
comment that ‘from the point of view of sound common sense, philosophy is the
“inverted world”’ (p. 95). And further on, he reveals a second point of agreement. After a
description of anxiety as a meta-physical experience in which nothingness manifests
itself, he quotes Hegel’s Science of Logic: ‘Pure Being and pure Nothing are therefore the
same’ (Wissenschaft der logik, vol. 1, 111, p. 74). This proposition, Heidegger says, is
correct, ‘Being and nothing do belong together’ (Basic Writings, p. 110). To be sure,
these two points of agreement are rather formal and Heidegger adds that his own
emphasis on the finitude of Being revealing itself in the transcendence of Dasein marks a
fundamental divergence in spite of a formal proximity. But a lecture course of 1930–1
devoted to an interpretation of Hegel’s Phenomenology of Spirit shows that there was

9.5 Page 85

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 47
much more than a formal convergence, and that Heidegger’s fundamental ontology really
crossed the Hegelian path. Focusing on the transition from consciousness to self-
consciousness, the lecture course claims that Hegel’s notion of ‘life’ in the
Phenomenology of Spirit unfolds a concept of Being which is no longer caught in the
traditional notion of presence-at-hand. Moreover, Heidegger in the lecture course
expresses admiration for the Hegelian description of the movement by which absolute
knowledge absolves itself from natural knowledge. That description, he suggests, has to
be considered as a transposition in an absolute framework of the very movement of finite
transcendence.
Finally, fundamental ontology involves a reappropriation of Nietzsche on one point at
least: historicality. In Being and Time ([2.45], section 76), Heidegger attempts to
demonstrate that historiology (Historie) has its existential source in Dasein’s
historicality. Dasein’s Being is essentially historical ‘in so far as by reason of its
ecstatico-horizontal temporality it is open in its character of “having been”’ ([2.45], 445).
In the context of the demonstration, Heidegger insists that ‘Nietzsche recognized what
was essential as to the “use and abuse of historiology for life” in the second of his studies
“out of season” (1874), and said it unequivocally and penetratingly’ ([2.45, 448]). For
both Heidegger and Nietzsche the so-called objectivity of historical sciences, instead of
being primordial, is a falling away from an active movement of uncovering directed
towards the future. For both, that active movement is essentially interpretative or
hermeneutical. For both, it is also circular because it creates an overlapping of the future
and the past.
In other words, Heidegger suggests that by saying that only master builders of the
future who know the present will understand the past, Nietzsche anticipates the
Heideggerian topic of the ‘hermeneutic circle’.
THE HISTORY OF BEING
Paroxysm and interruption of fundamental ontology
The basic principle of the analytic of Dasein, worked out in Being and Time, was: Das
Dasein existiert umwillen seiner (‘Dasein exists for the sake of itself). In the light of this
principle, the project of fundamental ontology intended to demonstrate under the heading
‘Time and Being’ how the various meanings of Being—such as life, actuality, reality,
permanence and so on—had to be understood as deriving from the self-projecting
existence of Dasein. But the principle itself was restricted to the way of Being of
individuals.
That restriction vanished in 1933 when Heidegger decided to support Hitler and
became the first National Socialist rector of the University of Freiburg. The focus of his
Rectoral Address is no longer the individual Dasein but the Dasein of the German
people. As a result of that shift many concepts of Dasein’s analytic undergo a significant
metamorphosis.
The early version of fundamental ontology had reappropriated the Aristotelian praxis
in the direction of Dasein’s solitary insight (theoria) into the finiteness of its own Being,

9.6 Page 86

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 48
therefore in the direction of Dasein’s bios theoretikos. Heidegger in 1933 once again
claims that the intention of the Greeks was to understand theoria, in its relation to Being,
as the highest form of praxis. But he adds that theoria, thus understood as the science of
the Being of beings, is ‘the very medium that determines, in its ownmost Being, the
Dasein of a people and of the State’ (The Self-assertion of the German University (Die
Selbstbehauptung der deutschen Universität) [2.7], 12). Accordingly, no longer the
individual Dasein but the very existence of a people organized in a state seems to become
the authentic location for the unconcealment of beings in their totality and in their Being.
Now the organization of a people is obviously not a matter of pure theoria, but a matter
of technē, of knowhow and of poiēsis. Consequently as a result of the shift from
individual Dasein to the Dasein of a people-in-a-state, technē is no longer confined
within the inauthentic realm of everydayness. To be sure, there is an ordinary technē
which is still restricted to those limits, but, in addition to it, there is now place for an
authentic technē, a knowhow which, instead of being fascinated by what is merely
present-at-hand, is ontologically creative. In this context, Heidegger recalls an old Greek
legend according to which Prometheus would have been the first philosopher, and he
quotes the words of Prometheus in Aeschylus’ tragedy: ‘technē however is much weaker
than necessity.’ Necessity is here interpreted by him as the ‘overpower’ of destiny. In
such ‘overpower’ a concealment of being is involved which challenges knowledge and
demands a metaphysical reply, in terms of a creative technē.
Along with the transposition of the notion of Dasein to a people, and the introduction
of a creative technē, the Rectoral Address also introduces the idea that Being itself, and
not only Dasein, is intrinsically polemical and historical; and that Dasein—either as an
individual or as a people—is the ‘there’ of Being.
But in spite of all these modifications, the Rectoral Address maintains the project of a
fundamental ontology, as a task including a metaphysics of Dasein articulated according
to the opposition between a fallen everydayness, fascinated by presence-at-hand, and a
resolute authenticity dedicated to unconcealing Being by transcending beings.
The two lecture courses offered by Heidegger after the rectorate period—a lecture
course on Hölderlin [2.37] given in the winter term 1934–5, and a lecture course on the
Introduction to Metaphysics [2.8, 2.53] given in the summer term 1935—introduce
developments of topics treated in the Rectoral Address, but they also maintain the
framework of fundamental ontology.
The lecture course on Hölderlin starts by discarding, in order to listen to the poet, all
the forms of fallen everydayness already described in Being and Time as obstructing the
question: Who is Dasein? The Dasein at stake here, however, is no longer the individual
but ‘the authentic gathering of individuals in a community’ ([2.45], 8). Hölderlin’s
poetry, in the poems ‘Germania’ and ‘Am Rhein’, is supposed to raise the question: ‘Who
are we, the German people?’ The question demands a withdrawal from everydayness and
a resolute attitude of racial questioning opposed to the ‘They’. In continuity with Being
and Time, Heidegger characterizes everydayness in terms of technē, i.e., circumspection
dedicated to the management of surroundings, to production, usefulness and the general
progress of culture. That inauthentic comportment encompasses the everyday life of the
Nazi regime: cultural activism, subordination of thought and the fine arts to immediate
political needs, biologism, and the rule of bureaucrats. But on the level of authenticity

9.7 Page 87

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 49
there is a place for a quite different technē, adjusted to the historical Dasein of the
German people. Only a few individuals are aware of the innermost historiality of that
people. These few are the creators: the poet, the thinker and the founder of the state. The
co-operation of these three creative types is described by Heidegger in his interpretation
of what he calls the Grundstimmung, the basic mood of the two poems, i.e., Hölderlin’s
holy mourning in the face of the flight of the gods. The poet institutes (stiftet) the truth of
the Dasein of the people. The thinker elucidates and articulates the Being of beings thus
disclosed by the poet. But the co-operation of the two requires the people to be led to
itself as a people. This can only occur through the creation by the state-creator of a state
adjusted to the essence of that people. That triad embodies the Promethean technē
mentioned in the Rectoral Address. The three of them rise to the level of demigods
preparing the conditions for a return of the divine.
The same Promethean trend is to be found in Heidegger’s dialogue with pre-Socratic
thought in the Introduction to Metaphysics. As a result of the elevation of a creative
technē to the highest ontological level, Heidegger now detects between Parmenides,
Heraclitus and Sophocles convergences pointing to an ontological assignment to setting-
into-work what the creative technē sees or knows. The assignment is required by the
polemical essence of what the early Greek thinkers called physis, an appellation which,
like the word alētheia, is taken to be another name for Being. Being is polemical because,
on the one hand, it is an unconcealment which retains itself in itself while disclosing itself
in beings; and because, on the other hand, it is again and again threatened, in its very
disclosure, by sheer semblance, deception, illusion. Therefore it is an ‘overpowering’
calling for a creative self-assertion defined as a decision (Entscheidung) to provide a
‘separation in the togetherness of Being, unconcealment; appearance, and Non-
Being’ ([2.8], 84; [2.53], 92). And since there is a violence in the ‘overpowering’ of
Being such decision has to be disrupting and violent. This violent response to the
‘overpowering’ of Being is what characterizes technē in its essential meaning. Technē
provides the basic trait of the Greek deinon (uncanny) evoked in a famous chorus of
Sophocles’ Antigone. So understood, technē is both a knowledge and a creative power.
As a knowledge, it is a sight looking beyond what is present-at-hand; as a creative power,
it is the capacity to set-into-work within being the historical unconcealment of Being. In
this context, Heidegger claims that unconcealment takes place only when it is achieved
by work: ‘the work of word in poetry, the work of stone in temple and statue, the work of
the word in thought, the work of the polis as the historical place in which all this is
grounded and preserved’ (pp. 146; 160). In this context, Heidegger celebrates what he
calls ‘the inner truth and greatness’ of the National-Socialist movement versus the
ideology (racism) and everyday practice of the Nazi Party.
In these two lecture courses the introduction of a distinction between a petty technē
trapped in everydayness or presence-at-hand and a lofty technē able to set-in-work Being
itself in its unconcealment not only leaves untouched but even reinforces the articulation
of fundamental ontology—i.e., the opposition between ordinary time and authentic
temporality. The fact that the Dasein at stake is now understood as the Dasein of a
people, either Greek or German, simply widens the basic principle of Being and Time
according to which the Dasein exists for its own sake and by willing itself. It could even
be said that the Promethean connotation of these texts brings fundamental ontology to a

9.8 Page 88

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 50
sort of metaphysical climax. Heidegger suggests, indeed, that it is because of its
foundational role towards his people that his own work deserved the heading of
fundamental ontology (pp. 113; 146). And he quotes with admiration Hegel’s words in
the Logic of 1812: ‘A people without a metaphysics is like a temple without a Holy of
Holies.’ Metaphysics is thus the privilege of Germany, whereas western democracies,
particularly the United States, on the one hand, and the USSR on the other hand, are said
to be absorbed in the frenetic development of the petty technē.
However, this paroxysm was soon going to bring fundamental ontology to an end, and
to open the way to a ‘turn’ (Kehre) in Heidegger’s thought. A comparison between the
successive versions of his essay The Origin of the Work of Art bears witness to such a
turn, or at least to a shift in Heidegger’s treatment of the question of Being. Indeed the
two early versions of the essay preserve the Promethean tendency which characterized
the Introduction to Metaphysics; whereas the third and final version is no longer
Promethean at all. All the topics tackled by the Introduction to Metaphysics—the people
and its gods, the greatness of a creative technē, decision, the ontological polemos
(conflict)—are still mentioned in the final version, but they lose their previous hardness
thanks to an overall tonality which is more meditative and open to enigmas than
voluntarist and proclamatory.
In the three versions, Heidegger insists that there is a circle in the investigation into the
origin of the work of art. Indeed, if it is true that the artist is the origin of the work, it is
also true that the work is the origin of the artist since neither is without the other.
However, both are what they are by virtue of art itself. But if it is true that the essence of
art should be inferred from the work, it is no less true that we could not recognize a work
of art as such without referring to the essence of art. Hence the interrogation into the
origin of the work of art moves in a circle. In the two early versions of the essay the topic
of the circle operates as a device for signifying the circular character of Dasein as a being
which projects its own Self by retrieving its thrownness, in such a way that project is a
retrieval, and retrieval is a project. But in the final version that emphasis on Dasein’s
existence for its own sake is replaced by an emphasis on Being itself inasmuch as Being
is neither limited to beings nor without them, and neither encapsulated in Dasein nor
without it.
Moreover, whereas the early versions insisted on the contrast between everydayness
and creative self-assertion, the final version is almost without sign of a contempt for
everydayness and its pettiness. It is significant in this regard that the first section of the
final version of the essay is entirely devoted to the question: what is a thing in its thingly
character? In the framework of fundamental ontology, as well as in the early versions of
the essay, that question was clearly not an important issue for the task of thinking, and
there was nothing enigmatic in the question. Indeed, there was an easy answer to it, in
terms of everydayness: the Being of things is either presence-at-hand (natural things) or
readiness-to-hand (equipment). By contrast, the final version of the essay states the
following: ‘The unpretentious thing evades thought most stubbornly. Can it be that this
self-refusal of the mere thing, this self-contained independence, belongs precisely to the
nature of the thing? Must not this strange feature of the nature of the thing become what a
thought that has to think the thing confides in? If so, then we should not force our way to
its thingly character’ ([2.55], 32). In other words, everydayness, instead of being the

9.9 Page 89

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 51
familiar realm that resoluteness has to overcome in order to face the homelessness of
existence, now becomes strange and deserves meditation in its familiar outlook. Dwelling
among things no longer obstructs thought, quite the contrary. It is also significant that the
reliability of equipment previously defined by its readiness-to-hand, hence in relation to
Dasein only, now turns out to bear testimony to an enigmatic interplay of unconcealment
and concealment in Being itself. This is what Heidegger tries to suggest in his meditation
on one of Van Gogh’s paintings of a pair of shoes.
The second section of the final version of the essay also marks a change regarding the
notion of truth. Heidegger’s point in the three versions is that in the work of art truth sets
itself to work. Truth, here once again understood as alētheia or unconcealment, is of an
essentially ambiguous and polemical nature, for it is a mixture of disclosedness and
withdrawal. This polemical nature of truth is revealed by the conflictual nature of the
work of art. While setting up a world, the artwork sets forth the earth, but whereas the
world is an opening of paths, the earth is a self-seclusion. Hence there is in the work of
art a strife between world and earth. Such strife characterizes truth itself as
unconcealment. But whereas the early versions of the essay maintain the priority of
Dasein regarding truth by making the Dasein of a people the locus of truth, the final
version characterizes unconcealment as a clearing (Lichtung) to which human beings
belong and are exposed. Consequently the meaning of resoluteness also changes: it is no
longer the project to be a Self but an exposure to the secret withdrawal at the core of the
clearing.
Finally, the last section of the final version is an attempt to define creation without
reference to Promethean self-assertion. What is now considered to be fundamental in the
work, inasmuch as it is created, is no longer its ability to anticipate in a leap what a
people decides to be. What is decisive in it, as created, is this: ‘that such work is at all
rather than is not’ ([2.55], 65). In other words, the enigma of a coming-to-presence now
overcomes the previous privilege of future self-projection. The creator is no longer a
violent struggler but someone receptive to the clearing.
The turn and the overcoming of metaphysics
Why did Heidegger give up his project of fundamental ontology? The question raises an
extremely complex issue and there are at least three ways of approaching it. From a
strictly systematic point of view, it is possible to notice a paradox at the core of the
project. Indeed if fundamental ontology—the science of the meaning of Being—is
identified with the ontological analysis or metaphysics of Dasein (as seemed to be the
case up to the Introduction to Metaphysics), then, as Heidegger himself said at the time,
‘ontology has an ontical foundation’ (Basic Problems, p. 26). But how is it possible to
avoid then the reduction of Being to characteristics of a being, more precisely to Dasein’s
way of Being? If, on the other hand, the metaphysics of Dasein is only the provisional
preparation of a systematic ontology, then a distinction has to be made between the
temporality of Dasein and the temporality of Being itself; and, consequently, the
provisional character of the analytic of Dasein contradicts its allegedly fundamental
function. In both cases, the attempt made in Being and Time (and later extended to
surpass the limits of individual Dasein) turns out paradoxically to be itself a manner of

9.10 Page 90

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 52
oblivion of Being to the benefit of a being.
A second way of approaching the issue would be a close chronological investigation of
the variations, appearing during the 1930s and early 1940s, in Heidegger’s use of the
notions coined in Being and Time. Such investigation remains to be done on a twofold
basis: the lecture courses already published or in the process of being edited in the
Gesamtausgabe, particularly those on Nietzsche (1936–41), and the long text written by
Heidegger for his own use under the heading Contributions to Philosophy (Beiträge zur
Philosophie 1936–8) [2.38].
A third approach is offered by Heidegger’s own explanations of what he called the
‘turn’ which, at some point, occurred in his thought. The first among these self-
interpretations is Heidegger’s Letter on Humanism, written in 1946 in reply to questions
raised by Jean Beaufret.
It is not certain, however, that the results of the three approaches could ever coincide,
mainly because of Heidegger’s tendency to justify retrospectively each step of his
philosophical development. Despite these difficulties there is no doubt that several topics
which had no place whatsoever in fundamental ontology came to the fore during the
second half of the 1930s. The lecture courses on Nietzsche are extremely significant in
this regard.
It has been noticed by several readers of the Nietzschebuch (Mehta; Arendt) that in the
first lecture courses (1936–9) Heidegger interprets Nietzsche in terms of the analytic of
Dasein and shows a basic agreement with Nietzsche, whereas the courses of 1939–41 are
polemical. This is why Hannah Arendt claimed that initially the ‘turn’ was a biographical
event, by which she meant that, underneath a polemical debate with Nietzsche, it was an
explanation of Heidegger to himself, and an attempt to discard his own voluntarist
inclinations during his activist period.
At any rate, what comes to the fore in the polemic against Nietzsche is a new way of
considering the history of metaphysics. In fundamental ontology, the point was to
deconstruct the biases and confusions inherent in past philosophies in order to liberate
metaphysics and complete it as the science of the meaning of Being. Now, the point is to
consider its development as a fatal destiny and to prepare its overcoming. That destiny is
characterized as an increasing oblivion of Being culminating in Nietzsche’s philosophy
of the will-to-power and of the eternal return of the same, interpreted by Heidegger as
nihilism.
At the dawn of western thought, the key words of the pre-Socratic thinkers, above all
the word alētheia, all signalled the process through which beings are brought to the
‘open’ in tension between a reserve and an appearing. This means that Being was
experienced as fully differentiated in the manner of an offering which withholds itself in
what it gives. This differentiation indicates a finiteness of Being to which corresponds
thinking as a receptivity to the secret of Being. The first erasing of this differentiated
correspondence and mutual belonging starts with Plato. Plato’s dialogues demonstrate a
tendency to transform a mere consequence of the ambiguous process of alētheia into the
essence of truth. In Plato beings reveal their beingness through ideas. The word initially
meant the outlook offered by things as they emerge out of physis. Therefore it meant a
consequence of the process of unconcealment. But Plato’s ideas come to the forefront and
get split off from the unconcealing process. Moreover, they acquire a normative status in

10 Pages 91-100

▲back to top

10.1 Page 91

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 53
relation to physis. Unconcealment then becomes a result of the clarity of the ideas which
themselves refract the clarity of a supreme idea, the Good. This is the birth of
metaphysics as onto-theology. The task of metaphysics from now on is to develop a
theory of the essence of beings, a logic of their beingness, i.e., an ontology, and
simultaneously to develop a theology by relating their beingness to a primordial being.
Alētheia is thus obliterated by an ontical hierarchy, and truth becomes a matter of
correctly seeing the ideas. Accordingly, the mutual belonging of Being in its ambiguity
and of thinking in its receptivity to the same is levelled down to a contemplative
conformity of the mind to essences.
A second stage in the metaphysical oblivion of Being took place in the Middle Ages.
In medieval thought the Platonic concept of truth as conformity of the intellect to the
beingness of beings, coupled with the founding role of a supreme being, was retrieved
within the Christian speculations about creation and the dependence of the created on the
creator. Truth in the scholastic sense of adaequatio intellects ad rem (adequacy of the
mind to the thing) is now grounded upon the deeper adaequatio rei Dei intellectus
(adequacy of the thing to the mind of God).
A third stage occurred at the beginning of the modern age with the invention of
subjectivity. When Galileo Galilei introduces, in still approximate terms, the first
formulation of what Newton, a few decades later, was to call the principle of inertia, he
uses the words ‘mente concipio’ (conceive in my mind). What is significant here, for
Heidegger, is not the replacement of the sensible outlook of natural phenomena (the
cornerstone of Aristotelian physics) by a purely intellectual approach of nature, but the
fact that inertia, in order to appear at all, requires the human mind to give itself a
preconception of what motion is and thus projects in advance the condition for
phenomenality. In the conformity of adequation between intellect and thing, the stress is
now put on the intellect in such a way that the thing manifests its truth inasmuch as it fits
with a project emanating from the mens. Deeper than the modern use of mathematics in
physics, there is what Descartes called mathēsis—a project by which the cogito ascertains
itself on its own and acquires a position of mastery. In Descartes’ philosophy, with the
restriction of the dependence of the finite human mind on the divine infinity, the cogito
posits itself as the unique basis upon which beings reveal their beingness. The word for
basis in Greek was hupokeimenon, in Latin subjectum. The cogito becomes the only
subjectum. The rule of subjectivity begins. The modern object-subject correlation means
that beings are what they are to the extent that they submit themselves to the rule of the
human cogito.
Such is the birth of the reckoning and evaluating reason which determines modernity.
All its features appear at the outset. The mathēsis is universalis, which means that it is
planning for the totality of beings. It is both a subjectivation of all beings referring them
to the cogito and an objectivation making them all equally calculable and controllable.
Earlier than the current reign of technology, right at the beginning of the modern era,
nature as a whole was conceived as one huge mechanism in relation to a technological
way of looking.
Between Descartes and Nietzsche, Heidegger does not notice a fundamental
discontinuity. Nietzsche’s notion of the will-to-power was in several ways anticipated by
Descartes and subsequent thinkers: Leibniz’s notion of the monad as a conjunction of

10.2 Page 92

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 54
perception and appetite in addition to his principle of Sufficient Reason; Kant’s concept
of reason as a condition of possibility; Fichte’s reinterpretation of Kant in terms of
practical reason; Schelling’s conviction that there is no other Being than the Will;
Hegel’s concept of the Absolute, willing its self-identity throughout differentiation. So
while claiming to be liberated from metaphysics, Nietzsche was merely bringing it to its
accomplishment and carrying modern subjectivity to an onto-theological climax.
Heidegger indeed interprets the will-to-power in ontological terms as the beingness of all
beings, and the eternal return of the same in theological terms as the ultimate ground of
beingness and being. Defined as the beingness of all beings, the will-to-power pushes to
an extreme limit the project of objectivation and subjectivation inherent in mathēsis.
Objectivation is brought to an extreme because the will not only treats every being as an
object (Gegenstand) but also compels any object to become a storage (Bestand) available
to all kinds of assignment and manipulation. Subjectivation is brought to an extreme as
well, for all things are reduced to the values that the will bestows on them in order to
intensify its power. On the other hand, the eternal return of the same, defined as the
ultimate form of being, signifies an endless, circular, repetitive machination which is the
metaphysical essence of modern technology. The abyssal thought of the eternal return
means that the will aiming to intensify itself is itself willed and challenged to will itself
infinitely. On both counts, Being has definitely lost the enigmatic ambiguity which was
experienced by the early Greeks. Being is like nothing. Nihilism rules.
It is significant of the ‘turn’ at work in this meditation on modernity that Heidegger’s
description of what he calls ‘European nihilism’ in a 1940 lecture course on Nietzsche
includes the following remarks about Being and Time: ‘The path followed in it is
interrupted at a decisive place. The interruption is explainable by the fact that, all the
same, the attempt made on that path was running the risk, against its own intention, to
reinforce furthermore subjectivity’ (Gesamtausgabe vol. 48, p. 261).
The main result of the above description of the history of metaphysics is the claim that
modern technology is the last accomplishment of a long process of oblivion of Being
inherent in metaphysics since Plato. Heidegger uses the word Gestell to characterize the
nature of modern technology. Gestell is a global ‘enframing’ wherein beings are entirely
available to all sorts of arbitrary evaluations and manipulations, and in which Being
counts for nothing. To that global enframing Heidegger opposes what he calls Ereignis,
often translated as ‘event of appropriation’, a term already used in his Beiträge of 1936–
8. Within the global enframing, thinking is replaced by calculation. It is only by
meditating Ereignis that thinking can remain alive. Thinking the Ereignis is a counter-
current to nihilism.
That opposition pervades the writings of Heidegger after the Second World War. In all
of them the voluntarist tonality of Being and Time and of the Introduction to Metaphysics
has vanished. Significantly the word Dasein is now spelled Da-sein: there-being. The
mortals are the ‘there’ of Being. They are exposed to the secret granting of Being.
Significantly, also, a topic such as the ‘call’, which was restricted in Being and Time to
Dasein’s listening to its ownmost potentiality, now emanates from Being itself. Whereas
in fundamental ontology the human Dasein was the lieutenant of nothingness, it is now
the shepherd of Being. Whereas fundamental ontology somehow conflated thinking and
willing, thinking is now a matter of not-willing, of letting-be (Gelassenheit), and even of

10.3 Page 93

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 55
thanking. Whereas fundamental ontology conceived of dwelling in terms of a
preoccupation of inauthentic everydayness, dwelling now deserves profound meditation.
Likewise for the ‘thing’, a topic to which Heidegger devoted several essays in the late
period. Likewise for speech, formerly taken as a capacity of Dasein, and now
characterized in terms of a call emanating from Being, of a gathering of Being and of a
corresponding to it. That shift from Dasein to Being explains why Heidegger criticized
humanism as an aspect of metaphysics.
The shift of emphasis also generates a change in Heidegger’s thought about time.
While maintaining the notion of ecstasis, Heidegger no longer understands ecstatical
temporalization in terms of an existential self-project, but in terms of a belonging of
Dasein to the ambiguous unconcealing process of Being allegedly covered up by the
entire tradition of metaphysics. This becomes apparent in a lecture given by Heidegger
more than thirty years after Being and Time, under the significant title Time and Being
(1962). This is the title which had been announced in 1927 as the heading of the third
division of the book, a division which never appeared. The lecture of 1962, however, is
not to be considered as the completion of the project of 1927.
It is a significant feature of the ‘turn’ that the topic is presented in neutral terms, in
which Dasein no longer plays a central role. Heidegger indeed announces that his
meditation is oriented by the sentence ‘Es gibt Sein, Es gibt Zeit’, which literally means:
‘It gives Being, It gives time.’ This neutral phrasing clearly suggests that the issue is no
longer Dasein’s temporalization. In both sentences, the phrase ‘Es gibt’ invites the
audience to hear an offering which is not itself reducible to what it is offering. Hence the
sentence ‘It gives time’ points to anoffering which keeps withdrawing itself within what
is offered. Already in the word ‘present’ there is more than the now; what is also meant
by the word is a gift bestowed upon man. Open to the presence of the present, mortals
welcome the granting. The emphasis is no longer on the project of the self but on
receptivity to the granting.
In this context, the prior concept of ecstasis is modified. Each ecstasis, as well as the
unity of the three ecstases, is now understood as a granting extended to human beings.
Instead of saying that the past is what we retrieve in the light of our finite project,
Heidegger now says that it happens to us, extending itself to us and soliciting us. The past
is an ecstasis in the sense of the coming towards ourselves of an absence which concerns
us while it is granted to us. Absence is itself a mode of presence if we think of presence
in the sense of a granting. But in each there is an interplay of granting and withholding.
The same holds true for the unity of the ecstases. Heidegger now calls each ecstasis a
dimension, and he calls the unity of the ecstaseis the fourth dimension of time.
About such unity, Heidegger no longer evokes a privilege of the future. The emphasis
is now on the coming-to-presence. Moreover, instead of evoking Dasein’s
temporalization, he suggests that time temporalizes from itself. The unifying fourth
dimension of time is characterized as a disclosed interplay of the three ecstases, a
clearing extension, an opening. However it is also characterized by a denial, a
withholding. Time nears and holds back. It is radically ambiguous. The granting,
effective in it, is also a denial.
This new apprehension of time is at the core of Heidegger’s notion of Ereignis which
he opposes to Gestell—the technological enframing for which there is no secret

10.4 Page 94

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 56
whatsoever. In German Ereignis means ‘event’. In Heidegger’s terminology it designates
the co-belonging of Being and man. He insists on both etymological roots of the word.
They are er-eignen, ‘appropriating’, and ‘er-äugen’, bringing to visibility. There is no
doubt that the use of the word in this twofold meaning signifies a contrast with the use of
words such as eigen (‘own’), and Eigentlichkeit (‘authentic selfhood’) in Being and Time.
The Ereignis is not to be conceived of in terms of the Self at issue in the work of 1927.
What is at stake in it is no longer a project but a Schicken, a sending or a destining. The
event of co-belonging between Being and man is the manner in which Being destines
itself to us, by opening the playspace (Spielraum) of time wherein beings appear. But
destiny withholds itself in order for its granting to occur. The history of Being is that
destiny. In it each epoch is an epokhē, a withholding of Being within its donation. In each
case the Ereignis witholds (enteignet) itself. Consequently the task of thinking is no
longer to be defined by the phrase ‘Being and time’ but by the phrase Lichtung und
Anwesenheit, ‘clearing and coming-to-presence’, both understood in terms of a granting
and a denial.
The trouble with this history of Being is that, in spite of the above signals of a
significant shift in Heidegger’s thought, it reproduces in a new way the previous contrast
between the ‘They’ and the Self. Indeed only a few German poets (Hölderlin, Trakl,
George) and Heidegger himself—but not the plurality of human beings interacting in a
common world of appearances and events—seem able to properly respond to the
ambiguity of the destiny of Being.
Moreover, the previous privilege of Dasein’s bios theoretikos reapppears in a new
manner: thinking is the only activity able to prepare a new beginning in the history of
Being.
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Major books published by Heidegger himself
2.1 Frühe Schriften (1912–16), ed. F.-W.von Hermann, Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1978.
2.2 Sein und Zeit (1927), Tübingen: Niemeyer, 1953.
2.3 Kant und das Problem der Metaphysik (1927), Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1951.
2.4 Vom Wesen des Grundes, Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1928.
2.5 Was ist Metaphysik? (1929), Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1955.
2.6 Vom Wesen der Wahrheit (1930, 1943), Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1961.
2.7 Die Selbstbehauptung der deutschen Universität, Breslau: Korn, 1933. Later reprinted
in Das Rektorat 1933/34: Tatsachen und Gedanken, Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1983.
2.8 Einführung in die Metaphysik (1935), Tübingen: Niemeyer, 1953.
2.9 Erläuterungen zu Hölderlins Dichtung (1936, 1944), Frankfurt: Klostermann,
2.10 Holzwege (1936–46). Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1950.
2.11 Nietzsche (1936–46), 2 vols, Pfullingen: Neske, 1961.
2.12 Vorträge und Aufsätze (1943–54). Pfullingen: Neske, 1961. Contains eleven essays,
including ‘Die Frage nach der Technik’ and ‘Bauen, Wohnen, Denken’.
2.13 Platons Lehre von der Wahrheit (1942). Mit einem Brief über den

10.5 Page 95

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 57
‘Humanismus’ (1946), Bern: Francke, 1947.
2.14 Was heisst Denken? (1951–52), Tübingen: Niemeyer, 1954.
2.15 Was ist das—die Philosophie? (1955), Pfullingen: Neske, 1956.
2.16 Zur Seinsfrage (1955), Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1956.
2.17 Der Satz vom Grund (1955–6), Pfullingen: Neske, 1957.
2.18 Identität und Differenz, Pfullingen: Neske, 1957.
2.19 Unterwegs zur Sprache (1950–9), Pfullingen: Neske, 1957.
2.20 Gelassenheit, Pfullingen: Neske, 1959.
2.21 Die Frage nach dem Ding (1936, 1962), Pfullingen: Neske, 1962.
2.22 Die Technik and die Kehre, Pfullingen: Neske, 1962.
2.23 Wegmarken (1967), Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1978.
2.24 Zur Sache des Denkens, Tübingen: Niemeyer, 1969.
2.25 Schellings Abhandlung über das Wesen der menschlichen Freiheit (1936), ed.
H.Feieck, Tübingen: Niemeyer, 1971.
2.26 Phänomenologie und Theologie (1927, 1954), Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1972.
Major lecture courses and manuscripts
Published in Heidegger’s Gesamtausgabe (Collected Edition), Frankfurt: Klostermann:
2.27 Phänomenologische Interpretationen zu Aristoteles (1921–2), ed. W.Bröcker and
K.Bröcker-Oltmanns, GA 61, 1985.
2.28 Ontologie: Hermeneutik der Faktizität (1923), ed. K.Bröcker-Oltmanns, GA 63,
1988.
2.29 Platon: Sophistes (1924–5), ed. I.Schüssler, GA 19, 1992.
2.30 Prolegomena zur Geschichte des Zeitbegriffs (1925), ed. P.Jaeger, GA 20, 1979.
2.31 Logik: Die Frage nach der Wahrheit (1925–6), ed. W.Biemel, GA 21, 1976.
2.32 Die Grundprobleme der Phänomenologie (1927), ed. F.W.von Hermann, GA 24,
1975.
2.33 Phänomenologische Interpretation von Kants Kritik der reinen Vernunft (1927–8),
ed. I.Görland, GA 25, 1977.
2.34 Metaphysische Anfangsgründe der Logik (1928), ed. K.Held, GA 26, 1978.
2.35 Die Grundbegriffe der Metaphysik: Welt, Endlichkeit, Einsamkeit (1929–30), ed F.-
W.von Hermann, GA 29/30, 1983.
2.36 Vom Wesen der menschlichen Freiheit (1930), ed. H.Tietgen, GA 31, 1982.
2.37 Hölderlins Hymnen ‘Germanien’ und ‘Der Rhein’ (1934–5), ed. S.Ziegler, GA 39,
1980.
2.38 Beiträge zur Philosophie: Vom Ereignis (1936–8), ed. F.-W.von Hermann, GA 65,
1989.
2.39 Grundfragen der Philosophie (1937–8), ed. F.-W.von Hermann, GA 45, 1984.
2.40 Grundbegriffe (1941), ed. P.Jaeger, GA 51, 1981.
2.41 Hölderlins Hymne ‘Andenken’ (1941–2), ed. C.Ochwaldt, GA 52, 1982.
2.42 Hölderlins Hymne ‘Der Ister’ (1942), ed. W.Biemel, GA 53, 1984.
2.43 Parmenides (1942–3), ed. M.S.Frings, GA 54, 1982.
Translations

10.6 Page 96

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 58
2.44 History of the Concept of Time, trans. T.Kisiel, Bloomington: Indiana University
Press, 1985.
2.45 Being and Time, trans. J.Macquarrie and E.Robinson, London: SCM Press, 1962.
2.46 The Basic Problems of Phenomenology, trans. A.Hofstadter, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1982.
2.47 Kant and the Problem of Metaphysics, trans. S.Churchill, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1962.
2.48 The Metaphysical Foundations of Logic, trans. M.Heim, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1984.
2.49 The Essence of Reasons, trans. T.Malich, Evanston: Northwestern University Press,
1969.
2.50 What is Metaphysics?, trans. D.F.Krell, in M.Heidegger, Basic Writings, ed.
D.F.Krell, New York: Harper & Row, 1977, pp. 95–116.
2.51 On the Essence of Truth, trans. J.Sallis, in Basic Writings, pp. 117–41.
2.52 ‘The Rectorate 1933/34: Facts and Thoughts’, trans. K.Harries, Review of
Metaphysics, 38 (March 1985):467–502.
2.53 An Introduction to Metaphysics, trans. R.Manheim, New Haven: Yale University
Press, 1959.
2.54 Nietzsche, trans, and ed. D.F.Krell in 4 vols, New York: Harper & Row, 1979.
2.55 The Origin of the Work of Art’, third version, from Holzwege, trans. A. Hofstadter
in M.Heidegger, Poetry, Language, Thought, New York: Harper & Row, 1971, pp. 7–
87.
2.56 The Question Concerning Technology and Other Essays, trans. W.Lovitt, New
York: Harper & Row, 1977, pp. 3–35.
2.57 ‘Building, Dwelling, Thinking’, trans. A.Hofstadter, in Basic Writings, pp. 323–39.
2.58 Three essays on Heraclitus and Parmenides, trans. D.F.Krell and F.A. Capuzzi, in
M.Heidegger, Early Greek Thinking, New York: Harper & Row, 1975.
2.59 ‘Plato’s Doctrine of Truth’, trans. J.Barlow in W.Barrett et al. (eds), Philosophy in
the Twentieth Century II, New York: Random House, 1962, pp. 251–70.
2.60 ‘Letter on Humanism’, trans. F.A.Capuzzi and J.G.Gray, in Basic Writings, pp. 193–
242.
2.61 What is Called Thinking?, trans. F.D.Wieck and J.G.Gray, New York: Harper &
Row, 1968.
2.62 What is Philosophy?, trans. J.R.Wilde and W.Klubach, New Haven: College and
University Press, 1968.
2.63 The Question of Being, trans. W.Klubach and J.T.Wilde, New York: Twayne, 1958.
2.64 The Principle of Reason, trans. R.Lilly, Bloomington and Indianapolis: Indiana
University Press, 1991.
2.65 Identity and Difference, trans. J.Stambaugh, New York: Harper & Row, 1969.
2.66 On the Way to Language, trans. P.D.Hertz and J.Stambaugh, New York: Harper &
Row, 1966.
2.67 Discourse on Thinking, trans. J.M.Anderson and E.H.Freund, New York: Harper &
Row, 1966.
2.68 What is a Thing?, trans. W.Barton and V.Deutsch, Chicago: Regnery, 1969.
2.69 ‘The Turning’, trans. W.Lovitt in [2.56], 36–49.

10.7 Page 97

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 59
2.70 On Time and Being, trans. J.Stambaugh, New York: Harper & Row, 1972.
2.71 The Piety of Thinking, trans. J.G.Hart and J.C.Maraldo, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1976.
Criticism
2.72 Arendt, H. The Life of the Mind, 2 vols, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich,
1977–8.
2.73 Beaufret, J. Dialogue avec Heidegger, 3 vols, Paris: Minuit, 1973–4.
2.74 Biemel, W. Le Concept de monde chez Heidegger, Louvain and Paris: Nauwelaerts,
1950.
2.75 Birault, H. Heidegger et l’expérience de la pensée, Paris: Gallimard, 1978.
2.76 Dastur, F. Heidegger et la question du temps, Paris: Presses Universitaires de
France, 1990.
2.77 De Waelhens, A. La Philosophie de Martin Heidegger, Louvain and Paris:
Nauwelaerts, 1942.
2.78 Derrida, J. De l’esprit: Heidegger et la question, Paris: Galilée, 1987.
2.79 Haar, M. (ed.) Martin Heidegger, Paris: Cahiers de l’Herne, 1983.
2.80 Haar, M. Heidegger et l’essence de l’homme, Grenoble: Jérôme Millon, 1990.
2.81 Hermann, F.-W.von, Die Selbstinterpretation Martin Heideggers, Meisenheim am
Glan: A.Hain, 1964.
2.82 Janicaud, D. L’Ombre de cette pensée: Heidegger et la question politique, Grenoble:
Jérôme Millon, 1990.
2.83 Kockelmans, J.J. On the Truth of Being: Reflections on Heidegger’s Later
Philosophy, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1984.
2.84 Lacoue-Labarthe, P. La Fiction du politique, Paris: Christian Bourgeois, 1987.
2.85 Marx, W. Heidegger and the Tradition, trans. T.J.Kisiel and M.Greene, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1971.
2.86 Mehta, J.L. The Philosophy of Martin Heidegger, New York: Harper & Row, 1971.
2.87 Ott, H. Martin Heidegger: Unterwegs zu seiner Biographie, Frankfurt: Campus,
1988.
2.88 Pöggeler, O. Martin Heidegger’s Path of Thinking (1963) trans. D.Magurshak and
S.Barber, Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press, 1987.
2.89 Pöggeler, O. Philosophie und Politik bei Heidegger, Freiburg: Alber, 1972.
2.90 Richardson W. Heidegger: Through Phenomenology to Thought, The Hague,
Nijhoff, 1963.
2.91 Rockmore, T. and Margolin, J. (eds), The Heidegger Case, Philadelphia: Temple
University Press, 1992.
2.92 Sallis, J. (ed.), Reading Heidegger: Commemorations, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1993.
2.93 Schürmann R. Le Principe d’anarchie: Heidegger et la question de l’agir, Paris:
Seuil, 1982.
2.94 Sheehan, T. (ed.) Heidegger: The Man and the Thinker, Chicago: Precedent
Publishing, Inc., 1981.
2.95 Taminiaux, J. Heidegger and the Project of Fundamental Ontology (1989), trans.

10.8 Page 98

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 60
M.Gendre, Albany: State University of New York Press, 1991.
2.96 Taminiaux, J. La fille de Thrace et le penseur professionnel: Arendt et Heideg ger,
Paris: Payot, 1992.
2.97 Zimmerman, M. Heidegger’s Confrontation with Modernity, Bloomington Indiana
University Press, 1990.

10.9 Page 99

▲back to top
CHAPTER 3
Philosophy of existence 2
Sartre
Thomas R.Flynn
Born 21 June 1905, in Thiviers (Dordogne), Jean-Paul Sartre was raised in the Parisian
home of his widowed mother’s parents. After his mother’s remarriage, he spent several
years with her and his stepfather in La Rochelle but returned to the capital to continue his
education, first at the prestigious lycées Henri IV and Louis-le-Grand, and then at the
renowned Ecole Normale Supérieure. After several years of teaching in various lycées,
interspersed with a year of research at the French Institute in Berlin (1933–4),
mobilization during the Phoney War (1939–40), and internment in a prisoner of war
camp (1940–1), Sartre abandoned teaching for a career as an author and critic. He
founded the review Les Temps modernes with Merleau-Ponty, Simone de Beauvoir and
others (1944), refused the Legion of Honour (1945) and the Nobel Prize for Literature
(1962), and became increasingly involved in the politics of the left in the second half of
his life. Sartre adopted a former student, Arlette Elkaïm (1965), who had become his
literary heir. He died in Paris on 15 April 1980.
Perhaps no one in the twentieth century better exemplifies the union and creative
tension among philosophy, literature and public life than Jean-Paul Sartre. His novel
Nausea and play No Exit emerged in the 1940s as paradigmatic ‘existentialist’ pieces, for
which his masterwork, Being and Nothingness, served as the theoretical underpinning.
This last, like Darwin’s Origin of Species, was more mentioned than read during the
halcyon days of café existentialism. But its basic insights and powerful
phenomenological descriptions have continued to attract a number of contemporary
philosophers as well as the general reading public. Several of these themes and theses
continued to direct Sartre’s philosophy throughout the shifts and adjustments of the next
thirty-seven years of his career. So we cannot refer to a rejection of, or a ‘turning’ from,
his earlier thought in his later work as is often done in the cases of Wittgenstein and
Heidegger respectively.
The present chapter will survey Sartre’s philosophical development, analyse the
fundamental concepts and principles that constitute his contribution to philosophy in
eight standard fields of inquiry, and conclude with reflections on Sartre’s relationship to
four movements in the recent history of philosophy, namely, existential phenomenology,
Marxism, structuralism and postmodernism.
PHILOSOPHICAL DEVELOPMENT

10.10 Page 100

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 62
Sartre once admitted that his inspiration to write philosophy came from reading
Bergson’s Time and Free Will. The Bergsonian influence on his thought, both positive
and by way of reaction, has yet to be studied in depth. But the presence of this formidable
French theorist is obvious from the centrality of time and temporalizing consciousness in
Sartre’s published philosophical writings from the very start. These works of the 1930s,
culminating in Psychology of Imagination (1940), exhibit both a keen sensitivity to lived
experience as distinct from the mechanical or quantified phenomena of positive science
(a well-known Bergsonian theme) as well as a profound opposition to the philosophical
idealism of his neo-Kantian professors at the Sorbonne. His early writings also tended to
take imaging consciousness as paradigmatic of consciousness in general. In fact, if Sartre
is known as the philosopher of freedom in our times, he could with equal justification be
considered the philosopher of imagination. We shall observe various forms of imaging
consciousness emerge in the course of our essay.
Sartre’s long-time companion, Simone de Beauvoir, relates the story of their meeting
with Raymond Aron after the latter’s return from a year in Berlin. At Aron’s account of
the new philosophy of Edmund Husserl that could describe ‘phenomenologically’ an
individual object such as the cocktail glass before them, she recounts, Sartre ‘turned pale
with emotion’. As they left the café, she recalls, Sartre had to find a bookstore open at
night in order to purchase a copy of Levinas’s The Theory of Intuition in Husserl’s
Phenomenology.
If phenomenology enabled Sartre to philosophize about concrete, individual reality, its
central concept of intentionality allowed him to escape the ‘principle of immanence’ that
entangled idealist philosophers in a mind-referring world. Philosophical idealism claims
that reality is essentially mental or mind-referring. Berkeley’s famous maxim ‘To be is to
perceive or be perceived’ illustrates this view. Sartre published an essay in 1939 that
countered this idealist claim with the principle of intentionality, namely, that
consciousness is essentially other-referring: ‘All consciousness is consciousness of
another.’ He applied this Husserlian principle with characteristic rigour, even directing it
against Husserl himself, whom he accused of sliding into idealism by appeal to a
‘transcendental’ ego.
Sartre’s robust realism continued to shape his epistemological claims over the years.
He always insisted that we can know the real world in itself, that historical facts are not
the result of our individual or collective creation, and that the harsh facticity of every
situation must be dealt with, indeed, that failure to do so is simply ‘bad faith’. It made
him an apt, if initially reluctant, convert to philosophical materialism in the 1950s. Of
course, mechanistic materialism was never a temptation. He had consistently opposed its
claims from the start. But once he could separate the emergent features of dialectical
materialism from its quasi-mechanical use by Marxist ‘economism’, he appealed to the
‘material conditions of history’ that Marxists of all shades respected and undertook to
incorporate these socio-historical considerations into his philosophy of individual
freedom-responsibility.
The Second World War was the dividing point between the phenomenological
existentialist Sartre and his Marxist existentialist avatar. As he said in one of his many
interviews, his ‘experience of society’ during those years forced him to shift from a
philosophy of consciousness to one of praxis, understood roughly as human action in its

11 Pages 101-110

▲back to top

11.1 Page 101

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 63
material, socio-historical environment. If it is a mistake to see the early Sartre as an
unqualified phenomenologist, witness his rejection of a basic Husserlian concept in The
Transcendence of the Ego (1937), it is equally erroneous to read him as a Marxist sans
phrase. In fact, in his final decade he explicitly denied he was a Marxist, insisting that
‘existentialist’ would be a more appropriate label if one had to make such designations.
In Search for a Method (1958) and the Critique of Dialectical Reason, vol. 1 (1960), he
makes ample use of historical materialist categories and arguments. Even in his massive
Flaubert study, The Family Idiot (1971–2), where existentialist and Marxist terms are
intertwined, he seems to regard physical labour and human need as the touchstones of
reality. Still, his association with les maos (ultraleftists) after the student uprising of
1968, and his unpublished collaborative effort with Benny Levy on yet another ethic,
confirms the judgment that Sartre was and remained a moralist. For it was the desire to
retain a place for moral assessment within social critique that attracted him to these
young radicals. As he noted, in obvious disgust, ‘The Communists don’t give a damn
about justice. All they want is power’ [3.28], 76. It is his moralist tendencies more than
his so-called ‘Cartesianism’ that locate him squarely in the French philosophical
tradition.
Sartre’s final interviews with Levy are much controverted. Simone de Beauvoir and
Raymond Aron claim that the young man took advantage of Sartre’s age and ill health to
project a false image, a Sartre without critical bite, a domesticated warrior. Indeed, these
conversations do read like Platonic dialogues, with Levy assuming the controlling role of
Socrates. Though it would be a mistake to read these pages without reference to the
development of Sartre’s thought as a whole, comparison of several disputed passages
with claims made in posthumously published material from different stages of Sartre’s
career indicates that at least some of Sartre’s so-called revisions of his well-known
positions were actually ideas he had defended in these other works quite independent of
Lévy’s purported influence. Thus his remarks about love and ‘fraternity’ are anticipated
and developed at length in his Notebooks for an Ethics (written 1948–9), as we shall see.
Again, this does not mean that Sartre ‘renounced’ his existentialist philosophy in his final
years. Nothing could be farther from the truth. But it does reveal Sartre as a living,
evolving thinker, responding to the everchanging challenges of his day. For Sartre, to
philosophize was his way of being-in-the-world.
PHILOSOPHICAL CONTRIBUTIONS
Existentialists have been portrayed as non- or even anti-systematic thinkers. No doubt
this stems from Kierkegaard’s notorious animus against Hegel’s ‘System’ and
Nietzsche’s strictures against academic philosophy in general. But, unless by ‘systematic’
one means ‘axiomatic deductive’, classical existentialist thinkers like Sartre, Merleau-
Ponty, Heidegger (who rejected the association) and others were rigorous and consistent
theorists, who applied fundamental principles and concepts according to a clear method.
Given the interlinking and cumulative nature of Sartre’s thought, it is best to order our
exposition according to the standard philosophical sub-disciplines. Not only will this
facilitate our consideration of his massive oeuvre, it will also exhibit the unity and

11.2 Page 102

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 64
coherence of his theoretical work.
Methodology and epistemology
Sartre had a remarkable talent for psychological description. His novels, plays and short
stories were replete with arresting, insightful accounts of both typical and dramatic
moments in the human condition. So it is small wonder that he was taken by Husserl’s
phenomenological method of ‘eidetic reduction’. By a ‘free, imaginative variation of
examples’, Husserl proposed to focus on the essence, eidos, or intelli-gible contour of any
‘object’ whatsoever. Not only physical nature, mathematical abstractions or metaphysical
categories but acts of ingratitude and artistic events were likely objects for the
phenomenologist’s eye. Like the forensic artist’s composite photograph, these reductive
descriptions serve to reveal the form, figure or essence of an object, whether this be an
abstract entity, like ‘material object’, an emotion, like ‘resentment’, or a particular
phenomenon, like ‘this glass’. At its best, such descriptive analysis reveals the essential
features of the object in question, that is, those that withstand the imaginative variations
to which they are subject by the describer. Descriptive phenomenology is a ‘science’ of
what Aristotle called ‘formal’, not ‘efficient’ causes. As Husserl noted, ‘phenomenology
does not try to explain…but simply to get us to see’. When it is unable to generate what
Husserl termed the ‘intuition of essences’ (Wesensschau), the phenomenological method
must be satisfied with possible or probable opinions about the matter in question. So the
first two parts of Sartre’s Psychology of Imagination are entitled the ‘certain’ and the
‘probable’ respectively.
What we may call an epistemology of ‘vision’, the Husserlian legacy, remains a
constant feature of Sartre’s method. It accounts for some of the most arresting passages in
his philosophical writings, and serves to ‘concretize’ some of the most abstract sections
of his theoretical works. The presuppositions of Husserl’s method are Cartesian,
however, and Sartre’s writings up to and including Being and Nothingness refer to a form
of the cogito as essential to any method that would move beyond mere probability to
certainty in its basic claims. The insight of individual reflective consciousness in this
approach is taken as the final court of appeal in philosophical argument. Although Sartre
seemed to modify this view in his later years, he never abandoned it, as is clear from his
retention of the language of Being and Nothingness in his final work on Flaubert. A
tension between this epistemology of vision and an overlapping epistemology of praxis
renders Sartre’s later philosophy problematic.
After the war, Sartre adopted a form of the dialectical method, which he had been
studying in the works of Hegel and Marx during that period. Central to this approach, as
he saw it, were the notions of ‘finality’, ‘negativity’ and ‘time’. It is a feature of
dialectical reasoning, he insists, to acknowledge ‘a certain action of the future as such’.
Explanation in terms of Aristotle’s ‘final’ causality had been philosophically unpopular
since Descartes. But Sartre argues that our comprehension of human activity (praxis) as
distinct from mechanical behaviour depends on the purposes that guided the agents
themselves.
He criticized philosophers since Descartes for ‘failing to conceive negativity as
productive’, an oversight that he certainly avoided in Being and Nothingness, where

11.3 Page 103

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 65
negativity assumes pride of place as an essential feature of consciousness as such.
Sartre’s dialectic differs most from Hegel’s by its insistence on the primacy of individual
activity in dialectical advance and in its denial of any ‘end’ to the dialectical process so
long as consciousness/praxis sustains it. A pivotal claim, and the undoing of any
totalitarian theory, is Sartre’s thesis that a ‘totalizing’ consciousness/praxis cannot
totalize itself, that is, it cannot be completely absorbed in a social whole of which its
totalizing activity is a part. This ‘nihilating’ character of consciousness in the early Sartre
remains in the praxis of the later one to preclude any ‘organicist’ or totalitarian
tendencies in his social thought.
The later, dialectical thinker prefers ‘notions’ to ‘concepts’ as the vehicles for
expressing historical intelligibility. Sartre argues that developmental thinking alone can
render comprehensible a fluid reality and that notions as dynamic are superior to static
concepts in performing this task. Like Aristotle’s and Kant’s categories, concepts as such
are atemporal whereas notions include an essential reference to temporality in their very
meaning. We should see ‘notion’ as a ‘dialectical concept’ and read Sartre’s writings
after Being and Nothingness as abounding in them.
Sartre’s discourse on method is the essay Search for a Method, published first as an
article and later as a kind of preface to the Critique of Dialectical Reason. It combines the
phenomenological and dialectical moments in an approach that develops the ‘method of
understanding’ (Verstehen) of German social theory at the turn of the century. The
method entails three stages or dimensions. The first is a phenomenological description of
the subject matter to be studied. The terminus of eidetic reduction, it now forms the
beginning of Sartre’s approach. The second step is a ‘regressive’ move from the object of
investigation to the conditions of its possibility. These may be purely ‘formal’, such as
the structures of social relations that Sartre uncovers in the Critique of Dialectical
Reason, vol. 1, or they may include a specific content, like the intrafamilial relations of
the young Flaubert that conditioned his psychosocial development. The third move in
what Sartre calls his ‘progressive-regressive’ method is the progressive spiral of
interiorization/exteriorization of these material and formal conditions by the agent whose
meaning-direction (sens) we are attempting to uncover. If successful, the progressive-
regressive method enables us to ‘understand’ (not ‘conceptualize’) an agent as well or
even better than he or she understood himself or herself, the ideal of hermeneutical
investigation since Kant.
Psychology
Sartre’s first published philosophical books were in psychology: Imagination (1936),
Sketch for a Theory of Emotions (1939), and The Psychology of Imagination (1940). Not
coincidentally, they emphasize the role of the imagination in our psychic life and pursue
in depth Husserl’s thesis that intentionality is the defining characteristic of the mental.
Both these remain influential in Sartre’s subsequent writings.
His phenomenological analysis of the imagination reveals three characteristics of its
structure: the imagination is a consciousness; like all consciousness, it is intentional; and
it differs from perceptual consciousness in the way it ‘intends’ its object, namely, as
absent, non-existent or unreal.

11.4 Page 104

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 66
It is better, he argues, to speak of ‘imaging consciousness’ than of ‘imagination’ with
its corresponding ‘images’. The latter form of expression tends to hypostatize
consciousness and to turn images into simulacra, ‘inner’ icons of some ‘exterior’ object.
Such discourse succumbs to what Sartre calls the ‘illusion of immanence’ shared by
realists and idealists alike. Rather, imaging consciousness should be conceived as a
manner of being-in-the-world, a Heideggerian term that Sartre adopts. Intentionality
avoids the paradoxes of traditional inside-outside epistemology and accounts for the
relational character of consciousness. Imaging consciousness ‘derealizes’ the perceptual
or recollected object, relating to it in the properly imaginary mode. This derealizing
activity employs physical or psychic material (for example, painted surfaces or
phosphenes in the case of aesthetic or oneiric objects respectively), to serve as an
analogue for the imagined object. Sartre’s concept of ‘representative analogue’ figures in
much that is original and interesting in his aesthetic theory. It is integral to his existential
‘biographies’ of such ‘lords of the imaginary’ as Baudelaire, Genet, Flaubert and
Mallarmé. For each in his own way will be portrayed as ‘derealizing’ the bourgeois world
of his contemporaries and enticing others with his art to do likewise. A conceptual flaw
that weakens Sartre’s usage is his failure to explain in detail what he means by these
cardinal terms, ‘analogy’ and ‘analogue’.
These features of imaging consciousness are summarized in the following definition:
‘The image is an act which intends [literally, “aims at” (vise)] an absent or non-existent
object in its corporality by means of a physical or psychical content which is given not
for its own sake but only as an “analogical representative” of the intended object’ ([3.30],
25; in the French text, p. 45). It is remarkable that Sartre speaks of imaging consciousness
in this first period of his writings as the locus of possibility, negativity and lack, and
insists that only in the imagining act is the ‘nihilation’ of objects revealed (see [3.30],
243–5; French, pp. 360–1), because, in Being and Nothingness and thereafter, these
emerge as the proper features of consciousness in general. To the extent that Sartre’s
early philosophy by his own admission is a ‘philosophy of consciousness’, it is likewise a
philosophy of the imagination. Our survey of his thought and works will justify
considering him the philosopher of the imagination as much as the philosopher of
freedom—the title by which he is commonly designated.
His analysis of the emotions is in direct parallel with that of the image. Like images,
emotions are not ‘inner states’ that somehow correspond to external stimuli. Neither are
they reducible to their physiological expression, as some have argued. Emotional
consciousness is another way of being-in-the-world. In this case, it is one that entails a
physiological change as a means of relating to the world in a ‘magical’ manner.
Emotional consciousness is ‘failure behaviour’ (la conduite d’échec), an expression that
will play an important role in Sartre’s biography of Flaubert. The agent, unable to change
the world through rational activity, changes himself or herself in order to conjure up a
world that is no longer frustrating. Thus, the golfer gets red in the face before his/her
failure to escape a sand trap. Sartre reads this as conscious, that is, ‘intentional’,
behaviour. Its purpose is to generate another world as if by magic via one’s bodily
changes: perspiration, increased blood pressure, agitated motions and the like—these are
‘intended’ to help whisk the ball on to the green. Again, Sartre’s phenomenological
descriptions are aimed at escaping the ‘inner life’ and underscoring the correlativity of

11.5 Page 105

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 67
consciousness and world, psychology and ontology.
Ontology
If Sartre is a moralist, he is likewise basically an ontologist. The close relation between
ethics and ontology in his thought lends it a ‘traditional’ flavour quite foreign to that of
recent French intellectuals. His masterwork, Being and Nothingness, subtitled ‘An Essay
in Phenomenological Ontology’, develops the basic categories of his theory of being
(ontology) and concludes with the promise of an ethics, which never appeared in Sartre’s
lifetime.
Inspired by the divisions of Hegel’s Phenomenology of Spirit but always relying on the
‘apodictic’ evidence of Husserl’s eidetic reduction, Sartre undertakes a description of the
fundamental forms of being. He calls these ‘being-in-itself’ (l’être-en-soi), ‘being-for-
itself’ (l’être-poursoi) and ‘being-for-others’ (l’être-pour-autrui). Each has distinctive
characteristics and is irreducible to the others. Exploiting the proximity of
phenomenology to psychology, ontology and literary ‘argument’, Sartre relies on
powerful examples and tropes to convey his insights. In fact, his first literary success,
Nausea (1938), both anticipates and ‘works through’ imaginatively the themes and theses
of Being and Nothingness, published five years later.
Being-in-itself or the non-conscious is the inert plenum. It is self-identical and without
the features commonly ascribed to being in realist ontologies. For example, it is neither
active nor passive, is beyond negation and affirmation (other than the judgment that it is
and is self-identical), knows no otherness, is not subject to temporality and is neither
derived from the possible nor reduced to the necessary. ‘Uncreated, without reason for
being, without any connection with another being, being-in-itself is de trop (superfluous)
for eternity’ ([3.2] lxvi). Sartre derives these characteristics from an initial
phenomenological investigation of the being of any phenomenon. He confirms them by
appeal to certain experiences like nausea and boredom that he believes are revelatory of
its ontological nature.
Being-for-itself or consciousness is the counter-concept to being-in-itself and is its
internal negation. It brings ‘otherness’ into play, is precisely non-self-identical, and is
characterized as a ‘pure spontaneous upsurge’, a feature Sartre’s concept shares with the
concept of mind in classical German idealism. The for-itself ‘temporalizes’ the ‘world’
that it constitutes by its intentional relations. As we noted above, consciousness is the
locus of possibility, negativity and lack. Early in Being and Nothingness, Sartre
undertakes an analysis of our act of questioning, a tactic doubtless learned from
Heidegger’s Being and Time, with which his book has several affinities. His descriptive
analysis concludes that the negativity which permeates our lives from the fragility of
objects to the absence of friends is not dependent on the act of judging—the standard
view—but conversely. We have ‘a certain prejudicative comprehension of non-
being’ ([3.2], 7), and it is this that grounds the negative judgments and realities
(négativités) that populate our world. Sartre proceeds to argue that this ‘nihilating’
relation of consciousness to the world is possible only because consciousness (the for-
itself) is of its very nature a no-thingness (néant), an ‘othering’ relation that holds the in-
itself (‘thingness’) at bay even as it conspires with being-in-itself to constitute the

11.6 Page 106

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 68
existential ‘situation’.
The essence of consciousness as the internal negation or no-thingness of being-in-itself
accounts for many of the paradoxes that abound in Sartre’s ontology. Chief among these
is the claim that ‘human reality’ (his translation of Heidegger’s Dasein), ‘is not what it
is…and is what it is not’ ([3.2], 123). Human reality ‘is’ its ego, its past, its ‘facticity’, in
the manner of not-being these givens of its situation, that is, as the internal negation of
being-in-itself. Metaphorically, the for-itself ‘secretes’ nothingness (le néant) or
otherness between itself and whatever predicate one might wish to ascribe to it. These
verbal twists are meant to capture the ephemerality of the for-itself, a transitivity which
echoes that of temporality, which the for-itself constitutes.
Following Heidegger, Sartre distinguishes lived or ekstatic temporality from the
‘universal time’ measured by chronometers. The latter is quantitative and homogeneous;
the former, qualitative and heterogeneous. Being-for-itself is not ‘in’ time the way a hand
is in a glove, or even the way the glove is ‘in’ time. Rather, it ‘temporalizes’ the world
which it constitutes. The for-itself ‘exists’ in three temporal ekstases: the past as facticity
or ‘already’, the future as possibility or ‘not yet’, and the present as ‘presence to’ or the
‘othering’ relation that at once unites and distinguishes the for-itself from being. These
are three structured moments of an original synthesis. Sartre insists that it is better to
accent the present ekstasis rather than the future as Heidegger does, because presence-to
best exemplifies the internal negation of being-in-itself, which is the total synthetic form
of temporality ([3.2], 142).
When one moves from the abstractions of the in-itself and the for-itself to the concrete
individual agent, these functional concepts, being-in-itself and being-for-itself, assume
the roles of ‘facticity’ and ‘transcendence’ respectively. Every individual is a being-in-
situation and ‘situation’ is a vague, indeterminate mix of the givens, including one’s
physical and cultural environment as well as one’s previous choices, on the one hand, and
the project that moves beyond them, on the other. These givens must be reckoned with,
but, Sartre insists, they are not determining. ‘One can always make something out of
what one has been made into’ is the maxim of Sartrean humanism. The first half of his
career was spent explaining the first portion of that remark; the remainder was devoted to
articulating how society and history have limited our choices without removing them
entirely.
Although Sartre insists that being-for-others is as fundamental as the in-itself and the
for-itself, it is clearly dependent on them ontologically. In one of the most famous
passages of Being and Nothingness, he offers his ‘proof for the existence of other minds
in the form of an eidetic reduction of shame-consciousness. After criticizing the adequacy
of traditional arguments from analogy to account for the certainty with which we believe
in the existence of other minds, he performs an ‘imaginative reconstruction’ of an
example to reveal how such certainty figures essentially in our experience of shame.
He imagines someone looking through a keyhole at a couple. Like all Sartrean
consciousness, the couple’s consciousnesses are objectifying one another in a reciprocal
gaze. The voyeur is a ‘pure’ consciousness, seeing but unseen, objectifying but
unobjectified, whereas they are in a mutual relation of looking/looked at, unaware of the
third party. Suddenly, the interloper hears a noise from behind. In one and the same
reaction of shame, one experiences the other as subject and oneself objectified. In other

11.7 Page 107

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 69
words, one’s experience of shame is analysable into the condition of its possibility,
namely, one’s embodiedness-as-perceived by another consciousness. One cannot be
objectified except by another subject, nor is it possible to feel shame except as an
embodied being. Even if the noise turns out to have been a false alarm, the mere rustling
of the curtains, for example, the agent has had an immediate experience of another as
subject; it is written in the blush on his/her face. This ‘proof of other minds is
experiential. Rather than the probability of some weak analogy, it yields the certainty of
the Wesensschau.
After establishing the existence of other minds, albeit in a general, ‘pre-numerical’
manner that renders my being for-others the precondition of my being objectified by any
subject in particular (see [3.2], 280–1), Sartre directs his ontological investigation to each
of the conditions for that experience, namely, the body and the other subject.
There are three dimensions to bodily being-in-the-world, namely, the body as for-itself,
as for-others, and as what Sartre calls the way I ‘exist for myself as a body known by the
Other’ ([3.2], 351). The absurdities of the mind-body problem, Sartre believes, stem from
failure to respect these ontological levels regarding the body and in particular from
beginning our analysis with the body-for-others. The latter approach sees body as a thing
among things and hence as externally related to consciousness and to other bodies. Sartre
begins, on the contrary, with body as being-for-itself, that is, as my way of being-in-the-
world. As such, body is ‘lived’ (pre-reflectively) and not ‘known’ (reflectively), it is the
absolute centre of instrumentality that I am, rather than an instrument that I employ, and
it is at once my point of view and my point of departure for acting in the world. Hence
Sartre can claim that ‘being-for-itself must be wholly body and it must be wholly
consciousness; it can not be united with a body’ ([3.2], 305). Sartre’s peculiar kind of
‘materialism’ depends on defending a body that is likewise wholly intentional, that is,
that is not simply externally related to the projects by which an agent is individuated.
Accordingly, body is integral to the existential ‘situation’ and is the vehicle by which
other ‘necessary contingencies’ of our situation such as our race, our class and our very
past figure in the mix. In other words, body as being-for-itself is the basic form of our
facticity.
Once we have phenomenologically described our way of ‘existing’ our body, there is
no temptation to misread the body-for-others as a thing among things. The latter now
appears as the Other’s flesh, a term elaborated by Merleau-Ponty and designating for
Sartre ‘the pure contingency of [the Other’s] presence’ ([3.2], 343). What he calls ‘the
pure intuition of the flesh’ is especially evident in the Other’s face (aclaim that invites
comparison with that of Levinas regarding the primacy of the Other and the ethical
significance of the face in this revelation). The body is thus revealed as a ‘synthetic
totality of life and action’ ([3.2], 346, emphasis his).
The third ontological dimension of the body, for Sartre, is ‘my body as known by the
Other’. This denotes that real but uncontrollable aspect of our being-in-the-world before
others—the poet’s ‘as others see us’. If shame-consciousness reveals the existence of
other subjects, affective structures such as shyness indicate a vivid awareness of my body
not as it is for me but as it is ‘for the Other’. Significantly, Sartre insists that language
shows us abstractly the principal structures of our body-for-others. We shall observe him
subsequently locate language among the ‘practico-inert’. This relation between language

11.8 Page 108

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 70
and body-for-others is a suggestive dimension of Sartre’s ontology yet to be fully
explored.
The social dimension of Sartre’s vintage existentialism elaborates our being-for-others
as well as the facticity of our being-in-situation. His famous analysis of our basic
relations to each other as an attempt to ‘assimilate the Other’s freedom’ through sadistic
or masochistic manoeuvres scandalized the public and contributed to his reputation for
pessimism in the late 1940s. This was reinforced by the well-known line from his play No
Exit (1944), that ‘Hell is other people’ (l’enfer, c’est les autres).
Although he later contextualized these remarks, along with the passages in Being and
Nothingness on which they form a gloss, as referring to interpersonal relations ‘in an
alienated society’ such as ours, the source of the difficulty and the obstacle to a more
satisfactory social theory is ontological, not historical: his looking/looked-at model for
interpersonal relations. Until this is surpassed in the Critique of Dialectical Reason,
Sartre can offer us at best a theory of the other writ large, but not a social philosophy
properly speaking.
Ethics
It is now common to divide Sartre’s ethical thought into three phases: the ethics of
authenticity of his vintage existentialist years, the dialectical ethics that he began to
formulate in the 1950s and 1960s, and the ‘ethic of the we’ that he was fashioning with
Benny Levy toward the end of his life. Since the first is his best known and most fully
articulated theory, we shall concentrate on the ethics of authenticity.
If there is any existentialist ‘virtue’, it has been remarked, it is authenticity. The basis
for this concept is appropriately ontological: ‘man is free because he is not a self but a
presence-to-self’ ([3.2], 440). In other words, human reality is a ‘being of distances’—
whatever it is, it is in the manner of not-being that property, that is, as being otherthan-
that. So the male homosexual’s friend who urges him to ‘come out’ and admit what he is,
in Sartre’s example, is really asking him to be inauthentic, to be a homosexual ‘the way a
stone is a stone’, that is, in the manner of the self-identity of being-in-itself. But, of
course, that is precisely what he cannot do—since, as conscious, he is ‘in situation’ as a
homosexual. He is homosexual, French, courageous, or whatever, in the manner of
transcending that facticity. Still, it is that facticity which he transcends, ‘nihilates’,
‘others’. The ‘moral’ challenge, if that word is appropriate, is to live that tension from
day to day. One can no more resign oneself to complete identity as a homosexual than the
reformed gambler or alcoholic can rest secure in his or her ‘sobriety’ after years of
success. What others see as pessimism Sartre proclaims as hope: we are not condemned
by our upbringing, our characters or our past behaviour; we are freed from determinisms
of every kind; we can always make something out of what we have been made into.
Perhaps Sartre’s best description of ‘authenticity’ published in his lifetime is found in
Anti-Semite and Jew (1946): ‘Authenticity consists in having a true and lucid
consciousness of the situation, in assuming the responsibilities and risks it involves, in
accepting it in pride or humiliation, sometimes in horror and hate’ ([3.1], 90). What
emerges from existentialism in general and from Sartre in particular is authenticity as an
ethical style. Its elements are: first, a heightened awareness of facticity and possibility,

11.9 Page 109

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 71
that is, of the existential situation; second, the exercise of creative choice of self within
this situation; and finally, owning or appropriating the consequences of this choice, that
is, of the altered situation, the altered self. As he remarks in his posthumously published
Notebooks for an Ethics (1992), ‘It is this double, simultaneous aspect of the human
project, gratuitous at its core and consecrated by a reflective reprise, that makes it into
authentic existence’ ([3.26], 481). This is not amor fati. Simply to resign oneself to one’s
facticity is a lie, for it denies that other dimension of the existential situation,
transcendence or consciousness, which must sustain the resignation and thereby leave
rebellion a constant possibility. Rather, authenticity is the challenge to ‘have the courage
to go to the limits of ourselves in both directions at once’ ([3.32], 599). This is the moral
Sartre draws from the biography of his ‘hero’ of authenticity, Jean Genet.
The ambiguity of ‘situation’, its indeterminate mélange of facticity and transcendence,
reflects the now-self-coincidence of human reality. It makes ontologically possible ‘bad
faith’, the best known of Sartrean moral categories. There are two basic forms of bad
faith, depending on whether the individual flees the anguish of his or her freedom-
possibility for identification with facticity (for example, the alcoholic who is ‘cured’ once
and for all) or denies the force of circumstances to float in the realm of pure possibility
(like James Thurber’s Walter Mitty). Each is a kind of ‘lie to oneself, which, of course, is
impossible unless one introduces another kind of otherness or inner distance into human
reality, namely, one that affects consciousness itself.
Sartre discovers a twofold duality in the human way of being: ontological (presence-to-
self) and psychological (levels of consciousness). The former accounts for the otherness
that infects our very being; the latter divides our awareness such that we can be conscious
without ‘knowing’ it. The former constitutes the split; the latter renders possible the self-
deception. In Being and Nothingness, he speaks of ‘pre-reflective’ and ‘reflective’
consciousness. The former is our immediate experience of the other, our being-in-the-
world. It is ekstatic and pre-personal in the sense that it is not closed in on itself but is
‘already in the world’ when reflection intervenes. With reflection comes the self (as
quasi-object of reflection), the concepts of ‘knowledge’ as distinct from the notions of
‘understanding’, which are rooted in the pre-reflective, and the objects of deliberation to
which one turns when ‘making up one’s mind’.
Significantly, the pre-reflective enjoys both an epistemic and an ontological primacy. It
is the level of ‘fundamental project’ that orients our reflective moments as well as the
locus of that comprehension which accompanies every conscious act. In fact, pre-
reflective comprehension functions in Sartre’s thought in a manner not unlike Freud’s
‘unconscious’, to which Sartre was notoriously opposed. The chief and crucial difference
is that appeal to the pre-reflective enhances rather than diminishes responsibility for
Sartre. The extreme responsibility to which Sartre holds us in his polemical writings is an
application of this far-reaching concept of pre-reflective comprehension: we all
understand what we are about, even if we do not reflectively know it. Awareness and
responsibility are coextensive.
This virtual identification of consciousness and responsibility will strike many as
hyperbolic, given the traditional conditions for moral responsibility, namely, some degree
of control in addition to an element of knowledge. In the brief compass of a sub-section,
it is impossible to pursue this at length, but it should be noted that Sartre is concerned

11.10 Page 110

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 72
with ‘responsibility’ in the sense of being the ‘incontestable author of an event or of an
object’ ([3.2], 553). What we might call noetic responsibility, that is, our appropriation of
the meanings that constitute ‘our world’, is the ground of the other forms of responsibility
that Sartre acknowledges. And here it does not seem incredible to claim that awareness
and responsibility are extentionally equivalent. Sartre confirms this interpretation when
he occasionally responds as a trump card: ‘Well, he or she could always commit suicide.’
The point is that, if they did not do so, they have ‘chosen’ in the existential sense the
‘world’ in which they live.
Fundamental ‘choice’ or project is both the individuating feature of existential
ontology, the factor that distinguishes consciousnesses among themselves, and the
totalizing aspect of human reality that renders it thoroughly responsible for its situation.
Problematic as the concept is—Sartre once likened it to what psychologists mean by
‘selective attention’ (see [3.2], 462)—it is consistent with his claim that being-in-itself
cannot act upon consciousness, that the for-itself is a ‘pure spontaneous upsurge’, and
that consciousness is what makes motives motivate. Some have compared basic choice to
R.M.Hare’s ‘decisions of principle’ in that both are prior to the principles to which one
appeals in settling arguments. As Sartre puts it, when one pauses to decide, the ‘chips are
[already] down’ ([3.2], 451). Fundamental choice is constitutive, not selective. It is
coterminous with pre-reflective consciousness. It is a ‘choice’ which we ‘are/were’, to
paraphrase a barbarism that Sartre introduces to express the transitivity and harsh
facticity of lived time.
Because consciousness, choice, freedom, responsibility are roughly extentionally
equivalent terms in what Iris Murdoch called Sartre’s ‘great inexact equations’, the
challenge to authenticity and the consequences of inauthenticity are all-encompassing.
There is a ‘Weltanschauung of bad faith’, for example; it constitutes a manner of being-
in-the-world ([3.2], 68).
In a set of unpublished manuscripts for lectures in the 1960s, Sartre begins to elaborate
another, dialectical ethic. This is more socially minded than his characteristically
individualist stance of twenty years earlier. It builds on his concepts of situation and the
exemplarity of moral choices as well as the thesis that no one can be free if anyone is
enslaved—themes addressed briefly in his earlier works. His ontological categories are
those of the Critique of Dialectical Reason and his discussions, for the most part inchoate
and sketchy, are phenomenological descriptions of moral experience, especially the
following of moral norms and their violation in moments of moral crisis and creativity.
The ideal is no longer the ‘authentic’ individual but ‘integral man’, understood grosso
modo as the person who has entered into relations of positive reciprocity with others
whose basic animal and human needs have likewise been met such that they are liberated
from the alienating tyranny of material scarcity and the violence it engenders. These are
necessarily vague notions, Sartre admits, because they gain their precision from that
which they oppose, namely, what he calls ‘sub-man’ or the oppressed and oppressing
individuals of contemporary society.The most that can be said of integral man in the
present state of our social existence is that he or she is made possible by the continuous
refusal to live as sub-man. Although Sartre cites the colonist-native relationship to
exemplify the notion of sub-humanity, he has always considered this an instance of more
general relations of oppressive practice and structural exploitation that characterize

12 Pages 111-120

▲back to top

12.1 Page 111

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 73
bourgeois society.
Clearly, Sartre was dissatisfied with this second attempt and so in his last years
undertook a third ethic in discussion with Benny Levy. Characterized by Sartre as an
‘ethics of the WE’, this third version remains buried in the tape-recordings in Lévy’s
possession. From Sartre’s somewhat exaggerated accounts, we learn that this product of a
livre à deux was to leave uncriticized not a single major thesis of his earlier philosophy.
As we noted earlier, the published interviews indicate that this is not the case, though
they do reveal the revival of some more ‘positive’ theses from earlier works such as
Notebooks for an Ethics. In any case, these tapes, if they are ever published, will almost
certainly be chiefly of biographical value and are not likely to warrant our rejecting the
systematic thought of Sartre at his prime.
Existential psychoanalysis
Although it has ‘not yet found its Freud’ ([3.2], 575), this approach to understanding the
fundamental project of an agent is followed in increasing detail in Sartre’s ‘biographies’
of Baudelaire, Genet and Flaubert as well as in his Nobel-Prize-winning autobiography,
The Words.
The method is an application of the ontology of Being and Nothingness, although it
does not rely on the latter’s discredited social theory. It assumes that human reality is a
totalization, not a totality, and that this ongoing unity is forged by the existential project.
If human reality is the ‘useless passion’ to coincide consciously with itself, to be in-itself-
for-itself, that is, if each of us exemplifies the famous futile desire to be God, then
psychoanalysis exercises an hermeneutic on the signs of an individual’s life that indicate
its distinctive manner of living this futile desire—whether authentically, for example, or
inauthentically. Because pre-reflective consciousness has replaced the Freudian
unconscious, Sartre considers it possible in principle to understand an individual
completely, that is, to uncover his or her self-defining project in complete transparency.
Like so many of the claims enunciated at the height of existentialist enthusiasm, the ideal
of total transparency is qualified in Sartre’s later works, where force of circumstance
(‘what we have been made into’) modifies absolute freedom and ideology clouds
individual awareness. But he remained true to theRousseauian concept of personal and
social transparency, at least as an ideal.
The details of Sartre’s love-hate relationship with Freud have yet to be recounted. On
the one hand, he rejected the Freudian concept of the unconscious as being deterministic,
and criticized Freud’s ‘censor’ for being in bad faith (it both knows and does not know
what is acceptable to consciousness). And yet he employs the concept of pre-reflective
consciousness in a manner that imitates Freudian unconscious in important ways and
allows the analyst to reveal to the analys-and meanings which he or she had hitherto not
known (in a reflective sense). Preparing the never-to-be-filmed script for a John Houston
movie, later published as The Freud Scenario, forced Sartre to rethink his ideas about the
unconscious. He acknowledged finding Lacan’s theory of the unconscious structured as a
language less troublesome but did not go so far as to embrace the idea. As always, the
concept of individual freedom-responsibility remained a non-negotiable.
Sartre’s most ambitious exercise in existential psychoanalysis and most thorough use

12.2 Page 112

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 74
of the progressive-regressive method is his massive study of the life and work of Gustave
Flaubert, The Family Idiot (1971–2). Numbering over three thousand pages in the
original, it constitutes a kind of summa of Sartre’s intellectual endeavours, embracing
everything from ontology and psychoanalysis to literary and social criticism. It addresses
the question, ‘What at this point in time, can we know about a human being?’ ([3.15],
French, vol. 1, p. ix). A synthesis of existential psychoanalysis and historical materialism,
the progressive -regressive method seeks to uncover Flaubert’s basic project, namely, his
‘choice’ of the unreal-imaginary through adopting the ‘neurotic’ lifestyle that bourgeois
society thrust upon any would-be artist of Flaubert’s generation. As becomes usual in the
second phase of Sartre’s career, biography has broadened into social critique. What is
both banal and profound in Sartre’s undertaking is his attempt to comprehend Flaubert’s
life and times through the dialectical relationship between his progressive
‘personalization’ and the production and public reception of Madame Bovary. It is a
commonplace to study the ‘life and times’ of a historical figure in mutual clarification.
But there is something boldly ‘rationalistic’ about Sartre’s attempt to understand why
Flaubert had to write Bovary and how he could finally claim, ‘I am Madame Bovary.’
Philosophy and literature
No thinker in our century more adequately brokers the marriage of these two disciplines
than Sartre. His novels, short stories and plays gave him an audience denied to most
philosophers, and his criticism, gathered with occasional pieces in the ten volumes of
Situations, established him as a major voice in that domain. This was furthered by the
journal of opinion and criticism, Les Temps modernes, which he founded at the end of the
war. In a collection of articles published first in that journal and later as a book, What is
Literature? (1947), Sartre defends his concept of ‘committed literature’ (littérature
engagée). Given his ontological theses of the fundamental project and the possibility of
bad faith, Sartre examines literary art in terms of the authenticity and inauthenticity, not
merely of its content (which would smell of socialist critiques) but of its very form.
He distinguishes prose from what he calls generically ‘poetry’ and insists that the latter
cannot be committed. Poetry employs its ‘analogues’ (words, musical sounds, painted
surfaces and the like) as ends in themselves. They do not point beyond themselves to our
being-in-the-world but undertake to short-circuit that outward movement by rendering the
aesthetic object present-absent, that is, imaginatively present, for its own sake. We might
say that, for Sartre, where prose looks beyond the pointed finger to the object indicated,
‘poetry’ focuses on the fingertip. If not precisely escapist, such art avoids the challenges
of a period of crisis. Sartre believes that the postwar years form such a period. Hence his
recommendation that artists should address social concerns and do so in a manner that
‘gives the bourgeoisie a bad conscience’. Once he appropriates this advice himself,
ironically about the time the Nobel Committee is preparing to award him the prize for
literature, he all but abandons imaginative literature except for an adaptation of
Euripides’ The Trojan Women (1965) and his ‘novel that is true’ about Flaubert. And yet
this very move to committed literature reveals that the distinction between poetry and
prose is functional rather than substantive in the final analysis and that imaginative
‘derealization’ can constitute a form of social action even in genres that Sartre seemed to

12.3 Page 113

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 75
have dismissed as ‘poetic’. In fact his early (1948) praise of black poetry in French as
‘the only great revolutionary poetry of our time’ ([3.36], vol. 3, p. 233) indicates that he
had understood his original distinction in a functional manner from the start.
At this point we should summarize the elements of Sartre’s aesthetic theory. Its
foundation is the theory of imaging consciousness developed in Psychology of
Imagination. It applies intentionality to the constitution of an ‘aesthetic object’ for which
the physical artefact serves as analogon. Both cognitive and affective ‘intentions’
conspire to ‘presentify’, that is, to render imaginatively present-absent the object in an
aesthetic mode. In the case of non-figurative art, the artefact serves as analogon for itself.
Words or their grammatical and syntactical configuration form the analogue of the
literary object, a ‘world’ with its proper space and time that is a ‘derealization’ of our real
world of praxis. Given both the paradigmatic nature of imaging consciousness for Sartre
and the extensional equivalence of ‘consciousness’ and ‘freedom’, it is not surprising to
find him discussing the work of art as an ‘invitation from one freedom to another’ and
interpreting artistic creativity as an act of generosity. In fact, invitation-response replaces
command-obedience as the model for ideal social relations in Sartre’s ‘city of ends’, as
we shall now see.
Social philosophy
In his ‘biography’ of Jean Genet, Sartre avows: ‘For a long time we believed in the social
atomism bequeathed to us by the eighteenth century…. The truth is that “human reality”
“is-in-society” as it “is-in-the-world”; it is neither a nature nor a state; it is made’ ([3.32],
590). As we noted earlier, the possibility of developing an adequate social theory was
hampered by Sartre’s looking/looked-at model of interpersonal relations. At best, this
ontology warranted the methodological individualism that his erstwhile friend Raymond
Aron ascribed to him in the social realm. But by subsuming his philosophy of
consciousness into one of praxis, Sartre increases qualitatively the social potential of his
thought. Whereas there is no such thing as a plural look, except as a merely psychological
experience (a basic claim of methodological individualists), there is a ‘synthetic
enrichment’ of my action when it is incorporated into that of a group. ‘We’ can do many
things that remain impossible for me alone.
Sartre’s major contribution to social philosophy is made at the level of social ontology,
the theory of individual and group identity and action. It takes the form of two concepts,
the practico-inert and the mediating third. But to explain each we must first elucidate the
notion of praxis, which is the pivot on which his social theory turns.
Praxis denotes purposive human activity in its cultural environment. It is distinct from
human action sans phrase in being historical; its ‘world’ is a horizon of meanings that are
already ‘there’, yet liable to interpretation in light of the ongoing project. But whereas the
Husserlian discourse of intentions, meanings and noetic responsibility dominated the
landscape of Being and Nothingness, Sartre displays a marked preference for the
language of historical materialism in the Critique of Dialectical Reason. The basic form
of praxis is labour as a response to material need. This original relationship overcomes
whatever lingering idealism Sartre’s theory may have been liable to and generates a
dialectic of negation, negation of negation, and transcendence (dépassement) adapted

12.4 Page 114

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 76
from the Hegelio-Marxist tradition. If the early Sartre left the impression that one could
simply change oneself rather than change the world, since the terms were correlative in
any case, such ‘Stoic’ freedom is strongly opposed by the later Sartre, and the factical
component of one’s situation is finally given its due.
Functional heir to being-in-itself, the ‘practico-inert’ refers to the facticity of our social
situation in its otherness, especially the material dimension of our cultural environment,
as well as to those sedimented past praxes that return to haunt us. If the act of speaking is
an instance of praxis, language is a form of the practico-inert. This is the category of
‘counterfinality’ whereby intended ends entail unintended consequences. Sartre’s classic
example is the deforestation by Chinese peasants that resulted in the very erosion from
floods of the land they hoped to cultivate. Similarly, he employs this concept in his
account of the impoverishment of the Spanish state through inflation caused by its
hoarding of gold from its newly exploited American mines. Practicoinert ‘mediation’ is
alienating, it steals one’s activity the way the ‘look’ of the Other robs one of one’s
freedom in Being and Nothingness. And when qualified by material scarcity, practico-
inert mediation renders human relations violent. Sartre describes violence as ‘interiorized
scarcity’. The fact that there is not enough of the goods of the world to go around colours
human history as a tale of violence and terror. Towards the end of his life, Sartre admitted
to Benny Levy that he had never reconciled these fundamental features of social life,
fraternity and violence. Both are essential to his social thought.
‘Fraternity’ is Sartre’s term for the mutuality and positive reciprocity that constitute his
social ideal and which are achieved, albeit temporarily, in the spontaneously formed
action group. Most relations are ‘serial’ because they are mediated by the practico-inert.
Most of the individuals who populate our world, from the television-viewing public to the
people waiting for the same bus, are rendered serial by the ‘false’ or ‘external’ unity
imposed on them by such collective objects as a television announcer or an expected bus.
They are related among themselves as ‘other’ to ‘other’—as competitors for scarce space,
for example, or as fashioning their opinions as the newscaster dictates. Sartre notes that
such ‘serial impotence’ is cultivated by dictators who wish to maintain an illusion of
power on the part of their subjects in the midst of the latter’s profound malleability.
In the ‘apocalyptic’ moment when people realize in a practical manner through a
common project that they are ‘the same’, not ‘other’, and that each is performing the task
which the other would do were he or she required to do so at this point, the ‘We’ emerges
in a fusing group. Sartre’s idealized example of such a genesis is the famous storming of
the Bastille. Under threat from an external source, the crowd changes from serial
dispersion to practical unity, from a mob to a group. By a performative utterance that
effects what it describes, the cry ‘We are a hundred strong!’ in Sartre’s imaginative
reconstruction of the event creates a new entity: the fused group. The mediating Third is
the ontological vehicle for this transformation. Unlike the objectifying voyeur of Being
and Nothingness, the third party in group formation performs a mediating, not an
alienating function. By subordinating purely personal or divisive concerns to general
interest, he or she emerges as the ‘common individual’. Mediation is exercised no longer
via the practico-inert but by means of the praxes of ‘common’ individuals. Complete
organic integration is impossible, Sartre continues to insist; some otherness always
remains. But it is ‘discounted’, not fostered. He calls it ‘free alterity’ of the group in

12.5 Page 115

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 77
praxis as opposed to the serial otherness of the impotent collective.
A threefold primacy of praxis emerges in Sartre’s later thought. At the ground is an
ontological primacy. Even at the highest moment of social integration, the group-in-
fusion, it is organic praxes who create and sustain the group. The entire ‘inner life’ of the
group is a revolving circle of practical relations whereby each praxis ‘interiorizes’ the
multiplicity of the rest. (Any member could have cried ‘We are a hundred strong!’) Even
the practico-inert is not an autonomous force that renders us powerless. It is, after all,
practico-inert; the praxes that it absorbs or deflects are still operative, though in alienated
fashion. Sartre explicitly adopts the Marxist thesis that ‘there are only individuals and
real relations among them’ ([3.35], 76). If Sartre’s early work was a relentless rejection
of idealism, his later, social theory is intent on avoiding organicism. The ontological
primacy of praxis is his chief weapon in that campaign.
On this original primacy Sartre founds an epistemological and an ethical primacy as
well. The epistemological primacy of praxis stems from the fact that comprehension is
the consciousness of praxis and that we can comprehend the other’s comprehension
through the progressive-regressive method. This is an elaboration of the Verstehende
sociology of Dilthey, Weber and others, placed in service of an historical materialist
conception of social change. But unlike Marxist ‘economism’, the comprehension Sartre
seeks comes to rest in the praxisproject of the organic individual. Sartre summarized the
difference in a memorable line: ‘Valéry is a petit bourgeois intellectual…. But not every
petit bourgeois intellectual is Valéry’ ([3.35], 56).
Because individual praxis sustains the most impersonal economic laws, like the ‘iron
law of wages’, and the most ‘necessary’ practicoinert processes, such as the colonialist
system, one can ascribe existential-moral responsibility to the serialized ‘agents’ whose
passive activity carries them out. In other words, one cannot escape responsibility by
appeal to facticity. For Sartre the moralist, the spark of human freedom-responsibility is
unquenchable: you can always make something out of what you have been made into.
Philosophy of history
A glance at the posthumously published War Diaries which Sartre kept during the
Phoney War of 1939–40 reveals that his interest in the topic was not the result of his so-
called conversion to Marxism after the war. But he does set the matter aside in Being and
Nothingness, reserving a lengthy discussion of morality and history for his Notebooks for
an Ethics, again not published in his lifetime. In the Diaries, his dialogue is primarily
with Raymond Aron, whose two volumes on the philosophy of history had just been
published. In criticism of Aron, Sartre enunciates a thesis that will be formative of his
existential approach to history ever after: the only way to achieve historical unity is by
studying the lived appropriation of historical events by an individual agent. What is being
sketched at this early stage is the rationale of his existential psychoanalyses of the next
decades. If history is to be more than the positivist concatenation of facts and dates, it
must come to life in the projects of the historical agent. This is more than psychohistory,
to which it exhibits a marked resemblance, because of Sartre’s characteristic moral
concerns as well as the historical materialist dimension which he will introduce after the
war.

12.6 Page 116

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 78
In the Notebooks Sartre indicates that an existentialist theory of history will have to
respect the paradox of moral responsibility. At this stage the dialogue is with Hegel and
the French Hegelians, Kojève and Hyppolite. The existentialist individual makes an ‘end’
to history inconceivable: any totality of which consciousness is part will be a
‘detotalized’ totality. Although he speaks of positive reciprocity, the generosity-gift
relationship and good faith in ways that correct the one-sided, pessimistic view of
interpersonal relations conveyed in Being and Nothingness, these notes remain in thrall to
the looking/looked-at model of the social. Accordingly, the theory of history is faced with
seemingly insurmountable difficulties as it attempts to interrelate the individual and the
social, morality and history.
It is in the two volumes of the Critique of Dialectical Reason, where the dialogue is
now with Merleau-Ponty’s criticism of his social thought in the latter’s The Adventures of
Dialectic, that Sartre formulates the philosophy of praxis and its attendant social
ontology that enable him to construct a theory of history that accounts for collective
action and counterfinalities, recognizes the specificity of the sociohistorical, and reserves
pride of place for existential-moral responsibility on the part of organic individuals. Since
his War Diaries, it has been clear that the root problem for an existentialist theory is the
relationship between biography and history. He treats this matter apropos of Joseph Stalin
and the Soviet Union in the 1930s in his posthumously published notes for volume 2 of
the Critique, but the relation of biography to history receives its most extended
consideration in The Family Idiot (especially in volume 3 of the French edition).
SARTRE AND TWENTIETH-CENTURY CONTINENTAL PHILOSOPHY
Although one of the few major twentieth-century philosophers not to be associated with
academe for most of his career, Sartre was professionally trained and remained in
dialogue with academic philosophy all of his life. Any assessment of his thought should
address his relationship to the leading philosophical movements of his time.
Existential phenomenology
It was Gabriel Marcel who first called Sartre an ‘existentialist’. By the time of his famous
public lecture, Existentialism is a Humanism (1945), his name had become synonymous
with the movement. Indeed, it was in part to separate himself from association with
Sartrean existentialism that Heidegger denied he was an existentialist and wrote his
groundbreaking Letter on Humanism (1947) to explain why. We have noted Sartre’s debt
to Husserlian phenomenology throughout this chapter. In Being and Nothingness he
criticizes Hegel, Husserl and Heidegger at several junctures but clearly has adopted
numerous concepts from each. While it is a gross exaggeration to characterize Sartre’s
masterwork as ‘Being and Time translated into French’, the similarities as well as the
profound differences between each thinker are underscored by comparing the two works.
As soon as a French translation of Heidegger’s 1930 lecture The Essence of Truth
appeared (1948), Sartre wrote a lengthy response. It was published posthumously as
Truth and Existence (1989).

12.7 Page 117

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 79
Sartre was a close collaborator with Simone de Beauvoir in the sense that they read
each other’s work prior to publication, and she completed several of the lacunae in his
social ethic in the mid-1940s with her The Ethics of Ambiguity. Despite its obvious
originality, Merleau-Ponty’s The Phenomenology of Perception shows numerous signs of
Sartrean influence, even as it takes Sartre to task for his ‘Cartesianism’. But we noted that
the Critique seems to be a response to the trenchant criticism levelled by Merleau-Ponty
in his Adventures of the Dialectic against a Sartrean social philosophy. Sartre’s
indebtedness both to Merleau-Ponty and to Kierkegaard is recounted in memorial essays
he penned in honour of each (‘Merleau-Ponty Alive’ (1961) and ‘Kierkegaard: The
Singular Universal’ (1966)).
The ‘existential turn’ that Husserl’s phenomenological movement took, if initiated by
Heidegger, was completed by Sartre. To the extent that such phenomenology grew
increasingly anthropological and ethical, it became associated with its French
practitioners. The phenomenological method was enriched and its limitations as an
approach to history were compensated for by the progressive-regressive method. This
last, as we noted, is a synthesis of existential psychoanalysis and historical materialism.
The former places it in direct line with the hermeneutic tradition of interpreting symbolic
action; the latter relates Sartre’s method to more ‘scientific’ (in the Hegelian sense)
approaches to historical intelligibility.
Marxism
Sartre’s ‘Marxism’ was always adjectival to his existentialism. In the late 1940s, he
advised the workers to support the Communist Party faute de mieux, while refusing to
join it himself. In Search for a Method, he declares Marxism ‘the philosophy of our
times’ and even makes it synonymous with ‘knowledge’ (savoir). But he described the
Critique of Dialectical Reason, to which Search served as a kind of preface, as an ‘anti-
communist book’ and in his last years explicitly denied he was a Marxist. Still, historical
materialism (the Marxist theory of history) is operative in The Family Idiot as well as in
his other writings after the late 1950s.
Sartre joins that group of Marxists known as ‘revisionists’ in that they question or
reject totally the Marxist dialectic of nature (DIAMAT) and emphasize the humanistic
dimension of Marx’s writings. In Search for a Method, Sartre announces that his mission
in this regard is ‘to conquer man within Marxism’ ([3.35], 83). It is because of their
failure to respect the moral dimension of human action, that Sartre abandoned even
fellow-travelling in favour of les maos after the events in Paris of 1968. This odyssey is
recounted in his discussion with two members of that group, published as On a raison de
se révolter (1974).
Structuralism
The structuralist movement in France as exemplified by the work of Althusser, Lacan,
Lévi-Strauss, Barthes and others in the 1960s is commonly credited with having replaced
existentialism as the reigning Parisian ‘philosophy’. This is true to a large extent, though
that school of thought was subsequently eclipsed by poststructuralist writers. Sartre

12.8 Page 118

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 80
occasionally criticized the structuralists for ignoring history in general and human agency
in particular—essential existentialist concerns. But even a cursory reading of the Critique
of Dialectical Reason will reveal the important role that Sartre reserves for structural
factors in his account. The ‘formal conditions’ revealed by the regressive movement of
the progressive-regressive method are arguably structural. In fact, the major portion of
volume 1 of the Critique is synchronic and structural. Whether it is thereby ‘structuralist’
depends on the meaning of the term. Clearly, Sartre opposed it as a system because of its
inadequacy to existential experience. And its binary relations, he would accept only as
complementing the dialectical, totalizing ‘Reason’ that he was elucidating in the Critique.
The ontological locus of structural relations in his social ontology is the practico-inert.
Recall that language as such, for him, is practicoinert. So too is analytical, as distinct
from dialectical, reason. Sartre speaks of the practico-inert and hence of structure as non-
historical and even ‘anti-dialectical’. But this must be taken in the context of the
totalizing activity of praxis, which renders these structures historically relevant. The
‘platonizing’ tendencies of structuralist thought are tempered by Sartre’s ‘dialectical
nominalism’, an approach to ontology and epistemology that respects the qualitative
difference between individual and collective phenomena as well as the irreducibility of
the latter to the former, while insisting on the threefold primacy of free organic praxis.
Dialectical nominalism is a middle ground between holism and individualism in the
methodology of the social sciences.
Postmodernism
Foucault once referred to Sartre as the last of the nineteenth-century philosophers. It was
not only his interest in History with a Hegelian ‘H’ and his seeming fixation on Flaubert
that generated this remark. It was equally Sartre’s philosophy of the subject, of freedom
and of moral indignation that lay behind Foucault’s words. And yet one can find several
strikingly ‘postmodern’ theses in Sartre’s work. These would make valuable
contributions to the current philosophical conversationand deserve closer scrutiny by
contemporary thinkers. By way of conclusion let us consider three.
Postmodern thinking is noted for its ‘evacuation of the subject’ from current discourse.
In so far as the ‘subject’ in question is the Cartesian res cogitans, Sartre never held that
position. His concept of ‘presence to self instead of a substantial self or ego, with its
attendant ‘circuit of selfness’ rather than an outer spatio-temporal plane, leaves Sartre
free to consider the fluidity of subjectivist discourse and speak of the self as an
achievement rather than an origin. The constitution of a moral ‘self, to which Foucault
devoted his last years, could have been the topic of a Sartrean treatise.
There is an aesthetic strain in Sartre’s thought, owing to the paradigmatic role that he
accords imaging consciousness. Postmodern critics from Lyotard to Foucault have shown
a marked preference for aesthetic categories as well, even to the point of advocating the
Nietzschean aestheticist injunction to ‘make one’s life a work of art’. Not that Sartre
should ever be accused of aestheticism. But his reading of history is certainly ‘poetic’,
and his existential biographies as ‘novels that are true’ suggest a fruitful field of future
inquiry and dialogue with postmodern writers.
The Nietzschean inspiration of Sartre’s thought has not received the attention it

12.9 Page 119

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 81
deserves, especially since the ‘postmodern’ Nietzsche has emerged. Sartre’s early essay
‘The Legend of Truth’, written in 1929, is profoundly Nietzschean in content and tone.
The general problem of contingency and chance, which Foucault wished to reintroduce
into postmodern historiography, was an abiding theme of Sartre’s existentialist thought. It
surfaces again in the posthumous Notebooks for an Ethics. The career of Nietzschean
interpretation forms another link between Sartre and postmodern thinkers.
And yet it would be excessive to refer to Sartre as a ‘postmodern’. He was a thinker of
unities, not of fragments. His emphasis on intentional consciousness and later on
totalizing praxis was meant to counter the historical pluralism of Raymond Aron as well
as the brute facts of the positivists. And his corresponding commitments aimed at
effecting socio-economic changes that would make it possible for ‘freedoms’ to
recognize one another. He shared the neo-Stoic belief of postmoderns that one should try
to maximize freedom even though there is no hope of complete emancipation. But he
persevered in the hope that such a ‘city of ends’ might be possible and urged people to
work to realize its advent. Again, we encounter the integral role of the imagination in
effecting a meaning-direction (sens) to history.
If Sartre is to be remembered as an important and influential philosopher of the
twentieth century, it will be as much for the consistency of his commitment to individual
freedom as for the insights of his phenomenological descriptions and the force of his
categories (bad faith, authenticity, practico-inert, and the like). When he died, the press
likened him to Voltaire and noted that we had lost the conscience of our age. It is as
moralist, philosopher of freedom and philosopher of the imagination that he made his
most memorable contributions. Despite the Teutonic length of his sentences, especially in
the later works, he was a quintessential Gallic philosopher.
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
References to the original French texts are given below only in cases where the
translations in the text of the chapter are by the author and not from the published
versions.
Translations
3.1 Anti-Semite and Jew, trans. G.J.Becker, New York: Schocken, 1948.
3.2 Being and Nothingness, trans. H.E.Barnes, New York: Philosophical Library, 1956.
3.3 Between Existentialism and Marxism, trans. J.Mathews, New York: William Morrow,
1974.
3.4 ‘Cartesian Freedom’, in [3.18], 180–97.
3.5 The Communists and Peace with A Reply to Claude Lefort, trans. M.H. Fletcher and
P.R.Berk respectively, New York: Braziller, 1968.
3.6 The Condemned of Altona, trans. S. and G.Leeson, New York: Random House,
Vintage Books, 1961.
3.7 ‘Consciousness of Self and Knowledge of Self’, in N.Lawrence and D. O’Connor
(eds), Readings in Existential Phenomenology, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1967.

12.10 Page 120

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 82
3.8 Critique of Dialectical Reason, 2 vols: vol. 1 Theory of Practical Ensembles, trans.
A.Sheridan-Smith, London: NLB, 1976; vol 2, The Intelligibility of History, trans.
Q.Hoare, London: Verso, 1991. An emended edition of vol.1 was produced by
A.Elkam-Sartre, Critique de la raison dialectique précédé de Questions de méthode,
vol. 1, Théorie des ensembles pratiques, Paris: Gallimard, 1985.
3.9 The Devil and the Good Lord, trans. K.Black, New York: Random House, Vintage
Books, 1960.
3.10 Ecrits de Jeunesse, ed. M.Contat and M.Rybalka, Paris: Gallimard, 1990.
3.11 The Emotions: Outline of a Theory, trans. B.Frechtman, New York: Philosophical
Library, 1948.
3.12 Entretiens sur la politique, with D.Rousset and G.Rosenthal, Paris: Gallimard, 1949.
3.13 ‘Existentialism is a Humanism’, in Existentialism from Dostoevsky to Sartre,
selected and intro. W.Kaufmann, Cleveland: World Publishing, Meridian Books, 1956.
3.14 ‘Hope, Now…Sartre’s Last Interview’, Dissent, 27 (1980):397–422.
3.15 L’Idiot de la famille, 3 vols, Paris: Gallimard, 1971–2, vol. 3 revised edn, 1988; vols
1 and 2 trans. C.Cosman as The Family Idiot, 4 vols, Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1981–91.
3.16 ‘Intentionality: A Fundamental Idea of Husserl’s Phenomenology’, Journal of the
British Society for Phenomenology, 1:2 (1970):4–5.
3.17 ‘Introducing Les Temps modernes, in [3.41], 247–67.
3.18 Life/Situations: Essays Written and Spoken, trans. P.Auster and L.Davis, New York:
Pantheon, 1977.
3.19 Literary and Philosophical Essays, trans. A.Michelson, New York: Crowell-Collier,
Collier Books, 1962.
3.20 ‘A Long, Bitter, Sweet Madness’, Encounter, 22 (1964):61–3.
3.21 Marxisme et existentialisme: Controverse sur la dialectique, with R.Garaudy,
J.Hyppolite, J.P.Vigier, and J.Orcel, Paris: Plon, 1962.
3.22 ‘Materialism and Revolution’, in [3.18], pp. 198–256.
3.23 ‘Merleau-Ponty’, in [3.36], vol. 4, pp. 189–287.
3.24 Nausea, trans. L.Alexander, New York: New Directions, 1959.
3.25 ‘No Exit’ and Three Other Plays, trans. L.Abel, New York: Random House, Vintage
Books, 1955.
3.26 Notebooks for an Ethics, trans. D.Pellauer, Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1992.
3.27 Oeuvres Romanesques, ed. M.Contat and M.Rybalka with G.Idt and G. H.Bauer,
Paris: Gallimard, 1981.
3.28 On a raison de se révolter, with P.Gavi and P.Victor, Paris: Gallimard, 1974.
3.29 On Genocide, intro. A.Elkaïm-Sartre, Boston: Beacon, 1968.
3.30 The Psychology of Imagination, trans. B.Frechtman, New York: Washington Square
Press, 1966; L’Imaginaire, Paris: Gallimard, 1940.
3.31 ‘The Responsibility of the Writer’, in Reflections on Our Age, intro. D. Hardiman,
New York: Columbia University Press, 1949.
3.32 Saint Genet, Actor and Martyr, trans. B.Frechtman, New York: Braziller, 1963.
3.33 Sartre on Theater, ed. M.Contat and M.Rybalka, trans. F.Jellinek, New York:
Pantheon, 1976.

13 Pages 121-130

▲back to top

13.1 Page 121

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 83
3.34 Sartre, un film, produced by A.Astruc and M.Contat, Paris: Gallimard, 1977.
3.35 Search for a Method, trans. H.E.Barnes, New York: Random House, Vintage Books,
1968.
3.36 Situations, 10 vols, Paris: Gallimard, 1947–6.
3.37 The Transcendence of the Ego, trans. F.Williams and R.Kirkpatrick, New York:
Noonday Press, 1957.
3.38 Truth and Existence, trans. A.van den Hoven, Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1992.
3.39 ‘L’Universel singulier’, in [3.36], vol. 9, pp. 152–90; ‘Kierkegaard: The Singular
Universal’, in [3.2], pp. 141–69.
3.40 War Crimes in Vietnam, with V.Dedier, Nottingham: The Bertrand Russell Peace
Foundation, 1971.
3.41 The War Diaries, trans Q.Hoare, New York: Pantheon, 1984.
3.42 What is Literature? and Other Essays, trans. B.Frechtman et al., intro. S. Ungar,
Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1988.
3.43 The Words, trans. B.Frechtman, New York: Braziller, 1964.
3.44 Preface to The Wretched of the Earth by F.Fanon, trans. C.Farrington, New York:
Grove Press, 1968.
Bibliographies
3.45 Contat, M. and Rybalka, M. The Writings of Jean-Paul Sartre, 2 vols, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1974. Updated in Magazine littéraire, no. 103–4
(1975):9–49; and in Obliques, 18–19 (1979):331–47.
3.46 Contat, M. and Rybalka, M. Sartre: Bibliographie 1980–1992, Paris: CNRS, 1993.
3.47 Lapoint, F. and C. Jean-Paul Sartre and His Critics: An International Bibliography
(1938–1980), 2nd edn, rev., Bowling Green: Philosophy Documentation Center, 1981.
3.48 Wilcocks, R. Jean-Paul Sartre: A Bibliography of International Criticism,
Edmonton: University of Alberta Press, 1975.
Criticism
3.49 Anderson, T.C. The Foundation and Structure of Sartrean Ethics, Lawrence:
Regents Press of Kansas, 1979.
3.50 Aron, R. History and the Dialectic of Violence, trans. B.Cooper, Oxford: Basil
Blackwell, 1975.
3.51 Aronson, R. Jean-Paul Sartre, New York: New Left Books, 1980.
3.52 Aronson, R. Sartre’s Second Critique, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987.
3.53 Aronson, R. and van den Hoven, A. (eds), Sartre Alive, Detroit: Wayne State
University Press, 1991.
3.54 Barnes, H.E. Sartre, New York: Lippincott, 1973.
3.55 Barnes, H.E. Sartre and Flaubert, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981.
3.56 Bell, L.A. Sartre’s Ethics of Authenticity, Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press,
1989.
3.57 Burnier, M.A. Choice of Action, trans. B.Murchland, New York: Random House,

13.2 Page 122

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 84
1968.
3.58 Busch, T.W. The Power of Consciousness and the Force of Circumstances in
Sartre’s Philosophy, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1990.
3.59 Cannon, B. Sartre and Psychoanalysis, Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1991.
3.60 Catalano, J.S. A Commentary on Jean-Paul Sartre’s ‘Being and Nothingness’,
Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1980.
3.61 Catalano, J.S. A Commentary on Jean-Paul Sartre’s ‘Critique of Dialectical
Reason,’ Volume 1, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986.
3.62 Caws, P. Sartre, London: Routledge, 1979.
3.63 Collins, D. Sartre as Biographer, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,
1980.
3.64 Danto, A.C. Jean-Paul Sartre, New York: Viking Press, 1975.
3.65 de Beauvoir, S. Adieux: A Farewell to Sartre, trans. P.O’Brian, New York:
Pantheon, 1984.
3.66 de Beauvoir, S. Letters to Sartre, trans. and ed. Q.Hoare, New York: Arcade, 1991.
3.67 Desan, W. The Marxism of Jean-Paul Sartre, Garden City: Doubleday Anchor
Books, 1965.
3.68 Detmer, D. Freedom as Value, La Salle: Open Court, 1986.
3.69 Fell, J. Emotion in the Thought of Sartre, New York: Columbia University Press,
1965.
3.70 Fell, J. Heidegger and Sartre: An Essay on Being and Place, New York: Columbia
University Press, 1979.
3.71 Flynn, T.R. L’Imagination au Pouvoir: The Evolution of Sartre’s Political and
Social Thought’, Political Theory, 7:2 (1979):175–80.
3.72 Flynn, T.R. ‘Mediated Reciprocity and the Genius of the Third’, in [3.83], 345–70.
3.73 Flynn, T.R., Sartre and Marxist Existentialism: The Test Case of Collective
Responsibility, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984.
3.74 Hollier, D. The Politics of Prose, trans. J.Mehlman, Minneapolis: University of
Minnesota Press, 1986.
3.75 Howells, C. (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to Sartre, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1992.
3.76 Jameson, F. Marxism and Form, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1971.
3.77 Jeanson, F. Sartre and the Problem of Morality, trans. and intro. R.V.Stone,
Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1981.
3.78 McBride, W.L. Fundamental Change in Law and Society: Hart and Sartre on
Revolution , The Hague: Mouton, 1970.
3.79 McBride, W.L. Sartre’s Political Theory, Bloomington: Indiana University Press,
1991.
3.80 Merleau-Ponty, M. Adventures of the Dialectic, trans J.Bien, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1973.
3.81 Murdoch, I. Sartre, Romantic Rationalist, New Haven: Yale University Press, 1953.
3.82 Poster, Mark, Sartre’s Marxism, London: Pluto Press, 1979.
3.83 Schilpp, P.A. (ed.) The Philosophy of Jean-Paul Sartre, La Salle: Open Court, 1981.
3.84 Silverman, H.J. Inscriptions: Between Phenomenology and Structuralism, London:
Routledge, 1987.

13.3 Page 123

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 85
3.85 Silverman, H.J. and Elliston, F.A. (eds) Jean-Paul Sartre: Contemporary
Approaches to his Philosophy, Pittsburgh: Duquesne University Press, 1980.
3.86 Verstraaten, P. et al. Sur les écrits posthumes de Sartre, Bruxelles: Editions de
l’université de Bruxelles, 1987.
Journal issues devoted to Sartre
3.87 L’Arc, 30 (1966).
3.88 Journal of the British Society for Phenomenology, 12 (1970).
3.89 Magazine Littéraire, 55–6 (1971) and 103–4 (1975).
3.90 Obliques, 18–19 (1979) and 24–5 (1981).
3.91 Les Temps modernes, 2 vols, nos 531–3 (1990).

13.4 Page 124

▲back to top
CHAPTER 4
Philosophy of existence 3
Merleau-Ponty
Bernard Cullen
à Henri Godin
LIFE AND WORKS
Maurice Merleau-Ponty was born on 14 March 1908 into a petty bourgeois Catholic
family in Rochefort-sur-Mer on the west coast of France. When he died suddenly, at his
desk, on 3 May 1961, he was widely regarded as France’s most brilliant and most
profound philosopher.
After his father, an artillery officer, died in 1913, the young Maurice grew up in Paris,
in the company of his mother, a brother and a sister. He told Jean-Paul Sartre, in 1947,
that he had never recovered from an incomparably happy childhood ([4.99], 230).
Schooled, as were all philosophy students of his generation, in a distinctively French
philosophical tradition dominated by Cartesianism, he entered the most elite
establishment for the study of philosophy in France, the Ecole Normale Supérieure in
Paris, in 1926. It was there he first made the acquaintance of Sartre, in circumstances he
was to recount twenty years later in the course of an affectionate defence of that
‘scandalous author’ against his detractors on the right and on the left: ‘the Ecole Normale
unleashed its fury against one of my schoolmates and myself for having hissed the
traditional songs, too vulgar to suit us. He slipped between us and our persecutors and
contrived a way for us to get out of our heroic and ridiculous situation without
concessions or damages’ ([4.22], 41). Simone de Beauvoir describes in her
autobiographical novel Memoirs of a Dutiful Daughter, under the fictitious name
Pradelle, her friend and fellow student Merleau-Ponty, a rather serious but optimistic
young searcher after truth who still attended mass.
At the Ecole Normale, Merleau-Ponty’s main teacher was the idealist Léon
Brunschvicg. In the academic year 1928–9, he prepared a dissertation on Plotinus, under
the supervision of Emile Bréhier. Between 1928 and 1930, he attended a series of lectures
given at the Sorbonne by Georges Gurvitch on contemporary German phenomenology,
especially the writings of Husserl, Scheler and Heidegger; and in February 1929, he
attended the lectures given at the Sorbonne by Husserl himself, which were revised and
published two years later as the Cartesian Meditations. One phrase from those lectures
recurs as a leitmotiv throughout Merleau-Ponty’s work: ‘It is “pure and, in a way, still
mute experience which it is a question of bringing to the pure expression of its own
significance”’ ([4.18], 219; cf. [4.24], 129 and [4.21], 188). The growing interest in
German philosophy within Parisian philosophical circles was not confined to

13.5 Page 125

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 87
phenomenology. The year 1929 also saw the publication of Jean Wahl’s pioneering book
Le Malheur de la conscience dans la philosophie de Hegel (The Unhappy Consciousness
in the Philosophy of Hegel).
After graduating in second place in the 1930 examinations for the agrégation en
philosophie (the qualification required to prepare candidates for the baccalauréat) and
carrying out a year’s compulsory military service, Merleau-Ponty taught philosophy in
lycées in Beauvais and Chartres. He taught himself German. (For his own account of his
researches at this time into the nature of perception, together with a list of the works he
read in 1933–4, see [4.60], 188–99.) In 1935, he was appointed as a tutor at the Ecole
Normale, where he remained until mobilization in 1939. His first two published works, in
the Catholic journal La Vie intellectuelle, were sympathetic critical notices of the French
translation of Max Scheler’s book on ‘ressentiment’ (1935) and Etre et avoir by Gabriel
Marcel (1936). (For a summary of these articles, see [4.60], 13–24.)
In the mid-1930s, he began to deepen his study of Marx, especially the writings of the
young Marx. From 1935, he attended the influential lectures by Alexandre Kojève at the
Ecole Pratique des Hautes Etudes on Hegel’s Phenomenology of Spirit—a reading of
Hegel deeply influenced by the writings of the young Marx, subsequently published
under the title Introduction à la lecture de Hegel. But around this time (and until the end
of 1937), he was still closely associated with the left-leaning Catholic journals Esprit and
Sept. The closure of Sept, on instructions from the Vatican, was probably the final blow
to his religious faith. In the same way, the publication in 1939 of the reports of the
Moscow trials of Bukharin and twenty others the previous year must have influenced his
decision not to commit himself to membership of the French Communist Party.
His minor doctoral thesis, The Structure of Behavior, was completed in 1938 (though
not published in book form until 1942). In early 1939, Merleau-Ponty became acquainted
with a special issue of the Revue internationale de philosophie devoted to Husserl (who
had died in April 1938). The references therein, especially by Eugen Fink, to Husserl’s
last book, The Crisis of the European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology,
whetted his appetite to learn more about this work, only the first part of which had been
published. At the beginning of April, he was the very first visitor to the Husserl Archive
at Louvain in Belgium (whence the Husserl papers had been hurriedly moved), where he
read the entirety of The Crisis, Ideas II, and a number of other unpublished pieces. (See
[4.110].) These brief encounters undoubtedly had a decisive influence on the way in
which Merleau-Ponty appropriated the later thought of Husserl and incorporated it into
the heart of his own philosophy.
The outbreak of war forced Merleau-Ponty to interrupt his research. After a year as a
second lieutenant, he was appointed to a post in the Lycée Carnot, where he remained
until 1944, when he took over from Sartre as senior philosophy teacher at the Lycée
Condorcet. In the meantime, in 1941, he had encountered Sartre again, when he joined
Socialism and Liberty, one of the many groups, as Sartre put it, ‘which claimed to be
resisting the conquering enemy’ ([4.99], 231). As Sartre tells it in his remarkably moving
extended obituary, the two men immediately recognized their common interests: ‘The
key words were spoken: phenomenology, existentialism. We discovered our real concern.
Too individualist to ever pool our research, we became reciprocal while remaining
separate…. Husserl became our bond and our division, at one and the same time’ ([4.99],

13.6 Page 126

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 88
231).
Throughout this period, Merleau-Ponty continued to work on his principal doctoral
thesis and philosophical masterpiece, the Phenomenology of Perception, which was
accepted and published in 1945. Appointed lecturer in philosophy at the University of
Lyons, he was made professor in 1948. He combined these duties with editing the left-
wing, anti-colonialist journal Les Temps modernes, which with Sartre and Simone de
Beauvoir he had founded shortly after the Liberation. (See [4.99], 247–53.) He was the
journal’s (anonymous) political editor and editor-in-chief, writing most of the editorials
(unsigned) and many lengthy articles (signed), several of them later gathered in his book
Humanism and Terror: an Essay on the Communist Problem, published in 1947. Others
were gathered in the collection Sense and Non-Sense, published in 1948. According to
Sartre’s reminiscences, ‘the review belonged to him. He had defined its political
orientation, and I had followed him’ ([4.99], 283). From 1949 to 1952, he occupied the
chair of child psychology and pedagogy at the Sorbonne; and in 1952, at the unusually
early age of 44, he was appointed to the most prestigious position for an academic
philosopher in France, the chair of philosophy at the Collège de France. He gave his
inaugural lecture, entitled In Praise of Philosophy, at the Collège on 15 January 1953.
Relations with Sartre had been cooling for some time: they disagreed deeply over the
role of the Communist Party and the actions of the Soviet Union before and during the
Korean War, and Merleau-Ponty resigned as editor-in-chief of Les Temps modernes in
1952. Almost half of the book in which, in 1955, Merleau-Ponty renounced his adherence
to Marxism, Adventures of the Dialectic, was devoted to a merciless critique of ‘Sartre
and ultrabolshevism’. A further collection of essays was published under the title Signs in
1960. His last published work, Eye and Mind, had just appeared in the journal Art de
France when Merleau-Ponty died suddenly on 3 May 1961, from a stroke, aged 53. The
divisions between him and Sartre had been gradually healing. Merleau-Ponty had taken
the opportunity of his Introduction to Signs to record in print his affectionate admiration
for Sartre. He counters Sartre’s harsh self-criticism (in his Preface to Aden Arabie, by
their mutual friend Paul Nizan) with the observation that ‘his accursed lucidity, in
lighting up the labyrinths of rebellion and revolution, has recorded in spite of himself all
we need to absolve him’ ([4.23], 24). Sartre, for his part, records his surprise and delight
when Merleau-Ponty unexpectedly turned up, shortly before his death, at a lecture Sartre
gave at the Ecole Normale. Among his many posthumous publications, the two most
important are The Prose of the World (notes dating from 1950–2) and the unfinished
manuscript of the book on which he was working at the time of his death, The Visible and
the Invisible.
THE PRIMACY OF PERCEPTION
In a paper he wrote in 1952 to support his candidacy for the chair of philosophy at the
Collège de France, Merleau-Ponty offers a brief summary of the themes of his work thus
far, before proceeding to outline his plans for future research. He begins by referring to
‘the perceived world which is simply there before us, beneath the level of the verified
true and the false’. His first two works, he goes on, ‘sought to restore the world of

13.7 Page 127

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 89
perception’ ([4.21], 3). Beginning with the insight that the mind that perceives is an
incarnated mind, his writings have tried to establish and illustrate the inadequacy of both
behaviourism and idealism and to overcome this dualism by recourse to the fundamental
reality of the perceiving body-subject.
He had already announced this programme of work in the opening sentence of his
Introduction to The Structure of Behavior: ‘Our goal is to understand the relations
between consciousness and nature.’ Rejecting philosophical approaches that emphasize
either the ‘pure exteriority’ of the objects of perception or the ‘pure interiority’ of the
perceiving subject, Merleau-Ponty insists that the world as perceived is not a sum of
objects of our perception; and our relation to the world is not that of a disembodied
thinker to an object of thought. What must not be forgotten is ‘the insertion of the mind in
corporeality, the ambiguous relation which we entertain with our body and, correlatively,
with perceived things’ ([4.21], 4).
This means that the classical Aristotelian/Kantian distinction between form and matter
is misleading. We cannot conceptualize the world to be perceived as disordered ‘matter’
on which the perceiving mind (or consciousness), through the use of reason, imposes
‘form’ or in which it deciphers ‘meaning’. ‘Matter is “pregnant” with its form, which is
to say that in the final analysis every perception takes place within a certain horizon and
ultimately in the “world”’([4.21], 12). Perception, for Merleau-Ponty, is not a conscious
activity of the mind: perception is the mode of existence of the body-subject at a
preconscious level, the dialogue between the body-subject and its world at a level that is
presupposed by consciousness. At the same time, ‘the perceived world is the always
presupposed foundation of all rationality, all value and all existence’ ([4.21], 13).
In The Structure of Behavior, his first published book, Merleau-Ponty considers this
theme of the relations between perceiving persons and the world in which they live and
perceive through an examination of certain physiological and psychological theories,
principally behaviourism and Gestalt psychology. He exposes the inadequacy of
behaviourism by showing that we cannot explain the facts of perceptual life by
conceptualizing the relation between the perceiving organism and its milieu in terms of
an automatic machine whose pre-established mechanisms are brought to life by reaction
to external stimuli. ‘The true stimulus is not the one defined by physics and chemistry;
the reaction is not this or that particular series of movements; and the connection between
the two is not the simple coincidence of two successive events’ ([4.20], 99).
Behaviourism, in other words, is false as a model of perceptual behaviour.
So is idealism. It is not a question of superimposing a pure, thinking consciousness on
a brute, thinglike body. Within the realms of physics or mechanics, a body can
legitimately be seen as a thing among things. But the scientific point of view is itself an
abstraction. ‘In the conditions of life…the organism is less sensitive to certain isolated
physical and chemical agents than to the constellation which they form and to the whole
situation which they define’ ([4.21], 4). Furthermore, the behaving organism displays a
kind of ‘prospective activity’, as if it were oriented towards the meaning of certain
elemen-tary situations, ‘as if it entertained familiar relations with them, as if there were
“an a, priori of the organism”, privileged conducts and laws of internal equilibrium
which predisposed the organism to certain relations with its milieu’ ([4.21], 4). Higher-
order behaviours bring out new forms or shapes of the milieu, in correlation with the

13.8 Page 128

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 90
meaning-conferring activity of the behaving subject. Perceptual behaviour emerges from
these relations to a situation and to an environment which are not the working of a pure,
knowing subject.
In the Phenomenology of Perception, his major published work, Merleau-Ponty takes
for granted the emergence of perceptual behaviour and installs himself in it ‘in order to
pursue the analysis of this exceptional relation between the subject and its body and its
world’. The book seeks to illustrate how the body is not ‘an object in the world, under the
purview of a separated spirit…. It is our point of view on the world, the place where the
spirit takes on a certain physical and historical situation’ ([4.21], 4–5). Although space
does not permit any more than a cursory glance at this long and densely textured treatise,
it is worth lingering on its Preface, one of the classic texts in the history of
phenomenology.
This is Merleau-Ponty’s phenomenological manifesto, one that is clearly indebted to
the unpublished works of Husserl which he had first inspected in 1939 in Louvain. This is
the Husserl who emphasized the Lebenswelt, the life-world in which all thinking,
perceiving and acting takes place. According to Merleau-Ponty, phenomenology is
a philosophy which puts essences back into existence, and does not expect to
arrive at an understanding of man and the world from any starting point other
than that of their ‘facticity’…. It is also a philosophy for which the world is
always ‘already there’ before reflection begins—as an unalienable presence; and
all its efforts are concentrated upon re-achieving a direct and primitive contact
with the world, and endowing that contact with a philosophical status.
([4.18], vii)
The first feature of this phenomenology is that it is a rejection of science: ‘I am not the
outcome or the meeting-point of numerous causal agencies which determine my bodily or
psychological make-up.’ I cannot conceive of myself as ‘a mere object of biological,
psychological or sociological investigation…. The whole universe of science is built
upon the world as directly experienced, and if we want to subject science itself to
rigorous scrutiny and arrive at a precise assessment of its meaning and scope, we must
begin by reawakening the basic experience of the world of which science is the second-
order expression’ ([4.18], viii). If the world as understood by phenomenology is ‘always
already there’, it is not the ‘objective’ world of zoology, social anatomy or inductive
psychology, since ‘I am the absolute source, my existence does not stem from my
antecedents, from my physical and social environment; instead it moves out towards
them and sustains them, for I alone bring into being for myself…the tradition which I
elect to carry on’ ([4.18], ix). To return ‘to the things themselves’ (an earlier rallying cry
of Husserlian phenomenology) is to return to ‘the world that precedes knowledge’, the
world of which science always speaks. In relation to this primordial world, science is an
abstract and derivative sign-language, as is geography in relation to the countryside in
which we already recognize a forest, a meadow or a river. The purpose of
phenomenology is to analyse these perceptual foundations which precede knowledge and
upon which our knowledge is built ([4.18], ix).
Also in the Preface to the Phenomenology of Perception, Merleau-Ponty offers a

13.9 Page 129

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 91
revised version of Husserl’s ‘phenomenological reduction’, a way of looking at the world
which enables us to see just how embedded in it we actually are. ‘It is because we are
through and through compounded of relationships with the world that for us the only way
to become aware of the fact is to suspend the resultant activity, to refuse it our
complicity.’ It is because the certainties of common sense and the ‘natural attitude’ to
things are the presupposed basis of any thought that they are taken for granted and go
unnoticed. Only by applying the phenomenological reduction, by suspending for the time
being our recognition of them, can we bring them into view. Reflection ‘steps back [from
the world] to watch the forms of transcendence fly up like sparks from a fire; it slackens
the intentional threads which attach us to the world and thus brings them to our notice; it
alone is consciousness of the world because it reveals that world as strange and
paradoxical’. Not only is the philosopher a perpetual beginner, but ‘philosophy consists
wholly in the description of its own beginning’. It is in this sense that phenomenology
‘belongs to existential philosophy’, the philosophy that interrogates Heidegger’s ‘being-
in-the-world’ ([4.18], xiii).
In the course of this personal restatement of phenomenological principles, Merleau-
Ponty considers the notion of intentionality, at the same time sketching out his own
understanding of history. Unlike the Kantian relation to a possible object,
phenomenological intentionality assumes that the unified world that is already there is the
world that is ‘lived’ by me. What Husserl calls ‘operative intentionality’ is the way in
which consciousness knows itself to be a project of the world, ‘meant for a world which
it neither embraces nor possesses, but towards which it is perpetually directed’. Operative
intentionality ‘produces the natural and antepredicative unity of the world and of our life,
being apparent in our desires, our evaluations, and in the landscape we see, more clearly
than in objective knowledge, and furnishing the text which our knowledge tries to
translate into precise language’ ([4.18], xviii).
These are the dimensions of history, the events that are never without meaning. In
seeking to understand a doctrine, it must be examined from the point of view of ideology,
politics, religion, economics and psychology—all at the same time! ‘All these views are
true provided that they are not isolated, that we delve deeply into history and reach the
unique core of existential meaning which emerges in each perspective. It is true, as Marx
says, that history does not walk on its head, but it is also true that it does not think with
its feet.’ Neither head nor feet are paramount, of course: all aspects of a life are captured
in ‘the body’. In an obvious reference to Sartre’s famous claim that ‘we are condemned to
freedom’, Merleau-Ponty concludes this discussion of intentionality and history with the
thought that ‘because we are in the world, we are condemned to meaning, and we cannot
do or say anything without its acquiring a name in history’ ([4.18], xix).
The above discussion leads naturally into a discussion of the individual’s relations with
other people. To the extent that phenomenology unites extreme subjectivism and extreme
objectivism in its notion of rationality, it discloses the way in which ‘perspectives blend,
perceptions confirm each other, a meaning emerges’. Phenomenological rationality exists
neither in an ideal world proper to absolute spirit nor in the real world of scientific
investigation and knowledge. The phenomenological world is the sense or meaning (sens)
revealed where the paths of the individual’s various experiences intersect; and also
‘where my own and other people’s intersect and engage each other like gears’. With this

13.10 Page 130

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 92
image of the meshing of gears (l’engrenage), Merleau-Ponty seeks to capture both
subjectivity and intersubjectivity, ‘which find their unity when I either take up my past
experiences in those of the present, or other people’s in my own’ ([4.18], xx).
THE PHENOMENOLOGY OF SPEECH, LANGUAGE AND ART
The Phenomenology of Perception largely consists of a series of studies on the role of the
body and perception in various aspects of social and cultural experience: speech and
language, expression, sexuality, art and literature, time, freedom and history. Space
limitations preclude here more than a few cursory glances in this direction. When I
perceive in my world cultural artefacts as varied as roads and churches, or implements
such as a bell, a spoon or a pipe, ‘I feel the close presence of others beneath a veil of
anonymity’. The challenge is: how can the word ‘I’ be put into the plural? When it comes
to ‘other selves’, contact is established through my perception of other bodies. ‘It is
precisely my body which perceives the body of another, and discovers in that other body
a miraculous prolongation of my own intentions, a familiar way of dealing with the
world. Henceforth, as the parts of my body together comprise a system, so my body and
the other’s are one whole, two sides of one and the same phenomenon’ ([4.18], 354).
But bodies only establish initial (mostly visual) contacts. The most important cultural
phenomenon in the perception of other people as people (as distinct from simply living
beings) is language (le langage). In the experience of dialogue, a common ground is
constituted between the other person and myself. ‘My thought and the thought of the
other are interwoven into a single fabric.’ Neither my interlocuter nor I invented the
language that enables us to communicate: ‘our words are inserted into a shared operation
of which neither of us is the creator…. Our perspectives merge into each other, and we
coexist through a common world’ ([4.18], 354). Coexistence does not remove the fact of
solitude, but solitude and communication are ‘two “moments” of one phenomenon, since
in fact other people do exist for me’ ([4.18], 359). Indeed, I would not even be in a
position to speak of solitude, much less declare others inaccessible to me, if I did not
have the experience of other people.
Language, then, is discovered by me in my phenomenal field and used by me for
expression and communication with others in that shared antepredicative world. One of
the uses to which language is put, of course, is literature; and literature, for Merleau-
Ponty, is firmly embedded in the lived world of politics and economics. In a long note on
the existential interpretation of historical materialism, tagged on to the end of the chapter
of the Phenomenology of Perception devoted to ‘the body in its sexual being’ ([4.18],
171–3), Merleau-Ponty writes that ‘the existential conception of history’ rejects the idea
that our actions are determined by socio-economic factors in our situation. It does not,
however, deny that our actions are motivated by such factors. ‘If existence is the
permanent act by which man takes up, for his own purposes, and makes his own a certain
de facto situation, none of his thoughts will be able to be quite detached from the
historical context in which he lives, and particularly from his economic situation.’
This applies to the philosopher, to the revolutionary and to the artist. It would be
ridiculous, writes Merleau-Ponty, to see Paul Valéry’s poetry as simply the product of his

14 Pages 131-140

▲back to top

14.1 Page 131

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 93
economic circumstances. But it would not be absurd ‘to seek, in the social and economic
drama, in the world of our Mitsein, the motive of this coming to awareness’. The act of
the artist (or the philosopher) is a free act, but it is not motiveless. The freedom of the
artist is not exercised in a vacuum, completely divorced from the world of shared
experience; ‘it consists in appropriating a de facto situation by endowing it with a
figurative meaning beyond its real one’.
Every aspect of our life ‘breathes a sexual atmosphere’ (as Freud showed), without our
ever being able to identify a single content of consciousness that is either ‘purely sexual’
or without any sexual content whatsoever. In the same way, all our lives are suffused
with ‘the social and economic drama’ which provides each one of us (the artists as well
as everyone else) with an inescapable element of the stuff of our existence, which we set
about deciphering and reappropriating in our own distinctive way.
Thus does Valéry transmute into pure poetry a disquiet and solitude of which
others would have made nothing. Thought is the life of human relationships as it
understands and interprets itself. In this voluntary act of carrying forward, this
passing from objective to subjective, it is impossible to say just where historical
forces end and ours begin, and strictly speaking the question is meaningless,
since there is history only for a subject who lives through it, and there is a
subject only in so far as he is historically situated.
([4.18], 172–3)
We have barely touched on Merleau-Ponty’s impressive, but scattered, phenomenology
of expression. Most of his more important studies on language, literature, culture and
art—which he defined as ‘the progressive awareness of our multiple relations with other
people and the world’ ([4.22], 152)—are gathered in the collections Sense and Non-Sense
and (especially) Signs, which he prefaced with an Introduction (1960) that helps to situate
these studies within his evolving philosophical project. Eye and Mind ([4.21], 159–90) is
his important late essay on painting. The unfinished manuscript abandoned in 1952 and
published posthumously as The Prose of the World was conceived, in inspiration at least,
as a response to Sartre’s What is Literature? It could be said that the phenomenon of
language became, in one way or another, the main focus for all of Merleau-Ponty’s
subsequent work. In this respect, he is at one with the other great philosophers of the
twentieth century, in both the continental and analytic traditions—one thinks of figures
such as Heidegger and Wittgenstein, Gadamer, Ricoeur, Austin and Searle. In Merleau-
Ponty’s case, language is the entry point for a more profound understanding of human
interrelations—which, he writes in 1952, ‘will be the major topic of my later
studies’ ([4.21], 9). The meaning of language consists in ‘the common intention’ of its
constituent elements; ‘and the spoken phrase is understood only if the hearer, following
the “verbal chain”, goes beyond each of its links in the direction that they all designate
together’ ([4.21], 8). In that direction (as we shall see below) lies Being. (For an excellent
summary of Merleau-Ponty’s views on these topics, see [4.74], 78–86. For a more
extended discussion of his theory of existential expression and communication, see
[4.82].)

14.2 Page 132

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 94
EXISTENTIAL FREEDOM, HISTORY AND POLITICS
In the immediate aftermath of the Liberation, taking stock of what had been learned in the
experience of the war and the occupation, Merleau-Ponty declared that in the course of
the war ‘we have learned history, and we claim that it must not be forgotten’ ([4.22],
150). Not surprisingly, his conception of history, and the role of the individual in history,
was forged in the crucible of his wartime experience. The final chapter of the
Phenomenology of Perception (written at this time) is devoted to a dialectical encounter
with Sartre’s notorious theory of ‘absolute freedom’ (with its obvious implications for
our understanding of history and historical praxis), as presented to the world only a year
or two earlier in Being and Nothingness.
The first three pages of this final chapter outline, roughly, the Sartrean position.
However, Merleau-Ponty points out that the problem with Sartre’s radical opposition
between the determinism of the brute in-itself (‘scientism’s conception of causality’) and
the absolute freedom of the conscious for-itself (‘divorced from the outside’) is that it
would appear to rule out the possibility of freedom altogether. If it is true that our
freedom is the same in everything we do, if the slave who continues to live in fear is as
free as the one who breaks his or her chains (or anyone else, indeed), then there can be no
free action, since freedom obviously, as in this example, has nothing to do with actions.
Furthermore, ‘free action, in order to be discernible, has to stand out against a
background of life from which it is entirely, or almost entirely, absent’ ([4.18], 437). If
freedom is everywhere (since it is simply the mark of human being, or being for-itself),
then, says Merleau-Ponty, it is nowhere. The very idea of action, the very idea of choice,
disappears, ‘for to choose is to choose something in which freedom sees, at least for a
moment, a symbol of itself. Freedom implies a struggle, freedom must be striven for;
freedom must make a decision. If freedom is already achieved without free actions, as it
would be in a Sartrean world, then free actions become redundant (ibid.). What is
required instead is a theory of freedom that ‘allows it something without giving it
everything’ ([4.22], 77).
Merleau-Ponty works out what this ‘something’ is by resuming his analysis of
Sinngebung: that is, interpretation, or, literally, the bestowal of significance on situations.
If we accept that there is ‘no freedom without a field’, and if we reject as non-
phenomenological the Kantian idea (which Sartre often seems to adopt) of a
consciousness which ‘finds in things only what it has put into them’, then our
understanding of Sinngebung must involve the intermeshing of both the conditions of
possibility of perception (the body-subject) and the conditions of reality of perception
(the world of situations in which I find myself).
To say that a particular rock is unclimbable makes sense only if I entertain the project
of climbing it; the attribute ‘unclimbable’ (like all attributes) can be conferred upon the
rock only by ‘a human presence’. ‘It is therefore freedom which brings into being the
obstacle to freedom, so that the latter can be set over against it as its bounds’ ([4.18],
439). But given that I have the project to get from A to B, not every rock will appear to
me as unclimbable. My freedom does not contrive it that this way there is an obstacle to

14.3 Page 133

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 95
my progress and that way there is a way through, but it does arrange it for there to be
obstacles and ways through in general. Without my ‘human presence’ there would be
neither obstacles nor ways through. But it is crucially important to distinguish: my
freedom ‘does not draw the particular outline of the world, but merely lays down its
general structures’ (ibid.).
The general structures of the world, which dictate that some mountains are climbable
while others are not, are to be found not out there, in an in-itself, but within me.
Irrespective of my ‘express intentions’ (for example, my plan to climb those mountains
next week), my ‘general intentions’ evaluate the potentialities of my environment: for
example, the fact that they exceed my body’s power to take them in its stride. This brings
us back to Merleau-Ponty’s fundamental insight involving the body-subject’s ‘insertion
in the world’: underlying myself as a thinking and deciding subject there is ‘as it were a
natural self which does not budge from its terrestrial situation’ ([4.18], 440). All the
‘free’ choices in the world will not obviate this fundamental relationship: ‘in so far as I
have hands, feet, a body, I sustain around me intentions which are not dependent upon
my decisions and which affect my surroundings in a way which I do not choose’ (ibid.).
To use Merleau-Ponty’s terminology (borrowed from the Gestalt psychologists), these
‘general intentions’ are the ever-present ‘ground’ against which my decisions are
‘figures’. This ground is ‘general’ in the sense that it constitutes a system in which all
possible objects are simultaneously included; and also in the sense that it is not simply
mine but something I share with ‘all psycho-physical subjects organized as I am’. For we
are all indeed ‘intermingled with things’. While it is true that none of those things
constitutes an obstacle unless we ordain it so,
the self which qualifies them as such is not some acosmic subject…. There is an
autochthonous significance of the world which is constituted in the dealings
which our incarnate existence has with it, and which provides the ground of
every deliberate Sinngebung.
([4.18], 441)
In the same way as the mountain that constitutes an obstacle is ‘my obstacle’, the pain
that makes me ‘say what I ought to have kept to myself is ‘my pain’, and the fatigue that
makes me break my journey is ‘my fatigue’. According to Sartre, I am always free to
transform my being in the world, including my chosen tolerance of pain or fatigue. But
Merleau-Ponty draws attention to the fact that this transforming for-itself does not
operate as if I had no yesterdays. Rejecting Sartre’s famous contention that ‘existence
precedes essence’, he insists that a theory of freedom must recognize ‘a sort of
sedimentation of our life: an attitude towards the world, when it has received frequent
confirmation, acquires a favoured status for us’ (ibid.). While it’s all very well to claim
that the self is always free to change the habits of a lifetime, Merleau-Ponty insists that
‘having built our life upon an inferiority complex which has been operative for twenty
years, it is not probable that we shall change’ ([4.18], 442).
To the objection of the rationalist (such as Sartre) that my freedom to change is either
total or non-existent, that just as there are no degrees of possibility there are no degrees of
freedom, Merleau-Ponty retorts that ‘generality and probability are not fictions, but

14.4 Page 134

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 96
phenomena; we must therefore find a phenomenological basis for statistical
thought’ (ibid.). Statistical thought simply addresses the fact that I have a past which,
‘though not a fate’ (since my past does not totally determine my future), ‘has at least a
specific weight and is not a set of events over there, at a distance from me, but the
atmosphere of my present’. Drawing once again on the image of l’engrenage, Merleau-
Ponty concludes that ‘our freedom does not destroy our situation, but gears itself to
it’ (ibid.). (Cf. Merleau-Ponty’s application of the Freudian concepts of repression and
fixation to ‘personal time’ and ‘the ambiguity of being in the world’, [4.18], 83–5. For a
discussion, see [4.49].)
The past, therefore, does not determine my future, but neither is my history irrelevant.
History—my own personal history and the history of the wider community within which
I live—provides the context within which I make my choices. And Merleau-Ponty
illustrates this conception of conditioned freedom by reference to the question of the
development of class consciousness and the decision to be a revolutionary. He again
seeks to discover a third way between the two traditional abstractions. Objective
(Marxist) thought derives class consciousness from the objective material conditions; and
idealist reflection reduces the condition of being a proletarian to the individual’s
awareness of it. But ‘in each case we are in the realm of abstraction, because we remain
torn between the in itself and the for itself. What is necessary is a return to the
phenomena, ‘to the things themselves’: instead of abstractions, we must apply ‘a
genuinely existential method’.
A person’s objective position in the production process will never in itself issue in
class consciousness; rather, it is the decision of individuals to become revolutionaries that
prompts them to see themselves as proletarians. ‘What makes me a proletarian is not the
economic system or society considered as systems of impersonal forces, but these
institutions as I carry them within me and experience them; nor is it an intellectual
operation devoid of motive, but my way of being in the world within this institutional
framework’ ([4.18], 443). The transition from individual self-description to class
solidarity with others takes place through a growing awareness that ‘all share a common
lot’ ([4.18], 444). ‘Social space begins to acquire a magnetic field, and a region of the
exploited is seen to appear’ ([4.18], 445). Neither the status quo nor the free
revolutionary action that might overturn it is an abstraction; ‘they are lived through in
ambiguity’ (ibid.). To be a member of a social class is not only to be intellectually aware
of the fact; it is to identify oneself with a group ‘through an implicit or existentialist
project which merges into our way of patterning the world and coexisting with other
people’ ([4.18], 447).
This is not to say that one cannot at any moment amend one’s existential project. What
one cannot do is pretend to be a nothingness (néant) and choose oneself out of nothing.
‘My actual freedom is not on the hither side of my being, but before me, in things.’ It is
misleading to say (as Sartre does) that I continually choose myself; and that to choose not
to choose is still to choose. ‘Not to refuse is not the same thing as to choose’ ([4.18],
452). In the lived world, there is never determinism and never absolute choice; I am
never either a ‘being’ or a ‘nothingness’. We are involved in the world and with others
‘in an inextricable tangle’ ([4.18], 454). This significant life, this certain significance of
nature and history that makes me what I am, far from cutting me off from the rest of the

14.5 Page 135

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 97
world, makes it possible for me to remain in communication with the rest of the world.
Philosophy, which teaches us to see things in the world and in history in all their clarity
and in all their ambiguity, best performs its role by ceasing to be (intellectualizing)
philosophy. In the words of Saint-Exupéry with which Merleau-Ponty closes the
Phenomenology of Perception: ‘Man is but a network of relationships, and these alone
matter to him’ ([4.18], 456).
(Merleau-Ponty published a wide range of articles on the role of the individual in
history and politics, varieties of Marxism, the role of the Communist Party, and the
Soviet Union. Most of these were collected in Sense and Non-Sense, Signs, Humanism
and Terror (a polemical riposte to Arthur Koestler’s Darkness at Noon), and Adventures
of the Dialectic. For the best extended discussions of Merleau-Ponty’s philosophical
politics, see 4.119 and 4.130.)
THE HYPERDIALECTIC OF THE FLESH
In the prospectus of his future work written in 1952, Merleau-Ponty writes: ‘my first two
works sought to restore the world of perception.’ As we have seen, all aspects of our life
are underpinned by antepredicative perception, the specifically human mode of inherence
in the world in which we all live. Looking to the future, he goes on: ‘my works in
preparation aim to show how communication with others, and thought, take up and go
beyond the realm of perception which initiated us to the truth’ ([4.21], 3). He wishes to
go beyond the ‘bad ambiguity’ of his works already published and articulate a ‘good
ambiguity’, ‘a spontaneity which gathers together the plurality of monads, the past and
the present, nature and culture into a single whole. To establish this wonder would be
metaphysics itself ([4.21], 11). He himself saw the enormous philosophical achievement
represented by the works we have been examining thus far in this chapter as furnishing
only the groundwork for the ontology that was to be the work of his mature years. His
elaboration of this ontology of ‘the flesh’ is contained in a number of works published
posthumously, but especially in the incomplete manuscript entitled The Visible and the
Invisible.
It is impossible to exaggerate just how ambitious Merleau-Ponty’s mature project
really is. He proposed to go beyond (or below, for he frequently returns to the metaphor
of archaeology) the traditional philosophical categories of realism and idealism, subject
and object, consciousness and world, in-itself and for-itself, being and nothingness, the
knower and the known, and discover in that scarcely penetrable region what he called
‘the flesh of the world’, the primordial stuff in which we all inhere and which is the
ultimate ground of all human experience. It is also impossible to give any more than a
flavour of this dense and enigmatic text, available to us in the form of 160 pages of an
apparently finished methodological introduction, followed by a remarkable chapter
entitled ‘The intertwining—the chiasm’ (L’entrelacs—le chiasme) and about 110 pages
of working notes. I shall do no more here than draw attention to a few key terms
introduced by Merleau-Ponty in these pages: the notion of ‘hyperdialectic’, and the
related concepts of ‘the flesh’ and ‘the chiasm’.
When Merleau-Ponty addresses the theory of dialectic in The Visible and the Invisible,

14.6 Page 136

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 98
he has in his sights the dialectic of Sartre’s Being and Nothingness. Sartre’s dialectic is a
‘bad dialectic’. It is a fixed opposition, presented in terms of theses, where reflection
imposes an external law and framework upon the content of experience.
It is with this intuition of Being as absolute plenitude and absolute positivity,
and with a view of nothingness purified of all the being we mix into it, that
Sartre expects to account for our primordial access to the things…. From the
moment that I conceive of myself as negativity and the world as positivity, there
is no longer any interaction…. We are and remain strictly opposed.
([4.24], 52)
The only ‘good dialectic’, on the other hand, is what he calls ‘the hyperdialectic’. A good
dialectic is a ‘dialectic without synthesis’ which must be constantly aware that every
thesis is but an idealization, an abstraction from the lived world of experience. ‘What we
call hyperdialectic is a thought that…is capable of reaching truth because it envisages
without restriction the plurality of the relationships and what has been called
ambiguity’ ([4.24], 94). What Merleau-Ponty is working towards is ‘a dialectical
definition of being that can be neither the being for itself nor the being in itself…that
must rediscover the being that lies before the cleavage operated by reflection, about it, on
its horizon, not outside of us and not in us, but there where the two movements cross,
there where “there is” something’ ([4.24], 95).
Where the two movements cross, of course, is the body. The body is simultaneously
part of the world of things and the thing that sees and feels things. The body (which is
itself visible) can see things not because they are objects of consciousness, at a distance
from it, but precisely because those things are the environment in which the seeing body
exists. These two aspects of the body (seen and seer, visible and invisible) are inseparably
intertwined: ‘the experience of my body and the experience of the other are themselves
the two sides of one same being’ ([4.24], 225). This intertwining at the most fundamental
and primordial level, this anonymous generality of the visible and myself, is what
Merleau-Ponty calls ‘the flesh’ (la chair).
‘There is no name in traditional philosophy to designate it’ ([4.24], 139). The flesh is
not matter and it is not mind. It is not substance. In a manner that recalls Heidegger,
Merleau-Ponty goes back to the pre-Socratic thinkers to try to express what he means:
to designate it, we should need the old term ‘element’, in the sense it was used
to speak of water, air, earth, and fire, that is, in the sense of a general thing,
midway between the spatio-temporal individual and the idea, a sort of incarnate
principle that brings a style of being wherever there is a fragment of being. The
flesh is in this sense an ‘element’ of Being.
(ibid.)
To underline the oneness of this primordial element of Being, Merleau-Ponty names it the
‘flesh of the world’: ‘My body is made of the same flesh as the world,…this flesh of my
body is shared by the world, the world reflects it, encroaches upon it and it encroaches
upon the world,…they are in a relation of transgression or of overlapping’ ([4.24], 248).

14.7 Page 137

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 99
Merleau-Ponty’s overriding concern, as it has been throughout his philosophical career, is
to offer a phenomenological description of reality that gets beneath the spurious
distinction between extension and thought, between the visible and the invisible. He is
not suggesting an identity of thought and extension; the key image is that ‘they are the
obverse and the reverse of one another’ ([4.24], 152). But we are all part of the same
‘flesh of the world’. We situate ourselves in ourselves and in the things, in ourselves and
in the other, ‘at the point where, by a sort of chiasm, we become the others and we
become world’ ([4.24], 160). The word ‘chiasm’ (le chiasme) recalls the intersection of
lines in the manner of the Greek letter chi (x), emphasizing the inextricable interlocking
of the various aspects of Being, of the perceived and the perceiver, of the visible and the
invisible.
One final theme must be mentioned in this brief examination of The Visible and the
Invisible and that is the important strategic role of language. ‘Language is a life, is our
life and the life of the things’ ([4.24], 125). Parallel to the reverse/obverse relation of the
visible and the invisible, language is always considered by Merleau-Ponty against the
background of silence: ‘language lives only from silence; everything we cast to the others
has germinated in this great mute land which we never leave’ ([4.24], 126). Because they
have experienced within themselves ‘the birth of speech [la parole] as bubbling up at the
bottom of [their] mute experience’, no one knows better than philosophers ‘that what is
lived is lived-spoken (vécu-parlé)’.
Language is ‘the most valuable witness to Being’ (ibid.). Furthermore, language is a
witness to Being that does not disrupt the unity of Being, since ‘the vision itself, the
thought itself, are, as has been said [by Lacan], “structured as a language”, are
articulation before the letter, apparition of something where there was nothing or
something else’ (ibid.). The speaking word (la parole parlante), which brings to the
surface all the deep-rooted relations of the lived experience wherein it takes form, the
language of life and of action, and also the language of literature and of poetry, is the
very theme of philosophy. Of course, philosophy itself is ‘that language that can be
known only from within, through its exercise, is open upon the things, called forth by the
voices of silence, and continues an effort of articulation which is the Being of every
being’ (ibid.).
CONCLUDING REMARKS
As we come to the close of this brief survey of Merleau-Ponty’s œuvre, we must take
stock. In my view, Merleau-Ponty is one of the great figures of twentieth-century
philosophy, a pivotal figure in mid-century: drawing deeply on and creatively
reappropriating earlier masters such as Saussure, Husserl and Heidegger, while his
formidable presence is evident (albeit indirectly) in the structuralist, poststructuralist and
deconstructionist thinkers in the generation that came immediately behind him.
Merleau-Ponty himself always loudly proclaimed his allegiance to Husserl, especially
the Husserl of the Crisis and the theme of the life-world. Now, Merleau-Ponty’s
phenomenology was undoubtedly originally inspired by Husserl. And Husserl (as
uniquely and creatively interpreted by Merleau-Ponty) remained a living presence

14.8 Page 138

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 100
throughout his work. But it is arguable that there is more Heidegger than Husserl in
Merleau-Ponty’s philosophy. First, there is the centrality of time: for Merleau-Ponty as
for Heidegger, human existence is essentially temporal existence. Second, there is the
privileging of language in both cases, as was illustrated in the last section. In the famous
saying in The Letter on Humanism, Heidegger proclaims that ‘language is the house of
Being’ (‘die Sprache ist das Haus des Seins’). In The Visible and the Invisible, Merleau-
Ponty writes that language is ‘the most valuable witness to Being’ ([4.24], 126). Third,
there is Merleau-Ponty’s intention—like Heidegger—to offer a comprehensive
description of Being. It has to be said, however, that while Heidegger’s Being (Sein) is
ontologically distinct from beings (Seiendes), Merleau-Ponty’s Being is inclusive of both
Sein and Seiendes.
Some of Merleau-Ponty’s recurring themes also prefigure subsequent dominant trends
in continental philosophy. It is not incidental that his first book was entitled The Structure
of Behavior. He carried out a detailed study of both the Gestalt psychologists and
Saussure’s structural linguistics and lectured on Saussure in 1949. To the last book he
published he gave the title Signs. Merleau-Ponty was clearly at the centre of the emerging
philosophical schools known as structuralism and semiotics. His continual and deepening
polemic against Sartre’s privileging of the choosing subject reflected the growing
decentring of the subject in his own work, a theme which in turn becomes central to the
later deconstructionist approach to philosophy. (For an interesting discussion of Merleau-
Ponty’s move ‘from philosophy to non-philosophy’, see [4.103], 123–51).
So what was Merleau-Ponty’s main contribution to the continental philosophy of this
century? Perhaps more than any other philosopher, Merleau-Ponty was determined to
overcome the dualism between mind and matter, between subject and object, which had
dominated European philosophy since Descartes. The contemporary representative par
excellence of the Cartesian tradition was, of course, Merleau-Ponty’s friend/ foe Sartre.
We have seen above how Merleau-Ponty constantly pitched his own philosophical
approach against Sartre’s radical dualism between the thinking and choosing for-itself
and the in-itself that is the object of thought. Merleau-Ponty was always a
phenomenologist. His fundamental philosophical impulse was always to describe ‘the
things themselves’; and he opposed dualism simply because it did not offer an adequate
description of the phenomena.
It has been suggested that Merleau-Ponty’s late philosophy represents a radical break
with his earlier phenomenology of perception. I do not agree with this view. Despite the
new terminology he developed in the 1950s, his philosophical work is all of a piece; and
his later search for a new fundamental ontology can be seen in germ (and sometimes in
more than germ) in the Phenomenology of Perception, for example in the chapter on the
cogito. While it is true that he was concerned in his final years that the basic terminology
of the Phenomenology of Perception (perceiver and perceived) retained remnants of the
old dualism, the fact that he was determined to go further and ground the phenomenology
of perception in ‘the flesh of the world’ in no way implies a rejection of the basic thrust
and the achievement (as far as it goes) of the earlier work.
Rather, as he expressed it in a working note of January 1959, Merleau-Ponty’s concern
was to ‘deepen’ his first two books within the perspective of an ontology which would
finally dissolve the subject/ object polarity. This implies only that those first two books

14.9 Page 139

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 101
constitute the indispensable starting point of his philosophical project and not its
terminus. His abiding concern was to provide a full description of the world. His new
ontology would go beyond his earlier phenomenology and provide the radical new
foundations for such a description. He makes it clear in The Visible and the Invisible that
the basic philosophical stance is one of ‘interrogation’. Merleau-Ponty’s profound
philosophical questions have not yet received an adequate answer.
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Primary texts
4.1 La Structure du comportement, Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1942.
4.2 Phénoménologie de la perception, Paris: Gallimard, 1945.
4.3 Humanisme et terreur: Essai sur le problème communiste, Paris: Gallimard, 1947
4.4 ‘Le Primat de la perception et ses conséquences philosophiques’, Bulletin de la
Société Française de Philosophie, 41 (1947):119–135 and discussion 135–53.
4.5 Sens et non-sens, Paris: Nagel, 1948.
4.6 Eloge de la philosophie, Paris: Gallimard, 1953.
4.7 Les Aventures de la dialectique, Paris: Gallimard, 1955.
4.8 Signes, Paris: Gallimard, 1960.
4.9 ‘Préface’ to A.Hesnard, L’Œuvre de Freud et son importance pour le monde
moderne, Paris: Payot, 1960, 5–10.
4.10 ‘Un Inédit de Maurice Merleau-Ponty’ [1952], Revue de métaphysique et de morale,
67 (1962):401–9.
4.11 Le Visible et l’Invisible, suivi de notes de travail [1959–61], ed. C.Lefort, Paris,
Gallimard, 1964.
4.12 L’Œil et l’esprit [1961], Paris, Gallimard, 1964.
4.13 ‘Pages d’ “Introduction à la prose du monde”’ [1950–1], ed. C.Lefort, Revue de
métaphysique et de morale, 72 (1967):137–53.
4.14 Résumés de cours, Collège de France, 1952–1960, ed. C.Lefort, Paris: Gallimard,
1968.
4.15 L’Union de l’âme et du corps chez Malebranche, Biran et Bergson: prises au cours
à l’Ecole Normale Supérieure (1947–48), ed. J.Deprun, Paris: Vrin, 1968.
4.16 La Prose du monde [1950–1], ed. C.Lefort, Paris: Gallimard, 1969.
4.17 ‘Philosophie et non-philosophie depuis Hegel’ [spring 1961], ed. C.Lefort, Textures,
8–9 (1974):83–129 and 10–11 (1975):145–73.
Translations
4.18 Phenomenology of Perception, trans. C.Smith, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul
and Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press, 1962.
4.19 In Praise of Philosophy, trans. J.Wild and J.M.Edie, Evanston: Northwestern
University Press, 1963.
4.20 The Structure of Behavior, trans. A.L.Fisher, Boston: Beacon Press, 1963.

14.10 Page 140

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 102
4.21 The Primacy of Perception and Other Essays on Phenomenological Psychology, the
Philosophy of Art, History and Politics, ed. J.M.Edie, Evanston: Northwestern
University Press, 1964. Includes (pp. 3–11) ‘An Unpublished Text by Maurice
Merleau-Ponty: A Prospectus of his Work’, trans. A.B.Dallery, a translation of [4.10]
above; and (pp. 159–90) ‘Eye and Mind’, trans. C.Dallery, a translation of [4.12]
above.
4.22 Sense and Non-Sense, trans. H.L.Dreyfus and P.Allen Dreyfus, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1964.
4.23 Signs, trans. R.C.McCleary, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1964.
4.24 The Visible and the Invisible, followed by Working Notes, ed. C.Lefort, trans.
A.Lingis, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1968.
4.25 ‘Phenomenology and Psychoanalysis: Preface to Hesnard’s L’Œuvre de Freud’,
trans. A.L.Fisher, in A.L.Fisher (ed.), The Essential Writings of Merleau-Ponty, New
York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1969, pp. 81–7.
4.26 Humanism and Terror: An Essay on the Communist Problem, trans. with notes by
J.O’Neill, Boston: Beacon Press, 1969.
4.27 Themes from the Lectures at the Collège de France 1952–1960, trans. J. O’Neill,
Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1970.
4.28 The Prose of the World, trans. J.O’Neill, Evanston: Northwestern University Press,
1973.
4.29 Adventures of the Dialectic, trans. J.Bien, Evanston: Northwestern University Press,
1973.
4.30 Consciousness and the Acquisition of Language, trans. H.J.Silverman, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1973.
4.31 Phenomenology, Language and Sociology: Selected essays of Maurice Merleau-
Ponty, ed. J.O’Neill, London: Heinemann, 1974. (Contains articles already available
elsewhere.)
4.32 ‘Philosophy and Non-Philosophy since Hegel’, trans. H.J.Silverman, Telos, 29
(1976):39–105; reprinted in H.J.Silverman (ed.), Philosophy and Non-Philosophy since
Merleau-Ponty, New York and London: Routledge, 1988, pp. 9–83.
Bibliographies
4.33 Lanigan, R.L. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty Bibliography’, Man and World, 3
(1970):289–319.
4.34 Métraux, A. ‘Bibliographie de Maurice Merleau-Ponty’, in X.Tilliette [4.109
below], 173–86.
4.35 Geraets, T.F. [4.60 below], 200–9.
4.36 Lanigan, R.L. ‘Bibliography’ [annotated], in [4.82 below], 210–43.
4.37 Lapointe, F.H. ‘The Phenomenological Psychology of Sartre and Merleau-Ponty: A
Bibliographical Essay’, Dialogos, 8 (1972):161–82.
4.38 Lapointe, F. and Lapointe, C.C. Maurice Merleau-Ponty and his Critics: An
International Bibliography (1942–1976), New York: Garland, 1976.
4.39 Whiteside, K. ‘The Merleau-Ponty Bibliography: Additions and Corrections’,
Journal of the History of Philosophy, 21 (1983):195–201.

15 Pages 141-150

▲back to top

15.1 Page 141

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 103
Criticism: General studies
4.40 Alquié, F. ‘Une philosophie de l’ambiguïté: L’existentialisme de Maurice Merleau-
Ponty’, Fontaine, 59 (1947):47–70.
4.41 Ballard, E.G. ‘The Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty’, Tulane Studies in Philosophy, 9
(1960):165–87.
4.42 Bannan, J.F. ‘The “Later” Thought of Merleau-Ponty’, Dialogue, 5 (1966): 383–
403.
4.43 Bannan, J.F. ‘Merleau-Ponty on God’, International Philosophical Quarterly, 6
(1966):341–65.
4.44 Bannan, J.F. The Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty, New York: Harcourt, Brace &
World, 1967.
4.45 Barral, M.R. Merleau-Ponty: The Role of the Body-Subject in Interpersonal
Relations, Pittsburgh: Duquesne University Press, 1965.
4.46 Bayer, R. Merleau-Ponty’s Existentialism, Buffalo: University of Buffalo Press,
1951.
4.47 Caillois, R. ‘De la perception à l’histoire: la philosophie de Maurice MerleauPonty’,
Deucalion, 2 (1947):57–85.
4.48 Carr, D. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty: Incarnate Consciousness’, in G.A.Schrader, Jr
(ed.) Existential Philosophers: Kierkegaard to Merleau-Ponty, New York: McGraw-
Hill, 1967, pp. 369–429.
4.49 Cullen, B. ‘“Repression” and “Fixation” in Merleau-Ponty’s Account of Time’,
Journal of the British Society for Phenomenology, forthcoming.
4.50 Daly, J. ‘Merleau-Ponty’s Concept of Phenomenology’, Philosophical Studies
(Ireland), 16 (1967):137–64.
4.51 Daly, J. ‘Merleau-Ponty: A Bridge between Phenomenology and Structuralism’,
Journal of the British Society for Phenomenology, 2 (1971):53–8.
4.52 de Waehlens, A. Une philosophie de l’ambiguïté: L’existentialisme de Maurice
Merleau-Ponty, Louvain: Publications Universitaires de Louvain, 1951.
4.53 Dillon, M.C. Merleau-Ponty’s Ontology, Bloomington: Indiana University Press,
1988.
4.54 Dufrenne, M. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty’, Les études philosophiques, 36 (1962): 81–
92.
4.55 Edie, J.M. Merleau-Ponty’s Philosophy of Language: Structuralism and Dialectics,
Lanham: University Press of America, 1987.
4.56 Fressin, A. La Perception chez Bergson et chez Merleau-Ponty, Paris: Société
d’éditions d’enseignement supérieur, 1967.
4.57 Friedman, R.M. ‘The Formation of Merleau-Ponty’s Philosophy’, Philosophy
Today, 17 (1973):272–8.
4.58 Friedman, R.M. ‘Merleau-Ponty’s Theory of Intersubjectivity’, Philosophy Today,
19 (1975):228–42.
4.59 Gans, S. ‘Schematism and Embodiment’, Journal of the British Society for
Phenomenology, 13 (1982):237–45.
4.60 Geraets, T.F. Vers une nouvelle philosophie transcendantale: La Genèse de la

15.2 Page 142

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 104
philosophie de Maurice Merleau-Ponty jusqu’à la Phénoménologie de la perception, The
Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1971.
4.61 Gerber, R.J. ‘Merleau-Ponty: The Dialectic of Consciousness and World’, Man and
World, 2 (1969):83–107.
4.62 Gill, J.H. Merleau-Ponty and Metaphor, Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press,
1991.
4.63 Gillan, G. (ed.) The Horizons of the Flesh: Critical Perspectives on the Thought of
Merleau-Ponty, Carbondale and Edwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press,
1973.
4.64 Grene, M. ‘Merleau-Ponty and the Renewal of Ontology’, Review of Metaphysics,
29 (1976):605–25.
4.65 Hadreas, P.J. In Place of the Flawed Diamond: An Investigation of MerleauPonty’s
Philosophy, New York: Lang, 1986.
4.66 Halda, B. Merleau-Ponty ou la philosophie de l’ambiguïté, Paris: Les Lettres
Modernes, 1966.
4.67 Hall, H. ‘The Continuity of Merleau-Ponty’s Philosophy of Perception’, Man and
World, 10 (1977):435–47.
4.68 Heidsieck, F. L’Ontologie de Merleau-Ponty, Paris: Presses Universitaires de
France, 1971.
4.69 Hyppolite, J. Sens et existence dans la philosophie de Maurice Merleau-Ponty,
Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1963.
4.70 Johnson, G.A. (ed.) Ontology and Alterity in Merleau-Ponty, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1991.
4.71 Jolivet, R. ‘The Problem of God in the Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty’, Philosophy
Today, 7 (1963):150–64.
4.72 Kaelin, E.F. An Existential Aesthetic: The Theories of Sartre and MerleauPonty,
Madison: The University of Wisconsin Press, 1962.
4.73 Kaelin, E.F. ‘Merleau-Ponty, Fundamental Ontologist’, Man and World, 3
(1970):102–15.
4.74 Kearney, R. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty’, in Modern Movements in European
Philosophy, Manchester and Dover, NH: Manchester University Press, 1986, pp. 73–
90.
4.75 Kockelmans, J.J. ‘Merleau-Ponty on Sexuality’, Journal of Existentialism, 6
(1965):9–30.
4.76 Krell, D.F. ‘Merleau-Ponty on “eros” and “logos”’, Man and World, 7 (1974):37–
51.
4.77 Kwant, R.C. The Phenomenological Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty, Pittsburgh:
Duquesne University Press, 1963.
4.78 Kwant, R.C. From Phenomenology to Metaphysics: An Inquiry into the Last Period
of Merleau-Ponty’s Philosophical Life, Pittsburgh: Duquesne University Press, 1966.
4.79 Lacan, J. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty’, Les Temps modernes, 184–85 (October
1961):245–54.

15.3 Page 143

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 105
4.80 Langan, T. Merleau-Ponty’s Critique of Reason, New Haven and London: Yale
University Press, 1966.
4.81 Langer, M.M. Merleau-Ponty’s Phenomenology of Perception: A Guide and
Commentary, Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1989.
4.82 Lanigan, R.L. Speaking and Semiology: Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s
Phenomenological Theory of Existential Communication, The Hague and Paris:
Mouton, 1972.
4.83 Lefort, C. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty’, in R.Klibansky (ed.), Contemporary
Philosophy: A Survey, vol. 3, Metaphysics, Phenomenology, Language and Structure,
Firenze: La Nuova Italia Editrice, 1969, pp. 206–14.
4.84 Levine, S.K. ‘Merleau-Ponty’s Philosophy of Art’, Man and World, 2 (1969): 438–
52.
4.85 Lévi-Strauss, C. ‘On Merleau-Ponty’, trans. C.Gross, Graduate Faculty Philosophy
Journal , 7 (1978):179–88.
4.86 Madison, G.B. The Phenomenology of Merleau-Ponty: A Search for the Limits of
Consciousness, Athens: Ohio University Press, 1981.
4.87 Mallin, S.B. Merleau-Ponty’s Philosophy, New Haven and London: Yale University
Press, 1979.
4.88 Natanson, M. ‘The Fabric of Expression’, Review of Metaphysics, 21 (1968): 491–
505.
4.89 O’Neill, J. The Communicative Body: Studies in Communicative Philosophy,
Politics, and Sociology, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1989.
4.90 Rabil, A. Merleau-Ponty: Existentialist of the Social World, New York: Columbia
University Press, 1967.
4.91 Rauch, L. ‘Sartre, Merleau-Ponty and the Hole in Being’, Philosophical Studies
(Ireland), 18 (1969):119–32.
4.92 Review of Existential Psychology and Psychiatry, 18 (1982–3), a special issue
devoted to Merleau-Ponty, including translations of several short pieces by Merleau-
Ponty on phenomenological psychology, sexuality and the relations between
phenomenology and psychoanalysis .
4.93 Ricoeur, P. ‘Hommage à Merleau-Ponty’, Esprit, 29 (1961):1115–20.
4.94 Robinet, A. Merleau-Ponty, sa vie, son œuvre, avec un exposé de sa philosophie,
Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1963.
4.95 Roman, J. ‘Une amitié existentialiste: Sartre et Merleau-Ponty’, Revue
internationale de philosophie, 39 (1985):30–55.
4.96 Sallis, J. ‘Time, Subjectivity, and The Phenomenology of Perception’, Modern
Schoolman, 48 (1971):343–58.
4.97 Sallis, J. Phenomenology and the Return to Beginnings, Pittsburgh: Duquesne
University Press, 1973.
4.98 Sallis, J. (ed.) Merleau-Ponty: Perception, Structure, Language, Atlantic Highlands:
Humanities Press, 1981.
4.99 Sartre, J.-P. ‘Merleau-Ponty vivant’, Les Temps modernes, 184–5 (1961): 304–76;
translated as ‘Merleau-Ponty’, in J.-P.Sartre, Situations, trans. B.Eisler, London:
Hamish Hamilton, 1965, pp. 225–326.
4.100 Sartre, J.-P. ‘Merleau-Ponty [1]’, trans. W.Hamrick, Journal of the British Society

15.4 Page 144

▲back to top
Philosophy of existence 106
for Phenomenology, 15 (1984):128–54. [An earlier version of the previous entry.]
4.101 Schmidt, J. Maurice Merleau-Ponty: Between Phenomenology and Structuralism,
New York: St Martin’s Press, 1985.
4.102 Silverman, H.J. ‘Re-reading Merleau-Ponty’, Telos, 29 (1976):106–29; reprinted,
with several other chapters on the philosophy of Merleau-Ponty, in [4.103].
4.103 Silverman, H.J. Inscriptions: Between Phenomenology and Structuralism, New
York and London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1987.
4.104 Silverman, H.J. et al. (eds) The Horizons of Continental Philosophy: Essays on
Husserl, Heidegger, and Merleau-Ponty, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1988.
4.105 Smith, C. ‘Sartre and Merleau-Ponty: The Case for a Modified Essentialism’,
Journal of the British Society for Phenomenology, 1 (1970):73–9.
4.106 Smyth, D.P. ‘Merleau-Ponty’s Late Ontology: New Nature and the
Hyperdialectic’, unpublished Ph.D. thesis, The Queen’s University of Belfast, 1988.
4.107 Taminiaux, J. ‘Merleau-Ponty: de la dialectique à l’hyperdialectique’, Tijdschrift
voor Filosofie, 40 (1978):34–55.
4.108 Tilliette, X. Merleau-Ponty ou la mesure de l’homme, Paris: Seghers, 1970.
4.109 Thévenaz, P. De Husserl à Merleau-Ponty: Qu’est-ce que la phénoménologie,
Neuchâtel: Editions de la Baconnière, 1966.
4.110 Van Breda, H.L. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty et les Archives-Husserl à Louvain’,
Revue de métaphysique et de morale, 67 (1962):410–30.
4.111 Waldenfels, B. ‘Das Problem der Leiblichkeit bei Merleau-Ponty’, Philosophisches
Jahrbuch, 75 (1967–8):345–65.
Criticism: Freedom, history and politics
4.112 Archard, D. Marxism and Existentialism: The Political Philosophy of Sartre and
Merleau-Ponty, Belfast: Blackstaff Press, 1980.
4.113 Aron, R. Marxism and the Existentialists, New York: Harper & Row, 1969.
4.114 Bien, J. ‘Man and the Economic: Merleau-Ponty’s Interpretation of Historical
Materialism’, Southwestern Journal of Philosophy, 3 (1972):121–7.
4.115 Borg, J.L. ‘Le Marxisme dans la philosophie socio-politique de Merleau-Ponty’,
Revue philosophique de Louvain, 73 (1975):481–510.
4.116 Capalbo, C. ‘L’historicité chez Merleau-Ponty’, Revue philosophique de Louvain,
73 (1975):511–35.
4.117 Compton, J. ‘Sartre, Merleau-Ponty, and Human Freedom’, Journal of Philosophy,
79 (1982):577–88.
4.118 Coole, D. ‘Phenomenology and Ideology in the Work of Merleau-Ponty’, in
N.O’Sullivan (ed.), The Structure of Modern Ideology, Cheltenham: Elgar, 1989, 122–
50.
4.119 Cooper, B. Merleau-Ponty and Marxism: From Terror to Reform, Toronto:
University of Toronto Press, 1979.
4.120 Dauenhauer, B.P. The Politics of Hope, London: Routledge, 1986.
4.121 de Beauvoir, S. ‘Merleau-Ponty et le pseudo-Sartrisme’, Les Temps modernes, 10
(1955):2072–122.
4.122 de Beauvoir, S.J.-P. Sartre versus Merleau-Ponty (Merleau-Ponty ou

15.5 Page 145

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 107
l’antisartrisme), trans. A.Leal, Buenos Aires: Siglo Veints, 1963.
4.123 Kruks, S. The Political Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty, Brighton: Harvester and
Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press, 1981.
4.124 Miller, J. ‘Merleau-Ponty’s Marxism: Between Phenomenology and the Hegelian
Absolute’, History and Theory, 15 (1976):109–32.
4.125 O’Neill, J. Perception, Expression, and History: The Social Phenomenology of
Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1970.
4.126 Pax, C. ‘Merleau-Ponty and the Truth of History’, Man and World, 6 (1973): 270–
9.
4.127 Ricoeur, P. ‘La Pensée engagée: Merleau-Ponty’, Esprit, 16 (1948):911–16.
4.128 Schmidt, J. ‘Maurice Merleau-Ponty: Politics, Phenomenology, and Ontology’,
Human Studies, 6 (1983):295–308.
4.129 Spurling, L. Phenomenology and the Social World: The Philosophy of Merleau-
Ponty and its Relation to the Social Sciences, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1972.
4.130 Whiteside, K.H. Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of an Existential Politics,
Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1988.
4.131 Whiteside, K.H. ‘Universality and Violence: Merleau-Ponty, Malraux, and the
Moral Logic of Liberalism’, Philosophy Today, 35 (1991):372–389.
4.132 Wiggins, O.P. ‘Political Responsibility in Merleau-Ponty’s Humanism and Terror’,
Man and World, 19 (1986):275–91.
4.133 Wolin, R. ‘Merleau-Ponty and the Birth of Weberian Marxism’, Praxis
International, 5 (1985):115–30.

15.6 Page 146

▲back to top
CHAPTER 5
Philosophies of religion
Marcel, Jaspers, Levinas
William Desmond
Gabriel Marcel (1889–1973), Karl Jaspers (1883–1969) and Emmanuel Levinas (1906–)
seem like a mere aggregate of thinkers. Jaspers, a German thinker who coined the phrase
Existenz Philosophie, was influential in making known Kierkegaard’s importance.
Marcel was a French dramatist with a love of music who came to philosophy from a
background in idealism, against which he struggled. Yet the influence, for instance, of
Royce, the first person on whom he wrote, was strong. Bergson, now a too neglected
thinker, was always in the background. Marcel’s Catholicism was extremely significant,
yet he bridled at the label ‘Christian Existentialist’. He was a philosopher who happened
to be a Catholic. Levinas was instrumental in introducing phenomenology to France. In
1930 he published a book on Husserl’s theory of intuition that was to excite Sartre to say:
That is the way I want to philosophize! Yet Levinas always thought in tension with this
phenomenological heritage, and most especially its transformation in Heidegger’s
fundamental ontology.
These three thinkers have received mixed attention. Jaspers laboured in Heidegger’s
shadow, as he himself seemed to recognize. Heidegger and he were once friends and
Heidegger alone he recognized as being on a par with him. Still Heidegger’s enormous
influence has tended to eclipse a proper appreciation of Jaspers’ achievement. Jaspers
was opposed to Nazism, as Heidegger was not. This did not prevent him from
acknowledging Heidegger’s stature. Indeed Jaspers was more concerned with Heidegger
than Heidegger was with Jaspers. Also Jaspers respected the tradition of philosophy, as
well as the achievements of science. He did not set himself in contestation with the
millennia to hoist himself to unprecedented originality. This, coupled with his restorative
efforts vis-à-vis perennial philosophy, meant that no cultformed around his thought. This
is not to deny that he was and is deeply admired.
Marcel is an insightful existential thinker, but existentialism has been identified widely
with its atheistic brands, especially that of Sartre. Because of Marcel’s unashamed refusal
to silence his own search for God, there has been a failure to listen properly to him by
professional philosophers who too easily become embarrassed with the religious. They
fail to listen attentively enough to his sometimes elusive themes—the body, the family,
the sense of mystery as eluding all objectifications, meditations on what I would call the
intimacy of being.
Marcel is difficult to package, though there are recurrent themes which have been
packaged as identifiably Marcellian: being and having, problem and mystery,
intersubjectivity and embodiment. His style of philosophizing, out of respect for the

15.7 Page 147

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 109
subject matter itself, refuses to be packaged, even systematically stated in any simple
survey. Though he sometimes has a diffuse style of writing, in the very peregrinations of
his thinking he hits on some absolutely essential insights. Thus the intimacy of being is
always other to technical thinking, eludes complete systematic ordering, is on the edge of
completely transparent conceptualization. Philosophy tends to home in on themes that are
manageable in a more neutral, public, generalized language. We need that language, but
it must be counteracted and complemented with modes of thinking that learn from art,
and indeed that allow themselves to be shaped by a certain music of being.
Levinas was not widely known in English-speaking philosophy until recently. His
work presupposes familiarity with phenomenology, both Husserlian and Heideggerian,
and also the currents of intellectual debates that have swept France from the 1930s
onwards, over which the shadow of Hegel has hovered in various interpretations and
appropriations. Levinas himself distinguishes his own more strictly philosophical
writings from his religious studies, but there is little doubt that religion and philosophy
cannot be finally insulated from each other. Many of the themes of his major work,
Totality and Infinity, are incomprehensible without the sense of the presence/absence of
God. Levinas’s stature is now being more widely recognized outside France, partly owing
to the impact of deconstruction, and its high priest Derrida, who learned a thing or two
from Levinas. The service to Levinas is ambiguous. Levinas has always exhibited a
spiritual seriousness that is ill repaid by the postmodern frivolity to which deconstruction
is frequently prone.
Each thinker is deserving of an entire study. Each has been prolific, Levinas less so,
but Marcel and Jaspers have been voluminous. To bring some manageable order to the
matter, I will concentrate on three major themes, and as the matter dictates I will mention
related ideas, without dwelling on them in the detail they might deserve in another study.
These three themes will be: the nature of philosophy; the question of the other; the
question of transcendence or God.
GABRIEL MARCEL
Marcel’s understanding of philosophical thought is determined by a reaction to the
idealism of the late nineteenth century. He did some early work on Royce and Schelling.
Their themes were to influence him throughout his writing. Thus the theme of loyalty in
Royce is transformed into an ontology of intersubjectivity with distinctive emphasis on
the notion of what Marcel calls creative fidelity. I mention the struggle of Schelling to
break free of the logicism of his own early thought and Hegel’s idealism. The struggle led
to Schelling’s positive philosophy that is the progenitor of all existential thought,
including that of Kierkegaard. Schelling tried to think evil as radically other to reason.
Marcel has later occasion to mention Schelling and Kant on this score, but the point is
more generally relevant to the conception of philosophy at issue. Evil as a philosophical
perplexity takes idealistic reason to its limit where the philosopher has to think otherwise
of what lies on the other side of reason, as idealistically conceived.
The desideratum of philosophy as system was bequeathed through Kant, Fichte, Hegel
to the whole subsequent history of idealistic and post-idealistic philosophizing. Marcel

15.8 Page 148

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 110
did intend at an early point to couch his thoughts in a systematic form. He discovered he
could not bring it off without forcing his thoughts into a form that went against their
grain. Eventually he published his Metaphysical Journal (1927), breaking ground here
not only in terms of content but in terms of a different sense of literary form.
Marcel’s commitment to what is other to system is forged in deep tension with the
sense that thought ought to have some systematic character, certainly an appropriate
order in its development and presentation. His Gifford lectures, published as The Mystery
of Being (1950), are presented as his most systematic work, but there he disclaims
anything like a system. Primarily philosophy is a matter of venture and exploration.
System, such as it is, comes after; it ought not to dictate to the matter what it should be.
Thinking is open to the matter at issue, even when the matter offers insurmountable
resistance to the encroachments of our categories. The drift of his thinking is not forced
into a form that betrays, so to say, its improvisatory nature. This sense of philosophy
shares a lot with Kierkegaard and Nietzsche, though Marcel does not list these as early
influences. One thinks too of the plurality of literary forms used by Kierkegaard and
Nietzsche, though one could also mention the non-systematic forms developed by
Shestov and the later Wittgenstein.
Marcel’s philosophy has a phenomenological as well as an existential side. In no sense
was he a disciple of Husserl. But his philosophizing is phenomenological in holding that
thinking ought to start by an act of attention to what appears to us. As best as possible we
allow the matter to make its appearance, according to its own form and requirements. The
first act of philosophical intelligence demands a kind of mindful attention to phenomena,
appearing, happenings, in all their nuance and surprise. This requirement is continuous
with his rejection of idealism. The stress in idealism on purely autonomous thought
tempts the philosopher to impose his categories on being as appearing, hence to see there
only what thought has itself put there. Kant himself talked about the mind as only seeing
in nature what it has itself put there. Kant was no absolute idealist but the equivocities of
some of his pronouncements, like the one just cited, led to the more uncompromising,
hence more coherent, idealism of his successors.
But the full coherence of idealism is also its undoing in that what is other to thought
always gets finally reduced to the construction of a category. Marcel rejects this, for at a
critical point the emptiness of the categorial construction makes itself felt. Hence
Marcel’s desire for phenomenological fidelity entails the reassertion of a realism which
asks the thinker to let things take their own shape without interference from the dictating
intellect. Marcel does not deny a critical dimension to philosophy. On the contrary, the
appearing of things is shot through with ambiguities that have to be interpreted and
evaluated. Letting ambiguity come to appearance is part of the phenomenological
requirement of philosophy. Mindless surrender to ambiguity is not. The ambiguities of
being have to be sifted.
This is especially relevant to the existential side of his thinking. Marcel is an
existentialist to the extent that he lays a primary focus on human being and the
perplexities that burden it about being and most especially its own being. He used the
term ‘existential’ before it became fashionable through Sartre. As finding itself in the
ambiguous middle of things, the human being is in quest of the truth of things and most
especially its own truth. It is tempted by possibilities that veil or distort or destroy its own

15.9 Page 149

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 111
truth and the truth of things. Hence the existential philosopher is again involved in a quest
or journey. Not surprisingly, Marcel lays great emphasis on homo viator, man the
wayfarer, (the title of one of his books).
We are on the way, to where we do not exactly know, from where we know not, in a
middle often clouded with uncertainty and sorrow. Marcel does not have quite the intense
concentrated passion of Pascal, but they share a similar sense of the enigma of existential
contingency. Nor can we stand outside the middle and survey our way of passage as a
whole. The deficiency of systematic idealism is the false imputation that we have such an
Archimedean point whence we can construct the system of categories to make all being
transparently intelligible. Such a system is false to our participation in being, and not
least to the singularity of the journeying philosopher. We need a different kind of
thinking, which acknowledges our intimacy with being, even in our sense of
metaphysical homelessness. The great struggle of philosophy is to get some reflective
distance on our being thus in the middle, a distance that does not distort our intimacy
with being in the middle. Thinking must be shown in its genesis and process, with all its
falterings and flights, its matured fruits and undelivered suggestions.
Here Marcel makes a distinction between what he calls primary and secondary
reflection. Primary reflection shows a tendency to objectify being and the human being. It
tries to survey the object from outside, or penetrate it as if it were an alien thing to be
mastered or overcome. Such a thinking has one of its major sources in Cartesian dualism
where knower and known, mind and nature, self and other are posited as antithetical
opposites. It is a mode of thinking that attenuates the thinker’s participation in being. This
kind of thinking corresponds to treating being as a problem.
Secondary reflection is such that the matter being thought unavoidably encroaches on
the one doing the thinking. The thinker cannot escape involvement with the matter that is
being thought. A thinking that objectifies and fosters the self-forgetfulness of the thinker
will not do. It is not that the thinker now collapses into a mushy subjectivism, softly
surrendering to the inarticulate, having given up the stiff precisions of articulate
objectivism. Secondary reflection, Marcel says, is a recuperative thinking. Once having
lived or been caught up or carried along by a process of living, one struggles to get a
thoughtful distance on one’s course, all the more to interiorize mindfully its possible
significance.
In human existence secondary reflection in some form goes on always, but not
necessarily in the accentuated form the existential philosopher cultivates. As Kierkegaard
says: life has to be lived forward, but thought backward. Secondary reflection is thus
recollective. As such it is not a nostalgic thinking; for to gain a mindful sense of one’s
present and past may open a truer orientation to what is to come. Secondary reflection is
bound up with the possibility of hope. Hope is a major theme for Marcel. Indeed one can
say that Marcel takes very seriously Kant’s question: For what may we hope?
The difference of primary and secondary reflection is relevant to Marcel’s treatment of
the notions of problem and mystery, and thesein turn influence his critique of the spiritual
devastations wrought by the modern hegemony of unrestrained technicism, indeed the
idolatry of technique. Like many other thinkers, Marcel recognizes the modern
dominance of scientific method and its way of conceiving the world. He does not deny
the benefits that come from this way, but is disturbed at the accompanying neglect of

15.10 Page 150

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 112
issues that fall outside its purview. Scientific method treats of all questions as
problematic matters: difficulties that can be solved by means of techniques of objective
experimentation and calculation. The hegemony of this approach can lead to the atrophy
of human perplexity before the metaphysical enigmas of existence.
Consider questions of despair and salvation. These become a matter of psychological
adaptation as the singular self becomes a case of maladjustment. The promise of our
despair is betrayed, not even guessed. With issues like suffering, the pervasiveness of evil
and the inevitability of death we deal with mysteries or meta-problematic themes. These
are perplexities that involve us and shake us and make us sleepless. We are threatened
and challenged and put on trial. They never yield a univocal answer; indeed they cannot
properly be formulated as univocal problems. A constitutive openness and ambiguity
remains. We have to return to such perplexities again and again. We never conclusively
master them.
Marcel does not advocate the abandonment of reason, as if these mysteries were
absurdities. They do demand a thoughtfulness not reducible to scientific knowledge,
moving the philosopher closer to the poet and the religious. The hegemony of the
problem makes us take for granted the existence of things and our own. By contrast, the
philosopher for Marcel is stunned into thought by just that fact of existence, astonished at
the marvel that things are. That the world is at all is the wonder. This mystery is all
around and within us, though to it we are heedless. We look but overlook; we hear but
have not listened or heard.
The neglect of mystery and the hegemony of problem leads to a world wherein
technique reigns with only sporadically disputed sway. There is an anonymity to
technique that is antithetical to the singularity of existing. Technique involves a set of
directives that can be used by all; the directives of a technique do not originate with the
user but, if we desire success in the outcome, to these directives we must submit. Thus
technique can breed a conformism, a certain standardization of the human being, an
averaging. Uniqueness and recalcitrant singularity are levelled down.
This is a theme sounded loudly by Kierkegaard and Nietzsche. We have heard it so
often that perhaps we are jaded. But weariness with a question does not mean it is solved.
Technique shows the calculative mind in action. But there is no technique of human
wholeness or integrity; there is no technique of ethical responsibility; there is no
technique of honesty and truthfulness. Technicism is in flight from the unexpected and
the uncontrollable. The idolatry of technique is really a metaphysical hostility to our
vulnerability before the incalculable chance of being. The tyranny of technique drowns
the deeper human in a conspiracy of efficiency and a frenzy of industry. It may erect a
house but cannot make us a home.
Marcel’s philosophizing takes shape at the opposite extreme to this technicism. It is
appropriate to mention that this philosophizing owes much to his twin loves: music and
drama. He repeatedly resorts to musical images, and was a composer and performer of no
little talent. The image of improvisation is important. As applied to philosophy and life it
means: the score is not settled before playing; the players are invited to create freely. This
is not incidental to the pervasive post-Hegelian concern with the limits of systematic
philosophy. Schopenhauer and Nietzsche are the major figures in the nineteenth century
who believed that music was the metaphysical art. There are others in the twentieth

16 Pages 151-160

▲back to top

16.1 Page 151

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 113
century, Adorno most notably, who give some privilege to music. Philosophy,
particularly in its logicist forms, can run roughshod over the subtleties, intimacies of
being. Music may sing these, as it were, in a manner that forces philosophy to raise the
question of the unsayable—the unsayable that yet is sung and so somehow said.
If music as metaphysically significant raises questions about the limits of philosophy,
Marcel has no desire to yield to a dark romanticism. Nor does he thematically focus on
the metaphysics of music, but uses musical images and metaphors again and again to
illustrate some of his more elusive ideas. One has to conclude that there is an implicit
community of meaning between his thought and music. Again consider the improvisatory
style of some of his philosophizing: a theme is stated, developed, dropped; then resumed,
restated; there come to be echoes back and forth; nor does Marcel offer any simple
resolution, though there are moments of revelation. Does his thought then sing? Does his
philosophy approach the condition of music? The analytical philosopher will squirm. But
there is a rigour and discipline in this thinking that the analytical philosopher hardly
suspects; there is a rigour and discipline in music too. Even Rudolp Carnap, one of the
avatars of analytical philosophy, sensed a connection between metaphysics and music,
though not surprisingly his judgment was topsy-turvy: metaphysics is just poor music.
The influence of drama is related to Marcel’s preoccupation with the question of the
other. Marcel was himself a successful playwright, with a lifelong interest in the theatre.
Drama presents the concrete dilemmas of humans in their otherness and estrangements
and solidarities. It imaginatively enacts the resistance and reciprocity of the self and the
other. It returns us to a point of emergent significance that is prior to abstract thought.
Marcel said that he had interest not in the solitary ‘I am’ but in the concrete ‘We are’. To
exist is to be shaped in this solidarity of selves. Drama, of course, is enacted in and
through language where again we face the other. Seemingly inconspicuous words may
offer the revelation of the significant world of the other, its wounds, its conceit, its
hospitality. Words are pregnant with more than can be rendered in the languages of
function. Philosophy, like drama, should awaken vigilance for this ‘more’.
One senses sometimes that his own plays were more important to Marcel than his
philosophy. His preoccupations emerged in pristine form in his plays which were not
meant as mere illustration of philosophical theories. What drama brings to birth,
philosophy later may take hold of in reflection. It is as if the dramas were closer to the
phenomenological matrix of being, wherein the basic perplexities appeared in statu
nascendi, in a form more concrete than later conceptualizations could capture.
Some readers may find it tedious for Marcel to quote his own plays. I see it as a
strategy of saying. In philosophy we always have a problem of writing about matters
closest to the personal, to the intimacy of being. We refuse to be confessional. And yet
we have to find strategies of confession, of saying the ‘I’ with a kind of elemental
honesty. In quoting his plays, Marcel can confess without embarrassment. The citation
offers not only a theme closer to the phenomenological matrix but also one with a space
of possible distance. We do not have to collapse into the theme; it can become the basis
for a secondary reflection. There is then a rhetorical complicity between his dramatic and
philosophical writing.
In that sense Marcel might be called a plurivocal philosopher. He does not dramatize
his philosophizing in the same way as Nietzsche does, who is poet and philosopher in

16.2 Page 152

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 114
one; or as Plato does in that great achievement of philosophical writing, the Platonic
dialogue. Instead he creates a dialogue between his dramas and his philosophizing, in the
philosophizing itself. There are times when he should have let the barrier between them
break down, as do Plato and Nietzsche. Perhaps he did not, less for the sake of
philosophy as out of respect for his dramatic art which one senses he wanted to preserve
from the devitalizing encroachments of abstract philosophical categories.
To break down the barrier need not encourage this devitalization but rather promote a
more radical vitalization of philosophical thinking. Admittedly the bureaucratic
separation of philosophy and poetry is hard to get beyond. We should get beyond it, on
Marcel’s own terms, since the functionalizing mind, the bureaucratic mind, is an
essentially technical mind. If Marcel too strongly insists on separating the function of
drama and philosophy, he will show himself captive to the same narrow mind he
denounces otherwise so rightly. He does not, to his credit. Beyond the functionalization
of poetry and philosophy and religion, the one thing necessary is honesty nourished by
spiritual seriousness. It does not matter whether we label it artistic, philosophic or
religious. The dialogue of drama and philosophy points to modes of philosophizing
outside system, entirely incomprehensible for an analytical philosopher in thrall to the
plain prose of univocal writing.
The theme of the other is connected with Marcel’s reflection on the body. His
emphasis is on the incarnate person. The flesh is where we are in a primary contact with
all otherness, both natural and human. The affirmation of being that arises there
articulates a sense of the togetherness of the existing self and the rest of being in its
otherness. It is as if the incarnate self is initially an inarticulate ‘We are’. Marcel
obviously sets himself against any form of Cartesianism and dualism here. There is some
affinity with empiricism, stemming from his desire for phenomenological fidelity. The
difference is in his interpretation of experience. Empiricist experience is an abstraction
from the fullness of original fleshed incarnation. It is as alienated from concrete existence
as is Cartesian dualism, from the side of the body in this case, rather than the reflective
reason.
The subject is an incarnate self defined intersubjectively. The inter, the between of
intersubjectivity, does not deny the flesh. The between is stressed by the concretization of
spirit in the flesh of the human being. Again the intimacy of our involvement with the
other matches the intimacy of our being our own bodies. Marcel is given to criticize the
view that we have bodies; the connection of self with flesh is not thus external. Marcel
wants to say: we are our body.
Here arises his concern with being and having. Like Marx and many other modern
thinkers Marcel was concerned with the question of property, of possession, the nature of
having. He denies that a person is what a person has. My property is something over
which I have power; I can dispose of it as I please; we cannot so dispose of our own
bodies, nor of our fellow human beings without a fundamental violation of our own
nature and theirs. It is not that we ought not to take care of things. Marcel is quite aware
that our care for things can draw them into the orbit of human attachment in a manner
which transforms them, releases in them their promise. Our belongings too can have a
more intimate relation to our selfhood. But this more authentic belonging is not simply a
relation of dominating power. This applies even more radically to our belonging together

16.3 Page 153

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 115
in human community.
The theme of possession of the other has also been a major concern in contemporary
European philosophy, especially in the light of different interpretations of Hegel’s
dialectic of master and slave. Power and domination have been held to define the essence
of human relations. This is currently a much debated issue, but Marcel has things to say
that have not been surpassed. I mention here Marcel’s fascination with Sartre’s
essentially degraded view of the other where the master/ slave dialectic is concretized as
a dialectic of sadist and masochist: either dominate or be dominated is the either/or that
runs through all of Sartre. While fascinated with Sartre’s view that hell is the other,
Marcel is unrelentingly hostile to it. The Sartrean look is the look of the Gorgon that
would reduce the other to stone. This look wants to have the other, wants to objectify the
other and disarm by pre-emptive violence the suspected threat to the self’s freedom.
Sartre’s sense of the human body is tied to his understanding of our openness to the
other. Sartre’s body is the place of negativity, the nothingness that shapes our freedom in
its power of refusal, like that of the child that asserts its own difference by repeating its
‘No’. If the body incarnates a ‘We are’ and, in a manner that affirms a solidarity with
what is other to self, then we are outside this Sartrean sense of the body, this sense of the
other, and this apotheosis of negation as freedom. Against the Sartrean degradation,
Marcel recommends the possibility of disponabilité. This availability to the other is not
threatened by the other, nor concerned to threaten. It signals a reversal of the normal for-
self of, say, the Spinozistic conatus essendi. It is the promise of an agape, rather than the
drive of eros to possess the other.
In opposition to having, our relativity to the other is marked by the gift. The bestowal
of a gift is never neutral, never just a transfer of a possession from one to the other. The
gift given is the bearer of generosity towards the other and for the other. If human being
were exhausted by will to power or conatus as self-insistence, giving would be a mere
ruse to use the other for the self again. There would be no true giving as a movement of
self towards the other but not for the sake of the self, but simply for the other as beloved.
Without this giving over of the giver, a gift is not a genuine gift.
Similarly the receiving of the gift is not an indifferent addition to the receiver’s
inventory of possessions. The communication of self on one side, of course, can be met
by refusal on the other. One might distrust the bestower’s goodness and turn away, or
take and suspect and wait for the appearance of the ulterior motive. The Sartrean self
lives this suspicion of the goodness of the other. A thing given is received as a genuine
gift in being hospitably welcomed. What touches one in the gift is not the thing or the
possession. It is the generous freedom of the other that has made itself available without
care for itself. The thanks that then may be voiced has nothing to do with abjectness
before an other who has one in his or her debt. Thanks is simple, elemental appreciation
of the transcendence of self-insistence by the goodness of the giver.
Marcel offers some important meditations on the family and on paternity in Homo
Viator. He calls attention to a community of spirit beyond all objectification. There are
ontological issues at stake in the shaping of a singular destiny by relation to the family.
One might here compare Marcel’s respect for paternity and the family to Sartre’s
contempt of the father in The Words, and his juvenile baiting of the bourgeois family. Of
course, it is not only Sartre who displays this puerile disdain. Marcel distances himself

16.4 Page 154

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 116
from the pervasive attitude in post-romantic modernity that the father is always the
tyrannical lord. Levinas’s remarks on the family also escape the closed dialectic of master
and slave.
Generosity is a condition of being beyond having which testifies to the human power
of sacrifice. Sacrifice literally means to make sacred (sacer facere). Here Marcel’s
concern with generosity relative to the human other shades into his meditations on the
divine other. For instance, Marcel draws attention to the difference of the martyr and the
suicide. Suicides claim that their bodies are their own property and that they can do with
them what they will. They claim the freedom to visit the ultimate violence on it. Martyrs
look like suicides but are entirely different. They give up their bodies, their lives because
neither belong to them. They belong to something higher than themselves and to this their
death witnesses. Suicides attest to nothing but their own despair. Martyrs are centred
beyond themselves; suicides find a centre in nothing, not even in themselves. The death
of a true martyr is living testimony to a higher order of being and worth. Our existence is
not our property but a gift of this order. The sacrifice makes sacred; even in this death the
martyr gives himself or herself over to this order, gives thanks for its gift.
Marcel as philosopher was not primarily or directly interested in the traditional issues
of natural theology. He was concerned with an existential phenomenology of significant
occasions in human experience where the sense of the divine breaks through or is offered
to us. While his conversion to Catholicism was profoundly influential, he tried to stay on
the philosophical side of specifically theological reflections. He was reticent about
making full-blown theological statements. He expressed some satisfaction when his
reflections spoke to individuals outside Catholicism. His philosophical meditations were
suggestive of theological possibilities, without determinately articulating anything even
approaching a systematic idea of God.
Marcel’s greatest fear, I suspect, and precisely out of religious reverence, was the
reduction of God to our concepts. Yet clearly his religious faith provided a matrix that
nurtured the characteristic ideas of his philosophical reflection. Reflections on the
mystery of suffering and evil, and on the love that seeks to outlive death, take his thought
again and again to the borders of religious faith.
He set himself against the traditional proofs of God as objectifying what ought never to
be objectified. The very idea of proving God is a misconception, a misconception that
might border on a kind of rationalistic sacrilege, if the living God is reduced to a mere toy
in a parlour game of conceptual virtuosity. God is never an object, always a Thou that
resists reification. Yet Marcel was profoundly disturbed at the godlessness of western
modernity. There is in his writings a growing sense of the spiritual waste produced by
godless modernity when coupled with the unbridled hubris of a Promethean technicism.
He has much in common with Heidegger’s later meditations on the absence of the holy in
modernity.
Marcel does not fit a common view of existentialism as probing a world from which
God has been barred. The atheistic existentialist, reduced to caricature by Sartre, sternly
girds his or her loins before this Godforsaken world, and dismisses as a sentimental
coward anyone seeking hope and ultimate sense. The stratagem began by being
disturbing but ended in a different conformism. Its revolt against the old became its new
dogma. To Marcel’s credit he was not consoled by this comfort of negation. He willingly

16.5 Page 155

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 117
made love, fidelity, hope, transcendence his themes—against the grain of the times.
His suspicion of traditional philosophical concepts of God make him the heir of Pascal
and his opting for the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob. Not that he accepted a fideistic
rejection of reason, a fideism sometimes imputed to Pascal and Kierkegaard, both of
whom are more sophisticated as thinkers than can be captured by a dualism of faith/
reason. Faith and the spirit of truth are bound together, and reason too is bound by the
spirit of truth.
Marcel’s reflections on human fidelity take us to the border of religious faith. Thus his
discussions of death and immortality have little to do with proving the immortality of the
soul. They are meditations on a fidelity between the living and the dead others, a fidelity
that transcends the divide between the living and the dead. Nor is the issue of death
simply a question of my death; it is much more a matter of the death of the other arousing
in the still living the promise of a fidelity beyond death. There is no objective certainty
with respect to this fidelity. Nor is there with respect to faith in God. It is always on trial
in its sojourn in the world. Fidelity is tied to hope, with the promise of being that cannot
now be secured with complete certainty. Fidelity itself may flower into witnessing and
testimony. Such existential realities—suffering, fidelity, hope, generosity, love,
testimony—are the mysteries in which our sense of the sacred is shaped and on which the
philosopher must reflect. The kinship with Kierkegaard is noticeable: the impossibility of
objective certainty with respect to faith and fidelity. We are dealing with a trans-objective
order, which for Marcel is not merely subjective.
Like Nietzsche he acknowledged the godless condition of modern man. But unlike
Nietzsche, he did not see this condition as a gain for human freedom but as the sign of a
catastrophic loss or refusal. Marcel admired Nietzsche’s honest diagnosis about our
godlessness but not his proposed solution in the Overman. Nietzsche offered a version of
heroic sacrifice when he says: I love the man who creates beyond himself and thus
perishes. But in the end there is no genuine beyond for Nietzsche, since all transcendence
dissolves into human self-transcendence. Without transcendence beyond human self-
transcendence, our sacrifice witnesses to nothing, except perhaps ourselves. The
wasteland still grows.
Promethean humans may steal divine fire, but in absolutizing their own power they
betray their community with the power of transcendence beyond them. The aspiration to
transcendence is deformed. Its root is the divine ground; out of this ground, it grows;
outside of it, the aspiration to transcendence withers. The howl of Nietzsche’s Madman
was heard by Marcel, but he also heard a different music. With neither Marcel nor
Nietzsche had the horror of this howl been cheapened into the postmodern kitsch it has
now become, with the chirpy nihilists who blithely claim to be at home in the wasteland.
KARL JASPERS
Karl Jaspers is often identified with German existentialism in that he speaks of one of the
tasks of philosophy as the clarification of Existenz. He distinguished empirical being
(Dasein) from Existenz which is peculiar to the human being. Some commentators have
seen a desire to mark his own thought off from Heidegger’s Dasein, used in the special

16.6 Page 156

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 118
Heideggerian sense to refer to human existence. The relationship between Jaspers and
Heidegger would command a study in itself, yet both helped to mediate Kierkegaard’s
philosophy of existence in the twentieth century. Philosophy of existence emphasizes the
singularity of the human being, and often in a manner that stresses the recalcitrance of
that singularity to inclusion in any system of concepts. Jaspers shares this view but
qualifies it with a different respect for the systematic impulse, and indeed a less closed
sense of system than had been dominant since German idealism. The tension of Existenz
and system, the necessity and the limits of system, the relation of Existenz and
transcendence at the limit of all systems, constitute some of his major concerns.
Jaspers suffered from ill health since his youth, which he turned to good use by
husbanding his strengths for thinking. His sense of philosophy was never that of an
academic discipline but that of a noble calling. He was under threat during the Nazi
regime, but he re-emerged into public prominence after the war with widespread respect
for his ethical integrity. He willingly undertook the public task of raising the question of
German guilt, and was always concerned with the spiritual condition of the time, the state
of the university, the issues of politics, national and international, especially in a nuclear
age, the questions of world religions in an age of mass communication.
Jaspers did not publicly commit himself to philosophy until around the age of 40. His
background prior to that was in medicine and psychology. His first published work was
General Psychopathology (1913), followed by Psychology of Weltanschauungen (1919).
He was later to say that these were really philosophy all along, though not as overtly so as
his subsequent work. His reverence for philosophy made him reluctant to claim its
mantle, especially when professional philosophers frequently fell short of the nobility of
its calling. His first major work, Philosophie, was published in 1931 and established him
as a major voice. The point has been made that the publication of Heidegger’s Being and
Time in 1927 stole his existential thunder and dimmed somewhat the lustre of his
achievement.
Existenz is Jaspers’s counterpart to Heidegger’s Dasein. For both, only the human
being exists in this unique sense: only the human being is questionable to itself. Existenz
is marked by this relatedness to self that is unique to human being; we are a being for self
which is the possibility of free self-determination. Though Kierkegaard’s influence marks
both Heidegger and Jaspers, in Jaspers we find a strong respect for science grounded in
his early training. This respect never wavered. Jaspers departs from the standard picture
of existentialism as virulently anti-scientific. He never tires of insisting that science is one
of the great works of the human mind. Moreover, any serious contemporary
philosophizing worth the name must take due cognizance of its pervasive role in the
modern world.
That said, the philosopher’s task is not simply to be a methodologist of science. In
reflecting on the meaning of science one inevitably inquires as to the precise status of
scientific truth and science’s role within the full economy of human life. One might even
call Jaspers a philosopher of science in this generous sense that up to quite recently was
almost unknown in Anglo-American analyses of science: science understood as a human
achievement, and hence placed within a larger historical and cultural, indeed spiritual,
milieu. To reflect on science is then not to abstract its methodological essence in a
pseudo-ahistorical analysis; it is to meditate on the ideal of truth, and in Jaspers’s case to

16.7 Page 157

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 119
open up a more fundamental sense of truth, which is constitutive of the milieu of
scientific truth.
Jaspers’s ideal of philosophy here is reminiscent of a certain reading and
reconstruction of Kant’s project. Many commentators have remarked on his debt to Kant,
and Jaspers always acknowledged the depth of this debt. In Anglo-American philosophy
Kant has been primarily read through the Critique of Pure Reason, interpreted as an anti-
metaphysical tract, interspersed with some epistemological insights. Outside of Anglo-
American analysis, Kant’s more comprehensive ambitions are more willingly and widely
recognized. Kant spoke of these ambitions in terms of the architectonic impulse. This
means that reflection on science is certainly with a view to plotting the limits of valid
cognition within a precisely delimited sphere. But—and this is where the more
comprehensive sense of philosophy of science is relevant—to plot that limit is not
necessarily to impute a merely negative judgment about other modes of meaning that
may be other to science. One thinks the limits of science to know its strength but also its
weakness in addressing no less pressing perplexities that transcend science. To assert that
there are such perplexities that transcend science is not at all to depreciate science. It is to
say that science is not the totality. The philosopher thinks what is other to science in
thinking the greatness of science.
A careful reading of the Kantian enterprise will show that the heart of Kant’s
philosophy is not in the First Critique but in the Second Critique, and perhaps to an
ambiguous extent (which has proved powerfully suggestive to Kant’s German
successors) in the Third Critique. German thinkers have this notable ability to hear voices
in Kant’s writing that to the outsider seem mere silences. In the scholastic twists and
turns of the Kantian architectonic they sense that Kant was a tortured thinker. A tortured
perplexity of thought is incessantly at work behind or beneath the scholastic encasing of
concepts wherein Kant sheaths his explorations. Jaspers singles out many great thinkers
for mention—Plato, Plotinus, Cusa, Spinoza, Hegel—but it is clear that his heart hears
something in Kant that he hears nowhere else. Kant is often taken as a destroyer of
Transcendence. Jaspers’s reverence for Kant, I suspect, is as a thinker who tries to plot a
winding way from finitude to Transcendence.
This sense of philosophy with a kind of Kantian architectonic is in tension with the
singularity of human being as Existenz. Granting too the great power of science, there are
questions that still exceed its proper competence. I underline the fact that the emphasis
must first fall on questioning. We are here not talking about academic textbook puzzles.
We are talking about the thinking human being as struck into questioning at the edge of
all scientific rationalizing. There can be nothing anonymous or neutral about being struck
into such questioning, and this is why the very unique selfhood of the philosopher is at
stake in a way that is never quite the case in science. The stakes of perplexity are
different in philosophy, for the mode of questioning that erupts is not one that can be
completely objectified.
In scientific questioning the point is to detach oneself from oneself in the idiosyncrasy
of selfhood, and to pose as univocal and determinate a question as possible. The singular
I of Existenz becomes the anonymous one of univocal mind, consciousness in general.
One represents univocal mind, anonymously the same for every rational consciousness,
in search of a univocal answer to a univocal curiosity. This is related to Marcel’s notion

16.8 Page 158

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 120
of the problem. But in philosophy a transformation of selfhood is called for which is
energized in a new mode of perplexity which cannot be terminated by information about
this object or that object. This perplexity is not a univocal curiosity about this thing or
that thing. It is a kind of indeterminate wondering that may extend to the whole of what
is, and indeed to the possibility of nothing. The ‘objects’ of philosophical perplexity are
not univocal, determinate objectifiable themes. Nor can the ‘results’ of philosophical
thinking be treated thus, be packaged thus. To do this would be to distort the true energy
of living philosophical thinking. This indeterminate perplexity is the very self-
transcending energy of human thinking. It was the ceaselessness of this that tortured
Kant, even when he thought he had finally laid it to rest in the system and its categories.
I am putting the matter in terms Jaspers does not use but that do not betray his intent.
Thus this perplexity is called forth when philosophy deals with what Jaspers calls
‘boundary situations’ (Grenzsituationen). Questions at the boundary are not just
questions about the limits of science, though they are that too. They are questions on the
limit, on the edge, simpliciter. The most obvious boundary situation is death. There is no
answer to the meaning of death, because there is no determinate univocal concept that
would put this event within an objective rational whole. Rather this event puts all
objective rational wholes into question, and yet the genuine philosopher has to continue
to think despite the severe strain put on the ideal of rational completeness. These are the
boundary situations Jaspers considers in Philosophie: that I must die, that I cannot live
without conflict and suffering, that I cannot escape guilt.
Boundary situations are not unrelated to Marcel’s notion of the meta-problematic or
mystery. They burst out of the system of scientific rationality. Yet philosophy does not
end at this bursting. A more authentic philosophizing can then begin. Put in terms of
Kant: Kant was obsessed with the desire to make metaphysics into a secure science, and
to put behind him all the ‘random gropings’ of the past. Did Kant secure metaphysics as a
science? The answer must be no. It will always be no. Metaphysics is not exhausted by
the rationalistic scholasticism of the Wolffian school. Jaspers is critical of metaphysics in
a vein reminiscent of Kant’s attack on rationalistic science of being. But metaphysical
thinking feeds on the indeterminate perplexity that takes us to the boundary and that is
more radically energized in encounter with the boundary. There is a sense in which
metaphysics really only begins at the limits of science. Despite his Kantian critique of
‘metaphysics’, I think Jaspers also hears this in Kant: the old rationalistic metaphysics
may perhaps be put in its place; but at the limit, the old and ever fresh wonder is recalled
into new life. A different kind of thinking has to take place at the boundary. This thinking
Jaspers performs under the rubric of what he calls ‘periechontology’ as distinct from the
old ‘ontology’.
Consider here Jaspers’s claim that truth cannot be reduced to correctness. Scientific
truth does operate with some notion of correctness, Jaspers implies. Putting aside the
complex disagreements in current philosophy of science, the ideal of correctness is based
upon the presupposition that the ideal of determinate intelligibility is fundamental. A
scientific proposition or theory or hypothesis is correct if it somehow ‘corresponds’ to the
determinate state of affairs that it purports to report. The scientific proposition or theory
or hypothesis must be stated with as much determinate precision as possible. The limit of
this precision would be a mathematical univocity, a completely determinate formulation

16.9 Page 159

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 121
of a matter without any shade of equivocity or ambiguity or indefiniteness. Moreover, the
reality thus propositionally determined is itself taken to be a more or less determinate
manifestation of being. To be scientifically objective is thus to epitomize an objective
mode of thinking relative to a reality that is objectified in just that sense of being
appropriated as completely determinate. Scientific correctness objectively dispels the
ambiguities of being. There is no objective mathesis of ambiguity, only a mathesis that
dissolves ambiguity.
Within its sphere this is to the point, as Jaspers acknowledges. But philosophical
thinking is already outside this sphere as reflecting upon this ideal of truth as correctness
and the will to objective knowing inherent in it. Philosophy is thus already a non-
objectifying thought. Jaspers pursues the question relative to truth as correctness by
suggesting that determinate objects could not appear as determinable and hence as
scientifically intelligible did they not appear out of or against a background that is not
itself an object. This is the horizon of intelligibility that makes possible the appearance of
determinate objects as determinate. The background horizon relative to which scientific
truthdeterminately appears is not itself a determinate truth. There is no truth as
correctness possible about this horizon. The horizon is truth in a sense that is not
determinable or objectifiable.
Again one is hard put to forget Heidegger’s analysis of the primordiality of alētheia
relative to truth as orthotes or adaequatio. We might say that this indeterminable truth is
the non-objective other to the indeterminate perplexity that drives the self-transcending
thinking of philosophy. One wonders if in his own way Kant was aware of this finally
indeterminable sense of truth. One of his most suggestive phrases in the Third Critique
was ‘purposiveness without purpose’, (Zweckmässigkeit ohne Zweck). Kant does not
extend the meaning of this phrase beyond the aesthetic, yet it has implications for the
very self-transcending orientation of the human being towards truth as beyond every
determinate truth. This is truth as the ultimate horizon of the truths of science and the
determinate intelligibilities it discloses. There is, of course, a deep equivocity in Kant in
tending to restrict truth to what is scientifically validated, and Jaspers shares in this
equivocation, even while in practice extending the notion of truth well beyond scientific
correctness. Jaspers’s name for this horizon of truth is ‘the Encompassing’ (Das
Umgreifende), one of the major ideas in his philosophy as a whole.
Das Umgreifende—the word carries the suggestion of being englobed by something
that cannot be reduced to any definite object within the globe, the circle. Is this a
variation of Parmenides’ well-rounded truth? Yes. But any implication of a closed totality
is something against which Jaspers will fight. The very language seems almost
unavoidably to connote the closed circle. But if so, this is not something Jaspers intends.
To close the circle would be to determine the indeterminable and so to objectify its non-
objectifiable transcendence. Jaspers also claims that there is a plurality of modes of the
Encompassing, and hence a Parmenidean monism will never do. This plurality of modes
includes: Being in itself that surrounds us—this is further specified in terms of world and
Transcendence; the Being that we are, further specified as empirical existence (Dasein),
consciousness as such and spirit (Geist); finally the Encompassing as Existenz and reason
(Vernunft).
Jaspers’s philosophy is here a post-Kantian Kantianism of finitude in which the

16.10 Page 160

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 122
singularity of Existenz is thrust into the ambiguities of the Kantian architectonic.
Jaspers’s Kantianism appears again in that the ultimate indeterminability of the
Encompassing makes it impossible to capture as a totality. Hegelian idealism makes what
for Jaspers is the false claim to totality. To claim totality would be to imply a standpoint
external to the Encompassing and this is impossible. Every determinate standpoint is
relative to a determinate, objectified other, and hence is itself only possible on the basis
of its englobement by the Encompassing.
We humans are not the encompassing of Encompassing. Still there is a sense in which
for Jaspers we humans are the Encompassing; somehow our self-transcending thinking
participates in the Encompassing; we are not determinate things but as Existenz
participants in the truth in this more ultimate sense. We ourselves are a certain horizon of
truth in a sense that cannot be reduced to objective correctness. The ‘Kantianism’ in this
again brings us back to a certain finitude of thought, even in the indeterminate self-
transcending of thought. The rejection of totality makes Jaspers join hands with Marcel in
rejection of the speculative whole of Hegelian idealism. Marcel is very explicit in saying
that the concept of totality is completely inappropriate to the idea of the spirit.
Jaspers, in my view, learned more from Hegel than he always explicitly acknowledged.
His willingness to acknowledge the debt was spoken more clearly in his later life, but at
the time of his earlier writing Hegel was not seen as an interlocutor that one could be
respectably associated with, except to try to thrash. Nevertheless, Jaspers is very much a
post-Hegelian philosopher in his refusal of totality, something he shares also with
Heidegger. We will see in Levinas a divergence of totality and infinity, where the infinite
ruptures every totality, beyond recuperation in any higher totality.
Our failure to determine the indeterminability of the Encompassing does not mean a
surrender to the merely indefinite. The other thinking at the boundary of objective
thought must be complemented by the project of Existenz clarification. Jaspers has some
very important reflections on what he calls ‘foundering’ (Scheitern) and
‘shipwreck’ (Schiffbruch). Philosophy too founders, but in its foundering the possibility
of breaking through to something other cannot be closed off. I cannot dwell on
foundering here, but we can appropriately situate Jaspers relative to two exceptional
predecessors he singles out for special mention: Nietzsche and Kierkegaard. These two
could be said to live a sense of philosophical foundering that is deeply significant for all
subsequent philosophizing.
Jaspers’s writing shows a clear awareness that these two figures signal the end of a
epoch, the end of modernity. Without exaggeration one can say that, to the extent that he
appropriated their significance, Jaspers himself was a postmodern philosopher. I use the
phrase with hesitation, since now postmodernism wastes itself with an academic anti-
academic frivolity, the hermeneutics of suspicion gone chic, a scholastic scepticism
without spiritual substance. A postmodern philosopher in any genuine sense is one who
recognizes the spiritual sickness of modernity. Of course, a sick being is not a dead being,
and a sick being continues to live, hence it must be in some other respects healthy.
Modernity is sick in this ambiguous sense. Kierkegaard and Nietzsche not only diagnosed
this sickness, they lived this sickness within themselves. Both were experimental
thinkers, both experienced the illness they tried to cure in themselves, the illness of
nihilism.

17 Pages 161-170

▲back to top

17.1 Page 161

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 123
Kierkegaard’s Christian cure, Nietzsche’s Dionysian pharmakon, diverge. Jaspers
thinks that philosophy can never be the same after them. They represent the radical
rupture with idealistic totality. They stand before our future as exceptional thinkers who
have lived through the spiritual sickness of modernity. Both founder for Jaspers. But this
living through and foundering is informed by its own spiritual greatness. This greatness
makes one reluctant to ally them completely with ‘postmodernism’, where the desire for
spiritual seriousness or greatness seems feeble, if not terminal. Nietzsche and
Kierkegaard would shudder at what passes for their current postmodern appropriations.
Nietzsche would see the last men mouthing his songs, and sounding cacophonous.
Kierkegaard would be dismayed at the aestheticization of his work, as if he did not call us
to God—God, God and nothing but God. Let readers ask themselves if my reiteration of
the word ‘God’ has not sent a shudder of uneasy embarrassment up their spines.
Understand Nietzsche and Kierkegaard well. They are embarrassing thinkers; they shame
us.
They call into question the traditional pretensions of reason. Jaspers is quite clear about
this. Do they bring philosophy to an end? Perhaps philosophy of totality, but philosophy:
no. Jaspers is himself a thinker of the end of philosophy, but he has a more nuanced
historical sense than the fashionable proclaimers of the end of philosophy. There is an
historical fairness. He does not totalize the tradition of philosophy in order to denounce it
for totalizing thought—a blatant equivocation not avoided by anti-totalizing totalizers
like Adorno, Derrida, Heidegger, Nietzsche himself. Though Jaspers is no Hegelian, there
is much about him not entirely antipathetic to Hegel. He acknowledges that for a long
time he got great sustenance for his own lectures from Hegel. Granting his greatness,
eventually the totalizing Hegel became ‘grotesque’ for him. I mention his relation to
Hegel again in that both have a much more generous attitude to the tradition of
philosophy than almost all other post-Hegelian philosophers.
Hegel, Jaspers and Heidegger are perhaps the three greatest thinkers of the last 150
years who have tried to embrace, albeit very diversely, the heritage of millennia in their
thinking. Jaspers’s generosity to the tradition makes him finally distance himself from the
exceptionality of Kierkegaard and Nietzsche. Their provocation of reason has to be
balanced by the greatness of reason, as seen from a proper appropriation of the great
thinkers of the past. Against the modern will to unprecedented originality—infecting
Nietzsche and Heidegger—Jaspers wants to reaffirm the idea of philosophia perennis.
A major undertaking of Jaspers was to write a universal history of philosophy. This
was never completed. Jaspers was interested not in a history of ideas but in a dialogue
with the great thinkers by a genuine philosopher. The truth persists across time, though
mediated through time. Nor is this truth identifiable with Heidegger’s historicity of being,
since Jaspers is not unwilling to invoke eternity, granting, of course, all the cautions and
qualifications necessary in any such invocation. The tradition of philosophy is the
privileged conversation of great thinkers. He includes himself in that conversation.
Across the centuries a great thinker still calls to other thinkers. We later thinkers have to
resurrect the greatness of the past thinker, not merely debunk them in the interests of
spuriously elevating ourselves into a position of false originality. It is the spiritual truth of
philosophical honesty that the great thinkers share. Each concretizes the self-surpassing
transcendence of thinking, a personification of the extremity of honest perplexity before

17.2 Page 162

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 124
ultimacy.
Jaspers has not been as fashionable as Nietzsche and Heidegger precisely because of
the generosity of his respect for tradition. In modernity we have been so infatuated with
futurity that we have shortchanged the spiritual greatness of the past. In the future it will
be great, it will be new, it will be unprecedented. A rhetoric of originality masks a lot of
intellectual conceit. Nietzsche and Heidegger were not immune from thus puffing
themselves up. As if a philosopher must strut and preen and crow: How different I am,
how new! Cockcrow: and no, not dawn, as Nietzsche said; but flourish, flourish of the
postmodern cock.
Jaspers addresses the theme of the other, especially in that philosophy for him is
inseparable from communication. The dialogue with the tradition is one instance of
communication. Communicative reason opens beyond monadic thinking at both ends:
towards the past, towards the future. Nor did Jaspers deny the responsibility of the
communicative reason of philosophy to shape the spiritual present. Again the other has to
be accorded a different place in thought from that allowed for in idealistic totality.
Reason in Existenz is always marked by a boundless will to communication. One sees
some harbingers of Habermas. The communicative relation to the other is constitutive of
the activity of reason. Indeed Existenz is not itself at all apart from the relation of the self
to the other. The demand of communication with the other must be met for Existenz to be
itself. Likewise we must be awakened to ourselves as Existenz if we are to do justice to
the demand of communication.
Jaspers confessed to loneliness and incapacity to communicate inhis youth. This was
exacerbated by the isolating effects of his illness. Just as Existenz cannot be objectified,
so our relatedness to the other can never be reduced to an objective relation such as might
hold between things. Jaspers’ primary emphasis is on the mutual reciprocity of
communication between humans. He is a severe critic of the substitution in modernity of
mass society for genuine community. The flattening of human beings into averageness,
and hence the impoverishment of singularity, diminish, if not deform, what is essential to
real community. In the singularity of Existenz there is always an opening to what is other
than closed subjectivity.
As with Kierkegaard and Marcel, Jaspers offers a critique of the functionalization of
man and the massification of societies. The sacrifice of singularity as Existenz is the
defect of totalitarianism. But this defect also marks the competitive individualism of
capitalism, for here singularity is merely atomized, and between atoms there is no deep
bond of community. He does not display Nietzsche’s elitist disdain for the many. He was
deeply and ineradicably influenced by Weber. In many respects he also shares the sense
of community at work in Kierkegaard’s neglected social critique: each of us is an
absolute singularity; this singularity is preserved in community, but genuine community
is ultimately a community of spirit under God. The will of Existenz to communicate with
the other stands under Transcendence as the absolute other.
Nor does Jaspers deny conflict in a mushy communitarianism. As already indicated,
guilt and conflict are discussed as boundary situations in Philosophie. His suffering
through Nazism was itself exposure to the violence of evil. He does underscore the
possibility of a loving struggle. Love is not devoid of conflict, but the conflict is a
creative war, polemos, as it were. Communication can be a contestation which is a mutual

17.3 Page 163

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 125
challenge to more authentic Existenz. His love for his wife, Gertrude, seem to have
epitomized for him this creative contestation. This is close to Marcel’s creative fidelity,
and certainly beyond sadism and masochism, the degraded form of erotic struggle given
so much attention by Sartre.
Communication is also central in Jaspers’s ideas of reason and truth. Reason is an
opening to the universal, but the true universal is not an anonymous generality in which
singularity is submerged. So also for Jaspers truth is incomplete if it does not embody
itself in a will to total communication. Truth is not closed on itself, timeless and
unaffected by historicity. Jaspers even implies that truth actualizes itself in the movement
of communication itself. Truth comes to completion in the process of communication.
One senses the shadow of Kant again. One is reminded of the Kantian progressus, the
infinite task of the regulative ideal. WhenJaspers indicates a call on self-transformation in
communication, to my mind he is talking about truthfulness, both singular and
communal. Obviously this is constituted in the coming to truthfulness by the self and the
community. This is a becoming truthful which would not be possible in the solitude of the
self-communing thought, self-thinking thought. What about a sense of truth that is not
constituted by what comes to be in a process of communication, but that makes possible
that process of coming to be of social truthfulness? This sense of truth makes possible the
constitution of truthfulness but is not itself constituted by truthfulness. This is truth that a
process of communication unfolds or reveals, rather than creates or constitutes.
Residues of the constitutive language of Kantian idealism are here evident in Jaspers.
The otherness of truth as for itself is compromised by this constitutive language. Jaspers
does not want to deny this otherness but his submission to Kantian ways of thinking
conditions a certain emphasis in his efforts to speak of Transcendence. This is applicable
with respect to metaphysical transcendence, but also with respect to the possibility of
divine revelation. The movement of our transcending, even in the communication of
truthfulness, mingles with Transcendence as communicating with us out of its own
integral otherness, such that we do not really know if there is this other otherness. What
we do, our becoming truthful, seems hard to distinguish from what is done to us, our
patience to truth. Does what is done to us collapse into what we do? How then are we to
avoid a wrong appropriation of the other?
There is a principle of tolerance in Jaspers’s sense of communicative reason. He knows
that vis-à-vis Existenz we cannot just say there is one univocal truth. The truth is refracted
singularly in the specific truthfulness of every singular Existenz. Reason must be honestly
vigilant to the particularities of just that singular refraction. Communication is this
vigilance, and this vigilance is respect for the other as other. I use the term ‘refraction’,
which is not the language of constitutive idealism. And even though there is a quasi-
constitutive language in Jaspers, his language of foundering must be seen to plot the limit
of this, and indirectly to open a moment of radical receptivity in which we do not
communicate but in which the other is communicating with us. Jaspers does not explicitly
address the question of symmetrical and asymmetrical relativity in a manner that Levinas
does.
Throughout I have referred to Transcendence. Here we approach the question of God.
Transcendence for Jaspers is the ground of human Existenz and freedom. Jaspers treats of
transcendence in volume III of Philosophie under the heading Metaphysics. The heading

17.4 Page 164

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 126
is not insignificant in the light of his critique of ontology from the standpoint of
periechontology. The sense of metaphysical transcendence returns,proves unavoidable,
even when all the Kantian strictures about metaphysics have been taken to heart.
Transcendence is the absolute other. Again the Kantian modulation for Jaspers is that
Transcendence is not to be known cognitively but to be reached existentially. There is no
positive knowledge of Transcendence. Moreover, Transcendence grants itself
gratuitously. Of course, if this is true the autonomy of reason is breached, and every trace
of idealism, even Kantian idealism, will have to been reinspected.
Jaspers speaks of Transcendence as the absolute Encompassing, the Encompassing of
all the encompassings. Transcendence is not the world, nor is it empty possibility, though
Jaspers says that it shows itself only to Existenz. Transcendence is the absolute other in
which Existenz is grounded. Wherever Existenz is authentically existing, it is not
completely through itself. The human existent does not create itself. Relative to
Transcendence I know that I have been given to myself. The more decisively Existenz is
aware of its freedom the more it is aware of its relation to Transcendence.
I am tempted to think of both Augustine and Kierkegaard. Augustine speaks of being
concerned with the soul and God and nothing more. This Augustinian theme is sounded
in the correlation of Existenz and Transcendence. Moreover, Augustine speaks of God as
intimior intimo meo: God is more intimate to me than I am to myself. The intimacy of
this relation is beyond the world of objectivity; it happens in the deepest interiority of
non-objectifiable Existenz, selfhood. Truth is subjectivity in Kierkegaard’s sense: the
truth of Transcendence will never be reduced to a set of general, public concepts. Perhaps
this is why Jaspers insists, in Kantian manner, on our relation to Transcendence as non-
cognitive. Why not speak of knowing in a different, non-objectifiable sense, a wisdom of
idiocy, idiot wisdom of the intimacy of being? Why the obsessive insistence that
validated cognition be confined to objective science?
Surely we can expand the notion of cognition without having to give ourselves over to
full-blown Hegelian reason? For that matter, without this expansion does not Jaspers’s
way of talking fall foul of Hegel’s critique of Kant’s unknowable: If it is unknowable,
you can say nothing; you cannot even know that it is unknowable; but you are saying
something, then it must not be unknowable. I am enjoining the Hegelian question, not
endorsing Hegel’s answer to Kant in terms of a dialectical knowing of Transcendence.
Hegel’s answer sins in the opposite direction of cognitively subordinating Transcendence
to immanence. We need a knowing other than Hegelian knowing and a non-knowing
other than Kantian agnosticism.
Transcendence is, but is never adequately manifest in appearance. It eludes all thinking
if we mean to think it as a determinate object. Itseems easier to name it negatively than to
say what it is positively. There is a sense in which we can find no final firm place in
trying to say it, whether positively or negatively. Jaspers allows that there are many
names for it. We can call it Being, Actuality, Divinity, God. Relative to thinking, he says
we can call it Being; relative to life, it can be called Authentic Actuality; as demanding
and governing, it can be called Divinity; relative to our encounter with it in our singular
personhood, it can be called God.
Again we find a denial of cognitive content in favour of the naming of an existential
experience. Self-transformation can occur in encounter with Transcendence; it can

17.5 Page 165

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 127
become a source out of which I live and towards which I die. Amor Dei can lead to a
transformation of how we love and hate the world. Jaspers mentions the magnificent love
of the world in Chinese life and the hatred of life in gnostic thought. This latter is finally
a nihilism and despair: the godless creation of the world is brought forth by Lucifer. This
diabolical creation is counter to God. When the world is God’s creation the world is
loved and God is loved in God’s creation; the promise of human existence is affirmed.
We are always within the world and hence our relation to Transcendence is marked by
finitude and foundering. We need the symbol and the cipher to articulate what in the end
is beyond all articulation. In his later life Jaspers undertook a major dialogue with
religious faith. He himself claimed the standpoint of what he called philosophical faith.
Philosophy is often in tension with religion but their quests of ultimacy are akin. Like
Hegel, Jaspers insists on the autonomy of philosophy, sometimes to the point of showing
traces of a residual Enlightenment hostility to the claims of revealed religion. The same
question can be put to both Hegel and Jaspers: To what extent are philosophical ideas
rational transformations of religious themes, and hence not autonomous but
heteronomous? Is philosophical faith religious faith rationalized?
For Hegel, of course, there is no philosophical faith; philosophy is knowing. Jaspers
again stands closer to Kant. His philosophical faith attempts, among other things, to
render articulate the ‘faith’ in favour of which Kant is willing to deny knowledge. This
philosophical faith cannot be assimilated to poetry or science or religion. If philosophy is
other to religion, it is with respect to critical self-consciousness, not with respect to any
Hegelian speculative knowing wherein religion is dialectically aufgehoben. This critical
self-awareness of limits nurtures a vigilance to the idolatry, whether fideistic or
rationalistic, which mistakes the cipher of Transcendence for Transcendence itself.
Religion and philosophy are different, not as opposites but as polar approaches to
Transcendence. In this polarity they comprise a community of ultimates that are
perennially a contestation and a challenge to each other.
EMMANUEL LEVINAS
Emmanuel Levinas was born in Lithuania into an orthodox Jewish family but has spent
most of his life in France. His experience of the Second World War was to shape his
thought deeply. He has written Talmudic studies, though he claims that his philosophy
belongs in another category. Husserl’s phenomenology and Heidegger’s fundamental
ontology influenced his first philosophical studies, influenced in the double sense of
supporting his thinking and yet provoking him into struggle against that very support. His
mature thought is expressed in Totality and Infinity (1961). Subsequently he has
published collections of essays leading to Otherwise than Being or Beyond Essence
(1973). He has also continued to write Talmudic studies of a more strictly religious
character. Starting from phenomenology he has moved towards a recovery of
metaphysical transcendence and an affirmation of what he calls ‘ethics’ as first
philosophy.
Levinas became better known in English-speaking philosophy in the 1980s, partly
mediated through the impact of deconstruction. English-speaking readers will find

17.6 Page 166

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 128
Levinas difficult without some sense of the context out of which he writes. Many
consider Totality and Infinity to be his masterwork. It is a difficult book, for many
philosophers as well as non-philosophers. Levinas’s thinking is haunted by a whole host
of philosophical ghosts. To get some sense of the peculiarities of his philosophizing,
relative to his influences and claims, I name some of the ghosts.
There is the Cartesian heritage that seeks cognitive certainty in the foundation of the
cogito, the ‘I think’. Levinas evinces high respect for Descartes, surprising respect in that
Descartes is often criticized as the originator of an understanding of mind that locks
thought within itself, within its own immanence. Levinas wants to break out of that
closed circle of immanence, without denying a certain inner integrity to the subject.
There is the phenomenological tradition, which can be interpreted as an ambiguous
continuation of the Cartesian heritage. Levinas’s first work was on the theory of intuition
in Husserl, and his practice of phenomenology is not without debt to Husserl. He came to
question the phenomenological doctrine of the intentionality of consciousness. He points
to modes of consciousness where intentionality as a directedness on an object is not the
final story. His discussion of enjoyment, for instance, reveals an engagement of
consciousness, which cannot be reduced to the intention of an object. The structure of
intentionality seems to point to a certain mastery of the object; but if there are modes of
the subject beyond intentionality, then objectifying, hence dominating, consciousness
does not have the last word.
The presence of Heidegger shadowed Levinas. Heidegger’s stature is not denied. Yet
the accusation against him is that his Being is an anonymous power that ultimately leads
to an account of history as impersonal destiny. The person in its singularity is sacrificed
to an ontology of anonymous powers. Heidegger’s thought epitomizes ontology as a
philosophy of power. Levinas opposes this with a metaphysics of the good wherein a
nameless universal Being does not have final sway. Heidegger produces an ontology of
the neuter; there is no basis for an ethics.
Levinas speaks against the neutering of being which he tends to identify with the
horror and anonymity of what he calls the element. A different view of the elemental is
possible, but for Levinas it is the faceless indefinite of the prima materia (sometimes
wrongly identified with to apeiron). His account of the impersonality of the ‘There is’, as
he calls it, reminds one of Sartre’s account of being-in-itself, for instance in his
phenomenology of the viscous: always threatening the integrity of the personal, the self
as an integrity of innerness for itself. Levinas rejected the view of human being as
derelict, as well as Sartre’s alienated vision of man as nothingness. Heideggerian
thrownness is counteracted by a phenomenology of enjoyment. Happiness, a prior
agreement with being, is a more primordial condition of elemental being.
The question as to why Heidegger was an ardent Nazi is as important to Levinas as it
was to Jaspers. Levinas spent time in a prisoner-of-war camp. Nazi philosophy was
articulated in terms of a world-historical destiny as expressed in the German people. The
others do not finally count; will to power subordinates all ethical concern to the victory of
the mighty.
This relates to the influence in French philosophy of Kojève’s reading of Hegel
through the eyes of the master/slave dialectic in the Phenomenology. Hegelianism here
becomes reduced to an all-devouring logic of domination and servitude. Sartre takes up a

17.7 Page 167

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 129
related interpretation in his infamous identification: hell is the other. Against the violence
of the Sartrean look, Levinas sees the defencelessness of the other in the unguarded eyes,
a powerlessness that nevertheless commands in the ethical injunction: Thou shall not kill.
Levinas rejects the identification of death as the master in Kojève’s Heideggerian-
Marxist Hegelianism. Contrary to the dialectic of master and slave and its violence, there
is a pacific relation to the other that Levinas stresses as underlying the entire economy of
labour and dwelling. This relates to the feminine. The grace of the feminine founds the
home and the dwelling, out of which the labouring self is articulated, and with this the
entire realm of economical, political and historical being. Things are conceived
differently at the origins. These origins are not identicalwith the fullness of the ethical
relation but they are consistent with it in a way that the dialectic of master and slave is
not.
Kojève’s Marxist Hegelianism also expresses a philosophy of history which culminates
in the modern state as the earthly embodiment of the absolute. The world-historical
universal sacrifices the intimate singularity of the self as person to the Moloch of the
state. As worldhistorical universals, the state and history are ultimately idolatrous
absolutes. Hegelian philosophy, like Heideggerian ontology, is seen by Levinas as an
ontology of power which always is tempted to relate to the other by murder. The class
struggle historically concretizes the master/slave dialectic. The course of history is war,
the goal of history a homogeneous state in which otherness, the dissident other is
suppressed in a universal sameness. Though this is abhorrent to Levinas, he is still
concerned with labour, property, possession, reminding us of Marcel’s concerns with
being and having.
Levinas’s repeated references to the philosophies of existence are guarded. He shares
much with some existentialists, Kierkegaard for instance, in defending the singularity, the
ipseity of the human self. Levinas’s phenomenological background and its pretence that
philosophy must be rigorous, indeed scientific, makes him uneasy with the so-called
‘irrationalism’ of the existentialists. He distances himself from a philosophy that is
merely a protestation against the impersonal reason of the idealists and rationalists. He
wants to defend a different sense of reason against individualistic irrationalism. This
sense of reason will defend the ethical community of the same and the other. Though
Levinas shuns the way of solitary genius, his sense of singularity aligns him with what is
best in the philosophies of existence. This is an emphasis on what I called the intimacy of
being with respect to Marcel. I find strong echoes of Marcel in some of the themes
Levinas dwells on: the family, paternity, filiality, the home, enjoyment.
There is a groundswell of influence from Levinas’s Jewishness. It is indicated very
explicitly in his admiring reference to Rosenzweig’s The Star of Redemption.
Rosenzweig was initially a Hegelian who had written on Hegel’s doctrine of the state.
Then he had an astonishing quick conversion—reversion really—to Judaism, out of
which The Star of Redemption sprung. This book is considered one of the landmarks of
modern Jewish thought. Against the lure of Hegelian totality, a metaphysics of creation,
as well as an affirmation of singularity as recalcitrant to inclusion in totality, is pursued.
Though in Totality and Infinity Levinas says he is working in a purely philosophical vein,
the distinctiveness of his philosophical voice owes much to the subterranean fermenting
of the Jewish heritage.

17.8 Page 168

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 130
In contrast to not a few poststructuralist thinkers, Levinas’s philosophy has always
exhibited a spiritual seriousness that refuses to playact with the matter itself. The return
of sacred otherness in Levinas reminds us of Shestov’s contrast of Athens and Jerusalem.
Shestov is unjustly neglected today but he is a profound, radical thinker of the limits of
philosophy in relation to religion as an other, and with a sense of the tradition of
speculative metaphysics in some ways more profound than Levinas’s.
With Heidegger and many post-structuralists, Levinas tends to totalize the tradition of
philosophy. All philosophy is said to be only an imperialism of identity or the same.
Levinas speaks of philosophy as allergic to otherness, an allergy that reaches its
culmination in Hegel. This is surely not true of the philosophical tradition as a whole.
This fact is revealed by Levinas’s retraction: there is some philosophical
acknowledgement of the other, as in Plato’s doctrine of the Good beyond being.
The strategy is: totalize the tradition as imperialism of the same; suggest a different
thinking of the other that is without precedent; then smuggle back ideas that in some form
are found in the tradition; finally, acknowledge instances of such ideas in the tradition. Of
course, most readers will have forgotten the first step by the time they reach the last. In
fact, the total claim made in the first step is now effectively abolished. Why not
acknowledge the last step at the start? But one cannot if one wants to claim to ‘overcome
the tradition’. That claim would be dissolved; suspicion would be cast on the
hermeneutics of suspicion. To take the last step first would require a hermeneutics of
generosity and perhaps also a different interpretation of the philosophical tradition.
Levinas is not to be confused with Derrida and Heidegger. He is very critical of
Heidegger, and his writings evidence a spiritual seriousness that is lacking in Derrida. He
mixes suspicion and generosity towards the philosophical tradition in his distinction
between what he calls ‘ontology’ and ‘metaphysics’. Ontology marks a philosophy of
being that always ends up reducing the other to the same. Ontology is a philosophy of the
neuter which cannot do justice to the other, and especially the other as ethical. It is built
upon the logic of a movement from the same to the other which is always for the same,
and always returning to the same. One is reminded of that strand of the tradition that
privileges the movement of thought thinking itself.
By metaphysics Levinas implies a movement of thought that exceeds totality, most
especially in the surplus to thought of the idea of infinity and the face-to-face relation of
the ethical. Metaphysical thought goes from the same to the other, but not in order to
return to the self. This metaphysical movement of mind has always been a philosophical
possibility, evidenced in Levinas’s own citation of Plato’sGood. Beyond thought thinking
itself, thought thinks what is other to thought.
Levinas shows a tendency to identify the assumptions and analyses of Cartesian and
transcendental idealism with the essential possibilities of philosophy. Relative to the
Cartesian heritage, the cogito is privileged as the origin of all rigorously grounded
philosophizing. Even Sartre’s Cartesianism shows this: the availability of consciousness
to itself seems to augur for a mode of philosophizing that is rigorously in possession of
its own procedures and contents, for none of its thoughts escape its own immanence, and
hence its own certainty and certification. Levinas differently underscores the Cartesian
notion of infinitude to find a renewed pathway to the other beyond all mastering thought.
Obviously phenomenology offers a more embracing sense of philosophizing than

17.9 Page 169

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 131
classical Cartesianism, but their basic presuppositions overlap significantly: immanence
to consciousness is fundamental to phenomenology. This is just how the ‘phenomenon’
of phenomenology is defined: not as the Sache as given in itself, but as given to and for
consciousness. Nevertheless, starting with many of phenomenology’s presuppositions
and methodical strategies, Levinas ends up with conclusions that produce the subversion
of phenomenological immanence, as well as classical versions of idealism.
Consider an important example: the discussion of representation in Totality and
Infinity. Long passages are expository of an essentially Husserlian version of
representation: representation is representability to consciousness; the immanence of the
other is objectified as a representation for the same. This notion of representation has also
been attacked by Heidegger, Derrida, Foucault and others. But to take this as the analysis
of representation is questionable. We are offered analyses of representation and
intelligibility which seem to cover the whole field, but do not at all. An account could be
given which does not coincide with Husserl’s view. Levinas himself goes on to do this,
by claiming that there is an uprooted quality to the Husserlian analysis which privileges
the theoretical consciousness. Turning to the phenomenon of enjoyment, Levinas finds a
more primordial stratum in the genesis of representation that undercuts the analysis of the
uprooted version. The ‘intentionality’ of enjoyment does not privilege self-constituting,
or the primacy of the same over the other, as representation allegedly does.
One need not quarrel with this second aim. But Levinas sets up his account as
undercutting the philosophical primacy of representation and intelligibility. In fact he is
essentially criticizing representation and intelligibility as defined by Husserl’s
transcendental method. One could give an account of representation in which the
privilege of the other over the self is primarily stressed. Instead of representation simply
being a commandeering of the other to appear before the self as the self would dictate for
itself, it might be an openness to the other in which the truth of the representation is a
submission to heterogeneity, a humility before the other which the representation tries to
approximate and respect.
Consider: if you ask me to represent you at a meeting, and if I truly want to represent
you, I must subordinate my views to you and yours; I as representative must speak for
you, the other; I cannot make you, the other, speak for me and yet honestly claim that I
am representing you, the other. I am for you, as your representative. Representing is
hence being-for-the-other in which the self subordinates the for-self of its own egoism to
the truth of the other as it is for the other. This is exactly the opposite of the ‘essence’ to
which Levinas reduces representation. Husserlian phenomenology is one philosophy; it is
not philosophy, not the essence of philosophy. Nor is it the touchstone of all
comparisons. Indeed its account is not true to the truth of representation as just indicated:
a standing for the truth of the other as other.
I dwell on this example, for the standard moves of many poststructuralist thinkers,
Derrida included, are already contained in Levinas’s account of representation. But all
philosophical discourse becomes skewed if Husserlian transcendentalism becomes the
standard of philosophy against which other views are to be pitted. There is a certain
historical, hermeneutical myopia here. When Marcel or Jaspers criticizes idealism, we do
not find any tendency to hermeneutical special pleading. They do not totalize philosophy
and its traditions. They are more judicious. Yet they too want to get beyond thought

17.10 Page 170

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 132
thinking itself to thought thinking what is other to thought.
It is impossible to separate Levinas’s philosophy of the other from his sense of infinity
and hence the idea of the divine other. Instead of conceiving the world as a fall or an
emanation from the One, or a projection of constitutive subjectivity, Levinas’s rethinking
of the idea of infinity points towards a renewal of the metaphysics of creation.
Metaphysics here again means a mode of thinking that is for the other as other, not
simply for the same. Creation names the radically originative act by which the singular
creature comes into being for itself, and is given its finite being for itself. The Creator
absolves His creation from the Creator to let be the other as finite in its given freedom. In
that sense, God is the ultimate other that is the giver of all otherness, including the radical
otherness that is let be for itself, and in no way coerced into a return that would
subordinate a part to an engulfing whole.
The strategic ambiguity here is that Levinas describes the for-self as atheist. On initial
reading one might be inclined to think that Levinas espouses atheism. As I understand
him, he is saying that the being of finitude as given in creation is atheist; it is a-theist in
the most literal sense that it is not-God. God does not create Himself in creating the
world, as Hegel and Spinoza might claim. God’s creation is the giving of what is
radically other to God, radically not-God; and this ‘not’ is the measure of an
incommensurability between the Creator and the created being. This incommensurability
is not a merely negative or lamentable disproportion; the ‘not’ of a-theism is the very
space of transcendence in which the freedom of the creature can be enacted and called
forth. The atheism of the self is the promise of its possible being-for-itself, and in its
being-for-self its possible free relation across an irreducible difference to the divine
source itself. Atheist being is then the product of divine generosity; atheism is the
precondition of a different relativity between the human and divine which absolves the
relata of complicity in relations of domination and violation.
Is there a little disingenuousness here? Totality and Infinity was written at a time when
atheistic existentialism and Marxism were in their heyday. For well over a century and a
half, the spiritual ethos of Europe has been dominated by a de rigueur atheism, as is
nowhere more evident than in the popularizing of Sartrean existentialism. Levinas is a
crafty writer in that he incorporates the truth of atheism within a project that aims to
renew the metaphysical affirmation of God as transcendent. In the ambiguous creation,
the human being as for-itself is atheist being; but atheist being can know its real otherness
to ultimate transcendence and hence out of its atheist being turn towards the other, not as
a part returns to its whole, not as an instance subordinates itself to its general, but as a
free centre of ethical existence wills to enact the good of the Creator, the good of the
creature and neighbour. This ethical affirmation stands sentinel against descent into the
anonymous powers of demonic universality, the world-historical universal, whether
idolized in Marxist or in Nazi form. In the latter we become agents, instruments of the
anonymous universal, and all the more vile when we become judges and executioners of
those who will not bow the knee before our murderously exacting idol. This is the malice
of atheist being, which does not receive the expression or consideration in Totality and
Infinity that it should.
Levinas’s emphasis on infinity invokes a tale that spans the history of speculative
metaphysics, from the pre-Socratics to our own time. Levinas exploits the Cartesian idea

18 Pages 171-180

▲back to top

18.1 Page 171

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 133
of infinity in a direction that I suspect would have astonished Descartes himself. Pascal
was correct and saw right through Descartes when he said: ‘I cannot forgive Descartes; in
his whole philosophy he would like to do without God; but he could not help allowing
him a flick of his fingers to set the world in motion; after that he had no more use for
God.’ Levinas, who often cites Pascal with approval, seems hardly to suspect the possible
godlessness of Cartesianism.
There is also a strange approval of Cartesian doctrines of sensibility, praised because
sensibility is held to be essentially other to thought and the concept. Kant is here praised
on the same score for insisting on a heterogeneity between sensibility and understanding.
One sees the point. The continuity of sensibility and thought, whether in Leibniz or in
Hegel, is to be ruptured in defence of a heterogeneity not subsumable under the rational
concept. But there is a sense in which such a thing as Cartesian sensibility hardly exists.
There is a sensible body in Descartes but it is not the body of flesh; it is not the bodied
self; it is the shape of the res extensa that in itself is lifeless. How can this lifeless res
extensa enjoy life, since it is already a dead body? And from where could a Cartesian res
extensa get a face? The res extensa has no face. The Cartesian body is like the featureless
wax of Descartes’ own example, entirely faceless, except for its automated mechanical
movements. But human flesh has a face—just what Levinas wants to uphold.
In another place the Cartesian order is said to be prior to the Socratic order relative to
teaching. But again what can the res cogitans teach to an other, or be taught itself? What
is it taught by the idea of infinity? That God exists. But this is about all that is taught.
Descartes is entirely lacking in the passion of religious inwardness that we find, for
instance, in Augustine, Pascal and Kierkegaard. In fact, for Descartes the self and God
are the two things most easily known, and once Descartes has placed them as
foundational concepts to certify rational knowing methodologically, he gets down to the
real business at hand: mathematicized science of nature. This Cartesian order of objective
mathesis proves all but oblivious of the inward otherness of the self and the superior
otherness of the divine transcendence. These become methodological means to an end,
not enigmatic, mysterious realities that tax all thinking to the utmost, indeed defeat all its
claims to the conceptual mastery, such as Descartes ardently pursued.
How superior here is the Socratic dialogue wherein the promise of openness to the
other is inscribed from the outset. Levinas has nothing to say about dialogue as already
articulating a concept of the soul that in its being is essentially relational; thought is never
kath’ auto in a manner that excludes relativity; for such a kath’ auto would exclude the
possibility of the face-to-face. Socratic dialogue is philosophical speech face-to-face.
There is an implied Socratic sense of bodied speech—speech in the sight and in the
hearing, and indeed within the touch of the other. Speech in a Socratic dialogue is as
much a self saying as a something said.
Levinas’s theme of the face-to-face must be noted here. This is his distinctive
contribution to the discussion of ‘intersubjectivity’. German idealism and
phenomenology bequeathed the problem of the other: starting with subjectivity how do
we genuinely constitute relatedness to the other as other? Is the other merely the means
by which I recognize myself and return to myself? Is the other, seen from the primacy of
the subject, just the mirror in which the self sees essentially itself, hence no radical
otherness can ever be defended? As an heir of phenomenology and not German idealism,

18.2 Page 172

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 134
Levinas confronts phenomenology’s same starting point in the subject. Levinas too starts
with the self, in that earlier parts of Totality and Infinity are predominantly devoted to
showing us a sufficiently strong sense of the separation of the self for itself. The self for
itself is an irreducible ipseity that cannot be subsumed into an impersonal reason, or
made the instance of an abstract universal. And yet this for-self in its radical separateness
is not a transcendental ego. It is invested with the concreteness of the existing I in its
primordial enjoyment of being.
How then is the problem of the inter, the ‘between’, tackled? The self expresses itself
and enters into discourse and language. Expression for Levinas is such that the speaking
subject always attends his or her expression. He or she does not abandon expression but
attends it as willing to justify it, or indeed justify himself or herself, that is to say,
apologize. To apologize does not here mean to ask pardon simply; it implies one standing
there for oneself and owning up in expression to what one is or does. An apology, like
Socrates’, is a self-justification; the justice of the self in its personal particularity is at
stake. But one apologizes always before the other. One attends one’s expression in the
sight of an other. Hence expression and the apologetic attending of expression by the self
is an entry into social relatedness, is the social relation.
This entry of justification, justice, apology, attention of self before the sight of the
other, comes to expression in the face-to-face. I encounter the face of the other and the
other looks on me, not like Sartre’s other that would petrify me and reduce the freedom
of interiority to an objectified thing. The face of the other calls me to justification, to
justice. The face presents itself with a nudity and destitution that is beyond all
conceptualization. The face cannot be totalized, for the infinite comes to epiphany there. I
cannot conceptually determine the face of the other; the eyes of the other look at me with
an unguarded vulnerability, and call me to a response that is beyond power. This
unguarded vulnerability of the eye of the other is radically opposite to Sartre’s look. If
looks could kill, Sartre’s subject would be a mass murderer. In Levinas’s case, the look
offers itself as the other offering itself in unguarded frankness; in that look there appears
the command ‘Thou shalt not kill’.
The ethical is not an instrumental contract that the self of will to power, be it
Nietzschean or Sartrean or Hobbesian, makes to defend itself against the other and to
launch its self-aggrandizing onslaught on the freedom of the other. The unguarded face is
beyond all instrumentality and beyond all finality in the sense that it does not constitute a
determinate purpose or telos that could be conclusively comprehended and mastered or
encompassed. Something overflows in the face of the other that is infinite, and this
infinite is the command of goodness. The overflow of infinity into the between, the inter,
calls the subject in its separateness to a relatedness with the other that does not
compromise separateness, since the very between is an ethical respect of justice between
the self and other.
Levinas finds the face absolutely irreducible, primordial. One cannot break it down
into more basic constituents; it is elemental, though not in Levinas’s sense. It cannot be
contained within the economy of classical subjectivity, whether idealistic or
transcendental/ phenomenological. These latter finally give hegemony to the same over
the other. While Levinas defends the separateness of the subject, the face-to-face and the
overflowing of the other’s infinitude reverse the hegemony of autonomy. There is a

18.3 Page 173

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 135
heteronomy more ultimate than autonomy. The self is for the other; and the other comes
from a dimension of height, even when the other is the abject self, the poor, the widow,
the orphan.
Levinas intends to transcend the master/slave dialectic, but there are occasions where
the other is referred to as the master, and where the asymmetry between the same and the
other seems to skirt dangerously another form of the master/slave relation. We find a
peculiar mixture of elements: the radical separateness of the subject, who is not really
separate, since he or she puts himself or herself in the between by his or her expression;
the subject who in the between encounters the face of the other who commands against
murder in the nakedness of the vulnerable eye; the separate self whose ineluctable destiny
seems social. How then is the other radically other and the self still irreducibly separate?
For it is their co-implication and infinite responsibility that seem the most important
things. Is this no more than a verbal problem? Levinas defends the irreducibility of the
self in its personal singularity, and yet against Enlightenment modernity he reinstates a
heteronomous ethics, where the justice of the other, assumed in infinite responsibility, is
absolutely central.
Eros is important for Levinas in breaking out of monadism and the ‘egocentric
predicament’. This is linked with his stress on fecundity. One is reminded of the speech
of Socrates/Diotima concerning eros as generating on the good/beautiful. Eros generates
beyond itself on the beautiful/good. This is a somewhat strange saying. I take it to mean
that the highest point of eros is not, in fact, erotic in the sense of yielding just a
completion of a lack in the self, and hence a culminating self-satisfaction in a final self-
relatedness. Eros seems to start in lack and in final satisfaction makes the erotic being
self-sufficient again by overcoming the lack. But this is not enough. Rather, the self
generates beyond itself on the good. There is a transcendence of self that goes beyond the
most embracing self-sufficiency and self-relativity.
Fecundity is the self generating beyond itself. I would prefer to call it the promise of
agape rather than eros, in that it does not fill a lack of satisfaction but goes beyond self in
an overflowing of being that is already full, overfull. As already full in itself the self
agapeically goes towards the other as other; in this case goes towards the child as an other
who is not yet known as a this, and who is the promise of the future, a continuation and a
rupture, a relativity and a radical separateness at once.
It is noticeable here that Levinas emphasizes the father/son relation, rather than the
relation of father/daughter, or mother/son. Paternity and filiality become the means of
expressing the fecundity, the infinitude of time in its generative power. The feminine
reduces to a certain equivocal form of being. There is ambiguity in the relation of the
father and son: I the father am the son; I the father am not at all the son.
Levinas makes much of the infinity of time against what he seems to see as the jealous
self-enclosure of eternity. It seems as if the fecundity of infinite time will pardon all. I
think this will not do relative to the singularity and sociality Levinas wants to emphasize.
Time, even infinite time, will not radically pardon radical evil. Later generations cannot
provide justification for the radical evils visited upon present generations. Levinas does
not want to instrumentalize present evil. But is infinite time enough to prevent time from
being swept up into the instrumental justification of world history? It can only be from an
entirely different dimension that the pardon for radical evil can come. This would be

18.4 Page 174

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 136
eternity in another sense to the one that Levinas plays with, namely, the catatonic
absolute identity that knows no relativity to otherness. Levinas’s reference to messianic
time at the end of Totality and Infinity indicates that the work is a truncated book; its real
import lies elsewhere.
For all the talk about the frankness of the face, and the person attending his expression,
Levinas is perhaps a dissimulating writer. The entirety of Totality and Infinity points
beyond itself to God, but God is foxily talked about throughout the entire book. One is
reminded of the equivocation of discourse imputed to some Jewish thinkers, Spinoza for
instance, or Derrida for that matter. In the present case, one speaks the language of
atheism, while being a theist behind it all. Today the metaphysicians and theologians
have to hide themselves from the inquisition of the atheist, while for the main part of
recorded intellectual history it was the atheist who had to go in hiding in fear of the
inquisition of the believer.
In Levinas’s later work the sense of responsibility for the other is accentuated further.
The claim that ethics is first philosophy is developed more fully. The central essay of
Otherwise than Being or Beyond Essence is titled ‘Substitution’. Here Levinas develops
the idea of an anarchic subjectivity that is prior to all thematization. One is reminded of
Sartre’s non-positional consciousness, except that in Levinas’s case the sense of being
summoned by the other is to the fore; the self prior to the ego is marked by an obsession
with the other. Levinas ties this with being a creature in which the trace of the absolute
other is in passage.
‘Substitution’ is a bold and provocative meditation, brilliant and profound in many
respects. I cannot do justice here either to its claims or to the questions it provokes.
Levinas does claim that prior even to the absolute priority claimed for the transcendental
ego, the call of the other in an infinite responsibility is at work. The concept of
‘substitution’ refers to the manner in which this anarchic self is a hostage for the other. It
is in the place of the other; this power to be in the place of the other is the ground of all
other acts of solidarity or sociality. The self is a subject in being subject to the other in
infinite responsibility.
Levinas likes to quote Dostoevsky’s Alyosha Karamazov: ‘We are all responsible for
everyone else—but I am more responsible than all the others.’ This is a claim of
hyperbolic responsibility, and some would criticize it as such. It may even ironically
suggest an ethical hubris in which I place myself in the role of the absolute, substitute
myself for God. Only God could be responsible thus, no mortal creature could. Yet
Levinas wants to insist, and insist is the word, that human creatures are disturbed by this
call of infinite responsibility. There are ambiguities here too complex to unravel in the
space allotted. For substitution is a divine responsibility, substitution even to the point of
death and sacrifice. Levinas is often presented as without precedents, and his singular
style helps to foster this impression. But I cannot but remind the reader of the emphasis
on testimony, witness and sacrifice in Marcel. Read in a certain way, Marcel’s
Catholicism and Levinas’s Judaism generate some very deep affinities.
Levinas sets himself against transcendental phenomenology here and its regress to
grounding in originary selfhood. He emphasizes the passivity, the patience to the other of
the pre-synthetic self. Yet his mode of thinking, like transcendental philosophy generally,
is regressive, a matter of what both call ‘reduction’. Is there not after all a strange

18.5 Page 175

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 137
‘transcendentalism’ in this? A transcendentalism of passivity rather than activity, or
rather of patience to the other prior to both activity and passivity? This would be prior to
the a priori of transcendental idealism. Substitution would be the condition of the
possibility of all meaning, linguistic, cognitive, pragmatic as well as ethical. Ethics as
first philosophy would then be a transcendental philosophy, though since it does not deal
with the transcendental ego as the ultimate originary presence, it might be called an
atranscendental ethics or a negative transcendentalism, on the analogy of negative
theology.
Many of Levinas’s ways of saying are strongly reminiscent of negative theology: It is
not this, not that…; it is as if it were, as though…it is neither this, nor that…. There is a
sense in which we here have to make a leap beyond phenomenology. There are times
when that leap could be made more intelligible for the reader if Levinas provided some
phenomenological examples from human relations, for instance in the telling way Marcel
appeals to the examples from his own dramatic works to suggest imaginatively the non-
objectifiable.
There is generally a tendency to dualistic thinking in Levinas, for example, ontology
versus metaphysics, being versus the good. This tendency can lead to significant
equivocity. I will conclude with a relevant example and question. In ‘Substitution’
Levinas unrelentingly stresses the irreplaceability of the self that is summoned in ethical
responsibility. But how can the irreplaceable be substituted? There cannot be a
replacement for the non-substitutable, nor a substitute for the irreplaceable. The concept
of hostage carried the idea of equivalence: one for the other, a tooth for a tooth. But the
concept of equivalence is impossible without the idea of identity, and Levinas’s whole
discourse of the irreplaceable claims to be prior to the idea of identity and its cognate
concepts like equivalence.
This is a logical problem with substitution, but it points to a tension that is not merely
logical. If we privilege the irreplaceable, there must be a limit to human substitution; by
contrast, if we privilege substitution, we compromise the absolute singularity of the
irreplaceable. How then can we affirm substitution and the irreplaceable both together?
Put this way: Job’s second set of children seem to be replacements for the first dead
children, they seem to be substitutes. But the whole thrust of Levinas’s thought must be
that there can be no replacement for the first irreplaceable children; there are no human
substitutes.
Do we reach the limit of human substitution? And a limit of the fecundity of infinite
time? Is there such a thing as divine substitution which would radically transfigure the
notion of selfhood as irreplaceable? Do we need the idea of re-creation, the idea of a new
creation to deal with the irreplaceability of the first creation, relative to the horrors we
have heaped on it and its seemingly senseless death?
SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Marcel

18.6 Page 176

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 138
Primary texts
5.1 ‘La Métaphysique de Josiah Royce’, Revue de métaphysique et de morale, January-
April 1919. Reprint: La Métaphysique de Royce, Paris: Aubier, 1945.
5.2 Journal Métaphysique, Paris: Gallimard, 1927. Reprint: 1935.
5.3 Etre et avoir, Paris: Aubier, 1935.
5.4 Du refus à l’invocation, Paris: Gallimard, 1940. Reprint: Paris: Aubier, 1945.
5.5 Homo Viator: Prolégomènes à une métaphysique de l’espérance, Paris: Aubier,
Editions Montaigne, 1944.
5.6 Les Hommes contre l’humain, Paris: La Colombe, 1951. Reprint: Paris: Fayard, 1968.
5.7 Le Mysterè de l’être, vol. 1, Réflexion et mystère, Paris: Aubier, 1951. Contains the
Gifford Lectures of 1949.
5.8 Le Mysterè de l’être, vol. 2, Foi et réalité, Paris: Aubier, 1951.
5.9 Le Déclin de la sagesse, Paris: Plon, 1954.
5.10 Fragments philosophiques, 1909–1914, Philosophes contemporains: Textes et
études 11, Louvain: Nauwelaerts, 1962.
5.11 La Dignité humaine et ses assises existentialles, Collections Présence et pensée,
Paris: Aubier, Editions Montaigne, 1964.
5.12 Pour une sagesse tragique et son au-delà, Paris: Plon, 1968.
5.13 Coleridge et Schelling, Paris: Aubier-Montaigne, 1971.
Translations
5.14 Royce’s Metaphysics, trans. V. and G.Ringer, Chicago: Henry Regnery Co., 1956.
5.15 Metaphysical Journal, trans. B.Wall, Chicago: Henry Regnery Co., 1950. Reprints:
1952, 1967. London: Barrie & Rockliff, 1952.
5.16 Being and Having, trans. K.Farrer, Westminster: Dacre Press; Glasgow: University
Press, 1949; Boston: Beacon Press, 1951. Reprinted under the expanded title Being
and Having: An Existentialist Diary, London: Fontana Library and New York: Harper
& Row, Harper Torchbooks, 1965.
5.17 Creative Fidelity, trans. R.Rosthal, New York: Farrar, Strauss, Cudahy, Noonday
Press, 1964.
5.18 Homo Viator: Introduction to a Metaphysic of Hope, trans. E.Crauford, London:
Victor Gollancz and Chicago: Henry Regnery Co., 1951. New York: Harper and Row,
Harper Torchbooks, 1962.
5.19 Men Against Humanity, trans. G.S.Fraser, London: Harvill Press, 1952.
5.20 Man Against Mass Society, trans. G.S.Fraser, foreword by D.MacKinnon. Chicago:
Henry Regnery Co., 1952. Reprint: Chicago: Henry Regnery Co., Gateway, 1962.
5.21 The Mystery of Being, vol. 1, Reflection and Mystery, trans. G.S.Fraser, London:
Harvill Press and Chicago: Henry Regnery Co., 1950. Reprint: Chicago: Henry
Regnery Co., Gateway, 1960.
5.22 The Mystery of Being, vol. 2, Faith and Reality, trans. R.Hague, London: Harvill
Press and Chicago: Henry Regnery Co., 1951. Reprint: Chicago: Henry Regnery Co.,
Gateway, 1960.

18.7 Page 177

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 139
5.23 The Decline of Wisdom, trans. M.Harari, London: Harvill Press and Toronto:
Collins, 1954. New York: Philosophical Library, 1955.
5.24 The Influence of Psychic Phenomena on My Philosophy, London: London Society
for Psychical Research, 1956. The Frederic W.H.Myers Memorial Lecture, December
1955.
5.25 Philosophical Fragments, 1909–1914, trans. L.A.Blain, published together with The
Philosopher and Peace, trans. V.H.Drath, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame
Press, 1965.
5.26 The Existential Background of Human Dignity, Harvard University: The William
James Lectures, 1961–2, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1963.
5.27 Philosophical Fragments 1909–1914, trans. L.A.Blain. Notre Dame: University of
Notre Dame Press, 1965.
5.28 Tragic Wisdom and Beyond, trans. S.Jolin and P.McCormick, Northwestern
University Studies in Phenomenology and Existential Philosophy , Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1973.
Criticism
5.29 Appelbaum, D. Contact and Attention: The Anatomy of Gabriel Marcel’s
Metaphysical Method, Lanham: University Press of America, 1986.
5.30 Davy, M.M. Un Philosophe itinérant: Gabriel Marcel, Paris: Flammarion, 1959.
5.31 Gallagher, K.T. The Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel, New York: Fordham University
Press, 1962.
5.32 Hocking, W.E. ‘Marcel and the Ground Issues of Metaphysics’, Philosophy and
Phenomenological Research 14:4 (June 1954):439–69.
5.33 O’Malley, J.B. The Fellowship of Being, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1966.
5.34 Peccorini, F. Selfhood as Thinking in the Work of Gabriel Marcel, Lewiston: Mellen
Press, 1987.
5.35 Prini, P. Gabriel Marcel et la méthodologie de l’invérifiable, Paris: Desclée de
Brouwer, 1953.
5.36 Ricoeur, P. Gabriel Marcel et Karl Jaspers: Philosophie du mystère et philosophie
du paradoxe, Paris: Editions du temps présent, 1948.
5.37 Schilpp, P. and Hahn, L. (eds) The Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel, The Library of
Living Philosophers, vol. XVII, La Salle: Open Court, 1983.
Jaspers
Primary texts
5.38 Allgemeine Psychopathologie, Berlin: Springer Verlag, 1913; 4th completely rev.
edn, Berlin, Göttingen and Heidelberg: Springer Verlag, 1946; 8th edn, 1965.
5.39 Psychologie der Weltanschauungen, Berlin: Springer Verlag, 1919:5th edn, Berlin,
Göttingen, Heidelberg: Springer Verlag, 1960.
5.40 Philosophie, 3 vols, Berlin: Springer Verlag, 1932.
5.41 Vernunft und Existenz: Fünf Vorlesungen. Gröningen: J.B.Welters, 1935; 4th edn,

18.8 Page 178

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 140
München: R.Piper, 1960.
5.42 Die Schuldfrage, Heidelberg: L.Schneider Verlag, and Zürich: Artemis Verlag,
1946.
5.43 Von der Wahrheit: Philosophische Logik, Enter Band. München: R.Piper, 1947; 3rd
edn, 1980.
5.44 Der philosophische Glaube: Gastvorlesungen, Zürich: Artemis Verlag and
München: R.Piper & Co., 1948; 7th edn, München: R.Piper, 1981.
5.45 Vom Ursprung und Ziel der Geschichte, Zürich: Artemis Verlag and München:
R.Piper, 1949; 4th edn, München: 1963.
5.46 Die grossen Philosophen: Enter Band, München: R.Piper, 1957; 3rd edn, 1981.
5.47 Die grossen Philosophen, Nachlass 1, ed. H.Saner, München and Zurich: R. Piper,
1981.
5.48 Die grossen Philosophen, Nachlass 2, ed. H.Saner, München and Zürich: R. Piper,
1981.
5.49 Der philosophische Glaube angesichts der Offenbarung, München: R.Piper, 1962;
3rd edn, 1980.
5.50 Weltgeschichte der Philosophie: Einleitung, ed. H.Saner, München and Zürich:
R.Piper, 1982.
Translations
5.51 General Psychopathology, trans. J.Hoening and M.W.Hamilton, Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1963.
5.52 Philosophy, 3 vols, trans. E.B.Ashton, Chicago and London: University of Chicago
Press, 1969–71.
5.53 Reason and Existenz, trans. W.Earle, London, Toronto and New York, 1955.
5.54 The Question of German Guilt, trans. E.B.Ashton, New York: Dial Press, 1947.
5.55 Tragedy is not Enough, (excerpt from Von der Wahrheit), trans. H.A.T. Reiche,
H.T.Moore and K.W.Deutsch, Boston: Beacon Press, 1952 and London: V.Gollancz,
1953.
5.56 Truth and Symbol (excerpt from Von der Wahrheit), trans. J.T.Wilde, W. Kluback
and W.Kimmel, New York: Twayne Publishers and London: Vision Press, 1959.
5.57 The Perennial Scope of Philosophy, trans. R.Manheim, New York: Philosophical
Library, 1949 and London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1950.
5.58 The Origin and Goal of History, trans. M.Bullock, New Haven: Yale University
Press and London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1953.
5.59 Philosophical Faith and Revelation, trans. E.B.Ashton, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1967.
5.60 Anaximander, Heraclitus, Parmenides, Plotinus, Lao-tzu, Nagarjuna, New York:
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, n.d. (excerpt from The Great Philosophers: The Original
Thinkers).
5.61 Anselm and Nicholas of Cusa, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, n.d. (excerpt
from The Great Philosophers: The Original Thinkers).
5.62 The Great Philosophers: The Foundations, The Paradigmatic Individuals: Socrates,
Buddha, Confucius, Jesus; The Seminal Founders of Philosophical Thought: Plato,

18.9 Page 179

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 141
Augustine, Kant, ed. H.Arendt, trans. R. Manheim, New York: Harcourt, Brace & World,
1962.
5.63 The Great Philosophers: The Original Thinkers: Anaximander, Heraclitus,
Parmenides, Plotinus, Anselm, Nicholas of Cusa, Spinoza, Lao-Tzu, Nagarjuna, ed.
H.Arendt, trans. R.Manheim, New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1966.
5.64 Kant, New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, n.d. (excerpt from The Great
Philosophers: The Foundations).
5.65 Plato and Augustine, New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, n.d. (excerpt from The
Great Philosophers: The Foundations).
5.66 Socrates, Buddha, Confucius, Jesus, New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, n.d.
(excerpt from The Great Philosophers: The Foundations).
5.67 Spinoza, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, n.d. (excerpt from The Great
Philosophers: The Original Thinkers).
Criticism
5.68 Allen, E.L. The Self and Its Hazards: A Guide to the Thought of Karl Jaspers, New
York: Philosophical Library, 1951.
5.69 Ehrlich, L.H. Karl Jaspers: Philosophy as Faith, Amherst: University of
Massachusetts Press, 1975.
5.70 Kane, J.F. Pluralism and Truth in Religion: Karl Jaspers on Existentialist Truth,
Chico: Scholars Press, 1981.
5.71 Lichtigfeld, A. Jaspers’ Metaphysics, London: Colibri Press, 1954.
5.72 Olson, A.M. Transcendence and Hermeneutics: An Interpretation of Karl Jaspers,
The Hague: Nijhoff, 1979.
5.73 Ricoeur, P. Gabriel Marcel et Karl Jaspers, Paris: Editions du Temps Présent, 1948.
5.74 Samay, S. Reason Revisited, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1971.
5.75 Schilpp, P. (ed.) The Philosophy of Karl Jaspers, 2nd edn, Lasalle: Open Court,
1981. Contains Jaspers’s ‘Philosophical Autobiography’ (including chapter:
‘Heidegger’), critical contributions by twenty-four authors, and Jaspers’s ‘Reply to His
Critics’.
5.76 Schrag, O.O. Existence, Existenz, and Transcendence, Pittsburgh: Duquesne
University Press, 1971.
5.77 Wallraff, C.F. Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy, Princeton:
Princeton University Press, 1970.
5.78 Young-Bruehl, E. Freedom and Karl Jaspers’s Philosophy, New Haven: Yale
University Press, 1971.
Levinas
Primary texts
5.79 La théorie de l’intuition dans la phénoménologie de Husserl, Paris: Alcan, 1930
(Vrin, 1963).
5.80 De l’existence à l’existant, Paris: Fontaine, 1947 (Vrin, 1973).

18.10 Page 180

▲back to top
Philosophies of religion 142
5.81 En découvrant l’existence avec Husserl et Heidegger, Paris: Vrin, 1967.
5.82 Totalité et infiní: Essai sur l’extériorité, The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1961.
5.83 Difficile liberté, Paris: Albin Michel, 1963 (2nd edn, 1976).
5.84 Quatre lectures talmudiques, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1968.
5.85 Humanisme de l-autre homme, Montpellier: Fata Morgana, 1972.
5.86 Autrement qu’être, ou au-delà de l’essence, The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1974.
5.87 Sur Maurice Blanchot, Montpellier: Fata Morgana, 1975.
5.88 Noms propres, Montpellier: Fata Morgana, 1976.
5.89 Du sacré au saint, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1977.
5.90 Le Temps et l’autre, Montpellier: Fata Morgana, 1947 (Paris: Presses Universitaires
de France, 1983).
5.91 L’Au-delà du verset, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1982.
5.92 De Dieu qui vient a l’idée, Paris: Vrin, 1982.
5.93 De l’evasion, Paris: Fata Morgana, 1982.
5.94 Ethique et infini, Paris: Fayard, 1982.
5.95 Transcendance et intelligibilité, Genève: Labor et Fides, 1984.
Translations
5.96 The Theory of Intuition in Husserl’s Phenomenology, trans. A.Orianne, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1973.
5.97 Existence and Existents, trans. A.Lingis, The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1978.
5.98 Difficult Freedom, trans. S.Hand, London: Athlone, forthcoming.
5.99 Otherwise than Being or Beyond Essence, trans. A.Lingis, The Hague, Martinus
Nijhoff, 1981.
5.100 Time and the Other, trans. R.Cohen, Pittsburgh: Duquesne University Press, 1987.
5.101 Ethics and Infinity, trans. R.Cohen, Pittsburgh: Duquesne University Press, 1985.
5.102 Collected Philosophical Papers, trans. A.Lingis, Dordrecht: Martinus Nijhoff,
1987.
Criticism
5.103 Bernasconi, R., and Wood, D. (eds) The Provocation of Levinas: Rethinking the
Other, London and New York: Routledge, 1988.
5.104 Burggraeve, R. From Self-Development to Solidarity: An Ethical Reading of
Human Desire in its Socio-Political Relevance according to Emmanuel Levinas, trans.
C.Vanhove-Romanik, Leuven: The Centre for Metaphysics and Philosophy of God,
1985.
5.105 Cohen, R. (ed.) Face to Face with Levinas, Albany: State University of New York
Press, 1986.
5.106 Derrida, J. ‘Violence and Metaphysics’, in Writing and Difference, trans. A. Bass,
London: Routledge & Kegan Paul and Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1978, pp.
79–153.
5.107 Libertson, J. Proximity, Levinas, Blanchot, Bataille and Communication,
Phaenomenologica 87, The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1982.

19 Pages 181-190

▲back to top

19.1 Page 181

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 143
5.108 Lingis, A. Libido: The French Existential Theories, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1985.

19.2 Page 182

▲back to top
CHAPTER 6
Philosophies of science
Mach, Duhem, Bachelard
Babette E.Babich
THE TRADITION OF CONTINENTAL PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE
If the philosophy of science is not typically represented as a ‘continental’ discipline it is
nevertheless historically rooted in the tradition of continental thought. The different
approaches to the philosophy of science apparent in the writings of Ernst Mach, Pierre
Duhem and Gaston Bachelard suggest the range of these roots. But for a discussion of the
tradition of continental philosophy of science—as the term ‘continental’ characterizes a
contemporary style of philosophic thinking—it is important to emphasize that while
Mach, Duhem and Bachelard may be said to be historically continental, a properly
continental-style philosophy of science should not be ascribed to any one of them.
Contemporary philosophy of science is pursued in what is largely an analytic or Anglo-
American-style philosophic tradition. And Mach, Duhem and Bachelard made the
formative contributions for which they are known in the philosophy of science within this
same almost quintessentially analytic framework.1
Nevertheless, this very necessary historical precision is itself witness to a changing
circumstance in mainline philosophy of science. Although continental philosophy has
been marginalized in professional philosophy in general, and where this marginalization
has perhaps been greatest within the philosophy of science, the very centre would seem to
have shifted. In past years, traditional philosophers of science have begun to broaden
their analytic conception of the philosophy of science to include approaches compatible
with or even drawn from continental styles of philosophy. Such approaches reflect the
philosophical reflections on science expressed from the tradition of important individual
continental thinkers such as Edmund Husserl (Gethmann, Heelan, Orth, Rang, Seebohm,
etc.) and Martin Heidegger (Gadamer, Heelan, Kisiel, Kockelmans), Habermas and
Foucault (Radder, Rouse, Gutting), and even Friedrich Nietzsche (Babich, Maurer,
Spiekermann). In this context, the philosophical reflections on science to be found in
Mach, Duhem and Bachelard may be mined for what should prove to be a productive
historical foundation between these two traditions addressed to a common focus.
Exemplifying such a common focus, the philosophy of science is not inherently or
essentially analytic if it is also not obviously continental.
The question of stylistic conjunction between continental and analytic philosophic
perspectives is complicated and, before it can be addressed, one further preliminary
clarification is necessary. Because of the possibility of geographic confusion, it must be
emphasized that the rubric ‘continental’ in the context of the philosophy of science does

19.3 Page 183

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 145
not pertain to the geographic locus of the European continent except historically and
circumstantially. Despite German and French scholars interested in specifically
continental approaches to the philosophy of science in contemporary European
philosophy, the character of the philosophy of science is decidedly analytic. It is telling
and to the point in this last connection that Wolfgang Stegmüller, familiar as he was with
traditional philosophy including phenomenological approaches, could find the appeal of
analytic philosophy for a formalist and foundationalist interest in scientific theories so
inspiring that he devoted his own life to its dissemination and through his influence
analytic styles of philosophic thought consequently assumed their current leading role in
German philosophy of science. In turn, this means that continental philosophy (and
philosophy of science) remains as professionally marginal on the ‘continent’ as in
English-speaking scholarly domains.
But if not defined as the dominant tradition in philosophy and if not a matter of
geographic reference, continental philosophy (especially with respect to philosophic
reflection on science) is also a multifarious tradition and not a single style or school. Just
as Rom Harré could speak of ‘philosophies’ of science,2 it is best to speak of ‘continental
philosophies’ and hence of ‘continental philosophies of science’. Not necessarily linked
by ‘family resemblances’—for example, Husserlian-influenced thinking bears almost no
resemblance to Habermasian or Foucauldian social, critical theory—what is called
‘continental philosophy’ comprises several conceptual traditions and reflects a manifold
of differing styles of philosophy with cross-disciplinary influences and applications. But
one general characteristic might be said to be a strong historical sensibility. This
sensibility distinguishes continental philosophic styles from analytic (progress-oriented
and often expressly ahistoricist and sometimes expressly anti-historical) styles of
philosophy. A critically reflective historical sensibility in addition to an explicit reference
to lived experience—the life-world of Husserlian and Diltheyan usage—indicates some
of the major advantages to be brought by continental styles of philosophy to the broader
and general philosophic project of reflection on science.
It is this historical dimension and reference to life (practice, experience, etc.) that
makes continental styles of philosophy so important for the philosophy of science today.
Since the radical critique of the received, analytic style of modern philosophy of science
through the writings of N.R.Hanson and the work of Thomas Kuhn and Paul Feyerabend,
contemporary philosophy of science has been increasingly transformed by an intensified
and today decisive sensitivity to the importance of historical and sociological studies of
actual scientific practice. The turn to history so characteristic of Mach’s as of Duhem’s
philosophic writing on science, witnessed by their valuable contributions to the history of
science, and implicit in Bachelard’s reading of the culture of science, has come to be
recognized as an irreducible component of the philosophy of science. In the same way,
the resources of continental philosophy with a tradition of reflection on history seem
increasingly essential to the practice of the philosophy of science beyond stylistic
differences.
As fons et origo, the shared destiny and origin of continental philosophy and analytic
philosophy is evident in a recent trend reviewing the connection between Husserl and
Frege (Hill, Wiener, Cobb-Stevens, Dummett), suggesting that Husserlian-style
philosophies of science may go furthest towards bridging the stylistic gap between

19.4 Page 184

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 146
analytic and continental philosophy. Likewise it is significant that the philosophy of
technology, related to the philosophy of science because of its importance for reflection
on experimental science, not only features continental practioners (Ellul, Ihde, Jonas,
Schirmacher, Winner, Zimmerman) but is in its rigorously philosophic aspect a direct
resultant of this same tradition (drawing as it does on the work of Heidegger but also
Ricoeur and Gadamer).
Although Mach’s (as indeed Duhem’s) positivist successors were ultimately to
disregard his concern with history in their focus on the formal analysis and logical
reconstruction which characterizes the hypothetico-deductive account of theory formation
and justification and which in its most developed form came to be known as the ‘received
view’, recent reviews of Mach seek to examine his philosophy of science in terms
germane to its own reflective scientific constellation and philosophical project
(Feyerabend, Haller) rather than merely in terms of its influence on the logical empiricist
tradition of the philosophy of science (beginning with Frank). Thus a reassessment of
Mach’s philosophy of science stresses his historical interests, while Feyerabend
emphasizes aspects in his work which anticipate the insights of Hanson and Kuhn (as
well as Michael Polanyi who is, according to Alasdair MacIntyre, significantly
underacknowledged in this connection)3 in Mach’s sensitivity to the element of finesse
(or in Polanyi’s language: ‘tacit knowledge’). Discussion of the role of tacit knowledge or
finesse represents the researcher’s ‘art’, an an which, if we follow Mach’s words, is
unteachable in the sense of being inherently unamenable to the programmatic Baconian
project and which project, conversely for its part, was held by Bacon to have its singular
advantage in being manageable by underlabourers—that is, by technicians literally, as
Bacon has it: without ‘wit’. For Mach, precisely such a programmatization
(automatization, industrialization) is not desirable even if it were possible. We may note
that the actuality of what Derek de Solla Price called ‘big science’ has long demonstrated
that such ‘programmatization’ is possible and Hugh Redner details the same in his study
of giant, industrial-sized science.4 Against the artless routinization of science, Mach held
that an unteachable ‘art’ must be indispensable for the practice of experimental science
because, in Mach’s conception of scientific inquiry, it is the sine qua non of invention
and discovery.
A turn to history and the role of the experimenter’s art is not the only parallel
resonance between continental philosophies of science and traditional analytic
approaches: there are others. Despite stylistic differences, analytic and continental styles
of philosophy share a common future as complementary approaches to the philosophy of
science where both disciplinary styles can enhance one another. But what is inevitably
more important than the prospects of such stylistic reconciliation on a scholarly level, it
now seems eminently clear that the philosophy of science cannot be conducted from an
analytic perspective uninformed by the hermeneutic turn or, as analysts prefer to speak of
it: the interpretive turn (Hiley et al). In concert with the phenomenological turn (to the
things themselves), the interpretive, hermeneutic turn represents the foundation of
continental thought. And it goes without saying, or calling it hermeneutics, that the
interpretive turn is a turn of thought in which, like the historical turn, the reflective
advantage of continental philosophy comes to the fore.
In both existing and possible expressions, continental philosophy of science includes

19.5 Page 185

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 147
approaches drawn from the larger tradition of phenomenology (as found in the works
expressed by Hegel, Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty) as well as hermeneutics
(beginning with some say Vico, but certainly with Schleiermacher and Dilthey, and also
Heidegger, Gadamer, Betti, Gramsci, Ricoeur). Continental philosophy also reflects the
influence of structuralism in linguistics, semiotics, and literary criticism and psychology,
as well as the Heidegger-inspired Daseinsanalyse and existential psychoanalysis (Piaget,
Binswanger, Boss, Fromm, Merleau-Ponty, Sartre and Lacan). Related philosophic styles
of deconstruction and recent postmodern conceptions of philosophy (Foucault, Derrida,
Lyotard, Baudrillard) have had a decisive influence on late twentieth-century philosophic
reflection on science in line with the hermeneutic perspective (Heelan, Kockelmans,
Kisiel, Hacking, Böhme, Gadamer, Bubner). With specific reference to the philosophy of
the social sciences, particularly representing the Frankfurt school, which often
incorporates analytic-style distinctions in its focus on language and discourse (Habermas,
Apel, Tugendhat), characteristically ‘continental’ influences are traced in a variety of
lineages to Hegel or Schleiermacher, Marx or Feuerbach (Althusser, Bhaskar, LeCourt)
and Kierkegaard or Dilthey, Heidegger, Weber, Simmel.
As representatives of nineteenth- and early twentieth-century empiricism and
positivism, the particular names Ernst Mach (1838–1916), Pierre Duhem (1861–1916)
and Gaston Bachelard (1884–1962) have of course and as already noted much more than
a merely historical significance. In analytic philosophy of science, an ongoing tradition of
reinterpretations of their work continues to influence the current linguistic or theoretical
crisis in analytic philosophy and semiotics/semantics of scientific theory (Duhem not
only as represented by W.V.O.Quine but also Stanley Jaki) as well as, on the other hand,
the current emphasis on experiment representing the counter-absolutist turn to the history
(and historiography) and practice of science in the philosophy of science (specifically
Mach, as represented by Feyerabend and others, and Bachelard—and in routine
conjunction with analyses of Michel Foucault—for Bruno Latour, Ian Hacking, Mary
Tiles, Gary Gutting).
MACH AND THE POSITIVIST CONNECTION: FROM ELEMENTS TO
PHENOMENOLOGY
Ernst Mach was born in 1838 at Turas, formerly in Moravia—a region to be found in
Bohemia, Silesia, and lower Austria which later was to become part of the modern
republic of Czechoslovakia and is now part of the Czech republic. He studied in Vienna,
teaching physics there in 1861, becoming professor at Graz in 1864, then at Prague in
1867, finally at Vienna in 1895. In 1901, upon his appointment to the upper house of the
Austrian Parliament, Mach gave up his Vienna chair in the history and theory of
inductive science. He spent the last three years of his life living with his son, Ludwig
Mach and died in 1916 at Haar, near Munich.
At the risk of inviting distracting historical confusion, the above listing of the details of
the historical name-changes concerning Mach’s original nationality and the proper name
or country of his birthplace—where names such as Moravia, Bohemia, Silesia, Lower
Austria or, indeed, Czechoslovakia do not currently denominate legitimate nations within

19.6 Page 186

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 148
today’s Europe—dramatizes the fortunes of the Austro-Hungarian empire and eastern
Europe as well as the philosophy of science conceived within the broad European
tradition of natural philosophy. Although this is also given as Galileo’s achievement in
historical accounts of science, it is usually claimed that the tradition of natural philosophy
was transformed by Newton himself into modern physical science. But this is only to say
that the practice of science (natural science) came to be regarded as identical to the
practice of the more speculative and often explicitly metaphysical tradition known as
natural philosophy, and, conversely, that the practice of natural science was identified
with natural philosophy. By the turn of the century, the project of the philosophy of
nature was identified with the project of natural science. In Mach’s day and well before,
then, philosophy (including the philosophy of science or natural philosophy) was not
thought to be necessarily separate and distinct from (understood as a business of
reflection, interpretive or speculative, either subsequent to or independent of) the physical
or natural sciences in both theoretical and experimental manifestations as Duhem and
more recently Jardine and Crombie have shown. As Kurt Hübner has it, ‘theory of
science coming into prominence at the turn of the century was still closely tied to the
study of the history of science. Names like Mach, Poincaré, La Roy and especially
Duhem clearly bear witness to this. However this development ceased to follow the path
opened up for it by these men.’5 Here we may add that the divisions between philosophy
and science and between philosophy of science and other kinds of philosophy were not
always the same. Thus the debate between Hobbes (a speculative philosopher not merely
a theoretician) and Boyle (an experimentalist not merely a physical scientist) or Berkeley
and Newton were not regarded by either the participants or their contemporaries as taking
place across, let alone mixing, categories (of philosophical speculation or hypothesis and
scientific experiment and theory). For Mach and Duhem, the importance of philosophic
reflection was to be evaluated with respect to its contribution to the progress of science.
Thus retaining a defining reference to and even identification with natural science (as)
natural philosophy, philosophia naturalis acquired the methodological, historical and
epistemological profile of what would later become modern philosophy of science.
Around the turn of the century, as practised by Henri Poincaré and by Duhem, philosophy
of science bore the name critique des sciences and this same science-critical emphasis
(that is, philosophical critique expressed for the sake of scientific advance or progress) is
echoed in Mach’s empirio-criticism. Under the influence of Wittgenstein, Carnap and
Schlick, Hempel’s mature expression of the ‘received view’ of the philosophy of science
or the hypothetico-deductive expression of professional analytic-style philosophy of
science represents a decisive and increasingly bankrupt departure from this late
nineteenth-century tradition of critique des sciences with its particular and explicit
reference to science in practice.
Almost from its inception then, the analytic tradition of the philosophy of science
lacked any reference to the historical ‘fortunes’ or ‘scenes’ of actual scientific inquiry
(Jardine). If the ‘new science’ of the seventeenth century had involved a transformative
turn (whether revolutionary and world-shattering as Koyré maintains or evolutionary and
therefore less radical a transformation as Duhem and Crombie would argue) to
experiment, analytic philosophy of science has so far found itself less able to complete
the same turn. If the difference is between, as the Galileo experts have it, Platonic

19.7 Page 187

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 149
(formal) speculation and Aristotelian mathematical (functional) science, philosophers of
science have tended towards Platonism. The turn away from history characteristic of
logical positivism was only an expression of this idealizing, analytic tendency.
Although Mach in particular was especially devoted to experiment and its context in
the history of science, many analytic authors nevertheless hold Mach to have been
responsible for the divorce of traditional philosophical (metaphysical) concerns from the
historical sensibility of the application of philosophic reflection to scientific practice.
This is a misprision of a devastating kind but it was a constitutive one: seminal for the
professional development of analytic-style philosophy of science.6 The separation
between philosophic expression and the lived world characteristic not only of logical
positivism but of the division between continental and analytic styles of philosophy is no
accident of location or tastes, as the talk of ‘styles’ may suggest. Rather, a necessary
consequence, it might be argued, of the self-definition of modern science (as distinct
from medieval and ancient science), the gap between theory and practice has shaped the
analytic tradition of the philosophy of science, while at the same time leaving the
philosophy of science as a theoretical discipline (qua, philosophy) addressed to a
particular theoretic practice (science) singularly unable to support the disjoint
consequences of a separation between theory and historical practice.
Despite Mach’s ‘physicalism’ or ‘phenomenalism’, the members of the Vienna circle,
in the telling words of one commentator, ‘wrote as though they believed science to be
essentially a linguistic phenomenon’.7 Hence this disposition to analyse ‘language’—be it
ordinary or logical language—together with a naive (non-historical, non-hermeneutic or
ideal) view of direct observation (i.e., observation sentences) effectively limited the
analytic concern of the philosophy of science to the analysis of theory, which last is the
project of the received view or hypothetico-deductive nomological ideal of science
(theory).
Such a focus on the elements of language—and not on the elements construed
according to Mach’s conception as physical-physiological-psychological—separates
language and world. One obvious advantage of such a focus is the advantage of certainty.
But this, its strength, to paraphrase Mach, and as is so often the case, is also its weakness.
Philipp Frank, one of the founding members of the Vienna circle, who expressed the
virtue of scientific analyticity, combining the essence of Mach’s insights with Duhem’s
Kantian conventions, explains, ‘the principles of pure science, of which the most
important is the law of causality, are certain because they are only disguised definitions.’8
If the essence of tautology or logical linguistic self-reference is not problematic when
what is analysed is language use (the game or its rules), this same tautological expression
becomes problematic when what is analysed must correspond to scientific facts or
empirical matters. As Harré has observed, ‘the philosophy of science must be related to
what scientists actually do, and how they actually think’.9 The imperative for such a
correlative project between the philosophy of science and scientific practice,
corresponding to the force of the socio-historical turn that comes after the linguistic turn,
represents a much-needed philosophic mandate for the philosophy of science.
The revolutionary shifts, reversals and paradigmatic conflicts within the analytic
tradition of the philosophy of science also correspond to the revolutionary shifts,
reversals and paradigmatic conflicts in physical science. These witness to the need to

19.8 Page 188

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 150
develop a ‘new’ philosophy of science appropriate to the ‘new science’. But the history
of science tells us that novelty is itself relative, for the history of science is just such a
record of ‘new’ sciences. One of the first ‘new sciences’, that of Galileo and Newton (and
Hooke and Boyle), inaugurated a tradition that has since developed beyond its initial
programme. That tradition was the tradition of modernity (as the cult of the new), and if
one can speak of postmodern science today that is just because the programme of
modernity can no longer be viewed unproblematically. The fortunes of the ‘new’ science
and enlightenment thought mirror the problem of modernity and postmodernity, the
problem of the conflict between the grand narratives of science and society and the
distintegration of the promise of those same narratives throughout the modern era. This is
not unconnected to the new historical and social turns in philosophic thinking about the
sciences. These turns are not a sign of the times so much as they reflect a tension interior
to post-Galilean science. As Mary Tiles explains the dynamics of this internal tension in
post-Galilean (or ‘new’) science: ‘The new science was to be abstract and mathematical,
but also experimental; it was to yield both enlightenment and mastery of nature. It was to
strive for an objective, purely intellectual, value-free view of the world in order to
improve the lot of mankind by rendering technological innovations possible.’10 There is
an inherent conflict in this juxtaposition of material, practical progress and ideal or
objective knowledge. Today’s post-analytic or ‘new’ philosophy of science is manifestly
directed to an expression of the consequences of this conflict.
Here, with reference to Mach’s own particular historical context, it must be observed
that Mach’s declared opposition to philosophy—even where such an opposition may be
rendered on Pascal’s account as the best affective precondition for the best kind of
philosophy—is, if taken literally as applying to philosophy today, anachronistic. Mach
wished to avoid identification with the more metaphysical fashions often associated with
or characteristic of philosophy. But his reflection on science was nothing other than a
philosophy (albeit a philosophy of nature). This point highlights the value of a return to
history for the sake of the broadening illumination of context. And where the return to
history represents Mach’s own phenomenalist version of Husserl’s phenomenological
call to return ‘To the things themselves!’, it cannot truly be Mach who is to be blamed for
the logicization of the philosophy of science.
In all, the history of modern philosophy of science may be said to begin at the juncture
epitomized by Mach’s biography; but the rupture between theory and experiment that
followed from the increasing logicization of empiriocriticism or critical positivism related
to the rise of analytic-style philosophy of science has no precedent in Mach. This point is
essential if one is to understand the growing attention paid to Mach’s historical emphasis
along with his very prescient sense of the importance of the art of the researcher, of the
technical and social flair essential for the practice of the experimental life of the sciences.
Mach was greatly influenced by Berkeley and Fechner as well as by Kant and Hume.
His thinking on the logical ‘economy’ of thought was shared by Richard Avenarius and
his views on the nature of science engaged not only the scientists Helmholtz, Kirchhoff,
Boltzmann, Einstein and Schroedinger but also the American pragmatist philosophers
James and Pierce. It has been suggested that Mach’s concern was to understand
experience. But this concern with experience was not the same as the anglophone
preoccupation with sensation. It has already been noted that many authors also tend to

19.9 Page 189

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 151
associate positivism’s characteristic distance or alienation from the world with Mach’s
scepticism. Given Mach’s sympathy with Berkeley and Hume, such an identification is
not surprising. Mach’s philosophy of science is commonly described as a
‘sensationalism’ or ‘phenomenalism’, expressed as an ‘idealism’, or by the catchwords
positivist, empiricist, and anti-metaphysical. Endowed with the radical scepticism of a
working scientist, as Mach was and because his sensationalism does not express an
ontology as such, it is best to understand his perspective as fundamentally or even
propaedeutically heuristic. Hence whatever metaphysical interests Mach may have had,
they are not propositional but rather reflect his project of articulating what Paul
Feyerabend describes as a non-foundational epistemology, and such an epistemology is
not only essentially scientific but also represents the philosophic spirit of epistemology as
such. In the same way, reference to a simplistic notion of parsimony, or Denkökonomie,
linking that principle to an ontology, is misguided. And without emphasizing the extreme
and today uncommon philosophical breadth of Mach’s interests, the claim made in his
Analysis of Sensations (1886) that ‘the world consists only of our sensations’ must be
confusing. Again, Mach does not reduce the world to sensation so much as he finds the
world given in and, as both Duhem and Bachelard would also stress, knowable only
through sensation: ‘Science does not create facts from facts, but simply orders known
facts’ (Popular Scientific Lectures). It is this connection that suggests a natural affinity
between Mach’s elemental phenomenalism and Husserlian phenomenology borne out by
Mach’s initial (and then specifically continental) reception (Brentano, Musil, Dingler)
and which has more than once been reviewed in its connections not only with Husserl but
even with Nietzsche (Sommer, Gebhard).
Mach deliberately sought to distance himself from the metaphysical pretensions of
traditional philosophy as well as those assumed (sometimes by scientists) in the name of
science. Like Duhem, Mach eschews the claims to certainty which have come to
characterize traditional scientific expression and serve as an identifying feature of today’s
analytic heirs to the logical positivist tradition of the philosophy of science. For Mach, as
for Duhem and Bachelard, enquiry, conceived via experiment, was the benchmark of the
scientific enterprise and a classical but not necessarily pyrrhonian scepticism was the best
guarantee of such an enquiring or open attitude. But this scepticism did not mean that
Mach gave up any claim to offer an account of the scientific knowing enterprise, with
respect to either practice or progress. Hence William James upon meeting Mach in 1882
could write not only that he had ‘read everything’ but that he ‘knew everything’. James
was not merely impressed with Mach, polymath extraordinaire, but by Mach’s
pragmaticist turn, which is one way to understand the very practical but not ontological
imperative guiding Mach’s endorsement of a logical economy. In this way, Mach’s
thinking illustrates the continental spirit of philosophy as questioning conceived in that
authentic sense charac-terizing what Martin Heidegger calls thinking and which
Nietzsche critically pronounces as the highest scientific virtue: intellectual probity or
Redlichkeit. In Mach’s Popular Scientific Lectures (1882), starting from the axiom that
‘Physics is experience, arranged in economical order’, such a questioning or open-ended
reflection means that a philosophic consideration of the goals of science following the
ordering value of economy as a thought principle is not proposed as or purported to yield
a finished system: ‘In the economical schematism of science lie both its strength and its

19.10 Page 190

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 152
weakness. Facts are always represented at a sacrifice of completeness and never with a
greater precision than fits the needs of the moment.’ This very Aristotelian practicality,
which Gadamer has expressed in another context as the prudential core of hermeneutic
judgment, works on Mach’s account to exclude anything like ‘absolute forecasts’.
Considered on its own terms, Mach’s view is an elemental sensationalism, a factual,
specifically non-factitious or empiri[ocriti]cism. Mach’s thinking is radically sceptical.
And it is a kind of conventionalism, like that of Duhem and Poincaré, which influenced
the positivist protophysics of Dingler and the Erlangen school of Lorenzen’s
constructivism and its related development in evolutionary epistemology (Wuketis). But
so far from the flat positivism of a reduction of the world to fact, Mach’s ‘mental mastery
of facts’ offers the only understanding to be had from or about those same ‘facts’, where
the question of order or mastery in each case is hypothetical and ever subject to revision.
This perspective in its historicist extension explains Mach’s positivist appeal but an
attention to the elemental mentality of this ‘mastery of facts’ shows its fruitfulness for
current issues. This is evident in contemporary analytic philosophy of science after Kuhn
and Feyerabend.
Thus Mach proposes that if the future of science may not be forecast as such (on pain
of abandoning the open enterprise of science itself), its non-absoluteness may
nevertheless be surmised and he suggests, in a fashion that is as Nietzschean as it is
radically, elementally pluralistic, reflecting the spirit of what today has come to be called
the ‘new physics’—and what might likewise be named the ‘new biology’ and the ‘new
ecology’—that ‘the rigid walls which now divide man from the world will gradually
disappear; that human beings will not only confront each other, but also the entire organic
and so-called lifeless world, with less selfishness and with livelier sympathy’ (Popular
Scientific Lectures).11
It has been noted that Mach sought to articulate the project of science in terms of its
history and its practical or working functionality. But Mach’s particular historicism was
that of a philosopher—in spite of his protests against such an identification, where, as
was also noted in a preliminary way, these protests themselves must be interpreted with
reference to Mach’s own, historical, circumstantial context. As a philosopher, Mach’s
historical focus shows him as a positivist, in the original, pristine Comtean sense of the
word.12 Ian Hacking, in a timely effort to broaden the current flattened and negative
reading of ‘positivism’ with reference to August Comte’s original use of the term, defines
positivity as ‘ways to have a positive truth value, to be up for grabs as true or false’.13
Positivistic to this extent then, not only was Mach a philosopher, but he was a quasi-
analytic—if also as we have seen a proto-phenomenological and even hermeneutic—kind
of philosopher. Moreover, Mach remained as consistently committed to expressing the
logical and philosophical foundations of science as any member of the Verein Ernst
Mach (which was in fact and significantly the original name for the Vienna circle) or the
modern heirs of the logical empiricist tradition in analytic philosophy of science.
Yet it must be emphasized that Mach was committed to the positivist ideal of science,
that is, in Hacking’s Comtean sense, to its ‘positivity’ but not its sheer logical expression.
Thus, and, as we shall see, like Duhem, Mach’s critical analytic turn far exceeds anything
like an exclusive commitment to the expression or clarification of scientific method or
theory as an end in itself where he criticizes the working functionality of the latter. More

20 Pages 191-200

▲back to top

20.1 Page 191

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 153
critical than Kant, Mach believes that there is no possibility of a priori knowledge as
such: the basis of all knowledge is sense experience. Mach’s elementalism—as his
‘sensationalism’ is best described as outlined above and following the letter of Mach’s
own account—repudiates the ‘arbitrary, one-sided theory’ which is implied in talk of
‘sensations’ or ‘phenomena’. This is important, for what Mach repudiates as ‘arbitrary,
one-sided theory’ focusing upon ‘sensations’ or ‘facts’ represents the idea of the self or
subject apart from or as substrate underlying or undergoing such ‘sensations’. In this
way, Mach’s elementalism mirrors the critique of the subject familiar to continental
scholars and others acquainted with the works of Nietzsche and Freud, as well as
Heidegger, Lacan and Wittgenstein. As the central tenet of Mach’s psychology, the self is
a bundle of elements, an expression which must be understood not as Locke or Berkeley
would understand it but rather as signifying a fundamental continuity between the unit of
the perceiving self, or the physiological (elemental) subject, and the mental matter of
psychological (elemental) knowing and the physical (elemental) world. Physical,
physiological and psychological, Mach’s convertible elements comprise his
elementalism. This continuity suggests the intentional commonality requisite for
developing a phenomenological reading of Mach’s ‘sensationalism’ in the line of
Husserl. This same connection also suggests the relevance of Mach’s thought for
interpretations of quantum physics. Mach’s principle, so important on Einstein’s own
account for Einstein’s theory of relativity, implies the interdependence of all things—that
is: relativity (Mach’s own views concerning relativity are no matter in this context).
Hence there is no need for an absolute frame of reference (whether Newtonian space or
time) but only for a relative frame of reference. The law of inertia stated by Newton can
be understood either from the perspective of the body at rest or motion or from the related
perspective of external impingent forces.
Scientific laws for Mach are abstract, general, and in all we might say: abbreviated
descriptions of phenomena. The value of such laws, the ‘meaning’ of such laws for
Mach, as for Nietzsche and Wittgenstein, lies in their use: their value for prediction. This
too is not an ontological statement. Since Mach is not concerned with absolute truth as is
the more metaphysically inclined philosopher of science, he is free to share the physical
scientist’s focus on working utility. It was this dedication which led to Mach’s notorious
repudiation of unobservables (unusable—untestable) as explanatory components in the
atomic theory of physics and chemistry. Needless to say this prejudice, like his emphasis
upon the researcher’s ‘unteachable’ art (Knowledge and Error), has acquired the
triumphant patina of prescience which is the fruit of a convergence with contemporary
science, for today’s atomic theorists have since discarded the nineteenth-century
mechanistical vision of the atom.
PIERRE DUHEM AND THE DAMNATION OF RELIGION: THE LIMITS
OF ANALYTIC REHABILITATION
Pierre Maurice Marie Duhem was born in Paris in 1861, a son of a businessman of
Flemish descent. Duhem’s mother could trace her origins to the south of France and the
village of Cabrespine, near Carcassonne, to the very house where Duhem himself was to

20.2 Page 192

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 154
die at the age of 54. In 1882, Duhem entered the Ecole Normale Supérieure at the head of
the yearly competition. Proving his initial promise, Duhem completed a dissertation in
thermodynamic physics in only three years. But through no evident fault of the work
itself, Duhem’s dissertation was none the less rejected by a jury headed by Gabriel
Lippman. Two years after this first academic frustration, Duhem would successfully
submit another thesis in thermodynamics, to earn his doctorate (in mathematics).
Duhem’s rejected first thesis was not only subsequently published but published to a
broad and approbative scholarly reception. We shall have cause to note below that the
complicated circumstances of this rejection are important for understanding Duhem’s
intellectual and academic career. In 1887, Duhem became maître de conférences at Lille,
where he taught physical mechanics. Following a pedagogic dispute at Lille, Duhem
moved to Rennes in 1893, but soon afterwards took a chair at Bordeaux in 1895, which
he occupied until his death in 1916.
Duhem’s philosophic interest in scientific theories is seen in his still-influential 1906
book, La Théorie physique: son objet, sa structure (The Aim and Structure of Physical
Theory). Duhem, who shared Mach’s belief in the vital importance of history for
scientific progress, also made significant and substantial contributions to the history of
science with his Les Origines de la statique (1905–6) and his voluminous study of
medieval cosmology, Le Système du monde (1913–58), for the most part published
posthumously and which has recently appeared in highly truncated form in English
translation as the one-volume Medieval Cosmology.
If a discussion of place names can illuminate the changes necessary for an
understanding of the transformation of natural philosophy into the kind of philosophy of
science familiar today, the absent name of Paris is significant for understanding Duhem’s
intellectual position in that same tradition of the critique des sciences. For Duhem to all
appearances had, with the submission of his first dissertation, opposed a then leading
scholar, Marcellin Berthelot.14 Duhem’s biographers are largely agreed in reporting that
the reasons for the jury’s refusal of the thesis stem from the offence given to Berthelot in
Duhem’s theoretical repudiation of Berthelot’s thermodynamical views on minimal work.
And, indeed, more than a motive indicating a subjective and not an objective reason on
Berthelot’s part, we also have a tacit confession. In a 1936 biography written to secure
support for the posthumous project of editing and publishing the remaining volumes
(ultimately to number ten in all) of Duhem’s Système du Monde, Duhem’s daughter,
Hélène, reported Berthelot’s oft-cited professional edict which consigned (or better said,
effectively damned) the Parisian-born Duhem to the provinces: ‘This young man will
never teach in Paris.’15
But to leave the question of the merits of Duhem’s first dissertation to one side, and
likewise to reserve the related question of the tactical wisdom of offending the leading
scholar of one’s day (for, as a recent biographer of Duhem’s life and work,
R.N.D.Martin, has observed, both are more properly questions to be directed to Duhem’s
teachers at the Ecole Normale than against Duhem himself), I would note that Berthelot’s
personal antagonism towards Duhem nevertheless retains resonant dimensions which
exceed the indignant prejudice of the offended vanity of a leading Parisian scientist. For,
betraying something more than a personal idiosyncrasy, Berthelot’s views echo the
general tenor of Duhem’s philosophical reception, both then and now, where at least for

20.3 Page 193

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 155
our times it may be assumed that questions of professional conviction and ego are not
similarly relevant. Nevertheless, questions of personality, understood in the broad,
psychological and, in Duhem’s particular case, confessional sense, play an essential role.
Hence it is not insignificant that we are informed again and again that Duhem was a
Catholic. Thus the newly published contribution to Duhem scholarship by Duhem’s
foremost English-language commentator, Stanley L.Jaki, bears the title Scientist and
Catholic. Jaki, himself a priest, certainly does not mean to underline this conjunction
unsympathetically. But Duhem’s religious faith is common stock in reviews of his
philosophical merit. And an evaluation of the objective significance of Duhem’s faith
with respect to Duhem’s historical circumstance is not easy. And Martin’s study of
Duhem’s intellectual biography, appropriately subtitled Philosophy and History in the
Work of a Believing Physicist, begins by adverting to the significance of the specific
fortunes of Duhem’s intellectual reception. Martin notes that Duhem’s work is from the
start clouded by a number of persistent critical reservations. Thus it is essential to
underline the fact that a French scholar of importance as, beyond all dispute, Duhem must
be accounted, should none the less be denied, as Duhem was denied, a Paris chair.
Whereas Bachelard, born in the provinces, and mentioned here for the sake of contrast,
would not be similarly denied this same token of recognition. The difficulty here in the
case of Duhem, arguably the superior philosopher, surely the superior scientist, is to trace
the proximate cause.
In the conflict with Berthelot, reservations concerning Duhem’s achievements
preceded Duhem’s scientific and academic career. Martin sums up the general scholarly
judgment with respect to Duhem’s historical stature with the resounding ambiguity of an
understated reservation as, in a word, ‘problematic’. For many, Martin writes, Duhem
was ‘a brilliant maverick who continually got things frustratingly wrong: producing
brilliant arguments against atomic explanations in physics and chemistry, a muddled
instrumentalism in the philosophy of science, and a voluminous collection of misreadings
of mediaeval Scholastics’ ([6.50], p. 194). In general, for Duhem’s biographical
commentators and interpreters, that is for Martin, for Jaki, Roberto Maiocchi, etc.,
Duhem’s problem was fundamentally and in its essence a religious one, and, like most
confessional affiliations, this was one that cut two ways. Not only was Duhem’s Catholic
faith an obstacle to the largely Protestant ideals of modern science but Catholics were
uneasy with his totally modern (and in the Catholic view ‘modernist’) opposition to neo-
scholasticism. Duhem for his part was an iconoclast, and his position in the provinces
was not such as to inspire him to restraint (Duhem, let it be remembered, despite his lack
of a Paris chair, was a native Parisian).16 He was particularly impatient with the neo-
Thomism of the day, evident in the works of Jacques Maritain with his quasi-Aristotelian
classification of the sciences. In the long run, what this meant was that Duhem could be
dismissed as a Catholic apologist by non-Catholics while simultaneously being
condemned as ‘modernist’ by the French Catholic intellectual elite.17 And these
reservations made on two sides were not the result of unthinking prejudice on one side or
the other, but were in fact founded at least to some degree in both cases. For it is clear
that the realist metaphysics and authoritarianism of the aims of the neo-scholastic
movement in philosophy were undermined by the substance of Duhem’s views.
Conversely, Duhem’s non-Catholic readers could regard Duhem’s historical interest in

20.4 Page 194

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 156
medieval science as representing little more than another version of neo-scholasticism.
The historical researches of Crombie and others suggest that the problem requires a
clearer understanding of the differences between historical eras rather than matters of
faith, but Martin’s observation that ‘Duhem seems to have fallen between every available
stool’ ([6.50], p. 211) would seem to be the least one could say not only of Duhem but of
the judgments made concerning him. What the new concern with history illustrates is the
value of Butterfield’s insight that a ‘Whig interpretation of history’ (or ‘presentism’ as it
is also called)—that is, an interpretation of other eras from the perspective of one’s own
era—illuminates only one’s own prejudices (and that only from the point of view of a
subsequent historiographer) without shedding light on the period in question. History
without hermeneutics is blind.
Against Koyré’s reading of the revolutionary transformation from the medieval to the
modern world-view, which corroborates the non-or anti-Catholic reading of Duhem’s
reactionary scholasticism, Jaki maintains that Duhem’s sympathetic account of the
scholastic opposition to Aristotelian philosophy of natural place suggests that this
medieval perspective fostered rather than hindered the modern scientific turn such as that
associated with, for example, Galileo’s speculations concerning the role of impetus.
Other scholars, such as William Wallace, have offered corroborating readings of the
‘Galileo affair’, showing the importance of taking Galileo’s terms not in a putatively
modern context (following the conviction of Galileo’s visionary genius) but in their more
patent and for the modern reader all the more tacit historical and that is medieval
context.18 Wallace’s discussion of Galileo’s use of the Latin term ex suppositions
illustrates this point.19 The problem is not only that readers from the perspective of
modern (analytic) philosophy of science tend to translate ex suppositione as ex hypothesi,
but that the perspective of the Catholic Church is automatically identified with that of an
anti-modern, progress-retarding influence. This, in the apposite context of the contest
between religion and science, shows the tenacity of the Whig interpretation of history.
For this reason, Butterfield writes, ‘It matters very much how we start upon our labours—
whether for example we take the Protestants of the sixteenth century as men who were
fighting to bring about our modern world, while the Catholics were struggling to keep the
medieval or whether we take the whole present as the child of the whole past and see
rather the modern world emerging from the clash of both Catholic and Protestant.’20 For
Butterfield the problem is the tendency to reduce the problem to one between Protestant
and Catholic, between enlightened Whig and darkage traditionalist. To understand
Duhem, one must go beyond confessional prejudice.
In fact, as Martin takes pains to demonstrate, Duhem must be characterized as a
reluctant convert to his ultimately continuous account of the transition from medieval
science to modern science. Duhem moved towards this view in spite of his own original
views as a scientist working at the peak of the modern self-understanding of the sciences,
that is, despite his typically scientific (high modern or scientistic) formation at the turn of
the last century. According to science’s own self-understanding then, and which is in part
still true for scientists today, the transition from the (in Koyré’s words ‘closed’) medieval
view of the world to the (‘open’) modern world-view was—like the birth of the fully
armoured Athena from the forehead of her father Zeus—a sudden, completely
discontinuous or punctual, radical leap from classical and hellenic to fully-fledged

20.5 Page 195

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 157
modern science. This view eclipsing the scientific value of the Middle Ages was as
typical for the average scientist in Duhem’s time as it can still be said to be true of
scientists and of many philosophers today. Against the bias of this formation, it was less
Duhem’s religious faith, one could argue, than his rigorous education as a formal logician
that brought him, indeed compelled him, to re-examine the historical record. In Jaki’s
view, a view now with considerable historiographical support, in addition to Duhem’s
axiom-atician’s rigour, the record suggests that the medieval cosmological viewpoint
worked not to obstruct the path to modern science in effect, where even Galileo’s term
impeto may be traced to Jean Buridan in the fourteenth century, but rather to further its
advance. Duhem’s reading of medieval science as an essential bridge between classical
science and Galileo’s inauguration of Newton’s project of modern scientific thinking
reflects a revolution, but the revolution for Duhem takes place in his own thinking,
against his modern scientist’s ingrained thought-style but in accord with his trained
axiomatician’s loyalty to the importance of first principles and logical coherence.
Duhem’s argument stressed both subtlety and complexity, but it is clear that for him
the key question for any theory or hypothesis was its utility in ‘saving’ the phenomena.
On such accounting, of course, not only was Galileo a child of his times, indebted to the
scholasticism of Oresme and Buridan, but Galileo’s account was less successful than the
Ptolemaic alternative. From this point of view, Cardinal Bellarmine’s prudential caution
may be read less as an illustration of jesuitry than as a representative of that kind of
French common sense or Pascalian bons sens where the spirits of geometry and finesse
intersect and for which, as both Martin and, years earlier, Dorothy Eastwood have
argued, Duhem had a notable affinity. Yet beyond the still-unsettled questions of
Duhem’s personal reception, Duhem’s significance for analytic philosophy of science is
not in fact a subject of much debate owing to the prominence of the philosophers
routinely listed as having responded to Duhem’s influence, most notably Popper and
Quine.
Duhem’s argument against crucial experiments may also be seen to turn on his
understanding of theories as axiomatic systems and his appreciation of the nature of such
systems. For Duhem, physical experiments cannot refute isolated theories. Where
alternative theoretical views are to be tested, an experiment designed to enable the
experimenter to choose between them only confirms one hypothesis or another. But as an
experiment confirms or refutes the theory and not the theoretical system, the results are
inconclusive for not only may a subsequent experiment fail to confirm the theory, but a
related experiment may refute a related theory; the experimenter is free to make ad hoc
adjustments, and what has come to be called the ‘theory-ladenness’ of observations
means that such adjustments may well be already or subsequently ‘built into’ the
interpretation of the experimental results, without necessarily involving the awareness of
the experimenter. Apart from such phenomenological hermeneutic questions as context-
dependence and interpretation, the significance of the theory in any case is articulated
only within the theoretical complex of which it is a part. Just as there are no isolated
phenomena, there are no isolated theories but only theoretical systems. This
interdependence points to the reason for Duhem’s (as for Mach’s own) conviction
concerning the importance of history. Modification in the theory may preserve the system
and vice versa, and an understanding of the system requires an understanding of the

20.6 Page 196

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 158
original meaning of its terms. For Duhem, experiment is crucial, but neither falsification
nor demonstration provides certain or sure tests of eternal, unchanging truth. On this
point, it is the history of science which justifies Duhem.
Apart from Duhem’s views on history and related to his views on theoretical
indecidability, Duhem held a form of instrumentalism that was shared not only by Mach
and Poincaré, but also by Kirchoff, Hertz, Bridgman, Eddington and the Copenhagen
school of quantum physics. For Duhem, two aspects of theory must be distinguished, the
explanatory and the representational. As far as Duhem was concerned, although scientists
and philosophers of science of a realist bent regarded theories as explanation, the value of
theory is ultimately its instrumental or conventional value. Instrumentalism is a view of
scientific theories founded, as Karl Popper says, by ‘Osiander, Cardinal Bellarmine and
Bishop Berkeley’.21 Linking Osiander to Cardinal Bellarmine, as most theoreticians stage
this drama, it is clear that the great antagonist to such instrumentalism for Popper and for
others is Galileo. And, as Ian Hacking puts it, ‘Galileo is everybody’s favourite hero—
not only Chomsky and Weinberg but also Husserl.’22 To say as has already been
suggested that Galileo was not as radical or as ahead of his times as had been thought is
to oppose the general conception of Galileo as a canonic scientific hero (or saint). This is
the associative point MacIntyre makes (arguing in a different direction) when he speaks
of Feyerabend’s ‘anarchism’ as Emersonian in spirit, advocating ‘not “Every man his
own Jesus” but “Every man his own Galileo”’.23 If Duhem is an instrumentalist, he also
stands opposed to Galileo. And he cannot do otherwise. Duhem, with his claim that ‘a
law of physics is properly speaking neither true nor false’ (The Aim and Structure of
Physical Theory), is consequently one of the principal antagonists not only of Popper’s
realist-falsificationist view of physical theories but of all realist views of science.
Duhem’s instrumentalism continues to be important for the present profile of the
philosophy of science in the English-speaking world. For Duhem, the same physical law
has a potentially different extension at different times owing to the historical
development of these laws and their embodiment in experimental praxis. The meaning of
a physical law is to be determined in the final analysis by the context of scientific practice
and the scheme of related laws involved in determining the meaning of that law. This
principle provides the basis for the underdeterminist perspective on the relationship
between experimental evidence and theory and the constellation of related theories.
Through the work of Quine and Davidson, this notion of underdeterminism led to the
current position on theoretical indecidability that has done so much to bring analytic
philosophy to a (theoretical) cul de sac if also, albeit indirectly, generating the current
emphasis on the importance of experiment in discussions within analytic philosophy of
science.
It is a testimony to the seminal character of the influence of both Duhem and Mach that
it is today thought necessary to return to their philosophic understanding of scientific
practice (as theory and experiment/praxis). This is not to say that they were in individual
agreement among themselves but rather that each had distinct insights which similarly
failed to be transmitted in subsequent debates. And the current urgency of an historical
turn in the philosophy of science, clear since the work of Hanson, Feyerabend and Kuhn,
is accordingly necessary largely if not only because of a correspondent refusal of history
in mainline or analytic philosophy of science.

20.7 Page 197

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 159
GASTON BACHELARD: SCIENTISM WITH A HUMAN FACE
Gaston Bachelard was born at Bar-sur-Aube in 1884. Bachelard’s studies were
conducted, as he himself was given to muse, under the sign of delay and he worked as a
part-time mechanical technician for the French postal service until 1913 when he earned
his licence in mathematics and science, becoming a teacher at the Collège of Bar-
surAube. Upon earning his doctorate in 1927, he assumed the chair of philosophy at
Dijon and was then called to the chair of the history and philosophy of science at the
Sorbonne in 1940, where he remained until his retirement in 1954. He died in Paris in
1962.
Bachelard’s philosophy of science is expressed as a ‘dialectical rationalism’ or
‘dialectical naturalism’. Just as Duhem’s anti-idealist conventionalism was read as
conducive to the aims of materialism, although instrumentalist and thus inherently anti-
realist, so Marxist authors such as Louis Althusser and Roy Bhaskar have read
Bachelard’s naturalism as a kind of dialectical materialism to be employed against
ideological appropriations of science. Although the current interest in Bachelard’s
epistemology and consequently in his philosophy of science doubtless owes a good deal
to Althusser, and without denigrating the value of Althusser’s reading for Marxist or
materialist epistemology, the Marxist reception of Bachelard’s work and the word
‘dialectic’, if drawn exclusively from Althusser’s programme, can be misleading
(LeCourt). Still it should be emphasized that those working from Marxist perspectives
have been far more assiduous in examining Bachelard’s philosophy for its epistemic
component than other traditionally analytic philosophers of science (Bhaskar).
Bachelard’s emphasis is on a dialogical exchange, that is to say, a dialogue between
the knower and the known, a dialogue between poetic and scientific discourse. This is not
to be construed as inherently (or essentially related to) a dialogue between poetry proper
and science proper. Instead the capital dialogical exchange is that between the scientist
and the dreaming scientist himself:24 the scientist and himself poetizing, or projecting
(and thus ‘dreaming’ or effectively constituting or technically constructing) the world of
scientific nature. Thus Bachelard wrote on the psychoanalysis of the history of the
discovery of fire as a dialogue between psychoanalysis and that history to find its
psychoanalysis metaphorically in (and of) the history of sexual desire. The metonymic
association between the origin of fire (and electricity) and the fire (and electricity) of
sexual passion points to a dialogue between image (the discovery of fire) and the human
reflection or projection of that same discovery. Similarly, the philosophy of no, by which
expression Bachelard seeks to characterize the openness of the scientific attitude, is a
dialogical philosophy—or better a dialogical account—of scientific practice. To say that
the scientist constitutes the phenomena, the objects of science, is not to describe a
unilateral construction; rather the constitution is a formative, informative, reciprocal
creation, a making of the scientist himself as much as a making (a projection or
constitution) of the scientist’s world. This exchange with the world of scientific or
technical experience articulates the scientist’s characteristic capacity for an anticipatory
openness to scientific phenomena, an attitude ever open to possible revision upon

20.8 Page 198

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 160
encountering a new phenomenon. Such a ‘no’ is then heuristic in function not destructive
or eliminative: it describes what for Bachelard will be the enabling condition for the
possibility of openness to (scientific) novelty. The scientist is thereby summoned to
further innovative and creative efforts, reconstituting a new framework embracing the
new experience.
Bachelard sought to go beyond phenomenology and regarded Husserl’s own
contributions as so many points of (dialectical) departure for Bachelard’s own avowedly
polemical reflections. Thus Bachelard could speak of the need for a ‘phenomeno-
technology’ to reflect the engaged role of the human investigator and the world under
investigation. Hermeneutically and phenomenologically sensitive authors have read this
perspective as compatible with a hermeneutic phenomenology of (reading) scientific
instrumentation.25 But against such a tolerant syncretism of Bachelard’s poetizing science
and phenomenological hermeneutics of scientific culture, Bachelard’s inherently
antagonistic emphasis is more than clear in its original context. In the interest of and
following upon the inspiration of science, Bachelard aims to correct phenomenology.
Owing to the scientific phenomenology implicit in the doing of science, as Bachelard’s
philosophy of ‘no’, ‘observation is always polemical; it either confirms or denies a prior
thesis, a preexisting model, an observational protocol’. For Bachelard, philosophic
reflection on science must be prepared to be instructed by science in practice. ‘A truly
scientific phenomenology is therefore essentially a phenomeno-technology’ (The New
Scientific Spirit [6.54]). The result of this perspective is not merely the banal pragmatism
one might expect. Because Bachelard expects that the prime experience of science is to
be a mathematical one, and that, as ‘the mathematical tool affects the craftsman who uses
it’, it is not only safe to say that ‘Homo mathematicus is taking the place of homo faber’,
but that ultimately ‘it is mathematics that opens new avenues to experience’. Close as this
point of view is to Husserl, the gap remains and is widened by Husserl’s sense of crisis,
as a separation even more exacerbated by Heidegger’s hermeneutic critique of
technology along with the knowledge ideal of mathesis, or axiomatic certainty.
More negatively, resolutely committed as Bachelard was to the scientific and
Enlightenment ideal disposition of a constitutional happiness or cheerfulness, Bachelard
found the existentialist world-view particularly pernicious for it expressed what in his
view was a false opposition between enquiring subject (poetizing poet or scientist—for
they are or at least inherently can be considered the same) and world object (as created or
as world to be known). Bachelard refused the distinction between the living subject and a
dead or alien or meaningless world. The poetic world of human meaning was continuous
with the scientific world, which for Bachelard bore the manifest imprint of the human
projective imagination. Bachelard’s positivism accordingly preserves the casual
colloquial meaning of the word ‘positive’ as an optimistic outlook, or, in Bachelard’s
words, a ‘happy’ perspective. This affirmative and essentially scientistic humanism is
expressed where Bachelard writes ‘Science calls a world into being, not through some
magic force, immanent in reality, but through a rational force immanent in the mind….
Scientific work makes rational entities real, in the full sense of the word’ (New Scientific
Spirit [6.54]).
Bachelard’s work is extensively cited and has been the subject of numerous
commentaries, less in the context of the philosophy of science than in principally literary

20.9 Page 199

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 161
and philosophical discussions of Bachelard’s poetics. Beyond anglophone continental
philosophic interests, Bachelard’s eclectic style of reading between literature and science
has found significant hearings in France and Germany in part through the efforts of a
tradition of literary theorists (as Barthes recounts). In (particularly French) history and
philosophy of science, this reception is due to the influence of Bachelard’s student,
Georges Canguilhem, the historian of physiological science, and R.Cavailles. In this
company, Michel Foucault may also be regarded as within Bachelard’s intellectual
sphere. But if Foucault’s value may be traced to—better and more significantly, if here it
can be argued that Foucault’s value for science can only be understood in terms of—
Bachelard’s influence (cf. Tiles who prefaces her own study [6.83] by saying that her
representation of Bachelard ‘is a rational construct’,26 or Gutting who reads Bachelard
and Canguilhem as background to Foucault, or Bhaskar who also prefers not to treat of
Bachelard on his own, or on his own terms, but sets and thus inevitably defines Bachelard
in opposition to Feyerabend), the question of the nature of the enduring significance of
Bachelard’s philosophy for the philosophy of science is more elusive. This difficulty is
not a matter of the conflict between religion and modern scientific sensibility—as it was
in Duhem’s case—but is doubtless due to Bachelard’s style. This is a style that is less
esoteric than simply dated and rather specific to French literary culture, at least according
to Jonathan Culler’s plausible and sympathetic account. Culler implies that the lack of
conceptual resonance among philosophers of science or philosophers proper in response
to Bachelard’s works (a limitation which is also shared by non-francophone literary
theorists) is due to Bachelard’s nineteenth-century style of rhetorical and imaginative
reference. The style in question is one of diffuse allusion and allegory, like that of
Jacques Lacan. In Culler’s view, Bachelard’s style is simply out of synch with current
modes of expression and particularly unsuited for today’s impatient styles of reading.27
To the late twentieth-century reader’s impatience may be added a fatal incapacity, that is
an inability to appreciate the sense, to infer and so to understand the full value of
Bachelard’s allusions. An allusive, allegorical or metaphorical—in Bachelard’s words
poetic—style presumes and is necessarily dependent upon the reader’s aptness for and
familiarity with the conventions used.
The capacity to note such allusive resonances in Bachelard’s work is essential both for
readers of Bachelard’s philosophy of science and for readers of his literary criticism.
Accordingly, the literary theorist Ralph Smith notes that it is Bachelard’s ‘philosophy of
science [which] must be understood in order to truly appreciate the full significance of his
essays on the imagination and to assess properly his contribution to literary criticism’.28
Where, for Bachelard, ‘Science in fact creates philosophy’ (The New Scientific Spirit
[6.54]), any clear distinction between Bachelard’s value for literary criticism and science
must perforce be difficult to make. Still the lion’s share of this attribution of value is
represented by studies in literary criticism. Apart from Gutting’s background reference to
Bachelard’s work in line with the philosophy of science, and Tiles’s related discussions,
Bachelard is better known for his literary contributions, in so far as Bachelard’s emphasis
on the imaginary continues to appeal to a distinctively French fascination with fantasy
and the domains of reverie and poetic invention.
Mary McAllester Jones’s recent study [6.76] employs the term ‘subversive’ to
emphasize Bachelard’s predilection for the literary and for the imagination not on the

20.10 Page 200

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 162
terms of humanism but rather as ‘unhinging’ humanism.29 This inverse, ‘subverting’
emphasis corresponds to the fashionable celebration of the postmodern but also testifies
to the need to come to terms with scientism’s recondite and irrecusable humanism. Citing
Bachelard’s claim that ‘Man’s being is an unfixed being. All expression unfixes
him’ (Bachelard in Jones [6.76], 193), Jones reads this ‘unfixing’ in her account of
Bachelard’s focus on the salutary spiritual value of challenge, dynamic flexibility and
innovation. Thus, in Jones’s expression of such an unhinged humanism, the movement or
fluidity of articulation is paramount: ‘Man is unfixed by language, not decentered’ (Jones
[6.76], 193).
I think it helpful to add that this openness, as a very literal flexibility, is akin to Paul
Valéry’s anti-Platonic celebration of the divinity that is not given negative or oblique
testament, that is, not at all missed or failing, but which speaks precisely in our muteness
in the presence of beauty.30 Such an awe or expression of silence in the face of the
beautiful rather than revealing an incapacity (such silence betrayed in the human inability
to hold to a steady glance in the face of beauty proves the body’s counter-divinity as
Plato maintains) is the caesura, the glancing gaping that affirms and confirms, sees, sings
and consecrates what is seen. In Bachelard’s words with reference to Valéry, ‘the
temporal structure found in ambiguity can help us to intellectualize rhythms produced by
sound…. We have come to realize that it is the idea that sings its song, that the complex
interplay of ideas has its own particular tonality, a tonality that can call forth deep within
us all a faint, soft murmuring’ (La Dialectique de la durée, cited in Jones [6.76], p. 73).
Silence thus testifies to the moving power or dynamis so important for Bachelard, who
was of course a reader of Valéry’s poetry and theory as well as a high-school teacher of
chemistry and university professor of epistemology. For Bachelard’s enduring aim was to
show that the work of the scientist was not only comparable to that of the poet, but was in
its own and full sense a poetics as well. And if, as noted, ‘science creates philosophy’, for
Bachelard it will also be science that, most properly said and equal to any poetic
discipline, creates poetry.
In the creative processes of poet and scientist, the play of thought echoes or responds
to what is in each case. This is what Bachelard means by writing, ‘Science calls a world
into being, not through some magic force, immanent in reality, but through a rational
force immanent in the mind.’ And it is in this creative, reflective way that Bachelard
claims that ‘Science in fact creates philosophy’. But that is to say that philosophy is
science reflecting on itself. The scientist is creator (poet) and philosopher, a modern
Prometheus calling ‘a world into being’. Here, the different senses evoked by the idea of
a ‘modern Prometheus’ in an English literary context (Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein) and
a continental context (romanticized Titanism) are significant and testify to the difficulties
inherent in assimilating such an elusive and allusive author as Bachelard.
A contemporary physicist and philosopher of science, and one who may be counted
within the continental tradition, Bernard d’Espagnat, takes Bachelard’s important
references to Valéry a step further. For d’Espagnat, Valéry’s notion of spiritual value
expresses a mysticism more veiled than obvious in Valéry’s contrast between spiritual
and material(ist) domains. D’Espagnat suggests that the nuance to be grasped here is that
between a spiritual life without God (atheist) and spiritual life of a human (here, to be fair
to d’Espagnat, perhaps not necessarily a humanist) kind. The difference is again not

21 Pages 201-210

▲back to top

21.1 Page 201

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 163
necessarily disjoint.
Yet the association with mysticism should perhaps only be emphasized in a limited
way. Furthermore, for the sake of rigour, Bachelard’s version of humanist scientism can
be named a subversion of scientism only on the most fancifully esoteric level and that
level is ambivalently problematic because of its insistent humanism. Bachelard’s project
must be conceived as a subversive humanism far more than a postmodernstyle subversion
of humanism as Jones maintains. Such a subversive humanism must, it would seem, be
rethought if it may not in the end be said to yield the absence of the subject. Which is of
course only to say that a subversive humanism remains a humanism. This subtle
humanism is such as d’Espagnat, for example, finds in Valéry. It is elusive because it
entails the conjunction of mysticism and what d’Espagnat calls Valéry’s ‘positivism of
principle’.31 As the proponent of a mysticism which is simultaneously, coextensively in
the human, the ambiguity of Valéry’s position is rightfully his as poet. Bachelard’s
poetics of science offers an illumination of why a contemporary scientist such as
d’Espagnat could turn to Valéry, a poet, as guide for ‘thinking’ science. Bachelard’s
philosophy of science represents (a position on) science as the high point of human
culture (as its most profitable-productive and progressive expression). But this science-
approbative perspective offers a valorization of science echoing not only Bachelard’s
well-rounded conservative cultural views but in uncanny resonance with the spirit of the
‘two cultures’ debate (and their interplay) popularized for the anglophone and traditional
reader in the philosophy of science by C.P.Snow’s essay The Two Cultures.
In Bachelard’s as well as Snow’s approach to the human achievement of science,
science remains an ideal to be valued (and, post-Foucault, we can observe that this value
is also the power of science, a power Nietzsche and Lacan would tell us which
contributes to the Enlightenment role or reign of terror). Where Snow glamorizes science,
Bachelard renders science a kind of poetizing and its products, its ‘phenomeno-
technologies’, a kind of poetry. In effect, science becomes myth. But this does not resolve
the opposition between logos and mythos, an opposition which has been traditional since
the beginnings of Socratic philosophy. Since a glamorization of science is a part of our
contemporary high-industrialist culture, Bachelard’s mythification of science, as a
poetizing venture, far from being a revolutionary coding (much less a double or
subversive coding) only underlines the ruling mystique of science. In this supplanting of
mythos by logos, mythos is not eliminated but absorbed by or subsumed under logos.
Mythos becomes (is and as so named always was) a function of logos. With a cultural
presumption exceeding Mach or Duhem, Bachelard asserts the very poetic function of
science. On Bachelard’s enthusiastic account, science as scientistically—which is also to
say (for such is the force of the mythic-logical conversion) science as poetically—
conceived truly is poetry at its best.
Bachelard’s express identification of the project of scientific practice and method, in
theory and experiment, where the scientist is taken to constitute the manifest entities (and
not merely the image) of science (what Bachelard calls poetizing) inspired the structure
of the sociological turn so decisive for the development of the new philosophy of science
beyond the received hypothetico-deductive or reconstructivist view (Latour, Bloor,
Woolgar). Literally constructed, the poetic project of the world of science is a suitable
object for a sociology of knowledge and scientific practice or, in Bachelard’s esoteric

21.2 Page 202

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 164
coinage, a psychoanalysis of science.
THE HISTORY OF CONTINENTAL PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE
From the perspective of Anglo-American analytic-style philosophy, continental
philosophy may be identified as the tradition of philosophy committed to thinking within
the philosophic tradition, that is, committed to explicitly reconstituting the enduring value
of the history of philosophy. For its part, analytic philosophy is not concerned with the
history of philosophy although to be sure it is rooted in it. Nor is analytic philosophy, as
defined by Müller and Halder, concerned with the traditional objects of philosophic
inquiry such as things or relations or events, but rather with ‘expressions, concepts,
axioms, principles’.32 On the basis of such a distinction between the objects of
continental and analytic philosophic concern, Husserl’s otherwise putatively realist ‘To
the things themselves!’ articulates an interest that is not merely stylistically but
constitutively antithetical to analytic philosophy.
Patrick A.Heelan characterizes continental philosophy according to two interests: ‘(1)
its preoccupation with the problem of the ‘constitution’ of knowledge, and (2) the effect
of the historical and cultural world context of science on the ‘social constitution’ of
scientific knowledge’.33 Although the word ‘constitution’ occurs twice in this definition,
rather than focusing on the phenomenological account of such constitution, recent efforts
to articulate continental philosophies of scientific theory and practice emphasize the
interpretive turn to hermeneutics (Hiley, Bohman et al.). The hermeneutic turn is the
interpretive turn taken by many analytic philosophers after Rorty, and in so far as this
interpretive turn is necessarily an historical turn it is also, as mentioned above, one that is
familiar to analytic philosophers of science after Kuhn. The interpretive and historic turn,
which may be designated the hermeneutic turn, thus represents the most salient line of
intersection between continental and analytic-style philosophy. But preliminary to any
rigorous and significant expression of this intersection, as Rüdiger Bubner has
demonstrated in a broader reflection on hermeneutics and critical theory, it is essential for
the hermeneutic turn to be properly conceived in its technical and (that means) historical
context.34 This background critical context (and constellation of related interests) does
not yet characterize the accepted path of received philosophy of science. Bubner’s
precision is of capital importance for the future of hermeneutic approaches to the
philosophy of science. In recent historical studies of science (Hacking, Jardine, Crombie),
a noteworthy attention is paid to the concept of the broadly hermeneutic rather than the
specifically phenomenological philosophies of Husserl and Heidegger. Authors such as
Gadamer and even Nietzsche may be invoked and references made to Ricoeur, but I think
it important to consider the consequences entailed by Bubner’s reservation that a genuine
conversance with critical hermeneutics (in its theoretical and historical context) is often
lacking.
What is more crucial than even this lack of interpretive and historical competency is
the question of the advantage for the philosophy of science to be gained by taking the
‘continental’ turn, as it were, be that turn construed more narrowly as a historical turn or
more radically as a hermeneutic turn. Would such a turn advance the fortunes of the

21.3 Page 203

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 165
currently becalmed (post-Kuhnian, post-sociology of science and knowledge) philosophy
of science? Long ago, Immanuel Kant observed that philosophy itself seemed almost not
to progress at all if compared to the natural, formalizable or mathematical sciences. For
Kant, in the first Critique and the Prolegomena, to express the difference between
philosophy and science, where science shows clear signs of cumulative and accelerating
development, philosophy, in contrast, appears dissolutely aporetic: without issue or
advance, and without consensus, lacking even a unified perspective or standard for what
would count as such advance. To date, analytic-style philosophy seeks to be true to the
scientific standard for philosophic progress as implied by Kant’s criticism, and seeks the
kind of absolutist or cumulative understanding, including formal precision and consensus,
which constitutes or at least approximates the professional mien of a scientific endeavour.
If the ideal of science remains the ideal of our modern era, and where science, echoing
Kant’s reference, is offered as the standard for philosophy itself, it seems patently
obvious that only a scientific (here, analytic) project of understanding the project of
science could command our interest, and analytic philosophy, given its rightful or proper
distinction, should also exclude other styles as irrelevant. Thus, as we have seen, Mach, a
scientist who was hence already affiliated with the (as he thought) superior thought-style,
eschewed the title of philosopher. If science shows concrete or factual progress where
philosophy manifests only moribund confusion or intestine bickering, science by contrast
would appear to have the most progressive part.
But the history of science shows that even in science the idea of progress is a
conceptual chestnut. As Kuhn has it, one era’s idea of progress is the ‘paradigmatic’ error
to be overthrown by the ‘revolutions’ of another generation. Even with a cumulative, pre-
Kuhnian scheme of simple progress, the philosophy of science, failing to approximate
that ideal, is more ‘philosophical’ (indeed to the extent of following Kant’s aporetic
account) than Mach’s ideal science. The philosophy of science, even analytically
construed, even modelled as it is on science, is still not a science as such. Nor is it a
metascience: if the philosophy of science is to be a science of science, complete with
concrete progress and visible results, it has not been very successful. Offering an array
(with no end in sight) of logical accounts, analytic philosophy of science may explain and
offer an understanding of the workings of science as it conceives them. It is at this formal
juncture that an analogy with the practice of science must end. For where science has to
do with actual events, whether theoretically construed or experimentally constituted,
where science is predictive, and thus amenable to verification or refutation, where related
theories and experimental tests may be expected to proliferate, the philosophy of science,
in its project of explaining science, does not similarly test or check its explanations
against the substance or ‘fact’ of actual science. Thus the shock of the historical,
interpretive or hermeneutic, and sociological turns in the philosophy of science. Far from
a critique of science as a fact, the philosophy of science begins with science as it finds it:
as a fact, a given, and a given to be accepted on the scientist’s own terms. Neither Mach
nor Duhem would champion this perspective, precisely because of their commitment to
the project of science. And Bachelard was too much a scientist himself despite his
celebration of science to petrify it by treating it as an accomplished fact. Thus if the least
demanding definition of the business of science as an explanation of what the world is, of
the world as it is (truly, or really, or practically-pragmatically), is to ‘save the

21.4 Page 204

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 166
phenomena’ on some level, either directly (observationally) or theoretically, the business
of the philosophy of science (qua, pretended science of science) will need to do the same
for science. But that means that the philosophy of science cannot, despite its scientistic
ambitions, become a science because such an account belongs within the perspective of
philosophy.
CONTINENTAL CURRENTS IN ANALYTIC-STYLE PHILOSOPHY OF
SCIENCE
The concern of analytic philosophy is, as its name betrays, a concern with the logical
analysis of language. Indeed, for the sake of this distinction, it should be said that analytic
philosophy is committed to the dissolution (that is, literally, the analysis) of philosophic
problems through their clarification. Once the traditional questions concerning things in
the world, cause and effect or freedom are analysed in terms of their meaning and
significance one finds that one has to do with a logical account or tractatus concerning
the world (i.e., statements, claims and assertions).
The analytic tradition of the philosophy of science is marked by its attention to
questions relating to the structure of scientific explanation and theory-making. If science
is characterized by reciprocal theoretical and experimental activity, the philosophy of
science in its analytic mode has shed more light on theory than on experiment.
Conversely its disposition vis-à-vis experimental procedure is such that the very mention
of historical studies whether by historians of science (Kuhn, Crombie) or by sociologists
of science (Barnes, Shapin, Bloor, Latour, Woolgar, Knorr-Cetina) has had a disruptive
effect on the analytic programme. For the analyst, historical studies are often
characterized by attempts at normative historical reconstruction. Feyerabend’s work
offers an example of such reconstruction, where efforts to restore the sense and
significance of Mach’s contribution to the foundations of the philosophy of science
should be seen as a logical fulfilment of Mach’s appreciation of science as historically
and normatively progressive.
Note that this criticism of analytic-style philosophy of science is not a complaint raised
against analytic style philosophy of science from the side of continental philosophy.
These criticisms have been offered in tandem with the development of the philosophy of
science itself from the start, beginning with Mach and Duhem and offered as well in
various styles of historical reflection by philosophers and historians of science across
cultural boundaries, from Bachelard and Canguilhem to Hanson, Kuhn and Feyerabend.
None of these, not excepting Bachelard and Canguilhem (or French philosophy of
science today which remains as addicted to analytic as to continental approaches), may be
named a typical continental philosopher.
Mach, Duhem and Bachelard along with a number of other scholars have argued that
science itself is more critical, indeed more inherently ‘hermeneutic’, than philosophy. But
this point too is problematic, and not only because of its counter-intuitive content—
whereby science ends up with the virtue of being more hermeneutic than hermeneutics
itself. It is overhasty to conclude as Mach for one would argue, with Duhem and
Bachelard echoing him here, that scientists are the best judges of their own practice or

21.5 Page 205

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 167
that science provides its own best philosophy.
Feyerabend has argued eloquently against this view in Against Method and his recent
books. But we should not need Feyerabend’s warnings that if science is not inherently a
socially responsible enterprise, science is nevertheless neither the Moloch nor the
redeemer of culture and it is as a practical matter of funding in fact socially responsive.35
We do need to add, that for Feyerabend’s programme of taking responsibility for getting
‘science’ to respond to social interests and needs, that if one is not to sink into the
platitudes of civic virtue, now more than Nietzsche could have imagined, we desperately
need a critique of critique, a critique of reason, of truth, of morality.
If the analytic philosophic perspective represents the notion that (natural and objective)
science is ‘mankind’s most successful truth enterprise’, as Heelan puts it, the continental
approach rejects the Whiggish implications of this ideal. However, this is a subtle point
for it must again be emphasized that today there is no approach to the philosophy of
science, analytic or otherwise, which would advocate an unreconstructedly Whiggish
ideal. Yet if the perspective of a continental approach to the philosophy of science is
inherently problematic owing to a perception of its views as ‘anti-science’, read off from
its explicit rejection of scientific knowledge as a ‘privileged kind’, the pluralism of
continental philosophy recommends a reconsideration. Such a review of continental
prospects for the philosophy of science is under way.
This phenomenological tradition begins with Husserl’s project of grounding
mathematics and physics begun in his work on arithmetic and continued in his Logical
Investigations and Ideas. Related to the Husserlian tradition in turn is Merleau-Ponty’s
The Primacy of Perception. Husserl’s interests grew out of the same tradition as and to
that extent matched analytic philosophy (Cobb-Stevens). Considering the common
origins of analytic and continental philosophy as a response (variously expressed in
Husserl and Frege) to the psychologism of Meinong and Brentano, one might propose, as
Michael Dummett has done, that a basic standard for bridging the continental-analytic
divide should be a scholarly conversance with both Husserl and Frege. In this way, Hugo
Dingler, a positivist and in that measure an analytic philosophic thinker, may also be
productively counted as one of Husserl’s students, indeed as a student who memorialized
the value of his teacher’s influence (Gethmann, Dingler). Recent reviews of the history of
the Vienna circle point to a revaluation of the historical relationship between
phenomenology and logical positivism. In line with this analytic/continental connection,
Ströker, Orth, Gethmann and Haller may be read as offering comprehensive discussions
of the phenomenological tradition beginning with Husserl, while Gethmann in particular
stresses the development of that tradition in Lorenzen and the Erlanger school and its
further development and the continuation of constructivist themes in evolutionary
epistemology (Wuketis, Löw, Maturana). According to Gethmann, beyond Husserl’s
transcendent phenomenology, Heidegger’s specific brand of hermeneutic phenomenology
may be counted as a indirect influence on the development of the Erlanger school. If
Foucault is included, this line of association running from Husserl to Heidegger and
beyond is more obviously seen to resonate with the Edinburgh school of strong sociology
of science (Rouse, Latour).
Joseph Kockelmans defends as proto-analytic the realist perspective of hermeneutic
continental approaches to the philosophy of science. For Kockelmans, a hermeneutic

21.6 Page 206

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 168
philosophy of science requires a ‘new conception’ of truth understood in Heideggerian
terms as alētheic (truth as unconcealment), horizonal or, in Nietzsche’s terms,
perspectival truth (Kockelmans, Heidegger, Gadamer, Babich). But where Kockelmans’s
concern is meaning, his reading of truth and science is closer to a Fregean conception of
Sinn (sense meaning) and to the traditional Diltheyan Lebenswelt (life-world), articulated
in terms of a Gadamerian hermeneutics than to the later Heidegger’s conception of truth
and ambiguity.
Patrick Heelan’s interest remains true to the formal constitutive (eidetic,
transcendental, and genetic) phenomenology that is Husserl’s project to found philosophy
as a rigorous science and not just with respect to the so-called ‘crisis’ of his later work.
Heelan’s hermeneutic phenomenology expresses a realism which he calls a horizonal
realism, articulating the basis for a phenomenology of experiment to be integrated with
the theoretical expression of science. Heelan’s phenomenology holds with Husserl’s
eidetic project the possibility of approximating the essence of a scientific object through
successive profiles. The hermeneutic dimension reflects the necessity for considering the
historical, social and disciplinary circumstance of the researcher. Theoretical descriptions
denominate the experimental profiles that would be perceived under standard laboratory
conditions and, with a hermeneutic of experimental work, become truly descriptive of
what is eidetically perceived in the laboratory. Heelan’s perspective accords with strong
or robust realist readings of experimental science, but his is more promising than most for
with a hermeneutic phenomenological expression the realist perspective becomes a
matter of perception not faith.
In current English-language publications, the foremost representatives of so-called
‘continental’ approaches to the philosophy of science in addition to Heelan and
Kockelmans include Theodore Kisiel and Thomas Seebohm. Older continental scholars
seem rather more concerned with the special problems of phenomenology (intuition and
formal logic, the meaning of transcendence, etc.) rather than with questions specific to
the philosophy of science, while younger scholars read the value of Husserl’s and
Heidegger’s thought with respect to science rather more historically and less
theoretically. Recent studies (Gethmann, Orth, Harvey, Rouse, Crease) by contrast tend
to argue for the historical influence upon rather than the current value of phenomenology
and hermeneutic reconceptualizations of the expression of the philosophy of science.
In sum, this means that the work of Heelan, Kockelmans, Kisiel, Seebohm (all
continental scholars, most originally of geographically continental nationality but
working in the traditionally analytic academic world of United States philosophy of
science), etc., must be seen as rather singular representatives of the philosophical
development and application of the phenomenological and hermeneutic traditions
towards an understanding of science including the natural sciences. And given the
factually analytic profile of professional philosophy of science, by far the most influential
contributions to the imperative value of a continental turn to historical and hermeneutic
expressions of the philosophy of science must be said to have come from traditional
analytic philosophers of science, complementing where not directly acknowledging the
work of Heelan et al. This is not due to the greater perspicacity of scholars in the analytic
tradition: it is only a function of its paradigmatic (and professional) dominance. Thus, for
example, Hacking’s recent work on statistics in The Taming of Chance and his recent

21.7 Page 207

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 169
articles is characterized by more than a historical turn but a turn that must be properly and
fully named (although Hacking does not employ the term) hermeneutic. And this same
reference to hermeneutics is implicit when not explicit in many recent historical studies
of science (Jardine, Crombie). What is more, in the turn to the social (in old-fashioned
terms, to the life-world) dimensions of science inspired by the sociology of science and
knowledge (Hiley et al., Fuller, Latour, McMullin, Shapin/Scheffler), a new fusion of
styles in the philosophy of science is emerging. If philosophy of science may not be said
to be returning to its historical continental roots in all these revolutions, a review of these
roots cannot but be salutary for the life of the broader discipline, for the range of styles,
the plurality, of philosophies of science.
NOTES
1 The topic of the nature of a continental approach to the philosophy of science is almost
necessarily esoteric rather than general. The intersection of continental thought and the
philosophy of science is far from well defined in professional philosophy. Indeed, the focus
on Mach, Duhem and Bachelard may even appear tendentious for these authors might well be
represented as antecedent figures within traditional analytic philosophy of science. In fact
they serve this antecedent function for both analytic and continental expressions of the
philosophy of science. Hence the issues raised in this chapter correspond to the history of
continental philosophy and the philosophy of science, their intersection, and the current state
of research. As this last profile is constantly in flux, a more detailed bibliography has been
included to indicate this ferment and to benefit further research.
2 R.Harré, Philosophies of Science (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1976).
3 A.MacIntyre, ‘Epistemological Crises, Dramatic Narrative, and the Philosophy of Science’,
in G.Gutting (ed.), Paradigms and Revolutions: Appraisals and Applications of Thomas
Kuhn’s Philosophy of Science (Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1980), pp. 54–
74.
4 H.Redner, The Ends of Science (Boulder: Westview Press, 1987).
5 K.Hübner, Critique of Scientific Reason (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1983), p. 35.
6 As a recent and comprehensive contribution to this perspective and the debate concerning it
and the history of the Vienna circle as a whole in the North American context of what is by
and large an American discipline, the philosophy of science, see G.Holton, ‘Ernst Mach and
the Fortunes of Positivism in America’, Isis, 83:1 (1992):27–60.
7 C.Dilworth, ‘Empiricism vs. Realism: High Points in the Debate during the Past 150 Years’,
Studies in the History and Philosophy of Science, 21 (3):431–62 (447).
8 P.Frank, ‘Kausalgesetz und Erfahrung’, Annalen der Naturphilosophie, 6 (1906):443–50.
9 Harré (note 1), p. 29.
10 M.Tiles [6.245], 227.
11 Blackmore cites Hans Kleinpeter’s 1912 letter to Mach, reporting that ‘Nietzsche read one of
your essays in a scientific journal and spoke very favourably about it’ ([6.8], 123). And
according to Alwin Mittasch, Mach himself sent a copy of one of his articles to Nietzsche
bearing the hand-written dedication ‘Für Herrn Prof. Dr. Nietzsche hochachtungsvoll Ernst
Mach’ (Mittasch [6.151], 367). Mach’s views correspond to Nietzsche’s refusal to
distinguish between the organic and the inorganic world as discontinuous (indeed, as
opposed). For Nietzsche the living and the dead are representations of a non-discontinuous

21.8 Page 208

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 170
order.
12 It goes without saying that positivism has an almost uniformly negative connotation. This
negative evaluation is not unique to our own times. F.Ringer notes that in the German
universities between the 1890s and the 1930s, during the Weimar period, ‘the label
“positivist” was almost invariably used in a deroga-tory sense’ (‘The Origins of Mannheim’s
Sociology of Knowledge’, in McMullin [6.202], 55). This parallel with contemporary
negative connotations of positivism extended to a critique that similarly accords with the
corrective turns to the historical, the interpretive or hermeneutic and the social. For Ringer,
the criticism of positivism entailed its own inherent ideology: ‘positivism was seen as a kind
of intellectual acid, a potentially disastrous dissolvent of wholistic concepts, traditional
beliefs, and socially integrative certainties. To “overcome” the problems raised by
specialization and positivism alike…there was an urgent need for a revitalization of
philosophical idealism that would also reinstate Wissenschaft as a ground for an integral and
partly normative Weltanschauung.’
13 I.Hacking, ‘“Style” for Historians and Philosophers’, Studies in the History and Philosophy
of Science, 23:1(1992):1–20 (12).
14 Berthelot, Duhem scholars seem pleased to observe, is himself today very nearly forgotten
and certainly more obscure than Duhem.
15 The issue is a socially and historically complicated one. For background information on this
topic, see chapter 6 of M.J.Nye [6.51]. For a fuller discussion of the particular circumstances
of Hélène Duhem’s efforts on behalf of her father’s unpublished work, see R.N.D.Martin
[6.50],
16 Parisians—and New Yorkers—will understand the profound implications of such a
circumstance. Although Duhem was characterized by his Bordeaux contemporaries as testy
(‘violence himself’), it is not hard to imagine this perception a result of a provincial point of
view.
17 Today we might understand this perspective as a reaction against scientism, and it is still
represented by thinkers such as Jacques Ellul and René Dubos. For a discussion of the French
intellectual landscape with respect to the historical features of scientific dogma and religious
belief including a discussion of Dubos’ situation regarded within such a vista, see H.W.Paul
[6.52].
18 W.A.Wallace, Prelude to Galileo: Essays on Medieval and Sixteenth Century Sources of
Galileo’s Thought (Dordrecht: Reidel, 1981).
19 See Wallace, Prelude to Galileo, ‘Galileo and Reasoning Ex Suppositione’, pp. 124–59.
Among others, see M.Clavelin, The Natural Philosophy of Galileo: Essay on the Origins and
Formation of Classical Mechanics (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press 1974) and R.E.Butts and
J.Pitt (eds), New Perspective on Galileo (Dordrecht: Reidel, 1978).
20 Butterfield [6.212], 27.
21 K.A.Popper, Conjectures and Refutations: The Growth of Scientific Knowledge (New York:
Harper & Row, 1963), p. 99.
22 Hacking (note 13), p. 7. Hacking feels compelled to add for reasons I dare not surmise, for
Hacking does not comment on this addition, ‘…and also Spengler’.
23 A.MacIntyre, ‘Epistemological Crises, Dramatic Narrative, and the Philosophy of Science’,
in Gutting (ed.) (note 3), p. 67.
24 It is hard to read Bachelard as conceiving of the scientist as a woman, hence I use masculine
pronouns advisedly in what follows.
25 P.A.Heelan, ‘Preface’ to the English translation of Bachelard’s The New Scientific Spirit
[6.54], xiii.

21.9 Page 209

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 171
26 Tiles [6.83], xv.
27 See J.Culler, Framing the Sign: Criticism and Its Institutions (Oxford: Blackwell, 1988). See
too J.Llewellyn, Beyond Metaphysics: The Hermeneutic Circle in Contemporary Continental
Philosophy (Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press, 1985). This dissonant reception may also
account for the recurrent fascination with Bachelard.
28 R.Smith [6.82], preface.
29 Cf. J.Derrida’s discussion of the ‘hinge’ (brisure) in Of Grammatology, trans. G.Spivak
(Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1974), pp. 65ff.
30 Paul Valéry (1871–1945), French poet, literary theorist and essayist.
31 B.d’Espagnat, Penser la science ou les enjeux du savoir (Paris: Bordas, 1990), p. 223.
32 M.Müller and A.Halder, ‘Analytische Philosophie’, Kleines Philosophisches Wörterbuch,
(Freiburg im Breisgau: Herder, 1971), p. 19.
33 P.A.Heelan, ‘Hermeneutical Phenomenology and the Philosophy of Science’, in
H.Silverman, Gadamer and Hermeneutics: Science, Culture, Literature (New York:
Routledge, 1991), p. 213.
34 See for example R.Bubner [6.131] and in particular Bubner [6.132].
35 See Feyerabend [6.218, 6.219, 6.220].
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Mach
Translations
6.1 ‘On the Definition of Mass’, History and Root of the Principle of the Conservation of
Energy, trans. P.E.B.Jourdain, Chicago: Open Court, 1872, 1911.
6.2 The Science of Mechanics, trans. T.J.McCormack, Chicago: Open Court, 1893, 1960.
6.3 The Analysis of Sensations and the Relation of the Physical to the Psychical, trans.
C.M.Williams and S.Waterlow, Chicago: Open Court, 1914; New York: Dover, 1959.
6.4 Popular Scientific Lectures, trans. T.J.McCormack, with additional lectures from
1865 and 1897, La Salle: Open Court, 1894, 1943.
6.5 Knowledge and Error: Sketches on the Psychology of Erring, trans. T.J. McCormack
(chaps xxi and xxii) and P.Foulkes, ed. B.McGuiness, Dordrecht and Boston: D.Reidel,
1976.
6.6 Space and Geometry: In the Light of Physiological, Psychological, and Physical
Inquiry, trans. T.J.McCormack (three essays originally published in The Monist, 1901–
3) La Salle: Open Court, 1906, 1960.
Criticism
6.7 Adler, F. Ernst Machs Überwindung des mechanischen Materialismus, Vienna, 1918.
6.8 Blackmore, J.T. Ernst Mach: His Work, Life and Influence, Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1972.
6.9 Blackmore, J.T. Ernst Mach—A Deeper Look: Documents and New Perspectives,

21.10 Page 210

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 172
Dordrecht, Boston: Kluwer, 1992.
6.10 Bradley, J. Mach’s Philosophy of Science, London: Athlone Press, 1971.
6.11 Brentano, F. Über Ernst Machs ‘Erkenntnis und Irrtum’, Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1981.
6.12 Dingler, H. Die Grundgedanken der Machschen Philosophie, Leipzig: Barth, 1924.
6.13 Duhem, P. ‘Analyse de l’ouvrage de Ernst Mach: La mécanique, étude historique et
critique de son développement’, Bulletin des sciences mathématiques, 1.26
(1903):261–83.
6.14 Forman, P. ‘Weimar Culture, Causality, and Quantum Theory, 1918–1927’,
Historical Studies in the Physical Sciences, 3 (1971):1–11.
6.15 Frank, P. Modern Science and its Philosophy, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard
University Press, 1949, 1961, pp. 13–62 and 69–95.
6.16 Haller, R. and Stadler, F. (eds) Ernst Mach: Werk und Wirkung, Wien: Holder-
Pichler-Tempsky, 1988.
6.17 Hentschel, K. ‘Die Korrespondenz Duhem-Mach, zur “Modellbeladenheit” von
Wissenschaftsgeschichte’, Annals of Science, 14 (1988):73–91.
6.18 Holton, G. ‘Ernst Mach and the Fortunes of Positivism in America’, Isis, 83:1
(1992):27–60.
6.19 Janik, A. and Toulmin, S. Wittgenstein’s Vienna, New York: Simon & Schuster,
1973.
6.20 Jensen, K.M. Beyond Marx and Mach: Aleksandr Bogdanov’s Philosophy of Living
Experience, Dordrecht: Reidel, 1978.
6.21 Kaulbach, F. ‘Das anthropologische Interesse in Ernst Mach’s Positivismus’, in
J.Blühdorn and J.Ritter (eds) Positivismus im 19 Jahrhundert, Frankfurt: Klostermann,
1971.
6.22 Kraft, V. The Vienna Circle, New York: Greenwood Press, 1953.
6.23 Lenin, V.I. Materialism and Empirio-Criticism, trans. A.Fineberg, London, Peking,
Moscow: Foreign Languages Publishers’ House, 1952, 1972, (1930).
6.24 Losee, J. A Historical Introduction to the Philosophy of Science, Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1972, chapter 11.
6.25 Mises, R.von Ernst Mach und die empirische Wissenschaftsauffassung, The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1938.
6.26 Mises, R.von Positivism: A Study in Human Understanding, trans. J. Bernstein and
R.G.Newton, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1951.
6.27 Musil, R. On Mach’s Theories, Washington, DC: University of America Press and
München: Philosophia Verlag, 1982.
6.28 Schlick, M. Gesammelte Aufsätze, Wien: Gerold, 1938; Hildesheim: G. Olms, 1969.
6.29 Smith, B. ‘Austrian Origins of Logical Positivism’, in B.Gower (ed.), Logical
Positivism in Perspective: Essays on Language, Truth, and Logic, Totowa: Barnes &
Noble, 1987, pp. 35–68.
6.30 Sommer, M. Evidenz im Augenblick. Eine Phänomenologie der reinen Empfindung,
Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1987.
6.31 Stadler, F. Vom Positivismus zur ‘Wissenschaftlichen Weltfassung’ am Beispiel der
Wirkungsgeschichte von Ernst Mach in Österreich von 1895 bis 1934, München (with
bibliography), Wien: Locker, 1982.
6.32 Weinberg, C.B. Mach’s Empirio-Pragmatism in Physical Science, New York: Albee

22 Pages 211-220

▲back to top

22.1 Page 211

▲back to top
Press, 1937.
Routledge history of philosophy 173
Duhem
Translations
6.33 The Aim and Structure of Physical Theory, trans. P.Wiener, Princeton: Princeton
University Press, 1954.
6.34 Mediaeval Cosmology, trans. and selection R.Ariew, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press , 1985.
6.35 To Save the Phenomena: An Essay on the Idea of Physical Theory from Plato to
Galileo, trans. E.Dolan and C.Maschier, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1969.
6.36 The Origins of Statics: The Sources of Physical Theory, trans. G.Leneaux,
V.Vagliente and G.Wagener, Boston and Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1991.
Criticism
6.37 Brenner, A. Duhem, science, realité et apparence, mathesis, Paris: J.Vrin, 1990.
6.38 Eastwood, D.M. The Revival of Pascal: A Study of his Relation to Modern French
Thought, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1936.
6.39 Frank, P. Modern Science and its Philosophy, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard
University Press, 1949.
6.40 Harding, S. Can Theories Be Refuted? Essays on the Duhem-Quine Thesis,
Dordrecht and Boston: Reidel, 1976.
6.41 Hentschel, K. ‘Die Korrespondenz Duhem-Mach, zur “Modellbeladenheit” von
Wissenschaftsgeschichte’, Annals of Science, 14 (1988):73–91.
6.42 Losee, J. A Historical Introduction to the Philosophy of Science, Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1972, chapter 11.
6.43 Lowinger, A. The Methodology of Pierre Duhem, New York: Columbia University
Press, 1941.
6.44 Jaki, S.L. Uneasy Genius: The Life and Work of Pierre Duhem, The Hague: Kluwer,
1984.
6.45 Jaki, S.L. Scientist and Catholic: An Essay on Pierre Duhem, Front Royal:
Christendom Press, 1991.
6.46 Maiocchi, R. Chimica e filosofia, scienza, epistemologia, storia e religions nell’
opera di Pierre Duhem, Firenze: Le Lettre, 1985.
6.47 Martin, R.N.D. ‘Darwin and Duhem’, History of Science, 20 (1982):64–74.
6.48 Martin, R.N.D. ‘Saving Duhem and Galileo: Duhemian Methodology and the
Saving of the Phenomena’, History of Science, 25 (1987):301–19.
6.49 Martin, R.N.D. ‘The Trouble with Authority: The Galileo Affair and One of its
Historians’, The Bulletin of Science, Technology, and Society 9:5 (1989):294–301.
6.50 Martin, R.N.D. Pierre Duhem, Philosophy and History in the Work of a Believing
Physicist, La Salle: Open Court, 1991.
6.51 Nye, M.J. Science in the Provinces: Scientific Communities and Provincial
Leadership in France, 1860–1930, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1986,

22.2 Page 212

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 174
chapter 6: ‘Bordeaux: Catholicism, Conservativism, and the Influence of Pierre Duhem’.
6.52 Paul, H.W. The Edge of Contingency: French Catholic Reaction to Scientific
Change from Darwin to Duhem, Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 1979.
6.53 Rey, A. ‘La Philosophie scientifique de M.Duhem’, Revue de métaphysique et de
morale, 12 (1904):699–744.
Bachelard
Translations
6.54 The New Scientific Spirit, trans. A.Goldhammer, Boston: Beacon Press, 1985.
6.55 The Philosophy of No: A Philosophy of the New Scientific Mind, trans. G.
C.Waterston, New York: Orion Press, 1969.
6.56 The Psychoanalysis of Fire, trans. A.Ross, Boston: Beacon Press and London:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1964.
6.57 The Poetics of Space, trans. M.Jolas, New York: Orion Press, 1964.
6.58 The Poetics of Reverie, trans. D.Russell, New York: Orion Press, 1969.
Criticism
6.59 Présence de Gaston Bachelard: Epistémologie pour une anthropologie complète,
Aix-en-Provence: Librarie de l’Université, 1988.
6.60 Gaston Bachelard: Profils epistémologiques, Philosophica, 32, Ottawa: Presses de
l’Université d’Ottowa, 1987.
6.61 Hommage à Bachelard: Etudes de philosophie et d’histoire des sciences, Paris.
1957.
6.62 Bhaskar, R. ‘Feyerabend and Bachelard: Two Philosophers of Science’, New Left
Review, 94 (1975):31–55.
6.63 Canguilhem, G. ‘Sur une épistémologie concordataire’, in [6.61].
6.64 Canguilhem, G. Ideology and Rationality in the Hisory of the Life Sciences, trans.
A.Goldhammer, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1988.
6.65 Caws, P. Yorick’s World: Science and the Knowing Subject, Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1993.
6.66 Dubrulle, G. Philosophie zwischen Tag und Nacht: Ein Studie zur Epistemologie
Gaston Bachelards, Frankfurt: Peter Lang, 1983.
6.67 Gaukroger, S.W. ‘Bachelard and the Problem of Epistemological Analysis’, Studies
in the History and Philosophy of Science, 7 (1976):189–244.
6.68 Grieder, A. ‘Gaston Bachelard: “Phénoménologue” of Modern Science’, Journal of
the British Society for Phenomenology, 17:2 (1986):107–23.
6.69 Gutting, G. Chapter 1 in [6.167].
6.70 LaLonde, M. La Théorie de la connaissance scientifique de Gaston Bachelard,
Montréal: Fidés 1966.
6.71 Lecourt, D. Bachelard ou le jour et le nuit (un essai de matérialisme dialectique),
Paris: Grasset, 1974.
6.72 Lecourt, D. L’epistémologie historique de Gaston Bachelard, Paris: Vrin, 1978.

22.3 Page 213

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 175
6.73 Lecourt, D. Marxism and Epistemology: Bachelard, Canguilhem, and Foucault,
trans. B.Brewster, London: NLB, 1979.
6.74 McAllester Jones M. (ed.) The Philosophy and Poetics of Gaston Bachelard,
Washington, DC: University of America Press, 1989.
6.75 McAllester Jones, M. ‘Unfixing the Subject: Gaston Bachelard and Reading’, in
[6.74], 149–61.
6.76 McAllester Jones, M. ‘On Science, Poetry and the “honey of being”: Bachelard’s
Shelley’, in D.Wood (ed.) Philosopher’s Poets, London: Routledge, 1990, pp. 153–76.
6.77 McAllester Jones, M. Gaston Bachelard: Subversive Humanist, Madison: University
of Wisconsin Press, 1991.
6.78 Parker, N. ‘Science and Poetry in the Ontology of Human Freedom: Bachelard’s
Account of the Poetic and the Scientific Imagination’, in [6.74], 75–100.
6.79 Schaettel, M. Bachelard critique ou l’achèmie du rêve: Un art de lire et de rêver,
Lyon: L’Hermes, 1977.
6.80 Schaettel, M. Gaston Bachelard: le rêve et la raison, Saint-Seine-L’Abbaye:
Editions Saint-Seine-L’Abbaye, 1984.
6.81 Smith, C. ‘Bachelard in the Context of a Century of Philosophy of Science’, in
[6.74], 13–26.
6.82 Smith, R.C. Gaston Bachelard, Boston: Twayne Publishers, 1982.
6.83 Tiles, M. Bachelard: Science and Objectivity, Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press, 1984.
6.84 Vadée, M. Bachelard ou le nouvel idéalisme épistémologique, Paris: Editions
Sociales, 1975.
Constructivism or evolutionary epistemology
6.85 Delbrück, M. Wahrheit und Wirklichkeit: Über die Evolution des Erkennens,
Hamburg/Zurich: Rosch & Röhring, 1986.
6.86 Dürr, H.P. Das Netz des Physikers, München: Hanser, 1988.
6.87 Eisenhardt, P. et al. (eds) Du steigst nie zweimal in denselben Fluss: Die Grenzen
der wissenschaftlichen Erkenntnis, Hamburg: Rohwolt, 1988.
6.88 Janich, P. ‘Physics—Natural Science or Technology’, in W.Krohn et al., The
Dynamics of Science and Technology, Dordrecht, Boston: D. Reidel, 1978.
6.89 Janich, P. Grenzen der Naturwissenschaft, München: Beck, 1992.
6.90 Maturana, U. and Varela, F. Autopoiesis and Cognition: The Realization of the
Living, Dordrecht and Boston: Reidel, 1980.
6.91 Riedel, R. Biology of Knowledge, New York: Wiley, 1979.
6.92 Safranski, R. Wieviele Wahrheit Braucht der Mensch: Über das Denkbare und das
Lebbare, München: Hanser, 1990.
6.93 Vollmer, G. Was können wir wissen? Bd 1: Die Natur der Erkenntnis, Stuttgart:
Hizel, 1985.
6.94 Watzlawick, P. and Frieg P. (eds) Das Auge des Betrachters: Beiträge zum
Konstruktivismus, München and Zürich: Piper, 1991.
6.95 Wolters, G. ‘“The first man who almost wholly understands me.” Carnap, Dingler
and Conventionalism’, in N.Rescher (ed.) The Heritage of Logical Positivism,

22.4 Page 214

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 176
Lanham: University Press of America, 1985.
6.96 Wolters, G. ‘Evolutionäre Erkenntnistheorie—eine Polemik’, Vierteljahreschrift der
NaturforschendenGessellschaft in Zürich, 133 (1988):125–42.
6.97 Wuketis, F.M. (ed.) Concepts and Approaches in Evolutionary Epistemology:
Towards an Evolutionary Theory of Knowledge, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1984.
6.98 Wuketis, F.M. (ed.) Evolutionary Epistemology and Its Implications for Humankind,
Albany: State University of New York Press, 1990.
Phenomenologically oriented approaches to the philosophy of science: Husserl
and Merleau-Ponty
6.99 Cho, K.K. (ed.) Philosophy and Science in Phenomenological Perspective, The
Hague: Nijhoff/Kluwer, 1984.
6.100 Compton, J. ‘Natural Science and the Philosophy of Nature’, in J.Edie (ed.)
Phenomenology in America, Athens: Ohio University Press, 1969.
6.101 Gutting, G. ‘Phenomenology and Scientific Realism’, New Scholasticism, 48
(1976), 263–6.
6.102 Gutting, G. ‘Husserl and Scientific Realism’, Philosophy and Phenomenological
Research, 39 (1979):42–56.
6.103 Hardy, L. ‘The Idea of Science in Husserl and the Tradition’, in [6.104].
6.104 Hardy, L. and Embree, L. (eds) Phenomenology of Natural Science, Dordrecht:
Kluwer, 1992. Includes Steven Chasan, ‘Bibliography of Phenomenological
Philosophy of Science’.
6.105 Harvey, C.W. Husserl’s Phenomenology and the Foundations of Natural Science,
Athens: Ohio University Press, 1989.
6.106 Harvey, C.W. and Shelton, J.D. ‘Husserl’s Phenomenology and the Ontology of
the Natural Sciences’, in Hardy/Embree, Phenomenology of Natural Science.
6.107 Heelan, P.A. Quantum Mechanics and Objectivity, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1965.
6.108 Heelan, P.A. Space-Perception and the Philosophy of Science, Berkeley: California
University Press, 1983.
6.109 Heelan, P.A. ‘Husserl, Hilbert, and the Critique of Galilean Science’, in R.
Sokolowski (ed.) Edmund Husserl and the Phenomenological Tradition, Washington,
DC: University Press of America, 1988, pp. 158–73.
6.110 Heelan, P.A. ‘Husserl’s Philosophy of Science’, in J.Mohanty and W. McKenna
(eds) Husserl’s Phenomenology: A Textbook, Pittsburgh and Washington, DC:
University Press of America, 1989, pp. 387–428.
6.111 Husserl, E. Phenomenology and the Crisis of Philosophy: Philosophy as a
Rigorous Science and Philosophy and the Crisis of Man, trans. Q. Lauer, New York:
Harper & Row, 1965.
6.112 Husserl, E. The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology,
trans. D.Carr, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1970.
6.113 Kockelmans, J. Phenomenology and Physical Science: An Introduction to the
Philosophy of Physical Science, Duquesne: Pittsburgh University Press, 1966.
6.114 Kockelmans, J. and Kisiel, T. (eds) Phenomenology and the Natural Sciences,
Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1970.

22.5 Page 215

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 177
6.115 Langsdorf, L. ‘Realism and Idealism in the Kuhnian Account of Science’, in
[6.104].
6.116 Lohmar, D. Husserl’s Phänomenologie als Philosophie der Mathematik, Diss.
Köln, 1987.
6.117 Lohmar, D. Phänomenologie der Mathematik: Elemente der phänomenologische
Aufklärung der mathematischen Erkenntnis, Dordrecht and Boston: Kluwer, 1989.
6.118 McCarthy, M. The Crisis of Philosophy, Albany: State University of New York
Press, 1990.
6.119 Merleau-Ponty, M. Phenomenology of Perception, trans. C.Smith, London:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1962.
6.120 Orth, E.W. (ed.) Die Phenomenologie und die Wissenschaften, Freiburg im
München: Alber, 1976.
6.121 Orth, E.W. ‘Phänomenologie der Vernunft zwischen Szientismus, Lebenswelt und
Intersubjektivität’, Phänomenologischen Forschungen, 22 (1989):63–87.
6.122 Rang, B. Husserls Phänomenologie der materiellen Natur, Frankfurt:
Klostermann, 1990.
6.123 Seebohm, T.M., Føllesdal, D. and Mohanty, J.N. (eds) Phenomenology and the
Formal Sciences, Dordrecht: Kluwer, 1992.
6.124 Sommer, M. Husserl und die frühe Positivismus, Frankfurt: Klostermann, 1985.
6.125 Strasser, S. Phenomenology and the Human Sciences: A Contribution to a New
Philosophic Ideal, Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press, 1974.
6.126 Ströker, E. ‘Husserl’s Principle of Evidence: The Significance and Limitations of a
Methodological Norm of Philosophy as a Science’, trans. R.Pettit, in Contemporary
German Philosophy, University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 1982, pp.
111–38.
6.127 Ströker, E. Husserls transzendentale Phänomenologie, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1987.
Hermeneuticist approaches to the philosophy of science: Nietzsche and
Heidegger
6.128 Babich, B.E. Nietzsche’s Philosophy of Science: Reflecting Science on the Ground
of Art and Life, Albany: State University of New York Press, 1993.
6.129 Baier, H. ‘Nietzsche als Wissenschaftskritiker’, Zeitschrift für philosophische
Forschung, 21 (1966):130–43.
6.130 Bleicher, J. The Hermeneutic Imagination: Outline of a Positive Critique of
Scientism and Sociology, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1982.
6.131 Bubner, R. Dialektik und Wissenschaft, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1973.
6.132 Bubner, R. ‘On the Role of Hermeneutics in the Philosophy of Science’, in Essays
in Hermeneutics and Critical Theory, trans. E.Mathews, New York: Columbia
University Press, 1988.
6.133 Connolly, J. and Keutner, T. Hermeneutics versus Science: Three German Views,
Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press, 1988.
6.134 Connolly, J. and Keutner, T. ‘Interpretation, Decidability, and Meaning’, in
[6.133].
6.135 Gadamer, H.-G. Reason in Science, trans. F.Lawrence, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT

22.6 Page 216

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 178
Press, 1981.
6.136 Gadamer, H.-G. ‘On the Circle of Understanding’, in [6.133], 68–78.
6.137 Gadamer, H.-G. and Böhme G. (eds) Seminar: Die Hermeneutik und Die
Wissenschaften, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1978.
6.138 Gebhard, W. Nietzsches Totalismus: Philosophie der Natur zwischen Verklärung
und Verhängnis, Berlin and New York: Walter de Gruyter, 1983.
6.139 Heelan, P.A. ‘Hermeneutics of Experimental Science in the Context of the Life-
World’, in D.Ihde and R.Zaner (eds) Interdisciplinary Phenomenology, The Hague:
Nijhoff, 1975, pp. 7–50.
6.140 Heelan, P.A. ‘Hermeneutical Phenomenology and the History of Science’, in
D.Dahlstrom (ed.) Nature and Scientific Method: William A.Wallace Festschrift,
Washington, DC: University Press of America, 1991, pp. 23–36.
6.141 Hempel, H.-P. Natur und Geschichte: Der Jahrhundertdialog zwischen Heidegger
und Heisenberg, Frankfurt: Anton Hain, 1990.
6.142 Hendley, S. Reason and Relativism: A Sartrean Investigation, Albany: State
University of New York Press, 1991, chapters 1, 2, 5, 6.
6.143 Juranville, A. Physique de Nietzsche, Paris: Denoël/Gonthier, 1973.
6.144 Kirchhoff, J. ‘Zum Problem der Erkenntnis bei Nietzsche’, Nietzsche-Studien, 6
(1977):16–44.
6.145 Kisiel, T. ‘Hermeneutic Models for Natural Science’, in [6.120], 180–91.
6.146 Kockelmans, J.J. Heidegger and Science, Washington, DC: University Press of
America, 1985.
6.147 Kockelmans, J.J. ‘Toward a Hermeneutic Theory of the History of the Natural
Sciences’, in [6.133],
6.148 Kolb, D. ‘Heidegger on the Limits of Science’, Journal of the British Society for
Phenomenology, 14:1 (1983):50–64.
6.149 Major-Poetal, P. Michel Foucault’s Archaeology of Western Culture: Toward a
New Science of History, Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1983,
chapters 1, 2, 3.
6.150 Mauer, R. ‘The Origins of Modern Technology in Millenarianism’, in P.T. Durbin
and F.Rapp (eds) Philosophy and Technology, Dordrecht and Boston: Reidel, 1983:
pp. 253–65.
6.151 Mittasch, A. Friedrich Nietzsche als Naturphilosoph, Stuttgart: A.Kroner, 1952.
6.152 Ormiston, G. and Sassower, R. Narrative Experiments: The Discursive Authority of
Science and Technology, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989.
6.153 Richardson, W.J. ‘Heidegger’s Critique of Science’, The New Scholasticism, 42
(1968):511–36.
6.154 Ricoeur, P. Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences, trans. J.B.Thompson,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1981.
6.155 Schirmacher, W. Technik und Gelassenheit: Zeitkritik nach Heidegger, Freiburg im
München: Alber, 1985.
6.156 Schmidt, A. ‘Zur Frage der Dialektik in Nietzsches Erkenntnistheorie’, in
M.Horkheimer (ed.) Zeugnisse: Theodore W. Adorno zum sechszigsten Geburtstag,
Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1969, pp. 15–132.
6.157 Serrs, M. Hermes: Literature, Science, Philosophy, trans. J.V.Harari and D. F.Bell,

22.7 Page 217

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 179
Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982.
6.158 Stegmüller, W. ‘Walther von der Vogelweide’s Lyric of Dream-Love and Qasar
3C 273’, in [6.133], pp. 102–52.
6.159 Vaihinger, H. Nietzsche als Philosoph, Berlin, 1902.
6.160 Vaihinger, H. The Philosophy of As If. A System of the Theoretical, Practical and
Religious Fictions of Mankind, trans. C.K.Ogden, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1935.
6.161 Wolff, J. Hermeneutic Philosophy and the Sociology of Art, London and Boston:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1975, chapters 1–3.
Social, communicative and materialist (Marxist) continental approaches to the
philosophy of science
6.162 Alford, C. Science and the Revenge of Nature: Marcuse and Habermas,
Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 1985.
6.163 Aronowitz, S. Science as Power: Discourse and Ideology in Modern Society,
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1988.
6.164 Bhaskar, R. Reclaiming Reality: A Critical Introduction, London: Verso, 1989.
6.165 Bubner, R. ‘Dialectical Elements of a Logic of Discovery’ in [6.132].
6.166 Foucault, M. The Order of Things: An Archaeology of the Human Sciences, New
York: Pantheon Books, 1973.
6.167 Gutting, G. Michel Foucault’s Archaeology of Scientific Reason, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1989.
6.168 Hacking, I. ‘Michel Foucault’s Immature Science’, Nous, 13 (1979):39–51.
6.169 Hiley, D.R., Bohman, J. and Schusterman R. (eds The Interpretive Turn:
Philosophy, Science, Culture , Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1991.
6.170 Lyotard, J.-F. The Post-Modern Condition: A Report on Knowledge, trans.
G.Bennington and B.Massumi, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1984.
6.171 Marcuse, H. One Dimensional Man: Studies in the Ideology of Advanced Industrial
Society, Boston: Beacon Press, 1964.
6.172 Radder, H. The Material Realization of Science: A Philosophical View on the
Experimental Natural Sciences Developed in Discussion with Habermas, Assen: Van
Gorcum, 1988.
6.173 Rouse, J. Knowledge and Power: Toward a Political Philosophy of Science, Ithaca:
Cornell University Press, 1987.
6.174 Whitebook, J. ‘The Problem of Nature in Habermas’, Telos, 40 (1979): 41–69.
Continental philosophy of technology
6.175 Beck, H. Kulturphilosophie der Technik: Perspektiven zu technikMenschheit-
Zukunft, Trier: Spec Verlag, 1979.
6.176 Guzzoni, U. ‘Überlegungen zum Subjekt-Objekt-Modell Kritisches Denken und
das Verhältnis von Technik und Natur’, Dialektik 14. Humanität, Venunft, und Moral
in der Wissenschaft, Köln: Pahl-Rugenstein, 1987: pp. 59–73.
6.177 Ihde, D. Instrumental Reason: The Interface Between Philosophy of Science and

22.8 Page 218

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 180
Philosophy of Technology, Indianapolis: Indiana University Press, 1991.
6.178 Loscerbo, J. Being and Technology: A Study in the Philosophy of Martin
Heidegger, The Hague: Nijhoff, 1981.
6.179 Winner, L. The Whale and the Reactor: A Search for Limits in an Age of High
Technology, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986.
Related sociological studies of science and experimental epistemology
6.180 Anderson, G. ‘Anglo-Saxon and Continental Schools of Meta-Science’,
Continuum, 8 (1980):102–10. Also in [6.240].
6.181 Ashmore, M. The Reflexive Thesis: Wrighting (sic) the Sociology of Scientific
Knowledge, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1989.
6.182 Barnes, B. Interests and the Growth of Knowledge, London: Routledge & Kegan
Paul, 1977.
6.183 Barnes, B. The Nature of Power, Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1988.
6.184 Bloor, D. Knowledge and Social Imagery, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1976; 2nd edn, 1991.
6.185 Brannigan, A. The Social Basis of Scientific Discoveries, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1981.
6.186 Brown, J. The Rational and the Social, New York: Routledge, 1989.
6.187 Collins, H. Changing Order: Replication and Induction in Scientific Practice,
London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1985.
6.188 Collins, H. and Pinch, T. Frames of Meaning: The Social Construction of
Extraordinary Science, London and Boston: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1987.
6.189 Crane, D. ‘The Gatekeepers of Science: Some Factors Affecting the Selection of
Articles for Scientific Journals’, American Sociologist, 2 (1967): 195–201.
6.190 Crane, D. Invisible Colleges: The Diffusion of Knowledge in Scientific
Communities, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1972.
6.191 Gallison, P. How Experiments End, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987.
6.192 Haraway, D.J. Simians, Cyborgs, and Women: The Reinvention of Nature, New
York: Routledge, 1991.
6.193 Heelan, P.A. ‘The Quantum Theory and the Phenomenology of Social-Historical
Phenomena’, in P.Blosser, L.Embree and S.Kojima (eds), Japanese and American
Phenomenology, Washington, DC: University Press of America.
6.194 Krige, J. Science, Revolution and Discontinuity, Atlantic Highlands: Humanities
Press and Brighton: Harvester, 1980.
6.195 Knorr-Cetina, K. The Manufacture of Knowledge, Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1980.
6.196 Knorr-Cetina, K. and Mulkey, M. (eds) Science Observed: Perspectives on the
Social Study of Science, London and Beverly Hills: Sage, 1983.
6.197 Kutschmann, W. Der Naturwissenschaftler und sein Körper: Die Rolle der
‘inneren Natur’ in der Experimentellen Naturwissenschaft der frühen Neuzeit,
Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1986.
6.198 Latour, B. Science in Action, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1987.
6.199 Latour, B. The Pasteurization of France/Irreductions: A Politico-scientific Essay,

22.9 Page 219

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 181
Cambridge: Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1988.
6.200 Latour, B. and Woolgar, L. Laboratory Life, London: Sage, 1979.
6.201 Laudan, L. Progress and its Problems, Berkeley: University of California Press,
1977.
6.202 McMullin, E. (ed.) The Social Dimensions of Science, Notre Dame: University of
Notre Dame Press, 1991.
6.203 Myers, G. Writing Biology, Texts in the Social Construction of Scientific
Knowledge, Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1990.
6.204 Prelli, L. A Rhetoric of Science, Columbia, South Carolina: University of South
Carolina Press, 1989.
6.205 Redner, H. The Ends of Science, Boulder: Westview Press, 1987.
6.206 Ringer, F. ‘The Origins of Mannheim’s Sociology of Knowledge’, in [6.202].
6.207 Sapp, J. Where the Truth Lies: Franz Moewus and the Origins of Molecular
Biology, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990.
6.208 Shapin, S. and Schaffer, S. Leviathan and the Air Pump: Hobbes, Boyle, and the
Experimental Life, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1985.
6.209 Winch, P. The Idea of a Social Science and its Relation to Philosophy, London:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1958.
Related studies in the philosophy and history of science
6.210 Agassi, J. Towards an Historiography of Science: History and Theory, vol. 2, The
Hague, 1963.
6.211 Butterfield, H. The Origins of Modern Science, New York: Macmillan, 1951, 1957,
1965.
6.212 Butterfield, H. The Whig Interpretation of History, New York: Norton, 1965
(1931).
6.213 Cartwright, N. How the Laws of Physics Lie, Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1983.
6.214 Churchland, P.M. and Hooker, C.A. (eds) Images of Science: Essays on Realism
and Empiricism, Chicago and London: 1985.
6.215 Crombie, A.C. Augustine to Galileo, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,
1961.
6.216 Cushing, J.T., Delaney, C.F. and Gutting, G.M. (eds) Science and Reality: Recent
Work in the Philosophy of Science, Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press,
1981.
6.217 Dijksterhuis, E.J. The Mechanization of the World Picture, trans. C. Dikshoorn,
London: Clarendon, 1961.
6.218 Feyerabend, P. Against Method: Outline of an Anarchistic Theory of Knowledge,
London: Verso, 1975.
6.219 Feyerabend, P. Farewell to Reason, London: Verso: 1987.
6.220 Feyerabend, P. Three Dialogues on Knowledge, London: Verso, 1990.
6.221 Gower, B. ‘Speculation in Physics: The History and Practice of Naturphilosphie’,
Studies in History and Philosophy of Science, 3 (1973):301–56.
6.222 Hacking, I. The Emergence of Probability: A Philosophical Study of Early Ideas

22.10 Page 220

▲back to top
Philosophies of science 182
about Probability, Induction and Statistical Inference, London and New York:
Cambridge University Press, 1975.
6.223 Hacking, I. Representing and Intervening: Introductory Topics in the Philosophy of
Natural Science, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1983.
6.224 Hacking, I. The Taming of Chance, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990.
6.225 Hanson, N.R. Patterns of Discovery: An Inquiry Into the Conceptual Foundations
of Science, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1958.
6.226 Harman, P.M. Energy, Force, and Matter: The Conceptual Development of
Nineteenth-Century Physics, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1982.
6.227 Hesse, M. Revolutions and Reconstructions, Bloomington: University of Indiana
Press, 1980.
6.228 Jardine, N. Fortunes of Inquiry, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986.
6.229 Jardine, N. Scenes of Inquiry, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1991.
6.230 Kockelmans, J. Philosophy of Science: The Historical Background, New York:
Free Press, 1968.
6.231 Kuhn, T. The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (2nd edn), Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1962, 1970.
6.232 Kuhn, T. The Essential Tension, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1977.
6.233 Ladrière, J. The Challenge to Culture Presented by Science and Technology, Paris:
Unesco, 1977.
6.234 Lakatos, I. The Problem of Inductive Logic, Amsterdam: North Holland Publishing
Co., 1968.
6.235 Lakatos, I. ‘Falsification and the Methodology of Scientific Research
Programmes’, in Lakatos and A.Musgrave (eds) Criticism and the Growth of
Knowledge, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1970, pp. 91–196.
6.236 Priyogine, I. and Stengers, I. La Nouvelle Alliance: Metamorphose de la science,
Paris: Editions Gallimard, 1979.
6.237 Polanyi, M. Personal Knowledge: Towards a Post-Critical Philosophy, Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1974.
6.238 Price, D.J. de Solla Little Science, Big Science, New York: Columbia University
Press, 1963.
6.239 Price, D.J. de Solla Science Since Babylon, New Haven: Yale University Press,
1975.
6.240 Radnitzky, G. and Andersson, G. (eds) Progress and Rationality in Science,
Dordrecht: Reidel, 1978.
6.241 Stegmüller, W. Metaphysik, Skepsis, Wissenschaft, Berlin: Springer, 1969.
6.242 Stegmüller, W. The Structuralist View of Theories: A Possible Analogue of the
Bourbaki-Programme to Physical Science, Berlin: Springer, 1979.
6.243 Suppe, F. (ed.) The Structure of Scientific Theories, Urbana: University of Illinois
Press, 1974.
6.244 Suppe, F. The Semantic Conception of Scientific Theories and Scientific Realism,
Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1989.
6.245 Tiles, M. ‘Science and the World,’ in G.H.R.Parkinson et al., The Handbook of
Western Philosophy, New York: Macmillan, 1988, pp. 225–48.
6.246 Toulmin, S. ‘The Construal of Inquiry: Criticism in Modern and Post-Modern

23 Pages 221-230

▲back to top

23.1 Page 221

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 183
Science’, Critical Inquiry, 9 (1982):93–111.

23.2 Page 222

▲back to top
CHAPTER 7
Philosophies of Marxism
Lenin, Lukács, Gramsci, Althusser
Michael Kelly
INTRODUCTION
Marxist philosophy can be seen as a struggle with Hegel or a struggle with capitalism,
that is, as an intellectual or a political movement. Neither of these views can be very
readily reduced to the other, but nor can they be entirely separated. It is difficult to deal
with Marxism in terms of a particular discipline when so much of it sprawls awkwardly
across the lines which delineate disciplinary boundaries within the English-speaking
institutions of knowledge. The attempt here to approach it within a philosophical context
can scarcely avoid transgressing that context and introducing material which, in a narrow
definition of philosophy, may be thought out of place. To consider Marxism at all,
philosophy may need to consider itself a more commodious enterprise.
A history of Marxist philosophy cannot be innocent. The Marxist tradition includes
histories of philosophy and philosophies of history. It also includes notoriously
conflicting accounts of the nature and status of both history and philosophy. Nor is there
any better agreement among non-Marxist thinkers on the nature and status of Marxist
philosophy. A study of its history must enter a fiercely contested field of combat, where,
more than in any other philosophical tradition, the struggle is waged not only in the
intellectual realm but also in the social and geopolitical arenas. The context in which this
study is written, in the turbulent and uncertain aftermath of the collapse of communist
regimes throughout Europe, carries its quantum of intellectual risk, and confers a certain
untimeliness on what is to be said.
Far from being a philosophia perennis, Marxist philosophy is in constant mutation,
spurred not only by the shifting contours of its environment but also by the changing
problems and purposes of its practitioners. With the passage of time, there has grown up
an increasing multiplicity of re-interpretations of canonical texts and commentaries,
several divergent accounts of who the founder (or founders) were, which of their writings
may be relied on and which subsequent commentators should be consulted. In many
cases, such issues have been the occasion of bitter controversy, and several schools of
Marxist thought have vigorously claimed to possess the only authentic version. Some
have, for a time at least, been willing and able to support that claim with judicial or even
military coercion. An initial question is therefore that of identity: in what sense can a
substantive Marxist philosophy be coherently defined across the diversity of its forms?
Eschewing orthodoxies, the present study will be content with a looser understanding of
the Marxist tradition as a family of movements, connected in complex and often

23.3 Page 223

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 185
conflictual relationships. In such a brief span as this chapter, it will not be possible to
examine more than a few moments in the tradition, and the main lines of their
interrelation. Such a broad approach to Marxism carries a price. In particular, it cannot do
more than gesture at the coherence and breadth of view which some versions of Marxism
have achieved, and which some, but not all, Marxists have regarded as a major strength
and achievement.
A closely related issue is what status to accord to philosophy within Marxism.
Invariably, this refers back to the relationship between Marx and Hegel. Marx’s much
repeated distinction between Hegel’s system (castigated as the idealist shell) and his
method (lauded as the rational kernel) has given rise to deeply conflicting interpretations.
Whereas some have argued that Marxism continues the Hegelian project of providing a
general philosophical framework which unifies the entire field of human knowledge,
others have contended that Marx’s signal achievement was to abandon philosophy,
having exposed its ambitions as illusory. There are many other positions between these
two poles. Without invoking an easy dialectical supersession of these terms, the present
study grasps the nettle at least to the extent of accepting that there is a field of discourse
within Marxism which must be recognized as philosophical, even when (perhaps
especially when) it purports to announce the end of philosophy.
At the heart of the problem is the relation between theory and practice. The starting
point lies in the major insight of Marxist thought that in addition to understanding or
interpreting the world it should seek to change it. Implied in this notion is the view that in
the first instance thought is a product of human social activity and that in the second
instance it contributes to producing or shaping the future course of that activity. Applied
to philosophy specifically, it suggests that philosophers who refrain from seeking change
are by default helping to maintain the existing social order. It may then be inferred that
philosophers who declare themselves as Marxist (or vice versa) are engaged, through
their philosophy, in a project of social change. The consequences of such an inference for
Marxist philosophers personally have at different times and places ranged from exile,
torture and execution to celebrity, fame and fortune: more often the former than the latter.
The shadow of the philosopher-king also looms in the important historical figures who
inhabit the pantheon of Marxist philosophy, including Lenin, Stalin and Mao Tse-tung in
their day. Their example compounds the tension between theory and practice in urging
Marxist political figures to exercise leadership in philosophy and philosophers to don the
mantle of statecraft: a wider gulf to bridge within some cultures than within others.
Karl Marx’s own discomfort on the interface between his theoretical and political
responsibilities was summed up in his reaction to French ‘Marxists’, whose work
prompted his much-quoted comment that ‘I am not a Marxist’. While it may be rash to
place too much weight on this boutade, it usefully illustrates the problematic relationship
between Marxist philosophy and an individual author. Perhaps more than elsewhere,
there are visible limits on the extent to which an author can, or would wish to, claim
ownership of the texts or ideas ascribed to him or her. If Marx was led to disown his self-
appointed disciples during his lifetime, it would be prudent not to assume too close a
correspondence between his or other thinkers’ writings and the positions with which they
are usually associated. Such prudence would be encouraged by the common phenomenon
in Marxism of texts coming to exercise influence only long after they were written and in

23.4 Page 224

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 186
quite different circumstances from those in which they were produced. This is eminently
true of major works of Marx, Lenin, Gramsci and Lukács. A thinker is often brandished
as a banner, designating a particular view which may or may not be found explicitly in
his or her work. Frequently, by a process of displacement, a thinker or even a
philosophical concept will also come to function as a coded reference to a political
position or programme, which cannot be directly addressed. An author or idea is in this
respect primarily a signifier, whose meaning is closely dependent on the context of its
utterance. They can in this way be emptied of meaning, though it is also common for
them to become supersaturated with meaning, when accumulated layers of commentary
effectively come to bar access to a heavily glossed text.
Marxist philosophy is largely inextricable from the groups and movements for which it
has been formulated or which have adopted it as a theoretical approach likely to promote
the achievement of their political purposes and programmes. Among them have been the
labour and trade union movements, the political parties of the left, the movements for
national self-determination and the states and regimes which under one guise or another
have espoused Marxism. Institutionalization of this kind has several effects which often
differentiate Marxist philosophy from other philosophies. One which is rarely remarked
upon is that the channels of its communication are frequently those of a sponsoring
organization, whether a political paper or journal, a political training programme or a
publishing house with a recognizable political or social complexion. Not infrequently,
work of Marxist inspiration has been excluded from the channels available to
professional philosophy. Marxist texts are always characterized by high levels of
intertextuality, such that their importance is often only grasped by a reader who is
familiar with other canonical or contemporary texts from which they are specifically
distinguished. Another distinguishing feature is the frequent effort to express Marxist
ideas in a way which is sufficiently simple and systematic to be widely understood and
applied, particularly by a non-specialist readership. Allied to this is the degree of
constraint under which work is produced, ranging from standard formats and house styles
to varying degrees of editorial intervention and collective authorship. No doubt this is
inseparable from the effect institutions have of vesting philosophy with authority beyond
the intrinsic merit of rational discussion.
There remains one final question for the present historical study: what is the object of
study? Is it a history of philosophers, however defined, or of ideas, or of intellectual
movements? And what criterion of selection and ordering is to be applied in the face of a
daunting abundance of material? The close dependence of Marxist philosophy on the
material conditions of its production and its reception suggests that it should be
approached as a history of ideas, though the confines of space dictate that it will here be
examined most often in terms of an individual philosopher. But while ideas and
philosophers do have individual and collective histories, their history is not wholly their
own. Concepts, propositions or arguments appear, change and disappear at times and in
places that can be charted, but their development cannot be adequately understood in
isolation from other historical processes, which provide both the conditions of
intelligibility and the main motive force for change. Ideas, in other words, draw their life
and strength more from social than from logical relations, though in the present study the
social context can be only lightly sketched.

23.5 Page 225

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 187
If ideas do not entirely have their own history, then they may best be approached
through entities which do have their own history. From this perspective, it is clear that
countries, or regions, offer the most manageable historical framework. Countries
certainly do have their own history, and it may even be argued that having a history is
what makes a country a country. The identity of a modern nation is closely bound up with
the construction, by itself and others, of a historical narrative in which it figures as the
subject. Philosophy is one of the cultural forms through which a nation represents itself,
articulating a general statement of its own identity and its history, especially in relation to
the acquisition of state power. Marxist philosophy has for most of the twentieth century
been a major participant in defining and representing this process, and the remainder of
this chapter will therefore be structured in terms of national and regional Marxist
philosophical movements.
SOVIET MARXISM
The Soviet Union was the first country to adopt Marxism as an official philosophy.
Supported by resources of the state and the prestige of the October Revolution, Soviet
Marxism was for most of the twentieth century the dominant version of Marxist
philosophy in the world. Its domination was never complete, of course, and much of the
debate among Marxist philosophers has been directed towards attacking or defending all
or part of the Soviet synthesis.
Towards the end of the nineteenth century, Russian socialists discovered Marxist ideas,
and, largely under the direction of George Valentinov Plekhanov (1856–1918),
elaborated them into a schematic and all-embracing philosophy. Plekhanov’s major work,
The Development of the Monist View of History (1895) became both an authoritative
statement and a model for later Soviet approaches to Marxism. He critically analysed
several currents of previous European philosophy, drawing out the strengths and
limitations of their thought as a preparation for the resolution of their problems in the
Marxist materialist conception of history. The materialism of the eighteenth-century
French Enlightenment, the conception of history of nineteenth-century French historians,
the French Utopian socialists’ concept of society and the dialectical philosophy of the
German idealists were each examined and found to be useful but flawed. He then
expounded Marx’s solutions, based on Engels’s short accounts of his own and Marx’s
philosophy, which Plekhanov characterized as a ‘modern dialectical materialism’, thus
coining the term which later became the generic title for official Soviet Marxism. He laid
a particularly strong emphasis on the determining role played by the economic base of
society, as against the political, legal and ideological superstructures, which he saw as
merely a function of the base, facilitating or impeding economic developments.
Without dwelling on the detail of his interpretation, it may be noted that Plekhanov
firmly established the practice of approaching Marxism through the exegesis of passages
from Marx and Engels, confirming a scriptural tradition in which texts are the
authoritative source of truth. He also approached Marxism through the intellectual history
of its antecedents, with several important consequences. In the first instance, it situated
Marxism in the mainstream of European thought, with all the intellectual prestige

23.6 Page 226

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 188
attaching to it, particularly among the Francophile Russian intelligentsia. Second, it
suggested that, within this tradition, Marxism appears as a modern and therefore better
solution to long-running problems, the very example of human progress. Third, it
confirmed the contestatory and polemical character of Marxism, which is almost defined
by its conflict with other schools of thought. These characteristics were amplified over
the years, as Plekhanov became the catechist of Russian Marxism. Even though he
became a leader of the Mensheviks from 1903, his philosophical writings were warmly
endorsed by Lenin, and his influence continued for several years after the Revolution and
his own death in 1918.
Lenin’s main philosophical work is Materialism and Empiriocriticism (1908). In it he
attacked what he considered to be idealist deviations in the theory of knowledge,
canvassed by leading intellectuals within the Marxist movement, among them Plekhanov,
who saw convergences with religious thought. Lenin contested the view that discoveries
in modern physics, challenging Newtonian mechanics, lent support to these ‘revisionist’
tendencies. Apart from the reiteration of classical statements of principle drawn from
Engels, the major impact of the work was to reinforce the polemical mode in which
Russian Marxist philosophy was increasingly couched, with the invective and
stigmatizing labels which were more common in political discourse. Lenin also published
a number of short popularizing accounts of Marxism, including an essay, The Three
Sources and Three Component Parts of Marxism (1913), which identified the founding
triad of Marxism as German philosophy, English economics and French politics, each
superseded by Marx’s theoretical advances.
The importance of these works is primarily that they were written by the leader of the
revolutionary movement which took power in 1917, and founder of the Soviet state. In
this capacity, they underwent the same canonization as Lenin himself, after his death in
1924. Used to support several sides in the philosophical debates of the 1920s, they
achieved the status of scripture when, in the early 1930s, Joseph Stalin declared Lenin to
have made such a significant advance in Marxism that it was henceforth to be known as
Marxism-Leninism. The sanctification was selective, however. In particular, Lenin’s
notes on his enthusiastic reading of Hegel, published in 1929, did not attract Stalin’s
approval.
The process by which Marxism-Leninism became the state philo-sophy of the Soviet
Union was marked by bitter controversies, particularly among the professional
philosophers who vied with one another to secure the support of Stalin. The groundwork
of Marxism-Leninism was laid in the codification of historical materialism by Nikolai
Ivanovitch Bukharin (1888–1938), in his manual The Theory of Historical Materialism
(1921). It sparked an intense debate, much of it conducted in the pages, and editorial
premises, of the leading philosophical journal Pod znamenem marksizma (‘Under the
banner of Marxism’—1922–44). On one side, the ‘mechanists’ (Skvortsov-Stepanov,
Timiryazev and others) held, with Bukharin, that Marxism now had no need of
philosophy since it had advanced to the stage of scientific knowledge. Consequently there
was no place for philosophers and ideologists to intervene in matters of natural science.
On the other side, the ‘dialecticians’ (Deborin, Tymyansky, Sten and others) argued, in
the tradition of Plekhanov, that Marxist philosophy was increasingly needed to
generalize, unify and direct enquiry in all areas of knowledge, as a ‘science of sciences’.

23.7 Page 227

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 189
The debate was concluded in 1929 when Bukharin’s fall into political disfavour took the
mechanists with him. The dialecticians’ victory was, however, shortlived. Their general
position passed into orthodoxy, but they themselves were criticized by a new generation
of ‘bolshevizing’ philosophers who accused them of overestimating Plekhanov at the
expense of Lenin, and of unspecified links with Trotsky (who had in fact generally been
reluctant to pronounce on philosophical matters).
At the centre of these debates was the question of authority, which fell into two parts.
First, what authority did philosophy have to direct activity in other areas of society,
especially the strategic areas of science and technology? The answer to this was that it
had complete authority to legislate and pronounce: Marxist philosophy was fundamental
to the successful construction of socialism, both in one country and worldwide. Second,
what authority is philosophy itself subject to? The answer to this is that it was subject not
to some internal philosophical principle or tradition but to the interests of the working
class, represented by the Communist Party, embodied in its General Secretary, Stalin,
whose authority was derived from Lenin. The specific contribution of Lenin to Marxism
was in turn declared to be his championing of partisanship in philosophy, interpreted
ultimately as the obligation of submission to the Party. This was the point at which
Marxism-Leninism assumed the position of official state philosophy.
The 1930s were a period during which Stalin extended his power over the whole of
Soviet life, and over the expanding communist movement throughout the world.
Codification and ‘bolshevization’ went hand in hand under the banner of Marxism-
Leninism, and reached their apogee in the era of the great purges with the publication in
1938 of the definitive Stalinist manual, History of the Communist Party of the Soviet
Union (Bolsheviks), A Short Course. One chapter of the Short Course, credited to Stalin
himself, laid out in simple schematic form the basic dogma of dialectical and historical
materialism. The four principle features of dialectics, as opposed to metaphysics, are
listed as interconnection, change, qualitative leaps and contradiction, while the three
features of materialism, as opposed to idealism, stipulate that the world is material, exists
independently of mind, and is knowable. This dialectical materialism is the guiding star
of the party of the proletariat and when applied to the study of history it yields historical
materialism. This recognizes that spiritual life (including ideas and institutions) is a
reflection of economic production, and that the determining force in historical
development is the mode of production, composed of forces of production and relations
of production. Five types of productive (i.e. property) relations have existed: primitive
communal, slave, feudal, capitalist and socialist, and the transitions between them have
always occurred through revolutions triggered by the faster progress of productive forces
(instruments, people, skill) than their associated relations.
The authority of the Short Course, assisted by its blunt clarity, channelled Marxist
philosophy into a narrow and dogmatic orthodoxy, which held absolute sway in the
Soviet Union and in world communism until after Stalin’s death. Since that time it has
been the implicit reference point of much of Marxist debate, even (perhaps especially)
when Stalinism is most vehemently denounced. Soviet dogmatism was given a further
twist in the early days of the Cold War when, under the direction of Andrei Zhdanov,
culture, including philosophy, was relentlessly confined to the defence and illustration of
Soviet Marxist preeminence in all things. This included strong discouragement of interest

23.8 Page 228

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 190
in non-Marxist philosophy, even where, as with Hegel, it had strong connections with
Marxism, and even extending to Marx’s own noncanonical writings, particularly the Paris
Manuscripts of 1844.
After the death of Stalin in 1953, and his denunciation by Krushchev at the 20th
Congress of the Soviet Communist Party in 1956, the rigidly dogmatic approach began to
ease. But an indelible pattern was set, which no amount of destalinization could remove.
The authority of the state, the primacy of the party, the obligatory teaching of Marxism-
Leninism at all stages of the Soviet education system and a strongly hierarchical
academic establishment, all served to maintain the social and intellectual structure of
Soviet Marxism largely unchanged. The Stalinist ‘Vulgate’ developed into an elaborate
scholastic system, in which controversies might rage over the interpretation of a
particular passage of the canon, or over the status of a particular doctrine. A good
example was the successful campaign to rehabilitate the negation of the negation, omitted
by Stalin from the Short Course, as one of the universal dialectical laws of development.
Paradoxically, the very close identification of Marxism-Leninism with the state and
party also largely insulated it from developments which took place elsewhere in Marxist
philosophy. The logic was simple: if a foreign thinker was not a member of a communist
party, he or she was not an authentic Marxist, and could be recognized only as some form
of renegade or deviant from Marxism; conversely, if he or she was a party member, his or
her work could not be publicly discussed without infringing the principle of non-
interference in the affairs of a fraternal party. The result was inevitably a thriving
underground preoccupation with foreign Marxist philosophers, and with major non-
Marxist philosophers. The resulting gulf between the public and private face of Soviet
Marxism rendered it extremely friable under pressure of events. Marxism-Leninism in the
USSR’s eastern European satellites, and in pro-Soviet communist movements elsewhere,
was clearly marked as a coded acceptance of Russian domination, political or ideological.
In those parties which espoused the Eurocommunist line in the 1970s, it was symbolically
rejected, while in many others it was discreetly abandoned. In any event, it had no
independent strength on which to draw, and when the state and party which sponsored it
collapsed at the beginning of the 1990s, Soviet Marxism effectively came to an end.
Since it has been the focus and archetype of Marxism for most of the twentieth century, it
remains to be seen whether its demise will also prove to be the end of Marxism as such.
The Chinese variant of Stalinist Marxism has also been influential. Chinese
communism developed two main currents of philosophy, one being the orthodox
Marxism-Leninism of the Short Course, introduced by Moscow-trained intellectuals and
promoted by the Comintern, the Third or Communist International (1919–43) founded by
Lenin to direct the policy and activities of Communist parties worldwide. The other
current was an adaptation of the first by intellectuals based in the revolutionary
headquarters at Yenan during the late 1930s, of whom the most successful was Mao Tse-
tung (1893–1976). Apart from a much greater emphasis on the role of the peasantry, Mao
developed a classification of contradictions in terms of whether they were antagonistic or
non-antagonistic in nature, primary or secondary in the specific context, and what their
primary and secondary aspects were. He argued that contradictions and their aspects
could in certain circumstances pass from one type to another, particularly when they were
handled correctly in the practice of the revolutionary party.

23.9 Page 229

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 191
With the success of the Chinese revolution in 1948, and particularly after the death of
Stalin, Mao was increasingly presented as a second Lenin, and Peking as an alternative to
Moscow in the leadership of the world communist movement. During the 1960s, most
countries witnessed the rise of Maoist communist movements, which in western Europe
were small, but particularly successful in student circles. They were particularly
influenced by the events of the Cultural Revolution, during which the ‘little red book’ of
Quotations from Chairman Mao Tse-tung elevated his neo-Stalinism to cult status,
condensing the official philosophy, renamed Marxism-Leninism-Mao-Tse-tung Thought,
into all-purpose gobbets and slogans. From this apotheosis, Chinese communism returned
from an internationalist to a nationalist Marxism-Leninism, and for a time during the
1980s began to allow the expression of humanist forms of Marxism associated with
Lukács and Gramsci. Whether and how soon Chinese communism will incur a fate
comparable to its Soviet counterpart can only be a matter of speculation, but it is clear
that its influence on Marxist philosophy elsewhere largely ceased in the mid-1970s.
CENTRAL EUROPEAN MARXISM
In the early years after the First World War, before root and branch bolshevization had
set them all marching to the rhythm of Moscow, there was still a flourishing culture of
philosophical debate among central European Marxists. To a large extent this was
conducted in the German-speaking circles which had been the intellectual centre of
gravity of pre-Bolshevik Marxism. Pervaded by the humanism of the Second
International, the organization which brought together the social-democratic and labour
parties of Europe (1889–1914), and oriented toward a respect for intellectual and cultural
values, it was blotted out by triumphant Marxism-Leninism and lay largely ignored until
the post-Stalinist era of the 1960s. At that stage it was rediscovered in the writings of
Korsch, Lukács, Benjamin, Bloch and others, and given widespread currency, largely by
movements opposed to the dominant communist orthodoxy.
Several attempts have been made to construct an alternative tradition by aggregating
these writers with the Frankfurt school, with Italian Marxists, and with French writers as
diverse as Althusser and Sartre, to create a ‘western Marxism’. Such has been the project
of the British New Left Review, which has done a great deal to create an appropriate
canon of texts in English, and has rendered accessible a broad range of non-Soviet
Marxist theorists. None the less, the notion of ‘western Marxism’, coined in the mid-
1950s by Maurice Merleau-Ponty, loses historical coherence as soon as it is extended
beyond the germanophone debates of the interwar period. For this reason, it is more
helpful to consider the diverse central European writers withouthaving to wrestle them
into an artificial unanimity with each other and with writers from other intellectual and
political traditions.
Undoubtedly, the giant among these philosophers is Georg (György) Lukács (1885–
1971). Born in Budapest to a wealthy and cultured family, and educated in the
universities of Germany and the Austro-Hungarian Empire, he wrote with equal facility
in German and Hungarian, and played a significant role in the political history of
Hungary and of the international communist movement, as well as being the central

23.10 Page 230

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 192
figure in major literary and philosophical debates. Brought up in the German
philosophical tradition of Kant, Dilthey and Simmel, he came to espouse Marxism via
Max Weber and then Hegel, whose thought exercised an enduring fascination for him. A
leading figure of the leftist faction in the Hungarian Communist Party during the
turbulent events of 1919–20, Lukács developed an interpretation of Marxism sharply at
odds with the dialectical materialism which gained ascendancy in Moscow. Through
most of his career he was the target of repeated attacks on his ‘revisionist’ positions,
despite his efforts at different times to assert his own orthodoxy. There has been
considerable discussion as to whether Lukács’s philosophical positions can be directly
correlated with his political shift towards a conciliatory attitude to the non-communist
left. But since his political sympathies were in many respects close to Bukharin, whose
philosophy he opposed, it would be rash to draw any reductive conclusions.
Undoubtedly Lukács’s major work is his collection of essays History and Class
Consciousness, published in 1923. It was the focus for controversy in the years following
its publication, and again at the beginning of the Cold War. It was widely circulated in
French translation in the 1960s, before Lukács approved its reappearance in German and
English in 1967. The basic thrust of the book was to relocate Marx firmly in the tradition
of Hegel, and to draw out the Hegelian concepts which Marx had sought to refashion. In
the first essay (‘What is orthodox Marxism?’) Lukács argues that Marx had adopted the
progressive part of the Hegelian method, namely the dialectic, setting it against the
mythologizing remnants of ‘eternal values’ which Hegel himself had been struggling
against. In this sense, Marx was directing against Hegel the very criticism that Hegel had
levelled against Kant and Fichte, that they immortalized particular moments of abstract
reflection at the expense of an awareness of process, concrete totality, dialectics and
history. Hegel, he argued, had been unable to progress from the level of abstractions to a
perception of the real driving forces of history, and it had been Marx’s originality to
discover these forces.
Perhaps the most influential essay in the book, entitled ‘Reification and the
consciousness of the proletariat’, launched the interpretation of Marxism as a theory of
alienation, remarkably antici-pating the argument of Marx’s Paris Manuscripts of 1844,
which had not yet been brought to light. Lukács highlighted the exchangeable commodity
as the basic unit of capitalist economies, and the fetishism of commodities as an
inevitable consequence, leading people to neglect the human content of activity in favour
of its quantifiable exchange value. He argued that it was a logical necessity for the
development of capitalism that all relations must eventually be reduced to the structure of
commodity-exchange. This process of reification led, he thought, to all aspects of life
being calculated and quantified, alienating the individuality of both people and things.
Carried to its conclusion, it also stamped its imprint on human consciousness and reified
the most intimate areas of human relations and the most rigorous of scientific
investigations. Within bourgeois society there was clearly no prospect of a radical escape
from the ravages of reification. The only hope of a solution was to transform philosophy
into praxis, a practical orientation of thought and consciousness towards reality. Reality
in this sense was understood as a process of becoming, a totality. Only the practical class
consciousness of the proletariat, grasping itself as the subject of the social totality, could
be expected to transform a theory of praxis into a practical theory which overturns the

24 Pages 231-240

▲back to top

24.1 Page 231

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 193
real world, revolutionizes the totality and overcomes the process of reification. Even then
it would succeed only as long as it retained its practical orientation and avoided the
Hegelian pitfalls of schematization, repetitive mechanical patterns (such as the famous
triad: thesis, antithesis, synthesis), and the undialectical project of extending its attention
beyond human society to a philosophy of nature.
Lukács’s reaffirmation of Hegel’s relevance was in one sense a reclamation of Marx
for the European philosophical tradition, and a challenge to the increasing tendency to
sanctify Lenin, visible in the last months of the latter’s life and stridently pursued by
Stalin in the campaign of bolshevization. His strictures against Hegel’s shortcomings
were in another sense an implicit reproach to the codification of Marxism into a set of
rigid abstractions, culminating in the Short Course. He reaffirmed the dialectical
relationship between subject and object, between theory and practice, as a fundamental
tenet of Marxism which guaranteed its progressive and transformative potential. The
alternative, he argued, would be a relapse into Utopian dualism, characteristic of
revisionism, and generating an ossified theory which would serve as a catch-all
justification of any kind of practice. This would most likely lead to a conservative right-
Hegelian worship of the state from which Marx had rescued the posterity of Hegel. It is
not difficult to see the Marxist-Leninist equivalent looming over the argument.
But Lukács did not only set a challenge to Soviet Marxism, he also set an intellectual
agenda for an alternative, Hegelianizing Marxism. Cultured and humanistic in its ethos, it
drew strength from romantic idealism and traditions of religious fervour. The philosophy
of alienation offered a subtle dialectic with a strong appeal to intellectuals, while the
philosophy of praxis offered a basis for activism and engagement in the political
struggles of the working class, cast as the secular source of salvation. Over the longer
term, the richness of Lukács’s conceptualization, and the many philosophical links it
made with the European intellectual mainstream, made History and Class Consciousness
a bridge between the western New Left of the 1960s and the non-Stalinist roots for which
it was so ardently searching. Lukács himself, though long-lived, played a singularly
distant role in his own rediscovery, obliged as he was to play intellectual hide and seek
with the political authorities in Moscow and Budapest. For most of his career, he was
much more widely recognized as a literary theorist and critic of European literature,
deeply involved in the cultural controversies, and more than a little reticent about his
earlier philosophy.
Though he was much read, Lukács had few disciples in central Europe. Perhaps the
most noteworthy is the Romanian scholar, Lucien Goldmann (1913–70), who met and
admired Lukács in Vienna but spent most of his adult life in Paris, where he distinguished
himself primarily through his analysis of French literature using approaches drawn from
Lukács and from the structuralism of Jean Piaget.
Closer in spirit and preoccupations was Lukács’s contemporary and friend Karl Korsch
(1886–1961). A leading figure in the powerful German Communist Party of the 1920s,
Korsch took a leftist stance vehemently opposed to the bolshevization of the Communist
International. His most influential work, Marxism and Philosophy (1923), aroused sharp
hostility and, with other oppositional leaders he was eventually ousted from the Party. In
1936 he emigrated permanently to the United States.
Korsch noted that nineteenth-century Marxism had largely ignored philosophy, and he

24.2 Page 232

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 194
traced the fact to Marx’s and Engels’s view that their materialist conception of history
and society was destined to supersede classical German philosophy, from which it
sprang, and ultimately destined to replace philosophy. He castigated the undialectical
approach of those who had assumed that philosophy was therefore abolished, and of
those who wished to reinstate it, pointing out that its abolition was necessary but
dependent on the revolutionary transformation of the historical circumstances which
produced it. Since this transformation had not taken place, the rejection of philosophy
was premature, while its reinstatement was retrograde. The result of abolition was that
Marxist economic or political theory were being proposed as value-free sciences which
could equally be used by opponents of socialism, and that in practice socialists were
combining Marxism with various substitute philosophies which did provide systems of
values. Conversely, the result of reinstatement was to reinforce philosophy as an obstacle
to the process of its own historical suppression.
Since Korsch was attacking both the theorists of the Second International, who had
abandoned philosophy, and those of the Comintern, who were reinstating it, he attracted
fierce criticism from both sides. There were strong affinities between his position and that
of Lukács, but both were increasingly isolated voices in the political aftermath of the
failure to achieve socialism internationally. The revolutionary fervour and the messianic
tone of their thought did not chime with the increasingly inhospitable social and political
climate in central Europe.
More consonant with the disillusioned and embattled left of the interwar period is the
work of Walter Benjamin (1892–1940), a Berliner who largely avoided political activism
but expressed a revolutionary Marxist approach in his critical essays. Benjamin was a
critic and historian of culture, rather than a philosopher, sharing the perception of the
Frankfurt school (which is treated elsewhere in this volume) that culture had in some
respects overtaken politics as the main field of struggle. His work on Brecht (with whom
he enjoyed a close friendship) and Baudelaire, and his more philosophical essays
collected as Illuminations, began to attract renewed attention in western Europe during
the 1970s. Benjamin was a deliberately non-systematic thinker, considering images,
aphorisms and allegories as a more potent means of gaining purchase on the course of
history. Progressive change was likely, he thought, to arise either from a long-term
strategy of attrition or from an extremely focused unleashing of explosive social forces.
In either event, his approach was expressed in the contemporary maxim of ‘pessimism of
the intellect, optimism of the will’, and he summed up his conception of history by
reference to a drawing by Paul Klee showing the angel of history facing backwards to
look with pity on the debris of its victims, but propelled into the future by a storm
blowing from paradise, which constitutes progress. Benjamin himself fell victim to the
upheavals of history, taking his own life to avoid falling into the hands of the Gestapo as
he attempted to flee from occupied France into Spain.
Central European intellectuals, caught between the hammer of fascism and the anvil of
Marxism-Leninism, plunged into an understandable slough of despond with the approach
of war. The basis for any optimism was slender, but, such as it was, it was articulated in
the philosophy of possibility of Ernst Bloch (1885–1977). Born and educated in Berlin,
Bloch developed a syncretic philosophy in which Marxist elements jostled with religious
mysticism, vitalism and classical German philosophy. During his wartime exile in the

24.3 Page 233

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 195
United States, he wrote most of his major work, The Principle of Hope, which was
published in East Germany, where he had returned, during the 1950s. He later fled to
West Germany following disagreements with the communist authorities which he had
generally supported, without becoming a party member.
Bloch’s thought, expressed almost as aphoristically as Benjamin’s, follows a humanist
inspiration to argue that the basic nature of a human being is characterized by living and
working towards a future goal which is in the process made real, actualizing one out of
the many potential forms of existence. The task of creating a utopia is central to human
existence, and falls not only to the intellect but also to the imagination and emotions,
which can awaken latent possibilities within the present. Ever since earliest times, human
societies have woven images and stories of utopias, which they have variously attempted
to bring into being, without ever completely succeeding. The constantly renewed drive to
do this is a principle of hope which energizes human activity and finds its highest
expression in the Marxist project of a concrete utopia, which can be compared with the
kingdom of heaven.
Bloch’s very unspecific characterization of what kind of utopia may be hoped for is in
sharp contrast with his euphoric endorsements of East German social achievements, and
he has been criticized for both. But, assisted by his own longevity, Bloch’s work is
another important contribution from the generation of central European Marxist
philosophers who were formed and continued to write outside the orthodox Marxist-
Leninist framework. Though Bloch, Benjamin, Korsch and Lukács are in many respects
different both politically and philosophically, they do share common roots in the classical
German philosophical tradition which culminated in Hegel, and a deep regard for the
value and efficacity of European cultural traditions. It is this shared culture which gives
them their potential for resisting the reduction of philosophy to an instrument to be used,
modified or discarded as it suits a particular political purpose.
ITALIAN MARXISM
From the end of the First World War to the end of the Second, Italian Marxism led an
underground life, most of which was only brought to wider attention long afterwards. It
was not born in the underground, however. Before the Great War, Marxists were well-
established figures in the Italian mainstream, active participants in debates which were
shaped by the neo-Hegelian revival.
Most prominent of the early Italian Marxists was Antonio Labriola (1843–1904),
whose Essays on the Materialist Conception of History (1895–1900) were read
throughout Europe at the turn of the century. His undogmatic and humanist approach was
alert to the sinuosities of history but lyrical about the mission of the proletariat to give
meaning to it. His thought left its mark on philosophers like Benedetto Croce (1866–
1952) and Giovanni Gentile (1875–1944), who both grappled with Labriola’s Marxism
before taking an avowedly Hegelian path away from it towards liberal and, in Gentile’s
case, fascist conclusions. The triumph of Mussolini in the early 1920s created
extraordinary difficulties for communists and Marxists in Italy, with activists driven into
exile, or hiding, or prison. In exile, a leader like Palmiro Togliatti (1893–1964) was able

24.4 Page 234

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 196
to shape the political direction of the Comintern, though not the development of Marxist
philosophy.
Paradoxically, it was the imprisonment of the Italian Communist Party leader, Antonio
Gramsci (1891–1937) that produced the most influential theoretical and philosophical
development. Born of a poor family in Sardinia, Gramsci studied history and philosophy
at the university of Turin before throwing himself into revolutionary politics early in the
First World War. He became an editor of the influential socialist review Ordine nuovo
(‘New order’) in 1919 and played a key role in the foundation of the Italian Communist
Party, becoming its leader in 1923, when his policy of broad alliances eventually
prevailed. His political activity in Italy and abroad ended when he was arrested in Rome
and imprisoned in 1926. Spending the rest of his life in appalling conditions in prison and
hospital, Gramsci wrote prolifically, reflecting deeply on Marxist principles in virtual
isolation from current events. His influence stems mainly from his Prison Notebooks,
which were published in Italy soon after the Second World War but only became widely
known during the late 1960s, when they were identified as offering an attractive
alternative to Soviet Marxism.
Philosophically, Gramsci’s affinities were with the Hegelian tradition which he had
encountered through Croce. He considered that Marx’s achievement had been to create a
synthesis from the two opposing schools into which Hegelianism had divided. He also
thought that Marx’s own posterity had divided into two schools, mechanistic materialism
and dialectical idealism, which now needed to be welded into a new synthesis. His
proposal was a philosophy of praxis, a name he chose partly as a code-word for Marxism
to placate the prison censors but partly also because it encapsulated his distinctive
conception of history as an aggregation of human practical activity.
At the core of Gramsci’s philosophy was the humanist question: what is man? A later
generation, attempting to meet feminist critiques, has rephrased the question: What is
human existence? Gramsci’s answer was that humanity is reflected in every individual
person, and consists of the individual, other people and nature. The individual enters into
relationships with other people and with nature, primarily through work, generating a
network of relationships. These relationships form organic social entities, which become
conscious of themselves and become capable of purposeful and effective action. Thus the
individual is an integral part of the process of change which is history, its conscious
motive force, and the whole complex of changing relationships is part of each individual.
Human existence is synonymous with the socio-historical process and the question ‘what
is human existence?’ must therefore be reformulated as ‘what can human existence
become?’
Within Gramsci’s humanist vision, philosophy appears as the consciousness of the
historical process, not only a dimension of the totality of human praxis, and therefore
inherently political, but also part of the consciousness of each individual within it. It was
in a sense a collective subjectivity, and its value lay in its appropriateness to the task of
the collectivity rather than in its relation to any objective reality. In any case, he
questioned whether it was meaningful to speak of a reality existing independently from
human praxis. He thought it necessary for the unity and advancement of humanity that
philosophy should overcome the distance, frequently observed, between the doctrine of
the intellectuals and that of ordinary people. There was in particular, he argued, a need

24.5 Page 235

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 197
for Marxism to foster intellectuals who were an organic part of the working people and
capable of raising the level of consciousness of the masses, without bringing elitist ideas
from outside. In this way, it would, he suggested, be possible to build a unity of ideas and
political action which could challenge the hegemony of bourgeois philosophy and
politics.
The concept of hegemony is Gramsci’s most influential and contentious innovation,
since it emphasizes that the exercise of power in a society is secured not only by the
repressive use of state power but also more crucially by the maintenance of a moral,
intellectual and cultural consensus. For the working class and its allies to win power, it is
not sufficient to engineer a coup d’état, it is also necessary to build an alternative cultural
consensus capable of securing hegemony. This is a much broader and more long-term
task, requiring a different kind of organization from the highly centralized and disciplined
parties built by the Comintern. Learning lessons from the ideological power exercised by
the Catholic Church, Gramsci was responding to the fact that Mussolini’s fascism had
been successful in gaining popular support, and recognizing that a long ‘war of position’
would be needed to win over the masses for socialism. The alternative, which he rejected,
was to fall back on faith in the likelihood of the blind workings of history producing a
suitable revolutionary opportunity. For socialists reading Gramsci thirty years later,
however, hegemony appeared to emphasize the strategic importance of ideological and
cultural struggle as an alter-native to traditional politics, which seemed to offer no
prospect of radical change.
Because of their fragmentary, allusive and often obscure nature, Gramsci’s prison
writings allow of a range of interpretations. At one end of the range, they can be seen as a
restatement of fairly orthodox Marxism-Leninism, somewhat veiled by the circumstances
in which they were produced. That is largely how they were presented when they were
first published. At the other end of the range, they can be interpreted as a penetrating
rebuttal of Soviet Marxism which offers an entirely different basis on which to develop
Marxist philosophy. That is largely how they have been received since their rediscovery
in the 1960s. The philosophy of praxis served to challenge the distinction between theory
and practice, obviating the need for a body of theory and thus for the scholastic apparatus
of hitherto existing Marxism. The concept of hegemony served to challenge the
distinction between base and superstructure, reducing the importance of economics, at a
time of relative prosperity, and increasing that of cultural theory, at a time of rapid
expansion in audiovisual communication. In this way Gramsci’s posthumous reputation
grew both from his conceptual innovations and from the new political directions his ideas
opened up.
In postwar Italy, Gramsci’s humanist and historicist positions dominated Marxist
debate for many years, assisted by the success of the Communist Party in giving
intellectuals an organic role to play within political activity. His influence was not
unchallenged, however. In particular, Galvano della Volpe (1895–1968) maintained a
persistent critique of historicism, which he regarded as a product of the contamination of
Marxism by Italian idealist philosophy. An academic rather than an activist, della Volpe
drew on the egalitarian and democratic thought of Rousseau, counterposed to the
Hegelian theory of the state, and argued that Marxism should concern itself with specific
scientific knowledge of the world, rather than with indeterminate abstractions.

24.6 Page 236

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 198
With the political effervescence of the 1960s came a flourishing Marxist culture which
permeated most areas of intellectual inquiry, prompting intense philosophical debates
between the diverse movements and schools of thought which sprang up inside and
outside the Communist Party. Two philosophers of the far left may be mentioned as
having been influential in the English-speaking world. Lucio Colletti, brought up in the
tradition of della Volpe, sought to demystify the historicism of Gramsci and to refute the
view that Marxism could draw on an underlying materialism in the dialectic of Hegel,
whom he regarded as essentially a Christian philosopher. Ultimately, however, he
concluded that dialectical mystification was present even in Marx, and he began to
distance himself from Marxism. His hostility to idealism was shared by Sebastiano
Timpanaro, who attacked the French attempts to reconcile Marxism with existentialist
(Sartre) and structuralist (Althusser) theories. A strong proponent of materialism, which
he saw as lacking in Gramsci, Timpanaro asserted the objectivity of scientific knowledge
and sought recognition for the autonomous existence of the natural world, necessary as a
theoretical basis for science and for ecological awareness.
These philosophers are not proposed as representative of debates over the past thirty
years, and the present study cannot offer an extensive survey of the variety of Italian
Marxists. They include a Utopian Marxism strongly imbued with Christian spiritualism,
and several suggested combinations of Marxism with other contemporary schools of
thought (psychoanalytical, ecological, feminist among others). Moreover, as the example
of Colletti suggests, Marxist philosophy shades into other philosophical movements.
With the transformation of the Italian Communist Party into a social democratic party, it
may be that Italy has largely lost the institutional framework which made it important, or
even possible, to distinguish Italian Marxism from other philosophies which are not
specifically Marxist.
FRENCH MARXISM
Marxist philosophy came late to France, despite the close contacts which Marx and
Engels had with French socialists. This was partly because Proudhon’s syndicalist
socialism continued to have a deep and abiding influence, and partly because of the
periods of repression following the failed revolutions of 1848 and 1871. In the 1890s,
Marx’s daughters, Laura and Jenny, and his two French sons-in-law, Paul Lafargue and
Charles Longuet, did a great deal to make his ideas known in France. Lafargue (1842–
1911), the most active of them, propagated a highly simplified economic determinism
which Marx himself was wont to criticize. His main opponent, Jean Jaurès (1859–1914),
countered this with a neo-Kantian ethical socialism in which he hoped to synthesize
Marx’s ideas with various other progressive doctrines. Their debate was largely curtailed
by the intellectual truce which followed the unification of the main socialist groupings in
1905.
The most sophisticated French contributor to pre-war Marxism, Georges Sorel (1847–
1922), was a maverick whose unorthodox Marxism included an unusually vigorous attack
on rationalism, and a corresponding advocacy of revolutionary myth. At odds with most
of his contemporaries, Sorel’s ideas were more influential outside France, especially in

24.7 Page 237

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 199
Italy, where Mussolini claimed them as an inspiration for his fascist movement.
After the First World War, a new generation of young intellectuals gradually
introduced a thriving Marxist culture, within or on the margins of the Communist Party.
Most prominent of them was Henri Lefebvre (1901–91), a prolific and long-lived thinker
who set his mark on sociology as well as on Marxist philosophy. Emerging from the
surrealist movement of the 1920s, he used his energy and erudition to popularize the
early writings of Marx, some of which he translated into French, and to publish several
volumes by or about Hegel, who was just beginning to arouse interest in France.
Enjoying the more intellectually relaxed climate of the Popular Front period, Lefebvre
wrote what eventually became the most successful short exposition of Marxism in
France, Dialectical Materialism (1939). Despite its orthodox-sounding title, it set out a
humanist Marxism fundamentally opposed to that of the Short Course, which appeared at
about the same time.
Lefebvre affirmed the superiority of Hegel’s dialectic over formal logic, based on the
dialectic’s attempt to achieve a synthesis of the concept and its content, and thence a
synthesis of thought and being. What distinguished the Marxist dialectic was that,
whereas Hegel had sought to derive the content from the concept, Marx saw the need to
enable the content to direct the development of the concept. The resulting dialectical
materialism, he thought, transcended both idealism and materialism, and oriented the
dialectic towards a resolution of contradictions in practical activity, or praxis. The
unfolding of dialectical praxis in history would, he believed, lead to the practical
realization of the full potential of human existence in what he called ‘Total Man’.
Recognizing the obstacles to the fulfilment of the dialectic of praxis, Lefebvre
systematized the analysis of alienation, which he argued was a fundamental structure of
human activity, and could be summarized in terms of a three-stage evolution. In the first
(spontaneous) stage, activity generates some form of order in response to needs; in the
second (conscious) stage, the spontaneous order is shaped into rational structures so as to
work more effectively; and in the third (illusory) stage, the rational structures become
fixed and fetishized, beginning to hinder further development, and being misappropriated
and used as an instrument of oppression by one group over another. The revolutionary
overthrow of alienated structures thus appears as a requirement of human self-realization.
It is clear that, by its generality, Lefebvre’s analysis can be applied to the oppressive role
of the state under communism as much as under capitalism, and to the sclerosis of
thought in the Communist Party as much as in the Sorbonne.
In the first years after the Second World War, Lefebvre was lionized by the French
Communist Party (PCF) as one of its most distinguished intellectuals but, unlike its
Italian counterpart, the PCF tended to regard major intellectuals as figures of symbolic
rather than practical importance. With the tightening of the Cold War, he was reproached
for his lack of orthodoxy, and withdrew from philosophy into sociology, which provided
the focus for his subsequent work. In the late 1950s he became an influential figure on
the non-communist left, where his dialectical humanism was widely welcomed as an
open and non-dogmatic basis for social critique. His conception of philosophy also
shifted to a suspicion that any general philosophical assertions would be likely to fall into
mystification. Ontological or cosmological statements should, he thought, be left to poets
and musicians, and Marxist philosophy should concentrate on honing the concepts of

24.8 Page 238

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 200
dialectics as a critical method, to be part of what he termed metaphilosophy. This meant
that praxis, which was action-oriented, should be supplemented by other dimensions,
including a creative function, which he termed poesis, to form a concept of ‘everyday
life’. More productive in sociology than in philosophy, Lefebvre’s humanist and
Hegelian Marxism offered plausible explanations for the uprising of students and workers
in France in May 1968 and proved an attractive conceptual framework for some members
of the radical movements involved.
The chief spokesman for Marxist-Leninist philosophy in the postwar period was Roger
Garaudy (b. 1913), who articulated a Stalinism of strict obedience up to the 20th
Congress of the CPSU in 1956. In its aftermath, he had the task not only of leading the
philosophical denunciation of Stalin but also, implicitly at least, of finding a suitable
replacement philosophy for the French Communist Party. His first step was to propose a
Marxist humanism directed towards the discovery of Total Man, little different in
substance from that of Lefebvre, though political difficulties made it impossible to
acknowledge the debt. His second step was more original, however, in that he sought an
explicit dialogue with other forms of humanism, particularly in the Catholic and
existentialist intellectual movements. The vitalist philosophy of Teilhard de Chardin,
exercising widespread posthumous influence, seemed to offer significant common
ground, though Garaudy stopped short of accepting that evolution would culminate as
Teilhard suggested, in the creation of God. Garaudy turned to Hegel, who was also
attracting the interest of theologians, as a possible basis for a common humanist
philosophy. The alarm his ‘God-building’ caused in communist circles was a material
factor in leading the Party to abandon the notion of an official philosophy in 1966.
Disavowed by the Party for disagreements over the events of 1968, Garaudy underwent a
religious conversion, first to Catholicism and then to Islam.
The most trenchant opponent of the path followed by Garaudy was Louis Althusser
(1918–90), who developed a critique of humanist Marxism, producing in the process an
innovative and influential philo-sophical reworking of Marx, expressed in two studies
published in 1965, For Marx and Reading Capital. A professional philosopher rather than
an activist, he was initially inspired by Mao Tse-tung’s writings on practice and on
contradiction, and was widely followed in French Maoist circles of the 1960s and early
1970s. Althusser began from a reexamination of the history of Marxist philosophy, in
which he argued that there was a radical discontinuity between Marx and his
predecessors, Hegel and Feuerbach. He suggested that Marx had first rejected the idealist
system of Hegel, and then the materialist humanism of Feuerbach, in order to emerge
with a distinctive and scientific theory. He dismissed the view that the theory was a
supersession of Hegel and Feuerbach, which would imply that it conserved important
parts of their philosophy, and argued that Marx had made an epistemological break,
establishing his theory as a science of history, entirely distinct from the ideological
conceptions from which it has emerged. He noted that ideas and concepts tended to
emerge in response to a historical situation and to aggregate into more or less coherent
combinations, each of which formed a problematic. Retaining a particular concept
generally implied accepting the entire problematic to which it belonged, and thus mature
Marxism had to exclude ideas drawn from pre-Marxist problematics. Marx’s own early
writings with their notions of alienation, human self-realization and Hegelian dialectics

24.9 Page 239

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 201
came before the epistemological break and should therefore be considered as belonging
to pre-Marxist and unscientific problematics. Althusser conceded that Marx’s later
writings sometimes contained ideological residues, but generalized his argument to assert
that the concept of the epistemological break could be applied to distinguish what was
scientific (or theoretical, as he preferred to say) from what was ideological in Marx’s
work, or in the work of anyone else. In this way theoretical practice could be clearly
separated from ideological practices.
Althusser next identified the problem that while the mature Marxist theoretical practice
was well developed, Marx had never gone back to reformulate the philosophical
principles which it implied. There was, in other words, no theory of theoretical practice.
In its absence, various ideological approximations were made to serve, most of them
Hegelian in origin. He suggested that these had now become an obstacle to the further
development of Marxism, and set himself the task of undertaking a philosophical reading
of Marx, Engels and Lenin, especially Marx’s major work Capital, attempting to
elucidate a theory of theoretical practice. Since such a theory was not articulated
explicitly, the texts would need to be read ‘symptomatically’, to detect symptoms which
might point to the theory at work in a practical way. If the theory had not been supplied
by Marx, it could certainly not be taken from Hegel or Feuerbach. Althusser
consequently drew from Spinoza’srationalism, Freudian psychoanalysis and Saussurean
structural linguistics to provide usable concepts.
Althusser began with the concept of contradiction. The Hegelian notion of a struggle of
opposites was replaced by the notion of a process of production, in which a raw material
of some kind was transformed into a product by some process of transformation
involving human work, or practice, and an appropriate means of production. In societies,
or social formations, there are four main processes of production, each with many
subsidiary processes: they are the economic, political, ideological and theoretical
practices. These practices are highly interlocking in that each is conditioned by all the
others, a situation which he designated ‘overdetermination’, borrowing from Freud’s
analysis of dream images. Contradictions, or transformations, in one level of practice
might transfer to or condense in another, and if contradictions in several or all practices
came to fuse together, then a general transformation or revolution would be likely to
ensue.
The concept of overdetermination was presented as a more complex, and more
rigorous, basis for the analysis of history than the Hegelian dialectic it replaced, and
contained a different conception of causality. The linear cause-and-effect principle of
classical physics, and the expressive causality of the Hegelian dialectic, were replaced by
a structural causality in which a particular event is not determined by an earlier event or a
more fundamental event, but is overdetermined by a structure of practices to which it
belongs. There is no centre to the structure, and since practices develop unevenly, one of
them is dominant in the structure at a given time, though none is permanently so. Even
economic practice has no permanent domination, though it has the special power of
determining which practice does dominate. This is Althusser’s version of the base-and-
superstructure model of society, reformulated to give greater relative autonomy to the
superstructures, which no longer merely reflect the economic base. Thus, although
economic developments are determinant in the last instance, there is no moment at which

24.10 Page 240

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 202
they abruptly take over, and so ‘the lonely hour of the last instance never comes’.
Althusser’s model was crowned in effect by philosophy (designated as Theory, or the
theory of theoretical practice) which had the role of ensuring the coherence and rigour of
other theories (and their corresponding practices), and therefore appeared as a science of
sciences. Criticized for his theoreticism, he devoted most of his writings after 1968 to
self-criticism in which a series of retreats from ‘high’ Althusserian positions was
accompanied by further conceptual innovations. Three of these may be mentioned as
particularly influential. First, he advanced an alternative conception of philosophy as
class struggle in theory, and as a weapon in the revolution. This suggested that its role
was to ensure the theoretical correctness of political practice and the political correctness
of theory. Second, he redefined the dialectic of history as a process without a subject or a
goal, as opposed to the Hegelian dialectic which was both humanist, in seeing human
existence as the subject of history, and ideological, in seeing history as advancing
purposefully towards some final end. And third, he offered an account of ideology as the
necessary illusion of a lived relationship between individuals and their circumstances. In
this, he argued that most of the apparatuses of a modern state are primarily ideological,
rather than repressive, in that their main function is to elicit the consent of the governed.
People are incorporated into these ideological state apparatuses by the effect, which all
ideology has, of calling on individuals to recognize themselves as subjects, in the sense
both of being persons responsible for themselves and of being subordinated to an
authority. His analysis of ideology has been widely adopted in critical theory and political
philosophy internationally.
Of the philosophers who have continued Althusser’s work, three are particularly
worthy of note. Etienne Balibar developed a critique of the abandonment, in France and
elsewhere, of the concept of the dictatorship of the proletariat, and has applied
Althusserian analysis to issues of nation, race and class. Pierre Macherey developed a
theory of how literature is produced, rather than created, and reveals the contradictions
which ideology serves to conceal. He also advocated an appropriation of Spinozist
conceptions by Marxism in preference to Hegelian ideas. Georges Labica re-examined
Marx’s early writings, criticizing the simplistic schema of his adoption of English
political economy, French socialism and German philosophy, and arguing that he finally
succeeded in escaping from philosophical mystifications only by substantially
abandoning philosophy in favour of a science of history. Labica is also the major French
instigator of academic research into the history of Marxist thought.
Althusser’s ideas remained oppositional on the French left, partly because of his
political disagreements with the French Communist Party, of which he was a member,
and partly because non-communist critics tended to view his enterprise as an attempt to
rescue Stalinist conceptions. His name was largely erased from public discussion after
1980 when he killed his wife, in a bout of his recurrent psychiatric disorder. None the
less, many of his ideas became common currency in Marxist philosophy, and have had
widespread influence particularly in literary and cultural criticism. Paradoxically, his
onslaught against Hegel also had the effect of stimulating renewed interest in Hegelian
studies in France.
Several Marxist philosophers responded to the challenge by carefully re-examining the
concepts which had come through Hegel. Jacques D’Hondt sought to rehabilitate the

25 Pages 241-250

▲back to top

25.1 Page 241

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 203
progressive content of Hegel’s own life and thought. Solange Mercier-Josa argued that it
was productive to look at the original Hegelian versions of Marx’s main concepts so as to
grasp the originality of his reworking of them, and also perhaps to retrieve some useful
Hegelian concepts which Marx neglected to rework. Perhaps the most comprehensive of
the attempts to find a synthesis in the Hegelian style is the work of Lucien Sève. In a
series of studies, culminating in a compendious work, An Introduction to Marxist
Philosophy (1980), Sève sought to systematize the concept of contradiction, suggesting
that the distinction between antagonistic and non-antagonistic forms should not exclude
their mutual interpenetration. He maintained the Hegelian distinction between objective
and subjective dialectics and consequently between real historical development and the
logical ordering of concepts with which to grasp it, while at the same time affirming the
dialectical relationship between them. Sève also argued that Marxist materialism,
understood as a scientific approach to knowledge rather than as a political ideology, was
not specifically atheistic and should be open to learning from what religious thought
expressed in intuitive or imaginative terms.
The breadth and erudition of Marxist philosophy in the 1960s and 1970s made it one of
the dominant currents in French and European intellectual life, with a strong place in the
schools and universities, as well as in political discourse. Towards the end of the
seventies it began to run out of steam, under a combination of pressures which included
the alternative attraction of other schools of thought (feminism, poststructuralist,
psychoanalysis, ecology, spiritualism and postmodernism), as well as shifts in national
politics and the accelerating decline of communism internationally. A variety of
strategies was proposed to rejuvenate Marxism, including the incorporation of Italian
Gramscian and Anglo-Saxon analytical versions of Marxism, but more often including
eclectical borrowings from non-Marxist currents. Perhaps most significant was the
impact of questioning from various quarters as to the need for, or legitimacy of, such a
comprehensive intellectual enterprise (or master-narrative) as Marxism had historically
undertaken. It was a question which struck an undeniable chord with intellectuals who
were increasingly working without reference to a real or imagined Marxist collectivity
(state, party or professional grouping) which could give a communal identity or an
institutional basis to their thought. As a result, Marxist philosophy was in serious disarray
even before the historical events of 1989 plunged it into catastrophe.
CONCLUSION
Since the present study is undertaken in the perspective of ‘continental philosophy’, it
would not be appropriate to conclude without evoking the implied standpoint of the
observer, that is, the philosophy of the English-speaking world, and in particular of the
British Isles. The supposition that continental philosophy is something which happens
elsewhere, on a real or imagined continent of Europe, indicates the extent to which the
dominant currents of English-speaking philosophy have sought to isolate their intellectual
traditions from foreign influences. In practice, English-speaking academic philosophy has
been deeply engaged with continental European philosophers, even though they have
often, like Popper or Wittgenstein, been regarded as honorary English philosophers. The

25.2 Page 242

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 204
strategy of exclusion implied by the term ‘continental’ serves to keep out undesirables, of
which the least desirable has generally been the Marxist tradition. Until recent times, the
exclusion of Marxism from at least academic philosophy has been largely complete, with
the result that it has fallen to other disciplines, particularly literary and cultural studies,
sociology, politics, history, geography and archaeology, to introduce continental Marxist
philosophers to English-speaking intellectuals.
Marxism-Leninism was given some currency through the agency of communist parties,
whose small size tended to exacerbate their dependence on Moscow. But for most of the
period from the 1920s to the 1960s its influence was confined to the trade union
movement. During the 1930s a small number of intellectuals were attracted to
communism, and one of them, Christopher Caudwell, might have founded an indigenous
Marxism in Britain had he not been killed fighting for the Republic in Spain. Later,
Maurice Cornforth (1909–80) was an effective exponent of Marxist-Leninist philosophy,
applying it in polemics against Popperian positivism and linguistic philosophy during the
1960s, and began to formulate a more critical view of Marxism shortly before his death.
During the 1970s, English-speaking communist parties, in rapid decline, divided between
Marxist-Leninists and Eurocommunists, who took Gramsci as their main philosophical
inspiration.
During the 1960s a strong interest in Marxism emerged in the New Left groupings
which were founded by dissident communists and Trotskyists. They drew on the non-
Marxist-Leninist writings which were being published in France and Italy. The American
journal Telos and the English journal New Left Review, and its publishing house, played a
major role in the cultural, political and historical fields, in translating and introducing the
work of Marxists who have been discussed above. From the early 1970s, the journal
Radical Philosophy played a similar role with particular emphasis on philosophical
discussion, by no means all Marxist. The growth of a flourishing English-speaking
Marxist culture was visible from the 1960s with the emergence of literary and cultural
critics like Raymond Williams, Stuart Hall, Terry Eagleton and Fredric Jameson, and
historians such as E.P. Thompson, Christopher Hill, Eric Hobsbawm and Perry
Anderson, among others. Philosophy proved more resistant to Marxist influence, though
it is visible in the philosophy of science, particularly in the work of Roy Bhaskar, whose
theory of scientific realism was linked to a project of general human emancipation. More
ambitious and influential has been the work of Jon Elster and G.A.Cohen, who have
attempted to reformulate the main principles of Marxism in terms of analytical
philosophy. The confrontation of Marx with Popper, Keynes and Austin produces
insights which are refreshing within the analytical tradition and challenging to Hegelian
dialectics. The reconciliation is inevitably incomplete, however, and involves rejecting
much of Marx’s socialism and historical materialism.
English-speaking Marxist theory has developed in relative dissociation from powerful
Marxist political movements. It has keenly observed such movements abroad, but their
domestic counterparts have been either far left groups with marginal influence or
mainstream parties with little commitment to particular doctrines. Its academic
detachment has to some extent insulated it from the debacle of communism in 1989. That
year did not bring Marxist philosophy to an end, but it does provide a convenient point at
which to end the narrative of its history. Though it is always rash to extend history so far

25.3 Page 243

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 205
towards the present that it cannot be seen at any historical distance, 1989 is mainly
significant in that the collapse of communism, symbolized by the breaching of the Berlin
Wall, was a turning point in international history heavy with consequences for Marxist
philosophy. While some English-speaking writers have continued to feel at ease in a
broadly Marxist moral and philosophical framework, the political fall-out of 1989 has
impelled others to take a more sympathetic view of other alternatives. This latter
tendency is also encouraged by the increasingly chill winds blowing from the continent
on unreconstructed Marxism.
Marxist philosophy has generally been distinguished by its close relationship to its
social context, and in particular to the institutional forms through which its practical and
political orientation is mediated. In its most institutional form, Marxism-Leninism, it
became inextricably tied to the Soviet state and to the network of communist parties and
client states which pledged their allegiance to it, including mutatis mutandis the Chinese
variant. To a large extent, it has collapsed with the states and parties which sustained it,
and, in Europe at least, writings in this tradition are now unreadable, except as historical
docu-ments, or as liturgy for the fragmented groups of old believers who continue to keep
the faith. The question which remains posed is how far this erasure will affect other
Marxist traditions which have been outlined in the present chapter.
The answer can as yet be only speculative, but it is probable that the future of Marxism
as an identifiable philosophy will depend on the persistence or emergence of states,
groupings or movements which can provide a plausible institutional basis for the
imperative to change the world as well as interpreting it. It is unlikely for the foreseeable
future that any individual state will provide such a basis, and the calamities which have
overtaken those which did so in the past will more probably serve as a counter-example.
Similarly the health and influence of those political parties which still claim the name
communist or Marxist suggests that they are scarcely better placed. If the link between
theory and practice is taken seriously, then the failure of practice must call into question
the validity of the theory. It is only a partial defence to argue that the previous practical
implementation of the theory was deficient, since that accepts a substantive severance of
the link.
If the chief originality of Marxism is that it claimed to have the means to put its theory
into practice, then it has largely lost that originality. An attenuated commitment to change
would effectively place Marxism in the same position as any of a number of philosophies
which express moral or social imperatives with general hortatory effect. Viewed in this
light, it becomes less important to set precise limits on what may be called Marxism. For
most of its history, Marxist philosophy has had an active and influential place as a strand
in many currents of thought. Some, like the Frankfurt school, took it as a starting point;
some, like the French existentialists, attempted to marry it with another tradition; and
some, like the structuralists, accepted it as one element feeding into their theory. There is
no reason to suppose that the process of intellectual cross-fertilization is likely to come
abruptly to an end.
The loss of a distinct and coherent tradition of Marxist philosophy would in some
respects liberate its proponents from their obligations to a collectivity, and perhaps also
from the authority of a canon. In other respects, however, it would remove a point of
reference and an identity, which has had the unusual role of forming common links

25.4 Page 244

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 206
between the different cultural and intellectual environments of Europe whether western,
central or eastern, and of opening them out to a wider world outside. The resistance to
overarching world-views or master narratives is no doubt in part a response to the
constricting effects of international Marxism especially in its dogmatic forms. In a world
where postmodernism is setting the intellectual and cultural agenda, there may be a role
for a humanist post-Marxism which retained its varieties and its international dimensions
without proclaiming the necessity or authority to synthesize them. But if Benjamin’s
angel of history is still being driven by the storm from paradise, it is unlikely to linger
over the debris that it leaves behind, and it remains to be seen how much of Marxist
philosophy will survive from the wreckage.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The following is a list of some of the relevant texts published in English. It is divided into
primary texts and critical texts, though in the nature of the subject, the distinction
between the two is in some respects arbitrary.
Primary texts
7.1 Althusser, L. Essays in Ideology, London: Verso, 1984.
7.2 Althusser, L. Essays in Self-criticism, London: New Left Books, 1976.
7.3 Althusser, L. For Marx, London: Verso, 1990.
7.4 Althusser, L. Reading Capital, London: New Left Books, 1970.
7.5 Balibar, E. and Wallerstein, I. Race, Nation, Class: Ambiguous Identities, London:
Verso, 1991.
7.6 Benjamin, W. Charles Baudelaire, a Lyric Poet in the Era of High Capitalism,
London: New Left Books, 1972.
7.7 Benjamin, W. Illuminations, London: Jonathan Cape, 1970.
7.8 Bhaskar, R. Dialectic, London: Verso, 1992.
7.9 Bhaskar, R. Scientific Realism and Human Emancipation, London: Verso, 1986.
7.10 Bloch, E. The Principle of Hope, 3 vols, Oxford: Blackwell, 1986.
7.11 Colletti, L. From Rousseau to Lenin, London: New Left Books, 1972.
7.12 Colletti, L. Marxism and Hegel, London: New Left Books, 1973.
7.13 Cornforth, M. Communism and Philosophy, London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1980.
7.14 Cornforth, M. The Open Philosophy and the Open Society, London: Lawrence &
Wishart, 1968.
7.15 Della Volpe, G. Critique of Taste, London: New Left Books, 1978.
7.16 Della Volpe, G. Rousseau and Marx and Other Writings, London: Lawrence &
Wishart, 1978.
7.17 Engels, F. Anti-Dühring, London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1975.
7.18 Engels, F. Dialectics of Nature, Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1972.
7.19 Garaudy, R. Marxism in the Twentieth Century, London, 1970.
7.20 Garaudy, R. The Turning Point of Socialism, London, 1970.
7.21 Goldmann, L. The Hidden God, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1964.

25.5 Page 245

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 207
7.22 Goldmann, L. The Human Sciences and Philosophy, London: Jonathan Cape, 1969.
7.23 Gramsci, A. Letters from Prison, ed. L.Lawner, New York: Harper & Row, 1973.
7.24 Gramsci, A. Selections from his Cultural Writings, ed. D.Forgacs and G. Nowell-
Smith, London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1985.
7.25 Gramsci, A. Selections from the Prison Notebooks, ed. Quintin Hoare and
G.Nowell-Smith, London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1971.
7.26 Ilyenkov, E.V. Dialectical Logic: Essays in its History and Theory, Moscow:
Progress Publishers, 1977.
7.27 Konstantinov, F.V. (ed.) The Fundamentals of Marxist-Leninist Philosophy,
Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1974.
7.28 Korsch, K. Marxism and Philosophy, London: New Left Books, 1970.
7.29 Labriola, A. Essays on the Materialist Conception of History, Chicago: Charles
H.Kerr, 1908.
7.30 Lenin, V.I. Collected Works, London: Lawrence & Wishart; Moscow, Progress
Publishers, 1972. Volume 18 contains Materialism and Empiriocriticism, and volume
38 contains his Philosophical Notebooks.
7.31 Lefebvre, H. Critique of Everyday Life, London: Verso, 1991.
7.32 Lefebvre, J. Dialectical Materialism, London: Jonathan Cape, 1968,
7.33 Lukács, G. The Destruction of Reason, London: Merlin, 1980.
7.34 Lukács, G. History and Class Consciousness, London: Merlin, 1971.
7.35 Lukács, G. The Ontology of Social Being, 3 vols, London: Merlin, 1978–80.
7.36 Macherey, P. A Theory of Literary Production, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1978.
7.37 Mao Tse-tung, Four Essays on Philosophy, Peking: Foreign Languages Press, 1966.
7.38 Mao Tse-tung, Selected Works, vols 1–4, Peking: Foreign Languages Press, 1967–9.
7.39 Marx, K. Selected Writings, ed. D.McLellan, Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1977.
7.40 Marx, K. and Engels, F. Basic Writings on Politics and Philosophy, ed. by L.
S.Feuer, London: Fontana, 1969.
7.41 Marx, K., and Engels, F. Collected Works, London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1975–.
About two-thirds of the planned fifty volumes have now appeared.
7.42 Oizerman, T.I. The Making of the Marxist Philosophy, Moscow: Progress
Publishers, 1981.
7.43 Plekhanov, G.V. Selected Philosophical Works, 5 vols, London: Lawrence &
Wishart; Moscow, Progress Publishers, 1974. Volume 1 contains The Development of
the Monist View of History.
7.44 Roemer, J. (ed.) Analytical Marxism, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1986.
7.45 Timpanaro, S. On Materialism, London: New Left Books, 1975.
Critical texts
7.46 Acton, H.B. The Illusion of the Epoch, London: Cohen & West, 1955.
7.47 Anderson, P. Considerations on Western Marxism, London: New Left Books, 1976.
7.48 Anderson, P. Arguments within English Marxism, London: Verso, 1980.

25.6 Page 246

▲back to top
Philosophies of marxism 208
7.49 Avinieri, S. Varieties of Marxism, The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1977.
7.50 Benton, T. The Rise and Fall of Structural Marxism, London: Macmillan, 1984.
7.51 Berki, R.N. The Genesis of Marxism, London: Dent, 1988.
7.52 Berlin, I. Karl Marx, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1978.
7.53 Boggs, C. Gramsci’s Marxism, London: Pluto Press, 1976.
7.54 Borkenau, F. European Communism, London: Faber, 1953.
7.55 Borkenau, F. World Communism,University of Michigan Press, 1962.
7.56 Bottomore, T. (ed.) A Dictionary of Marxist Thought, London: Blackwell, 1983.
7.57 Callinicos, A. Althusser’s Marxism, London: Pluto Press, 1976.
7.58 Callinicos, A. Marxism and Philosophy, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1983.
7.59 Carver, T. Marx and Engels, London: Wheatsheaf Books, 1983.
7.60 Caute, D. Communism and the French Intellectuals, London: Macmillan, 1964.
7.61 Caute, D. The Fellow-travellers, London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1973.
7.62 De George, R.T. Patterns of Soviet Thought, Ann Arbor, 1966.
7.63 De George, R.T. The New Marxism, New York, 1968.
7.64 Derfler, L. Paul Lafargue and the Founding of French Marxism, Cambridge, Mass.:
Harvard University Press, 1991.
7.65 Deutscher, I. Stalin: A Political Biography, Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1966.
7.66 Deutscher, I. Marxism in Our Time, London: Jonathan Cape, 1972.
7.67 Eagleton, T. Walter Benjamin, or Towards a Revolutionary Criticism, London:
Verso, 1981.
7.68 Elliott, G. Althusser, the Detour of Theory, London: Verso, 1987.
7.69 Evans, M. Lucien Goldmann, Brighton: Harvester Press, 1981.
7.70 Fiori, G. Antonio Gramsci: Life of a Revolutionary, London: New Left Books, 1970.
7.71 German, R.A. (ed.) A Biographical Dictionary of Neo-Marxism, Westport:
Greenwood Press, 1985.
7.72 Hirsh, A. The French New Left, Boston: South End Press, 1981.
7.73 Holub, R. Antonio Gramsci: Beyond Marxism and Postmodernism, London:
Routledge, 1992.
7.74 Hudson, W. The Marxist Philosophy of Ernst Bloch, London: Macmillan, 1982.
7.75 Hunt, I. Analytical and Dialectical Marxism, London: Avebury, 1993.
7.76 Hyppolite, J. Studies on Marx and Hegel, New York, 1969.
7.77 Jacoby, R. Dialectic of Defeat: The Contours of Western Marxism, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1981.
7.78 Jameson, F. Marxism and Form, Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1971.
7.79 Judt, T. Marxism and the French Left, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.
7.80 Kelly, M. Modern French Marxism, Oxford: Blackwell, 1982.
7.81 Kolakowski, L. Main Currents of Marxism, 3 vols, Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1978.
7.82 Labedz, L. Revisionism: Essays on the History of Marxist Ideas, London and New
York, 1961.
7.83 Leonhard, W. The Three Faces of Marxism, New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston,
1974.
7.84 Lichtheim, G. Marxism in Modern France, London and New York: Columbia
University Press, 1966.

25.7 Page 247

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 209
7.85 Lichtheim, G. Marxism, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 3rd impression, 1967.
7.86 Lichtheim, G. Lukács, London: Fontana, 1970.
7.87 Lukes, S. Marxism and Morality, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1985.
7.88 MacIntyre, S. A Proletarian Science: Marxism in Britain 1917–1933, London:
Lawrence & Wishart, 1986.
7.89 Matthews, B. (ed.) Marx 100 Years on, London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1983.
7.90 Merquior, J.G. Western Marxism, London: Paladin, 1986.
7.91 Mészáros, I. Lukács’ Concept of Dialectic, London: Merlin, 1972.
7.92 Mouffe, C. (ed.) Gramsci and Marxist Theory, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul,
1979.
7.93 Poster, M. Existential Marxism in Postwar France, Princeton: Princeton University
Press, 1975.
7.94 Rossi-Landi. F. Marxism and Ideology, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1990.
7.95 Scanlan, J.P. Marxism in the USSR, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1985.
7.96 Schram, S.R. Mao Tse-tung, Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1966.
7.97 Schram, S.R. The Political Thought of Mao Tse-tung, Harmondsworth: Penguin
Books, 1969.
7.98 Sowell, T. Marxism, Philosophy and Economics, London, George Allen & Unwin,
1985.
7.99 Tismaneaunu, V. The Crisis of Marxist Ideology in Eastern Europe, London: Croom
Helm, 1988.
7.100 Wetter, G. Dialectical Materialism, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1958.

25.8 Page 248

▲back to top
CHAPTER 8
Critical theory
Horkheimer, Adorno, Habermas
David Rasmussen
HEGEL, MARX AND THE IDEA OF A CRITICAL THEORY
Critical theory1 is a metaphor for a certain kind of theoretical orientation which owes its
origin to Hegel and Marx, its systematization to Horkheimer and his associates at the
Institute for Social Research in Frankfurt, and its development to successors, particularly
to the group led by Jürgen Habermas, who have sustained it under various redefinitions to
the present day. As a term, critical theory is both general and specific. In general it refers
to that critical element in German philosophy which began with Hegel’s critique of Kant.
More specifically it is associated with a certain orientation towards philosophy which
found its twentieth-century expression in Frankfurt.
What is critical theory? The term bears the stamp of the nascent optimism of the
nineteenth century; a critical theory can change society. Critical theory is a tool of reason
which, when properly located in a historical group, can transform the world.
‘Philosophers have always interpreted the world, the point is to change it.’ So states
Marx’s famous eleventh thesis on Feuerbach. Marx got this idea from Hegel who, in his
Phenomenology of Spirit,2 developed the concept of the moving subject which, through
the process of self-reflection, comes to know itself at ever higher levels of consciousness.
Hegel was able to combine a philosophy of action with a philosophy of reflection in such
a manner that activity or action was a necessary moment in the process of reflection. This
gave rise to one of the most significant discourses in German philosophy, that of the
proper relationship between theory and practice. Human practical activity, praxis in the
sense that classical Greek philosophy had defined it, could transform theory. There are
two famous instances where Hegel attempted to demonstrate the interrelationship of
thought and action in his Phenomenology of Spirit, namely, the master/ slave dialectic
and the struggle between virtue and the way of the world. In the former example, which
attempts to demonstrate the proposition, ‘Self-Consciousness exists in and for itself
when, and by the fact that, it so exists for another: that is, it exists only in being
acknowledged,’3 the slave transforms his or her identity by moulding and shaping the
world and thus becomes something other than a slave. In the latter example, the modern
way of the world (essentially Adam Smith’s concept of the political economy of civil
society) triumphs over the ancient classical concept of virtue as a higher form of human
self-knowledge oriented toward freedom. Historical development, as the
institutionalization of human action, became an element in human rationality. Critical
theory derives its basic insight from the idea that thought can transform itself through a

25.9 Page 249

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 211
process of self-reflection in history.
Marx, early on in his development in a text that has come down to us under the title On
the Jewish Question,4 argued from Hegel’s critical insight into the context of modern
society. Having already done an analysis a few months before of Hegel’s Philosophy of
Right, he turned his attention to the development of the modern state by reflecting on
Bruno Bauer’s essay by the same name. Here, he would come to the conclusion that the
course of human freedom culminating in the modern state (which Hegel had so brilliantly
documented as leading from slavery to emancipation—the so-called course of human
reason) was no emancipation at all. Indeed, the promised liberation of modern society
from the shackles of the Middle Ages had not occurred. Hence, the task of social
emancipation which could be carried on by critical reflection would lead the very agents
of that reflection to a further task, namely, the transformation of society through
revolution. Consequently, the promise of critical theory would be radical social
transformation. The ancient assumption that the purpose of reflection was for knowledge
itself, allied with the further assumption that pure contemplation was the proper end of
the human subject, was replaced by another end of reflection also to be derived from
classical thought, but with its own peculiarly modern twist; theory when allied with
praxis has a proper political end, namely, social transformation.
However, for Marx this was not enough. Two factors remained. First, whence was such
knowledge to be derived? Second, what would be the nature of such knowledge?
Between the autumn of 1843 and the summer of 1844, Marx would provide answers to
both questions. The answers came in the form of a class theory in which the newly
emerging ‘proletariat’ were to play the central role. For Marx, they became the concrete
subject of history with the result that hopes for emancipation would be anchored in a
critical theory, which would in turn be associated with the activity of a particular class.
Again, Hegel had provided the groundwork for this understanding by associating the
basic interest in civil society in his philosophy of law with the interest of a particular
Stände. Of the three orders of society—agricultural, business and civil service—it was
only the latter which could represent the universal interests of humankind. With Marx,
that latter task was transferred from the civil servants, who could no longer be trusted, to
the proletariat, who he somewhat confidently asserted would bring about the social
revolution necessary to overcome the contradictions with modern political society.
With regard to the second question, it was again Hegel, the philosopher of modernity
par excellence, who taught Marx to look not to intuition per se but to the manifestation of
reason in practical institutional form for an appropriate understanding of the world. Hegel
had been the first philosopher both to understand and to use the work of the political
economists in his work. Marx, first in a review of James Mill’s Elements of Political
Economy and later in a much more elaborate fashion, would work out a thesis about the
dynamics of history leading him to assert that economic activity had a certain priority in
the development of history.
This thesis would lead Marx to assert shortly thereafter, in The German Ideology,5 that
for the first time real history could begin. The very assumption behind a book which had
the audacity to put the term ‘ideology’ into the title was that thought alone was
ideological. There was a higher truth which Marx, through his methodology, would be
able to attain, namely the ‘productive’ activity of humankind. Human history would then

25.10 Page 250

▲back to top
Critical theory 212
be simultaneous with human production. The term for this new approach to the world of
reflection and action would be ‘historical materialism’ and it would attack other more
‘idealistic’ modes of thinking as ‘ideological’. Hence, a critical theory would be able to
unearth the false presumptions that had heretofore held humanity in their sway. Later, in
Capital, Marx would label the kind of thinking which he had characterized as ‘ideology’
in The German Ideology as ‘fetishism’. He did so in the famous last section of the first
chaper of volume 1, entitled ‘The fetishism of commodities and the secret thereof.
Marx’s choice and use of metaphor is interesting, if not compelling. He uses ‘ideology’,
‘fetishism’ and ‘secret’ as if there was some ominous conspiracy against humankind
which a certain kind of critical and theoretical orientation could unmask. The term
‘fetishism’ had a religious origin designating a fundamental confusion regarding
perceptual orientations to the world. The very assumption that a certain theoretical
orientation could unleash the ‘secret’ behind ideology as a kind of ‘fetishism’ represented
a kind of confidence that would not only shape the historical development of critical
theory in the future, but also unearth its problematic nature.
At the risk of oversimplification, one might state that there are two basic strains in the
history of German philosophy. One strain argues that thought or reason is constitutive,
the other that it is transformative. The former orientation can be traced to the debate
initiated by Kant over the limits of human reason, while the latter can be traced to
Hegel’s philosophy of history, which attempted to locate philosophical reflection in a
discourse about the history of human freedom.
Critical theory could be said to ally itself with this latter theme, even though the
constitutive element would play an ever more significant role. In its classical, Hegelian-
Marxist, context, critical theory rests on the nascent Enlightenment assumption that
reflection is emancipatory. But what is the epistemological ground for this claim? In
other words, how is thought constitutive for action? Which form of action is proper,
appropriate or correct? In the early writings, Marx attempted to ground the
epistemological claims of transformative action in the concept of Gattungswesen, i.e.,
species being. This concept, taken directly from Ludwig Feuerbach, who in turn had
constructed it from both Hegel and Aristotle, affirms that in contrast to the radical
individuation of the subject in modern thought, the aim or purpose of a human being is to
be determined through intersubjective social action. In Hegelian terms, one constitutes
valid self-knowledge through social interaction defined as human labour. According to
Marx, the problem with the modern productive process is that it fails to allow the worker
to constitute him-or herself as a species being, i.e., as a person who can function for
another human being. Hence, the labour process reduces him or her to an animal, as
opposed to a human, level making him or her autonomous, competitive and inhuman—
co-operating with the productive process and not with other human beings. The point of
revolution would be to bring the human being to his or her full and proper capacities as a
being for whom the species would be the end, object and aim.
There were problems with this view. To be sure, Marx represents the culmination of a
certain kind of political theory that began with Hobbes, and which was in turn critical of
original anthropological assumptions that saw the human being as an autonomous agent
emerging from a state of nature. However, in a certain sense, the concept of species-being
was as metaphysical as the Hobbesian notion of the human being in a state of nature, a

26 Pages 251-260

▲back to top

26.1 Page 251

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 213
view which was so aptly and appropriately criticized by Rousseau. It is my view that
Marx was aware of the essentially epistemological problem that lay at the foundation of
his own thought. Does one ground a theory of emancipation on certain anthropological
assumptions regarding the nature of the species, assumptions which were as metaphysical
as those the theory was attempting to criticize? Marx attempted to overcome this
dilemma by providing historical evidence. In this context, his later work, the volumes of
Capital, represent a massive attempt to give an account of human agency which was both
historical and scientific. Hence, the quest for a valid constitutive ground for critical
theory began with Marx himself. Marx as a political economist would bring massive
historical research to bear on the claim that capitalism is merely a phase in human
development and not the be-all and end-all of history. Hence, as a true Hegelian, he
would assert that like any economic system it bore the seeds of its own destruction. As a
consequence, the metaphysical claims present in the notion of species-being would re-
emerge as a claim about the implicit but incomplete socialization present in capitalism,
which, when rationalized, would transform the latter into socialism. As is well known,
Marx even went beyond that to attempt to develop, on the basis of his historical
investigations, a scientific, predictive formula announcing the end of capitalism on the
basis of the ‘falling rate of profit’. The formula assumed that as capital advanced it would
be able to generate less and less profit and so would lose its own incentive. Hence, the
force of capitalism, unleashed, would lead to its own imminent self-destruction. The
victor, of course, would be socialism, which would emerge from the fray, new-born and
pure, the ultimate rationalization of the irrationalism implicit in capitalism. As the family
would inevitably give way to the force of civil society in Hegel’s philosophy of law, so
capitalism would break down and re-emerge as socialism.
In 1844 the young Marx had accused his one acknowledged theoretical mentor, Hegel,
of harbouring a certain ‘latent positivism’.6 There are those who would accuse the older
Marx of having done the same. If capitalism is to fall of its own weight, what is the link
between thought and revolutionary action that so inspired the younger Marx? Indeed,
what role would the proletariat, the heretofore messianic class of underlings, play in the
transformation of society? And what of critical theory? It too would be transformed into
just one more scientific, predictive positivistic model. In Marx’s favour, this desire to
secure the claims of a critical theory on the firm foundation of positivistic science was
always in tension with the more critical claims of exhaustive historical analysis. But it
was Marx himself who bequeathed to the late nineteenth century, and subsequently by
implication to the twentieth century, the ambiguities of a critical theory. One could
imagine the great social thinkers of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries coming
together to pose a single question: upon what can we ground a critical theory? Would it
be the proletariat now transformed into the working class? economic scientific analysis?
the critical reflection of a specific historically chosen agent (the vanguard)? informed
individual praxis? Perhaps critical theory would produce a ‘dialectic of enlightenment’ so
cunning that its very inauguration would produce its own destruction as certain later heirs
would predict. Certainly, the late nineteenth and the early twentieth centuries saw the
concretization of a particular form of Marxism in a political society, not merely in the
former USSR but also in the various workers’ movements in Europe and elsewhere, as
well as in the founding of the International, which would raise these questions. A kind of

26.2 Page 252

▲back to top
Critical theory 214
critical theory found its apologists from Engels to Lenin, from Bernstein to Luxemburg,
from Kautsky to Plekhanov. Yet the systematization of critical theory as a model of
reflection owes its life in the twentieth century to a group of academics who, originally
inspired by the German workers’ movement, attempted to give to critical theory a life in
the German university.
FROM GRÜNBURG TO HORKHEIMER: THE FOUNDATION OF
CRITICAL THEORY
Although the term ‘critical theory’ in the twentieth century owes its definition primarily
to an essay written in 1937 by Max Horkheimer,7 the institute which became associated
with this term was founded almost two decades earlier. Certainly one of the more
interesting experiments in the history of German institutional thought began when Felix
Weil, the son of a German exporter of grains from Argentina, convinced his father,
Hermann, to provide an endowment which would enable a yearly income of DM 120,000
to establish, in the year 1922, an Institute for Social Research in affiliation with the
University of Frankfurt. Weil, inspired by the workers’ movement, and having written a
thesis on socialism, wanted an institute which could deal directly with the problems of
Marxism on a par equal to other established disciplines in the University. The first
candidate for director, Kurt Albert Gerlach, who planned a series of inaugural lectures on
socialism, anarchism and Marxism, died of diabetes before he could begin. His
replacement, Karl Grünberg, a professor of law and political science from the University
of Vienna, an avowed Marxist, who had begun in the year of 1909 an Archive for the
History of Socialism and the Worker’s Movement, was present at the official creation of
the Institute on 3 February 1922. In his opening address, he indicated that Marxism
would be the guiding principle of the Institute. And so it was for a decade. To be sure, it
was the kind of Marxism that was still inspired by the nineteenth century, by the idea of
the proletariat, by the workers’ movement, by the example of the Soviet Union and the
Marx-Engels Institute in Moscow, by the conception of Marxism as a kind of science
which could penetrate heretofore unknown truths which had been obscured by so-called
‘bourgeois’ thought. Indeed, mocking Frankfurt students celebrated its orthodoxy by
referring to it as ‘Café Marx’.
Certainly, Marxism need not be vulgar to be orthodox. Academic problems which were
standard fare for a now more or less established theoretical tradition were commonplace.
Principal among them was the study of the workers’ movement. Indeed, if Marxian class
theory was correct, the proletariat were to bear the distinctive role of being those who
were able to interpret history and bring about the transformation that such insight would
sustain. Praxis would then be associated solely with their activity. From an
epistemological point of view, the problem of the relation of theory to praxis would be
revealed. As Lukács would later think, there would be a certain transparent identity
between Marxian social theory and the activity of the working class. Hence, academic
study of the working class would be the most appropriate, indeed, the most proper,
subject of study for an institute which conceived itself in Marxist terms.
For the Institute for Social Research at that time, Marxism was conceived by analogy

26.3 Page 253

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 215
to science. Hence, the original works of the Institute were associated with capitalist
accumulation and economic planning, studies of the economy in China, agricultural
relations in France, imperialism and, along with this, through close collaboration with the
Soviet Union, the establishment of a collection of the unpublished works of Marx and
Engels. However, it wasn’t until the leadership passed from Grünberg to the more able
hands of one of the young assistants at the institute, Max Horkheimer, in 1931, that the
Institute was to make its mark through both productivity and scholarship. Although
Horkheimer was never the believing Marxist Grünberg had been, certain events in
Germany and the world would shape the Institute, distancing it from Marxian orthodoxy.
The rise of fascism and the splintering of the workers’ movement as well as the
Stalinization of Russia would force the Institute to stray from the conventional Marxist
wisdom about both theory and science as well as shake its confidence in the workers’
movement.
During the 1930s, the roster of the institute would include Theodor Adorno, Leo
Lowenthal, Erich Fromm, Fredrich Pollach, Herbert Marcuse, Walter Benjamin
(indirectly though, since he never became a fully-fledged member) and others. Although
each figure would eventually be known for independent work, and although certain
members would break with the general orientation of the Institute, in retrospect what is
somewhat amazing about this illustrious group of scholars was its concern for sharing a
common theoretical programme under a distinctive directorship. Indeed, the two most
powerful theoretical minds, Adorno (1903–69) and Horkheimer (1895–1973), continued
to collaborate for their entire lifetimes. Also, it was during this period that the distinctive
perspective with which this group came to be identified began to be developed. Modern
critical theory can be dated from this period.
The problematic which sparked a critical theory of the modern form was the demise of
the working class as an organ of appropriate revolutionary knowledge and action coupled
with the rise of fascism and the emergence of Stalinization. Taken together, these events
would de-couple the link between theory and revolutionary practice centred in the
proletariat which had become commonplace in Marxian theory. What became apparent to
Horkheimer and others at the Institute was that once this link was broken, essentially the
link with a certain form of ideology, it would be necessary to forge a unique theoretical
perspective in the context of modern thought in general and German thought in particular.
It would not be enough either comfortably to study the workers’ movement or to define
Marxist science. The road upon which the Institute embarked would have to bear its own
distinctive stamp and character. In brief, not only would this de-coupling give critical
theory its peculiar dynamic for the 1930s but, as the torch was passed in the 1960s to a
younger generation, this same thrust would give it definition. Hence, while Grünberg’s
Archive for the History of Socialism and the Workers’ Movement would define the
Institute in more traditional Marxian terms, the chief organ of the Institute under
Horkheimer, The Journal for Social Research, would record a different purpose, namely
the movement away from Marxian materialism. Writing in 1968 Jürgen Habermas would
put it this way:
Since the years after World War II the idea of the growing wretchedness of the
workers, out of which Marx saw rebellion and revolution emerging as a

26.4 Page 254

▲back to top
Critical theory 216
transitional step to the reign of freedom, had for long periods become abstract
and illusory, and at least as out of date as the ideologies despised by the young.
The living conditions of laborers and employees at the time of The Communist
Manifesto were the outcome of open oppression. Today they are instead motives
for trade union organization and for discussion between dominant economic and
political groups. The revolutionary thrust of the proletariat has long since
become realistic action within the framework of society. In the minds of men at
least, the proletariat has been integrated into society.
(Critical Theory [8.104], vi)
Horkheimer’s 1937 essay, ‘Traditional and Critical Theory’, which attempted to
systematically define critical theory, does not begin by underlining an association with the
Marxist heritage which still distinguished the Institute and journal with which it was
associated. Rather the essay begins by trying to answer the more general question regard-
ing theory per se, ‘What is theory?’ (ibid., p. 188). In the traditional sense, theory is a
kind of generalization based upon experience. From Descartes to Husserl theory has been
so defined, argues Horkheimer. As such, however, theory traditionally defined has a
peculiar kind of prejudice which favours the natural sciences. Horkheimer, reflecting the
great Diltheyian distinction between Geisteswissenschaften (social sciences) and
Naturwissenschaften (natural sciences) makes the appropriate criticism. Social science
imitates natural science in its self-definition as theory. Put simply, the study of society
must conform to the facts. But Horkheimer would argue that it is not quite so simple.
Experience is said to conform to generalizations. The generalizations tend to conform to
certain ideas present in the minds of the researchers. The danger is apparent: so defined,
theory conforms to the ideas in the mind of the researcher and not to experience itself.
The word for this phenomenon, derived from the development of the Marxist theoretical
tradition following Lukács’s famous characterization in 1934, is ‘reification’. Horkheimer
doesn’t hesitate to use it. Regarding the development of theory he states, ‘But the
conception of theory was absolutized, as though it were grounded in the inner nature of
knowledge as such, or justified in some other ahistorical way, and thus it became a reified
ideological category’ (ibid., p. 194). Although various theoretical approaches would come
close to breaking out of the ideological constraints which restricted them, theoretical
approaches such as positivism, pragmatism, neo-Kantianism and phenomenology,
Horkheimer would argue that they failed. Hence, all would be subject to the logico-
mathematical prejudice which separates theoretical activity from actual life. The
appropriate response to this dilemma is the development of a critical theory. ‘In fact,
however, the self-knowledge of present-day man is not a mathematical knowledge of
nature which claims to be the eternal logos, but a critical theory of society as it is, a
theory dominated at every turn by a concern for reasonable conditions of life’ (ibid., p.
199). Of course, the construction of a critical theory won’t be easy. Interestingly enough,
Horkheimer defines the problem epistemologically. ‘What is needed is a radical
reconsideration not of the scientist alone, but of the knowing individual as such’ (ibid.).
Horkheimer’s decision to take critical theory in the direction of epistemology was not
without significance. Critical theory, which had heretofore depended upon the Marxist
tradition for its legitimation, would have to define itself by ever distancing itself from that

26.5 Page 255

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 217
tradition. Indeed, one of the peculiar ironies resulting from this particular turn is that the
very tradition out of which critical theory comes, namely Marxism, would itself fall
under the distinction between traditional and critical theory. Ultimately, in many ways the
Marxist tradition was as traditional as all the other traditions. But, of course, the 1937
essay fails to recognize this. Indeed, this dilemma of recognition would play itself out in
the post-1937 period. This is the very irony of the systematization of critical theory.
Equally, this epistemological turn would change permanently the distinction and
approach of critical theory. As I suggested earlier, critical theory found its foundation in
the transformative tradition in German thought as inspired by Hegel and Marx. Now,
having embarked upon an epistemological route, it would find it necessary to draw upon
the constitutive dimension of German thought. If one could not ground critical theory in
Marxian orthodoxy, certainly the assumption behind the 1937 essay, it would be
necessary to find the constitutive point of departure for critical theory in an analysis of
knowledge as such. Unfortunately, Horkheimer was unprepared to follow his own unique
insight. Instead, the constitutive elements of knowledge to which he refers are taken in a
more or less unexamined form from the Marxian heritage. The distinction between
individual and society, the concept of society as bourgeois, the idea that knowledge
centres in production, the critique of the so-called liberal individual as autonomous, the
primacy of the concept of history over logos—these so-called elements which are
constitutive of a critical theory were part of the Marxist heritage.
Taken as a whole, ‘Tradition and Critical Theory’ is strongly influenced by the
Hegelian-Marxist idea that the individual is alienated from society, that liberal thought
obscures this alienation, and that the task of critical theory must be to overcome this
alienation. Horkheimer put it this way,
The separation between the individual and society in virtue of which the
individual accepts as natural the limits prescribed for his activity is relativized
in Critical Theory. The latter considers the overall framework which is
conditioned by the blind interaction of individual activities (that is, the existent
division of labour and class distinctions) to be a function which originates in
human action and therefore is a possible object of painful decision and rational
determination of goals.
(ibid., p. 207)
Horkheimer is vehement in his critique of the kind of thought that characterizes so-called
‘bourgeois’ individualism. For him, ‘bourgeois thought’ harbours a belief in an individual
who is ‘autonomous’ believing that it, the autonomous ego, is the ground of reality.
Horkheimer counters this view with another, reminiscent of the early Marx. ‘Critical
thinking is the function neither of the isolated individual nor a sum total of individuals.
Its subject is rather a definite individual in his real relation to other individuals and
groups, in his conflict with a particular class, and, finally, in the resultant web of
relationships with the social totality and with nature’ (ibid., pp. 201–11).
Of course, this view is dangerously close to traditional Marxian class theory and
Horkheimer knows it. After all, who is this ‘definite individual’ whose ‘real relation’ is to
other individuals? Traditional Marxist theory answered, the proletariat. Horkheimer is

26.6 Page 256

▲back to top
Critical theory 218
suspicious. ‘But it must be added that even the situation of the proleteriat is, in this
society, no guarantee of correct knowledge’ (ibid., p. 213). Horkheimer is hard pressed to
find the appropriate replacement of the proletariat without falling back into what he
called ‘bourgeois individualism’. He is doubtful of the proletariat’s ability somehow to
‘rise above…differentiation of social structure…imposed from above’. But if he wants to
eliminate the proletariat as a source of truth or correct knowledge, he doesn’t quite do it.
Indeed, the intellectual or critic can proclaim his or her identity with the proletariat.
Horkheimer is not entirely without optimism. ‘The intellectual is satisfied to proclaim
with relevant admiration the creative strength of the proletariat and finds satisfaction in
adapting himself to it and canonizing it’ (ibid., p. 214). Indeed, Horkheimer is optimistic
about this identification. If, however, the theoretician and his specific object are seen as
forming a dynamic unity with the oppressed class, so that his presentation of societal
contradictions is not merely the expression of the concrete historical situation but also a
force within it to stimulate change, then his real function emerges’ (ibid., p. 215).
Horkheimer’s reliance on Marxian doctrine as the epistemological foundation for
critical theory becomes more apparent as the essay develops. Hence, a critical theory of
society will show ‘how an exchange economy, given the condition of men (which, of
course, changes under the very influence of such an economy), must necessarily lead to a
heightening of those social tensions which in the present historical era lead in turn to
wars and revolution’ (ibid., p. 266). As such, critical theory has a peculiar insight into the
potential history of modern society. As Marx used political economy and the theory of
the primacy of production, Horkheimer will use this model of economic determinism to
predict the development of social contradictions in the modern world. Indeed, he goes as
far as to state that critical theory rests upon a ‘single existential judgment’, namely, ‘the
basic form of the historically given commodity economy, on which modern history rests,
contains in itself the internal and external tensions of the modern era’ (ibid., p. 227).
Equally, critical theory will be able to overcome the ‘Cartesian dualism’ that
characterized contemporary traditional theory by linking critical with practical activity,
theory and praxis. Indeed, it was this belief that critical theory was somehow related to
practical activity that would distinguish this kind of theoretical endeavour. ‘The thinker
must relate all the theories which are proposed to the practical attitudes and social strata
which they reflect’ (ibid., p. 232).
In retrospect, one may view this 1937 declaration as something of a tour de force
attempting to break away from at least some of the most fundamental tenets of traditional
Marxist theory, while at the same time in a curious way being caught in the very web of
the system from which it was trying to escape. Hence, while dissociating itself from the
assumption that truth and proper knowledge were to be rendered through the proletariat,
the fundamental tenet of Marxian class theory, this treatise on critical theory celebrated
concepts such as economic determinism, reification, critique of autonomy and social
contradiction—assumptions derived from traditional Marxian social theory—as valid
notions. Simultaneously, this position could not seek to justify itself independently of the
events of the time. As the French Revolution determined Hegel’s concept of the political
end of philosophy as human freedom, and as the burgeoning Industrial Revolution
determined Marx’s thought, critical theory attempted to respond to the events of the time,
the decline of the workers’ movement and the rise of fascism. Hence, the indelible mark

26.7 Page 257

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 219
of the Institute, and of the essay on critical theory in the decade of the 1930s, was the
conviction that thought was linked to social justice. The thesis, as old as the German
Enlightenment itself, was that thought could somehow be emancipatory. The
predominance of this view gave the Institute its particular character, especially when
contrasted to the other German philosophical movements of the time, phenomenology,
existentialism and, to some extent, positivism. Although influenced by the same set of
events as the other German philosophical movements it was critical theory that was to
distinguish itself by addressing the political oppression of the day.
HORKHEIMER, ADORNO, AND THE DIALECTICAL
TRANSFORMATION OF CRITICAL THEORY
Critical theory in the post-1937 period would be characterized by two essentially related
perspectives, one which broadened its critique of modes of rationality under the heading
‘critique of instrumental reason’ and the other which attempted a grand analysis of
culture and civilization under the heading ‘dialectic of enlightenment’. With the
onslaught of the Second World War, Horkheimer and Adorno shared not only a deep
pessimism about the future course of rationality but also a loss of hope in the
potentialities of a philosophy of history for purposes of social transformation. The
confidence in the great potentialities of thought as unleashed by the German
Enlightenment went underground, replaced by the pessimism of the two major thinkers of
critical theory who gave up not only on being thinkers in solidarity with the proletariat
but also on the redemptive powers of rationality itself. In this sense, not only do they
represent a critique of what is now quite fashionably called ‘modernity’, but they may be
the harbingers of postmodernity as well.
In the course of the development of critical theory under the ever more pessimistic
vision of its principal representatives, the focus would change from Hegel and Marx to
Weber. Although they were never to give up entirely on Hegel and Marx, it was Weber
who would articulate the pessimistic underside of the Enlightenment which Horkheimer
and Adorno would come to admire. Hegel, through his notion of reflection which made a
distinction between true and false forms of externalization, between Entaüsserung and
Entfremdung, always sustained the possiblity of reason being able to overcome its
falsifications. Marx, although less attentive to this distinction, retained the possibility of
overcoming falsification or alienation through social action. Hence, whether it was
through the reconciliatory power of reason in the case of Hegel, or the transformative
force of social action in the case of Marx, a certain emancipatory project was held intact.
Horkheimer, and eventually Adorno, initially endorsed that project. However, when
Horkheimer wrote his Critique of Instrumental Reason [8.105] it was under the influence
of Weber’s brilliant, sobering vision regarding reason and action forged through a
comprehensive analysis of the genesis and development of western society. Weber had
speculated that in the course of western history, reason, as it secularizes, frees itself from
its more mythic and religious sources and becomes ever more purposive, more oriented to
means to the exclusion of ends. In order to characterize this development, Weber coined
the term Zweckrationalität, purposive-rational action. Reason, devoid of its redemptive

26.8 Page 258

▲back to top
Critical theory 220
and reconciliatory possibilities, could only be purposive, useful and calculating. Weber
had used the metaphor ‘iron cage’ as an appropriate way of designating the end, the dead-
end of modern reason. Horkheimer would take the analysis one step further. His
characterization of this course was designated by the term, ‘instrumental reason’. Implied
in this usage is the overwhelming force of reason for purposes of social control. The
combined forces of media, bureaucracy, economy and cultural life would bear down on
the modern individual with an accumulated force which could be described only as
instrumental. Instrumental reason would represent the ever-expanding ability of those
who were in positions of power in the modern world to dominate and control society for
their own calculating purposes. So conceived, the kind of analysis which began with the
great optimism inaugurated by the German Enlightenment (which sustained the belief
that reason could come to comprehend the developing principle of history and therefore
society) would end with the pessimistic realization that reason functions for social
control, not in the name of enlightenment or emancipation. And what then of a critical
theory?
No doubt that question occurred to Horkheimer and Adorno, who, as exiles, now
southern Californians, collaborated on what in retrospect must be said to be one of the
most fascinating books of modern times, Dialectic of Enlightenment. Is enlightenment,
the avowed aim of a critical theory, ‘self-destructive’? That is the question posed by the
book, the thesis of which is contained in its title. Enlightenment, which harbours the very
promise of human emancipation, becomes the principle of domination, domination of
nature and thus, in certain hands, the basis for the domination of other human beings. In
the modern world, knowledge is power. The book begins with an analysis of Bacon’s so-
called ‘scientific attitude’. The relation of ‘mind’ and ‘nature’ is ‘patriarchal’ (ibid., p. 4);
‘the human mind, which overcomes superstition, is to hold sway over a disenchanted
nature’ (ibid.). ‘What men want to learn from nature is how to use it in order wholly to
dominate it and other men. That is the only aim’ (ibid.). Hence, ‘power and knowledge’
are the same. But the thesis is more complex. The term ‘dialectic’ is used here in a form
which transcends Hegel’s quasi-logical usage. Here dialectic circles back upon itself in
such a manner that its subject, enlightenment, both illuminates and destroys. Myth is
transformed into enlightenment, but at the price of transforming ‘nature into mere
objectivity’ (ibid., p. 9). The increment of power gained with enlightenment has as its
equivalent a simultaneous alienation from nature. The circle is vicious: the greater
enlightenment, the greater alienation. Magic, with its desire to control, is replaced by
science in the modern world, which has not only the same end but more effective means.
According to this thesis, the very inner core of myth is enlightenment. ‘The principle of
immanence, the explanation of every event as repetition, that the enlightenment upholds
against mythic imagination, is the principle of myth itself’ (ibid., p. 12). Indeed, they
observe, in the modern obsession with the mathematization of nature (the phenomenon so
accurately observed by Edmund Husserl in his famous The Crisis of European Science
and Transcendental Phenomenology) they find representatives of a kind of ‘return of the
mythic’ in the sense that enlightenment always ‘intends to secure itself against the return
of the mythic’. But it does so by degenerating into the ‘mythic cult of positivism’. In this
‘mathematical formalism’, they claim, ‘enlightenment returns to mythology, which it
never knew how to elude’ (ibid., p. 27). Such is the peculiar character of the dialectic of

26.9 Page 259

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 221
enlightenment, which turns upon itself in such a way that it is subsumed by the very
phenomenon it wishes to overcome.
Critical theory distinguishes itself in this period by ever distancing itself from the
Marxian heritage with which it originally associated. Some would see this as a departure
from the very sources of reason from which it was so effectively nourished. Hence, a
form of rationality gone wild. Others might see it from a different perspective. Perhaps
the Dialectic of Enlightenment represents the coming of age of critical theory as critical
theory finally making the turn into the twentieth century. As such, the philosophy of
history on which it so comfortably rested, with its secure assumptions about the place of
enlightenment in the course of western history (to say nothing of the evolution of class
and economy), was undercut by the authors’ curious insight into the nature of
enlightenment itself. Enlightenment is not necessarily a temporal phenomenon given its
claims for a particular time and place in modern historical development. Rather, for
Horkheimer and Adorno, enlightenment is itself dialectical, a curious phenomenon
associated with rationality itself. In this view, the dialectic of enlightenment could be
traced to the dawn of human civilization. Here we encounter a form of critical theory
influenced not only by Kant, Hegel, Marx and Weber but also by Nietzsche and perhaps
Kierkegaard. It would follow that texts that witnessed the evolution of human history
would be placed side by side with those which gave testimony to its origin.
Enlightenment can then be traced not to the so-called German Enlightenment, or to the
western European Enlightenment, but to the original written texts of western civilization,
which, as any former Gymnasium student knows, were those of Homer. Nietzsche is
credited with the insight. ‘Nietzsche was one of the few after Hegel who recognized the
dialectic of enlightenment’ (ibid., p. 44). They credit him with the double insight that
while enlightenment unmasks the acts of those who govern, it is also a tool they use
under the name of progress to dupe the masses. ‘The revelation of these two aspects of
the Enlightenment as an historic principle made it possible to trace the notion of
enlightenment as progressive thought, back to the beginning of traditional history’ (ibid.).
Horkheimer and Adorno do not concentrate much on the illusory character of the
enlightenment in Homer, ‘the basic text of European civilization’ as they call it. That
element has been over-emphasized by the so-called fascist interpreters of both Homer and
Nietzsche. Rather, it is the use or interpretation of myth as an instrument of domination
as evidenced in this classic text that they perceive as fundamental. Here, Weber and
Nietzsche complement one another. The other side of the dialectic of enlightenment is the
thesis on instrumental reason. Hence, the ‘individuation’ of self which is witnessed in the
Homeric text is carried out through what seems to be the opposition of enlightenment and
myth. ‘The opposition of enlightenment to myth is expressed in the opposition of the
surviving individual ego to multifarious fate’ (ibid., p. 46). The Homeric narrative
secularizes the mythic past in the name of the hero’s steadfast orientation to his own
‘self-preservation’. It secularizes it by learning to dominate it. Learning to dominate has
to do with the ‘organization’ of the self. But the very instrumentality associated with
domination has its curious reverse side; something like that which Marcuse would later
call ‘the return of the repressed’. As they put it regarding Homer, ‘Like the heroes of all
the true novels later on, Odysseus loses himself in order to find himself; the estrangement
from nature that he brings about is realized in the process of the abandonment to nature

26.10 Page 260

▲back to top
Critical theory 222
he contends in each adventure; and, ironically, when he, inexorably, returns home, the
inexorable force he commands itself triumphs as the judge and avenger of the legacy of
the powers from which he has escaped’ (ibid., p. 48).
There is no place where this curious double thesis is more effectively borne out than in
the phenomenon of sacrifice. Influenced by Ludwig Klage’s contention regarding the
universality of sacrifice, they observe that individuation undercuts the originary relation
of the lunar being to nature which sacrifice implies. ‘The establishment of the self cuts
through that fluctuating relation with nature that the sacrifice of the self claims to
establish’ (ibid., p. 51). Sacrifice, irrational though it may be, is a kind of enabling device
which allows one to tolerate life. ‘The venerable belief in sacrifice, however is probably
already an impressed pattern according to which the subjected repeat upon themselves the
injustice that was done them, enacting it again and again in order to endure it’ (ibid.).
Sacrifice, when universalized and said to apply to the experience of all of humanity, is
civilization. Its elimination would occur at enormous expense. The emergence of
rationality is based on denial, the denial of the relationship between humanity and nature.
‘The very denial, the nucleus of all civilizing rationality, is the germ cell of a
proliferating mythic irrationality: with the denial of nature in man not merely the telos of
the outward control of nature but the telos of man’s own life is distorted and
befogged’ (ibid., p. 54). The great loss is of course that the human being is no longer able
to perceive its relationship to nature in its compulsive preoccupation with self-
preservation. The dialectic of enlightenment continues to play itself out. To escape from
sacrifice is to sacrifice oneself. Hence the subthesis of Dialectic of Enlightenment: ‘the
history of civilization is the history of the introversion of sacrifice. In other words, the
history of renunciation’ (ibid., p. 55). It is this sub-thesis that they associate with the
‘prehistory of subjectivity’ (ibid., p. 54).
The text to which Horkheimer and Adorno have turned their attention is written by
Homer, but the story is about the prehistory of western civilization. Odysseus is the
prophetic seer who in his deeds would inform the course of action to be followed by
future individuals. Odysseus is the ‘self who always restrains himself, he sacrifices for
the ‘abnegation of sacrifice’ and through him we witness the ‘transformation of sacrifice
into subjectivity’. Above all, Odysseus ‘survives’, but ironically at the ‘concession of
one’s own defeat’, an acknowledgement of death. Indeed, the rationality represented by
Odysseus is that of ‘cunning’: a necessity required by having to choose the only route
between Scylla and Charybdis in which each god has the ‘right’ to do its particular task.
Together the gods represent ‘Olympian Justice’ characterized by an ‘equivalence between
the course, the crime which expiates it, and the guilt arising from that, which in turn
reproduces the curse’ (ibid., p. 58). This is the pattern of ‘all justice in history’ which
Odysseus opposes. But he does so by succumbing to the power of this justice. He does
not find a way to escape the route charted past the Sirens. Instead, he finds a way to
outwit the curse by having himself chained to the mast. As one moves from myth to
enlightenment, it is cunning with its associated renunciation which characterizes reason.
The great promise held by enlightenment is now seen when perceived in retrospect from
the perspective of the earlier Horkheimer and Adorno to be domination, repression and
cunning.
The thesis contained in Dialectic of Enlightenment can be extended beyond the origin

27 Pages 261-270

▲back to top

27.1 Page 261

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 223
of western civilization. As its authors attempt to show, it can be brought back to critique
effectively the eighteenth-century Enlightenment as well as attempts to overcome it. As
self-preservation was barely seen in Homer as the object of reason, the so-called
historical Enlightenment made a fetish of it. ‘The system the Enlightenment has in mind
is the form of knowledge which copes most proficiently with the facts and supports the
individual most effectively in the mastery of nature. Its principles are the principles of
self-preservation.’ ‘Burgher’, ‘slave owner’, ‘free entrepreneur’ and ‘adminstrator’ are its
logical subjects. At its best, as represented in Kant, reason was suspended between ‘true
universality’ in which ‘universal subjects’ can ‘overcome the conflict between pure and
empirical reason in the conscious solidarity of the whole’ (ibid., p. 83), and calculating
rationality ‘which adjusts the world for the ends of self-preservation’. In this view, Kant’s
attempts to ground morality in the law of reason came to naught. In fact, Horkheimer and
Adorno find more base reasons for Kant’s attempt to ground morality in the concept of
‘respect’. ‘The root of Kantian optimism’ is based in this view on the fear of a retreat of
‘barbarism’. In any case, in this view the concept of respect was linked to the bourgeois
which in latter times no longer existed in the same way. Totalitarianism as represented in
fascism no longer needed such concepts nor did it respect the class that harboured them.
It would be happy with science as calculation under the banner of self-preservation alone.
The link between Kant and Nietzsche is said to be the Marquis de Sade. In Sade’s
writings, it is argued, we find the triumph of calculating reason, totally individualized,
freed from the observation of ‘another person’. Here, we encounter a kind of modern
reason deprived of any ‘substantial goal’, ‘wholly functionalized’, a ‘purposeless
purposiveness’ totally unconcerned about effects which are dismissed as ‘purely natural’.
Hence, any social arrangement is as good as any other and the ‘social necessities’
including ‘all solidarity with society duty and family’ can be dissolved.
If anything, then, enlightenment means ‘mass deception’ through its fundamental
medium of the ‘culture industry’ where the rationality of ‘technology’ reigns. ‘A
technological rationale is the rationale of domination itself (ibid., p. 121). In film, in
music, in art, in leisure this new technology has come to dominate in such a way that the
totality of life and experience have been overcome. In the end, in accord with this view,
the so-called enlightenment of modern civilization is ironic, total, bitter and universal.
Enlightenment as self-deception manifests itself when art and advertising become fused
in an idiom of a ‘style’ that fashions the modern experience as an ideology from which
there is no escape. In the blur of modern images, all phenomena are exchangeable. Any
object can be exchanged for any other in this ‘superstitious fusion of word and
thing’ (ibid., p. 164). In such a world, fascism becomes entertainment, easily reconciled
with all the other words and images and ideologies in the vast arena of modern
assimilation.
In the end, Dialectic of Enlightenment can be viewed as a kind of crossroads for
modern philosophy and social theory. On the one hand, reason can function critically, but
on the other, it cannot ground itself in any one perspective. Reason under the image of
self-preservation can only function for the purpose of domination. This is critical theory
twice removed; removed from its foundations in the Marxism of the nineteenth century
from which it attempted to establish its own independence, and removed once again from
any foundation to function as a raging power of critique without foundation. In this sense,

27.2 Page 262

▲back to top
Critical theory 224
this book, more than any other to come from the so-called Frankfurt school, hailed the
end of philosophy, and did so in part to usher in the era now designated as postmodernity.
Thus, it was not only to the successive reconstruction of phenomenology from Husserl
through Heidegger that the harbingers of postmodernity could point as legitimate
forebears of their own movement, but to the voices which rang out in the Dialectic of
Enlightenment whose prophetic rage led the way. It was left to Foucault to probe the
multiple meanings of the discipline of the self and the institutional repression of the
subject unleashed by the Enlightenment, and to Derrick to articulate the groundlessness
of a position which seeks the role of critic but cannot find the way to a privileged
perspective which would make possible the proper interpretation.
ADORNO AND THE AESTHETIC REHABILITATION OF CRITICAL
THEORY
But if critical theory was willing in the late 1940s to give up partially on the
Enlightenment and the possibility of a modality of thought that harboured within it a
potential for emancipation, it was not totally ready to do so. Hence, critical theory in its
curious route from the early 1920s to the present would make one more turn, a turn
toward aesthetics. The wager on aesthetics would keep alive, if in muted fashion, the
emancipatory hypothesis with which critical theory began. Adorno, inspired in part by
Benjamin, would lead the way out from the ashes left in the wake of an instrumental
rationality whose end, as the end of philosophy, was almost apparent. If the general
claims of the Dialectic of Enlightenment were to be sustained, the theoretical
consequences for critical theory would be devastating. Hence the question regarding the
manner in which a critical theory could be rehabilitated, but this time under the suspicion
of a full-blown theory of rationality. In a sense, through Horkheimer’s and Adorno’s
rather devastating analysis of rationality as fundamentally instrumental, and of
enlightenment as fundamentally circular, it would have seemed that the very possibility
for critique itself would be undermined. The aesthetic redemption of the claims of critical
theory would have to be understood from the perspective of the framework of suspicion
regarding the claims of cognition. Since cognition would result inevitably in
instrumentality, it would be necessary to find a way in which critique could be
legitimated without reference to cognition per se. Aesthetics, with which Adorno had
been fascinated from the time of his earliest published work, would provide a way out. If
Dialectic of Enlightenment could be read as a critique of cognition, art represents for
Adorno a way of overcoming the dilemma established by cognition. Adorno sees the
capacity of a non-representational theory in the potentiality of art as manifestation. The
explosive power of art remains in its representing that which cannot be represented. In
this sense it is the nonidentical in art that can represent society, but only as its other. Art
functions then for Adorno in the context of the programme of critical theory as a kind of
stand-in for a cognitive theory, which cannot be attained under the force of
instrumentality.
Adorno, however, was not quite ready to give up on a philosophy of history which had
informed his earlier work. Hence, under the influence of Benjamin and in direct contrast

27.3 Page 263

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 225
to Nietzsche and Heidegger, he was able to incorporate his understanding of art within a
theory of progress. At the end of his famous essay ‘The Work of Art in the Age of
Mechanical Reproduction’,8 originally published in the Zeitschrift für Sozialforschung in
1936,9 Benjamin has postulated the thesis that with photography, ‘for the first time in
world history, mechanical reproduction emancipates the work of art from its parasitical
dependence on ritual’. As a consequence, art no longer needed to sustain a claim on
authenticity. After photography, the work of art is ‘designed for reproducibility’. From
this observation, Benjamin drew a rather astonishing conclusion: ‘But the instant the
criterion of authenticity ceases to be applicable to artistic production, the total function of
art is reversed. Instead of being based on ritual, it begins to be based on another
practice—politics’ (ibid., p. 244). However, it should not be assumed that the politics
with which modern an was to be associated was immediately emancipatory. The thesis
was as positive as it was negative. ‘The logical result of Fascism is the introduction of
aesthetics into political life’ (ibid., p. 241). But for Benjamin this was a form of the
relationship between aesthetics and politics which would attempt to rekindle the old
association between art and ritual. ‘The violation of the masses, whom Fascism, with it
the Führer cult, forces to their knees, has its counterpart in the violation of an apparatus
which is pressed into the production of ritual values’ (ibid.). However, the tables can be
turned; while fascism ‘equals the aestheticism of politics’, Benjamin claimed, Marxist as
he was, that ‘communism responds to politicizing art’ (ibid., p. 242).
Adorno would use this insight into the nature of art and historical development freed of
Benjamin’s somewhat materialist orientation. While he affirmed that ‘modern art is
different from all previous art in that its mode of negation is different’ because
modernism ‘negates tradition itself, Adorno addressed the issue of the relation of art not
to fascism but to capitalist society. Beyond that, Adorno’s task was to show how art
could overcome the dilemma of rationality as defined through the critique of
instrumentality, while at the same time sustaining the claim that art had a kind of
intelligibility. How could art be something other than a simple representation of that
society? Adorno would return to the classical aesthetic idea of mimesis in order to make
his point. Art has the capacity to represent, but in its very representation it can transcend
that which it is representing. Art survives not by denying but by reconstructing. ‘The
modernity of art lies in its mimetic relation to a petrified and alienated reality. This, and
not the denial of that mute reality, is what makes art speak’ (Aesthetic Theory [8.23], 31).
Art, in other words, represents the non-identical. ‘Modern art is constantly practicing the
impossible trick of trying to identify the non-identical’ (ibid.).
Art then can be used to make a kind of claim about rationality. ‘Art’s disavowal of
magical practices—art’s own antecedents—signifies that art shares in rationality. Its
ability to hold its own qua mimesis in the midst of rationality, even while using the
means of that rationality, is a response to the evils and irrationality of the bureaucratic
world.’ Art then is a kind of rationality that contains a certain ‘non-rational’ element that
eludes the instrumental form. This would suggest that it is within the power of art to go
beyond instrumental rationality. This is what art can do which cannot be done in
capitalist society per se. ‘Capitalist society hides and disavows precisely this irrationality,
whereas art does not.’ Art then can be related to truth. Art ‘represents truth in the twofold
sense of preserving the image of an end smothered completely by rationality and of

27.4 Page 264

▲back to top
Critical theory 226
exposing the irrationality and absurdity of the status quo’ (ibid., p. 79).
It is Adorno’s claim then that although art may be part and parcel of what Weber
described as rationalization, that process of rationalization in which art partakes is not
one which leads to domination. Thus, if art is part of what Weber called the
‘disenchantment of the world’, it leads us in a direction different from that of
instrumental reason. Hence, the claim that ‘Art mobilizes technology in a different
direction than domination does’ (ibid., p. 80). And it is for this reason, thinks Adorno,
that we must pay attention to the ‘dialectics of mimesis and rationality that is intrinsic to
art’ (ibid.).
Whereas the Dialectic of Enlightenment could be conceived as a critique of cognition,
Adorno uses art to rehabilitate a cognitive claim. ‘The continued existence of mimesis,
understood as the non-conceptual affinity of a subjective creation with its objective and
unposited other, defines art as a form of cognition and to that extent as “rational”’ (ibid.).
Hence, in a time when reason has, in Adorno’s view, degenerated to the level of
instrumentality, one can turn to art as the expression of the rehabilitation of a form of
rationality which can overcome the limitation of reason by expressing its non-identity
with itself. In this sense, the claims of critical theory would not be lost but be
transformed. Indeed, the earlier emancipatory claims of critical theory would be
reappropriated at another level. Here again, Adorno’s view seems to be shaped by that of
his friend Walter Benjamin. Art can reconcile us to the suffering which can never be
expressed in ordinary rational terms. While ‘reason can subsume suffering under
concepts’ and while it can ‘furnish means to alleviate suffering’, it can never ‘express
suffering in the medium of experience’. Hence, art has a unique role to play under a
transformed understanding, i.e., the role of critical theory. ‘What recommends itself, then,
is the idea that art may be the only remaining medium of truth in an age of
incomprehensible terror and suffering’ (ibid., p. 27). In other words, art can anticipate
emancipation, but only on the basis of a solidarity with the current state of human
existence. ‘By cathecting the repressed, art internalizes the repressing principle, i.e. the
unredeemed condition of the world, instead of merely airing futile protests against it. Art
identifies and expresses that condition, thus anticipating its overcoming’ (ibid., p. 26).
For Benjamin it was this view of and solidarity with suffering experienced by others in
the past which has not been redeemed. For him then, happiness is not simply an empty
Enlightenment term. It has a slightly messianic, theological twist. His fundamental thesis
was ‘Our image of happiness is indissolubly bound up with the image of
redemption’ (ibid., p. 254).
Finally, if it is possible to look at Adorno’s later work on aesthetics from the
perspective of the position worked out with Horkheimer in Dialectic of Enlightenment, it
appears that a case can be made for the retrieval of the earlier emancipatory claims of
critical theory on the basis of the non-identical character of the work of art. To be sure,
Adorno, along with Horkheimer, had left little room to retrieve a critical theory in the
wake of their devastating critique of the claims of reason. Indeed, the claims for art
would have to be measured against this very critique. Yet, in a peculiar way, Adorno was
consistent with the prior analysis. If reason would always lead to domination, then art
would have to base its claim on its ability to express the non-identical. However, the task
remained to articulate those claims precisely. In order to do so Adorno would often find

27.5 Page 265

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 227
himself falling back on a philosophy of history which, by the standards articulated in his
earlier critique, he had already invalidated.
HABERMAS AND THE RATIONAL RECONSTRUCTION OF CRITICAL
THEORY
With Jürgen Habermas, Adorno’s one-time student, the discourse over the rehabilitation
of critical theory was taken to a higher level. Habermas’s initial strategy was to
rehabilitate the notion of critique in critical theory. Clearly, Habermas has long-held
doubts about the way in which his philosophical mentors in Frankfurt failed to ground a
critical theory in a theory of rationality which would harbour an adequate notion of
critique. On this he has written eloquently in both The Theory of Communicative Action
(1981, [8.85]) and The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity (1985, [8.88]). What I have
found interesting in studying the works of Habermas is the manner in which the argument
for a critical theory of rationality began to take shape as an alternative argument to the
one which Horkheimer and Adorno put forth. In this context, Habermas would avail
himself of certain resources within the tradition of contemporary German philosophy
which his mentors overlooked. I suggested earlier that German philosophy since Kant has
been shaped by the interaction between the themes of constitution and transformation. If
modern critical theory began with a relatively firm belief that the grounds for the
emancipatory assumptions regarding critique were clear and given in a certain orientation
toward theory, in retrospect that foundation became ever less secure. Eventually, critique,
as in Dialectic of Enlightenment, became caught in a never-ending circle of internal
repression and external domination. Hence, the promise of critical theory had been
undermined. It was the great merit of Habermas’s early work to have seen the dilemma
and to have addressed it in terms of turning not to the transformative but to the
constitutive element in the German philosophical tradition. Critical theory was for
Habermas, at least originally, the problem of ‘valid knowledge’, i.e., an epistemological
problem.
It should come as no surprise then that when Habermas first juxtaposes traditional and
critical theory, following in the footsteps of Horkheimer’s 1937 article, he engages
Edmund Husserl not only on the status of theory but also on the nature of science. By so
doing, he appropriates two of the themes that were germane and of a piece in late
transcendental phenomenology, namely, the association of the concept of theory with a
more or less political notion of liberation or emancipation and the preoccupation of
phenomenology with the status of science.
As early as the writing of Knowledge and Human Interests (1969, [8.82]), Habermas
sustained the thesis that critical theory could be legitimated on the basis of making
apparent the undisclosed association between knowledge and interest. This association,
however, could be specified only on the basis of the clarification of theory in its more
classical form. According to Habermas theoria was a kind of mimesis in the sense that in
the contemplation of the cosmos one reproduces internally what one perceives externally.
Theory then, even in its traditional form, is conceived to be related to the ‘conduct of
one’s life’. In fact, in this interpretation of the traditional view, the appropriation of a

27.6 Page 266

▲back to top
Critical theory 228
theoretical attitude creates a certain ethos among its practitioners. Husserl is said to have
sustained this ‘traditional’ notion of theory. Hence, when Husserl approached the
question of science he approached it on the basis of his prior commitment to the classical
understanding of theory.
In Habermas’s view, it is this commitment to theory in the classical sense which
determines Husserl’s critique of science. Husserl’s attack on the objectivism of the
sciences led to the claim that knowledge of the objective world has a ‘transcendental’
basis in the pre-scientific world, that sciences, because of their prior commitment to
mundane knowledge of the world, are unable to free themselves from interest, and that
phenomenology, through its method of transcendental self-reflection, can free this
association of knowledge and mundane interest through a commitment to a theoretical
attitude which has been defined traditionally. In this view, the classical conception of
theory, which phenomenology borrows, frees one from interest in the ordinary world with
the result that a certain ‘therapeutic power’, as well as a ‘practical efficacy’, is claimed
for phenomenology.
Habermas endorses Husserl’s procedure, while at the same time pointing out its error.
Husserl is said to be correct in his critique of science, which, because of its ‘objectivist
illusion’, embedded in a belief in a ‘reality-in-itself’, leaves the matter of the constitution
of these facts undisclosed with the result that it is unaware of the connection between
knowledge and interest. In Husserl’s view, phenomenology, which makes this clear, can
rightfully claim for itself, against the pretensions of the sciences, the designation ‘pure
theory’. Precisely here Husserl would bring the practical efficacy of phenomenology to
bear. Phenomenology would be said to free one from the ordinary scientific attitude. But
phenomenology is in error because of its blind acceptance of the implicit ontology
present in the classical definition of theory. Theory in its classical form was thought to
find in the structure of the ‘ideal world’ a prototype for the order of the human world.
Habermas says in a rather insightful manner, ‘Only as cosmology was theoria also
capable of orienting human action’ ([8.82], 306). If that is the case, then the
phenomenological method which relied on the classical concept of theory was to have a
certain ‘practical efficacy’, which was interpreted to mean that a certain
‘pseudonormative power’ could be derived from the ‘concealment of its actual interest’.
In the end, phenomenology, which sought to justify itself on the basis of its freedom
from interest, has instead an undisclosed interest which it derived from a classical
ontology. Habermas believes classical ontology in turn can be characterized historically.
In fact, the concept of theory is said to be derived from a particular stage in human
emancipation where catharsis, which had been engendered heretofore by the ‘mystery
cults’, was now taken into the realm of human action by means of ‘theory’. This in turn
would mark a new stage, but certainly not the last stage, in the development of human
‘identity’. At this stage, individual identity could be achieved only through the
indentification with the ‘abstract laws of cosmic order’. Hence, theory represents the
achievements of a consciousness that is emancipated, but not totally. It is emancipated
from certain ‘archaic powers’, but it still requires a certain relationship to the cosmos in
order to achieve its identity. Equally, although pure theory could be characterized as an
‘illusion’, it was conceived as a ‘protection’ from ‘regression to an earlier stage’. And
here we encounter the major point of Habermas’s critique, namely, the association of the

27.7 Page 267

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 229
contemplative attitude, which portends to dissociate itself from any interest, and the
contradictory assumption that the quest for pure knowledge is conducted in the name of a
certain practical interest, namely, the emancipation from an earlier stage of human
development.
The conclusion is that both Husserl and the sciences he critiques are wrong. Husserl is
wrong because he believes that the move to pure theory is a step which frees knowledge
from interest. In fact, as we have seen, the redeeming aspect of Husserl’s phenomenology
is that it does in fact have a practical intent. The sciences are wrong because although
they assume the purely contemplative attitude, they use that aspect of the classical
concept of theory for their own purposes. In other words, the sciences use the classical
concept of pure theory to sustain an insular form of positivism while they cast off the
‘practical content’ of that pure theory. As a consequence, they assume that their interest
remains undisclosed.
Significantly, when Habermas turns to his critique of science, he sides with Husserl.
This means that Husserl has rightly critiqued the false scientific assumption that
‘theoretical propositions’ are to be correlated with ‘matters of fact’, an ‘attitude’ which
assumes the ‘self-existence’ of ‘empirical variables’ as they are represented in
‘theoretical propositions’. But not only has Husserl made the proper distinction between
the theoretical and the empirical, he has appropriately shown that the scientific attitude
‘suppresses the transcendental framework that is the precondition of the meaning of the
validity of such propositions’ (ibid., p. 307). It would follow, then, that if the proper
distinction were made between the empirical and the theoretical and if the transcendental
framework were made manifest, which would expose the meaning of such propositions,
then the ‘objectivist illusion’ would ‘dissolve’ and ‘knowledge constitutive’ interests
would be made ‘visible’. It would follow that there is nothing wrong with the theoretical
attitude as long as it is united with its practical intent and there is nothing wrong with the
introduction of a transcendental framework, as long as it makes apparent the heretofore
undisclosed unity of knowledge and interest.
What is interesting about this analysis is that the framework for the notion of critique is
not to be derived from dialectical reason as Horkheimer originally thought but from
transcendental phenomenology. One must be careful here. I do not wish to claim that
Habermas identifies his position with Husserl. Rather, it can be demonstrated that he
derives his position on critique from a critique of transcendental phenomenology. As
such, he borrows both the transcendental frame-work for critique and the emphasis on
theory as distinguished from empirical fact that was established by Husserl. Therefore, at
that point he argues for a ‘critical social science’ which relies on a ‘concept of self-
reflection’ which can ‘determine the meaning of the validity of critical propositions’.
Such a conception of critical theory borrows from the critique of traditional theory the
idea of an ‘emancipatory cognitive interest’ which, when properly demythologized, is
based not on an emancipation from a mystical notion of universal powers of control but
rather from a more modern interest in ‘autonomy and responsibility’. This latter interest
will appear later in his thought as the basis for moral theory.
On the basis of this analysis, one might make some observations. Clearly, from the
point of view of the development of critical theory, Habermas rightfully saw the necessity
of rescuing the concept of critique. Implicit in that attempt is not only the rejection of

27.8 Page 268

▲back to top
Critical theory 230
Dialectic of Enlightenment but also Adorno’s attempt to rehabilitate critical theory on the
basis of aesthetics. However—and there is considerable evidence to support this
assumption—the concept of critical theory which had informed Horkheimer’s early essay
on that topic had fallen on hard times. As the members of the Institute for Social
Research gradually withdrew from the Marxism that had originally informed their
concept of critique, so the foundations upon which critical theory was built began to
crumble. Habermas’s reconceptualization of the notion of critique was obviously both
innovative and original. It was also controversial. Critique would not be derived from a
philosophy of history based on struggle but from a moment of self-reflection based on a
theory of rationality. As Habermas’s position developed it is that self-reflective moment
which would prove to be interesting.
HABERMAS: CRITIQUE AND VALIDITY
Critique, which was rendered through the unmasking of an emancipatory interest vis-à-
vis the introduction of a transcendentalized moment of self-reflection, re-emerges in the
later, as opposed to the earlier, works of Habermas at the level of validity. The link
between validity and critique can be established through the transcendentalized moment
of self-reflection which was associated with making apparent an interest in autonomy and
responsibility. Later, that moment was transformed through a theory of communicative
rationality to be directed to issues of consensus. Validity refers to a certain background
consensus which can be attained through a process of idealization. As critique was
originally intended to dissociate truth from ideology, validity distinguished between that
which can be justified and that which cannot. Hence, it readdresses the claims for
autonomy and responsibility at the level of communication. It could be said that the quest
for validity is superimposed upon the quest for emancipation. There are those who would
argue that moral theory which finds its basis in communicative action has replaced the
older critical theory with which Habermas was preoccupied in Knowledge and Human
Interests. I would argue somewhat differently that Habermas’s more recent discourse
theory of ethics and law is based on the reconstructed claims of a certain version of
critical theory.
However, before justifying this claim, I will turn to the basic paradigm shift in
Habermas’s work from the philosophy of the subject to the philosophy of language
involving construction of a theory of communicative action on the one hand and the
justification of a philosophical postion anchored in modernity on the other. Both moves
can be referenced to the debate between earlier and later critical theory.
If Horkheimer’s, and later Adorno’s, concept of ‘instrumental rationality’ is but a
reconstruction of Max Weber’s concept of purposiverational action, it would follow that
a comprehensive critique of that view could be directed to Weber’s theory of
rationalization. In Habermas’s book, The Theory of Communicative Action, it is this
theory that is under investigation as seen through the paradigm of the philosophy of
consciousness. Weber’s thesis can be stated quite simply: if western rationality has been
reduced to its instrumental core, then it has no further prospects for regenerating itself.
Habermas wants to argue that the failure of Weber’s analysis, and by implication the

27.9 Page 269

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 231
failure of those like Horkheimer and Adorno who accepted Weber’s thesis, was to
conceive of processes of rationalization in terms of subject-object relations. In other
words, Weber’s analysis cannot be dissociated from Weber’s theory of rationality.
According to this analysis, his theory of rationality caused him to conceive of things in
terms of subject-object relations. Habermas’s thesis, against Weber, Horkheimer and
Adorno, is that a theory of rationality which conceives of things in terms of subject-
object relations cannot conceive of those phenomena in other than instrumental terms. In
other words, all subject-object formulations are instrumental. Hence, if one were to
construct a theory of rationalization in non-instrumental terms, it would be necessary to
construct an alternative theory of rationality. The construction of a theory of
communicative action based on a philosophy of language rests on this assumption.
In Habermas’s view, the way out of the dilemma of instrumentality into which earlier
critical theory led us is through a philosophy of language which, through a reconstructed
understanding of speech-act theory, can make a distinction between strategic and
communicative action. Communicative action can be understood to be non-instrumen-tal
in this sense: ‘A communicatively achieved agreement has a rational basis; it cannot be
imposed by either party, whether instrumentally through intervention in the situation
directly or strategically through influencing decisions of the opponents’ ([8.85], p. 287).
It is important to note that the question of validity, which I argued a moment ago was the
place where the emancipatory interest would be sustained, emerges. A communicative
action has within it a claim to validity which is in principle criticizable, meaning that the
person to whom such a claim is addressed can respond with either a yes or a no based, in
turn, on reasons. Beyond that, if Habermas is to sustain his claim to overcoming the
dilemma of instrumental reason he must agree that communicative actions are
foundational. They cannot be reducible to instrumental or strategic actions. If
communicative actions were reducible to instrumental or strategic actions, one would be
back in the philosophy of consciousness where it was claimed by Habermas, and a certain
form of earlier critical theory as well, that all action was reducible to strategic or
instrumental action.10
It is Habermas’s conviction that one can preserve the emancipatory thrust of modernity
by appropriating the discursive structure of language at the level of communication.
Hence, the failure of Dialectic of Enlightenment was to misread modernity in an
oversimplified way influenced by those who had given up on it. Here is represented a
debate between a position anchored in a philosophy of history which can no longer
sustain an emancipatory hypothesis on the basis of historical interpretation, and a position
which finds emancipatory claims redeemable, but on a transcendental level. Ultimately,
the rehabilitation of critical theory concerns the nature and definition of philosophy. If the
claims of critical theory can be rehabilitated on a transcendental level as the claims of a
philosophy of language, then it would appear that philosophy as such can be defined vis-
à-vis a theory of communicative action. Habermas’s claim that the originary mode of
language is communicative presupposes a contrafactual communicative community
which is by nature predisposed to refrain from instrumental forms of domination. Hence,
the assertion of communicative over strategic forms of discursive interaction assumes a
political form of association which is written into the nature of language as such as the
guarantor of a form of progressive emancipation. In other words, if one can claim that the

27.10 Page 270

▲back to top
Critical theory 232
original form of discourse is emancipatory, then the dilemma posed by instrumental
reason has been overcome and one is secure from the seductive temptation of the
dialectic of enlightenment.
NOTES
1 There are three excellent works on the origin and development of critical theory. The most
comprehensive is the monumental work by R.Wiggershaus [8.140]. M.Jay’s historical work
[8.131] introduced a whole generation of Americans to critical theory. Helmut Dubiel [8.128]
presents the development of critical theory against the backdrop of German and international
politics.
2 Hegel, Phenomenology of Spirit, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1977.
3 Ibid., p. 111.
4 K.Marx, ‘On the Jewish Question’, in The Marx-Engels Reader, ed. R.Tucker, New York:
Norton, 1972.
5 Ibid., pp. 110–65.
6 Ibid., pp. 83–103.
7 M.Horkheimer, ‘Traditional and Critical Theory’, in Critical Theory, New York: Herder &
Herder, 1972.
8 W.Benjamin, ‘The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction’, Illuminations
[8.36].
9 Zeitschrift für Sozialforschung, 5:1 (1936).
10 For a more comprehensive analysis of the issues involved in this distinction, see my
discussion in [8.96].
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Journals of the Institute of Social Research
8.1 Archiv für die Geschichte des Sozialismus und der Arbeiterbewegung, I–XV, 1910–
30.
8.2 Zeitschrift für Sozialforschung, vols 1–8, 2, Leipzig, Paris, New York, 1932–9.
8.3 Studies in Philosophy and Social Science, New York, 1940–1.
8.4 Frankfurter Beiträge zur Soziologie, Frankfurt, 1955–74.
Adorno
Primary texts
For Adorno’s collected works, see Gesammelte Schriften [GS] (23 volumes), ed.
R.Tiedemann, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1970–. See also Akte: Theodor Adorno 1924–1968,
in the archives of the former philosophy faculty at the University of Frankfurt.
For a bibliography of Adorno’s work, see René Görtzen’s ‘Theodor W. Adorno:
Vorläufige Bibliographie seiner Schriften und der Sekundärliteratur’, in Adorno

28 Pages 271-280

▲back to top

28.1 Page 271

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 233
Konferenze 1983, ed. L.Friedeburg and J.Habermas, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1983.
8.5 Kierkegaard: Konstruktion des ästhetischen, Tübingen, 1933.
8.6 Philosophie der neuen Musik, Tübingen: Mohr, 1949.
8.7 The Authoritarian Personality, co-authored with E.Frenkel-Brunswick, D. Levinson,
and R.Sanford, New York: Harper, 1950 (2nd edn, New York: Norton, 1969).
8.8 Minima Moralia: Reflexionen aus dem beschädigten Leben, Berlin and Frankfurt:
Suhrkamp, 1980.
8.9 Prismen: Kulturkritik und Gesellchaft, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1955.
8.10 Noten zur Literatur I, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1974.
8.11 Jargon der Eigentlichkeit, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1964.
8.12 Negativ Dialektik, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1966.
8.13 The Positivist Dispute in German Sociology, introduction and two essays by
Adorno, London: Heinemann, 1969.
8.14 Ästhetische Theorie, in GS, vol. 7, 1970.
8.15 Noten zur Literatur, ed. R.Tiedemann, in GS, vol. 11, 1974.
8.16 Hegel: Three Studies, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1993.
Translations
8.17 Philosophy of Modern Music, London: Sheed & Ward, 1973.
8.18 Minima Moralia: Reflections from Damaged Life, London: New Left Books, 1974.
8.19 Prisms, London: Neville Spearman, 1967.
8.20 Jargon of Authenticity, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1973.
8.21 Negative Dialectics, New York: Seabury Press, 1973.
8.22 Against Epistemology: A Metacritique, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1982.
8.23 Aesthetic Theory, London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1984.
8.24 Notes to Literature, 2 vols, New York: Columbia University Press, 1992.
Criticisms
8.25 Brunkhorst, H. Theodor W.Adorno, Dialektik der Moderne, München: Piper, 1990.
8.26 Früchtl, J. and Calloni, M., Geist gegen den Zeitgeist: Erinnern an Adorno,
Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1991.
8.27 Jay, M. Adorno, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1984.
8.28 Lindner, B. and Ludke, M. (eds) Materialien zur ästhetischen Theorie Theodor W.
Adorno’s: Konstruktion der Moderne, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1980.
8.29 Wellmer, A. Zur Dialektik von Moderne und Postmoderne: Vernunftkritik nach
Adorno, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1985.
Adorno and Horkheimer
8.30 Dialektik der Aufklärung, Amsterdam: Querido, 1947.
8.31 Sociologia, Frankfurt: Europäische Verlagsanstalt, 1962.
Benjamin

28.2 Page 272

▲back to top
Critical theory 234
Primary texts
For Benjamin’s collected works, see Gesammelte Schriften (7 vols), ed. R.Tiedemann
and H.Schweppenhäuser, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1972–89. See also Briefe (2 vols), ed.
G.Scholem and T.Adorno, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1966; Schriften (2 vols), ed. T.Adorno
and G.Scholem, Frankfurt 1955. See also Habilitationakte Walter Benjamins in the
archive of the former philosophy faculty at the University of Frankfurt. For a
bibliography see R.Tiedemann, ‘Bibliographie der Erstdrucke von Benjamins Schriften’,
in Zur Aktualität Walter Benjamins, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1972, pp. 227–97.
8.32 Deutsche Menschen: Eine Folge von Briefen, written under pseudonym Detlef Holz,
Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1977.
8.33 Zur Kritik der Gewalt and andere Aufsätze, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1965.
8.34 Berliner Chronik, ed. G.Scholem, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1970.
8.35 Moskauer Tagebuch, ed. G.Smith, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1980.
Translations
8.36 Illuminations, Essays and Reflections, ed. and introduced by H.Arendt, New York:
Schocken, 1968.
8.37 Charles Baudelaire; A Lyric Poet in the Era of High Capitalism, London: New Left
Books, 1973.
8.38 Understanding Brecht, London: New Left Books, 1973.
8.39 Communication and the Evolution of Society, Boston: Beacon Press, 1979.
Criticism
8.40 Buck-Morss, S. The Dialectics of Seeing: Walter Benjamin and the Arcades Project,
Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1989.
8.41 Roberts, J. Walter Benjamin, London: Macmillan Press, 1982.
8.42 Scheurmann, I. and Scheurmann, K. Für Walter Benjamin: Dokumente, Essays und
ein Entwurf, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1992.
8.43 Scholem, G. The Correspondence of Walter Benjamin and Gerschom Scholem:
Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1992. Frankfurt, 1975.
8.44 Tiedemann, R. Studien zur Walter Benjamins, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1973.
Fromm
For his collected works, see Gesamtausgabe (10 vols), ed. R.Funk, Stuttgart: Deutsche
Verlags-Anstalt, 1980–1. A bibliography is found in vol. 10.
8.45 ‘Die Entwicklung des Christusdogmas: Eine psychoanalytische Studie zur
sozialpsychologischen Funktion der Religion’, Imago, 3:4 (1930).
8.46 Escape From Freedom, New York: Farrar & Rinehart, 1941.
8.47 Man for Himself: An Inquiry into the Psychology of Ethics, New York: Rinehart,
1947.

28.3 Page 273

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 235
8.48 The Sane Society, New York: Rinehart, 1955.
8.49 The Art of Loving, New York: Rinehart, 1956.
8.50 Beyond the Chains of Illusion: My Encounter with Marx and Freud, New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1962.
8.51 The Heart of Man, New York: Harper & Row, 1964.
8.52 The Anatomy of Human Destructiveness, New York: Holt, Rinehart, Winston, 1973.
8.53 To Have or To Be? New York: Harper & Row, 1976.
Grünberg
8.54 ‘Festrede gehalten zur Einweihung des Instituts für Sozialforschung an der
Universität Frankfurt a.M. am 22 Juni 1924’, Frankfurter Universitätsreden, 20
(1924).
Habermas
Primary texts
8.55 Das Absolute und die Geschichte: van der Zweispaltigkeit in Schellings Denken,
dissertation, Universität Bonn, 1954.
8.56 Strukturwandel der Öffenlichkeit, Berlin: Luchterland, 1962.
8.57 Technik und Wissenschaft als Ideologie, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1968.
8.58 Erkenntnis und Interesse, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1969.
8.59 Theorie und Praxis, (2nd edn) Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1971.
8.60 Kultur und Kritik: Verstreute Aufsätze, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1973.
8.61 Legitimationsprobleme im Spätkapitalismus, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1973.
8.62 Zur Rekonstruktion des Historischen Materialismus, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1976.
8.63 Communication and the Evolution of Society, Boston: Beacon Press, 1979.
8.64 Theorie des kommunikativen Handelns, 2 vols, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1981.
8.65 Zur Logik der Sozialwissenschaften, 5th edn, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1982.
8.66 Moralbewuβtsein und kommunikatives Handeln, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1983.
8.67 Vorstudien und Ergänzungen zur Theorie des kommunikativen Handelns, Frankfurt:
Suhrkamp, 1984.
8.68 Philosophische Diskurs der Moderne, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1985.
8.69 Eine Art Schadensabwicklung, Frankfurt, Suhrkamp, 1987.
8.70 Nachmetaphysisches Denken, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1988.
8.71 Texte und Kontexte, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1990.
8.72 Erläuterungen zur Diskursethik, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1991.
8.73 Vergangenheit als Zukunft, Zürich: Pendo Interview, 1991.
8.74 Faktizität und Geltung: Beiträge zur Diskurstheorie des Rechts und des
demokratischen Rechtsstaats, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1992.
Translations
8.75 Structural Change of the Public Sphere, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1989.

28.4 Page 274

▲back to top
Critical theory 236
8.76 Toward a Rational Society, London: Heinemann, 1971.
8.77 Knowledge and Human Interests, Boston: Beacon Press, 1971.
8.78 Theory and Practice, London: Heinemann, 1974.
8.79 Legitimation Crisis, Boston: Beacon Press, 1975.
8.80 The Theory of Communicative Action, 2 vols, Boston: Beacon Press, 1984, 1987.
8.81 On the Logic of the Social Sciences, Cambridge, Mass., MIT Press, 1988.
8.82 Moral Consciousness and Communicative Action, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press,
1989.
8.83 The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1987.
8.84 The New Conservatism: Cultural Criticism and the Historians’ Debate, Cambridge,
Mass.: MIT Press, 1989.
8.85 Post-Metaphysical Thinking, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1992.
Criticism
8.86 Arato, A. and Cohen J. (eds) Civil Society and Political Theory, Cambridge, Mass.:
MIT Press, 1992.
8.87 Bernstein, R. (ed.) Habermas and Modernity, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1985.
8.88 Calhoun, C. (ed.) Habermas and the Public Sphere, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press,
1992.
8.89 Dallmayr, W. (ed.) Materialen zu Habermas ‘Erkenntnis und Interesse’, Frankfurt:
Suhrkamp, 1974.
8.90 Flynn, B. Political Philosophy at the Closure of Metaphysics, London: Humanities
Press, 1992.
8.91 Held, D. and Thompson, J. (eds) Habermas: Critical Debates, Cambridge, Mass.:
MIT Press, 1982.
8.92 Honneth, A. Kritik der Macht, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1985.
8.93 Honneth, A. and Joas, H. (eds) Communicative Action: Essays on Jürgen
Habermas’ Theory of Communicative Action, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1991.
8.94 Honneth, A. et al. (eds) Zwischenbetrachtungen im Prozess der Aufklärung,
Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1989.
8.95 McCarthy, T. The Critical Theory of Jürgen Habermas, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT
Press, 1978.
8.96 Rasmussen, D. Reading Habermas, Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1990. Rasmussen, D.
(ed.) Universalism and Communitarianism, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1988.
8.97 Schnädelbach, H. Reflexion und Diskurs, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1977.
8.98 Thompson, J. Critical Hermeneutics: A Study in the Thought of Paul Ricoeur and
Jürgen Habermas, New York: Cambridge University Press, 1981.
Horkheimer
For Horkheimer’s collected works, see Gesammelte Schriften (18 vols), ed. G. Noerr and
A.Schmidt, Frankfurt: Fischer, 1987–. Most of Horkheimer’s essays in the Zeitschrift für
Sozialforschung are found in Kritische Theorie: Eine Dokumentation (2 vols), ed.
A.Schmidt, Frankfurt: Fischer, 1968. See also Akte Max Horkheimer, 1922–65 in the

28.5 Page 275

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 237
archives of the former philosophy faculty at the University of Frankfurt. For a
bibliography, see Horkheimer Heute, ed. A. Schmidt and N.Altwicker, Frankfurt:
Fischer, 1986, pp. 372–99.
8.99 ‘Die Gegenwärtige Lage der Sozialphilosophie und die Aufgaben eines Instituts für
Sozialforschung’, Frankfurter Universitätsreden, 37 (1931).
8.100 Dämmerung, written under the pseudonym Heinrich Regius, Zürich: Oprecht and
Helbling, 1934.
8.101 Eclipse of Reason, New York: Oxford University Press, 1974.
8.102 ‘Zum Begriff der Vernunft’, Frankfurter Universitätsreden, 7 (1953).
8.103 Kritische Theorie: Eine Dokumentation, 2 vols, ed. A.Schmidt, Frankfurt: Fischer,
1968.
8.104 Critical Theory, New York: Herder & Herder, 1972.
8.105 Critique of Instrumental Reason, New York: Seabury Press, 1974.
Criticism
8.106 Gumnior, H. and Ringguth, R. Horkheimer, Reinbeck bei Hamburg: Rowohlt,
1973.
8.107 Tar, Z. The Frankfurt School: The Critical Theories of Max Horkheimer and
Theodor Adorno, New York: Wiley, 1977.
Lowenthal
For his collected works, see Schriften (4 vols), ed. H.Dubiel, Frankfurt, 1980.
8.108 Prophets of Deceit: A Study of the Techniques of the American Agitator, Palo Alto:
Pacific Books, 1970.
8.109 Literature and the Image of Man, Boston: Beacon Press, 1957.
8.110 Literature, Popular Culture, and Society, Palo Alto: Pacific Books, 1968.
8.111 Critical Theory and Frankfurt Theorists: Lectures, Correspondence,
Conversations, New Brunswick: Transaction Books, 1989.
Marcuse
For Marcuse’s collected works, see Gesammelte Schriften (9 vols), Frankfurt: Suhrkamp,
1978–87. For a complete bibliography of Marcuse’s works, see The Critical Spirit:
Essays in Honor of Herbert Marcuse, ed. K.Wolff and B.Moore, Boston: Beacon Press,
1967.
8.112 Reason and Revolution: Hegel and the Rise of Social Theory, New York: Oxford
University Press, 1941.
8.113 Eros and Civilization: A Philosophical Inquiry Into Freud, Boston: Beacon Press,
1955.
8.114 Reason and Revolution: Hegel and the Rise of Social Theory, 2nd edn, Boston:
Beacon Press, 1960.
8.115 Eros and Civilization, 2nd edn, with preface, ‘Political Preface, 1966’, Boston:
Beacon Press, 1966.

28.6 Page 276

▲back to top
Critical theory 238
8.116 Negations: Essays in Critical Theory, Boston: Beacon Press, 1968.
8.117 Counterrevolution and Revolt, Boston: Beacon Press, 1972.
8.118 The Aesthetic Dimension: Towards a Critique of Marxist Aesthetics, Boston:
Beacon Press, 1978.
Criticism
8.119 Görlich, B. Die Wette mit Freud: Drei Studien zu Herbert Marcuse, Frankfurt:
Nexus, 1991.
8.120 Institut für Sozialforschung (eds) Kritik und Utopie im Werk von Herbert Marcuse,
Frankfurt: Suhrkamp, 1992.
8.121 Pippin, R. (ed.) Marcuse: A Critical Theory and the Promise of Utopia, South
Hadley: Bergin & Garvey, 1988.
Pollock
8.122 The Economic and Social Consequences of Automation, Oxford: Basil Blackwell,
1957.
General criticism
8.123 Benhabib, S. Critique, Norm, and Utopia: A Study of the Foundations of Critical
Theory, New York: Columbia University Press, 1986.
8.124 Benhabib, S. and Dallmayr, F. (eds) The Communicative Ethics Controversy,
Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1990.
8.125 Bubner, R. Essays in Hermeneutics and Critical Theory, New York: Columbia
University Press, 1988.
8.126 Dallmayr. F. Between Freiberg and Frankfurt: Toward a Critical Ontology,
Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1991.
8.127 Dubiel, H. Kritische Theorie der Gesellschaft, München: Juventa, 1988.
8.128 Dubiel, H. Theory and Politics, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1985.
8.129 Guess, R. The Idea of Critical Theory, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1981.
8.130 Held, D. An Introduction to Critical Theory, London: Hutchinson, 1980.
8.131 Jay, M. The Dialectical Imagination: A History of the Frankfurt School and the
Institute of Social Research, 1923–1950, Boston: Little Brown, 1973.
8.132 Kearney, R. Modern Movements in European Philosophy, Manchester: Manchester
University Press, 1987.
8.133 Kellner, D. Critical Theory, Marxism and Modernity, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins
University Press, 1989.
8.134 McCarthy, T. Ideal and Illusions: On Reconstruction and Reconstruction in
Contemporary Critical Theory, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1991.
8.135 Marcus, J. and Tar, Z. (eds) Foundations of the Frankfurt School of Social
Research, London: Transaction Books, 1984.
8.136 Norris, C. What’s Wrong with Postmodernism: Critical Theory and the Ends of

28.7 Page 277

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 239
Philosophy, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1990.
8.137 O’Neill, J. (ed.) On Critical Theory, New York: Seabury Press, 1976.
8.138 Schmidt, A. Zur Idee der Kritischen Theorie, München: Hanser, 1974.
8.139 Wellmer, A. Critical Theory of Society, New York: Seabury Press, 1974.
8.140 Wiggershaus, R. Die Frankfurter Schule, Mun chen: Hanser, 1986.
I wish to thank James Swindal for his assistance in the preparation of the bibliography.

28.8 Page 278

▲back to top
CHAPTER 9
Hermeneutics
Gadamer and Ricoeur
G.B.Madison
THE HISTORICAL BACKGROUND: ROMANTIC HERMENEUTICS
Although the term ‘hermeneutics’ (hermeneutica) is, in its current usage, of early modern
origin,1 the practice it refers to is as old as western civilization itself. Under the
traditional appellation of ars interpretandi, hermeneutics designates the art of textual
interpretation, as instanced in biblical exegesis and classical philology. In modern times,
hermeneutics progressively redefined itself as a general, overall discipline dealing with
the principles regulating all forms of interpretation. It was put forward as a discipline that
is called into play whenever we encounter texts (or text-analogues) whose meaning is not
readily apparent and which accordingly require an active effort on the part of the
interpreter in order to be made intelligible. In addition to this exegetical function,
hermeneutics also viewed its task as that of drawing out the practical consequences of the
interpreted meaning (‘application’). This dual role of understanding (or explanation)
(subtilitas intelligendi, subtilitas explicandi) and application (subtilitas applicandi) is
perhaps especially evident in the case of juridical hermeneutics where the task is not only
to ascertain the ‘meaning’ or ‘intent’ of the law but also to discern how best to apply it in
the circumstances at hand.
In the early nineteenth century, at the hands of Friedrich Schleiermacher (1768–1834),
the scope of hermeneutics was expanded considerably. Indeed, Schleiermacher claimed
for hermeneutics the status of an overall theory (allgemeine Hermeneutik) specifying the
procedures and rules for the understanding not only of textual meaning but of cultural
meaning in general (Kunstlehre). Rooted in the romantic tradition, Schleiermacher, often
referred to as the ‘father of hermeneutics’, empha-sized the ‘psychological’ or
‘divinatory’ function of hermeneutics—the purpose of interpretation being that of
‘divining’ the intentions of an author, or, in other words, reconstructing psychologically
an author’s mental life (‘to understand the discourse just as well as and even better than
its creator’).2 The purpose of hermeneutics is thus that of unearthing the original meaning
of a text, this being equated by Schleiermacher with the meaning originally intended by
the author.3 This view of hermeneutics as a form of cultural understanding
(understanding another culture or historical epoch, for instance) and the concomitant,
‘psychological’ view of understanding (as a grasping of the subjective intentions of
authors or actors) was developed more fully towards the end of the century by Wilhelm
Dilthey (1833–1911).
One of the most salient features of the nineteenth century was the rapid expansion of

28.9 Page 279

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 241
the human sciences (Geisteswissenschaften), historiography in particular. The task that
Dilthey set himself was that of furnishing a methodological foundation for these new
sciences, similar to the way in which, a century earlier, Kant had sought to ‘ground’ the
natural sciences philosophically. Conceding, like Kant, an exclusivity in the explanation
of natural being to the natural sciences (Naturwissenschaften), Dilthey sought to go
beyond Kant by arguing (as the historian J.G.Droysen had before him) that the human
sciences have their own specific subject matter and, accordingly, their own, equally
specific, method. A spokesperson for the Lebensphilosophie current at the time, Dilthey
maintained that the proper object of the human sciences is something specifically human,
namely the inner, psychic life (Erlebnis, lived experience) of historical and social agents.
Whereas the natural sciences seek to explain phenomena in a causal and, so to speak,
external fashion (Erklären), the method proper to the human sciences is that of
emphathetic understanding (Verstehen). The task of the human scientist is, or should be,
that of transporting himself or herself into an alien or distant life experience, as this
experience manifests or ‘objectifies’ itself in documents, texts (‘written monuments’) and
other traces or expressions (Ausdrucken) of inner life experiences and world-views
(Weltanschauungen). The Lebensphilosophie assumption operative here is that, because
the human scientist is a living being, a part of life, he or she is, as a matter of principle,
capable of reconstructively understanding other objectifications of life. Understanding
(the method proper to the human sciences) is thus a matter of interpretation, and
interpretation (Deutung) is the means whereby, through its outward, objective
‘expressions’, we can come to know in its own innerness what is humanly other, can, in
effect, imaginatively coincide with it; relive it. Dilthey thus viewed the goal or purpose of
interpretation as that of achieving a reproduction (Nachbildung) of alien life experiences.
Dilthey’s purpose in conceptualizing the hermeneutical enterprise in this way was, as I
indicated, to secure for the human sciences their own methodological autonomy and their
own scientific objectivity vis-à-vis the natural sciences. The human sciences can lay
claim to their own rightful epistemological status, can, indeed, lay claim to validity, if, as
was Dilthey’s aim, it can be shown that there is a ‘method’ which is specific to them, and
which is different from the one characteristic of the natural sciences. This, Dilthey
argued, was the method of Verstehen, as opposed to that of Erklärung; the task of the
human sciences is not to ‘explain’ human phenomena, but to ‘understand’ them.
As a matter of historical interest, it may be noted that Dilthey’s ‘solution’ to what
could be called the ‘problem of the human (or social) sciences’ was revived several
decades later in the mid twentieth century by Peter Winch, at roughly the same time that
Gadamer and Ricoeur were developing their own quite different version of hermeneutics.
In opposition to the then dominant positivist approach to the human sciences, which (as
in the case of Carl Hempel and his ‘covering law’ model)4 maintained that these
disciplines could be made ‘scientific’ if they could manage, somehow, to incorporate the
explanatory methods of the natural sciences, Winch argued that the ‘explanatory’
approach is totally inappropriate in the human sciences. With Wittgenstein’s notion of
‘forms of life’ in mind, Winch maintained that ‘the concepts used by primitive peoples
can only be interpreted in the context of the way of life of those peoples’. The task of the
anthropologist, for instance, can be no more than that of empathetically projecting
himself or herself into an alien ‘form of life’. When one has empathetically described in

28.10 Page 280

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 242
this way a particular ‘language game’, there is nothing more to be done. Like Dilthey,
Winch drew a radical distinction between empathetic understanding and causal
explanation and suggested that the human sciences should limit themselves to the former,
arguing that human or social relations are an ‘unsuitable subject for generalizations and
theories of the scientific son to be formulated about them’. ‘The concepts used by
primitive peoples’, he insisted, ‘can only be interpreted in the context of the way of life of
those peoples.’5 Winch’s position is accurately characterized by Richard J.Bernstein in
the following terms:
Winch’s arguments about the logical gap between the social and the natural can
be understood as a linguistic version of the dichotomy between the
Naturwissenschaften and the Geisteswissenschaften. Even the arguments that he
uses to justify his claims sometimes read like a translation, in the new linguistic
idiom, of those advanced by Dilthey.6
The important thing to note in this regard is how this Diltheyan-style attempt to make of
life a special and irreducible category and to set it up as the foundational justification for
a special and irreducible son of science is, by that very fact, to oppose it to another
distinct category, that of nature, which generates another, opposed kind of science.
Explanation and understanding are viewed as two different, and even antagonistic, modes
of inquiry. As we shall see later in this chapter, one of the prime objectives of Ricoeur’s
hermeneutics has been to overcome the understanding/explanation dichotomy inherited
from Dilthey which has bedevilled so much of the debate in the twentieth century as to
the epistemological status of the human sciences. Indeed, it could be said that one of the
principal tasks of contemporary phenomenological hermeneutics7 continues to consist, on
the one hand, in ‘depsychologizing’ or ‘desubjectivizing’ the notion of meaning
(rejecting thereby an empathetic notion of understanding) and, on the other hand, and
correlatively, in attempting to specify the particular sense in which (or the degree to
which) it can properly be said that the human sciences are indeed ‘explanatory’.
In order to position ourselves for understanding what is distinctive about the
hermeneutics of Gadamer and Ricoeur, it should also be noted that the Schleiermacher-
Dilthey tradition in hermeneutics (customarily referred to as ‘romantic hermeneutics’)
has been carried on in this century in the work of Emilio Betti and E.D.Hirsch, Jr, both of
whom have strenuously objected to the version of hermeneutics put forward by Gadamer
and Ricoeur. In an attempt to revive traditional hermeneutics (which they view
phenomenological hermeneutics as having unfortunately displaced), Betti and Hirsch
have sought to argue anew for hermeneutics as a general body of methodological
principles and rules for achieving validity in interpretation.
Betti, the founder in 1955 of an institute for hermeneutics in Rome, has sought to
resuscitate Dilthey’s concern for achieving objective validity in our interpretations of the
various ‘objectifications’ of human experience. He has attacked Gadamer for, as he sees
it, undermining the scientific concern for objectivity and, because of the emphasis that
Gadamer places on the notion of ‘application’ (to be discussed below), of opening the
door to arbitrariness (or ‘subjectivism’) in interpretation and, indeed, to relativism. At the
outset of his major work of 1962, Die Hermeneutik als allgemeine Methodik der

29 Pages 281-290

▲back to top

29.1 Page 281

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 243
Geiteswissenschaften,8 Betti indirectly accused Gadamer of abandoning the ‘venerable
older form of hermeneutics’ by having turned his back on its overriding concern for
correctness or objectivity in interpretation.
Betti’s critique was taken up by Hirsch with the publication in 1967 of the latter’s
Validity in Interpretation,9 the first original and systematic treatise on hermeneutics
written in English. As the title of his book so clearly indicates, Hirsch, like Betti and the
other romantic hermeneuticists before him, was concerned to make of hermeneutics
ascience capable of furnishing ‘correct’ interpretations of ‘verbal meanings’ presumed to
exist independently of the interpretive process itself. Hirsch’s critical arguments are much
the same as those of Betti, but he does add a new, methodological twist to his overall
position. Hirsch’s strategy for transforming interpretation into a genuine science is, quite
simply, to transfer—lock, stock and barrel—the method of hypothetico-deductionism and
Popperian falsificationism from the philosophy of the natural sciences to the humanities
and, in particular, to the interpretation of literary texts. Like Popper’s ‘logic of scientific
discovery’, Hirsch’s ‘logic of validation’ maintains that there can be no method for
‘guessing’ (‘understanding’) an author’s meaning but that once such ‘conjectures’ or
‘hypotheses’ happen to be arrived at, they can subsequently be subjected to rigorous
testing in such a way as to draw ‘probability judgments’ supported by ‘evidence’. ‘The
act of understanding’, Hirsch writes, ‘is at first a genial (or a mistaken) guess, and there
are no methods for making guesses, or rules for generating insights. The methodological
activity of interpretation commences when we begin to test and criticize our
guesses’ (Validity, p. 207). And the activity of testing ‘interpretive hypotheses’, he says,
‘is not in principle different from devising experiments that can sponsor decisions
between hypotheses in the natural sciences’ (p. 206).
The curious result of Hirsch’s attempt to make of hermeneutics a science is to have
narrowed considerably the scope that, traditionally, was claimed for it by the romantics.
Hermeneutics is no longer concerned with understanding, interpretation and application
but with interpretation alone, and this conceived of merely as ‘validation’. In Hirsch’s
hands hermeneutics becomes essentially no more than an interpretive technique (technē
hermeneutikē) for arbitrating between possible meanings, conflicting interpretations, with
the aim of deciding which of them is the one and only true meaning of the text, i.e., the
one intended by the author. Moreover, in conceiving of ‘validation’ in a Popperian and
positivistic fashion, Hirsch effectively collapses the distinction between the natural and
the human sciences,10 sacrificing in the process the concern of Dilthey and others to
safeguard the integrity and autonomy of the latter. Hirsch resolves the long-standing
explanation/understanding debate—but at the total expense of ‘understanding’. He
uncritically endorses the scientistic claim that the natural sciences represent a model for
all legitimate knowledge and are canonical for all other forms of knowledge.
In the wake of Betti and Hirsch, critics of Gadamer and Ricoeur continue to iterate the
(by now well-worn) objection that their version of hermeneutics is incapable of
generating a method by means of which ‘correct’ interpretations of textual meaning can
be conclusively arrived at and that, because of this, it inevitably results in subjectivism
and relativism.11 We can begin to understand what is specific to phenomenological
hermeneutics when we can understand its own reasons for rejecting the modernist
obsession with ‘method’ and when, moreover, we can see why phenomenological

29.2 Page 282

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 244
hermeneutics should in its turn accuse traditional hermeneutics of falling prey to a naive
form of objectivism.
MOVING BEYOND THE TRADITION: PHENOMENOLOGICAL
HERMENEUTICS
It would seem to be something of a general rule that any specifically human phenomenon
is understood best when understood in terms of that from which it differs. It is certainly
the case in any event that what goes to make up the specificity of the hermeneutics
defended by Hans-Georg Gadamer (1900-) and Paul Ricoeur (1915-) is the way in which
it differs from, and stands opposed to, traditional hermeneutics, as portrayed in the
preceding remarks. For his part Ricoeur has explicitly characterized his hermeneutics in
terms of its oppositional role when he declared: ‘I am fighting on two fronts.’ The two
fronts he is referring to are, on the one hand, the ‘romantic illusion’ of empathetic
understanding and, on the other hand, the ‘positivist illusion’ of a textual objectivity
closed in upon itself and wholly independent of the subjectivity of both author and
reader’ (OI, 194–5).12 In the latter case Ricoeur had the structuralist approach to texts in
mind, but his remark would apply equally well to Hirsch’s brand of hermeneutics to the
degree that the latter seeks to maintain the pristine objectivity of a text closed in upon
itself and wholly independent of the subjectivity of the reader (of its ‘application’).
Gadamer has sought in a similar way to clarify his position by differentiating it from that
of Betti.
In the Foreword to the second edition (1965) of his magnum opus, Truth and Method,
Gadamer attempted to defend himself against Betti’s criticisms. His response was
basically two-sided. On the one hand, he sought to justify his lack of concern for
‘method’ and, on the other, to defend himself against the charge of ‘subjectivism’. In
regard to the question of method he stated:
My revival of the expression ‘hermeneutics’, with its long tradition, has
apparently led to some misunderstandings.13 I did not intend to produce an art
or technique of understanding, in the manner of the earlier hermeneutics. I did
not wish to elaborate a system of rules to describe, let alone direct, the
methodical procedure of the human sciences…. My real concern was and
isphilosophic: not what we do or what we ought to do, but what happens to us
over and above our wanting and doing.14
In other words, the goal that Gadamer set himself was that of envisaging
hermeneutics in a way thoroughly different from the way in which it
traditionally had been envisaged. In stark contrast to the positivistinspired view
of hermeneutics that Hirsch was subsequently to defend, Gadamer’s goal was
not prescriptive (laying down ‘rules’ for (correct) interpretation) but, in the
phenomenological sense of the term, descriptive (seeking to ascertain what
actually occurs whenever we seek to understand something). The difference
between Gadamer’s hermeneutics and traditional hermeneutics could be aptly
compared to the difference between traditional philosophy of science, of either a

29.3 Page 283

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 245
positivist or Popperian sort, and the radically new approach to the philosophy
of science instituted by Thomas Kuhn in The Structure of Scientific Revolutions
(first published in 1962, two years after the original German edition of
Gadamer’s Truth and Method), a work which was to revolutionize the
philosophy of science. Analogously to Gadamer, Kuhn sought not (like, for
instance, Popper) to lay down methodological criteria that scientists must meet if
what they do is to merit the appellation ‘science’, but sought instead simply to
describe that particular activity which we refer to when we speak of someone
‘doing science’ (the actual characteristics of which are more often than not
significantly different from what scientists are liable to say they are doing when
pressed to make philosophical statements about their actual practice). With
Gadamer explicitly in mind, Kuhn was later to describe his own work as
‘hermeneutical’.
As the text cited above clearly indicates, Gadamer’s purpose was not
‘methodological’ but, as he says, ‘philosophic’. That is, Gadamer’s goal was to
elaborate a general philosophy of human understanding, in all of its various
modes. It is precisely for this reason that his thought is often referred to as
‘philosophical hermeneutics’.15 A couple of pages further on in the Foreword
Gadamer, again with reference to Betti, states his ‘philosophic concern’ in the
following way:
The purpose of my investigation is not to offer a general theory of interpretation
and a differential account of its methods (which E.Betti has done so well) but to
discover what is common to all modes of understanding and to show that
understanding is never subjective behaviour toward a given ‘object’, but towards
its effective history—the history of its influence; in other words, understanding
belongs to the being of that which is understood.
([9.7], xix)
What in the present context is to be noted is how, in this last remark, Gadamer is
attempting to respond to Betti’s accusation of ‘subjectivism’. Understanding, Gadamer is
effectively saying, is not so much a ‘subjective’ as it is an ontological process.
Understanding is not something that the human subject or we ‘do’ as it is something that,
by reason of our ‘belonging’ to history (Zugehörigkeit), happens to us. Understanding is
not a subjective accomplishment but an ‘event’ (Geshehen), i.e., ‘something of which a
prior condition is its being situated within a process of tradition’ ([9.7], 276).
If, as we shall see, phenomenological hermeneutics is adamantly opposed to all forms
of objectivism, it is equally opposed to all forms of modern subjectivism. As Ricoeur
would say, it is continually constrained to do battle on two fronts. The central thrust of
phenomenological hermeneutics is to move beyond both objectivism and subjectivism,
which is to say, also, beyond relativism. One of the core features of Ricoeur’s
hermeneutics has been his ongoing attempt to articulate a notion of ‘the subject’ which
would be free from all forms of modern subjectivism.16 Unlike other forms of postmodern
thought, hermeneutics has strenuously resisted the current, and very fashionable, anti-
humanist calls for the abolition of ‘the subject’ (the ‘end of “man”’). The notion of the

29.4 Page 284

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 246
subject, hermeneutics insists, is not to be abandoned—but it must indeed be stripped of
all its modernist, metaphysical accretions. This continued allegiance on the part of
hermeneutics to the notion of the subject testifies to its rootedness in the
phenomenological tradition inaugurated by Edmund Husserl.
THE PHILOSOPHICAL BACKGROUND OF PHENOMENOLOGICAL
HERMENEUTICS: HUSSERL AND HEIDEGGER
All of Husserl’s philosophizing, from roughly 1900 onwards, was a sustained attempt to
overcome the debilitating legacy of modern philosophy and, in particular, the
subject/object dichotomy instituted by Descartes.17 A pivotal moment in the unfolding of
Husserl’s phenomenology occurred in 1907 with a series of five lectures delivered in
Göttingen (published subsequently in 1950 by Walter Biemel under the title Die Idee der
Phänomenologie). In these lectures Husserl introduced his celebrated ‘phenomenological
reduction’, the express purpose of which was to achieve a decisive overcoming of what
the French translator of this work, Alexandre Lowit, has called ‘la situation phénoménale
du clivage’, in other words, the subject/object split which presides over the origin and
subsequent unfolding of modern philosophy from Descartes onwards. To speak in
contemporary terms, what Husserl was seeking to accomplish by means of the
‘reduction’ was a thoroughgoing ‘decon-struction’ of the central problematic of modern
philosophy itself, namely, the ‘epistemological’ problem of how an isolated subjectivity,
closed in upon itself, can none the less manage to ‘transcend’ itself in such a way as to
achieve a ‘knowledge’ of the ‘external world’.18 This, it may be noted, is, in one of its
many variants, the problem which continues to inform the work of Betti and Hirsch (how
to ‘validate objectively’ our own ‘subjective ideas’).
Thanks to the ‘reduction’ however, Husserl effectively displaced or deconstructed the
epistemological problematic itself. He did so by discrediting (revealing the ‘philosophical
absurdity’ of) its two constitutive notions: the notion of an ‘objective’, ‘in-itself’ world
and the correlative notion that ‘knowledge’ consists in forming inner ‘representations’ on
the part of an isolated ‘cognizing subject’ of this supposedly objective or ‘external’
world. The subsequent history of the phenomenological movement in the twentieth
century—from Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty to Gadamer and Ricoeur—could be viewed
as nothing other than an attempt ‘to extract the most extreme possibilities’19 from
Husserl’s own deconstruction of the epistemological problematic. Building on Husserl’s
own point of departure, phenomenological hermeneutics has systematically defined itself
in terms of its opposition to both objectivism and subjectivism.
If the key methodological notion in Husserl’s phenomenology is that of the reduction,
the key substantive notion is the one that Husserl uncovered late in his life, that of the
life-world (Lebenswelt). This too was to play a decisive role in the evolution of
hermeneutics.20 As was later pointed out by Merleau-Ponty (who in his own revision of
Husserlian phenomenology anticipated a great many of the themes developed later on in
greater detail by hermeneutics), what Husserl’s phenomenological reduction serves
ultimately to reveal is the life-world itself and this, Merleau-Ponty observed, is exactly
what Heidegger referred to as ‘being-in-the-world’.21 The basic paradigm of modern

29.5 Page 285

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 247
epistemologism, dominated as it is by the subject/object dichotomy, is that of an isolated
subjectivity (the ‘mind’) which is supposed to be related to the ‘external’ or ‘objective’
world by means of ideas or sense impressions (subsisting within the ‘mind’ itself) which
are said to be ‘true’ (a ‘true likeness’) to the degree that they adequately ‘represent’ or
‘refer to’ facts or states of affairs in ‘reality’. This modernist view of things (which could
appropriately be labelled ‘referentialist-representationalism’) is one that continues to
prevail with theorists such as Betti and Hirsch. It was in opposition to modern
epistemologism, however, that Martin Heidegger argued in Being and Time (1927) that a
relation (a commercium) between the subject and the world does not first get established
on the level of ‘cognition’ or ‘knowledge’.22 Before any explicit awareness on its part,
the human subject (Dasein) finds itself already in a world, ‘thrown’ into it, as it were.
This surrounding world, the life-world, is thus one which is ‘always already’ there. What
this pregivenness (as Husserl would say) of the life-world means is that, by virtue of our
very existence, i.e. our ‘being-in-the-world’, we possess what Heidegger called a ‘pre-
ontological understanding’ of the world (of ‘being’). All explicit understandings or
theorizings do no more than build on this always presupposed—and thus never fully
thematizable—‘ground’. For Heidegger, therefore, understanding is not so much a mode
of ‘knowing’ as it is one of ‘being’. As Gadamer would subsequently put it,
consciousness is more Sein than Bewusstsein.
Heidegger refers to this situation as ‘facticity’: if there is an always presupposed
element in all our explicit understandings, this means that, in our various interpretations
of things, we can never hope to achieve total transparency. The lesson that
phenomenological hermeneutics was to draw from this Heideggerian position is that
human understanding is essentially ‘finite’. As Ricoeur has said: ‘The gesture of
hermeneutics is a humble one of acknowledging the historical conditions to which all
human understanding is subsumed in the reign of finitude.’23 What this means is that
there can be no ‘science’, in the traditional philosophical sense of the term (episteme,
scientia intuitiva), of existence (or of ‘being’). The hermeneutics of Gadamer and
Ricoeur could most fittingly be characterized as nothing other than a systematic attempt
to draw all the philosophical conclusions that follow from a recognition of the
inescapable finitude of human understanding (this is why they will argue, against
objectivists such as Betti and Hirsch, that it is impossible ever to arrive at the (one and
only) correct interpretation of a text or any other human product). Their hermeneutics
will be ‘a hermeneutics of finitude’ ([9.15], 96).
Heidegger’s ‘existential analytic’—his phenomenological-interpretive description of
human existence and its basic structures (what he referred to as Existentialen), his attempt
to elaborate a ‘hermeneutics of facticity’, of everyday life, the life-world—provided the
crucial impetus for subsequent hermeneutics. What is peculiar to Heidegger’s
hermeneutics is that it is an ontological hermeneutics. It is ontological (rather than
‘methodological’) in that, unlike what traditionally had gone under the heading
‘hermeneutics’, it was not concerned to specify criteria for ‘correct’ interpretations but
instead had for its object something much more fundamental (Heidegger referred to his
project as ‘fundamental ontology’), namely a properly philosophical elucidation or
interpretation of the basic (ontological) structures of human understanding which is to
say, human existence) itself. The move that Heidegger made in this connection was to

29.6 Page 286

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 248
prove decisive for the subsequent development of hermeneutics. Understanding,
Heidegger insisted, is not merely one attribute of our being, something that we may
‘have’ or not (in the sense in which we are said to ‘have knowledge’); understanding is
rather that which, as existing beings, we most fundamentally are.
As existing beings, we exist only in the mode of becoming (as Kierkegaard—from
whom Heidegger drew much of his inspiration—would have said), and thus what we
most fundamentally are is not anything fixed and given but rather what we can become,
i.e., possibility. This in turn means that the understanding which we are is itself nothing
other than an understanding of the possible ways in which we could be (‘Understanding
is the Being of such potentiality-for Being’, BT, 183). As existing, understanding beings,
we are continually ‘projecting’ possible ways of being (our being is defined in terms of
these ‘projects’). What Heidegger calls ‘interpretation’ (Auslegung) is itself nothing other
than a possibility belonging to understanding. That is, when our prethematic, pre-
predicative or tacit understanding is developed, it becomes interpretation.24 Interpretation
(explication, laying-out, Auslegen) is the working-out (Ausarbeitung) of the possible
modes of being that have been projected by the understanding. The point that Heidegger
is insisting on is that interpretation is always derivative; interpretation discloses only
what has already been understood (albeit only tacitly).
In other words, interpretation is never without presuppositions (Heidegger referred to
these as ‘fore-structures’). It is never the mere mirroring of an ‘objectivity’ which simply
stands there naked before us (the ‘bare facts’); in interpretation there is always something
that is ‘taken for granted’. With the example of textual interpretation in mind, Heidegger
pointedly remarks that if in one’s interpretations one appeals to ‘what “stands there”, then
one finds that what “stands there” in the first instance is nothing other than the obvious
undiscussed assumption [Vormeinung] of the person who does the interpreting’ (BT,
192). There is, then, an essential circularity between understanding and interpretation.
In this way Heidegger effectively ontologizes what traditional hermeneutics had called
the ‘hermeneutical circle’, which, as a methodological rule, simply meant that when
interpreting a text one ought continually to interpret the parts in terms of the whole, and
the whole in terms of the parts. For Heidegger, however, the ‘circle’ of understanding
goes much deeper; it is in fact rooted in the existential constitution of human being itself.
Human understanding itself has a circular structure. This amounts to saying that all
interpretive understandings are presuppositional or ‘anticipatory’ by nature (interpretation
must…already operate in that which is understood’ (BT, 194).
Since the ‘circle’ is constitutive of our very being—since, in other words, it constitutes
the very condition of possibility of our understanding anything at all—it would be
altogether misleading to view it, as a logician might, as a ‘vicious circle’. Even to view
the circularity involved in all understanding—its ‘presuppositional’ nature—as an
inevitable or unfortunate imperfection of human understanding that, in an ideal situation,
could or ought to be overcome would mean, Heidegger says, that one has misunderstood
the act of understanding ‘from the ground up’ (BT, 194). Indeed, all attempts to deny the
‘circle’ or to escape from it testify to a false consciousness. What Heidegger is here
calling into question is the Cartesian ideal that has dominated all of modern philosophy,
namely, the notion that truly ‘objective’ knowledge must be presuppositionless or
‘foundational’, grounded upon some rock-solid, ‘objective’ foundation (even the logical

29.7 Page 287

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 249
positivists continued to demand such a foundation and believed that they had found it in a
combination of the laws of logic and raw ‘sense data’). Thus, he maintains that the
objectivistic ideal of ‘a historiology which would be as independent of the standpoint of
the observer as our knowledge of Nature is supposed to be’ is a false ideal, an idol, in
fact, of the understanding. Both scientistic objectivism and common sense (the ‘natural
attitude’, as Husserl would have said) misunderstand understanding (see BT, 363). The
important thing, Heidegger says, the lesson to be drawn from the phenomenological
analysis of human being-in-the-world, is that we ought not even to try to get out of the
circle but should attempt rather ‘to come into it in the right way’ (BT, 195). We must, in
other words, learn in our theorizing to do without ‘foundations’ (such as, in textual
interpretation, the supposedly original intention of the author). It would not be too much
of an exaggeration to say that the whole meaning and significance of post-Heideggerian
hermeneutics consists in its strenuous attempt to take this lesson to heart and,
accordingly, to elaborate a theory of understanding and interpretation that could most
properly be termed ‘non-foundational’.
PHENOMENOLOGICAL HERMENEUTICS: THE BASIC THEMES
The putative purpose of Heidegger’s lengthy analysis in Being and Time of the basic
structures of human being was to set the stage for raising anew the age-old question of
the meaning of Being, a question which Heidegger believed had increasingly been lost
sight of since the time of the ancient Greeks. In subsequent writings Heidegger attempted
to find a more direct approach to the Being-question (die Seinsfrage), abandoning in the
process the existential orientation of his earlier work which, he believed, had distracted
him from this overriding issue. The key actor in Heidegger’s later writings is no longer
the human being (Dasein) but Being itself, Being-as-such. Neither Gadamer nor Ricoeur
chose to follow Heidegger in this all-out pursuit of ‘Being’. The following remark of
Gadamer reflects well the agenda that hermeneutics has set itself—and which is not that
of Heidegger’s ontological eschatology: ‘What man needs is not only a persistent asking
of ultimate questions, but the sense of what is feasible, what is possible, what is correct,
here and now’ ([9.7], xxv).
Throughout his career Ricoeur has, for his part, held fast to a fundamentally existential
motivation, conceiving of hermeneutics as an attempt on the part of the reflecting subject
to come to grips with ‘the desire to be and the effort to exist which constitute us’25 (his
‘existentialism’ is at the root of his opposition to scientistic objectivism), and over the
last several decades Gadamer has greatly expanded the scope of Heidegger’s earlier,
existential hermeneutics (the ‘hermeneutics of facticity’), elaborating in the process an
all-inclusive philosophical discipline. As he once remarked: ‘I bypass Heidegger’s
philosophic intent, the revival of the “problem of Being”.’26 Unlike Heidegger, Gadamer
has focused his interest not on the question of ‘Being’ but on the Geisteswissenschaften,
on the nature and scope of the human sciences. ‘We make’, he said, ‘a decided relation
between the human sciences and philosophy…. The human sciences are not only a
problem for philosophy, on the contrary, they represent a problem of philosophy’ (PHC,
112). As the subject matter of his writings testifies, Ricoeur has also devoted a great deal

29.8 Page 288

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 250
of his philosophical attention to human science issues. If there is a difference between the
two hermeneuticists in this regard, it is that Ricoeur feels that Gadamer has slighted
important methodological issues having to do with the human sciences in his concern to
accord them a special ontological status vis-à-vis the natural sciences (‘an entirely
different notion of knowledge and truth’ [PHC, 113]). We shall, accordingly, return to
the relation between hermeneutics and the human sciences after having explored some of
the basic tenets of hermeneutics qua philosophy.
In responding to Betti’s charge that his shift away from the concern of traditional
hermeneutics for verificatory method encourages subjectivism and arbitrariness in
interpretation, Gadamer, it will be recalled, asserted: ‘understanding is never subjective
behaviour toward a given “object”, but towards its effective history—the history of its
influence.’ One of the most outstanding features of Gadamer’s hermeneutics is the
emphasis he places on the ‘historicality’ or tradition-laden nature of human
understanding. ‘It is not really ourselves who understand’, he in fact says, ‘it is always a
past that allows us to say, “I have understood”’ ([9.5] 58). Gadamer defends himself
against the charge of subjectivism by maintaining that interpretation is never—indeed,
can never be—the act of an isolated, monadic subject, for the subject’s own self-
understanding is inevitably a function of the historical tradition to which he or she
belongs. In fact, Gadamer attempts to turn the tables on the objectivists by arguing that
the ‘presuppositionless’ or ‘objective’ view of understanding that their theory of
interpretation calls for is an existential impossibility, that, as Heidegger would say, it
involves a thoroughgoing misunderstanding of human understanding.
It is in this context that Gadamer’s famous ‘rehabilitation’ of prejudice must be
understood. When Gadamer provocatively asserts that prejudices are integral to all
understanding, he is not condoning wilful bias or bigotry. He is simply generalizing on
Heidegger’s observations on the ‘anticipatory’ nature of understanding, the fact that all
understanding operates within the context of certain pre-given ‘fore-structures’.
‘Prejudice’ must be understood in the literal sense of a ‘pre-judgment’ (or a pre-reflective
judgment), a presupposition, not in the pejorative sense of the term which has prevailed
since the Enlightenment. The polemical thrust of Gadamer’s speaking of ‘prejudice’ is in
fact directed against what he calls the Enlightenment ‘prejudice against prejudice’ ([9.7],
240). There can be, he wants to argue, ‘legitimate prejudices’. Here is yet another, and
most basic, instance of how phenomenological hermeneutics essentially defines itself in
opposition to modernist objectivism. The aim of Gadamer’s rehabilitation of prejudice is
to call into question the very notions of reason and knowledge that we have inherited
from Cartesianism and the rationalism of the Enlightenment.
In this rationalist view of things reason stands opposed to authority; the ‘prejudice
against prejudice’ is indeed, on a deeper level, a prejudice against ‘authority’ itself and as
such. The peculiarly rationalist prejudice is that true knowledge can be had only by
freeing ourselves from all inherited beliefs and opinions (the ‘authority of the tradition’)
so as to create a tabula rasa on which genuinely ‘objective’ knowledge can be erected.
What Gadamer objects to here is the quite arbitrary way in which Enlightenment
rationalism equates authority with blind obedience and domination; as there can be
‘legitimate prejudices’, so likewise the recognition of authority can itself be fully rational.
Gadamer asserts:

29.9 Page 289

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 251
It is true that it is primarily persons that have authority; but the authority of
persons is based ultimately, not on the subjection and abdication of reason, but
on recognition and knowledge—knowledge, namely, that the other is superior to
oneself in judgment and insight and that for this reason his judgment takes
precedence, i.e., it has priority over one’s own. This is connected with the fact
that authority cannot actually be bestowed, but is acquired and must be
acquired, if someone is to lay claim to it. It rests on recognition and hence on an
act of reason itself which, aware of its own limitations, accepts that others have
better understanding. Authority in this sense, properly understood, has nothing
to do with blind obedience to a command. Indeed, authority has nothing to do
with obedience, but rather with knowledge.
([9.7],
As Gadamer goes on to say, if we accord recognition to anything, it is because ‘what
authority states is not irrational and arbitrary, but can be accepted in principle’ ([9.7],
249). There is, therefore, something like rightful authority, the recognition whereof is
itself fully rational.
Gadamer contends that the Enlightenment ideal of Reason, as a ‘faculty’ enabling the
individual to make contact with ‘reality’ unmediated by authority and tradition, is in fact
an idol of modernity. He is especially opposed to the modernist assumption that reason so
conceived (in an objectivistic-instrumentalist fashion) should serve as the basis for the
complete reorganization (‘rationalization’) of society. As Richard Bernstein points out:
‘We can read his philosophic hermeneutic as a meditation on the meaning of human
finitude, as a constant warning against the excesses of what he calls “planning reason”, a
caution that philosophy must give up the idea of an “infinite intellect”.’27
Curiously enough (though not surprisingly), the modernist quest for ‘objective
knowledge’ is itself supremely subjectivistic. It presupposes that the thinking subject has
direct access only to the contents of its own ‘mind’ (which is assumed to be fully
transparent to itself) but that, with suitable methodological procedures, this isolated
individual can, by means of Reason, achieve genuine knowledge on his or her own. An
appropriate label for this view would be ‘methodological solipsism’. For Gadamer,
however, ‘Understanding is not to be thought of so much as an action of one’s
subjectivity, but as the placing of oneself within a process of tradition, in which past and
present are constantly fused’ ([9.7], 258).
It can thus be seen that Gadamer’s defence of ‘prejudice’ goes hand in hand with the
emphasis he places on tradition; indeed, for Gadamer the ultimate locus of authority is
tradition itself. It is interesting to note in this regard that post-positivist philosophy of
science has, in the case of Thomas Kuhn, Paul Feyerabend and others, sought to highlight
the role that tradition plays in that rational enterprise called ‘science’. Scientists, it is now
recognized, do not simply ‘observe and describe’ bare facts; what they look for, and what
they accordingly find, is a function not of an abstract method (‘the experimental method’)
but of the ‘paradigms’ or research traditions in which they happen to be working (and
into which they have been enculturated in their training as scientists). This parallel
between the new philosophy of science and Gadamerian hermeneutics is perhaps

29.10 Page 290

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 252
especially interesting and noteworthy in that in his work Gadamer has focused
exclusively on the human sciences and has not sought to indicate what a hermeneutical
approach to the natural sciences might look like. But the point that the new philosophers
of science are making is a properly Gadamerian one: there are no answers ‘in
themselves’; the only answers that scientists get is to the questions they have asked, and
these are ones which they owe to the tradition within which they are working.
In his reflections on the human sciences Gadamer has devoted particular attention to
the importance of the question. The logic of the human sciences, he says, is ‘a logic of the
question’ ([9.7], 333, see also 325ff.). All knowledge comes only in the form of an
answer to a question. And much as Feyerabend was later to do in his Against Method,
Gadamer insists that ‘There is no such thing as a method of learning to ask questions, of
learning to see what needs to be questioned’ ([9.7], 329). This of course does not mean,
as a neopositivist like Hirsch would maintain, that there is no ‘art of questioning’. There
is indeed such an art, and this is precisely one we learn from the tradition to which, as
thinking beings, we belong.
From what has been said, it can be readily appreciated why, in his attempt to elaborate
an overall philosophy of human understanding, Gadamer should devote so much of his
attention to the notion of tradition. If there is no understanding without presuppositions or
‘prejudices’, then it is incumbent on a philosophical hermeneutics to thematize the role
that tradition plays in our understanding, since our enabling presuppositions are historical
by nature, something handed down to us by the tradition(s) to which we belong—a prime
instance of ‘the historicality that is part of all understanding’ ([9.7], 333). In highlighting
tradition in this way, Gadamer is led to articulate one of the core notions in his work, that
of wirkungsgeschichtliche Bewusstsein.
Like so many other German terms, this one defies easy translation. The ‘hermeneutical
consciousness’ it designates is ‘the consciousness of effective history’ or, alternatively,
‘the consciousness in which history is effectively at work’. What effective-history
‘means’ is that ‘both what seems to us worth enquiring about and what will appear as an
object of investigation’ are determined in advance ([9.7], 267–8). The term connotes a
consciousness which is at once affected by history and aware of itself as so affected, an
awareness which precludes our regarding history as an object since it is itself already
implicated in history.28 As Ricoeur characterizes it, effective-history is ‘the massive and
global fact whereby consciousness, even before its awakening as such, belongs to and
depends on that which affects it’ ([9.15], 74). ‘Effective-history’ is Gadamer’s response
to ‘historical objectivism’. Gadamer not only argues that there can be no purely
‘objective’ knowledge of history—since history is already effectively at work in all
historiological attempts at understanding it—he argues also that the rootedness of
understanding in its own history (a history which it therefore continually ‘presupposes’)
must not be viewed as an impediment to genuine understanding, to ‘truth’. Or as Ricoeur
sums it up: ‘The action of tradition [effective-history] and historical investigation are
fused by a bond which no critical consciousness could desolve without rendering the
research itself nonsensical’ ([9.15], 76).
That indeed is Gadamer’s main point. Effective-history does not signal a limitation on
our ability to understand (unless, of course, one wishes to contrast human understanding
with divine understanding, in which case human understanding will always come out the

30 Pages 291-300

▲back to top

30.1 Page 291

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 253
loser) as much as it designates the positive and productive possibility of any
understanding that lays claim to truth. To speak in traditional philosophical terms,
effective-history is the very condition of possibility of understanding. Effective-history
provides us with our ‘enabling’ presuppositions.
There is a phenomenological parallel between the world in which we exist as thinking
beings and the world in which we exist as perceiving beings: both have horizons.29
Effective-history provides us with the intelligible horizon within which, as thinking
beings, we ‘live, move, and have our being’. Now, what occurs in the case of historical or
intercultural understanding is what Gadamer calls a ‘fusion of
horizons’ (Horizontsverschmelzung). The term ‘fusion’ is perhaps misleading, however.
When we attain to a ‘hermeneutical consciousness’ of another historical or cultural
horizon, we do not coincide with the other (cf. Dilthey’s notion of nachleben, re-living),
but our horizon and that of the other partially overlap, as it were. The best illustration of
such a ‘fusion’ is that of a meaningful conversation. As Gadamer writes:
Just as in a conversation, when we have discovered the standpoint and horizon
of the other person, his ideas become intelligible, without our necessarily having
to agree with him, the person who thinks historically comes to understand the
meaning of what has been handed down, without necessarily agreeing with it, or
seeing himself in it.30
([9.7], 270)
Were one inclined to draw out the applicational significance of Gadamer’s notion of a
fusion of horizons, it would be most instructive to interpret it in the light of recent
debates about ‘incommensurability’.31 What this would serve to reveal is how the notion
of a fusion of horizons, like so many other hermeneutical notions, is an intrinsically
oppositional or dialectical notion. In regard, for instance, to the question as to whether
different cultural world-views are in any way ‘commensurable’, the fusion-of-horizons
notion would oblige one to defend a position which would be neither absolutist nor
relativist. On the one hand, the hermeneuticist would want to argue—as Richard Rorty,
for instance, has done—against the idea of ‘universal commen-suration’, the idea, that is,
that the values operative in different cultures can be measured or ranked according to
some univocal, hierarchical standard of comparison, by means of some kind of
epistemological algorithm. On the other hand, however, the hermeneuticist would want to
argue just as strenuously against an unrestrained ‘particularism’, i.e., against the outright
rejection of universalism altogether (cf. Rorty’s defence of ‘ethnocentrism’). The
hermeneutical notion of a fusion of horizons means (in practical or pragmatic terms) that
a meaningful dialogue with the ‘other’ (a genuine contact with the other, as other) is
always possible, given the necessary effort and good will—even though a Hegelian-like
Aufhebung of differences in a univocally uniform understanding is neither possible nor
even, for that matter, desirable.32 Expressing much the same point, though in a somewhat
different way, Ricoeur observes:
This [the fusion of horizons] is a dialectical concept which results from the
rejection of two alternatives: objectivism, whereby the objectification of the

30.2 Page 292

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 254
other is premissed on the forgetting of oneself; and absolute knowledge,
according to which universal history can be articulated within a single horizon.
We exist neither in closed horizons, nor within an horizon that is unique. No
horizon is closed, since it is possible to place oneself in another point of view
and in another culture…. But no horizon is unique, since the tension between the
other and oneself is unsurpassable.
([9.15], 75)
To sum up: what Gadamer has called ‘tradition’ is nothing other than the way in which
our own horizons are constantly shifting through ‘fusion’ with other horizons. ‘In a
tradition,’ he says, ‘this process of fusion is continually going on, for there old and new
continually grow together to make something of living value, without either being
explicitly distinguished from the other’ ([9.7], 273). The all-inclusive name for the
phenomenon in question is ‘understanding’.
To highlight in this way the ‘horizonal’ nature of understanding is, once again, to
underscore the essential finitude of all understanding. ‘Philosophical thinking’, Gadamer
insists, ‘is not science at all…. There is no claim of definitive knowledge, with the
exception of one: the acknowledgement of the finitude of human being in itself.’33 The
important thing to note in this regard, however, is that while an emphasis on finitude rules
out the possibility of our ever attaining to ‘definitive knowledge’, it does not exclude the
possibility of truth. It does not, that is, if and when truth is no longer conceived of in a
metaphysical fashion, as a state of rest in which one has achieved a final coincidence with
the object in question (e.g., the meaning of a text), but is reconceptualized to mean a
mode of existence in which we keep ourselves open to new experiences, to further
expansions in our horizons. Truth, for Gadamer, is not a static but a dynamic concept. It is
not an epistemological but an existential concept, designating a possible mode of being-
in-the-world. When, in the very last line of Truth and Method, Gadamer speaks of ‘a
discipline of questioning and research, a discipline that guarantees truth’, what he means
by ‘truth’ tends to coincide with the notion of openness. This is why he writes: ‘The truth
of experience always contains an orientation towards new experience…. The dialectic of
experience has its own fulfilment not in definitive knowledge, but in that openness to
experience that is encouraged by experience itself’ ([9.7], 319).34
If human understanding is effectively historical, this means that it is also linguistic
through and through, since it is through language that the tradition is effectively mediated
and ‘fused’ with the present (which means also that in the language we speak and by
means of which we achieve understanding the past continues to be effectively present).
‘The linguistic quality of understanding’, Gadamer remarks, ‘is the concretion of
effective-historical understanding’; ‘it is the nature of tradition to exist in the medium of
language’ ([9.7], 351). Ricoeur has summed up the chief consequence of the ‘new
ontology of understanding’ in the following way: ‘there is no self-understanding which is
not mediated by signs, symbols and texts…that is to say that it is language that is the
primary condition of all human experience’ (OI, 191). For both Gadamer and Ricoeur the
ultimate goal of all understanding is self-understanding, and, to the degree that this
occurs, it occurs by means of language. As was mentioned earlier, hermeneutics for
Ricoeur is nothing other than an attempt on the part of the reflecting subject to come to

30.3 Page 293

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 255
grips with ‘the desire to be’ (‘le désire d’être’), and there is, he says, a basic ‘proximity
between desire and speech’. In fact, the path to self-understanding, he says, ‘lies in the
speech of the other which leads me across the open space of signs’. Like Gadamer,
Ricoeur believes that the condition for understanding and self-understanding is the
linguistically mediated tradition to which we belong, ‘the whole treasury of symbols
transmitted by the cultures within which we have come, at one and the same time, into
both existence and speech’ (OI, 192–3).
At one point in his career,35 Ricoeur equated hermeneutics with the interpretation of
symbols, i.e., various double-meaning expressions such as stain, fall, wandering,
captivity, and so on, the purpose of hermeneutics being that of explicating the non-literal
meaning of these expressions, thereby recollecting and restoring the fullness of their
symbolic meaning. In work undertaken subsequent to what he calls his ‘linguistic turn’,
Ricoeur’s view of the scope of hermeneutics expanded to include the entire range of
human linguisticality, the issue of textuality in particular. Gadamer for his part devoted
fully one-third of Truth and Method to a discussion of language. If ‘all understanding is
interpretation’, it is equally the case, Gadamer insists, that ‘all interpretation takes place
in the medium of language’. Language, he says, ‘is the universal medium in which
understanding itself is realized’ ([9.7], 350).
This is Gadamer’s thesis concerning the ‘linguisticality’ (Sprachlichkeit) of
experience, regarded by some as ‘his most original contribution to the history of
hermeneutics’.36 As he formulates it, the thesis is a strong one:
Linguistic interpretation is the form of all interpretation, even when what is to
be interpreted is not linguistic in nature, i.e., is not a text, but is a statue or a
musical composition. We must not let ourselves be confused by these forms of
interpretation which are not linguistic, but in fact presuppose language.
([9.7], 360)
A natural reaction on the part of many readers is to object that, surely, we have
experiences which are not linguistic in nature. As if in realization of the somewhat
counter-intuitive nature of his thesis, Gadamer goes on to say:
We must understand properly the nature of the fundamental priority of language
asserted here. Indeed, language often seems ill-suited to express what we feel.
In the face of the overwhelming presence of works of art the task of expressing
in words what they say to us seems like an infinite and hopeless undertaking. It
seems like a critique of language that our desire and capacity to understand
always go beyond any statement that we can make. But this does not affect the
fundamental priority of language.
([9.7], 362)
It is indeed necessary, as Gadamer says, to understand properly the nature of the priority
being asserted here. Gadamer is not advocating a kind of Sprachidealismus, a linguistic
idealism. He is not defending a metaphysical thesis to the effect that there is nothing
outside of language or that everything can be reduced to language—as Derrida was

30.4 Page 294

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 256
subsequently perceived to be saying (‘Il n’y a pas de hors-texte’). The linguisticality-
thesis does not deny the meaningfulness of non-linguistic modes of experience; rather it
affirms that meaningfulness by maintaining that it can always, in principle, be brought to
expression (can be interpreted) in language. If the pre-linguistic could not be so
interpreted, it would indeed be meaningless to speak of it as having any meaning at all.
Thus, as Gadamer says:
language always forestalls any objection to its jurisdiction. Its universality keeps
pace with the universality of reason. Hermeneutical consciousness is only
participating in something that constitutes the general relation between language
and reason. If all understanding stands in a necessary relation of equivalence to
its possible interpretation and if there are basically no bounds set to
understanding, then the linguistic form which the interpretation of this
understanding finds must contain within it an infinite dimension that transcends
all bounds. Language is the language of reason itself.
([9.7], 363)
Ricoeur too insists on this ‘general relation between language and reason’. The operant
presupposition or ‘central intuition’37 underlying his hermeneutical endeavours is that
existence is indeed meaningful, that, notwithstanding the very real existence of
unmeaning, necessity (unfreedom) and evil, there is in existence ‘a super-abundance of
meaning to the abundance of non-sense’.38 The core of what could be called Ricoeur’s
philosophical faith is his belief in the dicibilité, the ‘sayability’, of experience. He
formulates this ‘wager for meaning’ or this ‘presupposition of meaning’ in the following
way: ‘It must be supposed that experience in all its fullness…has an expressibility
[dicibilité] in principle. Experience can be said, it demands to be said. To bring it to
language is not to change it into something else, but, in articulating and developing it, to
make it become itself ([9.15], 115).
Perhaps no more forceful statement could be adduced to highlight the fundamental
difference between hermeneutics and other forms of postmodern philosophy which also
emphasize the centrality of language but which proceed to draw from such a recognition
conclusions of a philosophically agnostic sort (cf. Derrida’s notions of différance and
‘undecidability’). For hermeneutics the fact that our understanding of things is always
mediated by language does not mean that language is a barrier preventing us from having
genuine access to ‘reality’. Precisely because of the linguisticality of understanding,
hermeneutics insists that there is—‘in principle’, as Ricoeur would say—nothing that we
might wish to understand which cannot, in one way or another, be brought to language.
As Gadamer states: ‘everything that is intelligible must be accessible to understanding
and to interpretation. The same thing is as true of understanding as of language’ ([9.7],
365). ‘Every language’, he maintains, ‘…is able to say everything it wants’ ([9.7], 363).
This of course is not to say that one could ever succeed in saying everything that there is
to be said about anything; experience of the world is not only expressible, it is infinitely
expressible and is, therefore, inexhaustible in its meaning.39
It should be noted that the hermeneutical ‘postulate of meaningfulness’, of
expressibility, is not merely an article of (philosophical) faith but is based on an

30.5 Page 295

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 257
ontological thesis as to the relationship between human understanding (what traditional
philosophy would have called the ‘mind’) and reality. The thesis is one to which
Gadamer gave the following succinct formulation: ‘Being that can be understood is
language’ ([9.7], 432). Let us attempt to unpack this very provocative assertion.
What exactly the thesis as to the ‘linguisticality of the world’ means can perhaps best
be grasped when it is reinserted in the phenomenological context from which it derives;
for hermeneutics the relation between language and the world parellels the relation
between consciousness and the world as described by Husserl. As was mentioned earlier,
the ‘phenomenological reduction’ was the means by which Husserl sought to overcome
the subject/object split of philosophical modernity. What the reduction served to reveal is
the ‘intentionality’ of consciousness: ‘all consciousness is consciousness of its object, of
the world.’ In other words, in being conscious, one is not first of all conscious of one’s
own consciousness and then, only subsequently, of an object; on the contrary, self-
consciousness is derivative—‘parasitical’, even—upon an immediate consciousness of
the object.40 Consciousness is therefore not something we have to break out of in order to
encounter the world. As Merleau-Ponty remarked, ‘there is no inner man’;41
consciousness is ‘always already’ in a world and thus is itself a mode of being-in-the-
world.
Transposed from the register of consciousness to that of language, the intentionality-
thesis means that between language and the world there exists, as Gadamer puts it, a
mutual belonging, an ‘affiliation’. What language ‘expresses’ is nothing other than the
world itself, and thus, as Gadamer says, ‘language has no independent life apart from the
world that comes to language within it’ ([9.7], 401). Echoing, as it were, Heidegger’s
characterization of language as ‘das Haus des Seins’, the home of being, Gadamer insists
on ‘the intimate unity of word and object’. Objecting to ‘the instrumentalist devaluation
of language that we find in modern times’ ([9.7], 365), Gadamer maintains that language
is not simply a tool, ‘a mere means of communication’ ([9.7], 404). ‘Language’, he says,
‘is not just one of man’s possessions in the world, but on it depends the fact that man has
a world at all.’ By strict phenomenological logic, the conclusion follows: ‘this world is
linguistic in nature’ ([9.7], 401). Thus, to speak of ‘the nature of things’ or of ‘the
language of things’ is, Gadamer remarks, to use two expressions ‘that for all intents and
purposes mean the same thing’ ([9.5], 69).
Like the notion of a fusion of horizons, the hermeneutical view of language is a
dialectical concept resulting from a rejection of two alternative views of language. On the
one hand, just as phenomenology rejects the modernist view of consciousness as a mere
‘representation’ of the ‘external’ world, so likewise hermeneutics rejects the modernist
view of language as nothing more ‘than a mere sign system to denote the totality of
objects’ ([9.7], 377). The words of a natural language, Gadamer insists, are not merely
‘signs’ that ‘refer’ to an alinguistic, pre-given reality. Words are not mere labels that we
stick on things that are fully defined in themselves; they are the very means by which the
things themselves exist for us. To say that language is the universal medium of our
experience of the world means, practically or pragmatically speaking, that it is quite
devoid of meaning to speak of a totally extra-linguistic reality. The age-old goal of
transcending language in such a way as to coincide with reality as it is ‘in itself, with a
transcendental signified (as Derrida would say), is thereby shown to be a vain and

30.6 Page 296

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 258
meaningless pursuit. Hermeneutics spells the ‘end of metaphysics’ when it insists that
being itself is (to borrow a phrase from Jacques Lacan) ‘structuré comme un langage’,
structured like a language.
On the other hand, hermeneutics also rejects not only modernism but also those
postmodern views of language which, in addition to viewing language as a mere system
of signs, maintain as well that the system is closed in upon itself and that it ‘refers’ to
nothing other than itself—which is to say, to nothing ‘real’ at all. That indeed would be a
form of linguistic idealism.
For hermeneutics, language is neither a mere tool nor an autonomous object in its own
right; it is the medium of understanding itself, and all understanding is in the last analysis
a form of self-understanding. Faithful to its origins in existential phenomenology,
hermeneutics views language as the means whereby a speaking subject arrives at
understanding in dialogue with other speaking subjects. For his basic model of
linguistically-mediated understanding, Gadamer invariably takes as his privileged
example what is itself an instance of language as praxis: conversation (Gespräch).42 He
seeks, as he says, ‘to approach the mystery of language from the conversation that we
ourselves are’ ([9.7], 340). Language, he says, ‘has its true being only in conversation, in
the exercise of understanding between people’ ([9.7], 404). By ‘conversation’ Gadamer
understands
a process of two people understanding each other [‘fusion of horizons’]. Thus it
is characteristic of every true conversation thateach opens himself to the other
person, truly accepts his point of view as worthy of consideration and gets
inside the other to such an extent that he understands not a particular individual,
but what he says. The thing that has to be grasped is the objective rightness or
otherwise of his opinion, so that they can agree with each other on the subject.
([9.7], 347)
We should note that, as Gadamer defines it, conversation is an instance of dialogue. What
makes the conversation a dialogue is that it is not simply the intersection of two
monologues; in a conversation there exists a genuine commonality. What makes for this
commonality is not the individual ‘subjectivities’ of the interlocutors but rather what the
conversation is ‘about’, ‘what is being said’, i.e., the ‘topic’ or ‘subject’ of the
conversation or what Gadamer calls die Sache, that which is at issue (at play, en jeu) in
the conversation.43 As in a game situation, what guides and rules over the conversation is
not the subjective intentions of the participants but ‘the object to which the partners in the
conversation are directed’ ([9.7], 330). It should also be noted how the above definition
of conversation also contains an implicit reference to the concept of truth, as
hermeneutics conceives of it: truth (according to one reading of Gadamer’s somewhat
ambiguous remarks on the subject) is essentially the agreement that the interlocutors
arrive at in the course of a conversation on the issue at stake.
Gadamer’s portrayal of language under the aegis of conversation is typically
‘ontological’: it is part and parcel of his overall attempt to elaborate a philosophy (an
ontology) of human understanding. However, privileging as it does the point of view of
the speaking subject (or subjects), it bypasses the approach to language taken by the

30.7 Page 297

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 259
science of linguistics and the methodological implications thereof. One of Ricoeur’s chief
preoccupations has been to remedy this situation by engaging in a debate with the
objective science of language. Resisting Gadamer’s separation of ‘truth’ from ‘method’,
Ricoeur defines his own approach vis-a-vis that of Heidegger and Gadamer as wanting to
contribute ‘to this ontological vehemence an analytical precision which it would
otherwise lack’ (OI, 196).
Like Gadamer, Ricoeur holds to ‘the conviction that discourse never exists for its own
sake, for its own glory, but that in all of its uses it seeks to bring into language an
experience, a way of living in and of Being-in-the-world which precedes it and which
demands to be said’ (OI, 196). However, he believes that it is not sufficient simply to
assert this conviction but that it must be justified given what could be called the
‘semiological’ challenge. What exactly is this challenge?
For structural or Saussurian linguistics (from which philosophicalpoststructuralism was
to draw much of its inspiration and, in particular, its rejection of the notion of ‘the
subject’), language is an autonomous system of differences, one of internal dependencies
which are self-referential and self-defining. In this respect the system has no outside, only
an inside, and, as a mere code, it is anonymous. This means that, from a ‘semiological’
point of view, language has neither subject nor meaning nor reference, nor, a fortiori, is it
to be viewed as a means of communication. It would seem, therefore, that in their views
on language hermeneutics and ‘semiology’ are irreconcilably opposed.44
Typically of his general approach to issues, Ricoeur has sought to arbitrate this dispute
and to elaborate ‘a new phenomenology of language which would take seriously the
challenge of semiology, of structural linguistics, of all the “structuralisms”’.45 He has
done so by arguing that while on the micro level of phonological and lexical units the
structuralist approach to language is, qua science, fully justified, it none the less fails to
account for what is uniquely characteristic of language when one considers larger
linguistic units, such as the sentence and, above all, the text. When language is
considered no longer merely as an atemporal system of signs but as an event of discourse,
as an ‘actualisation of our linguistic competence in performance’, it becomes apparent,
Ricoeur argues, that language does indeed communicate something meaningful about the
world to a subject attuned to it (see [9.15], 132ff.). As we shall see in the next section
when considering the hermeneutical principles of text-interpretation, what a text
communicates is indeed a world, i.e., a possible mode of being-in-the-world.
Ricoeur’s debate or Auseinandersetzung with structural linguistics illustrates very well
one of the persistent elements in his philosophizing. From his early work in philosophical
anthropology (where he sought to overcome the idealist limitations of Husserl’s
philosophy of consciousness) to his current concern with textuality, semantic innovation
and the narrative function, Ricoeur has throughout waged a philosophical battle on two
fronts. While seeking to overcome all forms of modern subjectivism and, in particular, all
psychologistic theories of meaning (e.g., those which equate meaning with authorial
intention), he has consistently opposed various structuralist and poststructuralist attempts
to get rid of the notion of subjectivity altogether. What Ricoeur has worked to articulate
is a renewed, transformed and, above all, decentred notion of the subject, i.e., one which
views subjectivity not as a metaphysical ‘origin’ of meaning but as the result (‘effect’) of
its transformative encounter with the ‘other’. If, as Habermas has done in a recent work,

30.8 Page 298

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 260
we were to take as one of the more noteworthy traits of contemporary philosophy its
critique of ‘a self-sufficient subjectivity that is posited absolutely’46 (‘the philosophy of
the subject’, the ‘philosophy of consciousness’), the hermeneutics of Gadamer and
Ricoeur would stand out as exemplary in this regard. In its basic philosophical
orientation—key elements of which we have surveyed in this section—hermeneutics is a
prime instance of the general movement in twentieth-century philosophy which has been
a movement away from the paradigm of (monological) consciousness to that of
(dialogical) intersubjectivity. To insist, as hermeneutics does, on the effective-historical
and linguistic nature of consciousness is, eo ipso, to insist on its intersubjective nature.
To maintain that ‘the goal of all communication and understanding is agreement
concerning the object’ ([9.7, 260) is to aim at a conception of meaning and truth which is
neither objectivistic nor subjectivistic. Truth is not to be thought of objectivistically as
‘correspondence’ to some in-itself reality, nor is meaning to be thought of
subjectivistically as something residing ‘within’ subjectivity itself. The attempt on the
part of phenomenological hermeneutics to move decisively beyond both objectivism and
relativism is especially evident in regard to its theories on text-interpretation, an issue to
which we now turn.
THE HERMENEUTICAL THEORY OF TEXT INTERPRETATION
‘The best definition for hermeneutics’, Gadamer writes, ‘is: to let what is alienated by the
character of the written word or by the character of being distantiated by cultural or
historical distances speak again. This is hermeneutics: to let what seems to be far and
alienated speak again.’47 As we have seen, however, Gadamer distances himself from the
tradition of romantic hermeneutics by insisting that his ‘philosophical’ hermeneutics is
not intended as a skilled procedure, a body of knowledge that ‘can be brought under the
discipline of consciously employed rules and thus be deemed a technical doctrine’.
Rather, it is, as he says (borrowing a phrase from Habermas), a ‘critical reflective
knowledge’, i.e., an attempt to articulate what is ontologically presupposed in all acts of
text-interpretation which seek to bridge over cultural or historical distances.48 As a
critical reflection, it seeks to uncover ‘the naive objectivism within which historical
sciences, taking their bearings from the self-understanding of the natural sciences, are
trapped’.
In regard to text-interpretation, the ‘naive objectivism’ to be uncovered and overcome
is the belief that (as with respect to ‘reality’ naturalistically or scientistically conceived)
texts contain within themselves (as Hirsch would say) a perfectly well-defined,
determinate, selfsame, and unchanging meaning that it is the business of interpretation
merely to lay bare. It goes without saying that this objectivistic view of ‘knowledge’ is
thoroughly at odds with the philosophical theory of human understanding outlined above.
How then, we may ask, does philosophical hermeneutics conceive of textual meaning and
the business of interpretation?
The basic point can be stated fairly tersely: what interpretation seeks to understand is
not the intention of the author, but the meaning of the text. To put the matter yet another
way: textual meaning is not reducible to authorial intention. A ‘good’ text is precisely

30.9 Page 299

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 261
one which has something to say to us, its readers, over and above what its author may (or
may not) have intended and willed.49 As Gadamer pointedly asks: ‘Does an author really
know so exactly and in every sentence what he means’ ([9.7], 489)? ‘The sense of a text’,
Gadamer says, ‘in general reaches far beyond what its author originally intended.’ And
thus ‘the task of understanding is concerned in the first place with the meaning of the text
itself’ ([9.7], 335).’50 The task of interpretation is to develop or explicate these textual
meanings—by means, as we shall see, of ‘application’. The distinctive tenet of
philosophical hermeneutics is that, as Gadamer says, interpretation is never simply
reproduction ([9.7], 345).
Gadamer’s rejection of authorial intention as the supreme criterion of textual meaning
follows from his views on conversation. As we have seen, a genuine conversation is one
wherein we are not preoccupied with ‘reading the other person’s mind’ but are
concerned, instead, with coming to a mutual understanding (‘agreement’) with him or her
on the topic under discussion. For Gadamer, the same is, or ought to be, the case in our
encounter with texts. Reading involves ‘not a mysterious communion of souls, but a
sharing of a common meaning’. The goal of interpretive understanding is not ‘to
recapture the author’s attitude of mind but…the perspective within which he has formed
his views’ ([9.7], 259–60)—in other words, to join with him or her in a conversation on
the issue at stake in the text. Such is the ‘hermeneutic situation’ with regard to texts.
To speak of ‘conversation’ is necessarily also to speak of a ‘fusion of horizons’. What
occurs in the act of reading or interpretation is a ‘fusion’ of the ‘horizon’ of the text (what
Ricoeur calls the ‘world of the text’) with that of the reader. The meaning of the text is
the result of this ‘fusion’. Textual meaning is therefore nothing substantial in itself but
exists rather in the form of an event, and this event is the act of reading.51 If, as we have
seen, there are no answers but to questions we ourselves pose, then it is the
presupposition of ‘fore-meanings’ we bring to bear on a text which are decisive in what
the text ‘tells’ us. ‘The only “objectivity” here’, Gadamer insists, ‘is the confirmation of a
fore-meaning in its being worked out’ ([9.7], 237).
This of course is not to say that we are free to project our own presuppositions on to
the text arbitrarily—this would precisely not be a conversation in the Gadamerian sense.
Indeed, to the degree that in reading a ‘fusion’ actually does occur, to that very degree
our own presuppositions are put at risk. The mark of arbitrary prejudices, Gadamer says,
is that ‘they come to nothing in the working-out’ ([9.7], 237). This not infrequently
happens. Our fore-meanings are often not confirmed but challenged, and it is precisely in
this way that our own horizons are transformed, such that we gain in understanding. Not
only is understanding, in the final analysis, a form of self-understanding, but all self-
understanding is ultimately a matter of self-transformation. When we encounter a text or
object whose newness is a challenge to our acquired presuppositions, what that object
says to us is: ‘You must change yourself.’ Thus, in the act of reading, by means of the
fusion of horizons effected thereby, we achieve an understanding of what is other by
relating its horizon to our own; however, in order to do so, we are at the same time
challenged to expand our own horizons, such that, through and by means of reading, our
own selves are renewed. The postmodern paradigm of intersubjectivity under which
philosophical hermeneutics operates is perhaps no more in evidence than here, in its
theory of text-interpretation. ‘Only through others’, Gadamer says, ‘do we gain true

30.10 Page 300

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 262
knowledge of ourselves’ (PHC, 107).
Another way of expressing this whole matter would be to say that all interpretation
necessarily involves application (Anwendung, applicatio). We can be said to have
understood a text, grasped its meaning, only when we are able to relate (‘apply’) what it
says to our own situation, our own historical horizon. Indeed, if there would be no way in
which we could relate what a text says (what it means, ‘wants to say’, veut dire) to our
own situation, if, in other words, there were no way we could translate the language of
the text into our own historically conditioned language—then it would be meaningless to
speak of our having to do with a text in the first place, i.e., something presumed to have
meaning. We would have no more grounds for viewing the thing in question as a text
than we would to view markings on the floor of the Peruvian desert as traces of alien
subjectivities from outer space, rather than as mere curiosities of nature.
For Gadamer, the three moments of the ‘hermeneutical situation’—understanding,
interpretation and application—are inseparable. Just as understanding always involves
interpretation, so also interpretation always includes the element of application. In
asserting this interconnection (‘the truly distinctive feature of philosophic hermeneutics’,
in the words of one commentator52), Gadamer is once again distancing himself from the
tradition of romantic hermeneutics and, indeed, from the basic paradigms of modern
epistemology in general. In linking together understanding, interpretation and application,
he is rejecting outright the modernist view of ‘knowledge’ as correct ‘representation’ of
an in-itself state of affairs. He is insisting, in a decidedly postmodern fashion, that all
genuine knowledge is in fact transformation. Understanding, he maintains, is never
merely ‘a reproductive, but always a productive attitude as well…. It is enough to say
that we understand in a different way, if we understand at all’ ([9.7], 264). What that
means in regard to text-interpretation is that, since understanding a text involves its
application to the situation of the interpreter, it is necessarily the case that in changing
circumstances a text is understood appropriately ‘only if it is understood in a different
way every time’ ([9.7] 275–6). This is yet another inevitable consequence of linking up
meaning with the event of understanding. If, indeed, understanding (truth) is itself in the
nature of an event then, as Gadamer remar—provocatively, but with perfectly good
reason none the less: ‘the same tradition must always be understood in a different
way’ ([9.7], 278). An understanding of things which failed constantly to renew itself in
this way—through ‘application’—would be nothing more than (to borrow a phrase from
Hegel) ‘the repetition of the same majestic ruin’.53
It may be noted in passing that Gadamer’s notions of the fusion of horizons and,
consequent upon this, the transformative nature of understanding is enough to deflect one
of the main criticisms often directed at his work, namely that it amounts to a form of
cultural or intellectual conservatism. From what we have seen, it should be obvious that
Gadamer’s defence of tradition is in no way a paean to an incessant repetition of the
same. If the ‘same’—the tradition—is not always understood differently, it ceases to what
Gadamer understands by ‘tradition’. What are commonly referred to as ‘traditional’
societies—ones which seek to deny change and transformative becoming and to
perpetuate inviolate a particular societal order—are precisely ones which are devoid of
tradition in the Gadamerian sense, i.e., a living tradition animated by a ‘historical
consciousness’. The fact that language and its effective-history preforms our experience

31 Pages 301-310

▲back to top

31.1 Page 301

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 263
of the world does not, Gadamer insists, ‘remove the possibilities of critique’.
‘Conversation’ always holds open ‘the possibility of going beyond our conventions’ and
ensures ‘the possibility of our taking a critical stance with regard to every convention’. In
short, tradition does not present ‘an obstacle to reason’ ([9.7], 495–6). Gadamer’s
response to charges of conservatism could not be more categorical:
It is a grave misunderstanding to assume that emphasis on the essential factor of
tradition which enters into all understanding implies an uncritical acceptance of
tradition and socio-political conservatism…. In truth the confrontation of our
historic tradition is always a critical challenge of the tradition.
(PHC, 108)
Gadamer’s position in this matter could be summed up in the following way: given the
presuppositional nature of human understanding, the idea of a total critique of what has
been handed down to us by tradition is utopic and is an existential impossibility, for the
only way in which we can critically scrutinize certain presuppositions is by tacitly
appealing to others. However, the fact that we stand always within tradition and cannot,
for that reason, criticize everything at once, does not mean that there are things that
cannot be criticized, as a cultural conservative might maintain. The fact of the matter is
that, for Gadamer, there is nothing that cannot, at some time or other, be subjected to
criticism in the light of reason. For Gadamer reason and tradition do not stand in an
antithetical relation. ‘Reason’, he in fact says, ‘always consists in not blindly insisting
upon what is held to be true but in critically occupying oneself with it.’54
Thus, in contrast to intellectual conservatives such as Alasdair MacIntyre and Leo
Strauss, Gadamer’s trenchant critique of philosophical modernity is not intended to
justify a return to an idealized, premodern, metaphysical past. When, as he often does,
Gadamer makes use of notions drawn from the philosophical tradition, it is with the aim
of articulating a decidedly post-metaphysical and post-foundationalist—which is to say,
postmodern—theory of human being and understanding (albeit one which differs in
important ways from other forms of postmodern thought in that it seeks to avoid their
relativistic and nihilistic tendencies).
Gadamer’s way of summing up his notion of application by saying that the ‘same’
tradition must always be understood ‘in a different way’ may strike one as being, to say
the least, paradoxical. It would be meaningless indeed were Gadamer presenting his
theory of interpretation as a science in the traditional sense of the term; from a scientific
point of view the same conclusions should invariably follow from the same premises.
Unlike Betti and Hirsch, however, Gadamer is not attempting to make of hermeneutics a
science; indeed, he is resolutely turning his back on the age-old Platonic notion of science
(episteme). What he is arguing for is ‘a knowledge that is not a science’.55 In order to
indicate what such a knowledge could be, Gadamer effectuates, in the course of his
discussion of application, a creative retrieval of Aristotle’s notion of phronesis.
Phronesis is the key concept in Aristotle’s practical philosophy (ethics, politics) and is
concerned with the crucial issue of how something universal is to be applied in particular
circumstances. Phronesis designates a form of historically informed, prudential judgment
which seeks to determine not what is eternally true or valid (as in mathematics) but, as

31.2 Page 302

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 264
Gadamer would say, ‘what is feasible, what is possible, what is correct, here and
now’ ([9.7], xxv). In opposition to Plato, Aristotle argued that in matters of practical
reasoning (whose object is human action) there can be no hard and fixed rules which, as
in logic, can mechanically generate particular decisions. In practical reasoning there is, as
it were, a dialectical relation between the universal and the particular; the relation
between the two is one not of logical subsumption but of codetermination. The universal
in question (an ethical maxim, a law, a principle of political philosophy, and so on) is
oriented entirely towards its application and has no real meaning apart from it—in that,
precisely, its raison d’être, as a theoretical principle, is itself entirely practical, in that it is
meant to serve as a guide to action—and yet the universal is not reducible to its particular
applications, either, since no single application of the universal is unequivocally dictated
by it and, consequently, can claim to exhaust it (to express its ‘univocal’ meaning). It is
just this sort of reciprocal or codetermining relation, Gadamer holds, that obtains between
a text (which, as something that is in a sense ‘self-same’, functions as a universal) and
various interpretations (‘applications’) of it. He writes:
The interpreter dealing with a traditional text seeks to apply it to himself. But
this does not mean that the text is given for him as something universal, that he
understands it as such and only afterwards uses it for particular applications.
Rather, the interpreter seeks no more than to understand this universal thing, the
text; i.e., to understand what this piece of tradition says, what constitutes the
meaning and importance of the text. In order to understand that, he must not
seek to disregard himself and his particular hermeneutical situation. He must
relate the text to this situation, if he wants to understand at all.
([9.7], 289)
Gadamer’s preferred model for text-interpretation is the interpretive activity of the jurist.
‘Legal hermeneutics’, he maintains, ‘is able to point out what the real procedure of the
human sciences is.’ As he goes on to say:
Here we have the model for the relationship between past and present that we
are seeking. The judge who adapts the transmitted law to the needs of the
present is undoubtedly seeking to perform a practical task, but his interpretation
of the law is by no means on that account an arbitrary re-interpretation. Here
again, to understand and to interpret means to discover and recognise a valid
meaning. He seeks to discover the ‘legal idea’ of a law by linking it with the
present.
From this Gadamer generalizes as follows:
Is this not true of every text, i.e., that it must be understood in terms of what it
says? Does this not mean that it always needs to be restated? And does not this
restatement always take place through its being related to the present? …Legal
hermeneutics is, then, in reality no special case but is, on the contrary, fitted to
restore the full scope of the hermeneutical problem and so to retrieve the former

31.3 Page 303

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 265
unity of hermeneutics, in which jurist and theologican meet the student of
humanities.
([9.7], 292–3)
It follows as a general conclusion that in text-interpretation it is altogether
inappropriate—indeed, quixotic—to seek to determine the single correct interpretation of
a text. However, it also follows, and with equal force, that in text-interpretation, as in
practical reasoning in general, it is never the case that ‘anything goes’. If hermeneutics is
an instance of practical reasoning, as indeed Gadamer insists that it is—‘The great
tradition of practical philosophy lives on in a hermeneutics that becomes aware of its
philosophic implications’56—this means that while it is never possible to demonstrate the
validity of one’s interpretations, it is nevertheless always possible to argue for them in
cogent, non-arbitrary, indeed, prudent ways. As an instance of practical philosophy,
hermeneutics is as remote from dogmatic scientism as it is from interpretive anarchism. It
is precisely because hermeneutics is a practical philosophy in the Aristotelian sense of the
term that it can legitimately claim to have transcended both objectivism and relativism.
Godamer’s interest in practical philosophy has led him to explore the relationship
between hermeneutics and rhetoric. The relationship between the two is both extensive
and deep.57 If it is the case that hermeneutical reasoning is not a form of scientific
demonstration but of persuasive argumentation and that its object is not what is certain
but what is probable or likely, then it is obvious that it is to traditional rhetoric—the
theory of argumentation (in the words of Chaim Perelman58)—that hermeneutics is
obliged to look for its theoretical and methodological grounding. The scope of rhetoric,
Gadamer says, is truly unlimited, and thus to the universality of hermeneutics corresponds
the ubiquity of rhetoric. As he further remarks:
Where, indeed, but to rhetoric should the theoretical examination of
interpretation turn? Rhetoric from oldest tradition has been the only advocate of
a claim to truth that defends the probable, the eikos (verisimile), and that which
is convincing to the ordinary reason, against the claim of science to accept as
true only what can be demonstrated and tested! Convincing and persuading,
without being able to prove—these are obviously as much the aim and measure
of understanding and interpretation as they are the aim and measure of oration
and persuasion.
([9.5], 24)
Ricoeur shares with Gadamer the same basic approach to text-interpretation, the most
common element in which is perhaps the attempt to work out a ‘non-subjective’ theory of
meaning. However, there are some noticeable differences between these two leading
representatives of phenomenological hermeneutics, differences not so much in substance,
perhaps, as in what they choose to accentuate. Three such differences may be noted.
In the first instance, Ricoeur has always been uncomfortable with Gadamer’s apparent
dichotomizing of ‘truth’ and ‘method’. Throughout his career Ricoeur has maintained a
strong interest in the relationship between philosophy and the human sciences;
accordingly, and in contrast to Gadamer, the focus of much of his attention has been on

31.4 Page 304

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 266
specific methodological issues. While he fully subscribes to the basic ontological
concerns of both Heidegger and Gadamer, he feels none the less that this particular
preoccupation on their part has tended to prevent philosophical hermeneutics from
entering into a serious dialogue with the more empirically oriented sciences. Reacting no
doubt to Gadamer’s somewhat underdefined notion of ‘truth’,59 Ricoeur insists that
questions of ‘validation’ cannot simply be bypassed. Gadamer’s ‘ontological’
hermeneutics, he maintains, ignores the quite legitimate question of validation which so
preoccupied romantic hermeneutics. In Ricoeur’s eyes Gadamer develops not only the
anti-psychologistic tendencies of Heidegger’s philosophy but also, unfortunately, its anti-
methodological tendencies as well. As a result, he says, a crisis is opened in the
hermeneutical movement: ‘in correcting the “psychologizing” tendency of
Schleiermacher and Dilthey, ontological hermeneutics sacrifices the concern for
validation which, with the founders, provided a balance for the divinatory aspect.’60
Ricoeur distinguishes his own ‘methodological’ hermeneutics from Gadamer’s
‘ontological’ hermeneutics by saying that it attempts to place ‘interpretation theory in
dialogue and debate with the human sciences’. It is not surprising, therefore, that—in his
continuing attempt to mediate the ‘conflict of interpretations’—Ricoeur should make an
explicit attempt to incorporate Hirsch’s concerns for validation into his own
interpretation theory (though in a way which is hardly likely to have won Hirsch’s
allegiance to the cause of phenomenological hermeneutics).61
Another aspect of Gadamer’s interpretation theory about which Ricoeur has expressed
reservations is the conversation model on which Gadamer relies so extensively. In the
light of his concern over the nature of textuality as such, Ricoeur argues that the
relationship between reader and text is significantly different from that between two
conversational partners. The latter should not be taken as a model for all instances of
understanding, and it is definitely not appropriate for conceptualizing our relationship
with texts: ‘the dialogical model does not provide us with the paradigm of
reading’ ([9.15], 210).62
Far from viewing the act of reading as a kind of dialogue, we should, Ricoeur
provocatively remarks, consider even living authors as already dead and their books as
posthumous—for only then does the readers’ relationship to the book become ‘complete
and, as it were, intact’ ([9.15], 147). The reason for Ricoeur’s saying this is the profound
transformation that he believes writing has on language. Ricoeur defines a text as ‘any
discourse fixed by writing’ ([9.15], 145). but with this ‘fixation’ something important
happens: the text achieves, as it were, an ‘emancipation with respect to the
author’ ([9.15], 139). More specifically, in writing, the intention of the author and the
meaning of the text cease to coincide (in spoken discourse, Ricoeur holds, the intention of
the speaker and the meaning of what he says overlap) (see [9.15], 200). In other words,
when language is transformed into a text, it assumes a life of its own, independent of that
of its author. As Ricoeur expresses the matter: ‘the text’s career escapes the finite horizon
lived by its author. What the text says now matters more than what the author meant to
say, and every exegesis unfolds its procedures within the circumference of a meaning that
has broken its moorings to the psychology of the author’ ([9.15], 201).
This leads directly into the third difference between Ricoeur and Gadamer to be noted
in the present context, having to do with the notion of ‘distantiation’. It will be recalled

31.5 Page 305

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 267
how at the outset of the present section I quoted Gadamer as saying: ‘The best definition
for hermeneutics is: to let what is alienated by the character of the written word or by the
character of being distantiated by cultural or historical distances speak again.’ This
remark might seem to imply that distantiation is a negative factor which it is the task of
interpretation to overcome as much as possible. Ricoeur for his part appears to read
Gadamer in this way; he perceives as ‘the mainspring of Gadamer’s work…the
opposition between alienating distantiation and belonging’—an opposition reflected in
the very title of Gadamer’s Truth and Method ([9.15], 131). He sees Gadamer as wanting
to renounce the concern of the human sciences for objectivity so as to reaffirm our
‘belongingness’ to the tradition. In opposition to this, Ricoeur states: ‘My own reflection
stems from a rejection of this alternative and an attempt to overcome it.’
The point that Ricoeur wishes to emphasize is that the phenomenon of textuality
overcomes ‘the alternative between alienating distantiation and participatory belonging’
in such a way as to introduce ‘a positive and, if I may say so, productive notion of
distantiation.’ Why is distantiation a ‘productive function’? Distantiation is productive in
that, in ‘alienating’ a text from its original context, it confers on the text a kind of
‘autonomy’, thereby freeing it for what is in fact its true vocation, namely, that of being
‘reactualized’ in ever new contexts (becoming in this way a genuinely ‘living’ text).63
This reactualization (or recontextualization) is what Ricoeur calls
‘appropriation’ (Aneignung). He prefers this term to ‘application’ (Anwendung), since it
underscores the central role that the reader plays in regard to the text. To ‘appropriate’
means ‘“to make one’s own” what was initially “alien”’ ([9.15], 185). It is the reader’s
function to actualize (‘make actual, real”) the meaning of the text. A text is, by its very
nature, addressed to someone, to ‘an audience which extends in principle to anyone who
can read’ ([9.15], 139). In a very real sense, the text’s audience is one ‘that it itself
creates’ ([9.15], 202). In any event, without an audience (an addressee) to reactualize it,
the meaning of a text would remain for ever ‘undecidable’, as Derrida has quite rightly
remarked. Thus, for Ricoeur, ‘reading is the concrete act in which the destiny of the text
is fulfilled’ ([9.15], 164)
Ricoeur’s position in this matter is a strict consequence of his rejection of the
psychologistic theory of meaning. The meaning of a text is its ‘reference’, but this is
neither the psychological intention of the author nor an empirical state of affairs in the so-
called ‘objective’ world (‘ostensive reference’). The true referent of a text is what it is
‘about’, what Gadamer calls die Sache, the ‘matter of the text’. Ricoeur calls this the
‘world of the text’. He defines it as ‘the ensemble of [nonsituational] references opened
up by the text’—as when we speak of the ‘world of the Greeks’, meaning thereby not an
empirical reality but a particular understanding of the world ([9.15], 202). The ‘intended
meaning of the text’ is the ‘world’ that it discloses; the projecting of a world is ‘the
process which is at work in the text’ ([9.15], 164).
For Ricoeur there is no text that does not express a ‘world’, that ‘does not connect up
with reality’, no matter how fictional the text may be ([9.15], 141). In opposition to
Roland Barthes, Ricoeur strenuously maintains that the language of texts does not merely
‘celebrate itself. Poetry and novels may not refer to any merely empirical reality, but they
most definitely do have a ‘second-order reference’.64 The central task of interpretation is
that of explicating this higher-level reference; herein lies, according to Ricoeur, ‘the

31.6 Page 306

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 268
center of gravity of the hermeneutical question’ ([9.15], 132), ‘the most fundamental
hermeneutical problem’ ([9.15], 141):
If we can no longer define hermeneutics in terms of the search for the
psychological intentions of another person which are concealed behind the text,
and if we do not want to reduce interpretation to the dismantling of structures
[as in the structuralist, purely explanatory approach], then what remains to be
interpreted? I shall say: to interpret is to explicate the type of being-in-the-world
unfolded in front of the text.
This last remark provides a more precise indication of what Ricoeur means by the ‘world
of the work’. This ‘world’ is none other than Husserl’s life-world or Heidegger’s being-
in-the-world. That is to say, the ‘possible world’ ([9.15], 218) unfolded in a text is
nothing other than a possible mode of being. In other words, it is a world which I, the
reader, could (possibly) inhabit. By opening up a world for us, a text provides us with
‘new dimensions of our being-in-the-world’ ([9.15], 202); it suggests to us new and
different ways in which we ourselves could be. ‘To understand a text’, Ricoeur says, ‘is
at the same time to light up our own situation’ ([9.15], 202). It is at this point that
Ricoeur’s theory of text-interpretation links up with his overriding concern to articulate a
non-metaphysical concept of subjectivity, ‘a new theory of subjectivity’ ([9.15], 182).
The key point here is that in appropriating the meaning (the ‘world’) of a text, the
reader—the self—reappropriates itself, acquires in effect a new self. ‘What would we
know of love and hate,’ Ricoeur asks, ‘of moral feelings and, in general, of all that we
call the self, if these had not been brought to language and articulated by
literature’ ([9.15], 143)? The relation between text and reader is thus, as it were, a two-
way street: the text depends on its readers for its actualization, but in the process of
reading—giving the text a meaning—readers are themselves actualized
(‘metamorphosed’)—given a self—by the text. In exposing ourselves to the text, we
undergo ‘imaginative variations’ of our egos (see [9.15], 189) and receive in this way
from the text ‘an enlarged self, which would be the proposed existence corresponding in
the most suitable way to the world proposed’ ([9.15], 143). Thus, as Ricoeur remarks:
In general we may say that appropriation is no longer to be understood in the
tradition of philosophies of the subject, as a constitution of which the subject
would possess the key. To understand is not to project oneself into the text; it is
to receive an enlarged self from the apprehension of proposed worlds which are
the genuine object of interpretation.
([9.15], 182–3)
It can thus be seen that while Ricoeur’s interpretation theory situates the reader at the
heart of the interpretive process, it does not legitimate any form of interpretational
subjectivism; what it calls for is ‘instead a moment of dispossession of the narcissistic
ego’ ([9.15], 192).65 However, by linking up the understanding of meaning with self-
understanding, it does illustrate in a striking way Ricoeur’s basic philosophical motives
which derive from the tradition of reflective (or reflexive) philosophy and, more

31.7 Page 307

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 269
particularly, the concern for the ‘self that he inherits from existentialism.66 In all text-
interpretation what is ultimately at stake is a self in search of self-understanding, in
search of ‘the meaning of his own life’ ([9.15], 158). Thus Ricoeur writes: ‘By
“appropriation”, I understand this: that the interpretation of a text culminates in the self-
interpretation of a subject who thenceforth understands himself better, understands
himself differently, or simply begins to understand himself ([9.15], 158). It is accordingly
not surprising that when in the course of a famous debate Lévi-Strauss asserted that for
him meaning is always phenomenal and that underneath meaning (conceived of as
nothing more than the combination of elements meaningless in themselves) there is only
non-meaning, Ricoeur should have insisted most strongly: ‘If meaning is not a segment in
self-understanding, I don’t know what it is.’67 The position that Ricoeur adopts in his
consideration of the human sciences and, in particular, the explanation/ understanding
debate is, as we shall see in what follows, dictated by this fundamental conviction.
HERMENEUTICS AND THE HUMAN SCIENCES: FROM TEXT TO
ACTION
If Gadamer’s major contribution to philosophical hermeneutics is to have provided it with
a general theory of human understanding, Ricoeur’s vital contribution to the discipline
could perhaps be said to consist in his having drawn from this ontology of understanding
methodological conclusions of direct relevance to the practice of the human sciences. In
doing so, he has also addressed the key problem in the philosophy of the human sciences
that Gadamer’s hermeneutics tends to leave unresolved, namely, the problem of the
relation between explanation and understanding.
What is it about hermeneutics, one might ask, that makes it especially relevant to the
human sciences? Or, again, what is it about the human sciences that allows one to
maintain that they themselves are most properly understood when viewed as a form of
‘applied’ hermeneutics? The proper objects of these disciplines might seem, on the face
of it, to have very little in common: the traditional concern of hermeneutics is texts,
whereas the proper object of the human sciences is human action. The human sciences
are concerned with what people do, the meaning of what they do, why and how they do
it, and the consequences of their doing what they do. Hermeneutics is concerned, at its
core, with the right reading of texts. But perhaps, to be understood properly, human
action needs also to be read in the right way. Perhaps the common element here is the
notion of meaning.
What indeed constitutes the specificity of the human sciences vis-à-vis the natural
sciences? The difference lies first and foremost in the respective objects of these sciences.
What is unique about the objects of the human sciences is that these objects are also
subjects. As three human scientists remark: ‘the objects studied are subjects, embedded in
cultural practices, who think, construe, understand, misunderstand, and interpret, as well
as reflect on the meanings they produce.’68 This difference in the objects (or subject
matter) of the two kinds of science dictates a difference in method (it does, that is, if one
adheres to Aristotle’s injunction to the effect that a science should always adapt its
method to the nature of the object under consideration). From a methodological point of

31.8 Page 308

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 270
view, human action falls under a different category altogether than does mere physical
motion. Motion can be ‘explained’ in purely mechanistic terms, in terms of physical
cause and effect relations, but action cannot properly be ‘understood’ except in terms of
meaning. As the object of a science, human agents are not only interpreted objects (as in
the case of the natural sciences), they are also self-interpreting subjects.
Phenomenologically speaking, what is unique about that entity called ‘man’ is that he is a
self-interpreting animal (this is, of course, simply another way of saying that ‘man’ is the
‘speaking animal’). What this all means is that (in the words of the hermeneutical
anthropologist Clifford Geertz) ‘man is an animal suspended in webs of significance he
himself has spun’ and that, accordingly, the analysis of human culture (understood as
precisely those ‘webs’) is not ‘an experimental science in search of [nomological-
deductive] law but an interpretive one in search of meaning’.69
Human action is essentially meaningful (significative) in that action is, by definition
and in contrast to purely physical systems, intentional, teleological or purposeful.
Humans act in order to bring into being states of affairs that would not, or would not
likely, prevail without their acting. If, for instance, humans engage in economic activities
(the only species to do so), it is, as economist Ludwig von Mises has remarked, in order
to improve their material position, to make their lives more liveable, more meaningful.70
That human action is essentially meaningful can therefore be taken as an ontological (or
phenomenological) fact. The crucial question, as concerns the human sciences, is a
methodological one: if the human sciences cannot look to the natural sciences for their
method (since the concept of meaning or purpose is itself meaningless in a purely
physicalistic or mechanistic context), where are they to look? This is where hermeneutics
comes in.
In a famous article, ‘The Model of the Text: Meaningful Action Considered as a Text’,
Ricoeur addressed the above mentioned question. Meaningful action, he said, can be the
object of a science only if the meaning of action is ‘objectified’ in a way equivalent to
that in which the meaning of discourse is ‘fixated’ by writing (see [9.15], 203)—only if,
in other words, action can properly be viewed as a text-analogue (a ‘quasi text’). Ricoeur
maintains that this is indeed the case. He writes:
In the same way that a text is detached from its author, an action is detached
from its agent and develops consequences of its own. This autonomisation of
human action constitutes the social dimension of action. An action is a social
phenomenon…because our deeds escape us and have effects which we did not
intend. One of the meanings of the notion of ‘inscription’ [‘fixation’] appears
here. The kind of distance which we found between the intention of the speaker
and the verbal meaning of a text occurs also between the agent and its action.
([9.15], 206)
This is an important text, in that it specifies clearly that aspect of meaningful human
action which makes of it the proper object of a social science: as in the case of texts, the
meaning of action is not reducible to the psychological intentions of the agents
themselves. The meaning of what people do displays an autonomy similar to that of texts
in regard to their authors’ intentions. Thus here too the notion of meaning must be

31.9 Page 309

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 271
‘depsychologized’ or ‘desubjectivized’. The proper objects of the social sciences are
various social orders (the equivalent of texts) which are the result of human action—the
result, it must be added, of human action but not necessarily of human design.71 As
Ricoeur remarks: ‘our deeds escape us and have effects which we did not intend.’ Our
deeds escape us in the same way that the text’s career escapes the finite horizon of its
author. Strictly speaking, therefore, the meaningful action or, better expressed, the
meaningful patterns of action that the social sciences seek to understand are neither
subjective nor objective (in the purely physicalistic sense of the term). As the Canadian
hermeneuticist Charles Taylor has emphasized, we are dealing here with meanings which
are not subjective (residing in the heads of the actors) but rather intersubjective. ‘The
meanings and norms implicit in these practices’, Taylor observes, ‘are not just in the
minds of the actors but are out there in the practices themselves, practices which cannot
be conceived as a set of individual actions, but which are essentially modes of social
relation, of mutual action.’72 Although, as Ricoeur reminds us, it is only individuals who
do things, it is nevertheless also the case that human action is meaningful—and thus
understandable—only in terms of a shared public world.73 As one psychotherapist
observes:
The meaning of action can be read from the directedness of the action seen
within the pattern of practices that constitute the individual’s social milieu. It is
these practices, and not any representations in the individual’s head, that
determine the meanings attributable to the individual. The background of social
practices and cultural institutions give specific objects and actions—and even
mental representations when they do occur—their meanings.74
Another way of expressing the matter would be to say that just as what constitutes a text
is that it has a certain ‘logic’ which it is precisely the task of text-interpretation to lay
bare (Ricoeur speaks in this regard of ‘the internal dynamic which governs the structuring
of the work’ (OI, 193)), so also there is a certain objective logic to human events or
practices which it is precisely the task of social science to explicate. The social orders or
‘wholes’ that social scientists (anthropologists, economists, historians, etc.) seek to render
intelligible possess their own unique ontological status in that their mode of being is
neither psychological nor physical; it is, as Merleau-Ponty would say, an ‘ambiguous’
mode of being, neither that of the for-itself nor that of the in-itself. These wholes are
indeed objective (or incarnate) logics, which exist as the sedimented results (in the form,
ultimately, of sociocultural institutions) of the activities of a myriad of individual human
agents, each of whom was pursuing meaning in his or her own life. If this is indeed the
case, the crucial methodological question becomes: what method is most appropriate to
the task of explicating these logics?
From what has been said, it should be evident that a purely descriptive approach (in
terms of mental states) is no more appropriate than would be a purely ‘explanatory’,
cause-and-effect approach; in both cases the object to be understood—meaning
embedded in intersubjective practices—would be lost sight of. Human agents are self-
interpreting beings, but it is not the task of a social science simply to ‘describe’ these
interpretations. It is not their task, if it is indeed the case that the meaning of action

31.10 Page 310

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 272
surpasses the intentions of the actors themselves. The function of interpretation cannot
simply be that of Verstehen in the classical sense of the term, i.e., that of articulating the
self-understanding of human actors, in such a way as to achieve an empathetic
understanding of them. The unavoidable fact of the matter is that the human sciences are
doubly interpretive; they are interpre-tations of the interpretations that people themselves
offer for their actions. As Clifford Geertz has observed: ‘what we call our data are really
our own constructions of other people’s constructions of what they and their compatriots
are up to.’75 The fact that the proper object of social science is the logic of practices and
not merely the psychological intentions of actors means that social scientists often have
to discount the self-interpretations of the actors themselves.76 Ricoeur has long insisted
that the consciousness that we have of ourselves is often a false consciousness, which
means that the hermeneutical enterprise must include as one of its moments, a
‘hermeneutics of suspicion’.
This amounts to saying that the role of an interpretive social science is necessarily
critical. The fact that there is inevitably a certain non-coincidence between the
interpretations worked out by the social scientist and the self-interpretations proffered by
the actors themselves means that there exists, in the words of John B.Thompson, a
‘methodological space for…the critical potential of interpretation’.77 Because there is
always, to one degree or another, a certain décalage or discrepancy between what people
do and what they say they do, critique is in fact integral to interpretive understanding, and
this is why philosophical hermeneutics can, with Habermas in mind, insist on the
emancipatory function of interpretive theory.
In conceptualizing the interpretive function in a way such as this, Ricoeur is able, he
believes, to resolve the long-standing conflict between ‘explanation’ and
‘understanding’ (Gadamer had already portrayed Dilthey’s dichotomizing distinction as a
relic of the Cartesian dualism which has infected all of modern thought).78 From what has
been said, it is obvious that interpretation cannot be reduced to ‘understanding’, in the
narrow (empathetic) sense of the term. Indeed, precisely because the meaning of human
action is not ‘subjective’, there is, Ricoeur maintains, a legitimate, albeit strictly limited,
place for explanatory techniques of a purely objective nature in the overall interpretive
process. If (as in psychotherapy, for instance) meaningintentions are not open to, or
cannot be exhaustively grasped by, direct inspection, and thus cannot simply be described
‘from within’, but must be deciphered and interpreted, as it were, ‘from without’, it
follows that there is, by principle and of necessity, a rightful place for ‘explanation’ (in
the traditional sense of the term) in the human sciences.
Just as, in the case of text-interpretation, it may be useful at the outset to approach a
text in a purely objective way, in terms of an analysis of its formal structure or computer
analysis of word distribution, for instance, so also, in an attempt to understand human
action, an objective approach, e.g., in terms of statistical analysis, may alert social
scientists to the existence of patterns they might otherwise over-look. What Ricoeur
wishes nevertheless to emphasize is that the intelligibility provided by purely explanatory
techniques is essentially partial and one-sided. The phenomena themselves cannot
properly be understood, in the last analysis, until the results of the explanatory approach
are integrated into a wider, interpretive understanding. For Ricoeur, ‘explanation’
amounts to a methodological distantiation from what is ‘said’ in the text (the ‘world of

32 Pages 311-320

▲back to top

32.1 Page 311

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 273
the text’), but, unlike Gadamer (in Ricoeur’s view), he holds that this is a proper, and
even necessary, moment in the overall process of understanding, conceived of, in the last
analysis, as ‘appropriation’. With Ricoeur there is, therefore, as one commentator says, a
‘dialectic of an understanding which takes the detour of methodic distantiation so as to
return to understanding’.79
Ricoeur’s strategy in this regard consists in locating ‘explanation and understanding at
two different stages of a unique hermeneutical arc’ ([9.15] 218), integrating thereby the
opposed attitudes of explanation and understanding within an overall conception of
interpretation as the recovery of meaning. In accordance with his hermeneutical
conviction that all understanding is ultimately a form of self-understanding, Ricoeur
maintains that, as he says, ‘the final brace of the bridge [is] anchorage of the arch in the
ground of lived experience’ ([9.15], 164). In accordance as well with his underlying
existential motivations, Ricoeur also insists that social structures are ‘attempts to cope
with existential perplexities, human predicaments and deep-rooted conflicts’ ([9.15],
220). Thus, the ultimate goal of the social sciences is no different from that of text-
interpretation, namely ‘appropriation’, a heightened understanding of the meaning of our
being-in-the-world. ‘We are not allowed’, Ricoeur insists, ‘to exclude the final act of
personal commitment from the whole of objective and explanatory procedures which
mediate it’ ([9.15], 221). In applying Ricoeur’s notion of the ‘fixation’ or ‘inscription’ of
meaning to the study of cultures, Clifford Geertz for his part insists that the ultimate
concern of the anthropologist is ‘the existential dilemmas of life’ and that the ‘essential
vocation’ of interpretive anthropology is that of making ‘available to us answers that
others, guarding other sheep in other valleys, have given, and thus to include them in the
consultable record of what man has said’.80
Ricoeur has long maintained that human phenomena—texts, action—cannot properly
be understood until the results of the explanatory approach have been integrated into a
wider, interpretive understanding. In his latest work culminating in his three-volume
study Time and Narrative (1983–8), he has argued that the attempt to understand the
specifically human must, in the final analysis, assume the form of a narrative. To the
teleological nature of action, discussed above, corresponds the plot structure of
narrative.81 ‘Objective data’ (that is, the data that are produced as a result of the
application of objective measuring techniques) achieve their maximum intelligibility not
when, as is the goal of the natural sciences, they have been subsumed under (supposedly)
binding and timeless ‘covering laws’ (whose putative purpose is that of ‘explanation’ and
‘prediction’) but when, as in history or psychotherapy, they have been interrelated and
integrated into a narrative account, one which, precisely, confers meaning on them
through narrative emplotment. For Ricoeur, the most primordial of all forms of
understanding is thus that of story-telling. He writes:
to follow a story is to understand the successive actions, thoughts and feelings
as displaying a particular directedness. By this I mean that we are pushed along
by the development and that we respond to this thrust with expectations
concerning the outcome and culmination of the process. In this sense, the
‘conclusion’ of the story is the pole of attraction of the whole process. But a
narrative conclusion can be neither deduced nor predicted. There is no story

32.2 Page 312

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 274
unless our attention is held in suspense by a thousand contingencies. Hence we
must follow the story to its conclusion. So rather than being predictable, a
conclusion must be acceptable. Looking back from the conclusion towards the
episodes which led up to it, we must be able to say that this end required those
events and that chain of action. But this retrospective glance is made possible by
the ideologically guided movement of our expectations when we follow the
story. Such is the paradox of the contingency, ‘acceptable after all’, which
characterises the understanding of any story.
([9.I5], 277)
As Kierkegaard pointed out, understanding comes always only after the event, and, as
Ricoeur has sought to show, the full measure of whatever understanding is available to us
is made possible not by formalistic modes of explanation but by retrospective, narrative
emplotment. Ricoeur has developed his theory of the narrative function primarily with
respect to historiography,82 but it can be, and has been, extended to other human
sciences.83 If Gadamer has argued for the universality of hermeneutics on the grounds
that hermeneutics is concerned with the entire range of human linguisticality—which, in
turn, is coextensive with ‘being that can be understood’—Ricoeur advances this claim
even further when, in his later writings, he maintains that the object of hermeneutics is
textuality, and that this notion is coextensive with human existence itself. As one
commentator remarks: ‘Hermeneutics is concerned with the interpretation of any
expression of existence which can be preserved in a structure analogous to the struc-ture
of the text…. Taking it to the limit, the entirety of human existence becomes a text to be
interpreted.’84
As Ricoeur’s work on narrative clearly demonstrates, good history shares many of the
same traits as good fiction. In showing how understanding is ultimately a form of story-
telling—and in undermining in this way the modernist opposition between the ‘real’ and
the ‘imaginary’—Ricoeur has also shown how hermeneutical truth is itself a result of the
productive imagination.85 For Ricoeur the poetic imagination (the means whereby that
‘higher order referent’ he calls the ‘world of the text’ is brought into being) is necessarily
a ‘subversive force’ in regard to what is customarily (or traditionally) taken to be ‘real’. If
Ricoeur stresses the role of the imagination in the overall understanding process, it is
because he perceives this to be a strategic means of defending hermeneutics against
Habermas’s charge that it is inherently ‘conservative’. The hermeneutics of the text
conceived of as a ‘hermeneutics of the power-to-be’ (and thus as a critique of the illusions
and false consciousness of the subject) would itself, he argues, provide the necessary
underpinnings for a critique of ideology [9.15], 94). Of particular interest to Ricoeur is the
theme of the ‘social-imaginary’ (‘l’institution imaginaire de la société’, in the words of
Cornelius Castoriadis), an interest which testifies to his overriding concern with social
and political, i.e., practical, philosophy—a concern shared by Gademer, as we shall see in
what follows.86
HERMENEUTICS AND PRACTICAL PHILOSOPHY: ETHICAL AND
POLITICAL IMPLICATIONS

32.3 Page 313

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 275
The ultimate task of hermeneutical reflection consists in explicating the values that
inform and guide hermeneutical practice itself. These are values that are inherent in the
‘hermeneutical experience’ (as Gadamer calls it), i.e., in that most natural and universal
of all human activities: the persistent attempt on the part of humans to achieve
understanding, self-understanding, and, above all, mutual understanding. In articulating
these values, hermeneutics seeks to do no more than to spell out the (practical)
‘conditions of possibility’ of the interpretive-communicative process itself. It may be
noted that the values arrived at in this way are the core values of traditional liberal theory:
tolerance, reasonableness, the attempt to work out mutual agreements by means of
discourse (‘conversation’) rather than by means of force.87 The values in question are
ones that Gadamer would call ‘principles of reason’—in that they are integral to
communicative understanding or rationality.
Hermeneutical values are those having to do with respect for the freedom and dignity
of one’s conversational partners, one’s fellow dialogical beings. A fundamental value in
this regard is that of equality. Since for an agreement to count as ‘true’—from the
viewpoint of communicative rationality—it must be reached by non-coercive means, the
right of dialogical partners to equal and fair consideration cannot rationally be denied.
The hermeneutical notion of ‘good will’88 points to a core precept of democratic
pluralism: the other may possibly be right over against oneself and thus must be accorded
a freedom equal to one’s own. Of all the principles of reason, the highest is of course
freedom itself. In the course of a discussion of Hegel, Gadamer asserts:
There is no higher principle of reason than that of freedom. Thus the opinion of
Hegel and thus our own opinion as well. No higher principle is thinkable than
that of the freedom of all, and we understand actual history from the perspective
of this principle: as the ever-to-be-renewed and the never-ending struggle for
this freedom.
([9.6], 9)
Freedom is the highest ‘principle of reason’ in that (as the theory of argumentation—the
‘new rhetoric’—has shown) no one can claim to be ‘reasonable’ if he or she denies
freedom of opinion and expression to others. No one, that is, can deny this freedom
without undermining his or her own demand for due consideration (recognition) that is
implicit in the expressing of any opinion whatsoever, and without thereby ostracizing
himself or herself from collective or intersubjective deliberations as to what is true and
right. For Gadamer freedom and reason are inseparable concepts; freedom is precisely
the freedom (the right) to possess a meaningful voice in the common dialogue, in that
‘conversation’ which is constitutive of our humanity.
In advocating the ‘freedom of all’ as the highest principle of reason, Gadamer, it will
be noted, is defending the universality of certain basic human values. Here again is an
illustration of how hermeneutics differs in a most important way from other forms of
anti-foundational postmodernism; unlike them, hermeneutics does not believe that a
rejection of objectivism need entail an anti-humanist relativism. To the universality of
human linguisticality corresponds the universality of certain basic human rights. ‘It is no
longer possible’, Gadamer insists, ‘for anyone still to affirm the unfreedom of

32.4 Page 314

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 276
humanity’ ([9.6], 37). Unlike Heidegger and recent poststructuralists, both Gadamer and
Ricoeur defend the tradition of philosophical and political humanism.89
It may be noted as well that hermeneutics’ defence of normative universalism is what
allows for the possibility of a philosophical or rational critique of existing practices.
‘The task of bringing people to a self-understanding of themselves’, Gadamer says, ‘may
help us to gain our freedom in relation to everything that has taken us in
unquestioningly’ ([9.6], 149–50). To the degree that this or that form of human
community fails to embody the universal values of communicative rationality, it is a
legitimate object of critique. To fail to expose various forms of ‘social
irrationality’ ([9.6], 74) for fear of being accused of ‘ethnocentrism’ and, more
specifically, of ‘Eurocentrism’ would, hermeneutics believes, amount to nothing less than
a betrayal of reason.90
This is yet another reason why Gadamer’s own version of hermeneutics is improperly
understood when, as is often the case, it is thought to entail ‘an uncritical acceptance of
tradition and sociopolitical conservatism’ (PHC, 108). Richard Bernstein is one
commentator who has clearly perceived the ‘radical’ element in Gadamer’s hermeneutics
that follows from its stress on practical philosophy. Bernstein notes how, in attempting to
draw out the practical consequences of philosophical hermeneutics, Gadamer
appropriates from Hegel the principle of freedom (‘a freedom that is realized only when
there is authentic mutual “recognition” among individuals’), and he remarks: ‘This
radical strain is indicated in his emphasis—which has become more and more dominant
in recent years—on freedom and solidarity that embrace all of humanity.’91
Although he meant it as a criticism, Stanley Rosen was quite right when he said:
‘Every hermeneutical program is at the same time a political manifesto or the corollary of
a political manifesto.’92 Gadamer openly acknowledges this when he characterizes
hermeneutics as scientia practica sive politica.93 Hermeneutical philosophy is inevitably
political—to the degree, that is, that it is a form of practical philosophy, which is to say,
to the degree that it privileges practical reason, phronesis, dialogue. In addition,
hermeneutical politics inevitably assumes the form of what Ricoeur calls ‘political
liberalism’. ‘This apologia of dialogue’, he says, ‘implies, in the context of politics, an
unremitting censure of tyranny and authoritarian régimes, and a plea for discussion as
also for the free expression and unrestricted interplay of all shades of opinion.’94 In many
of his shorter writings after Truth and Method Gadamer returns again and again to socio-
political issues, defending the values of communicative rationality and denouncing the
subtle forms of oppression that tend to subvert these values in an age dominated by
science and technology and a purely instrumentalist conception of reason. ‘It is the
function of hermeneutical reflection, in this connection [the conservation of freedom],’
Gadamer says, ‘to preserve us from naïve surrender to the experts of social
technology’ ([9.5], 40).95
The term used by Gadamer to refer to the normative ideal defended by hermeneutics is
solidarity. What ‘practice’ means, Gadamer says, ‘is conducting oneself and acting in
solidarity. Solidarity…is the decisive condition and basis of all social reason’ ([9.6], 87).
The task incumbent upon hermeneutics is a universalist one; it is, as Gadamer might say,
that of ‘reawakening consciousness of solidarity of a humanity that slowly begins to
know itself as humanity’ ([9.6], 86). The solidarity advocated by Gadamer is not, it

32.5 Page 315

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 277
should clearly be noted, one based solely on ethnic or cultural commonalities
(Gemeinschaft, ‘culture’). What he means by solidarity is, rather, ‘rational identification
with a universal interest’, with ‘the universals of law and justice’.96 Unlike present-day
communitarians of either the left or the right, Gadamer is not extolling the virtues of any
particular ethos or way of life (‘community’), purely as such; he is arguing for the need
for a genuine, philosophical (and thus universalist) ethics. The relation here between
ethics (Moralität) and ethos (Sittlichkeit) parallels the more general relation between
‘understanding’ (the universal) and ‘application’ (the particular) discussed above; the
former requires the latter, but is not reducible to it.97 Practical reason is indeed a form of
reason, which means that it makes a claim to universality.98 In the final analysis, the
solidarity Gadamer defends is the solidarity of reason seeking ‘general agreement’;99 it is
the solidarity of mutual recognition (Anerkennung) binding together the citizens of a
liberal society (Gesellschaft), i.e., a polity, or what Kant called ‘a universal civic
society’,100 founded upon the rational idea of human rights and universal freedom.101
In opposition to anarchism in both its leftist and rightist versions (the latter sometimes
referred to as ‘anarcho-capitalism’), hermeneutics insists that for freedom and solidarity
to prevail in practice liberal institutions are required (or what Gadamer refers to as ‘moral
and human arrangements built on common norms’.)102 As Merleau-Ponty had already
pointed out, invoking the name of Hegel: ‘freedom requires something substantial; it
requires a State, which bears it and which it gives life to.’ The essential thing is the
existence of ‘institutions which implant this practice of freedom in our customs
[moeurs]’.103 Ricoeur reiterates this point. In the Hegelian view that Ricoeur adopts, an
‘institution’ is the ‘whole of the rules relating to the acts of social life that allow the
freedom of each to be realized without harm to the freedom of others’.104 Ricoeur refers
to this institutional set-up as ‘un Etat de droit’, i.e., the liberal-democratic state or the rule
of law. Such a state is democratic in that it ‘does not propose to eliminate conflicts but to
invent procedures permitting them to be expressed and to remain negotiable. The State of
Law, in this sense,’ Ricoeur goes on to say, ‘is the State of organized free discussion.’
Ricoeur refers in this connection to Hegel’s definition of the most rational state as ‘the
State in which each would be recognized by all’.105 In arguing for ‘a synthesis of
freedom and institution’ Ricoeur is expressly arguing against those contemporaries of
his—referred to by some as the ‘philosophers of ‘68’106—who exalt a kind of ‘liberté
sauvage’ outside of any institutional framework and who denounce institutions as being
essentially coercive and repressive. And he insists that ‘it is only in the form of the liberal
State that this synthesis [of freedom and institutions] can be seen at work in the depths of
history’.107 The liberal-democratic state defended by hermeneutics is, one could say,
nothing other than the institutionalization of (dialogical) reason. In this connection
Richard Bernstein describes the practical task of hermeneutics as that of fostering ‘the
type of dialogical communities in which phronesis becomes a living reality and where
citizens can actually assume what Gadamer tells us is their “noblest task”—“decision-
making according to one’s own responsibility—instead of conceding that task to the
expert”’.108 What democratic theory has long referred to as the ‘common good’ is in fact
nothing other than an order of social institutions binding people together, one whose
raison d’être is to facilitate and encourage in them the exercise of practical-dialogical
reason (‘solidarity’).

32.6 Page 316

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 278
In conclusion, it is apparent that philosophical or phenomenological hermeneutics not
only provides a general theory of human understanding in its various modes, it also
prescribes very specific tasks in the realm of socio-political praxis. With the recent
demise of anti-liberal socialism and the triumph of democratic values throughout much of
the world, ‘the end of history’ is said by some to have occurred. Although Gadamer too
does not see any alternative to liberalism, he is under no illusions as to the ultimate
triumph of freedom and reason in history. He agrees with Hegel that it is no longer
possible for anyone (rationally) to deny the supreme value of the freedom of all. ‘The
principle that all are free never again can be shaken.’ It cannot be shaken to the degree
that the principle is, precisely, a principle of reason. However, he adds:
But does this mean that on account of this, history has come to an end? Are all
human beings actually free? Has not history since then [Hegel’s time] been a
matter of just this, that the historical conduct of man has to translate the
principle of freedom into reality? Obviously this points to the unending march
of world history into the openness of its future tasks and gives no becalming
assurance that everything is already in order.
([9.6], 37)
The task of realizing freedom in history is like the task of understanding and self-
understanding itself—it is an endless task. ‘To exist historically’, Gadamer says in reply
to Hegel, ‘means that knowledge of oneself can never be complete’ ([9.7], 269). Like
humanism or the belief in the ‘subject’—the human subject in search of meaning in his or
her own life and, as such, the bearer of basic human rights—hermeneutics or the belief in
meaning in history must recognize, as Ricoeur says, that it is without metaphysical
foundations, that it is a wager, a cry.109
NOTES
1 The term was apparently first used by J.C.Dannhauer in his Hermeneutica sacra sive
methodus exponendarum sacrarum litterarum (1654).
2 F.Schleiermacher, Hermeneutics: The Handwritten Manuscripts, ed. H.Kimmerle, trans.
J.Duke and J.Forstman (Missoula: Scholars Press, 1977), p. 93.
3 Both Gadamer and Ricoeur concur in ascribing to Schleiermacher a ‘psychologistic’ view
of understanding of the sort described here. This interpretation has been challenged,
however, by Manfred Frank; see his What is Neostructuralism?, trans. S.Wilke and R.Gray
(Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989), pp. 8–9.
4 See C.G.Hempel, ‘The Function of General Laws in History’ (1942), reprinted in Theories
of History, ed. P.Gardiner (New York: Free Press of Glencoe, 1959), pp. 344–56.
5 See P.Winch, The Idea of a Social Science and Its Relation to Philosophy (London:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1958), as well as his articles ‘The Idea of a Social Science’ and
‘Understanding of a Primitive Society’, both in Rationality, ed. B.R.Wilson (New York:
Harper Torchbooks, 1971).
6 R.J.Bernstein [9.29], 30.
7 ‘Phenomenological hermeneutics’ aptly designates the hermeneutics of Gadamer and

32.7 Page 317

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 279
Ricoeur since, as I shall indicate in more detail below, their thought is rooted in the
phenomenology of Edmund Husserl and Martin Heidegger. Ricoeur has said of his own
position: ‘it strives to be a hermeneutical variation of this [Husserl’s] phenomenology’ (‘On
Interpretation’ in A.Montefiore (ed.), Philosophy in France Today (Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1983), p. 187; hereafter cited in the text as OI). On another occasion
Ricoeur stated: ‘I do not believe that hermeneutics replaces phenomenology. It is only
opposed to the idealist interpretation of phenomenology’ (‘Response to My Friends and
Critics’ in C.E.Reagan [9.25], no page no.).
8 Tübingen: J.C.B.Mohr; see also his earlier encyclopaedic work, Theoria generale della
interpretazione, 2 vols (Milan: Dott. A.Giuffrè, 1955).
9 E.D.Hirsch, Jr, Validity in Interpretation (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1967).
10 See Validity, p. 264: ‘The much-advertised cleavage between thinking in the sciences and
the humanities does not exist. The hypothetico-deductive process is fundamental in both of
them, as it is in all thinking that aspires to knowledge.’
11 A particularly mean-spirited attack against Gadamer along these lines was published by
J.Barnes: ‘A Kind of Integrity’, London Review of Books, 6 Nov. 1986, pp. 12–13.
12 As Ricoeur recently pointed out in response to the Canadian hermeneuticist Jean Grondin,
hermeneutic’s polemical opposition to objectivism is an integral part of hermeneutics as it is
of the Husserlian phenomenology from which it derives. ‘L’herméneutique…est
polémique’, Ricoeur says, ‘parce que la compréhension dont elle s’autorise doit sans cesse
se reconquérir sur diverses figures de la méconnaissance’ (Ricoeur, ‘Réponses’ in
C.Bouchindhomme and R.Rochlitz (eds), ‘Temps et récit’ de Paul Ricoeur: en débat (Paris:
Editions du Cerf, 1990), pp. 201–2).
13 Gadamer here refers in a note to Betti’s work.
14 Hans-Georg Gadamer, Truth and Method [9.7], xvi.
15 This was in fact the title given to an edited collection of essays by Gadamer published in
1976: Philosophical Hermeneutics ([9.5]).
16 For a detailed treatment of this issue see ‘Ricoeur and the Hermeneutics of the Subject’ in
Madison [9.34]; forthcoming also in The Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur (Library of Living
Philosophers), ed. I.E.Hahn. For a good overview of the basic themes in Ricoeur’s
philosophizing, centred on the notion of the subject, see John W.Van Den Hengel [9.27].
Van Den Hengel includes in his study a remarkably extensive bibliography (483 titles) of
Ricoeur’s writings from 1935 to 1981.
17 Husserl provides a historical reconstruction of the modernist tradition to which he is
opposed in The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology: An
Introduction to Phenomenological Philosophy, trans. D. Carr (Evanston: Northwestern
University Press, 1970).
18 See E.Husserl, The Idea of Phenomenology, trans. W.P.Alston and G. Nakhnikian (The
Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1964), lecture I.
19 The phrase is that of Ludwig Landgrebe, one of Husserl’s late assistants. See his ‘Husserl’s
Departure from Cartesianism’, in R.O.Elveton (ed.), The Phenomenology of Husserl
(Chicago: Quadrangle Books, 1970), p. 261.
20 Cf. Ricoeur, ‘On Interpretation’ (see note 7), p. 190: ‘The theme of the Lebenswelt, a theme
which phenomenology came up against in spite of itself, one might say, is adopted by post-
Heideggerian hermeneutics no longer as something left over, but as a prior condition.’
21 See M.Merleau-Ponty, Phenomenology of Perception, trans. C.Smith (London: Routledge
& Kegan Paul, 1962), p. xiv: ‘Far from being, as has been thought, a procedure of idealistic
philosophy, phenomenological reduction belongs to existential philosophy: Heidegger’s

32.8 Page 318

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 280
“being-in-the-world” appears only against the background of the phenomenological
reduction.’
22 M.Heidegger, Being and Time, trans. J.Macquarrie and E.Robinson (New York: Harper &
Row, 1962), p. 90: hereafter cited in the text as BT.
23 Ricoeur, Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences [9.15], 87.
24 ‘In it [interpretation] the understanding appropriates understandingly that which is
understood by it’ (BT, 188).
25 Ricoeur, ‘The Question of the Subject’, in D.Ihde (ed.), The Conflict of
Interpretations:Essays in Hermeneutics (Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1974),
p. 266 (translation corrected).
26 Gadamer, ‘The Problem of Historical Consciousness’, in P.Rabinow and W. M.Sullivan
(eds), Interpretive Social Science: A Reader (Berkeley: University of California Press,
1979), p. 106; hereafter cited in the text as PHC. Ricoeur also bypasses Heidegger’s
concern for Being. Grounded as his thinking is in the French tradition of reflexive
philosophy, Ricoeur’s guiding question is not so much ‘What is the meaning of being?’ as
‘Who am I?’ He writes: ‘L’herméneutique devenait pour moi le long détour d’une
philosophie de la réflexion, la médiation interminable de l’auto-compréhension…[M]a
philosophie s’est développée—grossièrement parlant—comme une anthropologie
philosophique, où la question de l’être se réduit à celle du mode d’être de cet être capable de
se désigner comme sujet parlant, comme agent et patient de l’action, comme sujet moral et
politique, porteur de responsabilité et de citoyenneté’ (‘Réponses’ in ‘Temps et récit’ de
Paul Ricoeur (note 12), p. 211).
27 Bernstein [9.29], 159.
28 I owe this particular observation to Paul Fairfield.
29 The parallel between the two was one of the principal objects of concern of Merleau-
Ponty’s hermeneutical phenomenology.
30 What Gadamer says here of historical understanding could be applied, mutatis mutandis, to
intercultural or ethnological understanding and could be usefully contrasted with the
position defended by Peter Winch.
31 For a good overview and discussion of the issues involved in this debate, see Bernstein
[9.29].
32 It would not be desirable, in that it is incompatible with the philosophical-political values to
which hermeneutics subscribes—a topic to be considered later in this chapter.
33 Gadamer, ‘The Science of the Life-World’, Analecta Husserliana, 2 (1977): 185. It should
be noted that this text differs from the version published subsequently under the same title
in Philosophical Hermeneutics.
34 Ricoeur makes a similar remark: ‘The truth is…the lighted place in which it is possible to
continue to live and to think. And to think with our very opponents themselves, without
allowing the totality which constrains us ever to become a knowledge about which we can
overestimate ourselves and become arrogant’ (‘Reply to My Friends and Critics’ [9.25], no
page no.). It could thus be said that for hermeneutics ‘truth’ is primarily not ‘cognitive’ but
a ‘moral’ concept; it refers not so much to bits and pieces of ‘information’ we may possess
as it does to a general mode of living (being-in-the-world). In this connection Ricoeur
remarks, in a very Jamesian sort of way: ‘We wager on a certain set of values and then try
to be consistent with them; verification is therefore a question of our whole life. No one can
escape this…. I do not see how we can say that our values are better than all others except
that by risking our whole life on them we expect to achieve a better life, to see and to
understand things better than others’ (Lectures on Ideology and Utopia [9.16], 312).

32.9 Page 319

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 281
35 In La symbolique du mal (Philosophie de la volonté: Finitude et culpabilité, vol. II) (Paris:
Aubier, 1960). English translation: The Symbolism of Evil [9.20].
36 D.C.Hoy [9.33], 61.
37 See T.M.Van Leeuwen [9.28] 1.
38 Ricoeur, The Conflict of Interpretations [9.13], 411.
39 In what is said, there is always, Gadamer insists, ‘an infinity of what is not said’ ([9.7],
426).
40 This point is developed by Sartre in La transcendance de l’ego: Esquisse d’une description
phénoménologique (Paris: J.Vrin, 1966).
41 Merleau-Ponty, Phenomenology of Perception (note 21): there is no inner man, man is in
the world, and only in the world does he know himself’ (p. xi).
42 It should perhaps be noted that, from a Gadamerian point of view, conversation is not so
much an instance of language as it is what language essentially is.
43 As Gadamer goes on to point out: ‘Where a person is concerned with the other as
individuality, e.g. in a therapeutical conversation or the examination of a man accused of a
crime, this is not really a situation in which two people are trying to understand one
another.’ (In a footnote Gadamer remarks that in such a situation the questions which arise
are ‘marked by insincerity’.) As we shall see later, this view of conversation has important
consequences for the theory of text-interpretation.
44 For a discussion of these issues see Ricoeur, ‘Structure, Word, Event’ in The Conflict of
Interpretations [9.13].
45 Ricoeur, ‘New Developments in Phenomenology in France: The Phenomenology of
Language’, trans. P.Goodman, Social Research, 34:1 (spring 1967): 14.
46 See J.Habermas, The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity, trans. F.Lawrence (Cambridge,
Mass.: MIT Press, 1987), pp. 41–2.
47 Gadamer, ‘Practical Philosophy as a Model of the Human Sciences’, Research in
Phenomenology, 9 (1980):83.
48 See Gadamer, ‘Reply to My Critics’ in G.L.Ormiston and A.D.Schrift, The Hermeneutic
Tradition: From Ast to Ricoeur (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1990), pp.
275–6.
49 For Hirsch, in contrast, meaning is always willed meaning (see Validity (note 9), p. 51).
50 See also pp. xix, 321, 336, 338, 353, 356.
51 This point is developed in aesthetic response theory and reader reception theory by
Wolfgang Iser and Hans Robert Jauss, respectively (see Iser, The Act of Reading: A Theory
of Aesthetic Response (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1978) and Jauss,
Towards an Aesthetic of Reception, trans. T.Bahti (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota
Press, 1982). Ricoeur discusses the views of Iser and Jauss in Time and Narrative [9.21],
vol. 3, pp. 166ff.
52 Bernstein [9.29], 145.
53 G.W.F.Hegel, The Philosophy of History (New York: Dover Publications, 1978), p. 106.
54 Gadamer, ‘The Power of Reason’, Man and World, 3:1 (1970):15. In response to
Habermas’s charge that ‘tradition’, as hermeneutics understands it, is not subject to a
critique guided by an ‘emancipatory interest’, Gadamer makes the following counter-
charge: ‘unconsciously the ultimate guiding image of emancipatory reflection in the social
sciences [i.e., Habermas’s position] must be an anarchistic utopia. Such an image, however,
seems to me to reflect a hermeneutically false consciousness, the antitode for which can
only be a more universal hermeneutical reflection’ ([9.5], 42).
Gadamer’s emphasis on tradition is not meant to deny either (1) the universality of certain

32.10 Page 320

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 282
values or (2) the critical function of reason. What it does deny is the existence of an
ahistorical reason (the kind of ‘transcendental’ reason appealed to by Habermas that can
escape tradition altogether). In Truth and Method Gadamer states his position in the
following way: ‘Does the fact that one is set within various traditions mean really and
primarily that one is subject to prejudices and limited in one’s freedom? Is not, rather, all
human experience, even the freest, limited and qualified in various ways? If this is true, then
the idea of an absolute reason is impossible for historical humanity. Reason exists for us
only in concrete, historical terms, i.e., it is not its own master, but remains constantly
dependent on the given circumstances in which it operates’ ([9.7], 245).
We shall return to the question of values and rational critique in the concluding section of
this chapter.
55 Gadamer, ‘Reply to My Critics’ (note 48), p. 273.
56 Gadamer, ‘Hermeneutics as Practical Philosophy’, in Reason in the Age of Science [9.6],
111.
57 For a detailed treatment of this issue see my ‘The New Philosophy of Rhetoric’, Texte:
Revue de critique et de théorie littéraire, 8/9 (1989):247–77.
58 See C.Perelman and L.Olbrechts-Tyteca, Traité de l’argumentation: la nouvelle rhétorique
(Bruxelles: Editions de l’Institut de Sociologie, Université Libre de Bruxelles, 2nd edn,
1970).
59 R.Bernstein remarks in this regard: ‘Although the concept of truth is basic to Gadamer’s
entire project of philosophic hermeneutics, it turns out to be one of the most elusive
concepts in his work’ ([9.29], 151).
60 Ricoeur, ‘Langage (Philosophie)’ Encyclopaedia Universalis, vol. 9 (1971), p. 780.
61 See Ricoeur, ‘The Model of the Text’ in Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences [9.15],
212–13.
62 See also pp. 146–7, 203. Ricoeur also says that whereas Gadamer, with his reliance on the
model of conversation, places a great deal of confidence in Einverständnis—profound
agreement—he himself is ‘beaucoup plus sensible au caractère conflictuel du champ
d’interprétation’ (‘De la volonté à l’acte’ in ‘Temps et récit’ de Paul Ricoeur (note 12), p.
19.
63 ‘Distantiation is not the product of methodology and hence something superfluous and
parasitical; rather it is constitutive of the phenomenon of the text as writing’ ([9.15] 139).
Critics of Ricoeur might argue that his own critique of Gadamer is not entirely fair, in that
Gadamer himself argues for a ‘positive’ notion of distantiation. See, inter alia, the
following remarks that Gadamer made in his lectures at the University of Louvain in 1957:
‘Contrary to what we often imagine, time is not a chasm which we could bridge over in
order to recover the past: in reality, it is the ground which supports the arrival of the past
and where the present takes its roots. “Temporal distance” is not a distance in the sense of a
distance to be overcome…. Actually, it is rather a matter of considering “temporal distance”
as a fundament of positive and productive possibilities for understanding’ (PHC, 155–6).
If it is the case that Ricoeur has misread Gadamer on this score, then it is also the case that
he concedes too much to Habermas in the latter’s criticism of Gadamer (for Ricoeur’s
attempt to mediate the dispute between Habermas and Gadamer, see ‘Hermeneutics and the
Critique of Ideology’ in Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences) [9.15]. If Ricoeur argues
for a positive notion of distantiation, it is because he wants to maintain (against Habermas)
that hermeneutics has to do not only with the transmission of the past (as Habermas portrays
Gadamer as saying) but that it can also incorporate a critical moment in the appropriation
process. However, if Gadamer’s notion of distantiation is itself of a positive sort, then there

33 Pages 321-330

▲back to top

33.1 Page 321

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 283
is already a critical element in Gadamer’s hermeneutics (which therefore does not need to
be supplemented with borrowings from Habermas’s critical theory). As I have already
indicated, Gadamer does indeed make this claim.
64 The ‘second order referentiality’ of metaphorical discourse was one of the main things that
Ricoeur sought to demonstrate in La métaphore vive (Paris: Seuil, 1975); English trans.: The
Rule of Metaphor [9.19].
65 This highlights an important difference between Ricoeur’s theory of text-interpretation and
other postmodern theories which indeed do legitimate ‘projecting oneself into the text’ in
whatever way, i.e., engaging in ‘strong misreadings’ of the text. An outstanding example of
just how ‘strong’ misreadings of a deconstructionist sort may be is provided by the
American literary critic J. Hillis Miller. In a review of Ricoeur’s Time and Narrative, Miller
asserts that ‘hermeneutic theories’, such as Ricoeur’s, assume ‘the existence of stable
monological texts of determinable meanings, meanings controlled in each case by the
intentions of the author and by the text’s reference to a pre-linguistic “real world out
there”’. One’s astonishment over such a manifestly absurd remark (do deconstructionists
even bother any more to read the texts they pretend to ‘interpret’?) is compounded when a
few paragraphs further on one reads: ‘his view of language remains a more or less
unambiguous copy theory. Language, for him, mirrors, represents or “expresses” the lived
world’ (‘But Are Things as We Say They Are?’, Times Literary Supplement, 9–15 October
1987:1104).
66 See in this regard ‘On Interpretation’ (see note 7), pp. 185ff. The subject of the ‘self’ was
the topic of Ricoeur’s 1986 Gifford Lectures, ‘On Selfhood, The Question of Personal
Identity’, published in book form under the title Soimême comme un autre (Paris: Seuil,
1990), trans.: Oneself as Another [9.17].
67 ‘Si le sens n’est pas un segment de la compréhension de soi, je ne sais pas ce que
c’est’ (Esprit, November 1983:636).
68 S.B.Messer, L.A.Sass, R.L.Woolfolk (eds), Hermeneutics and Psychological Theory:
Interpretive Perspectives on Personality, Psychotherapy, and Psychopathology (New
Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 1988), p. xiii.
69 C.Geertz, The Interpretation of Cultures (New York: Basic Books, 1973), p. 5.
70 By way of underscoring the purposive nature of human action, Mises writes: ‘There is no
human being to whom the intent is foreign to substitute by appropriate conduct one state of
affairs for another state of affairs that would prevail if he did not interfere’ (The Ultimate
Foundation of Economic Science: An Essay on Method (Kansas City: Sheed Andres &
McMeel, 1978), p. 71).
71 That various social orders are the result of human action but not necessarily of human
design has been one of the major themes in the work of F.A. Hayek whose work anticipates,
in many ways, that of Gadamer and Ricoeur. See in this regard my ‘Hayek and the
Interpretive Turn’, Critical Review, 3:2 (spring 1989).
72 C.Taylor, ‘Interpretation and the Sciences of Man’, in P.Rabinow and W. M.Sullivan (eds),
Interpretive Social Science: A Reader (note 26), p. 48.
73 See Ricoeur, ‘History as Narrative and Practice’, interview with P.Kemp, Philosophy Today
(fall 1985):216.
74 J.Wakefield, ‘Hermeneutics and Empiricism: Commentary on Donald Meichenbaum’ in
Messer et al. (eds), Hermeneutics and Psychological Theory (note 68), p. 143.
75 Geertz, The Interpretation of Cultures (note 69), p. 9.
76 The interpretive economist D.Lavoie remarks in this regard: ‘The fact that the objects of our
study already have an interpretation of what is going on does not release the social scientist

33.2 Page 322

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 284
from the responsibility to develop and defend her own explication of what is going on. The
interpreter should not try to rid herself of her own perspective in order to ‘adopt’ that of the
interpreted, but must try to find new ways to use her presuppositions to attain a better
understanding of the human activities under study…. Thus interpretation always means
adding to what is said through a mediation of the ‘horizons’ of the interpreter and the
interpreted’ (‘The Account of Interpretations and the Interpretation of Accounts: The
Communicative Function of “The Language of Business”’, Accounting, Organizations and
Society, 12:6 (1987):594).
77 J.B.Thompson, Ideology and Modern Culture: Critical Social Theory in the Era of Mass
Communication (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1990), p. 323. In his analysis of
ideology Thompson draws extensively on suggestions put forward by Ricoeur. For a
comparative study of Ricoeur’s hermeneutics and the critical theory of Jürgen Habermas,
see his earlier work [9.26].
78 See Gadamer’s discussion of Dilthey in ‘The Problem of Historical Consciousness’ (note
26).
79 Jean Grondin, ‘L’herméneutique positive de Paul Ricoeur’ in ‘Temps et récit’ de Paul
Ricoeur (note 12), p. 125.
80 Geertz, The Interpretation of Cultures (note 69), p. 30.
81 In Time and Narrative [9.21], vol. I, Ricoeur refers to ‘explanation’ and ‘understanding’ as
‘a now obsolete vocabulary’; he prefers to speak instead of ‘nomological explanation and
explanation by emplotment’ (p. 181).
82 Of Ricoeur’s work in this area historian H.White has said: ‘Ricoeur’s is surely the strongest
claim for the adequacy of narrative to the realization of the aims of historical studies made
by any recent theorist of historiography’ (‘The Question of Narrative in Contemporary
Historical Theory’, History and Theory, 1 (1984):30).
For a discussion of Ricoeur’s treatment of the imagination over the course of his writings
see Richard Kearney, ‘Paul Ricoeur and the Hermeneutic Imagination’, in T.P.Kemp and
D.Rasmussen (eds) [9.24] (reprinted in Kearney, Poetics of Imaging: From Husserl to
Lyotard (London: Harper Collins Academic, 1991)). The thesis defended by Kearney is that
‘a poetic hermeneutic of imagination’ represents ‘the ultimate, if discreet, agenda of his
philosophical project’ (p. 2). The following remark of Ricoeur lends support to this thesis:
‘Despite appearances the one problem that has interested me from the beginning of my
work as a philosopher is that of creativity. I worked from the angle of individual psychology
in my early work on the will, then on the cultural level with my studies on symbolisms. My
present work on narrative puts me right at the heart of this social, cultural,
creativity’ (‘History as Narrative and Practice’, Philosophy Today (fall 1985):222).
83 Thus, for example, economist D.Lavoie writes, with reference to Ricoeur: ‘History is in this
view not an attempt to find quantitative covering laws that fully determine a sequence of
events, but an attempt to supply a qualitative interpretation of some part of mankind’s
“story”. The whole purpose of the theoretical social sciences (including economics and
accounting research) is to equip people with the capacity to better distinguish acceptable
from unacceptable historical narratives…. What we find ourselves doing in the social
sciences is not so much the testing of ex ante predictions but is more of the nature of what
the Austrian economist F.A.Hayek calls an ex post explanation of principles. The only
“test” any theory can receive is in the form of a qualitative judgment of the plausibility of
the sequence of events that has been strung together by narrative’ (‘The Account of
Interpretations and the Interpretation of Accounts’ (note 76), pp. 595–6).
84 D.Pellauer, ‘The Significance of the Text in Paul Ricoeur’s Hermeneutical Theory’ in

33.3 Page 323

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 285
[9.25], 112, 109.
85 Ricoeur’s interest in history and narrative can be seen to be the logical outgrowth of his
abiding concern over the issue of human action, since, in being ‘fixated’, action is
transformed into institutionalized social patterns, which is to say that it generates historical
processes.
86 Ricoeur deals at length with the issue of the ‘social imagination’ (of which ideology and
Utopia are two basic modes) in Lectures on Ideology and Utopia [9.16].
87 See Ricoeur’s remarks on violence and discourse in Main Trends in Philosophy (New York:
Holmes & Meier, 1979), pp. 224–7. On p. 227 Ricoeur writes: ‘It is because we, as men,
have chosen discourse—that is, discussion, seeking agreement by means of verbal
confrontation—that the defence of violence for violence’s sake is forever forbidden us.’
88 ‘Reaching an understanding in conversation presupposes that both partners are ready for it
and are trying to recognize the full value of what is alien and opposed to them’ ([9.7], 348).
89 Speaking of the humanistic ideal of the German historical school, Gadamer says that it
‘does not contain any particular content, but is based on the formal ideal of the greatest
variety. This kind of ideal is truly universal, for it cannot be shaken by any historical
evidence, any disturbing evidence of the transience of human things. History has a meaning
in itself’ ([9.7], 178).
The political motivation for Ricoeur’s defence of philosophical humanism is evident in the
following remark: ‘If anti-humanism is true, there is also no theoretical basis on which the
legal subject can oppose the abuse of political authority’ (Main Trends in Philosophy, p.
369).
90 The real ‘ethnocentrist’, hermeneutics maintains, is the person who denies the universal
validity (‘applicability’) of the principles of freedom and reason and who asserts that any
criticism of non-western societies for failing to recognize these principles is an instance of
‘Eurocentrism’. As a leading spokesperson for democratic values (‘such basic ideas as
representative government, human rights, and the rule of law’) in the ‘third world’, Aung
San Suu Kyi, recipient in 1991 of the Nobel Peace Prize, has stated: ‘The proposition that
the Burmese are not fit to enjoy as many rights and privileges as the citizens of democratic
countries is insulting’ (‘In Quest of Democracy’, Journal of Democracy, 2:1 (January
1992):6 and 11). Anti-universalist ethnocentrism (‘reverse Eurocentrism’) is indeed an
affront to basic human dignity.
91 Bernstein [9.29], p. 163.
92 S.Rosen, Hermeneutics as Politics (New York: Oxford University Press, 1987), p. 141.
93 Gadamer, ‘The Power of Reason’, Man and World, 3:1 (1970):8.
94 Ricoeur, Main Trends in Philosophy (note 87), p. 315.
95 In ‘Hermeneutics and Social Science’, Cultural Hermeneutics, 55 (1970), Gadamer writes:
‘the chief task of philosophy is…to defend practical and political reason against the
domination of technology based on science. That is the point of philosophical
hermeneutic’ (p. 316).
96 ‘The Power of Reason’ (note 93), p. 13.
97 See in this regard Gadamer’s remarks on natural law in Truth and Method [9.7].
98 Cf. Gadamer, ‘The Power of Reason’ (note 93): ‘Clearly reason has an immediate
connection with the universal’ (p. 6); ‘identification with the Universal—what is Reason if
not that?’ (p. 12). Reason is ‘the self-realizing identification with the universal’ (p. 14). On
p. 13 of this text Gadamer identifies ‘loss of freedom’ with ‘lack of possibility of
identifying with the universal’.
99 See Gadamer. ‘Reply to My Critics’ (note 48), p. 289.

33.4 Page 324

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 286
100 I.Kant, ‘Ideas for a Universal History from a Cosmopolitan Point of View’, in On History,
L.W.Beck (ed.) (Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1963), p. 16. Kant goes on to characterize
such a society as ‘the society with the greatest freedom. Such a society is one in which there
is a mutual opposition among the members, together with the most exact definition of
freedom and fixing of its limits so that it may be consistent with the freedom of others’.
101 The notion of human rights, as hermeneutics conceives of it, is not a metaphysical notion
and does not appeal to essentialist or foundationalist modes of thinking. Human rights are
not ‘natural rights’ (as Gadamer’s critic, L.Strauss, would maintain); they are rational
rights, rights of reason. That is to say, they are injunctions as to how people ought to be
treated, given what they in fact are, namely rational beings. That means: beings who have
the logos (as Isocrates said), i.e., are capable of engaging in dialogical or communicative
rationality. Basic rights such as freedom of speech, of conscience, of association, and so on,
are simply enumerations of the legal-institutional guarantees that are required for the
unimpeded exercise of this form of rationality. Since, as Gadamer recognizes, the ‘power of
reason’ is not a ‘natural faculty’ but a social attribute (‘This is not simply a capacity that
man has, but something of the sort that must be developed’ (‘The Power of Reason’ (note
93), p. 7), people can be fully rational (and thus fully human) only when they have the good
fortune of living within the kind of institutional set-up that these rights make possible.
Human rights are what those rational beings who are reflectively aware of what they are
will claim for themselves, in order to be recognized for what they are and in order to
become what they are (cf. Tiananmen Square, 1989).
102 ‘The Power of Reason’ (note 93), p. 8.
103 M.Merleau-Ponty, Signs, trans. R.C.McCleary (Evanston: Northwestern University Press,
1964), p. 349.
104 Ricoeur, ‘Le Philosophe et la politique devant la question de la liberté’, in La liberté et
l’ordre social (Neuchâtel: La Baconnière, 1969), p. 53.
105 Ricoeur, Du texte à l’action (Paris: Seuil, 1986), p. 404.
106 See L.Ferry and A.Renaut, French Philosophy of the Sixties: An Essay on Antihumanism
(Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1990).
107 Ricoeur, ‘La raison pratique’ in T.Gearets (ed.), La Rationalité aujourd’hui/ Rationality
Today (Ottawa: Editions de l’Université d’Ottawa, 1979), p. 238.
108 Bernstein [9.29], p. 159.
109 See Ricoeur, Main Trends in Philosophy (note 87), p. 372. On another occasion, Ricoeur
says that ‘the lament of modern philosophy [is] that we have to raise Hegelian problems
without the Hegelian solutions.’ While rejecting the notion of absolute knowledge and all-
encompassing theories of history, he nevertheless concedes: ‘Maybe we cannot have
passionate history without a certain expectation of what could be the global meaning of
history, but that must remain at the level, I think, of hypothesis; that must remain a kind of
working hypothesis’ (‘The Conflict of Interpretations’ in R.Bruzina and B.Wilshire (eds),
Phenomenology: Dialogues and Bridges (Albany: State University of New York Press,
1982), pp. 319–20).
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
For an exhaustive bibliography of both the primary and the secondary literature in
various languages, see Jean Grondin, Einführung in die Philosophische Hermeneutik

33.5 Page 325

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 287
(Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft, 1991).
Gadamer
Translations
9.1 Dialogue and Dialectic: Eight Hermeneutical Studies on Plato, trans. P.C. Smith,
New Haven: Yale University Press, 1980.
9.2 Hegel’s Dialectic: Five Hermeneutical Studies, trans. P.C.Smith, New Haven: Yale
University Press, 1976.
9.3 The Idea of the Good in Platonic-Aristotelian Philosophy, trans. P.C.Smith, New
Haven: Yale University Press, 1985.
9.4 Philosophical Apprenticeships, trans. R.Sullivan, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press,
1985.
9.5 Philosophical Hermeneutics, trans. D.E.Linge, Berkeley: University of California
Press, 1976.
9.6 Reason in the Age of Science, trans. F.Lawrence, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press,
1981.
9.7 Truth and Method, New York: Seabury Press, 1975, 2nd rev. edn, New York:
Crossroad, 1990.
Criticism
9.8 Foster, M. Gadamer and Practical Philosophy: The Hermeneutics of Moral
Confidence, Atlanta: Scholar’s Press, 1991.
9.9 Michelfelder D., and Palmer, R. (eds) Dialogue and Deconstruction: The Gadamer-
Derrida Encounter, Albany: State University of New York Press, 1989.
9.10 Sullivan, R. Political Hermeneutics: The Early Thinking of Hans-Georg Gadamer,
University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 1989.
9.11 Warnke, G. Gadamer: Hermeneutics, Tradition and Reason, Stanford: Stanford
University Press, 1987.
9.12 Weinsheimer, J. Gadamer’s Hermeneutics: A Reading of Truth and Method, New
Haven: Yale University Press, 1985.
Ricoeur
Translations
9.13 The Conflict of Interpretations: Essays in Hermeneutics, ed. D.Ihde, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1974.
9.14 Freud and Philosophy: An Essay on Interpretation, trans. D.Savage, New Haven:
Yale University Press, 1970.
9.15 Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences, trans. J.B.Thompson, Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1981.

33.6 Page 326

▲back to top
Hermeneutics 288
9.16 Lectures on Ideology and Utopia, ed. G.H.Taylor, New York: Columbia University
Press, 1986.
9.17 Oneself as Another, trans. K.Blamey, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1992.
9.18 Political and Social Essays, ed. D.Steward and J.Bien, Athens: Ohio University
Press, 1974.
9.19 The Rule of Metaphor, trans. R.Czeny, K.McLaughlin and J.Costello, Toronto:
University of Toronto Press, 1977.
9.20 The Symbolism of Evil, trans. E.Buchanan, New York: Harper & Row, 1967.
9.21 Time and Narrative, trans. K.McLaughlin and D.Pellauer, 3 vols, Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1984, 1985, 1988.
Criticism
9.22 Clark, S.H. Paul Ricoeur, London: Routledge, 1990.
9.23 Ihde, D. Hermeneutic Phenomenology: The Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1971.
9.24 Kemp, P. and Rasmussen, D. (eds) The Narrative Path: The Later Works of Paul
Ricoeur, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1989.
9.25 Reagan, C.E. (ed.) Studies in the Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, Athens: Ohio
University Press, 1979.
9.26 Thompson, J.B. Critical Hermeneutics: A Study in the Thought of Paul Ricoeur and
Jürgen Habermas, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1981.
9.27 Van Den Hengel, J.W. The Home of Meaning: The Hermeneutics of the Subject of
Paul Ricoeur, Washington: University Press of America, 1982.
9.28 Van Leeuwen, T.M. The Surplus of Meaning: Ontology and Eschatology in the
Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1981.
General commentaries and analysis
9.29 Bernstein, R.J. Beyond Objectivism and Relativism: Science, Hermeneutics, and
Praxis, Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1983.
9.30 Bleicher, J. Contemporary Hermeneutics: Hermeneutics as Method, Philosophy, and
Critique, London: Routledge, 1980.
9.31 Heckman, S.J. Hermeneutics and the Sociology of Knowledge, Notre Dame: Notre
Dame University Press, 1986.
9.32 Hollinger, R. (ed.) Hermeneutics and Praxis, Notre Dame: University of Notre
Dame Press, 1985.
9.33 Hoy, D. The Critical Circle: Literature and History in Contemporary Hermeneutics,
Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.
9.34 Madison, G.B. The Hermeneutics of Postmodernity: Figures and Themes,
Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1988.
9.35 Palmer, R.E. Hermeneutics: Interpretation Theory in Schleiermacher, Dilthey,
Heidegger, and Gadamer , Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1969.
9.36 Weinsheimer, J. Philosophical Hermeneutics and Literary Theory, New Haven:
Yale University Press, 1991.

33.7 Page 327

▲back to top
CHAPTER 10
Italian idealism and after
Gentile, Croce and others
Giacomo Rinaldi
INTRODUCTION
The history of twentieth-century Italian philosophy is strongly influenced both by the
peculiar character of its evolution in the preceding century and by widespread tendencies
of contemporary continental (especially German) thought. In nineteenth-century Italian
philosophy we can distinguish four main trends: (1) St Augustine’s and Aquinas’s
traditional dualistic metaphysics, which was renewed with some originality by the priest
Antonio Rosmini Serbati (1797–1855), and was regarded by the Roman Catholic church
as its ‘official’ philosophical doctrine; (2) methodological empiricism, which was
developed since the Renaissance especially by the founder of modern mathematical
physics, Galileo Galilei, and which found its most prominent exponent in the positivist
thinker Roberto Ardigò (1828–1920); (3) the speculative German tradition of Kantian-
Hegelian idealism, according to its interpretation as a metafisica della mente, i.e. as a
philosophy of pure self-consciousness, outlined by the greatest nineteenth-century Italian
thinker, Bertrando Spaventa (1817–83); and finally (4) Marx’s and Engels’s historical
materialism, which was spread and fostered especially by Antonio Labriola (1843–1904),
who worked out a ‘humanistic’ (anti-naturalistic) interpretation of it.
The influence of ‘classical German philosophy’ from Kant to Marx on twentieth-
century Italian thought thus turns out to be strictly determined and ‘mediated’ by the
peculiar character of its interpretation and appropriation in the preceding century. But
other trends of German thought too are studied, interpreted and further developed by
contemporary Italian philosophers, thus exerting a direct, ‘immediate’ influence on them:
e.g., the German tradition of ‘speculative mysticism’ (one might recall the philosophies
of the later Fichte and the later Schelling, as well as Gadamer’s ‘hermeneutics’), the
‘philosophy of immanence’ (Schuppe and Schubert-Soldern), the ‘empiriocriticism’ of
Mach and Avenarius; Husserl’s ‘phenomenology’ and Heidegger’s ‘existentialism’, etc.
The peculiar political-cultural context in which the above-mentioned trends of
contemporary Italian thought arise and spread can be sketched as follows. The
philosophy of German idealism, and especially its Hegelian version, owing both to its
origin in Protestant theology and religiosity and to its insistence on the state’s ‘ethical’
essence as the supreme moral law of the individual’s practical activity, met the spiritual
exigencies of those ‘liberal-national’ movements of the Italian Risorgimento which aimed
at the foundation of a unitary state, and which saw their major adversary in the Catholic
church’s temporal power.1 Augustine’s and Aquinas’s dualistic metaphysics, on the

33.8 Page 328

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 290
contrary, prevailed in the most conservative classes and political trends in Italian society,
and can be safely regarded, as it were, as the Roman Catholic church’s secular arm in its
intellectual and moral life. At the extreme opposite of the social-political array, Marx’s
historical materialism seemed able to offer an ‘objective’, ‘scientific’ foundation to the
political aspirations of those who dreamt of radically transforming Italian society’s
traditional order, be it the more archaic one sanctioned by the Roman Catholic church or
the more recent one of the national unitary state. Finally, positivistic empiricism became,
as it were, the ‘official’ ideology of the rising Italian industrial bourgeoisie, concentrated
especially in the country’s northern regions.
One can easily distinguish three fundamental evolutionary phases in twentieth-century
Italian philosophy. In the first (c. 1900–45) we witness an indisputable prevalence of the
idealistic trends, among them especially Giovanni Gentile’s thought. This is despite the
often exaggerated cultural influence of his ‘actual idealism’, which from its first ‘official’
statement (1911) was strongly opposed by other no less famous representatives of Italian
idealism such as Pietro Martinetti, Benedetto Croce and Pantaleo Carabellese. In the
second phase (c. 1945–80), a widespread violent reaction against idealistic philosophy in
general, and ‘actual idealism’ in particular, occurred. Antonio Banfi, Nicola Abbagnano,
etc. set against it not only the materialistic conception of history, but also later tendencies
of German thought such as, e.g., Husserl’s phenomenology and Heidegger’s
existentialism. The distinction between the first and the second phase, however, must be
understood not simply as a rigid separation, but as indicating a prevalence of the
idealistic orientation in the first half of the twentieth century and of the anti-idealistic one
in the second. In effect, the influence of nineteenth-century positivism does not disappear
in the age dominatedby Croce’s and Gentile’s thought (it suffices to think, in this regard,
of the writings of sociologists such as Vilfredo Pareto (1868–1923), of economists such
as Luigi Einaudi (1874–1961), and of methodologists of science such as Antonio Aliotta
(1881–1964). Furthermore, many of the most prominent exponents of the reaction against
idealism in the second half of the century (e.g., Antonio Gramsci, Abbagnano and Banfi)
had already worked out their fundamental conceptions before 1945. On the other hand,
although in weakened and often speculatively unfruitful forms, the philosophical
traditions of Gentile’s ‘actual idealism’ and of Croce’s ‘absolute historicism’ have
survived up to today.2 In the 1980s, the final phase, something like a widespread ‘decline
of ideology’ (‘tramonto dell’ideologia’) has, as Lucio Colletti says, taken place. The most
remarkable consequence of it is likely to be the perhaps definitive dissolution of the
cultural influence of the materialistic conception of history, which in the second half of
the century has often represented one of the most powerful and unrelenting adversaries of
any idealistic speculation. Although, then, the current situation of the ‘spirit’ of Italian
culture is undoubtedly pervaded with a general feeling of bewilderment and creative
impotence, yet it might also disclose new horizons and real possibilities for a critical
resumption and further original development of the most glorious and speculatively
fruitful trend in Italian thought—i.e., the Kantian-Hegelian tradition.
‘ACTUAL IDEALISM’: GIOVANNI GENTILE

33.9 Page 329

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 291
Giovanni Gentile (1875–1944), who was rightly defined by Michele Federico Sciacca as
‘the greatest Italian philosopher in our century’,3 was the author of numerous
philosophical and historiographical works which are to be counted among the
masterpieces of Italian thought in any age and have left an indelible trace also on the
development of contemporary European philosophy. Here I can confine myself to
mentioning the most relevant ones: La riforma della dialettica hegeliana (The Reform of
Hegelian Dialectic) (1913 [10.32]), Sommario di pedagogia come scienza filosofica (An
Outline of Pedagogy as a Philosophical Science), two volumes (1913–14 [10.33]), Teoria
generate dello spirito come atto puro (General Theory of Mind as Pure Act) (1916
[10.35]), I fondamenti della filosofia del diritto (The Foundations of the Philosophy of
Law) (1916 [10.34]), Sistema di logica come teoria del conoscere (A System of Logic as a
Theory of Knowledge), two volumes (1917–22 [10.36]), Le origini della filosofia
contemporanea in Italia (The Origins of Contemporary Philosophy in Italy), three
volumes (1917–23 [10.37]), Discorsi di religions (Speeches on Religion) (1920 [10.38]),
La filosofia dell’arte (The Philosophy of Art) (1931 [10.42]), Introduzione alla filo-sofia
(An Introduction to Philosophy) (1933 [10.43]), and finally his posthumously published
book Genesi e struttura della società (Genesis and Structure of Society) (1946 [10.44]).
Gentile’s works organically merge a vigorous theoretical development of his own
original philosophical doctrine, ‘actual idealism’ (or ‘actualism’) with an immense,
philologically very accurate, historiographical erudition, focusing especially upon the
history of Italian philosophy and culture.
The doctrine of ‘actual idealism’ can be safely regarded as an attempt to press to its
extreme consequences Spaventa’s interpretation of Hegelian philosophy as a metaphysics
of pure self-consciousness. Philosophy is the search for truth—not for this or that
particular ‘abstract’ truth, but for the unique ‘absolute’ truth (and reality). And such a
truth cannot possibly ‘transcend’ thought’s self-conscious act which aspires to its
possession. For in such a case not only could the latter never be ‘certain’ of any truth
whatsoever, but as essentially ‘other’ than (absolute) truth it could not but turn into a
mere contingent phenomenon. This, however, is clearly disproved by the fact that, as
Descartes had already pointed out, one can deny the ‘evidence’ of self-conscious thought
only by virtue of a further, more original act of thinking. Gentile can therefore assert:
‘cogito ergo sum; sum substantia cogitans; quatenus substantia in me sum et per me
concipior; hoc est mei conceptus non indiget conceptum alterius rei, a quo formari
debeat’ (‘I think, therefore I am. I am a thinking substance. As a substance I am in myself
and can be thought of only through myself—i.e., the concept of myself need not any
concept of another thing in order to be thought of’).4 Yet according to Gentile, unlike
Descartes, not only is consciousness actual but the whole of reality turns into
consciousness. For any possible objectivity, in the final analysis, turns out to be
absolutely enclosed in it, as its own immanent content, or rather ‘opposite’. Since the act
of consciousness is one and ‘unmultiplicable’ (immoltiplicabile),5 the object’s essence,
then, will be radically manifold. On the other hand, as the object is but a negative content
of knowing, that of which consciousness can be actually aware is only itself. As Hegel
had already maintained, the ‘truth’ of consciousness is therefore self-consciousness. ‘The
Ego’s act is consciousness as self-consciousness; the Ego’s object is the Ego itself. Any
conscious process is an act of self-consciousness.’6 In such an act, then, subject and

33.10 Page 330

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 292
object coincide. But their identity is never ‘immediate’. For self-consciousness is every
truth only as the necessary consciousness of the error that essentially inheres to any
‘immediate’ (i.e. sensuous, manifold, natural, etc.) being as such. As a consequence, its
‘being’ can become actual only as the negation of a ‘not-being’ originally immanent to
it—and thus is a dialectical unity of opposites. Now, as Hegel himself had shown by
‘deducing’ Becoming from the opposite ‘abstractness’ of Being and Nothing, such a
unity can be consistently conceived only as ‘movement’ or ‘process’: ‘The subject that
resolves the object into itself, at least when this object is a spiritual reality, is neither a
being nor a state of being: it is nothing immediate, as we said, but a constructing
process—a process constructing the object as a process constructing the very subject.’7
One of the deepest and most fascinating aspects of ‘actual idealism’ is certainly
Gentile’s insightful distinction between his ‘transcendental’ concept of the self-conscious
Ego and the ‘empirical Ego’ (the sensuous-finite individual), and consequently between
the former’s peculiar processuality and the form of ‘time’. In fact, both the empirical
Egos and time (which to Gentile, unlike Kant, is, like ‘space’, the essential form of
nature, not of consciousness) imply a plurality of ‘facts’, or ‘points’, which exclude each
other, either in the simultaneity of spatial existence or in the succession of temporal
becoming. The transcendental Ego, on the contrary, as necessarily existing (cogito ergo
sum), is of necessity universal, and thus unique. The mutual transcendence (exclusion) of
the empirical Egos as well as of the moments of sensuous time (past, present and future),
therefore, is in the final analysis negated (in the Hegelian sense of ‘negation’, i.e. as
Aufhebung) in the timeless, ‘eternal’ process of the transcendental Ego—of the pensiero
pensante. ‘Thought as actual, or as the universal Ego, contains, and therefore overcomes
not only the spatiality of pure nature, but also the temporality of pure natural becoming.
Thought is beyond time, is eternal.’8 ‘And therefore the moment [istante], the
of thought, is not a moment among the moments, is not in time; it has no
‘before’, and no ‘after’; it is eternal.’9
Gentile deduces with admirable logical cogency the overall articulation of spirit’s
whole life from his concept of human self-consciousness as ‘mediate’, dynamic unity of
subject and object. If their unity cannot in principle be ‘immediate’, this means that they
are immediately different, and even opposite. Pure (‘abstract’) subject, pure (‘abstract’)
object, and their (‘concrete’) mediation (identity of subject and object)—these are the
three fundamental ‘phases’ of self-conscious thought’s process, the three ‘absolute forms
of spirit’.10 The form of spirit’s abstract subjectivity coincides, according to Gentile, with
‘pure feeling’ (sentimento puro), which constitutes the specific element of art.11 It is not
to be mistaken for the psychological sensations of pleasure and pain, although these latter
do constitute the opposite ‘poles’ of its immanent dialectic, for it is not conditioned by
any alleged extramental reality,12 and thus is ‘infinite’. Although acknowledging that
feeling, art, beauty, etc. are the origin, and even the ‘root’ (radice), of spirit’s whole
development, Gentile emphatically denies that they constitute something more than a
merely ‘abstract’, ‘inactual’ moment of it. For in the act of thinking in which they are
thought of as such, they necessarily negate themselves as ‘pure’ feeling, ‘pure’ beauty,
etc., and rather identify themselves with the very (concrete) objectivity of pure thought.
In fact, Gentile says, ‘[k]nowing is identifying, overcoming otherness as such’.13 The
very moment, then, the self-conscious subject becomes fully aware of the

34 Pages 331-340

▲back to top

34.1 Page 331

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 293
‘intimacy’ (intimità) of its feelings, it cannot but objectify them, and thus transform them
into a thought-content. Not unlike Hegel, Gentile therefore denies any possible
autonomous development of art.14
The pure, ‘abstract’ object, we have seen, is the immanent negation of the act of
thinking. Gentile can therefore proceed to set spirit’s unity, universality, necessity,
activity, freedom, eternity, etc. over against the radical multiplicity, particularity,
contingency, passivity, temporality, etc. of nature, which is just the object of thought as
‘immediately’ other than it. He consequently holds to a rigidly deterministic and
mechanical conception of nature. For him this is immanent to spirit, but the latter is not
immanent at all to it as such. To the extent that nature’s reality is (abstractly, and
therefore ‘erroneously’) posited, the actuality of the spiritual subject must be negated.
This is also the case with the positive (both ‘natural’ and ‘historico-social’) sciences,
since they describe or explain an essentially manifold object (the ‘phenomenal’ plurality
of natural ‘facts’ or of historical ‘events’), and, moreover, abstract from its essential
relation to the self-conscious act of thinking as its ultimate origin and condition of
possibility. Yet no less abstractly objective, and therefore in the final analysis negative
and ‘erroneous’, than sensible nature and the positive sciences is the intelligible
multiplicity of the concepts, principles, and logical laws that constitute the subject matter
of traditional formal logic. Although the first volume of his Sistema di logica come teoria
del conoscere (A System of Logic as a Theory of Knowing) is devoted to a close
examination of its fundamental structures,15 such a logic, whose peculiar object he
defines in terms of logo astratto (abstract thought) or of pensiero pensato (thought
thought of), is radically unable adequately to express the logical essence of thought’s self-
conscious process (or autoconcetto). Just as was the case with nature and the positive
sciences, Gentile does recognize the necessity of the logo astratto but for no other reason
than that in his dialectical conception of spirit’s becoming the negative, the ‘abstract’ is
no less essential than the positive, the ‘concrete’, to its ‘self-positing’ (autoctisi).
As an ‘abstractly’ objective form of spirit Gentile does not hesitate to consider religion
itself, both as confessional religiosity16 and as subjective mystical experience. This is
because religion generally sets against pure self-consciousness, as the creating principle
of its being, an absolutely transcendent personal God, who, as such, is obviously an
‘other’ with respect to its ‘pure immanence’, and thus an ‘inactual’ abstraction. On the
other hand, in mystical experience the subject does try to identify itself with the
objectivity of the ‘divine’, but at the cost of annihilating itself as consciousness, and, a
fortiori, as self-consciousness.17 Not unlike spirit’s artistic form, then, to Gentile religion
too remains incurably ‘abstract’. The ‘concrete’ unity of subject and object, therefore, can
be attained only by a higher spiritual form, in which the object is conceived as essentially
immanent to the subject, and this latter not as merely ‘subjective’ feeling but as the
‘substantial’, ‘objective’ subjectivity of actual thought. And this, of course, can be
explicated only by philosophy, which for Gentile coincides without residue with spirit’s
ethico-political activity. For it is possible to distinguish them only by somehow opposing
thought to action, theory to praxis, or, within the latter, the ‘morality’ of the individual to
the ‘ethicality’ of society (or of the state). Yet for him the very intrinsic absoluteness,
creativity and actuality of the autoconcetto excludes in principle the possibility that it
may be conceived as mere theory, as a passive ‘reflection’ of a ‘given’ it does not itself

34.2 Page 332

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 294
‘posit’. As a consequence, it does not lack that creative energy which traditional
philosophy (before and after him) is rather inclined to ascribe to the will alone. On the
other hand, to Gentile the only concrete effective moral life the human individual can
realize is that which unfolds in the organic, ‘spiritual’ unity of social institutions, from
the family up to the state.18 The very moment, then, speculative philosophy theoretically
‘constructs’ absolute truth in the ‘pure act’ of self-consciousness, it also actualizes itself
in those ethico-political institutions which are the ‘kernel’, as it were, of humanity’s
spiritual history.
Despite the extremely summary character of this outline of Gentile’s idealism I believe
that the reader can easily grasp its fundamental difference from Hegel’s, whose paternity,
on the other hand (through the mediation of Spaventa’s interpretation), he openly
recognizes. Whereas to Hegel there exists a dialectical movement of the logical
categories and of natural reality which is not yet, as such, (explicitly) self-conscious, to
Gentile the only possible dialectical process, and then concrete actuality, is that of self-
conscious spirit. Whereas to Hegel an organic, ideological development of the Denken, of
speculative reason, is immanent in nature (despite its being nothing more than the
Absolute Idea’s self-alienation), to Gentile (not unlike, at least in this regard, Kant and
the positivists old and new) it is nothing more than a dead mechanism determined by
merely quantitative and causal connections. Whereas to Hegel the identity of knowing
and the will in the Absolute Idea does not exclude a no less substantial ‘logical’
difference between them, which, in the Philosophy of Spirit, renders possible the further
distinction between the ‘finite’ sphere of ethico-political life (‘objective’ Spirit) and the
higher one of the artistic, religious and philosophical contemplation of the Absolute
(Absolute Spirit), to Gentile there is no other ‘Absolute’ than spirit’s ethico-political
history, nor any other ‘spirit’ than the ‘infinite’ unity of the ‘Ego=Ego’ (i.e., Absolute
Spirit).
To these fundamental differences two others can be added, which seem to me no less
relevant, although strictly logico-methodological in character. First of all, Hegelian
dialectic unfolds in a succession of categories (Denkbestimmungen and
Begriffsbestimmungen) in which the preceding are (relatively) more ‘abstract’ than the
subsequent ones, while the latter are (relatively) more ‘concrete’, and constitute the
‘truth’ of the former, which are both ‘negated’ and ‘preserved’ (aufgehoben) in them. To
Gentile, on the contrary, the ‘concrete’, the ‘Ego=Ego’ is the beginning of the dialectical
process not only in the ontological order of reality and truth, but also in the
methodological one of its dialectical explication. Second, while to Hegel the speculative
synthesis of opposites constitutes itself as a Stufenfolge, a hierarchical succession of
categories, or ‘spiritual forms’, more and more adequate to the Absolute’s concreteness,
Gentile openly denies that spirit’s development unfolds ‘in a series of typical degrees’.19
For its self-identity is equally immanent in all ‘concrete’ moments in which its
evolutionary process is being articulated. In fact, if one should admit, with Hegel, a
hierarchy of spiritual forms, the Absolute and the higher ones would turn out to be (at
least relatively) transcendent to the most elementary and inadequate ones. And this
would undermine the fundamental methodological assumption of ‘actual idealism’: i.e.
the ‘absolute immanence’ of truth to self-conscious thought.
This is not the place to try to strike a balance (however summary) of Gentile’s

34.3 Page 333

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 295
philosophy,20 still less of his ‘reform of Hegelian dialectic’. As compared with the
speculative doctrine from which it stems, it might certainly be regarded as little more
than a mere ‘simplification’21 of it that risks mutilating, if not even irreparably distorting,
the rich, systematic complexity of Hegel’s thought. Yet in such a case one would too
easily forget that that concept of ‘spirit’ as ‘pure act’, on which all of Gentile’s theoretical
reflections and constructions hinge, does constitute the most living, profound and up-to-
date aspect of the whole Hegelian system. Moreover, while Hegel distinguishes religion
from philosophy only owing to their ‘form’, and emphatically asserts the identity of their
‘content’, thus seeming to forget that according to his own logic22 they on the contrary
determine each other, Gentile’s distinction between religion as the ‘abstractly objective’
form of spirit and philosophy as the fully ‘concrete’ and ‘actual’ one does bring to light a
difference concerning their very content, and thus saves—against Hegel—the validity of
his very principle of the mutual determination of the form and the content of thought.
Finally, an undeniably original, creative development of Gentile’s thought with respect
to Hegel’s is certainly to be found in his pedagogical theory. The dialectical opposites
that are constitutive of the educational act, which he conceives as an essentially ‘spiritual’
activity, are the subjectivity of the ‘pupil’ and the objectivity of ‘science’, which is
embodied in the person of the ‘teacher’. As long as these two terms of the educational
relation remain in the ‘immediate’ form of their mutual exclusion—which constitutes, as
such, the original ‘antinomy of education’23—no real spiritual progress in the pupil’s
self-consciousness can take place. For it to occur, indeed, it is necessary that the latter
should turn the teacher’s objectivity into his or her own self-consciousness, thus
becoming, in a sense, the ‘teacher of himself or herself. In the fullness of the educational
act, Gentile profoundly observes, the pupil ‘does learn, and throbs and lives in the
teacher’s word, as if he heard a voice sound in it that bursts out from the inwardness of
his own being’.24 Any true knowing, therefore, is never mere passive learning of dead
and fragmentary notions, but rather free spiritual creation of knowledge by the pupil’s
inner personality. The spirit which ‘actually’ thinks, Gentile concludes, is always, in one
way or another, an ‘auto-didact’. From his deep-rooted conception of education as a
‘spiritual’ process Gentile does not fail explicitly to draw a consequence that seems to me
to be still today of the utmost cultural relevance and upto-dateness. True culture and
education is only that in which the human mind knows and ‘creates’ itself. Hence it is an
essentially humanistic (philosophical) culture and education. Any technological cognition
or ability (which as such constitutes the object of what he calls ‘realistic instruction’),25
therefore, can be legitimately ascribed some sort of meaning and value only to the extent
that it constitutes a useful (although of necessity always subordinate) means for the
pupil’s spiritual formation, this being in one both philosophical and ethico-political.26
‘ABSOLUTE HISTORICISM’: BENEDETTO CROCE
Both to Hegel and to Gentile ‘the Absolute is Subject’, and as such it necessarily
manifests itself in humanity’s historical development. Yet this does not mean at all that
for them historical reality, as a multiplicity of spiritual ‘facts’ or events, and
historiography, as the subjective representation of such a reality, constitute, respectively,

34.4 Page 334

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 296
the unique true actuality, and the only possible ‘objective’ knowledge of which the
human mind could dispose. Any historico-factual manifestation of the Absolute, as such,
is incurably ‘finite’, and thus inadequate to its pure ideal self-identity, whose full
concreteness is actualized only in the process of ‘absolute knowing’ (Hegel) or of the
autoconcetto (Gentile), as absolute identity of knowing and the will. The ‘absolute
historicism’ of Benedetto Croce (1866–1952), on the contrary, aims at resolving without
residue any possible reality into historical facticity. The fundamental error of any
metaphysical speculation consist in the filosofismo,27 i.e., in the illegitimate claim that the
concept’s immanent development would of itself be able to offer us an adequate
knowledge of objective reality. Croce appeals to Kant’s famous dictum that ‘concepts
without intuitions are empty, and intuitions without concepts are blind’, in order to
vindicate the element of the intuitive, individual, ‘historical’ representation as an
essential condition for any possible knowing. Actual knowledge, then, is neither the pure
concept (as metaphysics, and especially Hegel’s ‘panlogism’, maintains),28 nor the
singular sensuous representation (as empiricism generally holds), but rather the logical
activity of the ‘individual judgment’,29 in which the human mind predicates of an
historico-individual ‘fact’ four fundamental ‘categories’ (the Beautiful, the True, the
Useful, the Good), to which Croce ascribes universal, necessary and thus a priori validity.
But is not nature’s reality itself constituted by a multiplicity of individual ‘facts’, and
do not the natural ‘laws’ which the positive sciences discover in such facts imply some
sort of a priori cognitive ‘forms’ (e.g., space and time) or ‘categories’ (causality,
substance, etc.) either? Why, then, restrict the area of application of the ‘individual
judgments’ to historical reality alone? Croce resorts to the idealistic principle of the
identity of being and consciousness in order to deny in principle the actuality of any
alleged natural, and then extra-mental, facts. On the other hand, he borrows from one of
the most fashionable Wissenschaftstheorien (theories of science) of the early 1900s,
Mach’s and Avenarius’s ‘empiriocriticism’, the idea that the concepts and laws of the
positive sciences are devoid of intrinsic universality and necessity, and are rather
‘abbreviations’ of a contingent plurality of sensuous, particular representations, which are
worked out only in view of their practical utility, this consisting in the ‘economy’ of
mental ‘effort’ which their employment would allow to the scientists.30
Having denied the reality of the Absolute and of nature, and consequently the truth of
metaphysics and the positive sciences, Croce can easily identify the whole theoretical
activity of the human mind with historiography. Philosophical knowledge differs from it
only as the reflective explication of the conditions for the possibility of those ‘logical a
priori syntheses’ (the ‘individual judgments’) which the actual historiographical praxis
mostly carries out in an unconscious way. Contrary to what all great metaphysicians had
concordantly maintained, then, philosophy can no longer be regarded as an ‘autonomous’
science but as the mere ‘methodological moment of historiography’.31 Its specific subject
matter would consist, in substance, in a clarification of the contents and mutual relations
of those a priori categories which constitute, as we have seen, an essential moment of the
‘individual judgments’. The category of the Beautiful coincides with spirit’s artistic
activity, or sense-perception, and its essential products are just those individual intuitive
representations which become the subject of the judgments laid down by spirit’s logical
activity.32 This latter, then, does not exhaust as such the essence of the category of the

34.5 Page 335

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 297
True, whose concrete content, rather, turns into the multiplicity of the individual
judgments historical knowledge consists of. As to the category of the Useful, according
to Croce it defines a form of spirit’s activity no less concrete and ‘autonomous’ than art,
knowledge or morality. In this regard, the influence of Marx’s thought on Croce, through
the mediation of its ‘humanistic’ interpretation worked out by Labriola at the end of the
nineteenth century (see p. 350), is undeniable.33 Unlike Hegel and Gentile, who
emphasize the fact that the economic activity of the human mind is but the ‘phenomenal’,
‘negative’, ‘abstract’ side of the only true practical activity, i.e., moral activity as social
morality (Sittlichkeit, eticità) or ethico-political praxis, to Croce the world of economic
processes and relations instead constitutes a fully actual and autonomous factor in human
history. Of course, since Croce identifies being in general with history, and defines this
latter in terms of ‘spirit’, he can acknowledge the actual reality of economy only by
interpreting the latter as a human activity no less ‘spiritual’ than, e.g., aesthetic
contemplation or historical knowledge. As to the category of the Good, finally, Croce
decidedly rejects Hegel and Gentile’s contention that it can be concretely embodied only
in social institutions. As was already the case with Kant, he confines moral activity to the
private sphere of individual conscience, or, at best, to those social relations which an
individual can freely join.
These are the main lines of the ‘philosophy of spirit’ set forth by Croce in his four
‘systematic’ works: Estetica come scienza dell’espressione e linguistica generale
(Aesthetics as the Science of Expression and General Linguistics) (1902 [10.15]), Logica
come scienza del concetto puro (Logic as the Science of the Pure Concept) (1905
[10.16]), Filosofia della pratica (The Philosophy of Practice) (1908 [10.18]), and Teoria
e storia della storiografia (A Theory and History of Historiography) (1917 [10.19]). In
the later years of his long literary, philosophical and political career, he seemed deeply to
modify such a conception, at least with respect to two fundamental issues. On the one
hand, in his Storia d’Europa nel secolo decimonono (A History of Europe in the
Nineteenth Century) (1932 [10.20]),34 he sees at the root of the progressive historical
realization of the ethico-political ideal of ‘liberalism’ the spiritual energy of a new
‘religion’, although non-confessional in character: the so-called ‘religion of freedom’. In
the systematic exposition of his ‘philosophy of spirit’, on the contrary, religion is not
regarded as a peculiar form of spirit’s activity. On the other hand, in his La storia come
pensiero e come azione (History as Thought and as Action) (1938 [10.22]),35 he denies
that the category of the Good constitutes, as such, a ‘distinct’ and autonomous form of
spirit’s life. Now morality seems to him to turn without residue into each of the three
previous categories: the True, the Beautiful, and the Useful. Furthermore, in an essay
collected in his last book, Indagini sullo Hegel e schiarimenti filosofici (Inquiries into
Hegel and Philosophical Explanations) (1952 [10.23]),36 he stresses the spiritual form of
‘vitality’ (vitalità)—which coincides, at least prima facie, with the category of the
Useful—as the unique, common origin and ‘root’ of all the ‘distinct’ forms of spirit,
whose ‘autonomy’, on the contrary, he had once so emphatically vindicated.
Despite the wide influence exerted by Croce’s ‘historicism’ on twentieth-century
Italian and European culture, I do not believe that he was actually able to offer a
speculatively relevant contribution to the development of philosophical thought in our
age. Elsewhere I have pointed out those which seem to me to be the fundamental

34.6 Page 336

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 298
shortcomings both of his general conception of history and, in particular, of his logic.37
Here I can confine myself to remarking that Croce’s negation of the possibility of
metaphysics is based upon the uncritical ontological presupposition of the actual reality
of the ‘finite’ (as ‘historical fact’). As soon as its intrinsic negativity becomes evident to
self-conscious reflection, the radical inconsistency of such a presupposition can easily be
unmasked. Second, the empiriocriticistic and Crocean denial of the universality of the
concepts and laws of the positive sciences turns out to be possible only by surreptitiously
presupposing the immediate evidence of sense-perception, which in truth is no less
negative and contradictory than the ‘finite’ as such. Third, Croce declares that the four
‘categories’ in which he articulates the essence of spirit’s development are a priori, i.e.,
‘universal’ or absolute (and this is just the reason why, as against historical relativism, he
defines his own philosophy as ‘absolute historicism’). A merely historico-inductive
justification of their peculiar content and relations, then, is clearly out of place. The only
possible foundation of their objective validity would obviously be their
‘deduction’ (however this may be conceived). Now, in no passage of his extensive
writings does Croce appear to be able to provide us with the least ‘deduction’ of the
specific categorial content of his ‘theory of the distincts’, and still less with any coherent
conception of their mutual ‘dialectical’ relations. On the other hand, the groundlessness
of his claim that they are a priori is proved ad oculos by his subsequent reduction of their
number through the suppression of the category of the Good as an autonomous form of
spirit’s life as well as by his conclusive resolution of the whole categorial order into the
sensuous immediacy of the vitalità. Fourth, how is it possible meaningfully to speak of an
alleged ‘religion of freedom’ while at the same time openly denying (unlike Gentile and
Hegel!) that religion as such is a specific form of spirit’s dialectical development?
Finally, Croce’s vindication of the a priori character of the category of the Useful and,
correlatively, of the ‘spiritual’ value and meaning of man’s economic activity as such
clearly implies the absurd transmogrification of a merely external and finite categorial
relation such as that of ‘utility’38 into a self-contained, ‘infinite’ concept, since any
authentic ‘spiritual’ category must necessarily be such. The final outcome of Croce’s
critical destruction of metaphysics in general, and especially of his sometimes very
virulent polemic against Hegel’s and Gentile’s thought, then, appears to be, on the one
hand, the sanctification of the most immediate, arbitrary and egoistic utilitarian interests
of the ‘private’ individuals, and, on the other, the replacement of the living profundity of
speculative thought with the dead superficiality of the most trivial and fragmentary
historical erudition.
HISTORICAL RELATIVISM AND SCEPTICISM
Despite his polemic against Hegel and Gentile, Croce’s historicism nevertheless holds to
two fundamental assumptions of any idealistic philosophy: i.e., the identification of being
with consciousness and the distinction, within the latter, between a system of universal
(absolute) categories (or ‘values’) and the multiplicity of the particular, contingent
representations which they somehow determine and qualify. A widespread theoretical
and historiographical trend in twentieth-century Italian philosophy, represented especially

34.7 Page 337

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 299
by former fellows of Croce and Gentile, although holding fast to the first assumption,
decidedly rejects the second. It is a ‘dogmatic’ prejudice, they acknowledge, to assert the
actuality of a reality different from, and transcendent to, human consciousness—broadly
speaking, of an ‘external world’ (however this may be conceived). Yet this would not
imply at all that there exists something like a Universal Consciousness or an Absolute
Subject, or a mere plurality of a priori concepts, unifying the multiplicity of individual
consciousnesses and of their historical, temporal and subjective contents in a universally
valid objective experience. The very idea of ‘truth’ as an absolute norm and principle of
human knowledge is regarded as nothing more than a ‘metaphysical prejudice’. Not only
do they deny the existence of a unique, universal truth, of which the manifold determinate
truths would be but internal, organic manifestations, but human knowing could not even
come to any intrinsic, ‘apodeictic’ certainty of the specific content of a mere plurality of
finite, particular truths. Any judgments that can be actually stated, indeed, are always
merely ‘problematic’. According to the problematicismo of Ugo Spirito (1896–1979),
such a relativistic, and in the final analysis sceptical, conception of knowing would be the
unavoidable outcome of Gentile’s dialectical logic itself. This, as we have seen, identifies
the essence of spirit with its becoming. Yet as a ‘theory of spirit as pure act’ it cannot but
negate itself as becoming to the very extent that it claims a priori, and thus immutable
and eternal, validity for its own theoretical tenets. As a consequence, one can do justice to
reality’s intimate processuality only by denying, in principle, the possibility of anything
like a ‘general theory of spirit’—more generally, of metaphysics as such.39 Reality would
thus turn into a ‘historical’ flux of states of consciousness, in which any alleged universal
or absolute truth and reality dissolves, as a follower of Spirito puts it, into ‘an
unrestrainable rhapsody of sensations’.40 Any human knowledge would consist of
nothing other than mere ‘[probabilistic assertions, hypotheses and conjectures’, and these
‘are propositions which reality itself, in its daily or even hourly becoming, undertakes to
compromise in their objectivity and to defeat in their claim to universality’.41 According
to Raffaello Franchini (1920–90), metaphysics and (historical) becoming ‘cannot get
along with each other’,42 and the former’s claim to an ‘absolute unification’ and to
‘conclusiveness’ must give place to the ‘infinity of particular researches’.43 ‘The
survival…of the metaphysical conception of philosophy is very harmful to philosophy
itself.’44 Although not hesitating to see in Croce’s historicism the epilogue and
culmination of the whole history of western dialectic,45 Franchini declares that not even
Croce ‘can avoid paying a tribute to the archaic philosophy of Being, despite his effective
polemic against it’.46 Such a tribute would obviously consist in his ‘systematic’
conception of spirit’s forms as ‘distinct’ a priori categories, whereas they too would be
nothing else than the product of ‘a distinguishing activity, which in the final analysis is
the judgement which Croce himself did not by chance call “historical”’,47 i.e. merely
contingent and relative.
It is out of place to go deeply here into a more detailed exposition and critique of the
‘problematistic’ and ‘relativistic’ outcomes of Italian idealism. In this context it will
suffice to point out that, first of all, there is no actual contradiction between spirit’s
essential becoming and its reflective self-comprehension in a (metaphysical) ‘theory’
provided that the former is conceived (as with Gentile no less than with Hegel) not as
mere temporal change but as ‘eternal process’: not as a simple negation of the eternal’s

34.8 Page 338

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 300
self-identity, but as a self-identity which eternally ‘returns-into-itself from its ‘self-
alienation’.48 Second, ‘problematicism’ and ‘historical relativism’, like any more or less
radically sceptical sort of relativistic subjectivism, is plainly a self-refuting philosophical
conception. For on the one hand it denies the metaphysical ideal of an absolute,
‘definitive’ truth; on the other, it undeniably ascribes absolute, ‘definitive’ value to its
unjustified and unjustifiable, and therefore ‘dogmatic’,49 denial of truth.
‘CRITICAL ONTOLOGY’: PANTALEO CARABELLESE
Not unlike Croce’s ‘historicism’ or Spirito’s ‘problematicism’, the philosophy of
Pantaleo Carabellese (1877–1948) can itself be safely regarded as a critical reaction to
‘actual idealism’. Yet what he sets against Gentile’s metaphysics of the ‘pure act’ is not a
subjectivistic and relativistic conception of historical becoming so much as an ‘ontology’
of the ‘pure Object’, of absolute Being. In any case, such an ontology is still based upon
an idealistic conception of reality (unlike all the other trends of twentieth-century
‘metaphysics of Being’, which I shall examine below) in that Carabellese shares with
Gentile and Croce the fundamental epistemological assumption that ‘being is in
consciousness’.50 Hence he explicitly disallows any attempt to ‘overcome’51
consciousness and to make the latter dependent, in the manner either of naturalistic
empiricism or of traditional dualistic metaphysics, on a reality radically alien to it. Any
possible actuality is either an act, or an object (a content), of consciousness. The peculiar
problematic of metaphysics thus comes to coincide, for Carabellese, with a ‘critical’
analysis of the immanent formal-general structures of consciousness as the only
‘concrete’ reality. He distinguishes in it two ‘transcendental conditions’ mutually
connected: the ‘subject’ and the ‘object’; and three ‘determinate forms’ of its activity,
which also imply one another: ‘feeling’, ‘knowledge’ and the ‘will’. In each of the latter
it is possible to bring out a peculiar configuration of the subject-object relation.
Carabellese’s whole polemic against Gentile is rooted in a different, and even alternative,
conception of such a relation. Setting out from Kant’s famous contention that the
‘objectivity’ of a perception coincides with its intersubjective validity, i.e. with its
‘universality’, he identifies the very essence of the object as such with the most
‘universal’ concept, i.e. the indeterminate ‘idea of Being’. Yet this latter, as Rosmini (see
p. 350) had already pointed out against Kant,52 is not to be regarded as the product of an
act of the knowing subject. Rather, it is passively ‘given’ to it. But what about the
‘singular’ objects, e.g. ‘this’ pen ‘here’? Carabellese appeals in this regard to Berkeley’s
immaterialism, and emphatically denies that consciousness can actually refer to an
extended, material, bodily, etc. object.53 The only objective actuality it can become aware
of is a ‘spiritual reality’, and this coincides with the universal idea of Being. The subject
of the act of consciousness, on the contrary, must necessarily be merely ‘singular’: ‘one
among many’, a ‘monad’54 bearing a relation of ‘mutual otherness’55 to infinite other
possible singular subjects. As a consequence, contrary to what Kant, Hegel and Gentile
held, the unity of conscious experience cannot be the result of a spontaneous ‘synthesis’
by the subject (for this is ‘in itself’ merely passive and manifold). It will therefore be
rendered possible by the object alone, which, as universal, is also of necessity unique.56

34.9 Page 339

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 301
The universal uniqueness of the object, then, unifies the singular plurality of the
subjects; these latter, conversely, individuate the indeterminate universality of ideal
Being. As we have already said, this takes place in three ‘determinate forms of
consciousness’, to which three distinct ideal objectivities correspond: to feeling the idea
of the Beautiful, to knowing the idea of the True, to willing the idea of the Good. In
polemic with Gentile, who held ‘pure feeling’ to be ‘inactual’, and identified knowing
with the will in the concrete actuality of the transcendental Ego (see p. 356), Carabellese
vindicates, no less emphatically than Croce, the mutual autonomy of such concepts (and,
of course, of the corresponding forms of consciousness). Hence it turns out to be
impossible to raise any of them to the unconditioned principle of the others. Yet, unlike
Croce, he not only excludes economic activity (and the corresponding category of the
Useful) from his ‘table’ of the ‘determinate forms of consciousness’, but also tries to
offer something like a ‘deduction’ of their specific content, which should bestow on them
that necessity of which Croce’s ‘theory of the distincts’, as we have seen, is devoid. In
this regard, Carabellese appeals to consciousness’s temporal form. While Kant regarded
time as the mere form of ‘inner sense’, according to Carabellese it expresses rather the
inmost essence of the whole life of consciousness.57 Hence he thinks it possible to
‘deduce’ from the three ‘moments’ involved in the essence of time—past, present and
future—the concepts of the True, of the Beautiful, and of the Good in the following way:
In the certainty of having already been, the subjects are said intellect, the object
is said true, and the concrete act is said knowledge; therefore knowledge is
consciousness of the being that was, is consciousness of the past. In the
certainty of being now, instead, the subjects are said feeling; the object is said
beautiful, and the concrete act is said intuition; this therefore is consciousness of
the being that is, is consciousness of the present. Finally, in the certainty of
having to be [dover essere], the subject is said the will, the object is said good,
and the concrete act is said action. This therefore is consciousness of the being
that will be, consciousness of the future.58
Unlike Gentile (and Hegel), Carabellese refuses to deduce from the idealistic
principle of the identity of being and consciousness the further consequence that
the truth of immediate consciousness is the pure act of self-consciousness. For
in such an act the Ego should be the object of itself; but to Carabellese, as we
know, the object is essentially distinct from the subject (although being
immanent in, and inseparable from, it). I therefore can be conscious of an object
different from me (i.e., the idea of Being), but cannot possibly become aware of
my own conscious act. The resolution of the objectifying act of consciousness
into pure self-consciousness thus appears to Carabellese to be nothing less than
‘the fundamental falsehood’ of ‘post-Kantian idealism’.59
A summary critical examination of Carabellese’s ontology suffices to show
that it is certainly not preferable to Croce’s ‘historicism’ as a plausible
alternative to ‘actual idealism’.60 First of all, his attempt to deduce the
‘determinate forms of consciousness’ from the essence of temporality is quite
unsuccessful. His raising of temporality from a mere form of ‘inner sense’ to the
constitutive structure of consciousness as such appears to be wholly arbitrary

34.10 Page 340

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 302
and unjustified. He does not seem to realize the intrinsic negativity
(contradictoriness) of temporality, of whose ‘moments’ the past and the future,
as such, are not, and the (sensuous) present is but an abstract, unreal limit
between them. Moreover, if the origin of the concept of the True (and of
knowing) lay in the temporal moment of the past, not only would the knowledge
of the present and the future be obviously impossible, but also any logical and
metaphysical knowing whatsoever (for this as such transcends the whole sphere
of temporality). No less inconsistent is Carabellese’s identification of the
subject’s essence with the ‘plural singularity’, and of that of the object with the
unique universality of the idea of Being. As Kant himself, to whose authority
Carabellese so often resorts, had already shown, I can become aware of a
multiplicity (be it objective or subjective, and, in the latter case, be it the
‘manifold’ of the states of consciousness within the single subject or an
‘intersubjective’ plurality of individual subjects) only if I keep self-identical
during the whole process of knowing in which I become aware of such a
multiplicity. It is, then, the absolute identity of the self-conscious Ego, and not
that of the object, which renders possible, in the final analysis, the ‘synthetic
unity’ of concrete experience. Moreover, on what grounds can I assert that the
object is ‘in itself’ unique? In effect, apart from the fact that sense-perception
manifests an indefinite plurality of singular objects (‘this’ pen ‘here’, etc.), all
objective concepts too, as determined, are essentially manifold. Only the
indeterminate idea of Being is likely to be actually ‘unique’. Yet, just as
indeterminate, it is, in truth, but a mere ‘abstraction’, an empty nothing. How,
then, can it render possible the objective unity of the ‘concrete’ as conscious-
ness? Finally, Carabellese does not realize that his denial of the possibility of
self-consciousness undermines nothing less than the most original conditions for
the possibility of his own idea of philosophy as a ‘critique of the concrete’. For
we already know that to Carabellese the ‘concrete’ coincides with
consciousness, and that his ‘critique of the concrete’ consequently turns into a
reflective explication of consciousness’s formal-general structures. Such an
explication is obviously an act of consciousness. But its object, unlike that of
‘immediate’ consciousness, is by no means the indeterminate idea of Being, but
the very concrete actuality of knowledge, so that it clearly takes the shape of a
determinate form of pure self-consciousness, whose real possibility, then, it as
such proves, as it were, ad oculos.
‘MYSTICAL IDEALISM’: PIETRO MARTINETTI
When outlining the historical genesis of ‘actual idealism’ I have remarked that it stems
from Hegel’s idealism through the mediation of its interpretation by Spaventa in the
nineteenth century. And the conceptions of thinkers such as Croce, Carabellese, Spirito,
etc., can to a great extent be regarded as a mere reaction to Gentile’s philosophy. The
thought of Pietro Martinetti (1872–1943), on the contrary, derives both its concrete
problematic and its fundamental speculative inspiration from a direct, and very detailed,

35 Pages 341-350

▲back to top

35.1 Page 341

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 303
acquaintance with the German idealistic tradition from Kant61 to the neo-Kantianism of
Riehl, Wundt and others. Not unlike the other exponents of Italian idealism, however, for
him too the term ‘idealism’ fundamentally means an epistemological conception of the
subject-object relationship according to which the latter is nothing more (nor less) than a
pure immanent content of consciousness. The entire world-becoming thus turns without
residue into that of consciousness. ‘[T]he reality which is given us in perception is
conscious reality itself, and nothing other than it.’62 If consciousness is considered from
the standpoint of its immanent multiplicity, it constitutes the object. If, conversely, it is
considered from the viewpoint of its active, unifying function, it constitutes the subject or
the ‘Ego’ stricto sensu. The peculiar orientation of Martinetti’s philosophical idealism
with respect to that of Croce, Gentile or Carabellese is revealed, in my opinion, by two
fundamental aspects of his thought. On the one hand, he seems to hold that a clear
understanding of consciousness’s process can be offered us rather by a psychological
analysis of our inner experience than by a purely logical deduction of its a priori forms
(Fichte, Hegel). Indeed, he does not hesitate to define his own position in terms of
‘psychological idealism’,63 and to lay down a very favourable judgment about the
‘idealistic empiricism flourishing in contemporary philosophy’64—for example
Schopenhauer’s theory of ‘representation’ or Schuppe’s and Schubert-Soldern’s
‘philosophy of immanence’. But, on the other hand, no less crucial than the influence of
that ‘psychologism’ which held sway over German thought at the end of the nineteenth
century is that of pantheistic mysticism—from the Indian philosophy of the ‘system’
Sankhya (to which he devoted his doctoral dissertation) to the metaphysics of Plotinus,
Spinoza65 and the later Fichte. In substance, according to Martinetti, the analysis of
psychological experience is a necessary moment of the process of knowing, but only as
the groundwork for the construction of an ‘idealistic metaphysics’66 of the Absolute as an
immanent Whole.
The fundamental philosophical principle bestowing unity and coherence on
Martinetti’s thought, in fact, has little or nothing to do, in my opinion, with psychological
experience, but seems rather to coincide with the chief speculative assumption of
Plotinus’s metaphysics.67 The most universal categories on the basis of which it is
possible to interpret to totality of experience are Unity and Multiplicity. Contrary to what
Hegel (and, before him, Plato himself at least in the Parmenides) maintained, they are, as
such, mutually exclusive. This means that in an entity, experience or concrete spiritual
activity, the more the moment of unity prevails, the less relevant the role played by
multiplicity becomes, and conversely. The implications of such an assumption are not
only ontological but also axiological and ethical in character. Unity is the principle of the
intelligibility and ‘perfection’ of an entity; multiplicity, on the contrary, that of its
irrationality and ‘imperfection’. As a consequence, the differences revealed by our
experience of the world and the Ego are ordered in a hierarchical succession, at the lower
levels of which the moment of multiplicity predominates, while unity is the peculiar
feature of the higher ones. Absolute Reality, therefore, is to be identified with an
absolutely ‘formal’, ‘indeterminate’ Unity, devoid of any content, properties, relations,
etc., since these are all clearly unthinkable apart from the manifold. Any other form of
unity, even the ‘concrete unity’ of the system of Plato’s ‘ideas’ or of Hegel’s ‘categories’,
is but mere appearance. Since intelligent activity too involves a manifold content (the

35.2 Page 342

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 304
plurality of the concepts which it distinguishes and/or unifies), the Absolute Unity
necessarily transcends intelligence itself. ‘But also this intelligible world is nothing else
than a relative expression of a unity which in itself transcends intelligence.’68 This latter,
Martinetti rightly points out, is but a ‘development’ (potenziamento) of ‘consciousness’.
As a consequence, the Absolute Unity will transcend the totality of conscious experience
as well: ‘the highest constructions of logical thought are imperfect expressions of a
Reality whose absolute unity transcends any consciousness’.69 Although, then, all of our
world-experience turns without residue into a dynamic, hierarchical succession of forms
and states of consciousness, the ultimate aim (which to Martinetti, just as to Hegel, is at
the same time the ‘absolute foundation’ of the whole cosmic becoming) of its evolution is
not a possible act or content of consciousness.
It should be noted, however, that Martinetti’s insistence on the absolute
epistemological transcendence of Unity to consciousness does not exclude an
unambiguous vindication of its substantial ontological immanence to the multiplicity of
phenomenal experience. Perhaps the most intriguing aspect of Martinetti’s metaphysics
seems to me to be precisely his unrelenting polemic against the traditional theistic
conception of God as an absolutely transcendent, ‘otherworldly’ entity. For him, on the
contrary, the absolute, ‘divine’ unity is immanent even in the most negligible details of
world-becoming.
And therefore, as Leibniz already saw, every single phenomenon always
expresses in the unity it realizes the unity of the world to which it belongs;
every most simple unity reflects, owing to the infinite multiplicity of its factors,
the universal order of existences; every most trifling being encloses in the
mystery of its laws the secret of the world.70
The vulgar conception of the (first) cause as external to its effects (causa transiens) is to
be rejected in toto. For the a priori necessity of their connection can be accounted for
only by presupposing the intrinsic identity of them as their common foundation. But the
cause, in truth, is not only identical with its effects: rather, it ‘potentiates’, ‘reveals’ itself
in them.71 In polemic with Aquinas and, more generally, with the whole scholastic
ontology, Martinetti therefore declares: ‘The whole system of the forms in re and post
rem dissolves in such a case as an unhelpful complication. The world is but the very
system of the divine thoughts, of the forms ante rem, that, before the obscure power of
sense, as it were breaks and is refracted in the indefinite multiplicity of sensuous
appearances.’72
Martinetti’s reference to the ‘obscure power of sense’ in this passage is critical for the
interpretation and evaluation of his whole philosophy. For his doctrine of sensible
knowledge is perhaps that which gives rise to the greatest difficulties in his theoretical
perspective. I have said that to Martinetti the manifold is a principle of unreality and
imperfection, and that the more the process of consciousness approximates the Absolute
Unity, the less relevant the former’s actuality becomes. ‘Sensible intuition’ is obviously
the most rudimentary phase in consciousness’s development, since its content coincides
with the heterogeneous, unreal multiplicity of material things and of sensuous qualities. A
loose unification of the manifold is rendered possible, within the sphere of sense, by the

35.3 Page 343

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 305
(relatively) a priori functions73 of ‘space’ and ‘time’. The whole sphere of spatio-
temporal reality, then, becomes the content of further, higher-order logical unifications
by virtue of the fundamental categories of ‘causality’74 and ‘logical identity’.75 Now, not
unlike Hegel, Martinetti explicitly declares that in the evolution of a lower form of spirit
into a higher one the latter represents the ‘truth’, the ‘actual reality’ of the former, which
with respect to it turns out to be ‘virtually negated’: ‘the logical unity is not a reality
coexisting with pure sensuous multiplicity, is not a reality of the same degree, but is a
qualitatively higher reality, which virtually denies sensuous reality.’76 Yet, on the other
hand, he tries to differentiate his own position in this regard from Hegel’s ‘panlogism’ by
asserting that the logical unification of the sensuous ‘given’ does not undermine its
autonomous, independent reality: ‘An abyss subsists between the logical world of
panlogism and sensuous reality.’ ‘The sensible and the logical order are two absolutely
distinct orders, and their forced overlapping only succeeds in bringing out—here better
than elsewhere—the absolute impossibility of making them coincide.’77 The sharp
contradiction in which Martinetti’s thought here gets entangled is self-evident. In effect,
in the final passage of his major work he himself somehow tries to solve it by declaring
that ‘if from the logical viewpoint the distinction between logical and sensuous reality
turns into the distinction between being and not-being…from the absolute viewpoint both
are but two subsequent forms of one reality, which in its absolute form is neither the one
nor the other’.78 Yet we know that for Martinetti the ‘absolute viewpoint’ is that of the
absolutely ‘formal’ Unity, which as such radically transcends any consciousness and
intelligence. How, then, can we take up such an alleged ‘absolute viewpoint’? The
‘logical’ viewpoint therefore remains the only one we can legitimately resort to (and,
strictly speaking, not only ‘we’, but also a possible infinite ‘divine’ intelligence). Hence
his vindication of the original autonomy of sensuous reality is clearly self-refuting, and
consequently his attempt to differentiate his own position from Hegel’s ‘panlogism’ turns
out to be, at least in this regard, quite unsuccessful.
The other fundamental objections that Martinetti’s idealistic monism raises against
Hegel’s philosophy concern the dialectical method; his doctrine of the immanent
becoming of the logical Idea; his identification of the latter with the very Absolute
Reality; and finally his ‘realistic’ admission of the possibility of a philosophy of ‘nature’
as the process of the Idea in a still ‘unconscious form’. Given the validity of the idealistic
principle of the identity of being and consciousness, how can one still deem it possible to
construct a priori a succession of natural categories that is not, at the same time, the
content of a series of subjective ‘syntheses’ of consciousness? Martinetti’s reproach to
Hegel’s thought, in this regard, is clearly that it is not yet sufficiently ‘idealistic’. It seems
to me to be historically enlightening to point out that the gist of this Martinetti objection
coincides in toto with one of the fundamental results of Gentile’s ‘reform of Hegelian
dialectic’: i.e., the denial of the possibility of any dialectical process which is not the pure
becoming of the pensiero pensante, i.e. of the self-conscious Ego (p. 356).
As for the relation between the Hegelian Idea and Absolute Reality, it is undeniable
that, if the latter really is, as Martinetti maintains, a Unity which transcends any
multiplicity, and therefore the very element of consciousness and intelligence, it cannot
possibly coincide with Hegel’s Absolute Idea, which is indeed the pure self-
consciousness of a systematic totality of thought-determinations. Moreover, any

35.4 Page 344

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 306
becoming (be it temporal or logical) is clearly possible and thinkable only as a synthesis
of unity (continuity) and multiplicity (discretion, as the plurality of the successive
‘phases’ discernible in it). If, then, Absolute Reality is actually devoid of any multiplicity
whatsoever, becoming must certainly be nothing more than a mere ‘phenomenon’. The
Absolute Unity, therefore, is eo ipso absolutely motionless and static. Finally, according
to Martinetti (who strangely seems to share, in this regard, some of the most popular
tenets of contemporary logical empiricism), there are only two scientifically valid
‘logical’ methods: ‘analysis’, which is merely formal and reconstructive in character; and
‘synthesis’, or ‘induction’, which consequently is the only method actually able originally
to constitute, and then to extend, our knowledge. The latter’s ‘genetic order’, he says, ‘is
invariably inductive, and springs forth from a unique source which is experience’.79 As a
consequence, induction is the proper method not only of the positive sciences but also of
philosophy itself. As a consequence, the only real difference between them is that, while
the positive sciences limit themselves to a more or less ‘relative’ unification of the
multiplicity of the immediate ‘given’, philosophy on the contrary essentially aspires to a
‘total’, ‘absolute’ unification. The undeniable non-inductive character of Hegel’s
dialectical method, then, would ineluctably undermine the ‘scientificity’ of his
‘panlogistic’ conception of the Absolute. In Martinetti’s critique of Hegelianism, then,
(psychological) empiricism and (immanentistic) mysticism work hand in hand in a
somewhat surprising way. While, indeed, his rejection of the dialectical method (like his
theory of sensible intuition I have outlined above) relies on arguments of clear empiricist
origin, his polemic against Hegel’s Absolute Reason has no other ground, nor any other
aim (so at least I believe), than the vindication of the ontological and ethical primacy of
mystical-religious experience over rational-philosophical thought. In fact, on one
occasion he does not hesitate openly to define in terms of ‘mysticism’ the deepest
possible form of unity between the Absolute and the human mind: ‘our knowing…is an
act of mystical union with the eternal Logos which is the absolute ground of our
nature.’80
The plausibility of Martinetti’s anti-Hegelian polemic thus appears to depend in toto
upon two decisive speculative assumptions: (1) the epistemological validity of induction;
and (2) the ontological reality of an absolute Unity absolutely devoid of any moment of
difference or multiplicity. But, in truth, Aristotle and Kant had insightfully pointed out
already in the antinomy of ‘complete induction’ the irremediable shortcoming of the
inductive method; and Plato, in his Parmenides, had already brilliantly shown that the
statement ‘The One is’ actually means the very opposite of what it purports to mean, i.e.
the unreality of the One as One. For the existential predicate ‘is’ constitutes of itself an
element different from it, and thus immediately posits an original manifold in the alleged
pure ‘unity’ of the One itself.
METAPHYSICS OF BEING
The peremptory rejection of the ‘idealistic’ identification of being and consciousness and
the unrelenting polemic against all the logical, metaphysical and ethical consequences
drawn from it by both Croce and Gentile constitute the fundamental and historically most

35.5 Page 345

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 307
relevant features of a widespread tendency in twentieth-century Italian philosophy which
one could generally define in terms of ‘metaphysics of Being’.81 The divergences among
the spiritual traditions of (1) Thomism, (2) Augustine’s and Rosmini’s ‘spiritualism’, and
(3) Kierkegaard’s mystical irrationalism—to which thinkers such as (1) Armando Carlini
(1878–1959), Augusto Guzzo (1894–1986), Gustavo Bontadini (1903–90), and Michele
Federico Sciacca (1908–79), (2) Francesco Olgiati (1886–1968) and (3) Luigi Pareyson
(1918–91) respectively go back—turn out to be negligible as compared with the
substantial affinity of both the theoretical content and the historico-cultural finalities of
their philosophical activity. Being, Truth, the Absolute, God, they maintain, radically
transcend the whole sphere of self-consciousness, and especially the activity of rational
thought. Even those who are most willing to acknowledge the actuality and value of
speculative reason, i.e. the neo-Thomists, hold nevertheless that this is a function of spirit
which is in the final analysis subordinate (or rather: ‘subaltern’) to an alleged more
original immediate intuition of the ‘idea of Being’—and, a fortiori, to religious revelation
such as is sanctioned by the authority of the Roman Catholic church, and to mystical
experience. ‘The absolute objective truth’, Sciacca declares, ‘is before its being known,
and it would remain such even though no thinking subject ever knew, or sought for, it.’82
‘[T]he ratio is a cognitive power inferior to the intellectus, on which it depends.’83 ‘What
counts,’ Pareyson echoes him, ‘is not reason, but truth.’84 The vindication of the absolute
epistemological transcendence of truth to human self-consciousness finds a close
counterpart, at the ontological level, in their common intent to ‘restore’, as Bontadini
openly says, in contemporary philosophy and culture a decidedly ‘dualistic’ conception85
of the relations between God and man, process and eternity, spirit and nature, the One
and the Many, etc. ‘[Transcendence means duality, immanence means monism’, Sciacca
asserts. ‘The condition of culture turns out to us still to be the dualistic conception of the
reality of “this” world and of that of the “other” world, of the world of man and of the
world of God.’86 ‘Hegel’s Gottin-Werden [God-in-becoming] is a nonsense, in that one
uses the term “God”, but one ascribes to him a predicate that denies him, that is contrary
to his nature.’87 From this dualistic ontological perspective the reality of nature, of life, of
the ‘cosmos’ cannot obviously but be regarded as something quite alien to spirit, and as
such even unworthy of philosophical consideration. ‘Analogy’, Guzzo maintains, ‘can be
held to be the only means truly fit to dispel any temptation of identifying nature and man,
either in the naturalistic sense of a reabsorption of man into nature or in the sense of an
idealistic epistemology which aims at drawing back and dissolving “nature” into
“spirit”’,88 In his polemic against the metaphysical reality of nature, Carlini goes as far as
to accuse of cosmologismo, i.e. of naturalism, the very ‘Christian Neoplatonism with its
Ens Realissimum’!89
According to Olgiati, ‘if there were no realities there would be no relations, for it is not
the relations which create reality, but it is reality which gives rise to the relations’.90 In
Bradley’s terminology one could say that the fundamental ontological point this neo-
Thomist intends to make is that the only actual relations are the ‘external’ ones occurring
among an original plurality of logically indifferent entities that are irreducible to any
higher, more concrete Unity or organic Totality. No surprise, then, that in the light of
such an ontological conception of reality as mere plurality the only concept of man’s
personality that appears to be tenable to the upholders of the metaphysics of Being is still

35.6 Page 346

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 308
that of the traditional ‘soul-substance’, i.e. of a self-contained, finite and contingent
entity. ‘[T]he concept of person’, a follower of Sciacca observes, ‘cannot avoid that
individualistic-intimistic closure which seems to be wholly peculiar to the level of
singularity.’91 Its only possibility of, and hope for, ‘immortality’, consequently, far from
consisting in its absolute identity with the Totality of the cosmos and human history, will
rather coincide with its alleged indefinite duration ‘after death’ in the temporal dimension
of the future: i.e., as Sciacca openly declares, with its ‘ultramundane [ultraterreno]
destiny’.92
If it is an indisputable merit of the upholders of the metaphysics of Being to have
revived interest in the metaphysical problem in contemporary philosophy, one must also
acknowledge that its statement and solution in the ambit of their philosophical
perspective does appear to be wholly unsatisfying. The fundamental concept of ‘Being’
they concordantly resort to as the first and most original truth of the human ‘intellect’,
indeed, is but a dead, unfruitful, unthinkable abstraction—both because it is devoid of
any determinate content whatsoever and because it presupposes the actual abstraction
from the concrete becoming of the ‘act of thinking’, of which, in truth, such a concept is a
mere product, and which is thus necessarily presupposed by any alleged categorial
negation of it. In other words, the self-conscious (‘subjective’) process of thinking cannot
possibly be transcended, and consequently the object is originally and substantially
identical with the subject. The dualistic conception of reality, which is on the contrary
based on the original opposition of subject and object, is therefore inconsistent and
untenable, and any attempt to ‘restore’ it in the spiritual life of contemporary humanity
appears to be ineluctably destined to failure.93
MARXISM AND PHENOMENOLOGY
While for the upholders of the metaphysics of Being the fundamental shortcoming of
Croce’s and Gentile’s idealism consists in its rigorously ‘immanentistic’ and/or
‘historicistic’ orientation, most theorists of twentieth-century Italian Marxism, on the
contrary, regard it as the most ‘living’ and up-to-date legacy of the idealistic-Hegelian
tradition (if not even of the whole history of ‘bourgeois’ philosophy). One can distinguish
three main trends in Italian Marxism just on the basis of their different relation to that
tradition. According to Antonio Gramsci (1890–1937), ‘in a sense…the philosophy of
praxis [i.e., Marxism] is a reform and development of Hegelianism’.94 Croce’s and
Gentile’s Hegelian idealism is therefore the only twentieth-century ‘bourgeois’
philosophy which he holds to be able to furnish a helpful conceptual contribution to the
theoretical elaboration of historical materialism. Not unlike Croce’s ‘absolute
historicism’, indeed, ‘the philosophy of praxis has been the translation of Hegelianism
into a historicistic language’.95 And not unlike ‘actualism’, it is itself a philosophy of the
‘act’—even though not of the ‘pure’, but of the ‘“impure” (impuro), real act, in the most
profane and mundane sense of this word’.96 The possibility and necessity of an
‘integration’ of historical materialism with any other contemporary philosophical-cultural
tendency whatsoever is emphatically rejected by Gramsci. ‘Marxist orthodoxy’, he says,
consists ‘in the fundamental concept that the philosophy of praxis is “self-sufficient”, i.e.

35.7 Page 347

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 309
contains in itself all the fundamental concepts needed to build up a total, integral
conception of the world’.97
Quite opposed to the ‘subjective’98 conception of historical materialism worked out by
Gramsci is the interpretation of Marx’s thought as a ‘logic of existence’, or of ‘contingent
reality’, put forward by Galvano Della Volpe (1895–1968).99 In his opinion, Marx’s
methodology would bear a close resemblance to the ‘kind of critical instances from
which modem experimental science originates’.100 In open polemic against Hegelianism,
and, more generally, against any ‘metaphysics’ or ‘mysticism’, the school of Della Volpe
(Mario Rossi,101 Lucio Colletti,102 etc.) stresses the radical difference between thought
and being, vindicates the ‘positive reality’, the objectivity of the ‘instance of matter, or
the manifold, or the discrete’,103 and reduces Hegel’s concept of ‘reason’ as a unity of
opposites (an ‘identità tauto-eterologica’, as Della Volpe also says) to a merely logical
ideal devoid of concrete actuality.
The interpretation of Marxism put forward by the ‘Milan phenomenological school’
founded by Antonio Banfi (1896–1957), whose most prominent exponent was probably
Enzo Paci (1911–76), shares with Gramsci’s the insistence on the ‘subjective’,
‘humanistic’ character of historical materialism, and on its consequent substantial
divergence from any kind of traditional naturalistic and deterministic materialism. But the
most radical, and up-to-date, understanding of human subjectivity would certainly not be
the excessively ‘speculative’ and ‘metaphysical’ one worked out by Hegel’s philosophy,
so much as the ‘descriptive’ and ‘intuitive’ explication of its ‘formal-general structures’
rendered possible by Husserl’s ‘phenomenological’ method. Whereas, then, for Gramsci
Marxism is a ‘self-sufficient’ world-view, for Paci it needs to be ‘integrated’, and in some
respects even ‘rectified’, by the most original theoretical achievements of ‘transcendental
phenomenology’.
The fundamental shortcomings of traditional idealistic philosophy, according to
Gramsci, consist, on the one hand, in its being an ‘abstractly’ theoretical, or
‘speculative’, conception of the world which unduly ignores the essential practical, or
rather ‘political’, origin and finality of any alleged ‘autonomous’ spiritual or rational
activity; and, on the other, in its more or less explicit ‘solipsism’. ‘The history of
philosophy’, he asserts, is nothing more than ‘the history of the attempts…to modify
practical activity as a whole’.104 ‘One can believe in solipsism, and indeed any form of
idealism necessarily falls into solipsism.’105 Gramsci therefore goes on to set against the
idealistic (rationalistic) principle of ‘coherence’ as truth criterion the more trivially
quantitative one of the wideness of the consent which a philosophy (or rather, as he says,
an ‘ideology’) enjoys in the ‘masses’. The truth of a philosophy, he declares, ‘is
witnessed by the fact that it is appropriated, and permanently appropriated, by the
majority [gran numero], so as to become a culture’.106 ‘One can say that a philosophy’s
historical value can be “calculated” by the “practical” effectiveness it has won.’107 Also
Gramsci’s polemic against ‘vulgar’ materialism and positivism, which reduce in one way
or another humanity’s spiritual reality to the passive and ineffective ‘superstructure’ or
‘epiphenomenon’ of its material life, is based, in the last analysis, on grounds that are
strictly practical-political in character. Idealistic philosophy is right to insist on the
‘reality’ of ‘ideologies’—but not because they would express an ‘eternal’ or
‘autonomous’ being or truth so much as because the ‘cultural factor’ would constitute an

35.8 Page 348

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 310
essential ‘instrument of practical action’108 in view of the establishment of the ‘political
domination’, of the ‘hegemony’ (egemonia),109 of one social class over another.
‘According to the philosophy of praxis, ideologies are not arbitrary at all; they are real
historical facts.’110
Far more akin to traditional materialism and positivism is Della Volpe’s interpretation
of historical materialism. In his opinion, Marx’s Hegel critique would have rendered
possible the foundation of philosophy ‘as a scientific ontology, this being a material
ontology and no longer a formal ontology or metaphysics as the traditional one from Plato
and Aristotle up to Hegel’.111 It would thus allow us to replace Hegel’s ‘metaphysics of
the state’ with a far more realistic ‘sociology of the state’, whose peculiar inspiration
would be ‘experimental’ or ‘Galileian’.112 Its fundamental epistemological assumptions
consist, according to Della Volpe, in the vindication of the original reality of the
sensuous-contingent ‘facts’ (of the ‘manifold’) as well as of the objective validity of the
principle of non-contradiction, of the ‘finite understanding’, of experiment, and of formal
or ‘classificatory’ logic. Della Volpe decidedly denies the authentically ‘scientific’
character of Engels’s ‘laws of dialectic’,113 and against any activistic or pragmatistic
interpretation of historical materialism insists on the fact that it is Marxism as a ‘science’
that grounds practical activity, and not conversely.114
In open polemic against ‘naturalistic’ materialism, and the very logico-experimental
method of the positive sciences which would be but a peculiar form of the ‘alienation’
typical of ‘bourgeois’ society, Paci emphasizes no less than Gramsci the ‘subjective’,
‘historical’ character of Marx’s concept of ‘matter’. Yet, unlike Gramsci, he holds that it
at least virtually finds a close counterpart in Husserl’s conception of ‘transcendental
consciousness’ as ‘virtual intentional life’ (vita intenzionale fungente), or as a ‘world-of-
life’ (mondo-della-vita). ‘Inert matter is in some way subjective. Materialism is not a
metaphysics of a substance [sostanzialismo] alien to the subject: I am the world, I am the
whole world.’115 The plausibility of an ‘idealistic’ interpretation of such a fundamental
phenomenological conception is ineluctably undermined, according to Paci, by the fact
that to Husserl consciousness is always originally and radically sensuous, passive, and
temporal, even when it is regarded as a ‘pure’ transcendental ‘function’. ‘The error
fraught with the worst consequences in the interpretation of Husserl’s phenomenology is
that of those who see in [Husserl’s] Ego the consciousness or self-consciousness in the
creative [creativistico] sense of idealism.’116 The phenomenological analysis of the
‘world-of-life’ would thus render it possible to ‘correct’ the erroneous ‘naturalistic’
tendencies or interpretations of historical materialism without falling once again into the
alleged ‘categorial’ abstractness of the ‘idealistic’ metaphysical tradition. The
phenomenological point of view, Paci maintains, ‘allows us…to stress the necessity and
the conditioning of the material structure or of the structure of the needs on human-
historical praxis, but forbids us, at the same time, to apply to history a scientific dialectic
in the sense in which physics is scientific’.117
Except for the school of Della Volpe, then, Italian Marxism generally tends to
emphasize the decisive role played by human subjectivity in the self-constructing process
of history—and even of universal reality itself. Yet its uncritical allegiance to the
assumption of the original reality and truth of sensible perception and praxis, of time and
finitude, as fundamental constitutive structures of ‘history’, or even of the ‘transcendental

35.9 Page 349

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 311
consciousness’, does not allow either Gramsci or Banfi and Paci to realize the
‘abstractness’ (in the sense of ‘mutilated’ one-sidedness) and thus contradictoriness of a
‘subjectivity’ that is not at the same time ‘objective’ (infinite), since the ‘eternal’ reality
of the Absolute is not held to be immanent in it.118 Furthermore, they do not seem to be
sufficiently aware that their denial of the unconditional autonomy of logico-speculative
reason (of the philosophical ‘categories’) in the final analysis undermines the
‘coherence’, and then objective validity, of any conception or interpretation (be it
philosophical or scientific) of the very evolutionary process of human social history.
EXISTENTIALISM AND EMPIRICISM
The reaction against the speculative tradition of Italian idealism does reach a climax in
the philosophical perspective of Nicola Abbagnano (1901–90) and his followers, which
he defines in terms of both ‘positive existentialism’ and ‘methodological empiricism’ or
‘neo-illuminism’. His interpretation of Heidegger’s existential ontology, indeed,
emphatically disallows any possible ‘metaphysical stiffening’119 of it, and reduces the
method of ‘existential analysis’ to a mere empirical and contingent description ‘of those
human situations which can be regarded as “fundamental” or “essential” or “decisive” or
as “limit-situations” [situazioni-limite], etc.’.120 On the other hand, as the American
pragmatists had already pointed out, that ‘experimental method’ which any empiricist
philosophy is used to appealing to cannot and must not be conceived in a strictly
‘theoretical’ or ‘objective’ sense,121 but as ‘the structure of action par excellence, in that
it is destined to modify such [human] situations’.122 This is because to Abbagnano, just
as to all existentialists, the ‘being-in-the-world’ of man is a ‘relation to being’ which is
originally ‘emotional’ and ‘practical’ in character (something like a series of ‘decisions’),
and as such is absolutely alien and impenetrable to rational, theoretical consciousness.
‘Existence cannot be enlightened by knowledge or by reason, but can throw light on
them.’123
The originally ‘irrational’ nature of ‘existence’, according to Abbagnano, excludes the
possibility that it might be adequately qualified by those ontological categories which
most typically express the essence of pure rationality, such as universality, necessity,
infinity, ‘progress’. The only ‘really existing man’, he declares, is neither the Absolute
Subject of the idealistic systems, nor the ideal of ‘humanity’, nor world-history, but
nothing else than the ‘singular individuality’.124 This would be determined by a particular
factual ‘situation’ which radically distinguishes it from any other human individual, and
which one-sidedly conditions any possible ‘activity’—or ‘project’—of its own. Human
existence, then, is by its nature ‘contingent’, ‘uncertain’, ‘risky’, and the most general
ontological category needed to understand its fundamental structures is therefore that of
‘possibility’. Indeed, the essence of ‘freedom’ itself would turn into the mere possibility
of ‘choosing’ among a range of ‘given’ alternatives (or ‘choices’), and therefore is not,
nor can it in principle ever be, infinite or absolute. ‘Existentialism asserts that man is a
finite reality, that he exists and operates at his own risk and danger.’125
According to Abbagnano, then, the only object of which philosophy and the sciences
can meaningfully speak is ‘finite’ (temporal, contingent, relative, etc.) reality. The

35.10 Page 350

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 312
fundamental idealistic, or ‘romantic’, assumption that the finite as such is not actually
real, but is rather the mere manifestation of a ‘superior Reality’126 (the Totality of the
Universe, Spirit, Absolute Reason, etc.), is purely ‘mythological’ in character. But not
only is a unique, infinite Reality or Totality quite inexistent, but it does not even make
sense to speak of ‘absolute’ moral, or ‘spiritual’, values. Also the faith in the objectivity
of such values would be but a mere ‘romantic’ prejudice, and it is just the task of
‘existential analysis’ to show its inconsistency.
Romanticism always has a certain spiritualistic bent. It tends to extol the
importance of inwardness, of spirituality, as well as of the values that are called
‘spiritual’, at the cost of what is earthly, material, mundane, etc. Existentialism
shamelessly recognizes the importance and value for man of externality, of
materiality, and of ‘mundanity’ in general, and thus of the conditions of human
reality that are included under these terms: the needs, the use and production of
things, sex, etc.127
[F]rom the empirical standpoint, the moral problem cannot obviously be
coped with by resorting to an apology for morals, or by claiming to be able to
establish hierarchies of ‘absolute’ values, which ought to provide us with
necessary criteria for evaluation.128
The fundamental philosophical error that undermines the ‘positive existentialism’ of
Abbagnano and his followers throughout is the absurd claim that the human subject may
become ‘immediately’ aware of its own ‘existence’ as a ‘structure’ originally ‘other’ than
rational self-conscious thought. In truth, any reliance on the ‘evidence’ of ‘immediate’,
sensible, ‘pre-logical’ perception, intuition, praxis, etc. is purely illusory, since it does not
account for the intrinsically ‘mediate’ character of any subject-object relation, and,
furthermore, for the fact that any ‘mediation’, connection or ‘relation’, in the last
analysis, is nothing more (as Kant had already stressed) than a product of the ‘synthetic’
activity of the pure self-conscious Ego. And even the most elementary act by which this
‘posits itself necessarily involves (as the ‘dialectical’ development of its pure immanent
content could easily show) the objective validity of those very categories of ‘necessity’,
‘universality’, ‘infinity’, etc., which Abbagnano’s ‘positive existentialism’ dogmatically
denies, or rather is simply unable to account for. In face of the luminous ‘self-evidence’
of the thinking concept’s immanent self-explication, then, all the too often banal, trivial,
and worn-out arguments of his polemic against ‘romanticism’ and ‘idealism’ cannot but
‘dissolve as fog in the sun’.
CONCLUSION
If now, having come to the conclusion of this brief outline of twentieth-century Italian
philosophy, we take a fleeting retrospective glance at its most significant vicissitudes and
achievements, we can first of all remark that the debate between the upholders and the
adversaries of idealist-speculative thought does constitute the crux of its whole
development. It is undeniable that in the second half of the twentieth century the anti-

36 Pages 351-360

▲back to top

36.1 Page 351

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 313
idealistic trends—empiricism, existentialism, phenomenology, Marxism, dualistic
metaphysics, etc.—have somehow prevailed. Yet this does not mean at all that their
contributions to the progress of Italian philosophical culture have eo ipso turned out to be
more convincing, valuable, or lasting. On the contrary, our summary analysis of their
fundamental assumptions outlined above seems to have clearly brought out their
indisputable theoretical inferiority with respect to both the content and the method of the
idealistic perspective.
As far as the latter is concerned, then, we have witnessed the polemic between the
rigorously dialectical, monistic, and ‘speculative’ development of the philosophical
principle of idealism carried out by Gentile’s ‘actualism’ and other antidialectical,
pluralistic or historicistic forms of idealism such as Martinetti’s mystical monism,
Carabellese’s ‘critical ontology’, and Croce’s ‘absolute historicism’. Despite the sharp
critiques to Gentile’s thought put forward by the latter, none of their speculative
constructions can bear comparison—as to coherence, lucidity and intimate force of
persuasion—with the theoretical perspective of ‘actual idealism’. Hence this is and
remains up to the present the essential reference point for any further development and
progress of philosophical research in Italy.
This, however, is not tantamount at all to saying that a fair evaluation of the actual
speculative achievements of Gentile’s thought cannot and must not bring to light in it
more than one fundamental limit.129 In this context I can confine myself to remarking
that the actual result of his ‘reform of Hegelian dialectic’ appears to consist, in more than
one respect, rather in a one-sided formalistic ‘simplification’ of the very complex totality
of Hegel’s Absolute Idea than in the positive explication of a speculative truth which in
the Hegelian system would still be merely implicit. After all, Bosanquet’s famous
objection to Gentile’s philosophy—that it would be a sort of ‘narrow humanism’ which,
unlike the Hegelian one, does no justice to the intrinsic ‘dialectical’ nature both of the
logical categories and of the processes of natural reality—is likely to be sound and
tenable. The speculative task which the critical reflection on the theoretical limits of
‘actual idealism’ proposes to contemporary philosophy thus seems to be the integration of
the brightest and most fruitful idea of Gentile’s thought—i.e., that Absolute Reality is the
totality-in-becoming of self-conscious, active ‘spirit’—with a ‘holistic’ and ‘systematic’
interpretation of the fundamental achievements of scientific and methodological research
in our century such as is being developed, for example, by the latest and most significant
trends of the philosophical tradition of Anglo-Saxon Hegelianism.130
NOTES
1 Cf. H.Marcuse, Reason and Revolution: Hegel and the Rise of Social Theory, 2nd edn, New
York: The Humanities Press, 1954, pp. 402–9.
2 For a detailed, although somewhat uncritical, reconstruction of the ‘external’ events of the
development of twentieth-century Italian philosophical culture, see E.Garin [10.31] A
summary overview of the fundamental trends of Italian thought from 1945 up to 1980 is
offered by the collection of essays, ed. E. Garin [10.53].
3 M.F.Sciacca [10.86], vol. 3, p. 214.
4 G.Gentile, ‘L’atto del pensare come atto puro’, 1911; in Gentile, La riforma della dialettica

36.2 Page 352

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 314
hegeliana [10.32], 193.
5 G.Gentile, Teoria generale dello spirito come atto puro [10.35]; in Gentile [10.45], p. 491.
6 ‘L’atto del pensare come atto puro’ [10.32], 194.
7 Teoria generale dello spirito come atto puro [10.35], 475.
8 ‘L’atto del pensare come atto puro’ [10.32], 190.
9 Ibid., p. 191.
10 G.Gentile, Il modernismo e i rapporti tra religions e filosofia, 1909, ch. 10: ‘Le forme
assolute dello spirito’, in Gentile, La religione, [10.38], pp. 259–65.
11 Cf. G.Gentile, La filosofia dell’arte [10.42], 144–70. See also Gentile, Introduzione alla
filosofia [10.43], 34–60.
12 Cf. La filosofia dell’arte [10.42], 150–2.
13 Cf. Teoria générale dello spirito come atto puro [10.35], 470.
14 Cf. La filosofia dell’arte [10.42], 117ff.
15 Cf. G.Gentile, Sistema di logica come teoria del conoscere [10.36], vol. 1.
16 The most developed and accomplished form of which remains, in his opinion, Catholicism:
cf. G.Gentile, ‘La mia religione’ [10.40], 405–26.
17 Cf., e.g., G.Gentile, Discorsi di religione [10.38], 382: ‘The most deeply religious (=
mystical) element of religion is not the affirmation of the abstract object so much as the
negation of the subject’ (my italics).
18 In Gentile’s terminology: in the ‘societas in interiore homine’. Cf. Gentile, I fondamenti
della filosofia del diritto [10.34], 75–6; and Genesi e struttura della società [10.44], ch. 4,
pp. 33–43.
19 Cf. G.Gentile, Sommario di pedagogia come scienza filosofica [10.33], vol. 1, p. 25.
20 For a more detailed critical examination of his fundamental logical and epistemological
doctrines, see my paper [10.83] and my book [10.82], part 3, ch. 2, no. 51.
21 H.S.Harris [10.52], 274. A careful outline of Gentile’s philosophy is offered by the same
author in his essay [10.51]. Nothing more than a somewhat grotesque distortion of Gentile’s
thought in a relativistic-materialistic sense is the ‘interpretation’ put forward by A.Negri in
his book [10.64] and by V.A. Bellezza in his papers [10.7] and [10.8].
22 Cf., e.g., Hegel, Enzyklopädie der philosophischen Wissenschaften, Frankfurt: Suhrkamp,
1970, vol. I, no. 133, Zusatz.
23 G.Gentile, La riforma dell’educazione [10.41], 32–47,
24 Sommario di pedagogia [10.33], 127.
25 Ibid., p. 253.
26 La riforma dell’educazione [10.41], 176.
27 Cf. B.Croce, Logica come scienza del concetto puro [10.16], 249–54.
28 Cf. B.Croce, Saggio sullo Hegel seguito da altri scritti di storia delta filosofia, [10.17],
126ff.
29 Cf. Logica [10.16], 91ff.
30 Cf. ibid., pp. 323–5.
31 Cf. Teoria e storia della storiografia [10.19], 140.
32 In an essay of 1936, however, Croce, explicitly contradicting a fundamental assumption of
the aesthetic theory outlined by him in 1902, asserts that one of the essential features of
‘poetry’ is the ‘cosmicità’, i.e. its ‘universality’ (cf. B.Croce, La poesia [10.21], 11–14).
33 Croce’s critical discussion and (partial) appropriation of the theory of Marx’s historical
materialism is documented especially by his book Materialismo storico ed economia
marxistica [10.14].
34 Cf. B.Croce, Storia d’Europa nel secolo decimonono [10.20], 7–21.

36.3 Page 353

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 315
35 Cf. B.Croce, La storia come pensiero e come azione [10.22], 44.
36 B.Croce, Indagini sullo Hegel e schiarimenti filosofici [10.23], 29–55.
37 Cf. my paper [10.81], and my book [10.82], part 3, ch. 2, no. 52.
38 Cf. ibid., part 2, ch. 4, note 19, p. 280.
39 Cf. U.Spirito [10.89]. For an outline of the development of Spirito’s thought see A.Negri
[10.64], vol. 2, pp. 65–73.
40 A.Negri [10.65], 58.
41 Ibid., p. 57.
42 R.Franchini [10.30], 167.
43 Ibid., p. 57.
44 Ibid., p. 172.
45 R.Franchini [10.29], 347.
46 R.Franchini [10.30], 167.
47 Ibid.
48 ‘Relativistic historicism’ is also the final outcome of the spiritual itinerary of one of the
major Italian historians of philosophy, Guido de Ruggiero (1888–1948). See especially
[10.25]. For a critique of his misguided polemic against Hegel’s absolute idealism, which he
accuses of ‘theologism’ and even of ‘fetishism’, cf. G.Rinaldi [10.82], part 3, ch. 2, note 87.
The denial of the constitutive immanence of the logical universal in individual
consciousness led Julius Evola (1898–1974) to identify the essence of the human subject
with Nietzsche’s ‘will to power’: cf. J.Evola, Teoria dell’Individuo Assoluto [10.27].
49 In fact, Franchini (not unlike, in this regard, the contemporary empiricists) denies the
epistemological value of any possible logical ‘foundation’ or ‘demonstration’, as merely
‘tautological’ (cf. [10.30], 171). His very denial of the possibility of metaphysics, then, is to
be held to be ungrounded—more the expression of individual subjective impotence than the
ascertainment of human reason’s objective, insuperable ‘limits’.
50 P.Carabellese, Critica del concreto [10.11], 23. The second edition of this work
considerably differs from the first, and can be legitimately regarded as the definitive version
of Carabellese’s ‘critical ontology’.
51 Ibid., pp. 101, 184.
52 And, after him, Bernardino Varisco (1850–1933), a spiritualistic and theistic Italian thinker
who has remarkably influenced the development of Carabellese’s thought.
53 In Carabellese’s ontological perspective the very concept of ‘nature’ turns out to be simply
nonsensical. As a consequence, he cannot but deny in toto the theoretical value of the
positive sciences. Cf., e.g., Critica del concrete [10.11], 189.
54 Ibid., p. 109.
55 Ibid., p. 199.
56 In more than one context Carabellese does not even hesitate to identify the objective unity
of the idea of Being with God himself (cf., e.g. ibid., p. 7, note). In any case, since such an
idea, as we know, is but an abstract ‘transcendental condition’ of knowing, radically
different from the subject which is its other essential condition, he is bound to conclude,
somewhat absurdly, that God as such does not exist actually, nor is he ‘subject’, ‘person’,
‘self-consciousness’, ‘spirit’ (cf. ibid., pp. 151–2, 171, 194).
57 Cf. ibid., pp. 113–15 and 181. Note the analogy of this Carabellese doctrine with Husserl’s
and Heidegger’s more known ‘phenomenological’ conceptions of ‘temporality’.
58 Ibid., p. 24.
59 Cf. ibid., pp. 126–39.
60 Garin rightly stresses the ‘obscurity’ and ‘haziness of expression’ of Carabellese’s thought

36.4 Page 354

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 316
(cf. [10.31], vol. 2, pp. 357, note 16, and 455). And R.Donnici suitably observes that ‘as
compared with Gentile and Croce’s idealism, his most immediate polemical targets,
Carabellese’s critical ontology appears to be very frail’ (R.Donnici [10.26], 7). In my
opinion, this holds good more for his critique of Gentile than for that of Croce.
61 His book Kant [10.61] is devoted to a decidedly ‘spiritualistic’ interpretation of Kant’s
whole ‘critical philosophy’.
62 P.Martinetti, Introduzione alla metafisica [10.55], 45.
63 Ibid., p. 40.
64 Ibid., p. 259.
65 To Spinoza’s thought, which Martinetti interprets and criticizes from a substantially neo-
Platonic point of view, he devoted numerous insightful essays. Cf. P.Martinetti, ‘La dottrina
della conoscenza e del metodo nella filosofia di Spinoza’ [10.56], 289–324; ‘La dottrina
della libertà in Benedetto Spinoza’ [10.57], (reprinted in his book La libertà [10.59]); ‘Modi
primitivi e derivati, infiniti e finiti’ [10.58]; ‘Problemi religiosi nella filosofia di
B.Spinoza’ [10.60]. For a general critical evaluation of Martinetti’s Spinoza interpretation
see my ‘Introduction’ to my Italian translation of E.E.Harris’s book Salvezza dalla
disperazione. Rivalutazione della filosofia di Spinoza, Milano: Guerini, 1991, pp. 29–31.
66 Introduzione alla metafisica [10.55], 261.
67 Cf., e.g., Plotinus, Enneads VI, 9.
68 Introduzione alla metafisica [10.55], 471.
69 Ibid., p. 476.
70 Ibid., p. 478.
71 Cf. ibid., pp. 435–43.
72 Ibid., p. 273.
73 I say ‘relatively’, because for Martinetti their ultimate psychological origin is itself merely
empirical. They are a priori only with respect to experience’s sensible qualities, which they
unify in a ‘unique’, ‘absolute’ order. Cf. ibid., pp. 423ff.
74 Cf. ibid., pp. 434–43.
75 Cf. ibid., pp. 443–55.
76 Ibid., p. 468.
77 Ibid., p. 403. Such a vindication of the autonomy of sensible intuition seems to find a close
counterpart in Martinetti’s critique of Kant’s doctrine that the ‘manifold’ of sensuous
impressions is merely subjective, and the objective unity is introduced in it only by the
understanding’s ‘synthetic’ activity. In his opinion, on the contrary, sense-perception is an
inseparable unity of subject and object before, and independently of, its subsequent
unification in the logical forms of thought (cf. ibid., pp. 241–2).
78 Ibid., p. 472.
79 Ibid., p. 18.
80 Ibid., p. 433.
81 Among the numerous, although often speculatively mediocre, writings of today’s upholders
of the metaphysics of Being, I confine myself to mentioning: F.Olgiati [10.66]; A.Carlini
[10.12]; A.Guzzo [10.49]; V.La Via [10.54]; C. Mazzantini [10.63]; F.Olgiati [10.67];
V.A.Padovani [10.73]; M.F.Sciacca [10.87]; L.Stefanini [10.90]; F.Olgiati [10.68];
V.Mathieu [10.62]; M.F. Sciacca [10.88]; P.Prini [10.77]; G.Bontadini [10.10]; C.Arata
[10.4]; C. Arata [10.5]; M.Gentile [10.46]; D.Pesce [10.76]; C.Fabro [10.28]; A.Guzzo
[10.50]; L.Pareyson [10.74]. Guzzo’s broad essay [10.48] is devoted to an excellent
exposition of Spinoza’s thought and to a lucid critique of it from a still ‘actualistic’ (and by
no means ‘spiritualistic’ or ‘neo-Thomistic’) point of view. The reductive ‘irrationalistic’

36.5 Page 355

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 317
interpretation of Fichte’s thought put forward by L.Pareyson [10.75] is, on the contrary,
wholly questionable.
82 M.F.Sciacca [10.88], 36.
83 Ibid., p. 163.
84 L.Pareyson [10.74], 147.
85 Cf. G.Bontadini [10.10], 4.
86 M.F.Sciacca [10.88], 241.
87 Ibid., p. 206.
88 A.Guzzo [10.50], 77.
89 A.Carlini [10.12], 192.
90 F.Olgiati [10.68], 27.
91 C.Arata [10.5], 18.
92 M.F.Sciacca [10.88], 66–7.
93 A lucid, thoroughgoing critique of Thomism from the standpoint of Gentile’s ‘actual
idealism’ is carried out by Giuseppe Saitta (1881–1965) in his admirable essay [10.85].
94 A.Gramsci [10.47], 115.
95 Ibid., p. 244 (my italics).
96 Ibid., p. 54.
97 Ibid., p. 195.
98 Ibid., p 238.
99 G.Della Volpe [10.24], 36.
100 Ibid., p. 123.
101 Cf. especially M.Rossi [10.84].
102 Cf. especially L.Colletti [10.13].
103 G.Della Volpe [10.24], 103.
104 A.Gramsci [10.47], 26.
105 Ibid., p. 27.
106 Ibid.
107 Ibid., p. 28.
108 Ibid., p. 52.
109 Ibid., p. 219.
110 Ibid., p. 292. For a critique of Gramsci’s Hegel interpretation see my book [10.79], vol.1,
pp. 14f., 24f., 136f., 201f.
111 G.Della Volpe [10.24], 169.
112 Ibid., p. 121.
113 Ibid., p. 201.
114 Ibid., p. 184.
115 E.Paci [10.71], 222.
116 E.Paci [10.69], 3. For his critique of Gentile’s idealism see especially Paci [10.72]), 62–6.
Husserl’s theory of consciousness’s ‘original temporality’ is developed by Paci especially in
his essay [10.70].
117 [10.71], 226.
118 Banfi’s open denial of the original truth and reality of the Absolute is unambiguously
witnessed, for example, by the following passage: ‘in general one must say that according to
phenomenological thought an absolute reality is as absurd as a round quadrilateral, for there
is nothing absolute but the ideal moment of pure immanence’ (A.Banfi [10.6], 94–5). For a
more detailed exposition and critique at Banfi’s and Paci’s ‘phenomenological Marxism’
see my book [10.78], Appendices, pp. 214–31.

36.6 Page 356

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 318
119 N.Abbagnano [10.2], 157.
120 Ibid., p. 156.
121 Cf. Abbagnano [10.3], 45–9.
122 [10.2], 156.
123 [10.3], 48.
124 Ibid., p. 47.
125 [10.2], 26f.
126 Ibid. p. 26.
127 Ibid., p. 27. The stiff opposition between the philosophical-cultural perspectives of
‘Illuminism’ (or ‘existentialism’) and of ‘Romanticism’ (or ‘idealism’) constitutes the
fundamental historiographical criterion by which Abbagnano interprets and judges the
whole development of contemporary philosophy. Cf., e.g., Abbagnano [10.1], vol. 3, parts
VI and VII.
128 [10.2], 157.
129 Cf. above, note 20.
130 Errol Harris’s epistemological researches appear especially interesting in this regard. For a
summary exposition and interpretation of his philosophy see my books [10.80] and [10.82],
part 3, ch. 3 no. 61.
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Primary texts and criticism
10.1 Abbagnano, N. Storia della filosofia, 3 vols, 1946; 3rd edn, Torino: UTET, 1974.
10.2 Abbagnano, N. Possibilità e libertà, Torino: Taylor, 1956.
10.3 Abbagnano, N. Introduzione all’esistenzialismo, 1965; 4th edn, Milano: Il
Saggiatore, 1972.
10.4 Arata, C. Lineamenti di un ontologismo personalistico, Milano: Marzorati 1955.
10.5 Arata, C. Principi di un’interpretazione trascendentalistica e personalistica della
metafisica classica, Milano, 1955.
10.6 Banfi, A. Filosofi contemporanei, ed. R.Cantoni, Milano: Parenti, 1961.
10.7 Bellezza, V.A. ‘La riforma spaventiano-gentiliana della dialettica hegeliana’, in
Incidenza di Hegel, ed. F.Tessitore, Napoli: Morano, 1970, pp. 5–74.
10.8 Bellezza, V.A. ‘La razionalità del reale: Hegel, Marx, Gentile’, in Enciclopedia ’76–
’77: Il pensiero di Giovanni Gentile, Roma, 1977, pp. 59–75.
10.9 Bellezza, V.A. La problematica gentiliana della storia, Roma: Bulzoni, 1983.
10.10 Bontadini, G. ‘L’attualità della metafisica classica’, Rivista di filosofia
neoscolastica, 45:1 (1953):1–18.
10.11 Carabellese, P. Critica del concreto, 1921; 2nd edn, Roma: A.Signorelli, 1940.
10.12 Carlini, A. ‘Lineamenti di una concezione realistica dello spirito umano’, in
Filosofi italiani contemporanei, ed. M.F.Sciacca, Como: Marzorati, 1944, pp. 189–97.
10.13 Colletti, L. Il marxismo e Hegel, 2 vols, Bari: Laterza, 1976.
10.14 Croce, B. Materialismo storico ed economia marxistica, 1900; 3rd edn, Bari:
Laterza, 1978.
10.15 Croce, B. Estetica come scienza dell’espressione e linguistica generale, 1902; 11th

36.7 Page 357

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 319
edn, Bari: Laterza, 1965.
10.16 Croce, B. Logica come scienza del concetto puro, 1905; 2nd edn, Bari: Laterza,
1971.
10.17 Croce, B. Saggio sullo Hegel seguito da altri scritti di storia della filosofia, 1906;
5th edn, Bari: Laterza, 1967.
10.18 Croce, B. Filosofia della pratica, 1908; 9th edn, Bari: Laterza, 1973.
10.19 Croce, B. Teoria e storia della storiografia, 1917; 11th edn, Bari: Laterza, 1976.
10.20 Croce, B. Storia d’Europa nel secolo decimonono, 1932; 3rd edn, Bari: Laterza,
1972.
10.21 Croce, B. La poesia, 1936; 3rd edn, Bari: Laterza, 1971.
10.22 Croce, B. La. storia come pensiero e come azione, 1938; 3rd edn, Bari: Laterza,
1973.
10.23 Croce, B. Indagini sullo Hegel e schiarimenti filosofici, 1952; 2nd edn, Bari:
Laterza, 1967.
10.24 Della Volpe, G. Logica come scienza positiva, 1950; 2nd edn, MessinaFirenze:
D’Anna, 1965.
10.25 De Ruggiero, G. Storia della filosofia, 12 vols, Bari: Laterza, 1918–47.
10.26 Donnici, R. Comunità e valori in Pantaleo Carabellese, Venezia: Marsilio, 1982.
10.27 Evola, J. Teoria dell’Individuo Assoluto, 1927; 2nd edn, Roma: Edizioni
Mediterranee, 1973.
10.28 Fabro, C. Dall’essere all’esistente, Brescia: Morcelliana, 1957.
10.29 Franchini, R. Le origini delta dialettica, Napoli: Giannini, 1961.
10.30 Franchini, R. ‘Che cos’è la metafisica’, Criteria, 7 (1990):165–73.
10.31 Garin, E. Cronache di filosofia italiana 1900/1943. Quindici anni dopo. 1945/
1960, 2 vols, Bari: Laterza, 1966.
10.32 Gentile, G. La riforma delta dialettica hegeliana, 1913; 4th edn, Firenze: Sansoni,
1975.
10.33 Gentile, G. Sommario di pedagogia come scienza filosofica, 2 vols, 1913–14; 4th
edn, Firenze: Sansoni, 1959.
10.34 Gentile, G. I fondamenti della filosofia del diritto, Pisa: Mariotti, 1916.
10.35 Gentile, G. Teoria generate dello spirito come atto puro, 1916; 6th edn, Firenze:
Sansoni, 1959.
10.36 Gentile, G. Sistema di logica come teoria del conoscere, 2 vols, 1917–1922; Bari:
Laterza, 1922.
10.37 Gentile, G. Le origini della filosofia contemporanea in Italia, 3 vols, Messina:
Principato, 1917–23.
10.38 Gentile, G. Discorsi di religione, 1920; in Gentile, La religione, Firenze: Sansoni,
1965, pp. 281–389.
10.39 Gentile, G. Il modernismo e i rapporti tra religione e filosofia, in Gentile, La
religione [10.38], 1–275.
10.40 Gentile, G. ‘La mia religione’, in Gentile, La religione [10.38], 405–26.
10.41 Gentile, G. La riforma dell’educazione, 1920; 6th edn, Firenze: Sansoni, 1975.
10.42 Gentile, G. La filosofia dell’arte, 1931; 3rd edn, Firenze: Sansoni, 1975.
10.43 Gentile, G. Introduzione alla filosofia, 1933; 2nd edn, Firenze: Sansoni, 1981.
10.44 Gentile, G. Genesi e struttura della società, 1946; 2nd edn, Firenze: Sansoni, 1975.

36.8 Page 358

▲back to top
Italian idealism and after 320
10.45 Gentile, G. Opere filosofiche, ed. E.Garin, Milano: Garzanti, 1991.
10.46 Gentile, M. Come si pone il problema metafisico, Padova, 1955.
10.47 Gramsci, A. Il materialismo storico e la filosofia di Benedetto Croce, 1929–35,
Roma: Editori Riuniti, 1977.
10.48 Guzzo, A. Il pensiero di Spinoza, Firenze: Vallecchi, 1924.
10.49 Guzzo, A. ‘L’Uomo’, in Filosofi italiani contemporanei [10.12], 243–53.
10.50 Guzzo, A. ‘Idealismo 1963’, Filosofia, 14 (1963):25–84.
10.51 Harris, H.S. The Social Philosophy of Giovanni Gentile, Urbana & London:
University of Illinois Press, 1966.
10.52 Harris, H.S. ‘Gentile’s Reform of Hegel’s Dialectic’, in Enciclopedia 76–77: Il
pensiero di Giovanni Gentile, Roma, 1977.
10.53 La filosofia italiana dal dopoguerra ad oggi, ed. E.Garin, Bari: Laterza, 1985.
10.54 La Via, V. ‘La restituzione del realismo’, in Filosofi italiani contemporanei
[10.12], 255–72.
10.55 Martinetti, P. Introduzione alla metafisica, 1st edn, Torino, 1904; 2nd edn, Milano:
Libreria Editrice Lombarda, 1929; 3rd edn, Milano, 1987.
10.56 Martinetti, P. ‘La dottrina della conoscenza e del metodo nella filosofia di
Spinoza’, Rivista di filosofia 8:3 (1916):289–324.
10.57 Martinetti, P. ‘La dottrina della libertà in Benedetto Spinoza’, Chronicon
Spinozanum, 4 (1926):58–67.
10.58 Martinetti, P. ‘Modi primitivi e derivati, infiniti e finiti’, Rivista di filosofia, 18:3
(1927):248–61.
10.59 Martinetti, P. La libertà, Milano: Libreria Editrice Lombarda, 1928.
10.60 Martinetti, P. ‘Problemi religiosi nella filosofia di B.Spinoza’, Rivista di filosofia,
30:4 (1939):289–311.
10.61 Martinetti, P. Kant, posthumously published in 1946; 2nd edn, Milano: Feltrinelli,
1974.
10.62 Mathieu, V. Limitazione qualitativa della conoscenza umana, Torino, 1949.
10.63 Mazzantini, C. ‘Linee di metafisica spiritualistica come filosofia della virtualità
ontologica’, in Filosofi italiani contemporanei [10.12].
10.64 Negri, A. Giovanni Gentile, 2 vols, Firenze: La Nuova Italia, 1975.
10.65 Negri, A. ‘Modernity as Crisis and Permanent Criticism’, Idealistic Studies, 21:1
(1991):48–65.
10.66 Olgiati, F. ‘Come si pone oggi il problema della metafisica’, Rivista di filosofia
neoscolastica, 14 (1922):14–28.
10.67 Olgiati, F. ‘La filosofia cristiana e i suoi indirizzi storiografici’, in Filosofi italiani
contemporanei [10.12], 183–197.
10.68 Olgiati, F. Il concetto di metafisica, Milano, 1945.
10.69 Paci, E. ‘Coscienza fenomenologica e coscienza idealistica’ Il Verri, 4 (1960): 3–
15.
10.70 Paci, E. Tempo e verità nella fenomenologia di Husserl, Bari: Laterza, 1961.
10.71 Paci, E. Funzione delle scienze e significato dell’uomo, 1963; 4th edn, Milano: Il
Saggiatore, 1970.
10.72 Paci, E. La filosofia contemporanea, Milano: Garzanti, 1974.
10.73 Padovani, V.A. ‘Filosofia e religione’, in Filosofi italiani contemporanei [10.12],

36.9 Page 359

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 321
319–31.
10.74 Pareyson, L. Verità e interpretazione, 1971; 3rd edn, Milano: Mursia, 1982.
10.75 Pareyson, L. Fichte: Il sistema della libertà, Milano: Mursia, 1976.
10.76 Pesce, D. Saggio sulla metafisica, Firenze, 1957.
10.77 Prini, P. Itinerari del platonismo perenne, Torino, 1950.
10.78 Rinaldi, G. Critica della gnoseologia fenomenologica, Napoli: Giannini, 1979.
10.79 Rinaldi, G. Dalla dialettica della materia alla dialettica dell’Idea. Critica del
materialismo storico, vol. 1, Napoli: SEN, 1981.
10.80 Rinaldi, G. Saggio sulla metafisica di Harris, Bologna: Li Causi, 1984.
10.81 Rinaldi, G. ‘A Few Critical Remarks on Croce’s Historicism’, Idealistic Studies,
17:1 (1987):52–69.
10.82 Rinaldi, G. A History and Interpretation of the Logic of Hegel, Lewiston: The
Edwin Mellen Press, 1992.
10.83 Rinaldi, G. ‘Attualità di Hegel: Autocoscienza, concretezza, e processo in Gentile e
in Christensen’, Studi filosofici, 12–13 (1989–90):63–104.
10.84 Rossi, M. Marx e la dialettica hegeliana, 4 vols, Roma: Editori Riuniti, 1960–3.
10.85 Saitta, G. Il carattere delta filosofia tomistica, Firenze: Sansoni, 1934.
10.86 Sciacca, M.F. La filosofia nel suo sviluppo storico, 3 vols, 1940; 12th edn, Roma:
Cremonese, 1976.
10.87 Sciacca, M.F. ‘Spiritualismo cristiano’, in Filosofi italiani contemporanei [10.12],
365–74.
10.88 Sciacca, M.F. Filosofia e metafisica, Brescia: Morcelliana, 1950.
10.89 Spirito, U. ‘Finito e infinite’, in Filosofi italiani contemporanei [10.12], 375–83.
10.90 Stefanini, L. ‘Spiritualismo cristiano’, in Filosofi italiani contemporanei [10.12],
385–93.
Translations
See also 10.51 above.
10.91 Croce, B. What is Living and What is Dead in the Philosophy of Hegel, trans.
D.Ainslie, London, 1915.
10.92 Croce, B. My Philosophy and Other Essays on the Moral and Political Problem of
our Time, selected by R.Klibansky, trans. E.F.Carritt, London: Allen & Unwin, 1951.
10.93 Croce, B. History—As the Story of Liberty, trans. S.Sprigge, London: Allen &
Unwin, 1951.
10.94 Gentile, G. The Theory of Mind as Pure Act, trans. from the third edition with an
introduction by H.W.Carr, London: Macmillan, 1922.
10.95 Gentile, G. The Reform of Education, trans. D.Bigongiari, with an introduction by
B.Croce, New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1922.
10.96 Gentile, G. Fragments From La filosofia dell’arte, trans. E.F.Carritt, Oxford, 1931.
10.97 Gentile, G. Genesis and Structure of Society, trans. H.S.Harris, Urbana: University
of Illinois Press, 1960.
10.98 Gentile, G. The Philosophy of Art, trans. and with an introduction by G. Gullace,
Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, 1972.

36.10 Page 360

▲back to top
CHAPTER 11
French structuralism and after
De Saussure, Lévi-Strauss, Barthes, Lacan, Foucault
Hugh J.Silverman
FERDINAND DE SAUSSURE
The history of structuralism cannot be thought without Ferdinand de Saussure (1857–
1913). The Swiss linguist lecturing in Geneva in the early twentieth century set the scene
for what in the two and a half decades following the Second World War came to be
known as structuralism. The figures who dominated the development of the movement in
the 1940s and 1950s were Claude Lévi-Strauss (b. 1908), Jacques Lacan (1901–82), and
Roland Barthes (1915–80). By the 1960s Michel Foucault’s (1926–84) reformulations
and even rejections of structuralism indicated the new directions for what became
poststructuralism.
Curiously, the parallel development of existential phenomenology in France ran a
different course. With the possible exception of Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s (1908–61)
interests in the structuralist alternative, structuralism had little or no effect upon the
development of phenomenology as a philosophical movement. With poststructuralism,
however, the confluence of these two different philosophical methods marked the
appearance of an entirely new mode of thinking—one which is exemplified in Foucault’s
archaeology of knowledge on the one hand and Jacques Derrida’s (b. 1930)
deconstruction on the other. For the purposes of the present chapter however, I shall take
Foucault as exemplary of this new development.1
Structuralism—and especially French structuralism—cannot be understood apart from
de Saussure’s semiology. According to de Saussure—as articulated clearly in the
posthumously published Course in General Linguistics (1916), a compilation of several
years of the Swiss linguist’s Geneva lectures [11.1]—semiology is ‘the general science of
signs’. De Saussure proposed a new understanding of the notion of ‘sign’. He argued that
the sign is not just a word but rather that a sign is both a word and concept. He named
these two components of the sign the ‘signifier’ [signifiant] and the ‘signified’ [signifié].
The signifier is the word, that which does the signifying. The signified is the concept, that
which is signified. Together these two components constitute a binary pair called the
sign. The standard example which de Saussure offers for this binary relation is the word
tree and the concept ‘tree’.
A sign, however, is not yet a sign until it is distinguished from other signs in the same
system, or language [langue]. A sign cannot be on its own—apart from all other elements
of the language. Indeed, de Saussure defines a sign as determined by its difference from
all other signs in the sign system. Hence the sign tree is the sign tree by its difference

37 Pages 361-370

▲back to top

37.1 Page 361

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 323
from other signs such as house, bird and sky. Now the sign tree is also different from the
sign arbre or the sign Baum, arbor or arbol. Each of these other signs is part of a
different sign system: arbre, the French language, Baum, the German language, arbol,
the Spanish language. Because they are not part of the same sign system, they are signs
only in their respective sign systems.
De Saussure also remarks that the relation between a signifier and a signified is
entirely ‘arbitrary’. That the concept or signified ‘tree’ is designated by the word tree in
English is simply arbitrary. It could have been called arbre, Baum or arbol—and indeed
in different languages it does acquire such signifiers. Only in the limited instances of
onomatopoeia in which a signifier corresponds in a motivated way to a particular
signified is the arbitrary nature compromised. Hence bow-wow for a dog’s bark, or
smooth, for something soft and gentle, or Being-in-the-world for the extensiveness of our
existence are connected in a more related way than most words with their corresponding
concepts.
A sign—a signifier [un signifiant] and a signified [un signifié]—is one among many
signs in a language [langue]. A langue can be English, French, German, Japanese,
Russian, etc. In the account of a langue nothing need be spoken as such. Hence, de
Saussure offers a correlative concept called the speaking of the language or parole. While
langue is constituted by elements that make up a particular language, parole is the
speaking of that language in a determinate context and at a determinate time. Hence when
I say: ‘Tall evergreen trees inspire a sense of grandeur’, I am saying [parole] these words
(with their corresponding concepts) in English. Were I to say: ‘Ces grands arbres verts
sont magnifiques’, I am saying something else in French but I am enacting the French
language in a particular context and at a specific time—the saying is parole.
Another binary pair (or binary opposition), as Saussure sometimes calls them, is the
relation between ‘syntagm’ and ‘system’ (or ‘paradigm’). The sentence ‘Tall evergreen
trees inspire a sense of grandeur’ is a sequence of signs; one follows the other. As a
sequence, the signs follow a syntagmatic line. Each sign is contiguous with the next, and
there is a meaning produced by the sequence. By contrast, were one to substitute alternate
signs such as ‘short’, ‘broad’, or ‘imposing’ for ‘tall’, for instance, the sentence would
read: ‘Short (or broad, or imposing) evergreen trees inspire a sense of grandeur.’ The new
sentence with the substituted term still makes sense, but the sense is of course different—
and even in the first two instances a bit curious. What does not quite fit with ‘tall’,
‘short’, and ‘broad’ is ‘imposing’. The first three are all signs of size. ‘Imposing’ is of
another order, yet it is also substitutable for ‘tall’. All of these substitutable terms are part
of the same system (or paradigm) if broadly interpreted. If more narrowly interpreted, the
system could be restricted to signs of size and not just signs that are substitutable. Each of
the elements of the sentence could be examined in terms of substitutable signs, and each
would be part of a different system.
A fourth binary opposition is that between diachrony and synchrony. A diachronic
study of the Greek sign of excellence aretē would follow it through its Latin version in
virtus, its Italian reformulation as virtú, its French usage as vertu, a term which is also
repeated in English (virtue). To study the same work over time, chronologically, allows
for the consideration of a development over time, historically, as it were. However, such
a study isolates what is studied from its context and framework. It takes the element and

37.2 Page 362

▲back to top
French structuralism and after 324
reviews the whole development independently of related concerns. A synchronic study,
by contrast, is ultimately concerned with the set of relations among a whole complex of
signs and elements that arise at the same time and in the same context. The sign aretē is
studied in relation to other signs at the time: paideia (education and the ideals of the
culture), sophrosyne (moderation or temperance), and so forth. In this respect a given
notion is understood in a broad context—in this case, a cultural context. Once the
synchronic study has been accomplished for a given time-slice, it will be possible to
compare that time-slice with other periods of time—in order to show similarities and/or
differences across a number of different time-slices.
As a linguist, de Saussure was ultimately concerned with language. Indeed, the whole
project of structuralism is framed according to a linguistic model. This model presumes
that what is outside language is not relevant to the linguist’s task. Hence the earliest
forms of structuralism were restricted to the formulations of a semiology based on
language study. Roland Barthes, by contrast, in his Elements of Semiology (1964 [11.7]),
remarks that while de Saussure believed that linguistics is a part of semiology—that there
are domains of semiology that are not relevant for the linguist—in his view, semiology is
a part of linguistics. Barthes’s formulation presumes that all sign systems are already
language systems of one sort or another—I shall return to Barthes later.
CLAUDE LÉVI-STRAUSS
What is significant here is that when Lévi-Strauss in the late 1940s began to apply
structuralist principles to anthropological concerns, he was already extending the
linguistic model far beyond language study. This meant that although Lévi-Strauss as an
anthropologist was concerned with structures of thought, he had already made the shift
that Barthes articulates: ethnology is already a language which can be studied by the
structuralist.
Although de Saussure was lecturing on structural linguistics in the first decades of the
century, it took until the 1930s for his work to become noticed and accessible to a
broader context. This was the fate of his Course in General Linguistics. When Lévi-
Strauss travelled to the United States during the Second World War, it was out of
political and personal necessity as he narrates in considerable detail in Tristes tropiques
[11.3]. When he arrived in New York, he began teaching at the University in Exile
(which has subsequently come to be called The New School for Social Research). During
that time, he met and conferred often with Roman Jakobson (1896–1982) (whose own
itinerary had taken him from Russia to Prague to Paris to New York). Jacobson was a
linguist whose development of Russian formalism was an important contribution to the
concept of structure. Indeed both Lévi-Strauss and Jakobson worked together on a
groundbreaking reading of a Baudelaire poem, ‘Les Chats’. The idea was to offer a
structural study of the poem. Their reading was careful and meticulous. They were
interested in how the poem exhibits structural, stylistic and syntactic features in order to
constitute the work as a whole. Jakobson’s further interest in metaphor and metonymy
was worked out in his Fundamentals of Language [11.50] in terms of two types of
aphasia: metaphor as replacement by substitution, metonymy as replacement by

37.3 Page 363

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 325
contiguity.2
After the war, Lévi-Strauss served as cultural adviser to the French ambassador to the
United States (1946–7). Then he returned to France where he took up his position at the
Ecole Pratique des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales (the ‘Pratique’ has subsequently
been dropped) and resumed his research in structural anthropology. In 1949, he produced
his major contribution, The Elementary Structures of Kinship [11.2]. Here the concept of
kinship was developed in connection with Lévi-Strauss’s understanding of structuralism
and his collation of many different ethnographic accounts of kinship throughout the
world. His view was that despite many significant differences in kinship practice in
different cultures, common structures are repeated underneath these multiple instances of
kinship practices. These structures have a basic form according to a determinate set of
relations. The actual character of the relation might change from one context to another,
but what does not change is the relation itself. Each relation is part of a whole structure of
relations, where no element is strictly independent of any of the others. Thus a one-to-one
correspondence of one part of a structure with one part of another cannot be made. The
whole structure must be compared with another whole structure in order to provide an
appropriate analysis. For instance, Lévi-Strauss is particularly interested in the
‘avunculate’ or uncle-relation. He finds from his extensive research of many different
cultures, societies and social groups that the role of the uncle is critical. Hence there is the
mother-father relation, the mother-father and son relations, the son-maternal uncle
relation, and the mother-brother relation.
Understood independently, each of these relations has a particular content: positive and
socially supported in one case, negative and outcast in another. Lévi-Strauss determined
that by assigning a positive or negative value to each of these relations in a particular
context, he could determine the nature of the whole structure. For three hypothetical
societies, it might look like Fig. 11.1.
Figure 11.1
In each of these societies, the mother and father, the mother’s brother and the brother’s

37.4 Page 364

▲back to top
French structuralism and after 326
sister’s son constitute the key kinship relations. While the structure recurs, the nature of
the relations change from one society to the next. The repetition of the same structure is
matched with the differences in the nature of the relations among the social roles in each
society.
This concept of structure indicates a latent set of relations that underlie the actual,
particular and real relations of specific individuals in a determinate context. Lévi-Strauss
broadens his reading of kinship relations to the account of totems and taboos in different
societies as well as to the detailed study of myths. These further explorations of the
application of structural method resurface in a variety of essays written between 1944 and
1957 and are collected together in the first volume of Structural Anthropology (1958
[11.4]). The appearance of Structural Anthropology marked a significant phase in the
development of structuralism. Elementary Structures (1949, [11.2]) was highly detailed
and technical. The new book solidified the role of structuralism in France. It indicated
that there was now an alternative research programme that would ultimately match that of
existentialism and the existential phenomenology that had reigned unopposed since the
early 1940s. While it would take another decade for structuralism to establish its foothold
firmly, Lévi-Strauss’s new book was an important link between the growing interest in de
Saussure’s semiology and the full-fledged structural studies that Barthes, Lacan and
Foucault would carry on into the 1960s. This is not to say that Lévi-Strauss has not been
a continuing and dominant force in the development of structuralism even today. At the
beginning of the 1970s, when I attended his lectures at the Collège de France where he
occupies the Chair of Social Anthropology, he was still defending his position against the
comments and criticisms of the British anthropologist Rodney Needham. And many
books have followed the appearance of Structural Anthropology. His four-volume study
of world mythologies, his second volume of Structural Anthropology, his
autobiographical Tristes tropiques, his many essays on masks and race all add up to a
major contribution to late twentieth-century French thought.
Louis Marin (1931–92) used to comment that when he was a young man in the early
1950s, he and his wife Françoise were invited to the apartment of M. and Mme Maurice
Merleau-Ponty for what was then described as a ‘dîner intime’. When he and his wife
arrived, he discovered that it was indeed a small diner party: M. and Mme Merleau-
Ponty, M. and Mme Lévi-Strauss, and M. and Mme Lacan. That these three were all
friends indicates a certain collaboration and dialogue that was highly charged in the early
period in which structuralism was gaining hold. Although Merleau-Ponty is known for
his groundbreaking work as a phenomenologist of perception (1945), only a year later he
was lecturing on de Saussure at the Ecole Normale Supérieure in Paris. Merleau-Ponty’s
turn to semiology as a topic of interest began to blend with his commitment to the
achievements of Gestalt psychology, but even more with those of phenomenology which
he saw as superior even to the Gestalt theories of Köhler and Koffka, Gelb and Goldstein.
Yet with his growing interest in language, Merleau-Ponty found real value in the
Saussurian theory of the sign.3 His courses on ‘Language and Communication’ (1946–7)
stressed his new commitment to language—a topic which he had only broached in
Phenomenology of Perception (1945), notably in the chapter on ‘The Body as Speech and
Expression’. Hence concurrently with Lévi-Strauss’s return to France and his intense
work on kinship relations, his friend Merleau-Ponty, who was by then Professor of Child

37.5 Page 365

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 327
Psychology and Pedagogy at the Institut de Psychologie in Paris, was also developing a
serious interest in the implications of Saussure’s structural linguistics.
When Merleau-Ponty set himself the task of writing a kind of literary theory which
was to have seen the light of day in the early 1950s, he was setting the stage for an
important debate that would take shape throughout the 1950s and 1960s—even long after
his death in 1961. What became The Prose of the World (published posthumously in
1969) [11.64]) , was to have been completed in 1952. However, Merleau-Ponty was
elected to the Collège de France that year and his research took him in other directions,
most notably in his critique of ‘dialectic’ and towards his theory of visibility in The
Visible and the Invisible (1964). There were two companion pieces that have been
included in Signs (1960 [11.62]) which addressed the question of language: ‘The
Phenomenology of Language’ and ‘Indirect Language and the Voices of Silence’. These
two essays, written in 1951–2, indicate the convergence between phenomenology and
structuralism as it was under development in the French context. While Sartre continued
to reject structuralism vigorously,4 Merleau-Ponty continued to be intrigued. While Sartre
published his own theory of literature in Qu’est-ce que la littérature? in 1947, he oriented
this theory toward the act of communicating the freedom of a writer to the freedom of a
reader. Writing, for Sartre, was both an act of commitment and an expression of freedom.
Merleau-Ponty’s response came in 1952 with The Prose of the World: there are many
aspects of language and expression that are simply not direct, that do not give an
algorithmic reading of experience—literature and painting are prime examples. Here
there is language but indirectly expressed—even silence for Merleau-Ponty speaks.
ROLAND BARTHES
Like Merleau-Ponty, the second major figure of French structuralism, Roland Barthes,
was also preparing in 1952 a response to Sartre’s literary theory: Writing Degree Zero
[11.5] was of mould-breaking merit. It offered an entirely different way of understanding
the role and status of writing. Writing was no longer an act of communication, but rather
an articulation that links up both style and language. The writer’s style (whether
romantic, or surrealist or existentialist) is matched with the writer’s langue or language.
This language is not simply idiosyncratic. For Barthes, language partakes of a social
context and experience. Language and style at the intersection of the two marks the locus
of writing (écriture). Hence revolutionary writing or bourgeois writing or romantic
writing occur in terms of a particular language and a determinate style. And such
revolutionary writing can be found equally in the times of Thomas Jefferson, Robespierre
and Brecht. Though the times are radically different, even the language and style are
different, the writing can be called ‘the same’. Although Barthes found that different texts
could be characterized in terms of these repeatable forms of writing, he was also
fascinated with the new writing of Alain Robbe-Grillet. Barthes is credited with having
‘discovered’ Robbe-Grillet, whose style of writing is officially a radical break with the
nineteenth-century novel, but whose writing itself marks the beginning of an
impassionate language where the subject is decentred and the discursive proliferations are
structurally identifiable. Le Voyeur and La Jalousie are excellent examples of a language

37.6 Page 366

▲back to top
French structuralism and after 328
stripped of emotion—or at least emotion as described by the typical nineteenth-century
omniscient author. There is still emotion, but it is described through the surfaces and the
ways in which surfaces are affected.
With the 1964 publication of Elements of Semiology [11.7], Barthes at last linked up
his critical practice with the theoretical writings of de Saussure. In this short piece, which
was originally published in Communications, the official journal of the Ecole Pratique
des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales, Barthes outlines the theory of the sign: the
signifier/signified relation, the langue/parole link, the connection between diachrony and
synchrony, and the opposition between denotation and connotation. But the critical year
was 1966, which saw the publication of his own Criticism and Truth [11.8], Lacan’s
Ecrits, [11.15] and Foucault’s The Order of Things [11.17]. Hence over a decade after
Barthes produced Writing Degree Zero, structuralism finally came of age. Elements of
Semiology set the stage for that crowning moment. In his seminar at the Ecole Pratique
des Hautes Etudes which I attended for the whole year in 1971–2, Barthes focused on
what he called ‘The Last Decade of Semiology’. He considered 1966 as the watershed
year. In the following year, Jean-Luc Godard produced his revolutionary film La
Chinoise (which prefigured the student-worker revolts of 1968) and Derrida published
Speech and Phenomena [11.30], Of Grammatology [11.29], and Writing and Difference
[11.31]. Hence by 1967, a whole new phase had begun—for lack of a more precise term
it was called poststructuralism. Of course, there were still many who were committed to
structuralism for another decade and many of the so-called poststructuralist theories
continued to build upon the languages and lessons of structuralism.
Once the scene was set and the terminology clarified in The Elements of Semiology
[11.7], Barthes himself began to develop his own position further. He rejected those
critical theories that gave special place to the author and authorial presence. And in his
famous essay ‘From Work to Text’ (1971 [11.10]), he outlined very clearly the
distinction between the traditional notion of the ‘work’ and his notion of the ‘text’. The
‘work’ (oeuvre, opera, Werk) results from an act of filiation: an author produces or
creates a work which is then a ‘fragment of substance, occupying a part of the space of
books (in a library for example)’.5 The author requires authority over the meaning of the
work. And the critic seeks to understand the author’s meaning. This hermeneutic concern
pervades work-centred studies. And it was also a dominant feature of the Sartrian theory
as well. Barthes proposes to place the emphasis on the text, which he describes as a
‘methodological field’. He elaborates: ‘The Text can be approached, experienced, in
reaction to the sign. The work closes on a signified’ (p. 158). This means that the text can
be read in terms of the sign system which participates in it, while the work focuses on
what is meant by it. The plurality of the text permits a full and elaborate network of
intertextuality which is closed off by the work. ‘The Text’, he says, ‘is bound to
jouissance, that is to a pleasure without separation’ (p. 164).
Two years later, Barthes published The Pleasure of the Text (1973, [11.11]). For
Barthes, the Text is not an object of desire or even a result of a creative act. Rather the
Text is a site—a locus for a reading, a place in which jouissance occurs. Something
happens in the critical reading of a Text. The Text’s network of signifying dynamic is
brought out. In the Introduction to S/Z (1970), Barthes had already shown how the
distinction between the ‘readerly’ (lisible) and ‘writerly’ (scriptible) text marks the

37.7 Page 367

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 329
difference between a text which is simply read through for the pleasure of it and the text
which is read as a methodological field—one in which the codes and sign systems are
elaborated in detail and available for careful decoding. The ‘writerly text is not a thing,’
Barthes writes, ‘we would have a hard time finding it in a bookstore.’6 The ‘writerly is
the novelistic without the novel, poetry without the poem, the essay without the
dissertation, writing without style, pro-duction without product, structuration without
structure’ (p. 5). The writerly occupies only a methodological and theoretical space, it is
not a product like the readerly text.
In this frame, Barthes outlined five different codes which constitute what he calls ‘the
plural text’, and the plural text is the writerly text critically disclosed. The five codes
include: the semic code (the elaboration of the signifier), the hermeneutic code
(disclosure of the enigma), the symbolic code (one element stands for another), the
actantial code (the action code), and the reference code (the cultural indicators marked in
the text). These codes are only possible codes for the reading of a text. Although Barthes
does not dwell upon the alternatives, it is only plausible that alternative sets of codes
function as well as those Barthes invokes.
Barthes was at his most daring when he took up an age-old topic, namely
autobiography, but in a radically new way. Roland Barthes (1975, [11.12]) by Roland
Barthes is certainly a break with the traditional diachronic mode of writing one’s own
life. He organizes his life not according to the succession of years, but according to the
alphabetical arrangement of topics, themes and oppositions that played an important role
in his life. And as to the typical chronology, that can be found in two pages at the back of
the essay. Barthes should not have died so early. He was run over by a milk truck outside
the Collège de France where he had been elected to the Chair of Semiology in 1977. He
was only sixty-five when he died in 1980.
JACQUES LACAN
Jacques Lacan, by contrast, born in 1901 only one year after Hans-Georg Gadamer, lived
to a ripe old age of eighty-one. There is a wonderful cartoon which Barthes includes in
his Roland Barthes of Lévi-Strauss, Lacan, Barthes, Foucault and Michel Leiris all sitting
together in Tahitian skirts. Although reflecting different ages, they all came together
around the structuralist enterprise. Lacan provided the basis for a structural
psychoanalysis. His early 1936 study of the mirror stage was first presented in Marienbad
(later made famous by Robbe-Grillet in the film Last Year at Marienbad). Lacan’s theory
is rather simple: the child at first does not detect any difference between it and its mother.
The sensory world around it is all integrated. It begins to notice a difference between it
and the mother. This becomes clear when it looks into the mirror and sees no longer just
motion or another person, but recognizes an identity between what it sees and itself. It
waves an arm and the image waves its arm, etc. It notices then that the mirror image is
itself. But then the father intercedes: the nom du père/ non du père/non-dupe erre are all
forms of interdiction. The father with his name and his prohibition—after all, he is
somewhat jealous of the close relationship that his child has with his wife—attempts to
break the harmony, introduces a negation, his paternal law, his ‘No’. The father is no

37.8 Page 368

▲back to top
French structuralism and after 330
fool. He knows what he wants and he knows what he does not want. By interceding
between the child and the mother, he imposes his authority, his will, his name. Now the
child cannot but recognize difference. The Verneinung is effective. The father imposes
his will and the child learns to affirm its own identity. Thus the mirror stage is the critical
moment at which the child takes on an identity of its own.
The inclusion of the revised version of the ‘Mirror Stage’ in Ecrits (1966 [11.15])
correlates with a number of other essays of major importance. In 1966 there was a
conference held at Johns Hopkins University subsequently entitled The Structuralist
Controversy. While Richard Macksey and Eugenio Donato edited the volume, the
leadership of René Girard was crucial. At Stanford, for instance, in the late 1960s one
heard of the Johns Hopkins experiment and those professors of literature committed to an
earlier model of literary study were deeply opposed to the Johns Hopkins scene.
Curiously, René Girard is now Professor of Humanities at that very same Stanford
University after trying out the State University of New York at Buffalo for a brief period.
Lacan was one of the speakers at the 1966 Hopkins conference. Also presenting papers
were Jean Hyppolite and Jacques Derrida. It was an important moment. And Lacan’s
essay was no less important. His paper was entitled ‘The Insistence of the Letter in the
Unconscious’, an essay which also appears in Ecrits. The question is, how does the chain
of signifiers mark off and bar the range of the signified? The signified especially in the
metonymic line is barred from access by the signifier. This exclusion of the signified
leads to a veering off of the signifier from one sign to the next. The signified however
remains unaccessible. The line between the signifier and the signified is strong and
resistant. In such cases in which the signifier has no access to the signified, it must act in
terms of that repression.
In the case of metaphor, there is an overdetermination of signifieds for a particular
signifier. In such a case, the bar is weak and a multiplicity of meanings intrude.
Throughout Lacan’s account, ‘the unconscious is structured like a language’. Where there
is resistance in language, there would be resistance in the unconscious. But for Lacan
whatever there is of an unconscious is read in terms of the play of signifiers. Repression
results when the letter is unable to insist in the signified. Meaning is kept at bay. A
stream of words and utterances follows but the relation to the signified is repressed. With
Lacan, as later with Derrida, the self is decentred, the subject is dispersed throughout
language. The language of the self is the language of the chain of signifiers. The subject
per se remains absent.
MICHEL FOUCAULT
The theme of the absent subject is especially notable in the philosophy of Michel
Foucault, who met an untimely AIDS-related death at the early age of fifty-eight. In his
magnum opus, The Order of Things (Les Mots et les choses) [11.17] also published in
1966—the theme of the absent subject pervades not only his reading of Velázquez but
also his account of the contemporary human sciences. For contemporary
(poststructuralist, or what would now be called ‘postmodern’) thought, there is no centred
origin, no unique place of focus, no present subject as there once was for the modern age.

37.9 Page 369

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 331
Foucault’s reading of origins is marked off by his reading of discursive practices. As
he demonstrates in The Order of Things, history does not begin at a certain moment and
then continue—in linear fashion—from then on. Rather, moments of dominance of
certain discursive practices prevail for a time and are then succeeded by a new set of
discursive practices. Where a discursive practice ends, a new one is about to begin.
Origin then will occur where a new discursive practice starts to take place. But where and
when do such new practices begin to take place? They clearly do not occur at a
determined moment in time such as a date or year. Certain discursive practices pertinent
to a particular epistemological space, as Foucault calls it, continue into a new
epistemological space, while others die out.
But what is a discursive practice? For Foucault, a discursive practice is a whole set of
documents produced within a broadly general period of time in which common themes or
ideas occur across that period in a wide variety of disciplines and areas of human
knowledge production. For instance, in the nineteenth century the relations between
biology, economics and philology would seem to be entirely unrelated. However
Foucault has shown that they all consolidate in terms of a relatively singular conceptual
unity, or what Foucault calls an epistemé. For the broad space of the nineteenth century,
Foucault identifies the theme in question with what he calls an ‘anthropology’, that is, the
theory of ‘man’ as defined by the ‘empirico-transcendental doublet’,7 the particular
Kantian idea that empirical (objective) considerations must always be understood in
connection with a transcendental (subjective) set of conditions that permeates the
discursive practices of the nineteenth century. The theme of subjectivity in relation to
objectivity pervades the nineteenth-century understanding of life, labour and language.
Thus the discursive practices of the nineteenth century repeat themselves in a variety of
contexts—all explicitly unrelated to each other. These differences then form an epistemé.
The epistemé of the nineteenth century succeeds the epistemé of the ‘classical age’.
This prior epistemological space is marked by another set of discursive practices. These
include the classification of species, the analysis of wealth and natural grammar. What
one would take to be entirely unrelated concerns are here brought into relation to one
another in that they each exhibit features of the ‘classical age’ epistemé, namely
‘representation’. As Foucault reads the general period of the seventeenth century and first
half of the eighteenth century, the idea of ‘representation’—the projection or postulate of
ideas before the mind—formed the frame for a distinctly ‘classical’ way of thinking. The
relation between this classical epistemé and the nineteenth-century epistemé is much less
significant than the relation between the various practices at each of these respective
time-slices.
The origin of the epistemé is not the beginning of the epistemé. A particular epistemé is
marked by a certain dominance. The place where the epistemé dominates is the place of
its origin. The place of dominance for the empirico-transcendental doublet is the place of
origin within that epistemological framework. Similarly the place of dominance of
representation in the classical age is the place of origin within that epistemological
framework. However, where is this place of origin in each case? Dispersed throughout
the epistemological space, the place of origin occurs wherever there is a discursive
practice that exhibits it. Hence the origin is in many places: reappearing in many
locations throughout the epistemological space itself. In the nineteenth century, one can

37.10 Page 370

▲back to top
French structuralism and after 332
find the empirico-transcendental doublet not only in Hegel and Hölderlin but also in
biologists such as Cuvier (whose ‘fixism’ is set off against the backdrop of human
historicity), economists such as Ricardo (for whom history is a vast compensating
mechanism) and philologists such as Schlegel (with his 1808 essay on the language and
philosophy of the Indians), and philologists such as Grimm (most notably in the 1818
Deutsche Grammatik) and Bopp (whose 1816 study of the Sanskrit conjugation system
became an object of study).
Each of these places constitutes itself as an origin, as a locus in which the concept of
‘man’ as a subject-object is brought into discourse production itself. No longer does
language, for instance, operate between words and things resulting in an operation of
representation. And in the nineteenth century, words are objects themselves, objects for
scrutiny and study by a scientific practice that hopes to judge them and their
interrelationships. Origin, then, for Foucault is not a source from which all historical
events follow. Origin is not the beginning from which history begins to unfold. Origin is
not the inception from which development ensues. Origin does not establish the moment
before which nothing else will have occurred. Rather origin springs up in many places
within a broad, general, historical time-frame. Origins occur in various discourses,
scarring them with marks of a common practice that is unaware of its own commonality.
Foucault’s enterprise disperses origin throughout a kind of methodological field (as
Barthes would have called it). And his appeal to the English reader to ignore those ‘tiny
little minds that persist in calling him a structuralist’, indicates that he is already beyond
the mere repetition of structuralist methods. Although his own archaeology of knowledge
could be characterized as largely synchronic, it also relies upon the assessment of periods
or time-slices in order to compare one time-slice with another. What Foucault rejects is
the necessity of a concept of continuity in favour of discontinuity. Structuralists were
already concerned with a discourse of the past. Nietzsche and Mallarmé are invoked as
threshold figures marking the break with the older empirico-transcendental doublet of the
modern age. They mark the beginning of a new mode of thought in which dissemination,
dispersal, metonymy and decentring of the subject are the dominant frames of knowledge
production.
Where Sartre had announced in his 1936 Transcendence of the Ego that the self or ego
could not be located in consciousness but is at best an object of consciousness, Foucault
in 1966 places that claim in a historical context. He situates the end of the age of
modernism with the end of the centred subject, the dominant self, the focal ‘I’. Like
Nietzsche’s madman who ran through the streets proclaiming the ‘death of god’, Sartre
had already proclaimed ‘the end of man’, but in a sense that would not be fully
understood for another thirty years. The linguistic turn in continental philosophy took on
a different shape from that in the analytic tradition. It did not fully take place until the
Saussurian epistemology became the principle according to which language, culture and
knowledge production would be understood. The structural analysis of kinship, totems
and myths in Lévi-Strauss, the speaking subject’s chain of signifiers in Lacan, the
semiological analysis of text and culture in Barthes were themselves placed in context by
Foucault. In this respect, Foucault is indeed already after structuralism, for he is able to
situate it as a movement in a period of time. The subsequent development of Foucault’s
own genealogy, Derrida’s deconstruction, Deleuze’s nomadologies, Kristeva’s

38 Pages 371-380

▲back to top

38.1 Page 371

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 333
semanalysis and Lyotard’s postmodernist sublimities are all themes for another story in
the history of continental thought. Suffice it to say that structuralism played a critical role
in offering an alternative to existential phenomenology and at the same time a
complement to it. What comes after structuralism (and after the age of the modern
subject) is identified by those such as Foucault who were themselves marked by both
phenomenology and structuralism and who were in a position to succeed them as well.
NOTES
1 Derrida’s deconstruction is left aside here for the simple reason that it is taken up in another
contribution to this same volume. A portion of the discussion of Foucault is taken from
H.J.Silverman, Textualities: Between Hermeneutics and Deconstruction (New York and
London: Routledge, 1993).
2 The role of metaphor and metonymy have been subsequently linked with what Freud calls
‘condensation’ and ‘displacement’ in dream interpretation. Hence metaphor as substitution
and condensation implies the replacement of a father by a big bear (for instance) in a young
boy’s dream, while metonymy as contiguity and displacement results in a dream about a
neighbour’s garden hose (for instance) instead of her passion for him. In structural political
theory, developed most notably by Louis Althusser—in an essay called ‘Freud and Lacan’
from Lenin and Philosophy [11.23] metaphor is associated with overdetermination in a
reading of a political text or context, while metonymy is represented as underdetermination.
In making this point, Althusser is building on the account of metaphor and metonymy offered
by Lacan in his famous essay ‘The Insistence of the Letter in the Unconscious’ (included in
Ecrits [11.15]) and H.J.Silverman [11.72], especially the chapter on ‘Merleau-Ponty on
Language and Communication (1946–47)’.
3 See Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Consciousness and the Acquisition of Language [11.65].
4 See H.J.Silverman [11.72], esp. chapters on ‘Sartre and the Structuralists’ and ‘Sartre versus
Structuralism’.
5 R.Barthes, ‘From Work to Text’ [11.10], 155–64.
6 R.Barthes, S/Z [11.9], 5.
7 See Silverman [11.72], esp. chapter 18 on ‘Foucault and the Anthropological Sleep’.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
de Saussure
11.1 Course in General Linguistics (1916), trans. W.Baskin, New York: McGraw-Hill,
1959.
Lévi-Strauss
11.2 The Elementary Structures of Kinship (1949), trans. from the revised edition by
J.H.Bell and J.von Sturmer, and ed. R.Needham, Boston: Beacon, 1969.
11.3 Tristes tropiques (1955), trans. J. and D.Weightman. New York: Atheneum, 1974.

38.2 Page 372

▲back to top
French structuralism and after 334
11.4 Structural Anthropology (1958), trans. C.Jacobson and B.G.Schoepf, New York:
Basic Books, 1963.
Barthes
11.5 Writing Degree Zero (1953), trans. A.Lavers and C.Smith, New York: Hill & Wang,
1968.
11.6 Michelet, Paris: Seuil, 1954.
11.7 Elements of Semiology (1964), trans. A Lavers and C.Smith, New York: Hill &
Wang, 1968.
11.8 Criticism and Truth (1966), trans. K.P.Kenneman, Minneapolis: University of
Minnesota Press, 1987.
11.9 S/Z (1970), trans. R.Miller, New York: Hill & Wang, 1974.
11.10 ‘From Work to Text’, in [11.13], 155–64.
11.11 The Pleasure of the Text (1973), trans. R.Miller, New York: Hill & Wang, 1975.
11.12 Roland Barthes (1975), trans. R.Howard, New York: Hill & Wang, 1977.
11.13 Image-Music-Text, trans. S.Heath, New York: Hill & Wang, 1977.
11.14 Recherche de Proust, Paris: Seuil, 1980.
Lacan
11.15 Ecrits (1966), trans. A.Sheridan, New York: Norton, 1977.
11.16 ‘Seminar on “The Purloined Letter”’, trans. J.Mehlman, French Freud: Structural
Studies in Psychoanalysis, Yale French Studies 48 (1972): 38–72.
Foucault
11.17 The Order of Things: An Archeology of the Human Sciences (1966), trans. anon.,
New York: Vintage, 1970.
11.18 The Archeology of Knowledge (1969), trans. A.Smith, New York: Pantheon, 1972.
11.19 ‘Nietzsche, Genealogy, History’, in Language, Counter-Memory, Practice (1971),
trans. D.Bouchard and S.Simon, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1977, pp. 139–64.
11.20 Discipline and Punish (1975), trans. A.Sheridan, New York: Vintage, 1979.
Other works and criticism
11.21 Allison, D.B. (ed.) The New Nietzsche, Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1977, 1985.
11.22 Allison, D.B. ‘Destruction/Deconstruction in the Text of Nietzsche’, Boundary 2,
8:1 (fall 1979):197–222.
11.23 Althusser, L. Lenin and Philosophy and Other Essays, trans. B.Brewster, New
York: Monthly Review Press, 1971.
11.24 Blanchot, M. ‘Discours Philosophique’ in L’Arc: Merleau-Ponty, 46 (1971): 1–4.
11.25 Blanchot, M. Death Sentence, trans. L.Davis, New York: Station Hill, 1978.
11.26 Culler, J. Structuralist Poetics, Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1975.
11.27 Culler, J. On Deconstruction: Theory and Criticism After Structuralism, Ithaca:

38.3 Page 373

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 335
Cornell University Press, 1982.
11.28 Derrida, J. Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry: An Introduction (1962), trans.
J.Leavey, Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1989.
11.29 Derrida, J. Of Grammatology (1967), trans. G.C.Spivak, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins
University Press, 1975.
11.30 Derrida, J. Speech and Phenomena, and Other Essays on Husserl’s Theory of Signs
(1967), trans. D.B.Allison, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1973.
11.31 Derrida, J. Writing and Difference (1967), trans. A.Bass, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press and London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1978.
11.32 Derrida, J. Dissemination (1972), trans. B.Johnson, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press and London: Athlone Press, 1981.
11.33 Derrida, J. Margins of Philosophy (1972), trans. A.Bass, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press and Hassocks: Harvester Press, 1982.
11.34 Derrida, J. Positions (1972), trans. A.Bass, Chicago: University of Chicago Press
and London: Athlone, 1982.
11.35 Derrida, J. ‘The Deaths of Roland Barthes’ (1981), trans. P.A.Brault and
M.B.Naas, in H.J.Silverman (ed.) Philosophy and Non-Philosophy since Merleau-
Ponty (Continental Philosophy-I) , London and New York: Routledge, 1988, pp. 259–
96.
11.36 Derrida, J. ‘The Time of a Thesis: Punctuations’, in Alan Montefiore (ed.)
Philosophy in France Today, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1982.
11.37 Derrida, J. Signéponge/Signsponge, trans. R.Rand, New York: Columbia
University Press, 1984. (Parallel French and English translation.)
11.38 Descombes, V. Modern French Philosophy, trans. L.Scott-Fox and J.M. Harding,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1980.
11.39 Donate, E. and Macksey, R. (eds) The Structuralist Controversy, Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1972.
11.40 Eco, U. A Theory of Semiotics, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1976.
11.41 Fekete, J. (ed.) The Structural Allegory: Reconstructive Encounters with the New
French Thought, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1984.
11.42 Felman, S. (ed.) Literature and Psychoanalysis: The Question of Reading—
Otherwise, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982.
11.43 Gasché, R. ‘Deconstruction as Criticism’, Glyph 7 (1979):177–216.
11.44 Gasché, R. The Tain of the Mirror: Deconstruction and the Philosophy of
Reflection, Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1986.
11.45 Hartman, G. Beyond Formalism, New Haven: Yale University Press, 1970.
11.46 Hartman, G. The Fate of Reading, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1975.
11.47 Hartman, G. Criticism in the Wilderness, New Haven: Yale University Press, 1980.
11.48 Hartman, G. Saving the Text: Philosophy/Derrida/Literature, Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1981.
11.49 Hawkes, T. Structuralism and Semiotics, Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of
California Press, 1977.
11.50 Jakobson, R. ‘Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasia’, in
Fundamentals of Language, The Hague: Mouton, 1971.
11.51 Kearney, R. Dialogues with Contemporary Continental Thinkers: The

38.4 Page 374

▲back to top
French structuralism and after 336
Phenomenological Heritage, Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1984.
11.52 Kearney, R. Modern Movements in European Philosophy, Manchester: Manchester
University Press, 1986.
11.53 Kristeva, J. Desire in Language, trans. T.Gora, A.Jardine and L.Roudiez, New
York: Columbia University Press, 1980.
11.54 Kristeva, J. Revolution in Poetic Language, trans. M.Waller with an introduction
by L.S.Roudiez, New York: Columbia University Press, 1984.
11.55 Kristeva, J. The Kristeva Reader, ed. Toril Moi, New York: Columbia University
Press, 1986.
11.56 Kristeva, J. Black Sun, New York: Columbia University Press, 1989.
11.57 Lacoue-Labarthe, P. ‘Fable (Literature and Philosophy)’, trans. H.J.Silverman,
Research in phenomenology, 15 (1985):43–60.
11.58 Lyotard, J.-F. The Postmodern Condition, trans. G.Bennington, Minneapolis:
University of Minnesota Press, 1984.
11.59 Marin, L. Utopics: The Semiological Play of Textual Spaces, trans. R. Vollrath,
Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press, 1990.
11.60 Merleau-Ponty, M. Sense and Non-Sense (1947), trans. H.L.Dreyfus and
P.A.Dreyfus, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1964.
11.61 Merleau-Ponty, M. L’Oeil et l’esprit (1960), Paris: Gallimard, 1964.
11.62 Merleau-Ponty, M. Signs (1960), trans. R.C.McCleary, Evanston: Northwestern
University Press, 1964.
11.63 Merleau-Ponty, M. The Primacy of Perception, ed. J.M.Edie, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1964.
11.64 Merleau-Ponty, M. Prose of the World (1969), trans. J.O’Neill, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1973.
11.65 Merleau-Ponty, M. Consciousness and the Acquisition of Language, trans.
H.J.Silverman, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1973.
11.66 Merleau-Ponty, M. Texts and Dialogues, ed. H.J.Silverman and J.Barry, Jr.,
Atlantic Highlands: Humanities Press, 1992.
11.67 Montefiori, A, (ed.) Philosophy in France Today, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1982.
11.68 Peirce, C.S. Philosophical Writings of Peirce, ed. J.Buchler, New York: Dover,
1940/1955.
11.69 Said, E. The World, the Text, and the Critic, London: Faber & Faber, 1984.
11.70 Silverman, H.J. ‘Phenomenology’, Social Research, 47:4 (winter 1980): 704–20.
11.71 Silverman, H.J. ‘Phenomenology: From Hermeneutics to Deconstruction’,
Research in phenomenology, 14 (1984):19–34. Reprinted, with ‘After-thoughts’, in
A.Giorgi (ed.) Phenomenology: Descriptive or Hermeneutic?, Pittsburgh: Duquesne
University Phenomenology Centre, 1987, pp. 19–34 and 85–92.
11.72 Silverman, H.J. Inscriptions: Between Phenomenology and Structuralism, London
and New York: Routledge, 1987.
11.73 Silverman, H.J. (ed.) Philosophy and Non-Philosophy since Merleau-Ponty
(Continental Philosophy—I), London and New York: Routledge 1988.
11.74 Silverman, H.J. (ed.) Derrida and Deconstruction (Continental Philosophy— II),
London and New York: Routledge, 1989.

38.5 Page 375

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 337
11.75 Silverman, H.J. (ed.) Postmodernism—Philosophy and the Arts (Continental
Philosophy—III), New York and London: Routledge, 1990.
11.76 Silverman, H.J. (ed.) Gadamer and Hermeneutics (Continental Philosophy —IV),
New York and London: Routledge, 1991.
11.77 Silverman, H.J. (ed.) Writing the Politics of Difference, Albany: SUNY Press ,
1991.
11.78 Silverman, H.J. and Aylesworth, G.E. (eds) The Textual Sublime: Deconstruction
and its Differences, Albany: SUNY Press, 1989.
11.79 Sini, C. Semiotica e filosofia: Segno e linguaggio in Peirce, Heidegger e Foucault,
Bologna: Il Mulino, 1978.
11.80 Sini, C. Images of Truth, trans. M.Verdicchio, Atlantic Highlands: Humanities
Press, 1993.
11.81 Sturrock, J. (ed.) Structuralism and Since: From Lévi-Strauss to Derrida, London:
Oxford University Press, 1979.
11.82 Wurzer, W.S. ‘Heidegger and Lacan: On the Occlusion of the Subject’, in
H.J.Silverman et al. (eds) The Horizons of Continental Philosophy, Dordrecht: Nijhoff-
Kluwer, 1988, pp. 168–89.

38.6 Page 376

▲back to top
CHAPTER 12
French feminist philosophy
De Beauvoir, Kristeva, Irigaray, Le Doeuff, Cixous
Alison Ainley
INTRODUCTION
Although women have been active philosophers for many centuries,1 the development of
a specifically feminist viewpoint in the context of philosophy has gained credence only
comparatively recently; partly as a result of more widespread debates about sexual
politics in recent years, and partly as a result of social changes in the status of women.
While recognizing that feminism did not spring fully formed and fully armed from the
last twenty years like Athena from the brow of Zeus,2 for reasons of brevity I will discuss
in this chapter only a few of the better-known contemporary contributors to feminist
philosophy, and focus particularly on those feminists whose work overlaps with or draws
upon continental philosophy.
At the outset, it should be stressed that the strands of feminist thinking in relation to
philosophy have been and continue to be diverse and do not necessarily present a unified
point of view. Feminist thinking in relation to philosophy can take place at a number of
levels and from different perspectives, and indeed this has been one of the strengths of its
position(s). In general terms, it can take the form of a critique of philosophers’ images of
women (for example, criticisms of Schopenhauer’s description of women as ‘defective,
trivial, silly and shortsighted’,3 or Kant’s account of women as more sentimental and
more ‘delicate in judgment’ than men).4 It can be historical research into past women
philosophers whose work may have been unjustly disregarded.5 It can be a political
critique of the organization of the discipline of philosophy, or a critique of the whole of
philosophy as ‘male’ or ‘masculine’.6 Or it can be positive contributions to philosophy
from a feminist perspective.7 Feminist philosophy may take all or some of these
approaches to be important. However, as a general guide, feminist philosophy will
assume the question of sexual difference to be a philosophical issue at some level and,
depending on the point of departure, produce very different ways of theorizing this
question. Having said this, not all women philosophers are necessarily feminist
philosophers (although there may be feminist implications in their work); for example
Hannah Arendt and Simone Weil are twentieth-century thinkers whose work I will not
discuss here;8 and not all feminists accept the relevance of philosophy to their work.
Despite these qualifications, a notable amount of feminist thinking has been greatly
influenced and aided by developments in recent continental philosophy, borrowing from
thinkers such as Jacques Derrida, Michel Foucault, Jean-Paul Sartre and Jacques Lacan,
and earlier figures such as Hegel, Freud and Heidegger.9 Such borrowings have furnished

38.7 Page 377

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 339
many different aspects of feminist approaches to questions of sexual difference,
subjectivity and selfhood, ethics and epistemology. Because the above thinkers have been
concerned to raise questions about the discipline of philosophy itself—for example, what
they see as philosophy’s tendency to organize its enquiries in particular ways around
notions of truth or knowledge, the use of binary oppositions or dualisms of mind/body,
spirit/matter, order/chaos and hierarchical structures, and the issues of power and
politics—they have been helpful in the search for ways of theorizing sexual difference for
feminists.
However, feminist theorists have also been highly critical of the above thinkers,
sometimes finding their work reduplicating some of the problems they had already
identified with the discipline of philosophy in general, i.e. the exclusion of women as
philosophers, the use of such symbolic values as ‘the feminine’ to indicate chaos and
plurality without considering how such values relate to women, or the tendency to speak
‘on behalf of’ women.10 In other words, feminists have been concerned about the
apparent loss or lack of political agency which seems to accompany critiques of identity
in recent postmodernist theory. Postmodernists such as Jean Baudrillard respond that
‘there is a strange, fierce complicity between the feminist movement and the order of
truth’11 and women would do better to recognize that ‘woman is but appearance. And it is
the feminine as appearance that thwarts masculine depth. Instead of rising up against such
insulting counsel, women would do well to let themselves be seduced by its truth, for
here lies the secret of their strength.’12
The critiques of identity which thinkers such as Derrida, Baudrillard and Gilles
Deleuze advance mean that women, characteristically stereotyped as lacking agency in
the past, are ironically now ‘already’ in an enviable position.13 But feminists have been
alarmed or suspicious of the passivity implied in such characterizations of the feminine.
Such disagreements have often been placed in the context of the
modernism/postmodernism debate, where feminist theorists are seen to be holding on to
notions of emancipatory Enlightenment projects and ‘essentialist’ notions of identity in
the face of, and in opposition to, unassimilatable heterogeneity and the feminine as
‘mere’ surface. However, the feminist thinkers I discuss below have, I believe, a subtle
and complex approach to political questions and are not easily placed into this either/or
debate. In addition to raising questions of sexual difference in the context of philosophy,
they also raise questions about the connection (or lack of it) between theory and
practice/lived experience—women are the ones (amongst others) over whose heads this
discussion often seems to take place, and deserve to be able to make their own
contribution.
SIMONE DE BEAUVOIR
Simone de Beauvoir is perhaps the best-known feminist philosopher of the twentieth
century. Her lifelong association with Jean-Paul Sartre seems to have been on the whole
one of mutual intellectual inspiration and companionship.14 De Beauvoir’s work on the
moral implications and the social context of existentialism, for example in her 1947 work
Pour une morale de l’ambiguité (translated as The Ethics of Ambiguity)15 was influential

38.8 Page 378

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 340
upon Sartre, an influence discernible in his shift of focus from the individual
consciousness in Being and Nothingness16 to the more collective or situated concerns of
his later work. The publication in 1949 of de Beauvoir’s best-known work, The Second
Sex,17 continued her interest in these themes, a work which provoked reviewers to
express outrage at a book which was seen to herald the breakdown of social relations.
However, given that de Gaulle had granted French women the vote only five years
earlier, the radical impact of this book should not be underestimated.
The Second Sex is a rich and complex work which draws upon literature, myth and
religion, theories of biology, accounts of social and economic development (Marxism and
psychoanalysis), but also existentialist philosophy. De Beauvoir’s aim is to address the
question ‘What is a woman?’18 It is because her painstaking analysis uncovers and
addresses the nature of the oppression and exclusion of women that it has been significant
in the history of feminist thought. But de Beauvoir is also responsible for the promotion
of questions of sexual difference on to the philosophical agenda, and for probing
questions about the social context of the existentially free individual. Sartre, Merleau-
Ponty and other existentialist thinkers agreed that sexuality was an issue that had been
largely disregarded in philosophy, but de Beauvoir’s work most insistently asks questions
of the relevance of sexual difference to philosophical notions of identity, an insistence
Michèle Le Doeuff has called ‘a characteristic genius for the inappropriate’.19 De
Beauvoir points out that sexuality is not just ‘added on’ to human beings but plays a
fundamental role in the meaning of an individual’s existence: that we are ‘embodied’.
However, she rejects the accounts of sexual difference which subscribe to an
‘essential’ notion of identity, whether this is found in the biological differentiation of the
sexes (male/female) or in the ‘eternal feminine’, an ideal ‘essence’ of feminine
qualities.20 She rejects these accounts first because she sees individuals as dynamic,
engaged in struggles towards freedom, and second because she fears that to suggest an
‘essential’ nature of woman will allow women to be imprisoned back in the problematic
identity of the oppressed. This identity is unacceptable for ideals of existential freedom,
and for feminist claims that women should have equal opportunities to engage freely in
projects in the world. Her overwhelming historical evidence points to the fact that, in
general, men possess such freedom and women do not.
De Beauvoir takes up the concerns of existentialist thinking with the freedom of the
individual, the capacity of the individual to make choices and the conflicts which arise
between individuals in the context of social relations. She claims that The Second Sex is
‘an existentialist ethics’,21 and hence agrees with Sartre about the need for individuals ‘to
engage in freely chosen projects’.22 The Sartrean individual, striving to maximize
freedom, becomes aware that he or she exists as an object in the consciousness of others,
a compromising objectification for an individual striving towards freedom. Individuals
may become locked into opposing the determinations that others, with their own projects
and their capacity to objectify an individual, present. This means that social relations are
inherently conflictual, basically relations of dominance and submission. For de Beauvoir,
it is important that freedom be maintained as an open horizon, since this is what gives
meaning to an individual’s existence. However, she immediately questions the apparent
neutrality of the individual and the equal starting point of human freedom and autonomy
that existentialist individuals are supposed to possess. She points out that, rather than

38.9 Page 379

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 341
beginning from a neutral and autonomous point, women are already in the position of the
determined and objectified, as the Other. ‘She is defined and differentiated with reference
to man and he not with reference to her; she is the incidental, the inessential as opposed
to the essential. He is the Subject, he is the Absolute—she is the Other.’23
The freedom of the existential individual is immediately compro-mised by the socially
constructed roles for men and women; rather than various neutral possibilities presented
to equal individuals, women are unable to exercise their freedom, because they inherit a
pre-given set of assumptions shaping the range of possibilities available to them.
This seems to suggest that women are doomed to be inauthentic because of their sex, if
inauthenticity is the failure to maximize one’s freedom. Women are in the position of
being the second sex. Their existence is constantly conflated with their gender in a way
that men’s is not, and they seem to be more confined to being bodies or objects.
De Beauvoir accepts that biology plays an important part in one’s identity (we live our
bodies), but argues that it cannot be used to determine one’s destiny. Women’s role in
reproduction has caused her to be exclusively identified with this role, but with adequate
social changes such as childcare and medical advances, there is no reason why
reproduction should limit a woman’s capacity for freedom. The problem with a biological
account of sexual difference, she argues, is that it may attribute essences to men and
women, splitting human beings into two types or essential identities.24 There may be
perceptible differences (in physical strength for example), but there is no intrinsic reason
why strength should be given a superior value. Such values depend on social context, and
are therefore open to revision.
De Beauvoir may wish to dissociate herself from the ‘biology is destiny’ position, but
she often seems to come close to rejecting biology altogether. If women are restrictively
defined as ‘mere’ bodies or as mothers then such restrictions must be overcome, to ensure
that women are able to realize their choices consciously. But de Beauvoir does not
always consider the extent to which she may be echoing a misogynistic distaste for the
female body in trying to overturn such determinations. ‘It has been well said that women
have “infirmity in the abdomen”, and it is true that they have within them a hostile
element—it is the species gnawing at their vitals.’25
These aspects of her argument are an attempt to escape from essentialism or biologism
and to affirm the demand for self-determination. But de Beauvoir has also argued that
women’s own experience is important and should be validated, even if such experience is
of a less independent nature than men’s. After sex, she suggests, men are free to take up
their individuality once again, whereas women feel themselves to be more ‘connected’ to
biology and more embodied, with responsibility for reproduction within themselves—an
experience of their own ‘immanence’.26 De Beauvoir’s commitment to projects of
transcendence and freedom on the one hand, and her argument that women are more
immanently ‘in’ their bodies on the other, seems to suggest that women are placed in the
impossible position of having to transcend their own bodies. It suggests that if women do
not seektranscendence they are ‘inauthentic’ or guilty of bad faith, but if they do seek
transcendence it will be a project of self-defeat, an attempt to escape from the immanent
realm which is ‘feminine’.27 This contradiction has led some feminists to interpret de
Beauvoir either as essentialist or as suggesting that sexual identity is culturally
constructed. In fact she seems to be in both positions, and the tension here can be

38.10 Page 380

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 342
interpreted as part of the contradictions in her existentialist framework.
In keeping with her initial socialist perspective on oppression, de Beauvoir does seem
to locate inequalities between the sexes in a social or cultural context. Such declarations
as ‘One is not born a woman, one becomes one’28 or ‘the body is not a thing, it is a
situation’29 would tend to support this interpretation. Her concern is to ensure that
inequalities can be diagnosed, and so combated, at this level. She refuses to accept that
any biological or essentialist reason could be given to prevent women overcoming their
‘secondary’ position. Sheer effort of will, the widespread recognition of women’s
freedom and choices (which must also be recognized by men) and the fuller availability
of choices will bring about greater equality of the sexes. This uncompromising stance
often leads her to be stern about the efforts women must make to transcend determination
for themselves, in effect to ‘stop colluding’ in becoming the other for men. Her objective
is to galvanize women into asserting their autonomy and formulating projects which will
allow them to develop their own identity. She has been criticized for apparently
suggesting that it is only if women become more like men that equality will be attained,
partly because the kinds of projects she values as important are derived from a framework
which itself could still be described as masculine—emphasizing fewer domestic ties, the
need for recognized (and paid) labour, perhaps specifically the work of individual
creative artists. However, she does suggest that even complete equality in this sphere
would not cancel out all differences between the sexes, and women would still maintain a
specific understanding of their own sexuality.30
AFTER DE BEAUVOIR
The increasingly complex account of otherness that feminist theory in France has
developed owes a clear debt to de Beauvoir’s analysis of Woman as Other. Feminists
have sought to combine the forceful political critique provided by drawing attention to
sexual difference, with an analysis of identity drawn from developments in
poststructuralist and psychoanalytic theory. Such an analysis draws attention to the self’s
vulnerability to the displacing effects of desire, as well as to the socially and culturally
constructed nature of identity, implicating systems of language and meaning in such a
critique.31
Rather than situating projects for change and emancipation within existing political and
cultural practices, many feminists have subjected such practices to a sustained critique,
asking questions about the very constitution of meaning and the concepts of power and
politics as such. Whereas de Beauvoir stressed the strong will and self-control required in
struggling for equality and autonomy, subsequent theories have raised questions about the
very nature of equality and the extent to which such self-control can be practised. In this
respect, feminist critiques of identity as rational or masculine coincide with
psychoanalytic theory regarding the displacement of consciousness by forces which call
into question the epistemological privilege of the subject. Such forces are seen as all-
pervasive and unsettling, manifest in systems of representation and language and are
understood as corresponding linguistically to the processes of desire. This theory, shaped
in part by Lacan’s work in structuralism and psychoanalysis, looks at difference as a

39 Pages 381-390

▲back to top

39.1 Page 381

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 343
relation operating not only intersubjectively between self and other, but also as sets of
relations of differences within the very systems of signification which order and create
meaning. This expanded version of difference means that apparently unified or singular
terms are seen to operate by processes of exclusion or suppression, occluding their
relation to, or reliance upon, other terms. Discrete or autonomous identities are shown to
be disrupted or undermined by ‘otherness’ and concepts such as ‘truth’ or ‘knowledge’
are put into question.
Hence the maintenance of identity as rational and autonomous and the notion of truth
as objective and independent are viewed as a defence of territory by the exclusion of that
which is other. Anything which lies outside the ‘normal’ circuits of knowledge or identity
gets classified as madness, chaos, darkness or ignorance, and the borders between the two
realms are characterized as the site of constant power struggles. Many thinkers also draw
attention to a symbolic equation between the excluded otherness and the feminine.
Whether this connection is made explicitly or implicitly, the feminine as otherness is seen
as multiple, dissembling and excluded, yet capable of disrupting limits and disturbing the
status quo.
Thus a connection is established between sexual difference (male/ female or
masculine/feminine) and polarized oppositions such as self/ other, knowledge/ignorance,
spirit/body. De Beauvoir makes it possible to draw these parallels from a feminist
viewpoint, and to politicize the hierarchical arrangement of such oppositions. Apparent
neutrality is thus opened up for analysis as an imbalance of power. But de Beauvoir
retains her existentialist/humanist framework when discussing a possible feminist
practice, whereas other feminist thinkers take up thecritique of the humanist subject as
besieged and intersected by unruly forces of desire and structures of power. Thinkers
such as Julia Kristeva, Hélène Cixous or Luce Irigaray are influenced by understandings
of otherness inherited from Hegel, Sartre and Heidegger, as well as by Derrida’s account
of western thinking as phallo-logo-centric, unduly centred on a particular account of truth
which is infused with masculine values, and Foucault’s analyses of the connections
between power and knowledge. They are also influenced by Lacanian theory concerning
sexuality, language and identity.32
Psychoanalytic theory has proved useful to feminist theory, in that it can show the
extent to which identity and sexuality are constructed by conflicting and quasi-
deterministic forces, as well as indicating the penetration of such forces to psychic
structures.33 At the same time there is an acknowledgement of the implicitly sexual
nature of structures and economies which are ostensibly neutral. Hence on one level it
provides a generalizable account of identity construction, cross-culturally and trans-
historically. Despite the danger of universalizing identity which such an analysis courts, it
does give a certain force to the analysis of sexual difference: the dominant structures
which divide sexuality into two essential types may need to be challenged and addressed
at precisely this level. However, the determinism implied by such internalized
constructions is offset somewhat by the notion of the unconscious. The unconscious can
act as a constant reminder of the overall failure of the internalization process: ‘a
resistance to identity at the very heart of psychic life’,34 as Jacqueline Rose puts it. The
splits, forcings and divisions of psychic life place pressure against the notion of coherent
identity, a widespread replay of an incomplete adjustment to the norm. This moment of

39.2 Page 382

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 344
failure, negativity, fluidity or formlessness is symbolically bound up with the feminine.
As Rose suggests, feminists may recognize certain similarities with their own projects—a
‘symbolic failure to adjust to normality’35 and the resistance this implies.
Lacan suggests that the whole social and cultural context of meaning, the Symbolic
Order, is premised on a suppression or repression of the symbolically feminine/maternal.
Symbolically otherness stands as excessive, ex-centric and ecstatic, beyond or outside the
dominant order of meanings, which allows Lacan to state ‘the woman does not exist’.36
Whether this is the pre-Oedipal mother or the quintessentially feminine, the Ideal woman
or the dark absence of negativity, it is the process by which such a realm is designated as
Other or otherness which allows the dominant meanings to retain their hold on truth,
singularity and power, although paradoxically such otherness is the hidden ground or
unacknowledged axis of such an economy.
In its very construction the Lacanian framework is emphatically unfeminist.
Nevertheless, Lacan accords women, or the feminine, a kind of power, the possibility of
disrupting signifying systems, albeit without the agency to do anything other than
constantly disrupt, efface, move on. ‘I believe in the jouissance of the woman in so far as
it is something more, on condition that you screen off that something more until I have
properly explained it.’37 The force of feminist theory influenced by Lacan may be
understood as a kind of ‘return of the repressed’.38 The unnameable and unrepresentable
feminine jouissance Lacan has proscribed is taken up as the power of disruption and
destabilization, and works to unsettle fixation, particularly in the realm of sexual
stereotypes.
JULIA KRISTEVA
The interdisciplinary nature of Julia Kristeva’s work, drawing from linguistic theory,
Marxism, philosophy and psychoanalysis, makes her a versatile and wide-ranging
thinker. She sees herself as a cultural critic and analyst rather than particularly as a
feminist thinker, although many feminists see potentials in her work for developing
critiques of western thinking and for understanding problems of identity, and she
certainly deals with questions about ‘the feminine’, cultural representations of figures
such as ‘the mother’, or topics such as Chinese women. Coming to Paris from Bulgaria in
the mid-1960s, she brought with her a mixture of left-wing politics and an approach to
literary criticism influenced by Russian formalism: in brief, a materialist approach to
signification and social structures, tempered by her commitment to aesthetic and cultural
practices and her desire to change oppressive conditions.39 The common themes running
through her work are an interest in language, politics and sexual identity, themes initially
broached in her doctoral thesis Revolution in Poetic Language (1974),40 where she
attempts to develop a theory of identity formation in the context of Lacanian
psychoanalysis and structuralism. Her main concern in this book is to understand the
structuring effects of language without relinquishing the creative, poetic and marginal
aspects. She then links her theory to a political account of marginalized but revolutionary
forces, exemplified in the figure of the avant-garde poet.
Through a complex intersection of theoretical perspectives, Kristeva develops her

39.3 Page 383

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 345
account of the material/linguistic forces which constantly disrupt identity, but are still
located within the corporeal body. She suggests that identity is forged in a precarious and
dynamic relation between various positionalities which can be taken up according to the
social and cultural meanings in the Symbolic, and a force of negativity which is
persistently engaged in undermining such positions. Her analysis has proved intriguing
for many feminist theorists for a number ofreasons. First, she emphasizes the critique of
identity as a fixed or essential notion. Second, she identifies the constructed nature of
meaning and sexuality, and the determining or restrictive effect which existing
definitions, stereotypes and cultural roles can have in shaping identity. Third, she
identifies a transgressive force which, if activated, can have a disruptive or
revolutionizing effect on the social/cultural context in question. Her account of ‘the
subject-in-process’41 analyses the cost involved in subject formation, but it also hints at
ways of subverting the dominant forms of understanding sexual difference. For feminist
theorists, she seems to negotiate essentialism on the one hand by suggesting that subject
‘positions’ are being created and destroyed in the ongoing dialectic of signification, and
yet she refuses to diffuse subjectivity into merely an effect of language.
For Kristeva, Lacan’s ‘return to Freud’ (his reworking of Freud)42 is important in that
it shifts the focus from biology to a linguistic shaping of sexuality and identity. This shift,
she thinks, will allow for a different way of understanding identity. If sexual difference is
implicated in the conceptual framework itself, Kristeva’s characterization of language as
a shifting process of the production and decay of meaning allows her a potential for
mobility on the question of identity formation. The Freudian focus on a visible/biological
structure seems very limiting in the light of the fluid freeing of sexual difference into the
Symbolic arena (many potential positionalities or social roles to be fulfilled). But in some
ways all that has happened is a shifting of the terms of formation. Lacan’s point that a
framework of cultural reference is the only place from which any account of sexual
difference can be produced, is meant to negate any simplistic biological starting point.
Now that difference is seen as being produced by systems of meaning, there is no direct
access to a pure biological understanding of physical bodies, since it would be impossible
to recognize such bodies outside of the system of meaning. This is the basis of the
development of the imaginary, the realm which severs full cognisance of the body and
renders its relation metaphorical or ‘morphological’. If identity is seen as structuration
rather than as psycho-physical development through time, the issue shifts from questions
of anatomical difference (at what point in development do differences appear?) to
questions as to what such differences mean within the symbolic, and the extent to which
they are open to subversion. But because Lacan denies any access to an ‘other’ realm, for
him there can only be the conceptions of sexual difference which already exist, but which
are inherently ‘masculine’ (because created in the Symbolic).43
For Lacan, the primary relation with the mother’s body, which he had characterized as
fluid and plural, the realm of unmediated jouissance, was what had to be overcome so
that identity could be established. Successfully relinquishing this realm of non-separation
allows for successful entry into the Symbolic and identification with the masculine or
patriarchal values of social/cultural meaning. The price to be paid for attaining linguistic
competence and a place in the Symbolic is the loss of the blissful, unselfconscious
pleasure before the entry into language. However, Kristeva argues that the overcoming of

39.4 Page 384

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 346
this ‘other’ realm can never be wholly successful, and it will continue to break through or
irrupt into the Symbolic Order, where its effects will be felt bodily as pleasurable
disturbances. Symbolically, such disruptions will connote the pre-Oedipal and the
feminine.
The focus of Kristeva’s work on femininity is governed by this understanding. If the
structuration of identity is at the level of language, but this process is constantly invaded
by the ‘language’ of the other realm, then its stability is called into question. Perhaps by
insisting upon the disruptive rather than the constitutive elements of language, a
sufficiently transgressive notion of the subject can be produced to allow it to reformulate
itself, ‘more or less’ masculine or feminine?
Kristeva is critical of theorists who focus on language as a homogeneous, logical
system with internal coherence. It would seem she has in mind the prioritizing of
communication, consensus and competence she finds in the work of Saussure and
Chomsky and in Lacan’s symbolic. In contrast, Kristeva focuses on the ‘edges’ of
language, the points at which language appears to break down: the ‘pathologies’ of
madness and schizophrenia, the hermetic and difficult poetries of the avant-garde, and the
‘hysteria’ of women. She theorizes these aspects in a different way from other linguists,
who had seen these forms of language as continuous with conventional signification, but
less successful. If the formal practice of language uses is emphasized, these deviant
practices are judged according to their conformity or deliberate flouting of the rules.
Structuralist linguists minimized reference to ‘subjective’ elements. Kristeva seeks to
identify a connection, but, as she makes clear, it is a productive and dynamic relation she
is interested in, not a relation of stasis or a revival of a humanist subject.
Focusing on rhythm, repetition, elision and displacement reinforces a notion of the
subject-in-process, rather than an ideal enunciator, since it concerns the apparent failures
rather than the successes of the struggle to maintain a coherent identity. It is also
indicating the points at which the ‘other’ realm is discernible through its effects.
Kristeva’s notions of ‘the semiotic’ and the ‘chora’ present an attempt to theorize this
untheorizable, pre-discursive realm which is described in terms of ‘space’ or a locus to
avoid pinning it to a stage of development. She writes of the semiotic as a kind of
primordial writing or signifying of the body, although this is not strictly an accurate
description, since it is concerned with ‘the body of a subject who is not yet constituted as
such’.44 Still, this pre-signifying signification is a textuality of the body which is more
experiential than meaningful. ‘We understand the term semiotic in its Greek sense;
=distinctive mark, trace, index, precursory sign, proof engraved or written
sign, imprint, trace, figuration.’45 It is an ordering of energies which initiates the
inscription and conditions for representation. Hypothesized as both the material rhythms
and forces underlying the possibility of textuality, and the imprinting of psychical
energies to connect sensation to movement, it acts as a preparation for entry into
language. This space is as yet undifferentiated but it cannot be described as
homogeneous, shot through with ‘psychical marks’ and in a state of motility. Kristeva
names it as ‘the chora…an essentially mobile and extremely provisional articulation
constituted by movements and their ephemeral stases’.46
That this notion is positioned ‘prior’ to signification should not be taken to indicate a
necessary chronology in time, since this realm is symbolically ‘other’ to temporal order

39.5 Page 385

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 347
as well as topographical space. Therefore although it is given an apparently archaic and
originary status, it does not constitute a reified origin divided from the subject in the
symbolic. This would replicate a duality which Kristeva is concerned to resist; the terms
are not equal and the notion of origin is reconstructed only in retrospect from positions
already in language. In fact, Kristeva is explicitly critical of Lacan for making the
repression of the mother the condition of subjectivity. As she draws attention to the
symbolic connection of the chora with feminine or maternal notions, she is taking up pre-
figured connections which identify the notion of an origin with a primordial mother:
‘This place which has no thesis and no position, the process by which significance is
constituted. Plato himself leads us to such a process when he call this receptacle or chora
nourishing or maternal.’47 However, the semiotic is in one important sense opposed to
the Symbolic: it is a site of resistance and disruption against which the organization of the
Symbolic is to be compared. Kristeva takes up the equation of otherness with the
feminine or maternal, in order to demonstrate the sacrificial process involved in identity
construction, and to suggest how the inherent violence might be made less painful or
channelled in more creative ways.
Despite the alignment of otherness and the feminine, for Kristeva it does not constitute
an alternative identity for women, nor does it allow a specifically female or feminine
language. However, there are ways of maximizing its disruptive effects in order to
combat the restrictive impact of the Symbolic. The figures of the avant-garde poet and
the political dissident are focal points in Kristeva’s earlier work, while later on she
considers women as potential disruptive figures.
What the father doesn’t say about the unconscious, what sign and time repress
in their impulses, appears as their truth (if there is no absolute, what is truth, if
not the unspoken of the spoken?) and this truth can be imagined only as a
woman. A curious truth: outside time, with neither past nor future, neither true
nor false; buried underground, it neither postulates nor judges. It refuses,
displaces, breaks the symbolic order before it can re-establish itself.48
Kristeva suggests three ways in which this curious truth may be understood: ‘Jouissance,
pregnancy, and marginal speech: the means by which this “truth”, cloaked and hidden by
the symbolic order and its companion, time, functions through women’.49 Here Kristeva
is linking ‘a vigilance, call it ethical’,50 with the figuration of the feminine and the
maternal as ‘other’. It is a critical and disruptive kind of ethicality, linked to a capacity to
resist the fixation of subjectivity and to remain critical, but also seeking a means to
express such ‘otherness’.
To refuse all roles, in order, on the contrary, to summon this timeless ‘truth’—
formless, neither true nor false, echo of our jouissance, of our madness, of our
pregnancies—into the order of speech and social symbolism. But how? By
listening; by recognising the unspoken in speech; by calling attention at all
times to whatever remains unsatisfied, repressed, new, eccentric,
incomprehensible, disturbing the status quo.51

39.6 Page 386

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 348
Here she seems to be suggesting that the location of ethicality is no longer adequately
situated in the reformulation and attempted perfection of codes of behaviour, rules and
laws. Unless the disruptive traces of the subject, constantly being rewritten in its
processes, can also be accounted for, these projects are destined to keep retreading the
same ground. The constant transgression and renewal of positioning in relation to the
process of signification leads to the possibility of new practices, forged at the very
boundaries of thinking.
Kristeva finds in maternity the metaphoric expression of the above boundary location
of ethicality, which is given the force of subversion but still embodied. Maternity
connotes a possible irruption and interruption of the Symbolic, centrally placed, yet
disruptive, a disturbance between stasis and dynamism, cyclical/monumental time and
discursive/grammatical time. In her essay ‘Stabat Mater’,52 the poetic, left-hand
(sinister?) ‘other’ side of the text irrupts into the historical and chronological mapping of
motherhood. Textually this corresponds to a writing of the metaphoric mother, positioned
as a body in signification and yet already split, separated, pleasuring; ‘the heterogeneity
not subsumed under any law’. A space is opened for different subjective possibilities, yet
retaining the specificity of women. This ‘heretical ethics’ (her-ethics) is based not upon
avoiding the law, but upon enriching it. ‘Now, if a contemporary ethics is no longer seen
as being the same as morality; if ethics amounts to not avoiding the embarrassing and
inevitable problematics of the law but giving it flesh, language, jouissance—in that case
its reformulation demands the contribution of women.’53 A similar position is taken in
Kristeva’s analysis of the role of the Virgin Mary. In ‘Stabat Mater’ she draws heavily
upon Marina Warner’s book Alone of All Her Sex; the Myth and Cult of the Virgin
Mary54 to indicate how the Virgin Mary becomes a symbolic axis of the conjunction
between hebraic and hellenic; and as a conjunction between virginity and maternity. As a
moment of undecidability, the figure presents a potential site of ambivalence, for the two
traditions as well as for understandings of women. There is a potential disruption of the
Greek logos and Jewish monotheism in the presence of a divine feminine figure, central
to religion but neither one thing nor another. But this dangerous ambivalence is
conscripted for control and synthesis, in that the virginal aspect becomes a pure and holy
asceticism, and maternity becomes the continuity of the community via reproduction. The
freezing of undecidability sets up an ideal, fusing with the existing ideal of virginity in
courtly love and the ideal of devoted maternal love. The impossible totality of the virgin
mother is not only disseminated within patriarchal cultures but becomes the prototype for
western love relations. In Kristeva’s terms, the dangerous moment of rupture is contained
by erasing jouissance, in virginity, and channelling it, in maternal reproduction, to sustain
the deathless ideal of the masculine, whether this is the law, the community or the
subject.
This maternal figure, the epitome of romantic sentimentality and utterly serene icon,
ideal and untroubled, functions as a sublimating vessel for various cultures. And yet
Kristeva indicates that its ‘cleverly balanced architecture today appears to be crumbling’,
the ‘psychotic sore of modernity’ is ‘the incapacity of contemporary codes to tame the
maternal’.55 Thus it reveals that which it cannot contain even in trying to cover over this
slippage.
Despite Kristeva’s characterization of the subject as ‘an open system’, I don’t think she

39.7 Page 387

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 349
is committed to the denial of sexual difference or the ‘erasure’ of the subject. However,
she does argue that the positionality which may lead to a metaphysical hypostatization of
identity is to be found in feminist discourse too. This is perhaps what leads her to be
unnecessarily harsh on the variety of feminist positions which do not coincide with her
own; a fear of the reintroduction of the essentialist subject which has led women to
‘sacrifice or violence’. If this is a challenge to feminist theory, is it the kind of critique
which feminist theory needs? Many feminist writers on Kristeva find her attacks on
feminism uncomfortable, especially when they seem to emanate from an apparently
powerful position as the ‘queen of theory’. But on occasion her work is compatible with
feminist approaches to the body, offering a potential rethinking of corporeality in keeping
with a radical perspective on difference. As Rosi Braidotti puts it:
the body thus defined cannot be reduced to the biological, nor can it be confined
to social conditioning. In a new form of ‘corporeal materialism’, the body is
seen as an inter-face, a threshold, a field of intersection of material and
symbolic forces; it is a surface where multiple codes of power and knowledge
are inscribed; it is a construction that transforms and capitalises on energies of a
heteronomous and discontinuous nature. The body is not an essence, and
therefore not an anatomical destiny.56
LUCE IRIGARAY
Like Kristeva, Irigaray has a background in linguistics, psychoanalysis, philosophy and
feminist theory, and is currently practising therapy or analysis. However, she takes a set
of premises very different from Kristeva’s from these areas, and produces markedly
different conclusions.
Born in 1930 in Belgium, Luce Irigaray began her work with research into
psycholinguistics, specifically the language of patients diagnosed schizophrenic or
suffering from senile dementia (see some of the essays in Speaking/Language is Never
Neutral/Neuter first published in 1986).57 Her conclusions concerning the loss or lack of
identity of such patients who seem ‘overwhelmed’ by language led her to draw
comparisons with the position of women in relation to language. In the process of the
analytic session, understood as a dialogue between two speakers, Irigaray noted a number
of factors which continue to be important throughout her work. First, the emergence of
identity formulated as possible positions in such locutionary exchanges. Second, the
differences (specifically sexual difference) dramatized or enacted in speech. Third, the
points at which grammatical formulations of language begin to break down, and the
experience of speakers caught in this position. Her focus is the vulnerability of
subjectivity and the attempts to secure a place for it against the destructive
technologization of communication in the present age. However, her concern is not the
resurrection of a humanist subject but a critique of the language and thinking which
presents itself as neutral or neuter.
Irigaray combines this research with her understanding of Lacanian psychoanalysis and
structuralism concerning the construction of identity, to throw light on what she sees as a

39.8 Page 388

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 350
sacrificial culture and the position of women in such a culture. One of her concerns,
which has been extensively misinterpreted, is her attempt to develop an alternative
strategy to allow ‘feminine identity’ to take (a) place. Although she has often been
understood to be positing a language of the female body, the level of her intervention is
markedly that of cultural and social formations. She does suggest that the dominant form
of discourse has been ‘isomorphic’ with masculine sexuality, and it is this relation which
has been difficult to understand or translate. It is not simply a representational model but
a relation itself to be understood as metaphoric or metonymic. If this relation has
dominated in the past, perhaps there could be a form of discourse which has
morphological suggestions of images of the female body? It is this ‘hypothetical’ style
she deploys in the essay This Sex Which is Not One’ (first published in 1977),58 and
which has led to the assumption that she is ‘writing the body’. Rather, it appears that this
stylistic deployment is a strategic intervention in what she feels has been a monologic or
‘phallo-logo-centric’ approach to questions of sexuality and language. In her later work it
appears that she is concerned more with existing social formations and linguistic
practices than with developing a completely alternative female language, and her recent
empirical studies into language use and sexual difference would seem, with hindsight, to
support this analysis of her early writings. However, this does not lessen her attempts to
restore, or rather to create, a less damaged and damaging understanding of sexual
difference.
At the beginning of her book The Ethics of Sexual Difference, (first published in
1984),59 she states her belief that sexual difference is the burning issue of our age, the
issue of difference which potentially could be ‘our salvation on an intellectual level…the
production of a new age of thought, art, poetry and language; the creation of a new
poetics’. However, she suggests that the development of this event is hampered and
constrained by the systematic repetition of sameness being compulsively reiterated in the
spheres of philosophy, politics, religion and science. This repetition, or reworking of the
same ground, is evident in many contexts, which Irigaray lists as ‘the consumer society,
the circular nature of discourse, the more or less cancerous diseases of our age, the
unreliable nature of words, the end of philosophy, religious despair or the regressive
return to religion, scientistic imperialism or a technique that does not take the human
subject into account, and so on’.60 According to Irigaray, this repetition works to conceal
or efface a possible way of articulating otherness. This articulation, she thinks, can best
take place in the context of questions of sexual difference. Apart from the explicit
feminist perspective, her reasons for privileging sexual difference lie in her specific
appropriation of psychoanalytic discourse, particularly the work of Lacan. Despite her
use of a psychoanalytic framework, her work is also a strategic departure from it, or an
attempt to subvert it from within. She suggests that psychoanalysis has enabled a
theoretical treatment of sexuality and identity to take place via the (generalizable)
analysis of forms of patriarchal identity as constructions. Her focus on the constructed
nature of such notions as identity, philosophical discourse and its concepts has a number
of implications. She is able to diagnose a bias running through the history of such notions
and to point to the permeation of such forces to psychic levels. She is also able to conduct
a sustained critique of the damaging nature of such constructions as exclusion or
suppression. She thus sees her work as ‘jamming the machinery’61 of western theory, a

39.9 Page 389

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 351
process of analysing and uncovering the fantasies, projections and repressions which are
taken to be normal or necessary. The nature of this work is extensive and radical.
For the work of sexual difference to take place, a revolution in thought and
ethics is needed. We must re-interpret the whole relationship between the
subject and discourse, the subject and the world, the subject and the cosmic, the
microcosmic and the macrocosmic…. In order to think and live through this
difference, we must reconsider the whole question of space and time.62
If such apparently foundational notions are shown to be constructions, then there is a
possibility that they may be modified or changed in the future. For Irigaray, the
usefulness of psychoanalytic theory rests in some part on its capacity to analyse the
symbolism of masculine and feminine as a pair of terms which pervade wide and various
sets of relations, such that the symbolization becomes tangled up in the very process of
conceptualization. The common oppositions of the Pythagorean table of opposites
become aligned with a symbolic interpretation of anatomical difference, and,
significantly, the unified, non-contradictory and homogenous terms come to dominate.
Across a range of systems and at different levels, exclusion and censorship operate to
prioritize the masculine term at the expense of the feminine, such that the very operation
itself is obscured from view. The status quo is maintained at the price of a peculiar
violence—the exclusion of the feminine, or its characterization as object, matter, inferior
term. As regards subjectivity, masculine/feminine forces or values may become aligned
with male and female sexes, but, she suggests, the very notion of subjectivity itself has
‘already been appropriated to the masculine’, despite the way that such a notion is
presented as neutral. It is because such structures are built upon repression and denial that
inevitably the tension of maintaining such a territory begins to show and the cracks,
failures and breakdowns indicate the spaces through which the potentiality of the
feminine may begin to be built. It is through her under-standing and seizure of a certain
lack of synchronization, therefore, that Irigaray situates her project.
Irigaray’s engagement with philosophy has been extensive. If she sees philosophical
discourse as ‘the master discourse…the discourse on discourses’63—adding, ‘the
philosophical order is indeed the one that has to be questioned, and disturbed, inasmuch
as it covers over sexual difference64—she has also identified philosophy’s resources as
crucial in reinterpreting questions of sexual difference. She sees her focus as
philosophical, but her work is a dramatic testimony to the ambivalence she feels as a
woman in philosophy, and as such displays an equivocation between her critique of
philosophy and her more positive reconstructions of female subjectivity.
In the context of philosophy, she announces her desire to ‘have a fling with the
philosophers’,65 paradoxically to indicate the seriousness of her engagement with
philosophical questions. This means ‘going back through the male imaginary’, and gives
rise to ‘the necessity of “reopening” the figures of philosophical discourse—idea,
substance, subject, transcendental subjectivity, absolute knowledge—in order to pry out
of them what they have borrowed that is feminine, from the feminine, to make them
“render up” and give back what they owe the feminine.’66
She means to be as intimate and familiar with philosophical history as possible, but

39.10 Page 390

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 352
also to challenge it from the position of a woman; that is, one who is symbolically
positioned outside or other to philosophy, one who can only ‘flirt’ with ideas, or
conversely, deflate them by being too playful, refusing to take them seriously. This
positioning allows Irigaray to follow through some of the main canonical texts of western
philosophy; in Speculum of the Other Woman (first published in 1974), she takes on
Plato, Aristotle, Meister Eckhart, Descartes, Hegel, Spinoza, Plotinus, Kant, Marx, Freud,
and in The Ethics of Sexual Difference she adds Hegel, Merleau-Ponty and Levinas,
while other texts deal with Nietzsche and Heidegger, for example,67 reconstructing their
logic carefully in order to show how it interrupts itself. What she calls ‘the blind spot in
an old dream of symmetry’,68 the hidden assumption so necessary to the symmetry and
so necessarily hidden, will entail analysing philosophy’s unconscious.
For Irigaray, what is repressed is ‘the feminine’, that which allows philosophy to get
off the ground, but must remain essentially unspoken, as the ground. The negativity of
symbolically occupying this groundless ground constantly places women in an
impossible position. As primal matter or ‘mother-matter’, the feminine or maternal acts
an archaic past, the ‘nature’ placed in opposition to culture. ‘The mother-woman remains
the place separated from its “own place”, a place deprived of a place of its own. She is, or
ceaselessly becomes, the place of the other who cannot separate himself from it.’69 One
of Irigaray’s concerns is to explore the suppressed or superseded nature of this element or
‘the elemental’ space, partly to remind philosophy of its debt to this unexplored ‘pre-
rational’ world-view and partly to try to develop a vocabulary which could articulate this
otherness. Irigaray writes: ‘I wanted to go back to this natural material which makes up
our bodies, in which our lives and our environment are grounded; the flesh of our
passions.’70 Her ‘elemental’ texts deal with air, earth, water and fire, her ‘re-invention’ of
the material origins of philosophical thinking and its elision with maternal or feminine
symbolism (for example in Marine Lover of Friedrich Nietzsche (first published in 1980)
she shows a certain aversion in Nietzsche’s writing to water, which is symbolically
feminine). In trying to imagine this ‘other region’ she employs a strategic syntactical
style, an interplay of weaving in the writing of the body as she had expressed it—
multiplicity and plurality, with frequent changes of tense, and questions disurpting her
work and interrupting whichever position she was speaking from. Speaking (as) woman
is a tactical means of restoring specificity to a non-specific discourse, and also
corresponds to her aim to put the philosophical subject back into a material context—the
body and the materiality of its surroundings.
Irigaray’s strategy in reading these canonical texts is to imitate their movements, a
mimicry which is, in its very exaggerated miming, in excess of the limits and definitions
which had been set.
There is in an initial phase, perhaps only one ‘path’, the one historically
assigned to the feminine: that of mimicry. One must assume the feminine role
deliberately. Which means already to convert a form of subordination into an
affirmation and thus to begin to thwart it…. To play with mimesis is thus, for a
woman, to try to recover the place of her exploitation by discourse, without
allowing herself to be simply reduced to it.71

40 Pages 391-400

▲back to top

40.1 Page 391

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 353
Her strategy of mimicry is directly related to the notion of ‘mirroring’ which runs
throughout her texts. This notion is part of a complex set of interwoven strands which
explore the preoccupation of western thinking with accurate ‘reflection’, illumination,
and clarity. Not only do metaphors of the ‘ocular’ and ‘specular’ seem to dominate, but,
she suggests, they are essential for the establishing of the self-reflexive subject, and the
apparent autonomy of the philosopher. The narcissism of the subject that results is, for
Irigaray, part of the logic of ‘the same’. However, she also suggests that the speculations
which privilege this version of the epistemological subject are based upon a (hidden)
reliance upon women or the feminine to act as a mirror for such a subject, at the expense
of their own identity. Women are either frozeninto static representations dictated by the
logic of the same, or they are positioned wholly outside the system as a conceptual ‘black
hole’; the elsewhere and otherwise without a status of its own. In Speculum Irigaray
suggests equivalencies with Freud’s dark continent or Plato’s cave, the exploration of
which is deemed essential and yet produces, according to Irigaray, theory still caught
within its own expectations, more of the same. In order to broach the question of sexual
difference, Irigaray produces a critique of the ‘flat mirror’ of ‘the processes of specula
(riza)tion that subtend our social and cultural organisations’72 and suggests, through such
a critique, another mode of approach which will allow for feminine subjectivity: ‘a
curved mirror, but also one that is folded back on itself, with its impossible appropriation
“on the inside” of the mind, of thought, of subjectivity. Whence the intervention of the
speculum and the concave mirror, which disturb the staging of representation.’73 If
mimesis is no longer direct and accurate ‘reflection’, then the distorting mirror in which
women have been confined can throw back ‘disturbed’ and disturbing reflections, thereby
beginning the process of allowing the feminine to take (a) place. This is a mimicry which
not only twists and parodies, but effects a change in the process.
Irigaray proposes a particular conception of psychic health to counteract the crisis and
fragmentation of the present age, which would involve the adequate conceptualization of
both masculine and feminine elements in a non-hierarchical exchange and process.
However, we are far from this stage. The feminine is still inadequately conceptualized. It
is only by intervening on the destructive circuit that another age of difference might be
broached, an intervention which Irigaray describes as ethical. The revaluation of
‘passion’ and ‘wonder’ (admiration)74 could lead to relations which, while retaining the
radical otherness of the other, allow for an ethical encounter to take place.
Irigaray’s more explicitly political proposals include interventions in the legal, civil
and representional status of women75 and her own work with various women’s groups in
Italy for example. But she has also explored more ‘mystical’ approaches; lyrical poetic
expressions of love between women, between mothers and daughters and lovers, and her
work on ‘the divine’, which is an attempt to explore the forms of sacred meaning which
have also acted to exclude women, and to revalue divisions between sacred/profane,
carnal/celestial, matter/spirit.76
Irigaray’s equivocations may strike her critics as contradictory or difficult to place.
How are we to understand what seem to be utopic projections of ‘amatory exchanges’
and a new fertile dialogue of sexual difference in the light of her sustained critique of
subjectivity and philosophy, the ‘sacrificial culture’? Is she writing for all women? From
where? However, at present she is perceived to be a thinker who manages to negotiate the

40.2 Page 392

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 354
minefields and sustain the tensions with acuity, a position which itself invites further
responses and engagements with her writings.77
MICHÈLE LE DOEUFF
Michèle Le Doeuff was born in 1948, taught philosophy at the Ecole Normale Supérieure
and is currently doing research at the CRNS. Her focus on the apparently innocuous
illustrative devices used in philosophy (and she shows that ‘the feminine’ is a constantly
recurring item) uncovers a tension at the heart of such texts which has repercussions for
women’s relation to philosophy. Although metaphors and images may appear to be
harmless, especially when they are explicitly given a secondary status, one of Le
Doeuff’s concerns is to expose such an assumption. Her reading of the history of
philosophy shows how philosophy draws upon a very specific set of such devices which
function in quite particular ways in the texts, even as ‘philosophical discourse…labels
itself as philosophical by means of a deviation from the mythic, the poetic and all that is
image making’.78 For Le Doeuff, these images point to tensions or stress lines in the
organization of the philosophical enterprise, the ‘sensitive nerve endings’ which say more
about philosophical discourse than it would prefer to speak. For not only do they provide
continuity markers in the history of philosophy, but they also indicate the ‘obsessions,
neuroses and dangers’, or the more uncontrollable elements intrinsically bound up in the
progress of reason. In her book The Philosophical Imaginary (first published in 1986) she
analyses such images and figures in Kant, Rousseau, Plato, Moore, Bacon and Descartes.
She argues that philosophy sets up the feminine as an internal enemy: ‘a hostile principle,
all the more hostile because there is no question of dispensing with it…the feminine, a
support and signifier of something that, having been engendered by philosophy whilst
being rejected by it, operates within as an indispensable deadweight’.79
Despite the psychoanalytic tones of this analysis, Le Doeuff rejects any notion of the
unconscious at work. For her, the metaphors of ‘the feminine’ are expressed as part of the
philosophical imaginary (which at times seems to resemble a bestiary), but she uses this
term more in the sense of ‘a collection of images’ than in the sense which Lacan, or
Irigaray, employ it. She argues that greater awareness of this process will have certain
implications for changes in the practice of philosophy, but she rejects overarching
frameworks such as Marxism or psychoanalysis, partly because of her concern that
women in philosophy will exchange one set of orthodoxies for another, sitting at the feet
of ‘new masters’ (Lacan and Derrick, amongst others), a process which sets up new
forms of political correctness.
This is why she is careful to examine the specific relation of student and teacher in her
more recent book Hipparchia’s Choice (first published in 1989).80 She conducts an
analysis of the way an apprenticeship is served in philosophy, considering what
techniques of assessment, training and control are used. Seeing this relation in terms of
influence and power or lack of it, she locates it within a wider set of relations, the relation
of the academic institution to the particular social setting and historical inheritance, with
connections between knowledge and power being made in a manner reminiscent of
Foucault. Her ‘case study’ for this analysis is the relationship between Sartre and Simone

40.3 Page 393

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 355
de Beauvoir, a complex site of tensions between male/female, teacher/ disciple (de
Beauvoir’s own description), philosophy/feminism.
Rather than concentrate upon the exclusion of women from philosophy, Le Doeuff
emphasizes their incorporation into the very centre. Far from them appearing as victims
of rigid expulsion, she points out, women have been philosophers all along, learning,
corresponding, discussing and writing. However, the terms of their admission into
philosophy have been, she suggests, quite strictly controlled, presenting a more complex
and subtle picture of philosophy’s process of self-legitimation.
Despite the cheerful optimism which Le Doeuff seems to display about the possibility
of ‘retraining’ philosophy to be more open and tolerant, she doesn’t underestimate the
difficulties which such a demand presents. Rather, I would see her strategy as ‘entrism’,
borrowing scholarly techniques in order to gain a legitimate foothold in philosophy, and
from there developing the feminist challenges and provoking the changes which she
believes the discipline must address. She wishes to redeem, restore and rehabilitate
philosophy, arguing for a pluralistic ‘contest of faculties’, or ‘constrained disagreement’
in academia, which could allow for uncertainty and resisting closure, and prevent
domination of any one viewpoint at the expense of other, more hesitant viewpoints. This
approach, which Rosi Braidotti calls ‘a reasoned critique of reason’,81 comparing it with
the work of Lorraine Code or Genevieve Lloyd,82 means that her work does not indict the
whole of western philosophy for ‘masculinism’. Her work is not really compatible with
that of, for example, Irigaray’s, because Le Doeuff does not subscribe to the discourse of
radicality or revolution. Her ‘commonsense’ approach contrasts with the ‘poetic-hysteric’
style of other French feminists, but some critics find her occasionally too cautious.
HÉLÈNE CIXOUS
Hélène Cixous was born in Algeria in 1937, and has been professor of English literature
at the University of Paris VIII at Vincennes, located in Saint-Denis, since 1968. It is with
Cixous that the notion of écriture féminine (feminine, or female, writing) is most readily
associated. Through her explorations of the relationship between sexuality and writing,
mostly in her texts of the 1970s (which deliberately defy classification as poetry or
theory), she tries to encourage the scripting of Lacan’s forbidden feminine jouissance.
While she seems to pay even less heed to the theoretical demands of philosophical rigour
and clarity than Kristeva and Irigaray, she elaborates on the construction and uncovering
of feminine sexual pleasure as it might be given shape in a subversive practice of writing,
but the implicit background is Derrida’s analysis of différance and the poststructuralist
problematizing of logos, power and knowledge. Cixous takes up the notion of the
feminine as symbolically other, plural and multivocal, positioned as such by the classical
oppositions which classify and divide values. Her texts may be said to work at the knots
which tie such an economy in place, loosening the rigidity of dualisms to free the
expression of heterogeneity. Through the exploration of this more open and fluid form of
difference, from the strategic standpoint of a woman ‘lost’ in her corporeal sexuality, her
dreams of her marginalized, inessential nature, Cixous believes that the fixity of our
present conceptual schema will be shaken. Her work initiates and celebrates the

40.4 Page 394

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 356
experiential dimensions of feminine desire. She raids classical literature to uncover ‘lost
voices’ through reinvesting in powerful figures—mothers, mythical heroines, goddesses
and the ecstatic and excessive aspects of a sexual ‘dark continent’. It is also an attempt to
enrich a particular vocabulary coextensive with ‘the feminine’; poetic and allusive,
metaphorical and ‘incandescent’. Rather than merely replicating the static, fragmented or
silenced position she has diagnosed women as occupying, her texts attempt to transgress
these positions by ‘overloading’ them, and lyrically exploding them. The notions of
‘spending’ and ‘the gift’ are significant in her piece ‘Sorties’:83 showing up an economy
of exchange to be one of exploitation by miming its carefully monitored limits to the
point of parody is for Cixous a political and transgressive activity.
There are many problematic aspects of Cixous’ work—she may seem to lapse into the
versions of women’s bodies she was critical of, or into a fascination with her own
fabulous textual labyrinths at the expense of more explicit political engagement. She does
extricate herself from any collective feminism which she believes to be a quest for
recognition and legitimation in an inadequately interrogated patriarchal economy and so a
‘reactionary ideology’. It is also unclear whether Cixous is celebrating and uncovering
the quintessential ‘feminine’ in her work, or if she is demonstrating a strategy which all
women are invited to explore for themselves. The use of ‘we’ for women in her texts is
an ambivalent point in this regard. However, the celebratory tone of her texts is
inspirational and creative: ‘a laughter that breaks out, overflows, a humour no one would
expect to find in a woman… she who laughs last. And her first laugh is at herself.’84
CONCLUSION
The philosophical paradox of scepticism bears, I think, many similarities to feminist work
in philosophy. ‘Scepticism may be understood as an expression of an extreme form of
dissatisfaction with the logos in its philosophical form. Scepticism tries to evade
philosophy; but is there any logos-free space where it could settle to enjoy a human
life?’85 If thinking is continually involved in movements of imprisonment, encompassing
and repulsing, ‘Which experiences, adventures of the mind, or events of history do not
permit the gathering of logos to enclose them within its horizons?’86 How are we to find
a strategy of critique which is not merely repetition of the same, but manages to avoid the
infinite regress of a scepticism forced to be sceptical of its own position? This is the
problematic which faces those thinkers who seek to reproach philosophy for what it has
repressed or left out, and to reproach it in the name of a legitimate cause, and yet this
reproach contaminates the basis of an appeal to legitimation in reproaching philosophy.
How to dodge philosophical containment while at the same time utilizing its resources to
articulate otherness? Engaging in this ‘impossible’ enterprise is to offer an ethical
reproach to philosophy, the conditions of this reproach being a determination to avoid
quietism.
The questioning of identity belongs to an immense volume of work which aims to
uncover the conflation of singularity, ontology and presence, and the connection to the
power structures which not only create such formations but maintain them as the most
successful means of sustaining the status quo. The totalitarian thinking which occludes

40.5 Page 395

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 357
difference in the name of a more coherent theorization of unity is not confined to those
political regimes more immediately identifiable as repressive, but also to the liberal
framework which argues for equality at the expense of celebrating difference. If feminist
theory has been concerned to question identity in the context of postmodernist thinking, it
is in order to analyse the alignment of presence and power. But the recent ‘return to the
subject’ in philosophical theory, which is heralded as the chance to reconsider questions
of ethics and political responsibility now that subjectivity has been unsettled from its
complacent fixity, is not really new to feminist theory, in that feminism is in general
seeking an effective version of agency to be able to conduct a struggle, whether reformist
or revolutionary.
NOTES
1 See M.E.Waite (ed.) [12.87].
2 In [12.85], 169, G.Spivak suggests that the professional woman philosopher may be
comparable to Athena: ‘Women armed with deconstruction must be aware of becoming
Athenas, uncontaminated by the womb, sprung in armour from the father’s forehead’.
3 A.Schopenhauer, ‘On Women’, in [12.84], 102–13.
4 I.Kant [12.69].
5 See some of the contributors to [12.87].
6 Many feminists have drawn attention to masculine traits in philosophy (see [12.73, 12–80]
for examples) although this does not often extend so far as to see philosophy as all and
irredeemably ‘male’.
7 I have tried to include a representative sample of feminist philosophers in the Bibliography.
8 See E.Young-Bruehl [12.93], and C.Herman, ‘Women in Space and Time’, in E.Marks and
I.de Courtivron (eds), New French Feminisms, an Anthology (Brighton: Harvester, 1980), pp.
168–74, for just two examples of feminist readings of Arendt and Weil.
9 See A.Jardine [12.68], R.Braidotti [12.50] or E.Grosz [12.65] for a mapping of the influence
of such thinkers on contemporary feminist theory.
10 The works cited in note 9 also give examples of critiques of these thinkers. See also A.Nye
[12.79].
11 J.Baudrillard [12.46], 8.
12 Ibid., p. 9.
13 See J.Derrida [12.57], J.-F.Lyotard, ‘One of the Things at Stake in Women’s Struggles’, in
A.Benjamin (ed.), The Lyotard Reader (Oxford: Blackwell, 1989), pp. 111–21, or G.Deleuze
[12.57] for examples of the fragmentation and dispersal of identity being linked to the
feminine.
14 Texts dealing with Sartre’s and de Beauvoir’s relationship are extensive: see for example
M.Le Doeuff’s discussion in Hipparchia’s Choice [12.43]. Many of the themes discussed
above are given shape in de Beauvoir’s novels, for example in The Woman Destroyed, or in
her short stories, When the Things of the Spirit Come First. Portraits of women struggling
with social contradictions and moral dilemmas and attempting, succeeding or failing to assert
their freedom, complement her more theoretical work on this topic. Such themes are also
given poignant expression in her autobiography, from ‘dutiful daughter’ to ‘old age’.
15 S.de Beauvoir [12.27].
16 J.-P.Sartre, Being and Nothingness, trans. H.Barnes (London: Methuen, 1968).

40.6 Page 396

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 358
17 S.de Beauvoir The Second Sex [12.28].
18 Ibid., p. 13.
19 M.Le Doeuff, Hipparchia’s Choice [12.43], 58.
20 De Beauvoir, The Second Sex [12.28], 15.
21 Ibid., p. 28.
22 Ibid., p. 29.
23 Ibid., p. 16.
24 Ibid., pp. 35–69.
25 Ibid., p. 62.
26 Ibid., p. 57.
27 See G.Lloyd [12.73], 102, for a discussion of this paradox in relation to de Beauvoir.
28 De Beauvoir, The Second Sex [12.28], 249.
29 Ibid., p. 66. De Beauvoir also considers a Marxist analysis of sexual difference, which
attributes inequalities to economic conditions and the historical development and
transmission of such conditions. The division of labour which leads to the unequal
distribution of property and wealth still does not explain why women should be seen as
secondary, confined to the home and themselves valued as part of property. Sexual difference
cuts across all class distinctions, yet in each class women are seen as subordinate. Although
she agrees that at some indeterminate moment in history women became the other for men,
and, once occupying a secondary role, continued to perpetuate such conditions through the
centuries, she rejects the idea that the abolition of the family will resolve women’s
subordination, since without a fuller account of interpersonal relations (how dominant and
subordinate roles between individuals come about), she argues, the inequalities may continue
to exist.
30 See J.Pilardi, ‘Female Eroticism in the Works of Simone de Beauvoir’, in J. Allen and
I.M.Young (eds) [12.44], 18–34. Another aspect of sexuality which de Beauvoir explores is
the psycho-physical development of an individual in the context of the family. She agrees
with Freud that women’s positioning as subordinate is a consequence of her own emotional
and sexual development, as a woman she identifies with or reacts against certain models of
sexuality and incorporates such attitudes into her own self-understanding. But she also
questions the universality of the Freudian scheme, being suspicious of the apparent
inevitability with which men and women achieve their sexual identity in Freud’s view,
motivated by drives and prohibitions into particular socially determined roles, mainly
because it represents an encroachment on her valorization of freedom.
31 See C.Duchen [12.61] for a clear historical perspective on the shifts in thinking.
32 See E.Grosz [12.66].
33 See J.Mitchell and J.Rose (eds) [12.76], or J.Gallop [12.63], for discussions of this influence.
Feminist theory influenced by ego-psychology and object relations psychoanalysis, such as
the work of Jessica Benjamin or Nancy Chodorow ([12.48], [12.54]) differs, in that it tends to
analyse patterns of identification and difference or relations of dominance and submission
between individuals, rather than the fragmented individual of Lacanian theory.
34 J.Rose, cited in G.C.Spivak, ‘Feminism and Deconstruction, Again: Negotiating
Unacknowledged Maculinism’, in T.Brennan (ed.) [12.51], 206–24.
35 Ibid.
36 J.Mitchell and J.Rose (eds) [12.76], 166.
37 Ibid., p. 147.
38 Although this is Freud’s phrase, it is often used to describe feminist theory influenced by
psychoanalysis.

40.7 Page 397

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 359
39 See J.Lechte [12.72] for an account of Kristeva’s work and influences upon her.
40 J.Kristeva, Revolution in Poetic Language [12.35], Only the first part is translated. The poets
she discusses in the later section are Lautréamont and Mallarmé.
41 Ibid., p. 22.
42 See Lechte [12.72], 32, where he writes: ‘On 7 November 1955, Jacques Lacan—doctor of
medicine, psychoanalyst, friend of surrealism—“officially” announced his famous “return to
Freud” in a paper given at a neuro-psychiatric clinic in Vienna.’ See J.Lacan, The Freudian
Thing, or the Meaning of the Return to Freud in Psychoanalysis’ in [12.71], 114–45.
43 Lacan writes: ‘It is the name-of-the-father that we must recognize as the support of the
symbolic function, which from the dawn of history has identified his person with the figure
of the law’ [12.71], 67.
44 Kristeva, Revolution in Poetic Language [12.35], 25.
45 Ibid.
46 Ibid.
47 Ibid., p. 26.
48 Kristeva, About Chinese Women [12.36], 35.
49 Ibid., p. 36.
50 Ibid., p. 16.
51 Ibid., p. 35.
52 Kristeva ‘Stabat Mater’ in Tales of Love [12.40], and in The Kristeva Reader [12.41].
Quotations from The Kristeva Reader.
53 Ibid., p. 185.
54 M.Warner [12.88].
55 Kristeva ‘Stabat Mater’, in [12.40], 162.
56 R.Braidotti [12.50], 219. In contrast to the so-called ‘feminists of difference’ stand those
thinkers who see all identity as social construction, and as a consequence see the notion of
sexual difference as constructed. Such thinkers as Monique Plaza and Christine Delphy
return to the ground of materialist/ humanist thinking because they see the adoption of sexual
difference and ‘the language of the female body’ as too hasty or naive, in the face of the
material and social oppression which women face. While it may be timely to remind
philosophy of such concerns, overall the rejection of difference may lead once again to the
marginalization or postponement of issues about sexual difference, or to very specific or
localized areas of concern. Monique Wittig is perhaps an example of this approach. She
rejects all binarisms of male/female or masculine/ feminine, and opts for a ‘third’ category,
the lesbian, which, in her terms, involves advancing a strategic utopia and utilizing guerrilla-
type tactics of subversion. Opting out or refusing any given terms may ultimately render this
tactic less than effective.
57 L.Irigaray, Parler n’est jamais neutre [12.12].
58 L.Irigaray ‘This Sex Which is Not One’, in This Sex Which is Not One [12.34], 23–33.
Reprinted from Marks and de Courtivron (eds) (note 8), pp. 99–106.
59 L.Irigaray, Ethique de la différence sexuelle [12.11]. First part translated in T. Moi (ed)
[12.78] as ‘Sexual difference’, pp. 118–32. Quotes from translation.
60 Ibid., p. 118.
61 Irigaray, This Sex [12.34], 78.
62 Irigaray, ‘Sexual difference’ (note 59), p. 119.
63 Irigaray, This Sex [12.34], 149.
64 Ibid., p. 159.
65 Ibid., p. 150.

40.8 Page 398

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 360
66 Ibid., p. 74.
67 L.Irigaray, Speculum of the Other Woman [12.33]. See also Marine Lover of Friedrich
Nietzsche [12.31] and L’oubli de l’air chez Martin Heidegger [12.10].
68 The title of the first section of Speculum of the Other Woman.
69 Irigaray, ‘Sexual difference’ (note 59), p. 122.
70 L.Irigaray, ‘Divine Women’, Sydney: Local Consumption Occasional Papers 8, trans.
S.Muecke, from Sexes et parentés [12.13].
71 Irigaray, This Sex [12.34], 76.
72 Ibid., p. 154.
73 Ibid., p. 155.
74 Irigaray takes this notion from Descartes, The Passions of the Soul, article 53 in The
Philosophical Writings of Descartes, vol I, trans. J.Cottingham et al., Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1985, p. 350.
75 See L.Irigaray, Sexes et parentés [12.13], Je, Tu, Nous, pour une culture de la différence
[12.15] and Le Temps de la différence: pour une révolution pacifique [12.14] for examples of
Irigaray’s recent concerns. See The Irigaray Reader [12.32] for representative translations,
particularly pp. 157–218.
76 See Ethique de la difference sexuelle [12.11] or Elemental Passions [12.29] for examples.
77 See M.Whitford’s excellent and comprehensive study [12.90] and her introduction to The
Irigaray Reader [12.32] where she writes: ‘Holding the tension here, walking this particular
tightrope, is what makes her work so challenging and so insistent’ (p. 13). See also
R.Braidotti [12.50], 262–3.
78 M.Le Doeuff, ‘Women and Philosophy’ in T.Moi (ed.) [12.78], 195, revised from version
printed in Radical Philosophy, 17 (summer 1977):2–11. Originally from The Philosophical
Imaginary [12.42].
79 Ibid., p. 196.
80 M.Le Doeuff, Hipparchia’s Choice [12.43].
81 R.Braidotti [12.50], 197.
82 See G.Lloyd [12.73] and L.Code, ‘Experience, Knowledge and Responsibility’, in
M.Griffiths and M.Whitford (eds) [12.64], 187–204.
83 H.Cixous, ‘Sorties’ in Marks and de Courtivron (eds) (note 8), pp. 90–8.
84 H.Cixous, ‘Castration or Decapitation?’ [12.24], 55.
85 A.Peperzak, ‘Presentation’, in R.Bernasconi and S.Critchley (eds) [12.49], 51–66 (p. 54).
86 Ibid., p. 53.
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
Primary texts by de Beauvoir, Kristeva, Irigaray, Le Doeuff, Cixous
12.1 Cixous, H. ‘Le Rire de la Méduse’, L’Arc (Simone de Beauvoir), 61 (1975): 39–54.
12.2 Cixous, H. ‘Le Sexe ou la tête?’ Cahiers du GRIF, 13 (1976):5–15.
12.3 Cixous, H. La Jeune Née (en collaboration avec C.Clément), Paris: Union Générale
d’Editions, 10/18, 1975.
12.4 de Beauvoir, S. Pour une morale de l’ambiguité, Paris: Gallimard, 1948.
12.5 de Beauvoir, S. Le Deuxième sexe, Paris: Gallimard, 1949.
12.6 Irigaray, L. Speculum de l’autre femme, Paris, Editions de Minuit, 1974.

40.9 Page 399

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 361
12.7 Irigaray, L. Ce Sexe qui n’en est pas un, Paris, Editions de Minuit, 1977.
12.8 Irigaray, L. Amante marine, de Friedrich Nietzsche, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1980.
12.9 Irigaray, L. Passions élémentaires, Paris: Editions de minuit, 1982.
12.10 Irigaray, L. L’oubli de l’air chez Martin Heidegger, Paris: Editions de Minuit,
1983.
12.11 Irigaray, L. Ethique de la différence sexuelle, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1984.
12.12 Irigaray, L. Parler n’est jamais neutre, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1986.
12.13 Irigaray, L. Sexes et parentés, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1987.
12.14 Irigaray, L. Le Temps de la différence: pour une révolution pacifique, Paris:
Librairie Générale Française/Livre de Poche, 1989.
12.15 Irigaray, L. Je, Tu, Nous, pour une culture de la différence, Paris: Grasset, 1990.
12.16 Kristeva, J. La révolution du langage poétique; l’avant-garde à la fin du XIXe
siècle, Lautréamont et Mallarmé, Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1974.
12.17 Kristeva, J. Des chinoises, Paris: Editions des Femmes, 1974.
12.18 Kristeva, J. Polylogue, Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1977.
12.19 Kristeva, J. ‘Le Temps des femmes’, 33/44, Cahiers de recherche des sciences
textes et documents, 5 (winter 1979):5–19.
12.20 Kristeva, J. Histoires d’amour, Paris: Denoel, 1983 and Gallimard, 1985.
12.21 Le Doeuff, M. L’Imaginaire philosophique, Paris: Payot, 1980.
12.22 Le Doeuff, M. L’Etude et le rouet, Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1989.
Translations
12.23 Cixous, H. ‘The Laugh of the Medusa’, trans. K. and P.Cohn, in E. Marks and I.de
Courtivron (eds) New French Feminisms, Brighton: Harvester, 1980, pp. 254–64.
Reprinted from Signs, 1 (summer 1976): 875–99.
12.24 Cixous, H. ‘Castration or Decapitation?’, trans. A.Kuhn, Signs, 7 (1981): 36–55.
12.25 Cixous, H. (with C.Clément) The Newly Born Woman, trans. B.Wing, Theory and
History of Literature Series 24, Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1986.
12.26 Extract from ‘Sorties’ in E.Marks and I.de Courtivron (eds) New French
Feminisms, Brighton: Harvester, 1980, pp. 90–8.
12.27 de Beauvoir, S. Ethics of Ambiguity, trans. B.Frechtman, Secancus: Citadel Press
1980.
12.28 de Beauvoir, S. The Second Sex, trans. H.M.Parshley, Harmondsworth: Penguin,
1978.
12.29 Irigaray L. Elemental Passions, trans. J.Collie and J.Still, London: Athlone Press,
1992.
12.30 Irigaray, L. The Ethics of Sexual Difference, trans. C.Burke, Ithaca: Cornell
University Press, forthcoming.
12.31 Irigaray, L. Marine Lover of Friedrich Nietzsche, trans. G.C.Gill, New York:
Columbia University Press, 1991.
12.32 Irigaray, L. The Irigaray Reader, ed. M.Whitford, trans. D.Macey et al., Oxford:
Blackwell, 1992.
12.33 Irigaray, L. Speculum of the Other Woman, trans. G.C.Gill, Ithaca: Cornell
University Press, 1985.

40.10 Page 400

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 362
12.34 Irigaray, L. This Sex Which is Not One, trans. C.Porter and C.Burke, Ithaca:
Cornell University Press, 1985.
12.35 Kristeva, J. Revolution in Poetic Language, trans. M.Waller, New York: Columbia
University Press, 1984 (first part translated only).
12.36 Kristeva, J. About Chinese Women, trans. A.Barrows, New York and London:
Marion Boyars, 1977.
12.37 Kristeva, J. Desire in Language: a Semiotic Approach to Literature and Art, trans.
S.Gora, A.Jardine, and L.Roudiez, Oxford: Blackwell, 1984 (8 essays of 20 translated).
12.38 Kristeva, J. ‘Women’s Time’, Signs 7: 1 (autumn 1981): 13–55. Reprinted in
N.O.Keohane, M.Z.Rosaldo, and B.G.Gelpi (eds), Feminist Theory: A Critique of
Ideology, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1982 and in [12.41], pp. 187–214.
12.39 Kristeva, J. ‘Julia Kristeva in Conversation with Rosalind Coward’, in ICA
Document: Desire, London: ICA, 1984, pp. 22–7.
12.40 Kristeva, J. Tales of Love, trans. L.S.Roudiez, New York: Columbia University
Press, 1987.
12.41 Kristeva, J. The Kristeva Reader, ed. with an introduction by T.Moi, Oxford:
Blackwell, 1986.
12.42 Le Doeuff, M. The Philosophical Imaginary, trans. C.Gordon, London: Athlone,
1986.
12.43 Le Doeuff, M. Hipparchia’s Choice: An Essay Concerning Women, Philosophy
etc., trans. T.Selous, Oxford: Blackwell, 1991.
Other works and criticisms
12.44 Allen, J. and Young, I.M. (eds) The Thinking Muse: Feminism and Modern French
Philosophy, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1989.
12.45 Atack, M. ‘The Other; Feminist’, Paragraph, 8 (Oct. 1986):25–39.
12.46 Baudrillard, J. Seduction, trans. B.Singer, London: Macmillan, 1990 (De la
seduction, Paris: Galilée, 1979).
12.47 Benhabib, S. and Cornell, D. (eds) Feminism as Critique, Oxford: Blackwell, 1987.
12.48 Benjamin, J. The Bonds of Love: Psychoanalysis, Feminism and the Problem of
Domination, London: Virago, 1990.
12.49 Bernasconi, R. and Critchley, S. (eds) Re-reading Levinas, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1991.
12.50 Braidotti, R. Patterns of Dissonance: A Study of Women in Contemporary
Philosophy, London: Polity Press, 1991.
12.51 Brennan, T. (ed.) Between Feminism and Psychoanalysis, London: Routledge,
1989.
12.52 Burke, C. ‘Romancing the Philosophers: Luce Irigaray’, in D.Hunter (ed.)
Seduction and Theory; Feminist Readings on Representation and Rhetoric, Chicago:
University of Illinois Press, 1981, pp. 226–40.
12.53 Butler, J. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity, London:
Routledge, 1990.
12.54 Chodorow, N. The Reproduction of Mothering: Psychoanalysis and the Sociology
of Gender, Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.

41 Pages 401-410

▲back to top

41.1 Page 401

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 363
12.55 Conley, V.A. Hélène Cixous: Writing the Feminine, Lincoln: University of
Nebraska Press, 1984.
12.56 Deleuze, G. Différence et répétition, Paris: PUF, 1969.
12.57 Derrida, J. Eperons/Spurs, the styles of Nietzsche, trans. B.Harlow, Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1978.
12.58 Derrida, J. ‘Women in the Beehive: An Interview with Jacques Derrida’,
Subjects/Objects, 2 (1984). Reprinted in A.Jardine and P.Smith (eds) Men in
Feminism, London: Methuen, 1987.
12.59 Derrida, J. and Conley, V.A. ‘Voice ii’, Boundary 2, 12:2 (1984):180–6.
12.60 Derrida, J. and McDonald, C.V. ‘Choreographies’, Diacritics, 12 (summer,
1982):66–76.
12.61 Duchen, C. Feminism in France from May ’68 to Mitterand, London: Routledge &
Kegan Paul, 1986.
12.62 Eisenstein, H. and Jardine, A. (eds) The Future of Difference Boston: G.K. Hall,
1980.
12.63 Gallop, J. Feminism and Psychoanalysis: The Daughter’s Seduction, London:
Macmillan, 1982.
12.64 Griffiths, M., and Whitford, M. (eds) Feminist Perspectives in Philosophy,
London: Macmillan, 1988.
12.65 Grosz, E. Sexual Subversions, Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1989.
12.66 Grosz, E. Jacques Lacan: A Feminist Introduction, London: Routledge, 1990.
12.67 Harding, S. and Hintikka, M. Discovering Reality: Feminist Perspectives on
Epistemology, Metaphysics, Methodology and the Philosophy of Science, Dordrecht:
Reidel, 1983.
12.68 Jardine, A. Gynesis. Configurations of Women and Modernity, Ithaca: Cornell
University Press, 1985.
12.69 Kant, I. ‘Of the Distinction of the Beautiful and the Sublime in the Inter-relations
of the Sexes’, in Observations on the Feeling of the Beautiful and the Sublime, trans.
J.T.Goldthwaite (1763) Berkeley: University of California Press, 1960.
12.70 Kofman, S. The Enigma of Woman: Women in Freud’s Writing, Ithaca: Cornell
University Press, 1985.
12.71 Lacan, J. Ecrits: A Selection, trans. A.Sheridan, London: Tavistock, 1977.
12.72 Lechte, J. Julia Kristeva, London: Routledge, 1991.
12.73 Lloyd, G. The Man of Reason. ‘Male’ and ‘Female’ in Western Philosophy,
London: Macmillan, 1984.
12.74 Miller, N.K. (ed.) The Poetics of Gender, New York, Columbia University Press,
1986.
12.75 Mitchell, J. Psychoanalysis and Feminism, Harmondsworth: Pelican, 1974.
12.76 Mitchell, J. and Rose, J. (eds) Feminine Sexuality: Jacques Lacan and the Ecole
Freudienne, trans. J.Rose, London: Macmillan, 1985.
12.77 Moi, T. Sexual/Textual Politics: Feminist Literary Theory, London: Methuen,
1985.
12.78 Moi, T. (ed.) French Feminist Thought: A Reader, Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1988.
12.79 Nye, A. Feminist Theory and the Philosophies of Man, London: Routledge, 1988.
12.80 Okin, S.M. Women in Western Political Thought, Princeton: Princeton University

41.2 Page 402

▲back to top
French feminist philosophy 364
Press, 1979.
12.81 Pateman, C. The Sexual Contract, Cambridge: Polity Press, 1988.
12.82 Pateman, C. The Disorder of Women: Democracy, Feminism and Political Theory,
Cambridge: Polity Press, 1990.
12.83 Schiach, M. Hélène Cixous: A Politics of Writing, London: Routledge, 1991.
12.84 Schopenhauer, A. The Essential Schopenhauer, London: Unwin Books, 1962.
12.85 Spivak, G.C. ‘Displacement and the Discourse of Woman’, in M.Krupnick (ed.)
Displacement: Derrida and After, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1983, pp.
169–91.
12.86 Vetterling-Braggin, M., Elliston, F., and English, J. (eds) Feminism and
Philosophy, Totowa: Littlefield, Adams & Co., 1977.
12.87 Waite, M.E. (ed.) A History of Women Philosophers, 4 volumes, The Hague:
Martinus Nijhoff, 1987.
12.88 Warner, M. Alone of All Her Sex, London: Picador, 1981.
12.89 White, A. ‘L’Eclatement du sujet: The Theoretical Work of Julia Kristeva’,
Birmingham Centre for Contemporary Cultural Studies, Stencilled Occasional Paper
49, 1977.
12.90 Whitford, M. Luce Irigaray: Philosophy in the Feminine, London: Routledge,
1991.
12.91 Wilcox, H., McWatters, K., Thompson, A. and Williams, R. (eds) The Body and
the Text: Hélène Cixous, Reading and Teaching, London: Harvester, 1990.
12.92 Wittig, M. The Lesbian Body, trans. Peter Owen, New York: Avon, 1986 [Le
Corps lesbien, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1973].
12.93 Young-Bruehl, E. Mind and the Body Politic, London: Routledge, 1988.

41.3 Page 403

▲back to top
CHAPTER 13
Deconstruction and Derrida
Simon Critchley and Timothy Mooney
DERRIDIAN DECONSTRUCTION1
In the last twenty-five years or so, particularly in the English-speaking world, no
philosopher has attracted more notoriety, controversy and misunderstanding than Jacques
Derrida. Caricatural summaries of deconstruction and ‘deconstructionism’ abound in
introductory textbooks, newspaper articles, radio and television programmes. The word
‘deconstruction’ has found a home in everyday language, and positions pro and contra
Derrida are taken up and held with a vehemence that is difficult for the uninitiated to
grasp. ‘Derrida’ and ‘deconstruction’ have become integral terms in the debate on the
meaning of western culture in the late twentieth century. However, in this chapter I would
like to take a step back from the sound and fury of the cultural debate around Derrida and
sketch, as clearly and simply as possible, what appears to take place in deconstruction,
that is to say, what is the method of reading employed by Derrida and what, in brief, are
the consequences of the latter for the philosophical tradition.
What is deconstruction? Or, as it is perhaps initially easier to give a negative response
to this question, what is not deconstruction? Employing a short text of Derrida written in
1983 and published in 1985, ‘Letter to a Japanese Friend’, which was specifically written
in order to aid the possible translation of the word déconstruction into Japanese, one can
quickly sketch some important caveats. First, Derrida insists that deconstruction is not
negative; it is not a process of demolition (which does not automatically entail that
deconstruction is positive—[13.17], 390). Furthermore, deconstruction needs to be
sharply distinguished from analysis, which presupposes a reduction of entities to their
simple or essential elements, elements which themselves would stand in need of
deconstruction. Crucially, deconstruction is not critique, either in the general or Kantian
sense; Derrida writes, ‘The instance of the krinein or of krisis (decision, choice,
judgement, discernment) is itself, as is moreover the entire apparatus of transcendental
critique, one of the essential “themes” or “objects” of deconstruction’ ([13.17], 390).
Similarly, deconstruction is not a method or way that can be followed in the activity of
interpretation. This is also to say that deconstruction cannot be reduced to being a
methodology (amongst competing methodologies) in the human or natural sciences, or
becoming a technical procedure assimilable by academics and taught in educational
institutions ([13.17], 390–1). In addition, deconstruction is not an act produced and
commanded by a subject, nor is it an operation that sets to work on a text or an
institution. Derrida concludes the ‘Letter’ characteristically by writing, ‘What
deconstruction is not? But everything! What is deconstruction? But nothing!’ ([13.17],
392). All ontological statements of the form ‘deconstruction is x’ miss the point a priori,

41.4 Page 404

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 366
for it is precisely the ontological presuppositions of the copula that provide one of the
enduring ‘themes’ of deconstruction. Rather, carefully avoiding the verb ‘to be’, Derrida
claims that deconstruction takes place (‘a lieu’), and that it does so wherever there ‘is’
something (‘où il y a quelque chose’). Such is the enigma (Derrida’s word—[13.17], 391)
of deconstruction: it cannot be defined and therefore resists translation; it is not an entity
or a thing, it is not univocal or unitary. Derrida writes, paying careful attention to
reflexivity of the statement, ‘Ça se déconstruit’ (‘It deconstructs itself, the Ça being both
a translation of Es—the id, the unconscious—and a homophone for Sa—‘Savoir Absolu’,
Absolute Knowing—[13.17], 391). It deconstructs itself wherever something takes place.
However, such a formulation, although subtle and faithful, risks being unhelpful
because of its generality. Having taken on board the negative caveats in the problem of
defining deconstruction, I should now like to assemble a more ‘constructivist’ account of
deconstruction by asking the question: how does deconstruction take place? Derrida
addressed this question concisely and lucidly in Of Grammatology (1967) [13.4, 13.29],
in a chapter entitled, ‘The Exorbitant. Question of Method’. The first essential point to
make, however, trivial it may seem, is that deconstruction is always the deconstruction of
a text. Derrida’s thinking is always thinking about a text, from which flows the obvious
corollary that deconstruction is always engaged in a reading of a text. The way of
deconstruction is always opened through reading, what Derrida calls ‘a first task, the
most elementary of tasks’ ([13.21], 35; [13.43], 41). Any thinking that is primarily
concerned with reading will clearly be dependent upon the text that is being read. Thus,
Derrida’s readings are parasitic because they are close readings of texts that draw their
sustenance from within the flesh of the host. What takes place in deconstruction is
reading, and, I shall argue, what distinguishes deconstruction as a textual practice is
double reading. That is to say, a reading that interlaces at least two motifs or layers of
reading, most often by first repeating what Derrida calls ‘the dominant
interpretation’ ([13.22], 265; [13.44], 143) of a text in the guise of a commentary, and
second, within and through this repetition, by leaving the order of commentary and
opening a text up to the blind spots or ellipses within the dominant interpretation.
Now, when Derrida reads Rousseau, he organizes his reading around the word
supplément. It is claimed that this word is the ‘blind spot’ (tâche aveugle [13.4], 234;
[13.29], 163) in Rousseau’s text, a word which he employs but whose logic is veiled to
him.2 Derrida’s reading of Rousseau traces the logic of this supplement, a logic which
allows Rousseau’s text to slip from the grip of its intentions and achieve a textual
position that is other than the logocentric conceptuality that Rousseau intended to affirm.
Thus, Derrida’s reading of Rousseau occupies the space between the writer’s intentions
and the text, or between what a writer commands and fails to command in a language. It
is into this space between intentions and text that Derrida inserts what he calls the
‘signifying structure’ ([13.4], 227; [13.29], 158) of the reading that constitutes part two of
Of Grammatology.
How does one perform a deconstructive reading? In ‘The Exorbitant. Question of
Method’, Derrida pauses in his reading of Rousseau in order to justify his own
methodological principles. The signifying structure of a deconstructive reading cannot, he
claims, simply be produced through the ‘respectful doubling of commentary’ ([13.4],
227; [13.29], 158). Although Derrida is acutely aware of the exigencies of the traditional

41.5 Page 405

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 367
instruments of commentary as an ‘indispensable guardrail’ in critical production, he
claims that commentary ‘has always only protected, it has never opened, a
reading’ (ibid.).
Here I would like to pause for a moment to consider what Derrida could possibly mean
by the word ‘commentary’ in this context: is he claiming, oblivious to the achievements
of Heideggerian and especially Gadamerian hermeneutics, that there can be a pure
commentary or literal repetition of a text that is not already an interpretation? Derrida
corrects and clarifies the above remarks from Of Grammatology in one of his responses
to Gerald Graff in the ‘Afterword’ to Limited Inc. Derrida writes that ‘the moment of
what I called, perhaps clumsily, “doubling commentary” does not suppose the self-
identity of “meaning”, but a relative stability of the dominant interpretation (including the
auto-interpretation) of the text being commented upon’. He continues, ‘perhaps I should
not have called it commentary’ ([13.22], 265; [13.44], 143). Thus, for Derrida, the
moment of commentary refers to the reproducibility and stability of the dominant
interpretation of a text, for example the traditional logocentric reading (or misreading) of
Rousseau. Commentary is always already interpretation and Derrida does not believe in
the possibility of a pure and simple repetition of a text. However, and this is a crucial
caveat, there is an unavoidable need for a competence in reading and writing such that the
dominant interpretation of a text can be reconstructed as a necessary and indispensable
layer or moment of reading. ‘Otherwise’, Derrida writes, echoing a sentence from Of
Grammatology effectively ignored by many of its opponents and proponents alike, ‘one
could indeed say just anything at all and I have never accepted saying, or being
encouraged to say, just anything at all’ ([13.22], 267; [13.44], 144–5; cf. [13.4], 227;
[13.29], 158).
Derrida goes on to argue that the moment of ‘commentary’ or of the dominant
interpretation reflects a minimal consensus concerning the intelligibility of texts,
establishing what a given text means for a community of readers. Although such a search
for consensus is ‘actively interpretive’, Derrida adds, ‘I believe that no research is
possible in a community (for example, academic) without the prior search for this
minimal consensus’ ([13.22], 269; [13.44], 146). Thus, although ‘commentary’ alone
does not open a genuine reading, the latter is not possible without the moment of
commentary, without a scholarly competence in reading, understanding and writing,
without a knowledge of texts in their original languages (for example, Rousseau’s or
Derrida’s French), without knowing the corpus of an author as a whole, without knowing
the multiple contexts—political, literary, philosophical, historical and so forth—which
determine a given text or are determined by that text. This is what one might call the
deconstructive duty of scholarship. I would go further and claim that there is a
hermeneutic principle of fidelity—one might even say ‘an “ethico-political duty”’ (‘un
“devoir éthico-politique”’) ([13.22], 249; [13.44], 135)—and a minimal working notion
of truth as adaequatio underlying deconstructive reading, as its primary layer of reading.
If deconstructive reading is to possess any demonstrative necessity, it is initially in virtue
of how faithfully it reconstructs the dominant interpretation of a text in a layer of
‘commentary’.
To choose an extreme example, in Limited Inc. every word of Searle’s ‘Reiterating the
Differences: A Reply to Derrida’ is repeated or re-reiterated. Derrida clearly views this as

41.6 Page 406

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 368
a way of responding responsibly to the brutality of Searle’s essay, which decides to
‘insult’ ([13.22], 257; [13.44], 139) Derrida’s work—for example Searle writes of
‘Derrida’s distressing penchant for saying things that are obviously false’3 rather than
engaging in the necessary critical demonstration. Thus, bearing the above qualifications
in mind, one might say a reading is true in the first instance to the extent that it faithfully
repeats or corresponds to what is said in the text that is being commented upon. This is
perhaps the reason why Derrida quotes at such length and with such regularity in his
writings, and it is also the basis for his accusation of falsity against Habermas’s critique
of his work in ‘Excursus on Leveling the Genre Distinction between Philosophy and
Literature’, where Derrida is not cited a single time ([13.22], 244; [13.44], 156).4
Returning to Of Grammatology, it is clear that although the respectful repetition of the
text which ‘commentary’ produces fails to open a reading, this in no way entails that one
should then transgress the text by reductively relating it to some referent or signified
outside of textuality (i.e. historical material or the psychobiography of the author). To
determine textual signifiers by referring them to a governing signified—for example, to
read A la recherche in terms of Proust’s asthma—would be to give what Derrida calls a
transcendent reading. The axial proposition of Of Grammatology is ‘il n’y a pas de
horstexte’ (‘there is no outside text’ [13.4], 227; [13.29], 158), or again, ‘il n’y a rien hors
du texte’ (‘there is nothing outside of the text’ [13.4], 233; [13.29], 163). One should be
attentive to the nuanced difference between these two sentences: the first claims that
there is no ‘outside-text’, no text outside; whilst the second claims that there is nothing
outside of the text, the text outside is nothing), implying by this that any reading that
refers the text to some signified outside of textuality is illusory. Within the logocentric
epoch, the textual signifier (and writing, inscription, the mark and the trace in general)
has always been determined as secondary, as a fallen exteriority preceded by a signified.
A deconstructive reading must, therefore, remain within the limits of textuality, hatching
its eggs within the flesh of the host.
Thus, the ‘methodological’ problem for deconstruction becomes one of discovering
how a reading can remain internal to the text and within the limits of textuality without
merely repeating the text in the manner of a ‘commentary’. To borrow the adverbial
phrase with which Derrida describes his reading of Husserl, deconstructive reading must
move à travers the text, traversing the space between a repetitive commentary and a
metatextual interpretation, ‘Traversing [à travers] Husserl’s text, that is to say, in a
reading which cannot simply be that of commentary nor that of interpretation’ ([13.2],
98; [13.27], 88). By opening up this textual space that is other to ‘commentary’ or
interpretation, a certain distance is created between deconstructive reading and
logocentric conceptuality. The signifying structure of a deconstructive reading traverses a
space that is other to logocentrism and which attempts eccentrically to exceed the orbit of
its conceptual totality. In an important and explicit reference to the ‘goal’ or ‘aim’ of
deconstruc-tion, Derrida writes, ‘We wanted to attain the point of a certain exteriority
with respect to the totality of the logocentric epoch. From this point of exteriority a
certain deconstruction of this totality… could be broached [entamée]’ ([13–4], 231;
[13.29], 161–2). It is from such a point of exteriority that deconstruction could cut into or
penetrate the totality, thereby displacing it. The goal of deconstruction, therefore, is to
locate a point of otherness within philosophical or logocentric conceptuality and then to

41.7 Page 407

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 369
deconstruct this conceptuality from that position of alterity.
It is at this point that the concept of double reading can be properly understood. If the
first moment of reading is the rigorous and scholarly reconstruction of the dominant
interpretation of a text, its vouloir-dire, its intended meaning, in the guise of a
commentary, then the second moment of reading, in virtue of which deconstruction obeys
a double necessity, is the destabilization of the stability of the dominant interpretation
([13.22], 271; [13.44], 147). It is the movement of traversing the text which enables the
reading to obtain a position of alterity or exteriority from where the text can be
deconstructed. The second moment brings the text into contradiction with itself, opening
its intended meaning, its vouloir-dire, onto an alterity which goes against what the text
wants to say or mean (‘ce que le texte veut dire’). Derrida often articulates this double
reading around a semantic ambivalence in the usage of a particular word, like supplément
in Rousseau, pharmakon in Plato or Geist in Heidegger. It is of absolutely crucial
importance that this second moment, that of alterity, should be shown to arise necessarily
out of the first moment of repetitive commentary. Derrida ventriloquizes this double
structure through the mouth of Heidegger in De l’esprit: ‘That is why, without opposing
myself to that of which I am trying to think the most matinal possibility, without even
using words other than those of the tradition, I follow the path of a repetition which
crosses the path of the wholly other. The wholly other announces itself within the most
rigorous repetition ([13.18], 184).’ Thus, by following the path of a repetition, the
Wiederholung of a text or a tradition, one inevitably crosses the path of something wholly
other, something that cannot be reduced to what the text or tradition wants to say. It is at
this point that the similarities between Derridian deconstruction and Heideggerian
Destruktion become apparent. Indeed, Derrida initially employed the term déconstruction
as an attempt to render into French the Heideggerian notions of Destruktion (de-struction,
or non-negative de-structuring) and Abbau (demolition or, better, dismantling—[13.17],
388). For the Heidegger of Being and Time, the working out or elaboration
(Ausarbeitung) of the question of the meaning of Being does not become truly concrete
until the ontological tradition—that is, the tradition that has forgotten the question of
Being, and more precisely the temporal dimension of this question—has been completely
repeated (wiederholen) and deconstructed.5 In the 1962 lecture ‘Time and Being’, Abbau
is presented (and presented, moreover, as a synonym for Destruktion) as the progressive
removal of the concealing layers that have covered over the first Greek rending of Being
as presence (Anwesenheit). The repetition of the metaphysical tradition is a dismantling
that reveals its unsaid as unsaid.6 Returning to Derrida, it is the belonging together or
interlacing of these two moments or paths of reading—repetition and alterity—that best
describes the double gesture of deconstructive reading: the figure of the chiasmus.
What takes place in deconstruction is double reading, that is, a form of reading that
obeys the double injunction for both repetition and the alterity that arises within that
repetition. Deconstruction opens a reading by locating a moment of alterity within a text.
In Derrida’s reading of Rousseau, the concept of the supplement is the lever that is
employed to show how Rousseau’s discourse is inscribed within the general text, a
domain of textuality irreducible to logocentric conceptuality. In this way one can see how
a moment of blindness in a logocentric text grants insight into an alterity that exceeds
logocentrism. As Derrida remarks in an interview with Richard Kearney, ‘deconstruction

41.8 Page 408

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 370
is not an enclosure in nothingness, but an openness towards the other’.7 What takes place
in deconstruction is a highly determinate form of double reading which pursues alterities
within texts, primarily philosophical texts. In this way, deconstruction opens a discourse
on the other to philosophy, an otherness that has been dissimulated or appropriated by the
logocentric tradition. Philosophy, particularly in its Hegelian moment, has always
insisted on thinking its other (art, religion, nature, etc.) as its proper other and thereby
appropriating it and losing sight of its otherness. The philosophical text has always
believed itself to be in control of the margin of its own volume ([13.5], 1; [13.30], x). As
Emmanuel Levinas points out in ‘Transcendence and Height’, philosophy might be
defined as the activity of assimilating all otherness into the Same.8 Such a definition
would seem to be accurate in so far as the philosophical tradition has always attempted to
understand and think the plurality and alterity of a manifold of entities through a
reduction of plurality to unity and alterity to sameness. The same gesture is repeated
throughout the philosophical tradition, whether it be in Plato, where the plurality of the
instances of an entity (phainomena) are understood in relation to a unifying form (eidos).
Or whether it be Aristotle, where philosophia protē (that is to say, metaphysics) is the
attempt to understand the Being of a plurality of entities in relation to a unifying
substance (ousia), and, ultimately, a divine ousia: the god (to theion). Or, indeed,
whether it be in terms of Kantian epistemology, where the manifold or plurality of
intuitions are brought into unity and sameness by being placed under concepts which are
regulated by the categories of the understanding (and other examples could be cited).
The very activity of thinking, which lies at the basis of epistemological, ontological
and veridical comprehension, is the reduction of plurality to unity and alterity to
sameness. The activity of philosophy, the very task of thinking, is the reduction and
domestication of otherness. In seeking to think the other, its otherness is reduced or
appropriated to our understanding. To think philosophically is to comprehend—
comprendre, comprehendere, begreifen, to comprehend, to include, to seize, to grasp—
and master the other, thereby reducing its alterity. As Rodolphe Gasché points out,
‘Western philosophy is in essence the attempt to domesticate Otherness, since what we
understand by thought is nothing but such a project.’9 As the attempt to attain a point of
exteriority to logocentrism, deconstruction may therefore be ‘understood’ as the desire to
keep open a dimension of alterity which can neither be reduced, comprehended, nor,
strictly speaking, even thought by philosophy. To say that the goal of Derridian
deconstruction is not simply the unthought of the tradition, but rather ‘that-which-cannot-
be-thought’ is to engage neither in sophistical rhetoric nor negative theology. It is rather
to point towards that which philosophy is unable to say.
Derridian deconstruction attempts to situate, ‘a non-site, or a non-philosophical site,
from which to question philosophy’.10 It seeks a place of exteriority, alterity or
marginality irreducible to philosophy. Deconstruction is the writing of a margin that
cannot be represented by philosophy. In question is an other to philosophy that has never
been and cannot become philosophy’s other, but an other within which philosophy
becomes inscribed.
However (and this is crucial), the paradox that haunts Derrida’s and all deconstructive
discourse is that the only language that is available to deconstruction is that of philosophy
or logocentrism. Thus to take up a position exterior to logocentrism, if such a thing were

41.9 Page 409

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 371
possible, would be to risk starving oneself of the very linguistic resources with which one
must deconstruct logocentrism. The deconstructive reader is like a tightrope walker who
risks ‘ceaselessly falling back inside that which he deconstructs’ ([13.4], 25; [13.29], 14).
Deconstruction is a double reading that operates within a double bind of both belonging
to a tradition, a language and a philosophical discourse, and at the same time being
unable to belong to the latter. This ambiguous situation of belonging and not-belonging
describes the problem of closure.
Broadly stated,11 the problem of closure describes the duplicitous historical moment—
now—when language, conceptuality, institutions and philosophy itself show themselves
to belong to a logocentric tradition which is theoretically exhausted whilst at the same
time searching for the breakthrough from that tradition. The problem of closure describes
the liminal situation of modernity out of which the deconstructive problematic arises and
which Derrida inherits from Heidegger. Closure is the double refusal both of remaining
within the limits of the tradition and of the possibility of transgressing that limit within
philosophical language. At the moment of historical and philosophical closure,
deconstructive reading takes place as the disturbance, disruption or interruption of the
limit that divides the inside from the outside of the tradition. A deconstructive reading
shows how a text is dependent upon the presuppositions of a metaphysics of presence of
logocentrism, which that text might attempt either to champion or dissimulate, whilst at
the same time showing how that text radically questions the metaphysics it presupposes,
entering into contradiction with itself, and pointing the way towards a thinking that would
be other to logocentrism. Closure is the hinge that articulates this double and strictly
undecidable movement between logocentrism and its other. Deconstruction(s) take(s)
place as the articulation of this hinge.
Simon Critchley
PHILOSOPHICAL ROOTS AND BIBLIOGRAPHICAL HISTORY
Throughout the history of thought new philosophies have unfolded as reactions to or
developments of previous ones, and in this way have shown their indebtedness to their
forebears. There is no field outside the philosophical tradition from which a completely
new thinking could spring into being. Starting from the recognition of this fact, the first
part of this section seeks to show how some of Jacques Derrida’s central ideas develop
out of his encounters with the work of Edmund Husserl. Charting the ground of an
individual’s thought with any fidelity is always a difficult exercise, the more so in
Derrida’s case. He has cited and displayed evidence of numerous influences, including
Heidegger, Hegel, Levinas, Nietzsche, Freud and Saussure, and his own arguments have
cast doubt on the possibility of uncovering simple origins or foundations. All this being
said, however, the crucial importance of Husserl’s phenomenology can still be clearly
demonstrated. Outlining Derrida’s readings of Husserl also shows that he has engaged in
philosophical argumentation rather than in some esoteric anarchism that is supposedly
closed off from all criticism.
The second part of this section attempts to give a concise overview of Derrida’s
philosophical career within the broad framework of a bibliographical history. Reference

41.10 Page 410

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 372
will be made to his most important works and to the way in which they follow on from
certain questions articulated in the early texts. This is also a difficult task. From the close
of the 1950s Derrida has published twenty-six books and innumerable articles, many of
them extending into the associated regions of literary criticism, aesthetics and politics.
These factors alone militate against the adequacy of short summaries and chronological
surveys, quite apart from specifically theoretical objections. Perhaps the best combination
of clarity and continuity lies in confining one’s attention to those philosophical concerns
that stand out most strongly in the Derridian constellation. It is this approach that has
been adopted here.
It was as a teenager in Algeria that Derrida first became interested in philosophy. He
read Sartre copiously, and was spurred into enrolling for pre-university classes after
hearing a radio broadcast by Albert Camus. In 1949 Derrida went to Paris, where he
commenced his studies under Jean Hyppolite at the Ecole Normale Supérieure. As far as
can be ascertained, Derrida’s interest in Sartre waned from the moment he became
acquainted with the work of Husserl. The latter’s phenomenology, as opposed to the
version propounded by Sartre, appeared to Derrida as an inescapable method of analysis.
As recently as 1980, Derrida has remarked that he still sees it, although in a different
way, as a discipline of incomparable rigour.12
Derrida’s first article was entitled ‘“Genesis and Structure” and Phenomenology’.
Published in 1959, this was a development of part of his master’s thesis. The problem of
genesis or origin and structure had emerged as a result of Husserl’s insistence that the
meanings of those objects and states of affairs taken as irreducible to what we call the
conscious self are never immediately given from outside. There are no transparently
intelligible meanings in phenomena which would fall like manna from a heavenly place
(topos ouranios) and strike the mind ready-made. In all these cases meaning demands not
just a subject but a complex subjective contribution. All of the objects or states of affairs
that we can entertain must be taken as more than an amorphous fuzz of unceasing
mutation. Without at least a relative constancy in phenomena, recognition and
discrimination would be impossible. Yet these constancies themselves presuppose a
wider horizonal structure within which we ourselves place every appearance. Recognition
and discrimination point to a surround of expectations which phenomenology seeks to
make explicit. We expect physical objects, for instance, to have currently invisible
aspects which can be brought into view, or made present, as we vary our perspective. We
also expect physical things to behave in certain ways. On this view everything
experienced is implicitly contextualized, whether it pertains to the physical, scientific or
cultural worlds.
Unlike the Kantian categories of experience and understanding, Husserl’s horizons are
not fixed but constantly evolving. Through successive acts of perception we adjust each
horizon so that it more comprehensively contextualizes objects or states of affairs.
Meaning emerges from a weave made up of changing horizons and their contents. This
creative emergence of meaning Husserl calls constitution. To explain any constituted
phenomenon adequately, we have to give a structural description of this phenomenon and
of our present mode of consciousness of it. But we also have to give a genetic or
originary description of the evolving horizon which the phenomenon and our mode of
consciousness of it presuppose.

42 Pages 411-420

▲back to top

42.1 Page 411

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 373
According to Derrida, certain insoluble problems ensue from this approach, stemming
from the fact that the isolation and description of the objective structures of phenomena
and of the horizons through which they are revealed is, on Husserl’s premisses, an
infinite task. Because we must describe ever anew our continually evolving horizons, we
will at the same time be altering our correlative characterizations of the objective
structures of phenomena. What now appear as foundational structures could well be
shown to be derivative in the future. Being caught up in history, we can never claim to
encounter closed or finished structures, that is, structures that would be immune from
modification and deposition. Yet another problem is that of discerning where our
horizons end and where the objective structures of phenomena begin. There are no sure
criteria for distinguishing between the ‘productive’ and ‘revelatory’ aspects of certain
constituted meanings.
Derrida does not claim any great novelty in this analysis, and he stresses that these
difficulties could never have been brought to light were they not built upon Husserl’s
powers of insight. It is the critical drive in Husserl that foregrounds these problems as he
attempts to get back to the things themselves, to describe faithfully the phenomena
presented to consciousness.
Derrida does not accept the Husserlian argument that the living present (lebendige
Gegenwart) of human consciousness is the ultimate locus and ground of meaning. He
takes over the structuralist position that meaning depends on sign-systems that transcend
the intentional control of individual subjects. There is no self and no other than can be
understood apart from signs. The move towards this position is marked in Derrida’s first
book, Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry, an Introduction (1962) [13.1; 13.26]. All
the problems treated in this early text, according to Derrida, have continued to organize
the work he has subsequently embarked upon.13
In The Origin of Geometry (1936), written shortly before his death and published only
posthumously, Husserl was concerned with the communicability of ideal objects, such as
geometrical formations, that are initially reached or constituted in an individual human
consciousness. Being universal and non-perspectival, geometrical idealities are free from
the contingencies of spatio-temporal existence, and in terms of perfection, argues
Husserl, they can serve as the model for any object whatsoever. But precisely because of
their ideality, they must in principle be accessible to every rational being, capable of
being objects for all conscious subjects. One of the core concerns in The Origin of
Geometry is to explain how a geometrical formation which is initially confined to the
solitary psychological life of the first or proto-geometer can become intersubjective, that
is, an object for the whole human community.
Husserl’s immediate answer is that it is speech which brings ideality into the public
realm, allowing the proto-geometer to share his or her discovery with others in the same
community. But it is only writing that allows the discovery to be transmitted from
generation to generation, thus giving it a history. Through writing or inscription, the
geometrical formation is passed down to others, who add corollaries and formulate
further theorems and axioms. Through successive generations, new layers are added on
top of the original formation. This is the path of scientific progress, and indeed of cultural
development in general, and it resembles an elevated rock stratum composed of various
sedimented layers. Through encoding the original discovery, the protogeometer sends it

42.2 Page 412

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 374
forward in a productive passage through time. The price of productive written
transmission, however, is the loss of the conscious intentional states of the proto-
geometer’s mind that led to his or her discovery. Writing is an autonomous field that can
virtualize a discovery, separating a bare formation from the conscious acts of constitution
that are communicable through the tone and facial expressions of everyday speech. This
loss is itself a condition of progress, for later geometers have to take the bare formation
as a readymade given so as to have the time to improve on it. Quite apart from the
comparative shortness of wakeful life, our bodily needs leave us little enough time for
research. All the productive arts and sciences, argues Husserl, have to progress in this
way. But it is just this element of loss in writing that has led to the contemporary crisis in
western civilization. We have lost our roots, our sense of where we came from, of how
and why our scientific and cultural traditions began.
Husserl regards this state of crisis as endemic—it can never be overcome. The
intentional states of the founders of our traditions are lost for ever, and there is no return-
enquiry (Rückfrage) that could recover them. But if we cannot reactivate the primordial
archē of a science in our present age, argues Husserl, we can at least envisage its telos,
which is that of a complete system of knowledge, of absolutely transparent and univocal
understanding. This is not something that can ever be fully actualized; rather it functions
as a infinite ideal. The building up of a science on top of an original formation can be
understood as a gradual process of approximation towards this ideal. The actual
formation can be understood as an essential element within this process that contributes
to its determination. In this regard it is described by Husserl as an ‘Idea in the Kantian
sense’. Only efficacious through writing, the ideal of objective and thorough knowledge
and the correlative Idea in the Kantian sense may not constitute a knowledge of origins,
but they do show that our scientific and cultural objects are not meaningless when
recontextualized.
In his reading of this text, Derrida seeks to show that certain radical conclusions follow
from Husserl’s premisses. These were already touched upon by the latter, but never
developed, perhaps because he well understood the problems they would pose for a text
that valorized the notion of a unique and transparent origin of geometry and of other
traditions in the living present of human consciousness. Derrida is careful to emphasize
Husserl’s acute awareness of the significance of language, and of writing in particular.
Here we see the first direct articulation of the idea that language is more than a material
body that receives an already constituted truth. Contributing to the clarification and
systematization of a discovery, it is not a passive receptacle of something given ready-
made. Constituting ideal objects as definite and repeatable formations, it is a necessary
condition of truth, in principle as well as in fact:
Husserl insists that truth is not fully objective, i.e, ideal, intelligible for
everyone and indefinitely perdurable, as long as it cannot be said and written.
Since this perdurability is truth’s very sense, the conditions for its survival are
included in its very life… freedom is only possible precisely from the moment
truth can in general be said and written, i.e., on condition that this can be done.
Paradoxically, the possibility of being written [possibilité graphique] permits
the ultimate freeing of ideality…the ability of sense to be linguistically

42.3 Page 413

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 375
embodied is the only means by which sense becomes nonspatiotemporal.14
This material condition of truth can also jettison what Husserl sees as the original
meaning of a truth, its intentional origin. In philosophy and literature, as well as in the
natural sciences, Husserl well appreciates the possibilities of loss and misunderstanding
brought into play by writing. But what he fails to account for, Derrida goes on to argue, is
the possibility of the total loss of a message in the autonomous field of writing. This
eventuality is to be distinguished from an empirical catastrophe, such as a worldwide
burning of books and defacing of monuments. In this case writing would be materially
destroyed and the message consumed. What Derrida is adverting to is the possibility of
the complete disappearance of a message in a writing that remains fully intact in the
world. The writing that gives life after death to a message can just as well bury that
message. As Derrida points out, we can see abundant evidence of this in those prehistoric
artefacts and monuments that silently defy all comprehension and translation. That which
is the condition of transmission through the ages is not a guarantor of the success of any
such transmission.
Derrida rejects Husserl’s suggestion that the intentional origin of geometry was unique
to one particular person at one time. He maintains that the unpacking of the Idea in the
Kantian sense undercuts any such suggestion. This, we may recall, is the notion of an
ideal object as an essential element in a process of approximation towards a complete
system of objective, univocal knowledge. Derrida’s argument is that a person would have
no appreciation of the ideality of geometry without possessing this notion, even if they
chanced upon a bare geometrical formation in the empirical world. The proto-geometer
could never understand the significance of such formations without some awareness of
science, of its ultimate end.15 This awareness would include some of the conditions that a
formation would have to fulfill in order to have an essential status in any science. For this
reason, the Idea in the Kantian sense is not just the end of geometry—it is its very origin.
Anyone who attains to this idea begins in just as original and authentic a fashion as the
chronologically first geometer, since it is not specific to any one culture at any one time.
Apart from a brute empirical history of ownership and copyrights, Derrida wonders
whether we can ever speak of a once-off or unrepeatable origin of geometry. Since the
intentional origin of geometry need not be unique to any one factual individual, geometry
could in principle have an infinite number of births and birth certificates, each one
upstaging its forebears. On this view, it can be difficult to divide intentional acts into ones
that are original on the one hand and derivative or parasitic on the other.
Perhaps the most important caveat that Derrida has in connection with The Origin of
Geometry pertains to Husserl’s suggestion that what is lost in writing was a transparent
plenitude in its own time. This is the idea that the proto-geometer was adequately aware
in the living present of consciousness of what he or she was about in constituting an ideal
formation. The fact that the meaning of an ideal object as an Idea in the Kantian sense is
universally accessible, notes Derrida, does not entail that this meaning is adequately given
in the present. In fact and in principle, the project within which we understand the ideality
and objectivity of a formation cannot be realized in the living present of a human subject.
The present meaning is given by virtue of an ideal which is deferred ad infinitum. The
sign that gives the object its meaning is the sign of something for ever absent, because the

42.4 Page 414

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 376
realization of a complete science within which the significance of an ideal object would
be transparently intelligible always recedes as we approach it. We can have the empty
idea, but not that of which it is the idea. To comprehend the inability of consciousness to
reach such an absolute is to comprehend the structural necessity of deferral, delay, or
difference. As a structure of infinite anticipation devoid of final fulfilment, the absolute is
a limit, a condition of possibility of meaning that cannot be imagined in itself alone. To
make it real one would have to be an omnipotent God untrammelled by perspective and
distance, eternally comprehending everything within its absolute gaze. The origin of
geometry and of objectivities in general lies in a promised land which even the so-called
proto-geometer never saw in the living present of consciousness. Even in its own time the
past-present was never an undivided plentitude. The meaning of objectivity presupposed
something that could never be brought into view.
Derrida’s second book, translated as Speech and Phenomena [13.27], was published in
1967. Derrida has described this essay as the one which he likes most, because it raises in
a ‘juridicially decisive’ way the ‘privilege of the voice’ as it occurs in western
metaphysics in general and in Husserl in particular. He also says that this work can be
read as the other side, the recto or verso, of the earlier Introduction ([13.27], 5). In the
later work, Derrida focuses his attention on the Husserlian claim that the living present is
based on an undivided immediacy of self-consciousness. In the Introduction, Derrida had
already argued against the idea that we can ground the meaning of objectivity in an
undivided present of consciousness. Now he will argue that this latter notion is a
metaphysical illusion in itself. Reflective awareness or subjectivity is also dependent on
the representation by the sign of something that cannot be made fully present.
In his account of conscious mental life in the Logical Investigations (1900–1), Husserl
makes a distinction between a signified meaning that can be fully present to
consciousness and one that can be only indirectly present. A meaning of the first type can
be described as an expression (Ausdruck). A meaning of the second type is anything
conveyed through indication (Anzeichen). In general terms, the world of indication is
composed of those signs referring to things outside direct awareness. The function of an
indicative sign is that of standing in for something that is completely or partially absent.
Although it has its referent or signified, this type of sign is devoid of intrinsic meaning.
To be more than an empty bearer or carrier it must be given meaning by a specific
intention, though it may not transmit this in its fullness. When I read a book in which the
author indicates something to me, for instance, I can grasp that something without
intuiting his or her background intention as well as I could intuit an intention of my own.
In contrast to derivative indications, expressions are inherently meaningful and fully
present to the self. They mean something and they express a meaning. Because an
expression effectively includes content and object, it is a sign that almost immediately
gives way to the actual thing that it signifies. Every expression can subsequently acquire
an indicative function, for example when I communicate it’ to another person via speech.
In this case expression is given a phonic material body. It is this vehicle that allows it to
enter into the arena of intersubjectivity. I can also communicate through writing, through
a graphic material body. This puts expression into the historical field that threatens the
perversion and loss of meaning. Writing lacks the immediacy of speech. When I make an
utterance I can hear myself speak. I concretely experience and understand an indication

42.5 Page 415

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 377
that has been permeated by an expression. What I say is present to me, under my
intentional control. This immediacy can be lost in writing. When I write something, it can
go out beyond my living present. The original immediacy is cast adrift with the
indication, and fades into the dead letter on the page. Speech is the only material medium
that safeguards the life of expressed intuitions, for it is a reflection of the uncontaminated
immediacy of conscious life. This is why thinking is often described as a form of self-
addressed inner speech. In the actual zone of conscious life, however, Husserl does not
hold that the solitary mind engages in a silent dialogue with itself. In the interior field of
pre-expressive intuition, we can only imagine mercurial messages flitting through the
galleries of the transcendental ego. We have no need to communicate anything at this
level because our meanings are immediately experienced and understood. Not even the
blink of an eye can be held to separate an intention and my intuition of it. In the pure self-
relation of reflective consciousness, the realm of signs is really quite useless (ganz
zwecklos).
Derrida rejects Husserl’s initial prioritization of speech over writing, which he terms
phonocentrism. This privilege of the voice is regarded by Derrida as a metaphysical
assumption foreign to the rigour of a thoroughgoing phenomenological philosophy.
Derrida points to the fact that Husserl characterizes most conscious intentions as
imperfect or unfulfilled. In perception I intend the entire bureau that I am leaning on. Yet
it is only partially present to me as a hard and black horizontal surface that I see with my
eyes and touch with my elbows. In imagination I intend the cellars of Ludwig of
Bavaria’s fairytale castle. These are only present to me in so far as they can be envisaged
without acquaintance or description. It is linguistic signs that stand in for these absences.
We use these to denote objects and states of affairs that are either indirectly given or not
given at all. On this description, signs can operate perfectly well in the complete absence
of their object, and indeed this is one of their essential functions. But what about cases
where the object, so to speak, is the human subject itself? We have to ask whether
propositions with reflexive pronouns are properly meaningful in the absence of the
subject that communicates them.
Husserl draws back from affirming this. He admits that we can understand the ordinary
everyday meaning of a mathematical proposition, for example, quite apart from the
circumstances of our use of it. We can read it without thinking of a particular person. But
in a statement that uses the word ‘I’, such as ‘I am alive’, Husserl states that we can glean
its proper meaning only from the individual intentions that permeate it at the time of its
utterance or inscription. If we were to read this statement without knowing who wrote it,
says Husserl, it might not be meaningless, but it would be alienated from its normal
meaning. According to Derrida, however, such a proposition can and does function
normally in the absence of a speaker or writer. ‘I am alive’ retains its normal meaning
even when the original subject is dead or fictitious. The meaning borne in the reflexive
sign or proposition does not have to be fulfilled by a personal intuition. Language has a
life of its own in writing, and there is no good reason to think why the situation is any
different in speech. Here also we have to allow for the transmigration of signs that have
their own meaning. If the expressed personal intuition that my voice breathes into the
sign were to give it its normal meaning, and if this were to stay with the sign, then
everyone would have to use my own private language. According to Derrida:

42.6 Page 416

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 378
The absence of intuition—and therefore of the subject of the intuition—is not
only tolerated by speech; it is required by the general structure of signification,
when considered in itself. It is radically requisite: the total absence of the
subject and object of a statement—the death of the writer and/or the
disappearance of the objects he was able to describe—does not prevent a text
from ‘meaning’ something. On the contrary, this possibility gives birth to
meaning as such, gives it out to be heard and read.
([13.2], 104; [13.27], 93)
In the world that we actually find, the meaning of each and every sign is independent of
whatever momentary intentional fulfilment the speaking or writing subject may give it.
Precisely because he recognizes that language has its own life, Husserl tries to limit
normal or proper meaning to the here and now of the speaking subject. Yet this subject,
implicated in a living medium not under its control, has to stand like a watchguard over
its utterances. We often enunciate a statement and immediately qualify it, aware that our
intention does not encounter a neutral container. We hang around so as to catch certain
‘normal’ implications of the sign that we were not sufficiently aware of at the time of
speaking or writing. And it could even be argued that writing is better than speaking
inasmuch as it focuses the mind and enables greater clarity of expression, though again
this is not safeguarded from perversion or loss in either medium.
Derrida is not content with exposing phonocentrism as an unjustified prejudice. He
wants to show that the conception of an immediate, self-identical consciousness reflected
in expression and subsequently cast into an impure world of indication itself falls down.
Husserl argues that signs are redundant in the self-relation because we are present to
ourselves in an undivided now, though he is very careful to qualify this last idea. This can
be seen in a series of lectures which he composed between 1893 and 1917 and later
published as On the Phenomenology of the Consciousness of Internal Time in 1928.
Husserl here rejects out of hand any recourse to the notion of detached atomic instants of
consciousness. Our conscious processes are always ongoing and interconnected, making
up a flowing stream. Within this stream every present moment or immediate now of self-
consciousness carries an inheritance from the past (retention) and an anticipation of the
future (protention).
The past that is held in retention is different from a past that has to be reproduced.
Reproduction is the recreation of an event that is completely over, one that lies in the
more distant past. It is the reactivation of a dead event and it always involves some
vagueness and distortion. Retention is the holding of an immediately lapsed past in the
present moment of consciousness. It would be analogous to the hum of a dinner-gong that
echoes on in my ears. The present-past of retention avoids the inevitable imperfection of
reproduction, because there is no significant temporal lapse between the present moment
and the immediately past one that makes up the content of the retention. I have to be
conscious of the retentional content in the present moment to be conscious of the latter’s
immediacy. This can only be identified when I have an immediate past against which it
can be contrasted.
As stated above, the present moment also involves a protention. This is an anticipation

42.7 Page 417

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 379
of the next moment of awareness, the one that will immediately follow the now. Implicit
in self-consciousness is the expectation that the now will pass into a new moment within
which I shall be just as present to myself as I am in this one. I could of course switch
attention, be knocked unconscious or drop dead, but the suspension or cessation of self-
consciousness cannot be experienced or imagined per se. I cannot know what it is like not
to be self-aware; since by definition one cannot be cognizant of such a state when one is
in it. Barring accidents then, self-consciousness (the ground of human subjectivity) is
understood as something ongoing, not as a once-off act. It has an ideal and repeatable
character. Every protention is the expression of this understanding, anticipating as it does
the repetition of the present moment of self-awareness. Reflective consciousness can be
extensive and continuous because each moment contains the ‘about to be’ as well as the
‘just gone’. Through protention and retention, past, present and future are connected in
each individual moment of reflective awareness.
On Derrida’s reading, Husserl is correct and prescient to recognize that each moment
of self-consciousness involves retentions and protentions. But it is this very recognition
that opens up a fissure in the claim that the now is something pure, unified and devoid of
signification. It has been possible to present the now to consciousness only by setting it
against something different, the immediately past now. It has been possible to present it
as part of an unbroken unity only by anticipating the moment that will immediately
succeed it. Consciousness of the selfsame, the now, always requires consciousness of the
other, the not-now. Put another way, that which is different has to be held over and
anticipated within the same so as to produce immediacy and continuity, the essential
characteristics of a conscious subject. Derrida describes this retentional and protentional
process as autoaffection. It constitutes rather than being constituted: ‘This movement of
difference is not something that happens to a transcendental subject; it produces a subject.
Auto-affection is not a modality of experience that characterizes a being that would
already be itself (autos). It produces sameness as self-relation within self-difference; it
produces sameness as the nonidentical’ ([13.2], 92; [13.27], 82). Derrida is arguing
against the idea of a self-identical now and hence of a primordial and self-contained
subjectivity. To be itself the now has to point to moments beyond itself. Because they are
actual forms of pointing, retention and protention can effectively be understood as signs
of what has lapsed and what is pending. But is this admission of signs into the now of
reflective consciousness also an invasion by indication? Taking retention on its own, one
could argue that since it perfectly captures the past as it was in its own time, it is a
fulfilled or expressive sign. In the case of protention, however, the situation seems
different. The pending moment which I point to in the now will in turn point to another
moment, and the cessation of this process is unimaginable—it could proceed to infinity.
What I point to will never fulfil the present sign, because it will not itself be a self-
referential plenitude. When one comes to look backwards, one sees that the situation was
in fact the same. The present moment was itself anticipated in a previous moment, and
that moment was also anticipated, right back to a primal moment of reflection that cannot
be isolated because there was no antecedent reflection to identify it against. (The
antecedent moment would be an unconscious trace hidden from view.) The most recent
protention anticipating the immediate now passed over into a retention on the arrival of
this present moment, and from this it can be concluded that both protention and retention

42.8 Page 418

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 380
(one of which collapses into the other) are condemned to an unfulfilled and indicative
function. The present moment cannot fulfil that which pointed to it in the past, and the
pending moment will not fulfil that which is pointing to it in the present. Difference
doubly contaminates the now. It only allows self-presence through a Janus-faced
indication of an indefinite past and future. Presence is always already outside of itself,
and so on without a definite end.
Derrida concludes his reading by adverting to a strangely prophetic passage from the
first volume of Husserl’s Ideas (1913). Husserl remembers walking through the Dresden
Gallery and seeing a painting by Teniers. This represents a gallery of paintings, each of
which represent further paintings in an endless regress. In this passage, as Derrida
interprets it, can be glimpsed the fate of phenomenology. This raises the question of
whether Husserl in some way reaches deconstruction avant la lettre. In the course of
Speech and Phenomena Derrida speaks of Husserl’s ‘admirable’ analysis of internal time
consciousness, an analysis which he further characterizes as one of ‘incomparable
depth’ ([13.2], 94 n. 1; [13.27], 84 n. 9). It seems strange that Husserl failed to see where
this analysis was leading. The explanation, for Derrida, lies in the fact that the idea of
unmediated or perfect presence is a pervasive and hidden prejudice carried forward from
ancient times. The emphasis on the ‘now’ as an Archimedean point, the ground of
immediacy and certainty, is one particular manifestation of this. So powerful is the
prejudice that even Husserl, the first to provide the means for its circumscription, none
the less remains under its sway. He stands on the very threshold of the deconstruction of
the metaphysics of presence.
A brief overview of Derrida’s career could well begin with the essays from his
formative period in Writing and Difference (1967) [13.3; 13.28]. This collection includes
the first article on genesis and structure and also ‘Force and Signification’ and ‘Structure,
Sign and Play’, where the earlier analysis can be seen applied to modern structuralism.
Whilst agreeing with the structuralist critique of a subjectivity that would be anterior to
the world of signs, Derrida sees the general enterprise as misled in its tendency to
construct closed sign-systems that are abstracted from time and change, and, having done
this, to characterize these as transcendental realities that determine meaning in general.
The dream of unearthing foundational structures centred on some fixed theme is a
metaphysical illusion which sustains itself only by concealing the dynamic and ongoing
process of constitution through which meanings emerge and mutate. The point at which
this strategy is made evident is the point at which structuralism’s fabrications begin to
tremble and show their cracks. It is here that deconstruction takes its hold.
In ‘Violence and Metaphysics’, Derrida engages with the thought of Emmanuel
Levinas. Characterizing the history of philosophy since Parmenides as a totalitarian
wasteland, Levinas calls for an openness to the experience of the other that lies beyond
the dominion of reason, whose logos has always been one of violence and power. The
only ethical relationship to this other, or others, is one of infinite responsibility and
respect. Whilst greatly admiring the approach of Levinas, Derrida argues that he does not
pay due attention to Husserl’s studies of intersubjectivity or to Heidegger’s ‘destruction’
of those forms of thought that proceed from a determinate precomprehension of Being.
Derrida also maintains that ordinary language and the philosophical discourse that
proceeds from it cannot be escaped in the way that Levinas would like. Since the other

42.9 Page 419

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 381
can only be revealed through discourse—the opening of peace as well as of war—the
attempt to transcend this risks its suppression, which would result in the worst violence.
In ‘Freud and the Scene of Writing’, Derrida examines Freud’s metaphor of the mystic
writing pad, where the unconscious is likened to a text and the structures and layers of
this text compared to forms of writing. This text, Derrida will argue, is a weave of signs
based on lost traces which involves intervals spaced out in time just as in the world of
conscious awareness. It would be one more ruse of reason to see the unconscious text as
embodying primordial truths that could be brought to the surface and transcribed, like an
original that is somehow reproduced. Even the most radical of critiques run the danger of
confirming presence at a deeper level, and metapsychology is no exception. This theme
of covertly reinstating what one seeks to reject recurs throughout the remaining essays
and through the later Derrida.
Of Grammatology (1967) [13.4; 13.29] is an extended reworking of an article of the
same name that Derrida originally published in two parts in 1965. The book incorporates
many of the conclusions reached in Speech and Phenomena, and its purpose, according to
Derrida, is to make enigmatic the concepts of proximity and of the proper that are
included in the concept of presence. The deconstruction of these begins with the
deconstruction of consciousness. Derrida explicitly generalizes the concept of the
indicative sign to include anything that can possibly appear, whether it is ‘originally’ in
consciousness or in the world of sense-experience. All ‘present’ things are internally
constituted by variation of phonic and graphic marks or protentions and retentions. The
manifest is what it is through being always ready set against irreducible absences. There
is never a thing in itself that could come to glow in the luminosity of its own presence.
Derrida rejects the belief that a sign or sign-system can eventually fall away before the
naked object, like a veil that would drop from our eyes. This is the myth of the
transcendental signified, of a terminus to the play of signs somehow outside that play. It
recurs in various guises throughout the philosophical tradition, as God, or matter, or
absolute knowledge, or the end of history. It remains a myth because it is never realized.
In the absence of the transcendental signified we are left with the apparent limitlessness
and pervasiveness of the play of signs. In this sense it can be held that everything is
writing, with every instantiation of this general writing making up a text. (To give a crude
example, the red sky in the morning is a set of signs written on the blank sheet of the sky.
This text points to an indeterminate series of other events that will probably include a
storm.) All meanings are inscribed in a text and point to other meanings in other texts.
The world would be the most general text, though it is never closed or finished. The
history of philosophy can be read as a sustained attempt to suppress such a seemingly
endless play.
The ideal of the transcendental signified, according to Derrida, is the obverse side of
logocentrism, which is the affirmation—in whatever form—of a pre-ordained order, of a
univocal and proper meaning to all things that merely awaits discovery. Because it poses
a threat to the communication of every supposed univocity, graphic writing has
traditionally been relegated to the role of a dangerous and accidental supplement, with
Rousseau providing the most notable example of such a strategy. Writing has been
understood as something subsequent to a pre-given plenitude. But Derrida argues that
there is another meaning to supplementarity which has been all but ignored in the

42.10 Page 420

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 382
philosophical canon. The supplement is also that which is required to make up for a lack.
If graphic writing were no longer seen as exterior and accidental, the way would be paved
for the recognition of general writing as the weave of differences that inhabit and make
possible all forms of presence. It is not by accident that Rousseau conceives of writing as
an unhappy mischance, the root of dissemblance and impropriety. Writing has to be
suppressed if he is to uphold the logocentric illusion of a prelapsarian state of nature.
Rousseau most clearly demonstrates the inevitable violence of metaphysics, which
equates propriety with pure presence through the debasement of writing.
The year 1972 saw the publication of three further books by Derrida: Margins of
Philosophy [13.5; 13.30], Dissemination [13.6; 13.31] and Positions [13.7; 13.32].
Margins is made up of eleven articles written from 1967 on. Most of these are
applications of a practice of reading whose theoretical grounding is effectively completed
in the second article of the collection, entitled ‘Différance’. This piece can also be read as
a summary of the earlier works. Derrida presents différance as the development of
Saussure’s insight that in language there are only differences. It is also presented as an
outcome of the important Heideggerian notion of ontological difference, the difference
between Being and beings considered as such:
It is the domination of beings that différance everywhere comes to solicit, in the
sense that sollicitare, in old Latin, means to shake as a whole, to make tremble
in entirety. Therefore, it is the determination of Being as presence or as
beingness that is interrogated by the thought of différance. Such a question
could not emerge and be understood unless the difference between Being and
beings were somewhere to be broached. First consequence: différance is not. It
is not a present being, however excellent, unique, principal, or transcendent. It
governs nothing, reigns over nothing, and nowhere exercises any authority. It is
not announced by any capital letter. Not only is there no kingdom of différance,
but différance instigates the subversion of every kingdom…. Since Being has
never had a ‘meaning’, has never been thought or said as such, except by
dissimulating itself in beings, then différance, in a certain and very strange way,
(is) ‘older’ than the ontological difference or than the truth of Being.
([13.5], 22–3; [13.30], 21–2)
Being is not a meaning that commands from a lofty height. It emerges from beings and
they from it. In a similar way the intelligible needs the sensible and the natural the
cultural. Différance is the productive movement of differing and deferring. Every concept
is deferred in signifying a plenitude without realization and differed in gaining identity
from that which it is not. Différance is not a concept, but that which makes concepts
possible. It is not an essence, for it assumes a different form in each relation and does not
exist before these.
In the third article, ‘Ousia and Grammē’, Derrida examines a note by Heidegger
concerning Aristotle on time. Aristotle first posed the problem of how Being can be
determined as presence without determining time as external to substance, and hence as
non-present and nonexistent (the no-longer and the not-yet). According to Derrida,
Heidegger seriously neglects Aristotle’s investigations. Furthermore, Heidegger’s own

43 Pages 421-430

▲back to top

43.1 Page 421

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 383
critique of ‘vulgar temporality’ succumbs—despite its significance—to the aporia or
perplexity outlined by Aristotle. Authentic existence is characterized as primordial
temporality and inauthentic existence as derivative temporality. In this opposition of the
primordial and the derivative Derrida observes a covert reintroduction of Being as self-
present substance.
‘The Ends of Man’ addresses the question of humanism, concentrating on Heidegger’s
critique of the general ideology. Derrida describes this critique as unsurpassed in the
‘archeological radicalness’ of the questions that it sketches. No metahumanist position
can neglect the opening of these questions without being peripheral and secondary
([13.5], 153; [13.30],128). Heidegger wishes to transcend humanism so as to discover the
proper essence and dignity of man, his humanitas. He seeks to move towards an
understanding of man as an openness to the mystery of Being, one who will shepherd the
true meaning of Being in the proximity of the near. Derrida regards this alternative as a
subtle variant of traditional humanism. Heidegger’s evocations of the proper and of
proximity indicate a logocentric ideal, a real meaning of Being and of the self that can be
epiphanically revealed to those who attain to the right attitude.
In Dissemination [13.6; 13.31] Derrida writes on Sollers, Mallarmé and Plato. In the
best-known essay, ‘Plato’s Pharmacy’, phonocentrism is traced back to the Phaedrus
dialogue, where writing is condemned for endangering the truth of the living voice and
reinstated as the inscription of eternal law in the soul. Writing is ambiguously
characterized as poison and cure, this being its most charitable characterization in the
western tradition.
The extended preface or ‘Outwork’ to Dissemination attacks the historical conception
of the book as the best form of encapsulating authorial intentions in the graphic medium,
since it has a definite structure of beginning, expanding and ending. Derrida reactivates
his claim that the différance in all conscious activities usurps transparency and mastery in
every form of every medium. The book is a concatenation of irreconcilable elements and
forces from which meaning is onanistically disseminated or scattered to the four winds.
Positions [13.7; 13.32] is a series of interviews held with Derrida so as to clarify his
own project and its relationship with other intellectual movements. It can lay claim to
being one of the more illuminating introductions to his thinking. According to Derrida,
deconstruction is not a simple overturning of traditional philosophical prejudices or
‘violent hierarchies’. It is best conceived as a double gesture of unseating the privileged
motifs within texts (speech, nature, spirit, etc.) and then showing how the opposites on
which they depend are sited within a subtext or shadow-text. The so-called master text is
always haunted by a double that dislocates it rather than destroying it. Différance
produces two texts or two ways of looking that are at once together and separate.
Glas (1974) [13.8; 13.33] can be interpreted as a rather jarring example of
deconstructive work in progress.16 Hegel’s discourses concerning God, law, religion and
the family are presented on one side of each page and Jean Genet’s somewhat different
treatment of the same topics on the other. Derrida’s running commentary oscillates
somewhere between the two. The subtlety of this rather inaccessible performance may lie
in showing that the reader always becomes a writer to extract sense. It could also be
viewed as a once-off experiment in hyper-Joycean equivocity, for Derrida never again
presents a work in this precise format.

43.2 Page 422

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 384
With Spurs (1978) [13.10; 13.35], Derrida moves to a consideration of sexual
difference. He focuses his attention on Nietzsche’s strange denunciation of woman as the
nexus of untruth and subversion, which on first sight might appear as one more rendering
of Schopenhauer’s misogynism. Derrida draws out of Nietzsche’s cryptic remarks an
anticipation of some of the themes in modern feminist criticism, since the latter was
never noted for his love of the established order or of traditional conceptions of truth.
In The Post Card (1980) [13.12; 13.37], Derrida develops at length the theme—already
seen at length in his work on the origin of geometry—of messages that fail to reach their
destinations. In the course of readings of Freud, Lacan and Heidegger, he compares
general writing to a telecommunications service that is quite capable of suffering hitches
and breakdowns. The little postcard that is open to all symbolizes the fragility of
meanings always already cast into space and time. Even messages that reach their
addressees without too much delay can be misunderstood, whether they come from the
subconscious, from the mystical contemplation of being, or from ‘external’ sources.
Most of Derrida’s work since the late 1970s has concentrated on literature and its genre
distinction with philosophy on the one hand and on matters ethical and political on the
other. A good example of the first set of interests can be seen in Parages (‘Regions’)
(1986) [13.15], which engages with the work of Maurice Blanchot. Derrida has also
written on Ponge, Celan and Joyce.
The increased concern with ethics and politics first emerges in The Ear of the Other
(1982) [13.1; 13.38], which was based on a colloquium held in Montreal in 1979.
Derrida’s remarks emerge out of considerations of the philosophical problems of
autobiography and translation. He stresses that whilst différance undercuts authorial
mastery and makes every interpretation a misreading, it does not destroy personal
responsibility. The fact that statements and writings immediately take on a life of their
own is an argument for eternal vigilance. One should at least attempt to foresee possible
misinterpretations of one’s works. Though the exercise cannot always succeed, it may
minimize certain dangers inherent in inscription. These dangers have been well shown in
the use that at least one ideology has made of the work of Nietzsche. We have to proceed
as if every part of what we say and write could be taken out of context.
Psyché: Inventions de l’autre (‘Psyche: Inventions of the Other’) (1987) [13.17]
includes articles on Reconstructive methodology, sexual difference, racism and nuclear
deterrence. In ‘Racism’s last word’, written for an itinerant exhibition of art against
apartheid, Derrida scrutinizes this very word. Apartheid is the appellation for one of the
world’s ultimate forms of racism. It signifies the violence of the talking animal that can
make words discriminate rather than discern. Though it claims to represent a state of law
derived from a natural or divine right, the day will come when this word will resonate in
its own emptiness. Yet the collapse of what it signifies will be credited not just to the
triumph of moral standards but to the laws of liberal economics that have come to
determine this system as ‘inefficient’. These laws of the market are another standard of
calculation to be analysed.
In ‘No Apocalypse, Not Now’, Derrida attacks certain consequentialist assumptions in
the logic of nuclear deterrence. The leading idea in the nuclear arms race has been that
each advance in destructive capability will so impress the opposition as to make
catastrophe more unlikely. Derrida notes that this assumes that the ‘best intentions’

43.3 Page 423

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 385
would always be ‘correctly interpreted’ by the other side. The seeming success of this
strategy has also pleased the military-industrial complex. Expensive contracts can be
made without any apparent increase in danger.
In the lengthy afterword to Limited Inc. (1988) [13.22; 13.44], the full record of
Derrida’s critique of the work of J.L.Austin and exchange with John Searle, Derrida tries
to clarify questions concerning the aim and extent of the activity of deconstruction.
Derrida states that although the themes of full presence and immediacy have been
subjected to deconstruction, he has never argued for an untrammelled free-play of
meaning. There can be a relative stability of meaning in texts; the point being made is
only that this is not self-sufficient, immutable or indestructible. The double reading
revealing a double text shows that the dominant meaning or interpretation of a text cannot
live up to all its claims. In undoing conceptual hierarchies deconstruction seeks to
achieve a more just balance. It does not suspend or reject the possibility of truth or of
communication.
With Memoires for Paul de Man (1988) [13.21; 13.43] and Du droit à la philosophie
(1990) [13.23], Derrida has included essays concerning the responsibilities and position
of the intellectual in the modern or post-Enlightenment world.17 He has maintained that
the freedom of the academic world is only an abstract one, since the members of this
world are effectively excluded from the fields of ethical and political decision-making.
One of the crucial roles of the university in a technocratically managed society, according
to Derrida, has been to provide a place where trouble-makers can be properly corralled
and the compliant properly funded. As can be imagined, these analyses have not
contributed greatly to Derrida’s popularity amongst certain academics.
The most intriguing question that the essays in these books have raised—as with much
of Derrida’s work over the last few years—is that of the future direction of his project.
Whilst his concentration on ethics and politics could be read as the unfolding of the
hitherto unseen and positive aspects of deconstructive practice, it does not involve a clear
advance on the theoretical groundwork already sketched in the 1960s. Furthermore,
Derrida has not spoken of any departure from or revision of the existing body of texts.
All the comments he has made on his work have been more or less explanatory in nature.
It remains to be seen what new paths may be opened in the future by this most
controversial of modern thinkers.
Timothy Mooney
NOTES
1 This section reworks certain arguments from the opening sections of The Ethics of
Deconstruction: Derrida and Levinas [13.73].
2 This formulation implies, of course, a certain delusion on Rousseau’s part, namely that he did
not mean to say what he actually said and that what he actually meant to say is in
contradiction with what is said in his text. Such a line of thought recalls Paul de Man’s
objections to Derrida in ‘The Rhetoric of Blindness: Jacques Derrida’s Reading of
Rousseau’, in Blindness and Insight: Essays in the Rhetoric of Contemporary Criticism, 2nd
edn (London: Methuen, 1983), pp. 102–41, where de Man goes so far as to claim that
‘Rousseau’s text has no blind spots’ (p. 139). Consequently, ‘there is no need to deconstruct

43.4 Page 424

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 386
Rousseau’ (ibid.). However, de Man continues, there is a profound need to deconstruct the
established tradition of Rousseau interpretation which has systematically misread his texts.
Thus, although de Man claims that Derrida is Rousseau’s ‘best modern interpreter’ (p. 135),
one who has restored ‘the complexities of reading to the dignity of a philosophical
question’ (p. 110), Derrida is still blind to the necessarily ambivalent status of Rousseau’s
literary language (p. 136). Derrida fails to read Rousseau as literature. Of Grammatology is
therefore an exemplary case of de Man’s thesis on the necessary interaction of blindness and
insight in the language of criticism.
In defence of Derrida, let me briefly say that despite de Man’s many insights, his blindness to
Of Grammatology consists in the fact that he reads the latter as a critique of Rousseau and
not as a double reading. Derrida is no more speaking against Rousseau than he is speaking
for him. Indeed, one might go so far as to say that the proper name ‘Rousseau’, whose texts
Derrida comments upon, simply signifies the dominant interpretation (or, for de Man,
misreading) of Rousseau; that of the ‘époque de Rousseau’ ([13.4], 145; [13.29], 97), an
interpretation that sees Rousseau simply as a philosopher of presence, and which ascribes to
him the fiction of logocentrism, a fiction that extends even to modern anthropologists like
Lévi-Strauss, whose structuralism, it must be remembered, is Derrida’s real target for so
much of part two of Of Grammatology.
3 J.Searle, ‘Reiterating the Differences: A Reply to Derrida’, Glyph, 2 (1977): 203.
4 J.Habermas, The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity, trans. F.Lawrence (Oxford: Polity
Press, 1987), pp. 185–210.
5 Cf. Heidegger, Sein und Zeit, 15th edn (Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, 1984), p. 26, trans.
J.Macquarrie and E.Robinson as Being and Time (Oxford: Blackwell, 1962), p. 49.
6 Cf. Heidegger, Zur Sache des Denkens (Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, 1969), p. 9, trans.
J.Stambaugh as Time and Being (New York: Harper & Row, 1972), p. 9.
7 R.Kearney, Dialogues with Contemporary Continental Thinkers (Manchester: Manchester
University Press, 1984), 124.
8 Cf. E.Levinas, ‘Transcendence et hauteur’, Bulletin de la Société Française de la
Philosophie, 56:3 (1962):92.
9 R.Gasché [13.61], 101.
10 Dialogues with Contemporary Continental Thinkers, 108.
11 For a detailed discussion of closure in Derrida, see ‘The Problem of Closure in Derrida’, in
[13.73], 59–106.
12 J.Derrida, ‘Ponctuations: Le Temps de la thèse’, in Du droit à la philosophie [13.23], 444,
trans. K.McLoughlin, ‘The Time of a Thesis: Punctuations’, in A.Montefiore (ed.),
Philosophy in France Today (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1983), p. 38.
13 Ibid., p. 446, trans. pp. 39–40.
14 Derrida, Introduction à l’origine de la géométrie par Edmund Husserl [13.1], trans. [13.26],
90. For a detailed outline of Derrida’s Introduction and its influence on his later work see
R.Bernet, ‘On Derrida’s “Introduction” to Husserl’s Origin of Geometry’ in J.Silverman (ed.)
[13.70], 139–53.
15 Neither Derrida nor Husserl would ever deny the bare logical objectivity of a geometrical
truth, that the three angles of a triangle make up two right-angles in two-dimensional space,
for example. What they are claiming is that a particular objectivity is only philosophically
significant when set within a wider context. For a more detailed explanation of this claim, see
the Introduction, pp. 31–3 (trans. pp. 47–8).
16 Leavey has provided a concordance of references to Hegel in his Glassary (Lincoln:
University of Nebraska Press, 1986).

43.5 Page 425

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 387
17 Derrida’s comments on the modern university clearly display the influence of Heidegger, as
he would be the first to admit. An interesting comparison can be made between this aspect of
Derrida’s work and the more recent writings of the Austro-American philosopher Paul
Feyerabend. In particular see the latter’s Farewell to Reason (London and New York: Verso,
1987).
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
The most exhaustive bibliography on the publications of Derrick is by A.Leventure, ‘A
Jacques Derrida Bibliography: 1962–1990’, Textual Practice, 5:1 (spring 1991).
Reprinted in amended form in D.Wood, Derrida: A Critical Reader. Another useful
bibliography is by J.P.Leavey Jr and D.Allison, ‘A Derrida Bibliography’, Research in
Phenomenology, 8 (1978):145–60. Also useful is the list given by P.Kamuf (ed.) in A
Derrida Reader: Between the Blinds (New York and London: Harvester Wheatsheaf,
1991). Many of Derrida’s articles have been published several times in French and
English in a bewildering variety of books and journals. I have confined the following list
to his published books.
Primary texts
13.1 Introduction à l’origine de la géométrie par Edmund Husserl, Paris: Presses
Universitaires de France, 1962.
13.2 La Voix et le phénomène: Introduction au problème du signe dans la
phénoménologie de Husserl, Paris: Presses Universitaries de France, 1967.
13.3 L’Ecriture et la différence, Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1967.
13.4 De la grammatologie, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1967.
13.5 Marges de la philosophie, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1972.
13.6 La Dissémination, Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1972.
13.7 Positions, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1972.
13.8 Glas, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1974.
13.9 L’Archéologie du frivole: Lire Condillac, Paris: Denoël-Gonthier, 1976.
13.10 Eperons: Les Styles de Nietzsche, Paris: Aubier-Flammarion, 1978.
13.11 La Vérité en peinture, Paris: Aubier-Flammarion, 1978.
13.12 La Carte postale: De Socrate à Freud et au-delà, Paris: Aubier-Flammarion, 1980.
13.13 L’Oreille de l’autre: Otobiographies, transferts, traductions: Textes et débats avec
Jacques Derrida, ed. C.Levesque and C.V.McDonald, Montreal: VLB Editions, 1982.
13.14 D’un ton apocalyptique adopté naguère en philosophie, Paris: Editions Galilée,
1983.
13.15 Parages, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1986. (A collection of essays translated in several
English language texts.)
13.16 Schibboleth, pour Paul Celan, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1986.
13.17 Psyché: Inventions de l’autre, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1987. [A collection of essays
translated in several English language texts.]
13.18 De l’esprit: Heidegger et la question, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1987.

43.6 Page 426

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 388
13.19 Ulysse Gramophone: Deux mots pour Joyce, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1987. [Two
essays translated in separate English language texts.]
13.20 Signéponge, Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1988.
13.21 Mémoires pour Paul de Man, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1988.
13.22 Limited Inc. Paris: Editions Galilée, 1990.
13.23 Du droit à la philosophie, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1990. [A collection of essays
translated in several English language texts.]
13.24 Le Problème de la genèse dans la. philosophie de Husserl, Paris: Presses
Universitaries de France, 1990. [A printing of Derrida’s master’s thesis.]
13.25 L’Autre Cap, Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1991.
Translations
13.26 Edmund Husserl’s Origin of Geometry: An Introduction, trans. J.P.Leavey, Jr,
Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1989, rev. edn.
13.27 Speech and Phenomena and Other Essays on Husserl’s Theory of Signs, trans.
D.B.Allison, Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1973.
13.28 Writing and Difference, trans. A.Bass, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1978.
13.29 Of Grammatology, trans. G.C.Spivak, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press,
1975.
13.30 Margins of Philosophy, trans. A.Bass, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1982.
13.31 Dissemination, trans. B.Johnson, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981.
13.32 Positions, trans. A.Bass, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1982.
13.33 Glas, trans. J.P.Leavey, Jr, and R.Rand, Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press,
1986.
13.34 The Archeology of the Frivolous: Reading Condillac, trans. J.P.Leavey, Jr,
Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1987.
13.35 Spurs/Eperons, trans. B.Harlow, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979,
bilingual edn.
13.36 The Truth in Painting, trans. G.Bennington and I.McLeod, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1987.
13.37 The Post Card: From Socrates to Freud and Beyond, trans. A.Bass, Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1987.
13.38 The Ear of the Other: Otobiography, Transference, Translation: Texts and
Discussions with Jacques Derrida, trans. P.Kamuf and A.Ronell, Lincoln: University
of Nebraska Press, 1988, rev. edn.
13.39 ‘Of an Apocalyptic Tone Recently Adopted in Philosophy’, trans. J.P. Leavey, Jr,
The Oxford Literary Review, 6:2 (1984):3–37.
13.40 ‘Shibboleth’, trans. J.Wilner, in S.Budick and G.Hartman (eds), Midrash and
Literature, New Haven; Yale University Press, 1986, pp. 307–47.
13.41 Of Spirit: Heidegger and the Question, trans. G.Bennington and R.Bowlby,
Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1989.
13.42 Signéponge/Signsponge, trans. R.Rand, New York: Columbia University Press,
1984, bilingual edn.
13.43 Memoires for Paul de Man, trans. E.Cadava, J.Culler, P.Kamuf, and S. Lindsay,

43.7 Page 427

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 389
New York: Columbia University Press, 1989, rev. edn.
13.44 Limited Inc., ed. G.Graff and trans. J.Mehlmann and S.Weber, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1988.
13.45 The Other Heading: Reflections on Today’s Europe, trans. P.-A.Brault and
M.G.Naas, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1992.
13.46 Acts of Literature, trans. D.Attridge, London: Routledge, 1992. [A collection of
essays by Derrida from several sources.]
Criticism: introductory works
13.47 Atkins, D.G. ‘The Sign as a Structure of Difference: Derridean Deconstruction and
Some of Its Implications’, in R.De George (ed.), Semiotic Themes, Lawrence:
University of Kansas Press, 1981, pp. 133–47.
13.48 Cascardi, A.J. ‘Skepticism and Deconstruction’, Philosophy of Literature, 8:1
(1984):1–14.
13.49 Cousins, M. ‘The Logic of Deconstruction’, The Oxford Literary Review, 3:2
(1978):70–7.
13.50 Descombes, V. Modern French Philosophy, trans. J.Harding and L.Scott-Fox,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1980.
13.51 Eldridge, R. ‘Deconstruction and its Alternatives’, Man and World, 18 (1985):147–
70.
13.52 Gasché, R. ‘Deconstruction as Criticism’, Glyph, 7 (1979):177–216.
13.53 Hoy, D.C. ‘Deciding Derrida: On the Work (and Play) of the French Philosopher’,
London Review of Books 4:3:3–5.
13.54 Kearney, R. Modern Movements in European Philosophy, Manchester: Manchester
University Press, 1986.
13.55 Norris, C. Deconstruction: Theory and Practice, New York and London: Methuen,
1982.
13.56 Norris, C. Derrida, London: Fontana, 1987.
13.57 Rorty, R. ‘Philosophy as a Kind of Writing: An Essay on Derrida’, in
Consequences of Pragmatism, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1982, pp.
89–109.
13.58 Wood, D. ‘An Introduction to Derrida’, Radical Philosophy, 21 (1979): 18–28.
Criticism: more detailed works
13.59 Caputo, J.D. Radical Hermeneutics: Repetition, Deconstruction, and the
Hermeneutic Project, Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987.
13.60 Culler, J. On Deconstruction: Theory and Criticism after Structuralism, Ithaca:
Cornell University Press, 1982.
13.61 Gasché, R. The Tain of the Mirror: Derrida. and the Philosophy of Reflection,
Cambridge, Mass, and London: Harvard University Press, 1986.
13.62 Giovannangeli, D. Ecriture et repetition: Approche de Derrida, Paris: Union
Générale d’Editions, 1979.
13.63 Hartman, G. Saving the Text: Philosophy/Derrida/Literature, Baltimore, Johns

43.8 Page 428

▲back to top
Deconstruction and derrida 390
Hopkins University Press, 1982.
13.64 Harvey, I. Derrida and the Economy of Difference, Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1986.
13.65 Kofman, S. Lectures de Derrida, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1984.
13.66 Llewelyn, J. Derrida on the Threshold of Sense, London: Macmillan, 1986.
13.67 Melville, S. Philosophy Beside Itself: On Deconstruction and Modernism,
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986.
13.68 Sallis, J. (ed.) Deconstruction and Philosophy: The Texts of Jacques Derrida,
Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987.
13.69 Silverman, H.J. (ed.) Hermeneutics and Deconstruction, Albany: State University
of New York Press, 1985.
13.70 Silverman, H.J. (ed.) Derrida and Deconstruction, New York and London:
Routledge, 1989.
13.71 Wood, D. and Bernasconi, R. (eds) Derrida and ‘Différance’, Evanston:
Northwestern University Press, 1988.
Criticism: critical and comparative works
13.72 Altizer, T.J. et al. Deconstruction and Theology, New York: Seabury Crossroads,
1982.
13.73 Critchley, S. The Ethics of Deconstruction: Derrida and Levinas, Oxford: Basil
Blackwell, 1992.
13.74 Dasenbrock, R.W. (ed.) Redrawing the Lines: Analytic Philosophy,
Deconstruction, and Literary Theory, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press,
1989.
13.75 Dews, P. Logics of Disintegration: Post-structuralist Thought and the Claims of
Critical Theory, New York and London: Verso, 1987.
13.76 Evans, J.C. Strategies of Deconstruction: Derrida and the Myth of the Voice,
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1991.
13.77 Ferry, L. and Renaut, A. French Philosophy of the Sixties: An Essay on
Antihumanism, trans. M.H.S.Cattani, Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press,
1990.
13.78 Frank. M. What is Neostructuralism?, trans. R.Grey and S.Wilke, Minneapolis:
University of Minnesota Press, 1989.
13.79 Greisch, J. Herméneutique et grammatologie, Paris: Editions du CNRS, 1977.
13.80 Lacoue-Labarthe, P. and Nancy, J.L. (eds) Les Fins de l’homme: a partir du travail
de Jacques Derrida, Paris: Editions Galilée, 1981.
13.81 Michelfelder, D. and Palmer, R. (eds) Dialogue and Deconstruction: The
Gadamer-Derrida Encounter, Albany: State University of New York Press, 1989.
13.82 Rapaport, H. Heidegger and Derrida: Reflections on Time and Language, Lincoln:
University of Nebraska Press, 1989.
13.83 Rose, G. Dialectic of Nihilism: Post-Structuralism and Law, Oxford: Basil
Blackwell, 1984.
13.84 Ryan, M. Marxism and Deconstruction: A Critical Articulation, Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1982.

43.9 Page 429

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 391
13.85 Staten, H. Wittgenstein and Derrida, Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press 1984.
13.86 Wood, D. (ed.) Derrida: A Critical Reader, Oxford, Blackwell, 1992.

43.10 Page 430

▲back to top
CHAPTER 14
Postmodernist theory
Lyotard, Baudrillard and others
Thomas Docherty
INTRODUCTION
Philosophy has been touched by postmodernism. Philosophy, in the modern academy, is
supposed to be the discipline of disciplines: it is philosophy which will be able to gather
together, in one over-arching discourse, all the various micro-disciplinary problems and
procedures dealt with in the differing and ostensibly unrelated fields of literature,
medicine, law, politics and so on; and it is philosophy which will also set itself the task of
explaining their necessary separations. Postmodernism has not ‘challenged’ philosophy;
rather it has simply enabled an earthquake under its foundations; for postmodernism is
most aptly situated precisely in the moment of the eradication of all foundational
thinking. This, of course, makes it a fundamentally paradoxical exercise to ‘define’
postmodernism, for any definition would at once inherently seek the foundationalist
status lexically integral to any description, while it would simultaneously discount in the
semantic content of the definition the very possibility of such foundationalism. In what
follows, therefore, I shall not so much ‘define’ postmodernism in philosophy as indicate
what is at stake in the debates that have constituted the postmodern moment in our
cultures.1
The term ‘postmodern’ was probably first consistently used by Arnold Toynbee in
1939; and it was prefigured in his writings in 1934 (that is, at around the date of the first
recorded instance of the term’s usage in Spanish, by Federico de Onis).2 In A Study of
History, Toynbee suggested that the ‘modern’ historical period had ended, at a date
determined in his studies roughly between 1850 and 1918. Toynbee’s historiography was
a product of the late nineteenth-century desire to found a synoptic and universal history;
and this desire was most easily accommodated in Toynbee’s own individual work by the
fact that his history approximates to the condition of a Christian theodicy. His task was to
redeem humanity by discovering the trajectory of history to be a movement of separation
from God and the eternal returns towards a theocentric and universalizing centre of
meaning for the world. Secularity—history itself—becomes nothing more or less than a
humble interruption in a fundamentally circular narrative structure, whose end is always
already somehow contained in its beginning. This, of course, is reflected in much of the
artistic literary production of the first decades of the present century in western Europe,
where writers such as Eliot, Joyce, Mann, Proust and many others all experimented with
the cyclical structures of history. For Toynbee and his kind, the facts of history would
make sense in relation to a governing narrative structure which would be given and

44 Pages 431-440

▲back to top

44.1 Page 431

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 393
legitimated in advance, since it is narrated fundamentally from the point of view of a
monotheistic God.
Such a notion of history is indebted to conflicts which had their root in Enlightenment.
As Hayden White points out, the Enlightenment broadly agreed with Leibniz’s
monadology in the sense that the philosophers of the Enlightenment subscribed to the
view that there was an underlying unity or direction to human history. But the big
difference between Leibniz and Enlightenment is that Leibniz thinks that this essential
unity of humanity is simply immanent, whereas the philosophers of the Enlightenment
view it as an ideal whose realization lies in the future, an ideal which is therefore, at best,
imminent, or one which is
yet to be realized in historical time. They could not take it as a presupposition of
their historical writing, not merely because the data did not bear it out, but
because it did not accord with their own experience of their own social worlds.
For them the unity of humanity was an ideal which they could project into the
future.3
Toynbee’s invocation of a postmodern moment can thus be seen to accord with the
idealist drive of Leibniz; yet it also acknowledges the necessarily future orientation of
history. Toynbee can plainly see that the ‘modern’ moment is not yet a moment of a
universal accord or harmony. In this, he is rather like the literary critic Erich Auerbach,
who wrote his great study, Mimesis, while living in Turkey in flight from the Nazis. In
that study, Auerbach poignantly and desperately attempts to discern, and to validate in
the literary history of the western world, the idea of a shared humanity in which, ‘below
the surface conflicts’ which ostensibly wedge us apart, ‘the elementary things which our
lives have in common come to light’.4 Both these writers were writing under the sign of
the Second World War, in which the ideology of a specific racial difference and
disharmony momentarily, but triumphantly, was in the ascendant. Auerbach’s answer to
his predicament was to find solace in aesthetic harmony; Toynbee rather hypothesized a
moment in the future, a ‘post-modern’ political moment, when history and humanity can
be properly redeemed.
The word ‘postmodern’ is thus characterized, from its very inception, by an ambiguity.
On the one hand, it is seen to describe a historical period; on the other, it simply describes
a desire, a mood which looks to the future to redeem the present. This ambiguity is at the
core of a tension between postmodernism as an aesthetic style and postmodernity as a
political and cultural reality.
This is an instance of one of the dominant philosophical concerns responsible for
shaping the question of the postmodern: what is the proper relation in our time between
the aesthetic and the political? The particular intimacy of the relation between aesthetics
and politics in postmodernism is apparent even from the earliest considerations of the
question. Leslie Fiedler characterized the emergence of new aesthetic priorities in the
novel during the 1960s as a ‘critical point’ in which new attitudes to time were
developed; and such attitudes, he claimed, ‘constitute…a politics as well as an
esthetics’.5 In the light of this, it is interesting to note that two of the foremost thinkers in
the field of postmodernism, Fredric Jameson and Jean-François Lyotard, both write

44.2 Page 432

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 394
equally fluently and influentially on aesthetic culture and on political practices; and, more
importantly, they have consistently pondered the relation between these hymeneally-
linked activities. A deep formative influence lying behind much of the contemporary
debate, as is now perhaps obvious, is the legacy of the Frankfurt school, perhaps most
especially the work of Adorno, to which I shall return. For present purposes, the single
salient fact is that aesthetic postmodernism is always intimately imbricated with the
issues of a political postmodernity, even if postmodernism and postmodernity may not
always themselves coincide.
As a result of the legacy inherited from Frankfurt, the question of the postmodern is
also, tangentially at least, an issue of Marxism. Marxism, in placing the labouring body at
the interface between consciousness and material history, is the necessary explanatory
and critical correlative of a modern culture whose technology (in the form of an industrial
revolution) divides human knowledge or consciousness from human power or material
history. But the continuing revolutionary shifts within capitalism itself have necessitated
in recent years a marked and vigorous self-reflection on the part of Marxism. In
Habermas, for instance, Marxism has taken ‘the linguistic turn’, in arguments for a
continuation of the emancipatory goals of Marxist theory and practice under a revised
rubric of ‘communicative action’. Habermas’s faith in the continuing viability of a
vigorously self-revising Marxism is shared by Jameson, who models his own version of
‘late Marxism’ to correspond with Mandel’s descriptions of ‘late capitalism’.6
A key date here, of course, is 1968. This is not only a moment which could be
described as the high point of ‘grand theory’ and of the emergence of a poststructuralist
challenge to what had become by then the grand structuralist orthodoxies; it is also the
moment of a critical political failure. The seeming availability of a revolution which
brought workers and intellectuals together all across Europe represented a high point for
a specific kind of Marxist theoretical practice. But when these revolutions failed, many
began, at precisely that moment, to rethink their commitments to the fundamental
premises of Marxist theory. Simultaneously, most other erstwhile dominant philosophical
trajectories (the phenomenological tradition; the insistence on the centrality of Hegel via
Kojève; the entire ‘history of western thought’) came under suspicion and revision.
Rudolph Bahro and André Gorz began, from an economistic perspective, to rethink
issues of growth and sustainable development. Their emergent ecologism coincided
neatly with the ‘imaginative’ aspects of 1968, and Cohn-Bendit began his own movement
from red to green. Kant began to assume the same kind of position of centrality once
occupied by Hegel. Feminism and deconstruction both criticized the monolithic aspects
of the institutions of western thinking. These all coincided neatly with the aftermath of
the Algerian and other colonial crises, and with the growing awareness of the issues
relating to post-colonialist cultures. The developed countries began to question not only
the desire of the underdeveloped countries for the same levels of consumerist technology
as those enjoyed by the First World, but also the reliance of that First World upon
exhaustible planetary resources.
For many European thinkers who were now coming to question the fundamental
grounds of their intellectual activities and philosophies, Marxism now began to appear to
be part of the problem, especially in its assumption of the desirability of human mastery
over nature. The emerging Green movement of this period moved closely to a post-

44.3 Page 433

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 395
Marxism which was sceptical of Enlightenment: sharing the emancipatory ideals and the
desire for the fullest possible enjoyment of human capacities, but tempering that with the
idea of a necessary cohabitation between humanity and the rest of nature. A postmodern
world needed a post-Marxist politics. Gramsci began to assume a prominent position in
this thinking, and the notion of hegemony replaced that of class as a fundamental political
category. A new political pluralism became possible precisely at the moment when
technology, as Lyotard indicates, had made it possible for the multinational companies to
homogenize and unify their forms of control. Yet underneath the increasingly
homogenized capitalist world, the play of local forces continues to pose the threat of a
disruptive pluralism which capitalism must now police if it is to sustain itself. For those
forces to be activated, all we require is the release of something inimical to capital, the
release of something which cannot be inserted into or accommodated within a capitalist
economy. The radical, central philosophers at this moment made their revolutionary
investment in the body and in libidinal desire.
Perhaps the most extreme re-thinking of Marx began with the socalled ‘philosophy of
desire’ in texts such as Lyotard’s Economie libidinale (1974; complete translation not
available) or in the work of Deleuze and Guattari in their Capitalisme et schizophrénie
(1972, 1980; translated 1984, 1987). This work led Lyotard and Deleuze to the position
where they favour the supervention of a micropolitics which will attend to the local and
the specific without recourse to some grand programme or macropolitical theory such as
Marxism, psychoanalysis or evolutionary progress to legitimize actions taken at the local
level. Practice is now valid—that is to say, it becomes an ‘event’—only when it is
unanswerable to, or when it is actually disruptive of, a totalizing ‘grand theory’.
The most explicit attack on fundamental Marxist theory, and specifically on its
underlying category of ‘production’ is fully developed in Baudrillard’s Le Miroir de la
production (1973; translated as The Mirror of Production 1975), a work which set
Baudrillard firmly on a trajectory away from any form of classical Marxism. His work
since has increasingly sustained a problematization of the oppositionalist impetus
inscribed in Marxist theory. For Baudrillard, opposition to a dominant force is always
already inscribed in the structure which holds that dominant force in power. The
oppositional energy is diverted and recharged to the account of the dominant force:
opposition works like inoculation. Marxism inoculates capital, the better to sustain it:
‘critical’ or ‘oppositional’ thinking is, as it were, the last refuge of the bourgeois, who is
condemned to go through the motions of theoretical opposition while simultaneously
sustaining the historical status quo.
Theory, by which I here mean any critical practice which makes a philosophically
foundational claim, enters into crisis itself in the wake of 1968. Not only has knowledge
become uncertain, but more importantly the whole question of how to legitimize certain
forms of knowledge and certain contents of knowledge is firmly on the agenda. No single
satisfactory mode of epistemological legitimation is available. Even if one were, the very
Subject of consciousness has, as a result of deconstruction and psychoanalysis, also been
thrown into doubt. Postmodernism is shaped and informed by these crises in
epistemology, in ontology, in legitimation and in the Subject.
In what follows, I shall firstly outline briefly the intellectual trajectory of two thinkers
whose work has shaped much of the debate over postmodernism: Jean-François Lyotard

44.4 Page 434

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 396
and Jean Baudrillard. I shall then substantively address the issue of the Enlightenment
and its contested legacies. This leads into a necessary reconsideration of the question of
politics, specifically under the rubric of a theory of justice. In conclusion, I shall draw
together the characteristics of postmodern philosophy under the sign of what might be
called, in contradistinction to Leibnizian Optimism, a ‘new pessimism’ distinguished not
by sadness but by stoicism.
TWO PARADIGMATIC THINKERS
Jean-François Lyotard
Lyotard moved to the centre of debates around postmodernism in the late 1970s when he
defined The Postmodern Condition in terms of an ‘incredulity toward metanarratives’.7
By this, he meant that, in the contemporary world, it had become difficult to subscribe to
the great narratives which had previously conditioned existence, be they narratives of
salvation as in the various religions, or of emancipation as in Marx, or of therapy as in
Freud, and so on. Postmodernism was defined in terms of an anti-foundationalism; it was
a mood and not a period; and it was characterized by a pragmatic and experimentalist
attitude. Like the artist, the postmodern philosopher was to ‘work without rules in order
to formulate the rules of what will have been done’ after the event:8 that is to say,
thinking was to be radically experimental and ostensibly undirected in order to allow for
the unpreprogrammed, for the unforeseen, to take place.
This led Lyotard to ponder two key theoretical principles: that of the ‘event’; and that
of ‘justice’.9 An ‘event’ occurs when ‘it happens’ without the ‘it’ having any specific
identity. Such an identification of ‘what’ happened can only happen when the event is
inserted into a determining structure which will assign a meaning to the happening and a
substance to it. An ‘event’ is, as it were, a happening laid bare, devoid of a Subject,
devoid of—or, better, prior to—an assigned significance. For Lyotard, the honour of
thinking can itself only occur when thinking is ‘eventful’, when thinking is of the status
of an event.
Thought thus has little to do with the accumulation of ‘knowledges’ whose
significance can be arrayed and arranged in hierarchical orders and sequences, initially
placed in repositories of knowledge such as libraries and museums, but increasingly in
our time stored in ostensibly less material but equally reified form on microchips or on
computer discs.
For Lyotard, one effect of this is the necessity to wage war on all forms of totality. He
argues that any ‘grand narrative’ or foundational theory necessarily tends to homogenize
the absolute heterogeneity and specificity of singular events, thereby robbing the event of
its full ontological or historical status and, more importantly for a philosopher, denying
the possibility of genuine thinking. Further, he argues that such totality most often
articulates itself under the form simply of consensus. Here, he explicitly set himself apart
from a thinker such as Jürgen Habermas, who argues that, given the lack of any prior
foundational philosophy upon which to build a rational society, individual Subjects must
strive collectively or mutually to attain a rational consensus which will enable the

44.5 Page 435

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 397
formulation of (at least provisional) values against which individual acts can be judged.
In other words, a practical social theory is to be based upon rational discourse and the
disinterested pursuit of the better argument by a community. Lyotard argues that the
consensus thus reached is illusory, for it is necessarily founded upon a covert violence
between the participants in the dialogues, in which the discourse of one Subject will
always find itself degraded in and by the discourse of the other. There is no consensus
without the covert exercise of an imperialist power, according to Lyotard, who therefore
prefers the pursuit of paralogy over consensus.
In order to maintain thinking at the status of the event, it becomes important to bear
witness to what Lyotard calls the ‘differend’. A differend occurs when, in a dispute
between two parties, the rules of conflict which bring them into their opposed positions
are made in the idiom of one party while the wrong from which the other suffers simply
does not figure and cannot be recognized in that idiom. That is, the fundamental clash is
one of language-games; the language-game of each party to the dispute simply cannot
accommodate the terms of the wrong suffered by the other; and further, there is no
common language to which a ‘neutral’ appeal can be made to facilitate an adjudication
between the two parties.
Here we enter the second specific realm of Lyotard’s concern: justice. As with
knowledge, justice or judging too must become, for Lyotard, an event rather than a
substance. Given that we should abandon the metanarrative, or theory, we now have no
grounds upon which to make our judgments, be they aesthetic, ethical, political or
whatever. Yet we must judge, as a simple condition of living. For Lyotard, we must bear
witness to the differend and learn to judge without criteria. This he relates to the Kant of
the third Critique, where a fundamental distinction is made between determining
judgment and reflective judgment. Determining judgments are made in conformity to a
rule; reflective judgments are those where we lack any formal guiding principle, as in
aesthetics. Lyotard urges the prioritization of the latter, for it is only by making judging
and thinking reflective—and thereby ‘eventful’ —that we will attain to the postmodern
mood; and it is only that way that we can avoid the tacit political violence which
dominates and informs our modes of philosophy and of social being.
Jean Baudrillard
Baudrillard, like Lyotard, began his career on the political left. But in The Mirror of
Production, he began his trajectory steadily away from any recognizable Marxism and
towards an extremely different position indeed. Fundamentally, Baudrillard began by
arguing that Marx was not Marxist enough; that in the attempt to confound political
economy, Marx simply could not manage to escape the form ‘production’ and the form
‘representation’ which shape political economy. Marxism is thus tainted by a complicity
with capitalism, argued Baudrillard. He then began himself to try to find a way out of this
by insisting that the world is not ‘pro-duced’ but ‘seduced’: seduction, he claimed in De
la séduction, was logically prior to production. Seduction is not simply sexual: it is rather
any mutual interplay of forces of attraction and repulsion. It thus can have no
paradigmatic form and veers into a multiplicity of social practices, none of which can
assume a position of centrality, normativity or dominance. By this point, Marxism has not

44.6 Page 436

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 398
been modified as much as entirely abandoned.
Baudrillard began to indicate that Marxism had become part of the problem rather than
part of the cure for a society in any case. He suggested that in any given system (such as a
capitalist one) which is characterized by efficiency, the possibility of opposition to the
system has to be controlled internally if the system is to persist. The single best way of
controlling opposition is, of course, by accommodation. Hence, using a medical analogy,
Baudrillard argued that every system generates localized ‘scandals’ which ostensibly
throw the system entirely into disrepute—but which operate rather like an inoculation
against disease. Thus, for instance, Watergate was a scandal to the office of the President
of the USA; but it was a scandal which ‘purified’ the office by vilifying its temporary
occupant; it thus enabled the possibility of that now ‘purged’, ‘incorruptible’, office being
inhabited very soon after by Ronald Reagan, whose folly, lies and obvious insincerity far
outstripped anything of which Nixon seemed capable. Similarly, capitalism needs and
thrives on Marxism; masculinism and patriarchy need feminism if they are to strengthen
themselves; racism requires anti-racist legislation; and so on.
This somewhat desperate scenario provokes Baudrillard into his most radical claims,
and into a position usually described as ‘nihilist’. The principle of reality itself, he argues,
is defunct. At an early stage in his career, when he concentrated his attention on
consumer society, Baudrillard rapidly realized not only that consumption was the new
structure of power in the social, but also that something had happened to the very
materiality of the object of consumption. He argued that the object as signifier was more
important than the object as referent. In other words, classical ‘use-value’ had been
replaced not just by ‘exchange-value’ but by what might be called ‘signifying-value’, or
the value of the object as a sign. The referent—the ‘real’ world—began simply to
disappear in Baudrillard’s theoretical thinking.
When allied to his thinking on negation or criticism as a form of therapeutic
inoculation, this has far-reaching consequences. Baudrillard is now able to argue that
Disneyland, for example, is there as an arena of fantasy in order to generate the belief that
the rest of the USA, everything ‘outside’ Disneyland, is ‘real’. In fact, Baudrillard argues,
it is the rest of the USA which is now living entirely at the level of fantasy. Meanwhile
‘the real’ has disappeared, or has been overtaken by simulacra of the real. Thus he felt
able to claim, for instance, that, in a specific sense, the Gulf War of 1990 ‘did not take
place’. Baudrillard indicates that technology has now made it possible for us to reproduce
the real in a ‘more’ real form than the ‘original’; and historical events for us now are only
real once they have been mediated, usually by television. If we are to make any genuine
philosophical or political engagement in this state of affairs, it has to be done by
attending not to specific aspects of the real but rather to the very principle of reality itself.
ENLIGHTENMENT AND ITS LEGACIES
A major source for the contemporary debates around the postmodern is to found in the
work of the Frankfurt school, and perhaps nowhere more precisely than in the text
proposed by Adorno and Horkheimer in 1944, the Dialectic of Enlightenment, a work
‘written when the end of the Nazi terror was within sight’. This work prefigures some of

44.7 Page 437

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 399
Lyotard’s later scepticism over Enlightenment; and it also seriously engages the issue of
mass culture in ways which influence Gorz’s thoughts on the ‘leisure merchants’ of
contemporary capitalist societies. It is worth indicating in passing that it is Adorno and
Horkheimer, and not Lyotard, who propose that ‘Enlightenment is totalitarian’:10 the
vulgar characterization which describes contemporary German philosophy as pro-
Enlightenment and the French as anti-Enlightenment is simplistic and false.
Enlightenment aimed at human emancipation from myth or superstition, and from an
enthralled enchantment to mysterious powers and forces of nature. Such emancipation
was to be effected through the progressive operations of critical reason. According to
Peter Gay, ‘The Enlightenment may be summed up in two words: criticism and power’:11
criticism would become creative precisely by its capacity for empowering the individual
and enabling his or her freedom. Why would Adorno and Horkheimer set themselves in
opposition to this ostensibly admirable programme? Why do they argue that ‘The fully
Enlightened earth radiates disaster triumphant’?12
The problem lies not in the theoretical principle of Enlightenment but in its practice. In
the desire to contest any form of animistic enchantment by nature, Enlightenment set out
to think the world in an abstract form. Consequently, the material content of the world
becomes a merely formal conceptual set of categories. As Adorno and Horkheimer put it:
‘From now on, matter would at least be mastered without any illusion of ruling or
inherent powers, of hidden qualities. For the Enlightenment, whatever does not conform
to the rule of computation and utility is suspect’.13 In a word, reason has been reduced to
mathesis: that is, it has been reduced to a specific form of reason. More importantly, this
specific inflection of reason is also now presented as if it were Reason-as-such, as if it
were the only valid or legitimate form of rational thinking. But Adorno and Horkheimer
share a fear that, in this procedure, reason has itself simply become a formal category,
which reduces or translates the specific concepts of material realities into rational
concepts, or into a form amenable to mathematization. Reason becomes no more than a
discourse, a language of reason (the codes of mathematics), which deals with the
‘foreign’ matter of reality by translating it into reason’s own abstract terms; and
something—the ‘event’, non-conceptual reality itself—gets lost in the translation. As
Adorno and Horkheimer have it: ‘The multiplicity of forms is reduced to position and
arrangement, history to fact, things to matter.’14 A mathematical consciousness thus
produces the world, not surprisingly, as mathematics. So a desired knowledge of the
world is reduced to the merest anamnesis, in which a consciousness never cognizes the
world as it is, but rather recognizes the world as the proper image and correlate of the
consciousness itself. Enlightenment thus serves only the self-Identity of the Subject of
consciousness.
‘Emancipatory’ knowledge turns out to involve itself firmly with a question of power,
which complicates and perhaps even restricts its emancipatory quality. Knowledge,
conceived as abstract and utilitarian, as a mastery over a recalcitrant nature, becomes
characterized by power; as a result, ‘Enlightenment behaves toward things as a dictator
toward man. He knows them in so far as he can manipulate them. The man of science
knows all things in so far as he can make them.’15 Knowledge is hereby reduced to
technology; and that in nature—the ‘event’—which is unamenable to the formal or
conceptual categories of such mathematical knowledge simply escapes consciousness.

44.8 Page 438

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 400
Yet the Subject believes itself to have captured, dominated and conceptually controlled
the event; for it can determine the meaning of the event. There is thus only the illusion of
power over nature; and yet there is a more important dividend of power here: the Subject
endowed with Enlightenment ‘knowledge’ has a power over the consciousness of others
who may be less fluent in the language of reason. Knowledge is thus caught up in a
dialectic of mastery and slavery in which the victim is not a dominated and overcome
nature but rather other overwhelmed human individuals. Accordingly, knowledge such as
this cannot be purely characterized by disenchantment and emancipation. Enlightenment
does not simply produce a disenchanted knowledge of the contents of the material world;
rather, it produces a formally empowered Subject of consciousness, a Subject which
exerts its power in the discourse of reason, in a language-game. From now on in
philosophy—and this is what will be characterized as the ‘modern’ philosophy from
which postmodernism wishes to escape—to know is to be in a position to enslave, or, as
Lyotard will argue, ‘what was and is at issue is the introduction of the will into reason’.16
What is thus at issue is a confusion between the operations of a pure reason on the one
hand and a practical reason on the other: a confusion between theory and practice,
between gnosis and praxis. This is an old Aristotelian distinction which has resurfaced
precisely at the moment when many thinkers are becoming suspicious precisely of theory
itself. Twentieth-century literary criticism, the field in which much of the postmodern
debate has been fought out, presents us with a series of attempts to yoke together theory
and practice. Language, for instance, is often seen not as something which merely runs
alongside and parallel to the ‘real’ events of material history: rather, it is consistently
secularized, realized as itself a historical event. This is so all the way from J.L.Austin’s
speech-act theories of performative linguistics, through various advocates of the idea of
‘language as symbolic action’ (Kenneth Burke, R.P.Blackmur and others), and all the
way on to the contemporary revival of Jamesian and Deweian pragmatism in the thinking
of Rorty, Fish and others.17 These are all attempts to bring together the epistemological
function of language with the ontological event of linguistic activity. And in this regard,
twentieth-century literary criticism can be seen to be wrestling with one major and
fundamental issue: the perceived rupture between the realm of language and the realm of
Being, a rupture articulated most vigorously by those readers of Saussure’s Course in
General Linguistics who prioritize above all else the arbitrariness of the relation between
the linguistic signifier and the conceptual signified. By inserting the cognitive activity of
a real historical reader between the text and its epistemological content, critics such as
Fish, Jauss, Iser and others tried to circumvent the threatened split between, on the one
hand, the structure of consciousness (i.e., the conceptual forms in which a consciousness
appropriates the world for meaning) and, on the other, history (the material content of a
text which may—and indeed, according to Fish, must—disturb such formal structures).
In philosophical terms, what is at stake here is an old Kantian question regarding the
proper or adequate ‘fit’ between the noumenal and the phenomenal. Kant was aware that
the world outside of consciousness does not necessarily match precisely our perceptual
cognitions of that world; and in the Critique of Pure Reason he argued that it was
erroneous simply to confuse the two. The two elements of signification being confused
were distinguished by Frege as ‘sense’ and ‘reference’; and it is a distinction similar to
this which was maintained by Paul de Man, who argued that such a confusion is precisely

44.9 Page 439

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 401
what we know as ‘ideology’: ‘What we call ideology is precisely the confusion of
linguistic with natural reality, of reference with phenomenalism.’18
De Man’s concern was to ensure that literary criticism made no premature assumptions
of the absolute validity of reference; and in this he simply followed the deconstructive
practice of maintaining a vigilant scepticism about the legitimacy or truth-contents of any
linguistic proposition made about those aspects of the real world that could properly be
called ‘non-linguistic’. He was aware that the premature assumption that the world was
available for precise, ‘accurate’ or truthful linguistic formulation was itself an assumption
not only grounded in but fundamentally demonstrative of ideology. But this, of course, is
simply a reiteration of Adorno and Horkheimer in their complaint about the assumption
made by (mathematical) reason that the world is available for rational comprehension. It
should now be clear that the fundamental burden of the Dialectic of Enlightenment is that
Enlightenment itself is not the great demystifying force which will reveal and unmask
ideology; rather, it is precisely the locus of ideology, thoroughly contaminated internally
by the ideological assumption that the world can match—indeed, can be encompassed
by—our reasoning about it, or by the attendant assumption that the human is not
alienated by the very processes of consciousness itself from the material world and events
of which it desires knowledge in the first place. Enlightenment, postulated upon reason,
is—potentially at least—undone by the form that such reason takes.
For Adorno and Horkheimer, this argument assumed a specific shape recognizable as
an abiding question in German philosophy from Kant to Heidegger. What worried
Adorno and Horkheimer was that under the sign of Enlightenment, the Subject would be
capable of an engagement with the world in a manner which would be ‘rational’ only in
the most purely formal (and thus vacuous) sense of the word. That is, they were anxious
that what should be a properly political engagement which involves the Subject in a
process called intellection or thinking could be reduced to a ritual of thinking, to a merely
formal appearance of thinking which would manifest itself as a legitimation not of a
perception of the world but of the analytical modes of mathematical reason itself. The
political disturbance of the Subject proposed by an engagement with a materially
different Other (i.e., the Subject as transformed and transfigured through an ‘event’)
would be reduced to a confirmation of the aesthetic beauty and validity of the process of
mathematical reason itself, a reason whose object would thus be not the world in all its
alterity but rather the process of reason which confirms the Identity of the Subject as an
identity untrammelled by the disturbance of politics, an amorphous identity predicated on
a narcissism and uninformed by any real event. In short, the Subject would be reduced to
an engagement with and confirmation of its own rational processes rather than being
committed to an engagement with the material alterity of an objective world.19
The ‘aesthetic engagement’ with the world might be characterized as follows: the
structure of consciousness determines what can be perceived, and processes it in
accordance with its own internal logic, its own internal, formal or ritualistic operations of
reason. There is thus a ritual or appearance of engagement with the material world only.
‘Political engagement’ would be characterized by the rupture of such ritual, by the
eruption of history into the consciousness in such a way that the aesthetic or formal
structures of consciousness must be disturbed, reconfigured, rearranged. Enlightenment’s
commitment to abstraction is seen as a mode of disengagement of the ideological,

44.10 Page 440

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 402
opinionated self: abstraction is itself meant to address precisely this problem. But it leads,
according to Adorno and Horkheimer, not to a practice of thinking but rather to the
ritualistic form of thought; it offers a form without content. Adorno and Horkheimer fear
that it is precisely when Enlightenment addresses the political that it in fact most
successfully evades the political; that Enlightenment is Idealist precisely when it pretends
to be fully materialist.
One twentieth-century legacy of Enlightenment is the so-called ‘Copernican
revolution’ proposed initially by structuralism and semiotics. In the wake of Roland
Barthes, the world became an extremely ‘noisy’ place: signs everywhere announced their
presence and demanded to be decoded. Such decoding was often done under the aegis of
a presiding formal structure, such as myth in anthropology (Lévi-Strauss), desire in
psychoanalysis (Lacan), or grammar in literature (Genette, Greimas, Todorov). In
semiotics, it is always important to be able to discover a kind of equivalence between
ostensibly different signs: this is, in fact, the very principle of decoding or of translation
which is at the basis of semiotic analysis. But as Adorno and Horkheimer indicate:
‘Bourgeois society is ruled by equivalence. It makes the dissimilar comparable by
reducing it to abstract qualities.’20 Such abstraction must wilfully disregard the
specificity of the material objects or events under its consideration: ‘Abstraction, the tool
of enlightenment, treats its objects as did fate, the notion of which it rejects: it liquidates
them.’21 The semiotic revolution—a revolution which frequently masqueraded as a
political, emancipatory heir of Enlightenment, but a revolution whose content was only at
the level of the abstract sign and thus at the level of an aesthetics denuded of politics—is,
like Enlightenment, irredeemably bourgeois in the eyes of the postmodernist, for it is
irredeemably caught up in a philosophy of identity which negates material and historical
reality in the interests of constructing a recognizable Subject of consciousness as a self-
identical entity.
When postmodernism rigorously questions the tradition of a selfconsciously ‘modern’
Enlightenment philosophy, it does not do so in the interests of nihilism or irrationality.
Postmodernism indicates rather (as did Foucault) that Enlightenment reason may not
itself be entirely reasonable.22 Further, postmodernism returns to the great Kantian
questions: how might we know the alterity of a material reality; how might we validate or
legitimize that knowledge?
The Dialectic was written in a profound awareness of the material and historical
realities of fascism and of the Nazi atrocities. It is a text which inserts itself in a specific
tradition of philosophical and ethical tracts which ask for an explanation of the presence
of evil in the world. This tradition was properly inaugurated in the modern world by the
debates around Leibniz and Optimism. Optimism is based on the idea that nature is a
Leibnizian monad, and that there is a great unifying chain in nature which links, in a
necessary conjunction, all the ostensibly random and diverse elements of a seemingly
heterogeneous and pluralistic world. Much more important for our purpose is the
observation that Optimism must be based upon a specific idea of progressive time which
challenges the meaning of events. It argues that what appears ‘now’ to be a local evil will
be revealed ‘in the fullness of time’ as something which essentially serves the realization
of a greater good. As Voltaire’s Pangloss has it in Candide, ‘All is for the best in the best
of all possible worlds’; or, as a less comic predecessor, Milton’s Satan, has it: ‘Evil, be

45 Pages 441-450

▲back to top

45.1 Page 441

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 403
thou my good.’23 History would reveal the immanent goodness in the most apparently
evil acts; under the sign of a homogeneous and monadic eternity, the heterogeneous and
secular would be redeemed.
In a sense this philosophy is a precursor of some contemporary theoretical principles;
and it foreshadows directly the great (and perhaps final) flowering of a modernist thought
in deconstruction. According to Optimistic philosophy, the meaning of an event is not
immediately apparent, as if it were never present-to-itself: its final sense—to be revealed
as the necessity of goodness—is always deferred (to be revealed under the sign of
eternity), and is thus always ‘different’ (or not what it appears to be to the local eye
caught up in the event itself). The major difference between deconstruction and
Optimism is that Optimism believes that the final sense lies immanently within an event,
whereas deconstruction eschews any such ‘immanentist’ ideas as metaphysical. Yet the
trajectory underpinning both is the same in that they share fundamentally and tacitly an
investment in the notion of a ‘progressive enlightenment’: the passage of time is invested
with the idea of progress.
Optimism was buried, of course, with the buildings under the earthquake in Lisbon on
1 November 1755. But at that time a different idea of progress in history arises. After
1755, progress is characterized as a gradual emancipation from the demands of the sign
of eternity. The secularization of consciousness became a necessary precondition for the
possibility of an ethics: that is to say, the ethical is increasingly determined by the
philosophically rational, or the good is determined by the true. Hans Blumenberg in his
The Legitimacy of the Modern Age, offers eloquent testimony to the inflection this gives
to philosophy and to truth. Traditionally, the pursuit of truth had been pleasurable,
eudaemonic; from now on, the absoluteness of truth, and correspondingly its ascetic
harshness, becomes a measure of its validity: ‘Lack of consideration for happiness
becomes the stigma of truth itself, a homage to its absolutism.’24 Pain legitimizes
knowledge.
There arises thus the possibility—and Kantians would argue the necessity—of
separating the realm of facts from the realm of values: neither can legitimately be derived
from the other, neither facts from values nor values from facts. Optimism has proceeded
on the grounds that these were intimately conjoined; and it followed that the progressive
movement from evil to good was seen as inevitable. But once epistemology is separated
from ethics, the whole idea of historical progress is itself called into question: no longer
do we know with any certainty the point towards which history is supposedly
progressing. In the wake of this, humanity becomes enslaved not to the enchantments of
myth but rather to the necessities of narrative, for humanity has embarked upon a secular
movement whose teleology is uncertain, whose plot is not inherently predetermined by
values or by an ethical end.25
This critique of progress returns in the twentieth century; and is acentral component of
a postmodernist mood. The paradigmatic example comes in architecture, where there has
grown a resistance to the ‘modernist’ idea that all buildings must be innovative in aim
and design. As Jencks and Portoghesi have suggested, it is possible to relearn from the
past, to develop a ‘new classicism’ or simply to engage with an abiding ‘presence of the
past’.26 The result is—in principle if not always in practice—a heterogeneous
juxtaposition of different styles from different architectural epochs as a putative response

45.2 Page 442

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 404
to the homogenizing tendency of the so-called ‘international style’. This argument leads
to two interrelated consequences. The first is that lived space is inhabited by a
complicating sense of historical time.27 More importantly, there grows an awareness in
architecture and urban planning in general that the local traditions of a place should be
respected in all their specificity, while at the same time these local traditions may be
opened to a kind of criticism by their juxtaposition with styles from other localities and
from different traditions.28 This is a localism without parochial insularity: a
revalorization of the ‘periphery’ without the need for a determining ‘centre’.
Probably the greatest and most-cited description of the postmodern coincides nicely
with this architectural scepticism regarding inexorable progress. In philosophy, Lyotard
argued that the postmodern mood was characterized by an ‘incredulity towards
metanarratives’. In an argument which he subsequently described as ‘overstated’, Lyotard
argued that it was becoming increasingly difficult to subscribe to the great—and
therapeutically Optimistic—grand narratives which once organized our lives.29 What he
had in his sights were the great totalizing narratives, great codes which in their degree of
abstraction necessarily deny the specificity of the local event and traduce it in the
interests of a global homogeneity or a universal history. Such ‘master narratives’, as they
subsequently came to be called, would include the narrative of emancipation via
revolution proposed by Marx; the narrative of psychoanalytic therapy elaborated by
Freud; or the story of constant development and adaptation advanced under the rubric of
evolution by Darwin. Such narratives operate like Enlightenment reason: in order to
accommodate widely diverging local histories and traditions, they abstract the meaning of
those traditions in a ‘translation’ into the terms of a master code, thereby violating the
specificity of the local and rendering real historical events unrecognizable. As
metanarratives, they also become coercive and normative. In the interests of respecting
the heterogeneity of the real, and (more importantly for Lyotard) in the interests of
maintaining the possibility of thought, of philosophy, we must wage war on such
totalizing prescriptive grand narratives. Lyotard’s debt to Adornian critical theory is
obvious here.
This new pessimism with regard to the idea of historical progress was foreseen by
Walter Benjamin, another great source for much postmodern thinking. In his famous
seventh thesis on the philosophy of history, he indicates a specific scepticism regarding
history which has been picked up and thoroughly developed in postmodernism. His
famous words in that thesis—‘There is no document of civilization which is not at the
same time a document of barbarism’—prize open the historical document—and, by
extension, the event itself—to an internal instability and mutability.30 Postmodernism has
enlarged on this to the extent that it challenges the very notion of there being any
universal history at all. It is important to be clear on this: postmodernism does not deny
history; rather, it denies that there is only one history. For Lyotard, a universal history
implies a single transcendent Subject position from which the history might be
recuperated, appropriated, recounted or narrated: that is to say, universal history is
predicated on monotheism. In place of this, Lyotard advocates the pluralism of paganism:
multiple gods, multiple histories, no transcendence.31 Any singular event can be inserted
into any number of histories, each presided over by a different force or power; and its
value—its essence—will depend upon the contradictions and incoherence involved in our

45.3 Page 443

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 405
necessarily considering the event from such a pluralist perspective. In the simpler terms
which Benjamin had in mind, the singular event of a battle, say, is different when one is
the victim and when one is the victor: postmodernism would ask us to think the narratives
proposed by both such positions simultaneously.
‘Modernity’ itself is increasingly seen as a Benjaminian document of civilization and
of barbarism at once. It is a crude banalization of the postmodern position to suggest that
it entirely reneges on modernity. Zygmunt Bauman’s work is an excellent case in point
here. Given the pessimism regarding Enlightenment and subsequent European history, it
would be an easy step to consider the twentienth century’s greatest disaster, the Nazi
atrocities, as a consequence of modernity. But Bauman takes a much more circumspect
postmodern attitude to the Holocaust. Citing sociological research into the victims of
hijackings and terrorist activity, he indicates that so-called ‘personality change’ after the
traumatic event is in fact illusory. What happens is that historical circumstances after the
trauma favour the appearance of traits which were always latent, but which were not
appropriate under the historical norms which conditioned the life of the victim before the
traumatic event. A different aspect of the personality assumes the normative position: the
same person remains. Bauman allegorizes this to consider the Holocaust:
The unspoken terror permeating our collective memory of the Holocaust…is the
gnawing suspicion that the Holocaust could be more than an aberration, more
than a deviation from an otherwise straight path of progress, more than a
cancerous growth on the otherwise healthy body of the civilized society; that, in
short, the Holocaust was not the antithesis of modern civilization and everything
(or so we like to think) it stands for. We suspect (even if we refuse to admit it)
that the Holocaust could merely have uncovered another face of the same
modern society whose other, so familiar, face we so admire. And that the two
faces are perfectly comfortably attached to the same body.32
Modernity does not lead inexorably to the Holocaust; rather, the civilized face of
modernity is attended constantly by a barbarism which is its Janus-complement.
The horror at the evil of the Holocaust is, for Bauman, really a horror at the rationality
inscribed within the practice of the Holocaust. Enlightenment reason had enabled the
development of an extraordinarily complete rationally ordered and self-sustaining social
process. Part of the legacy of this is the development of efficiency in productivity, and
the (often self-serving) development of technology. The horrifying truth of the matter,
according to Bauman, is that ‘every “ingredient” of the Holocaust…was normal,
“normal” not in the sense of the familiar…but in the sense of being fully in keeping with
everything we know about our civilization, its guiding spirit, its priorities, its immanent
vision of the world’.33 Structurally, the gas chambers are driven by the same presiding
principles that were taken for granted as the positive aspects of modernity: rationalized
efficiency in industrial production. The barbarism of the Holocaust arises because
Enlightenment contained within its drive to reason a carcinogenic drive to rationalism,
which can be used as well for fascist as for emancipatory ends. For a postmodern
sociologist such as Bauman, it becomes difficult to disintricate the ‘rationality of evil’
from the ‘evil of [modern, instrumental] rationality’. As he indicates, in the world of the

45.4 Page 444

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 406
death camps, everything was rationalized: ‘Each step on the road to death was carefully
shaped so as to be calculable in terms of gains and losses, rewards and punishments.’34
The SS also knew that, in a perversion of Enlightenment, but a perversion made possible
precisely by Enlightenment, reason was their single best ally in ensuring that their victims
would become complicit in their own suffering, betraying their fellows in the reasonable
hope of prolonging their own lives thereby: ‘to found their order on fear alone, the SS
would have needed more troops, arms and money. Rationality was more effective, easier
to obtain, and cheaper. And thus to destroy them, the SS men carefully cultivated the
rationality of their victims.’35
Reason, which was supposed to legitimize the neo-pagan and emancipatory activities
of Enlightenment, is now itself in need of legitimation. It can no longer assume the
capacity for self-legitimation without assuming an exclusivity which necessarily
victimizes other possible (and equally, if differently) reasonable narratives. Its claims
upon universality are supplied by its inherent tendency to fall into the merest rationalism.
It produces an administered society, and not a reasonable one; reason is replaced by
efficiency and by the aesthetic and formal vacuities of rationalism. As both Derrida and
Foucault have argued, though in very different ways, Enlightenment reason is profoundly
exclusivist: it can legitimate itself only by first identifying and then stigmatizing its
Other. As a result, Enlightenment reason is a potent weapon in the production of social
normativity, driving people towards a conformity with a dominant and centred single
‘norm’ of behaviour. Reason, in short, has to produce the ‘scandal’ of its Other to keep
itself going. Baudrillard has argued that this has an extremely important corollary effect
in the twentieth century. In our time, it is not so much reason itself which requires
legitimation as the very principle of reality (which, it is assumed, is founded upon
rational principles). Society, in a move structurally parallel to Enlightenment reason, thus
produces the Other of the real—fantasy—to legitimize the normativity of its own
practices. Thus: ‘Disneyland is there to conceal the fact that it is the “real” country, all of
“real” America, which is Disneyland (just as prisons are there to conceal the fact that it is
the social, in its entirety, in its banal omnipresence, which is carceral.’36 The
emancipation proposed by Enlightenment brings with it an incarcerating impetus: its
‘freedom’ turns out to be but the form of a freedom, an aesthetics rather than a politics of
freedom. The name for this aestheticization of the political is representation. In the
postmodern, representation, as both a political and an aesthetic category, has come under
increasing pressure; and it is to this that we can now turn.
JUSTICE AND REPRESENTATION
Enlightenment reason is self-legitimizing: it takes one historically and culturally specific
inflection of reason for the universal form of all Reason; and then adjudges all competing
forms of reason to be, ipso facto, unreasonable.37 In crude terms, Enlightenment Europe
judged the rest of the cultures of the world in precisely the terms of Enlightenment
Europe; and when, not surprisingly, it found the rest of the world to be ‘different’, it
judged it to be inferior, unreasonable, ‘underdeveloped’. Hence there arises the
legitimation for a racist and imperialist consciousness which underpins some of the most

45.5 Page 445

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 407
unjust actions of the modern world, culminating perhaps in the Holocaust.
Enlightenment’s difficulty, it seems, was in accepting the possibility of a plurality of the
forms of reason, each specific to particular historical or cultural events in their
singularity. That difficulty had its root in the tendency to abstraction, or to theory.
Equally abstract is the idea of a Universal History which, if it is to exist, must
disregard the singularities of specific events, reading them as ‘signs’ or semiotic counters
which can be meaningfully inserted into a governing and totalized master narrative.
Given that a human culture or society is made possible precisely by the narratives which
it tells to itself, then it becomes clear that what is at stake here is a massive political
injustice.
The postmodern attack on the notion of a Universal History has important
ramifications for the questions of representation and justice. As I indicated earlier, a
Universal History is tacitly predicated upon a monotheism which brings in its wake an
incipient totalitarianism. It presupposes a single transcendental position (‘God’) from
which the whole of history can be recounted or truthfully narrated. Accordingly, if we
subscribe to such notions, then all contradictory (‘pagan’) human narratives are
automatically discarded and deemed to be nothing more than ‘fictions’. In pragmatic fact,
of course, this has meant that, as Benjamin and others have indicated, all history is told
from the point of view of the victor, who, as a ‘master narrator’, assumes the position of a
totalitarian author, or God; and any opposing narratives—such as the narratives which
constituted the entire cultural and social history of the victim—are either ignored, denied
or brought into line with the dominant narrative of the victor, from whose point of view
they appear to be deviant, disjunctive and clearly false. The master narrator simply
subsumes other competing narratives within a totalized framework, and assigns the
competing narratives to a marginalized position. Those margins have, in modernism,
been occupied by various figures such as dissidents, intellectuals, communists, women,
lesbian and gay people, ‘foreigners’, and so on. In contrast to this, the postmodern faces
the problematic possibility of a potentially endless and self-contradictory series of re-
presentations without the predication of an implied presence anywhere which would exist
to ground or hierarchize the competing representations or narratives.
In addition to this, and linked to it, is the political complication of the issue of justice.
How can we judge an event? In the ‘modern’ world it is possible to judge according to
specific criteria. These criteria are assumed to be shared by a social consensus. But this
also implies an instance of presence somewhere, a fundamental ground of truth upon
which all judgments can be made. That is to say, both representation and justice require a
foundational theory. It is precisely such a theory that postmodernism would challenge, on
the grounds that it is a theory which is always tacitly founded upon injustice and upon the
covert violence of totalization.
Habermas would agree that no necessary foundation for a social formation exists prior
to human beings in community. But he has consistently argued for the necessity of
struggling towards the fabrication of a society founded upon a rational consensus.
Lyotard challenges this on the grounds that consensus without the prior exercise of power
and without covert injustice seems to be impossible; and on the grounds that such a
consensus, which would of necessity conceal and act as a cover for the violences and
injustices upon which the social is founded, may therefore not even be desirable.

45.6 Page 446

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 408
For Lyotard, there is, in any achieved consensus, necessarily repression or, worse,
oppression.38 In order to circumvent this, he advocates that we multiply differences and
that we bear witness to the differend, a term taken from legal discourse. A differend
arises under specific circumstances: two opposed parties in a dispute are each in the right
according to their own terms of reference; the terms of reference of each party cannot
accommodate, or refuse to accommodate, the other party; and there is no common ground
or third set of terms of reference which will allow an adjudication between the two
parties while respecting their own terms of reference. In short, a differend arises when we
lack a theory which will encompass radically divergent (‘pagan’) narratives. This may
arise in a court of law; but, for Lyotard, it arises everywhere as an issue of justice and
representation.39
Neither party to a differend can find an adequate representation of itself in the
language-game of the other party. Each therefore feels violated by its insertion into that
language-game. Further, we lack a ‘neutral’ or monotheistic theory which can encompass
and adequately represent both parties. In the absence of criteria upon which to make the
necessary judgments, how then do we judge?40
Judgment and representation are intimately related in the postmodern. The just has
always been closely linked to the true; and justice depends upon a revelation of truth.
There is a clear structural similarity between this and a Marxist hermeneutic. The project
of an ideological demystification starts from the presupposition that a text (or the object
of any critical judgment) is always informed by a specific historical and political nexus,
and that the text is the site for the covering over (or disappearance) of the contradictions
implicit in this historical conjuncture. The task of critical judgment here is in the first
instance epistemological: it involves the necessary revelation of a truth lying concealed
behind an appearance. But it is precisely the opposition between ideological appearance
on one hand and foundational or true reality on the other which the postmodern puts
under speculative pressure.
As Baudrillard has argued, the real in our time is no longer what it used to be.
Technology has made it possible to confound the separation between the authentic and
the fake, between the real and its representation, in ways far more radical than even
Benjamin imagined. Yet that separation, of course, is precisely the separation required for
a foundational philosophy or for any philosophy which has a strong investment in a
univocal and transcendental notion of truth. The postmodern eschews any such simple
access to the true or to foundational criteria upon which to base its acts of criticism or of
judgment.
We live increasingly in the time of what Debord aptly called ‘the society of the
spectacle’. Our politics, and our justice, have become increasingly ‘spectacular’, a matter
of ‘show trials’ and ‘live’ television courtroom drama. A poignant icon of this state of
affairs is to be found in the example, often cited by Paul Virilio, of the women of the
Plaza de Maya in Buenos Aires, who congregate in silence at regular intervals simply to
bear witness to their relatives who have been made to ‘disappear’ by a cruel politico-
military regime.41 Political systems—including soi-disant ‘democratic’ systems—
increasingly deal with dissident thought by controlling and regulating its appearances;
and, on occasion, dissident thinkers themselves are entirely ‘disappeared’ either directly
by force or indirectly by bureaucratic measures. The essence of the political in our time is

45.7 Page 447

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 409
formulated not upon the old—the ‘modernist’—relation between appearance and reality,
but rather upon the relation between appearance and disappearance. Increasingly, the real
itself is subject to this relation as well, when, for a random instance, the reality of the
Gulf War of 1990 was reduced to the status of a video game, death and destruction
disappearing until such times as the military decided it was appropriate for their
reappearance before the population to be acceptable.42
Fundamentally, this shift has affected the status of knowledge upon which judgment
and representation are based. The opposition of appearance to reality assumes necessarily
that the Object of knowledge is stable, and that there exists a model for the Subject of
knowledge which is transcendent. But in the postmodern mood, this has been
contaminated by a historicity and mutability which render both Subject and Object
unstable. As a result, knowledge itself—predicated upon a stable relation between the
Subject and Object of knowledge, upon a moment of anagnorisis or recognition
producing the Identity of the Subject—has entered into crisis.
This crisis was foreseen by Kant. In the Critique of Pure Reason Kant faced up to the
question of the scientificity—by which he meant verifiability—of knowledge about the
world; and he argued there for the necessity of a priori judgment in such matters. But
more than this, he argued that an a priori knowledge gleaned simply from an analytic
methodology would simply tell us a great deal about the methodology, and not
necessarily anything new about the world: it would provide only anamnesis. That is to
say, to perceive the world at all, consciousness needs a form in which to comprehend it;
that form—the analytic method of perception—serves primarily the function of self-
legitimation. Kant, like the contemporary postmodernist, wanted the world to be able to
shock us into new knowledge, into the unforeseen and unpredictable. For Badiou, who
makes a clear—and we might now say ‘Kantian’—distinction between truth and the
accumulation of knowledges, for instance, ‘what is clear is that the origin of a truth is of
the order of an event’.43 Kant wanted the world to be able to shock us out of the
ideological conditioning of our consciousness’s structures. He wanted, thus, what he
called the synthetic a priori, which would exceed the analytic a priori. The synthetic
would not only confirm the method of epistemological analysis of the world; it would
also allow for the structural modification of the very analytic method itself to account for
and encompass a new given, the new and therefore unpredictable data of the world. It
would thus provide not just anamnesis but what we would now call the event of
knowledge, or knowledge as event rather than fact.
In the Critique of Judgment, this distinction between analytic and synthetic more or
less maps directly on to a distinction between determining and reflective judgments, a
distinction made much of by Lyotard in the question of postmodern justice. In a
determining judgment, an analytic method determines—predetermines—the result of the
judgment: as in mathematics, say, where the structure of arithmetic determines the result
of its internally generated problems, such as those of addition or subtraction. In reflective
judgment, we have a different state of affairs, for here, as in our judgments about the
aesthetically beautiful, there are no predetermining rules in accordance with which we
can verify our judgments: we judge ‘without criteria’, in the phrase made famous by
Lyotard. In short, this means that we judge without a predetermining theory. Judgments,
we could say, are replaced by acts or by events of judging: the aesthetic form of justice is

45.8 Page 448

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 410
replaced by the political event of justice.
In this state of affairs, the operation of reason extends itself beyond its own internally
coherent framework and attempts to grasp—or to make—the new. This extension is one
in which we can see a shift in emphasis away from scientific knowledge towards what
should properly be called narrative knowledge. Rather than knowing the stable essence of
a thing, we begin to tell the story of the event of judging it, and to enact the narrative of
how it changes consciousness and thus produces a new knowledge. The postmodern
prefers the event of knowing to the fact of knowledge, so to speak.
But the central problem remains: how can one legitimize an ‘event’ of judging? With
respect to what can one validate what must effectively be a singular act? For Lyotard, a
credulity towards metanarratives (i.e., subscription to a prevailing theory against whose
norms single events of judging might themselves be judged and validated) is tantamount
to a concession to systems theory. Even Habermas, who is opposed to Lyotard on many
counts, opposes this, seeing that in such systems theory ‘belief in legitimacy…shrinks to
a belief in legality’.44 For Habermas, communicative action can lead to the establishment
of consensus, which would provide the necessary—if always provisional—grounds upon
which to make our judgments. But Lyotard would see the establishment of consensus as a
means of arresting the flow of events, in such a way that truth would be reduced to an
accumulation of knowledges. That is to say, in short, that consensus is the means
whereby a philosophy of Becoming is reduced to a philosophy of Being. The modernist
assumes that it is possible to pass from Becoming to Being; the postmodernist believes
that any such move is always necessarily premature and unwarranted, and that its primary
victim is truth in the guise of the event.
Politics, as we usually think it, depends upon consensus; most often, such consensus
articulates itself under the rubric of ‘representation’, in which there is first an assumed
consensus between representative and represented, and second the possibility of
consensus among representatives. This is bourgeois democracy, and, for the
postmodernist, hardly a democracy at all. In place of such a politics, the postmodernist
makes the demand for a justice. Justice cannot happen under bourgeois democracy, which
is always grounded in the tyranny of the many (and even, of course, in many
‘democratic’ systems, on the tyranny of the few—on the hegemonic control of thought
and of mediatic representations, appearances and disappearances, exercised by a few who
mediate the norms of a social formation). We may no longer be able to legislate
comfortably between opposing or competing political systems, for we can no more
subscribe to such totalizing forms; but we can address the instance, the event, of judging
and of justice in its singularities.
Here lies the basis of the ethical demand in the postmodern, a demand whose roots lie
in the work of a philosopher such as Levinas. We must judge: there is no escape from the
necessity of judging in each particular case. Yet we have no grounds upon which to base
our judgment. This is profoundly akin to Levinas:
I have spoken a lot about the face of the Other as being the original site of the
sensible…. The proximity of the Other is the face’s meaning, and it means in a
way that goes beyond those plastic forms which forever try to cover the face
like a mask of their presence to perception. But always the face shows through

45.9 Page 449

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 411
these forms. Prior to any particular expression and beneath all particular
expressions, which cover over and protect with an immediately adopted face or
countenance, there is the nakedness and destitution of the expression as such,
that is to say extreme exposure, defencelessness,vulnerability itself…. In its
expression, in its mortality, the face before me summons me, calls for me, begs
for me, as if the invisible death that must be faced by the Other, pure otherness,
separated, in some way, from any whole, were my business.45
The ‘face-to-face’ implicates us in a response, in the necessity of sociality. We must
behave justly towards the fact of the Other; but we cannot do that according to a
predetermined system of justice or a predetermining political or ethical theory. The Other
is itself always other than itself; it is not simply a displaced Identity in which we may
once more recognize and reconstitute our self. The demand is for a just relating to alterity,
and for a cognition of the event of heterogeneity. In short, therefore, we must discover—
produce—justice. Here, for Lyotard and many others is the real political burden of the
postmodern: the search for a just politics which will respect the differend that constitutes
the event.
THE NEW PESSIMISM
Postmodernism has thrown the very fundamental notion of critique into doubt. It asks two
basic questions of critique: first, given that, in order to be consistent internally, critique
must have a theoretical foundation, how does it escape the injustice of violence; second,
is critique not always accommodated by and within the existing totality of its ostensible
object, and thereby rendered at best redundant and at worst complicit with its own defeat?
Many conclude, as a consequence, that postmodernism is nihilist through and through,
and that it gives succour to a contemporary socio-cultural and political state of affairs in
which late capitalism carries on unabated and uncontested.
This view causes a particular concern among critics of culture, who, coincidentally
with the rise of postmodernism in philosophy, have striven to validate mass and popular
forms of culture, and who therefore see the work of critical philosophy to be thoroughly
enmeshed in matters of general political interest. It is a widely held belief that the
postmodern has somehow eradicated the boundaries supposed to exist between ‘high art’
and ‘popular culture’. This is largely due to an understanding, deriving largely from
Jameson, that the fundamental trope of postmodernism in art is pastiche, a ‘parody
without purpose’.46 While modernists would cite or refer intertextually to a wide range of
other artistic products (Joyce using Homer, say), they would do so for some specific ends.
Postmodernists, it is argued, reiterate the same structural strategy of quotation, partial
misrepresentation and so on, but they do this simply for the sake of it. In short, where
modernism’s strategy of quotation sent the Subject from one signified to another,
postmodernism’s similar strategy stays defiantly at the level of the signifier. We watch a
rock video, in which allusions will be made to Hitchcock, say, and which may use archive
cinematic footage; but the point is simply to play with such references and not to assign
any governing ‘meaning’ or intentionality to them.

45.10 Page 450

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 412
This is an ‘ad hocism’ which has seen its counterpart in some forms of contemporary
architecture, where some architects have explicitly tried to accommodate their design to
the various tastes and demands of a variegated community. Typically, contemporary
popular art-forms plunder, and thereby question the ‘value’ of, the forms of high art,
which are often deemed to be obstructively monumental. Modelling themselves on
Duchamp, whose ‘ready-mades’ or ‘LHOOQ’ derive their power from the questioning of
all modes of ‘originality’, contemporary artists frequently ‘sample’ or repeat the ‘great
works’ of the past. In fact, as a result of this, much of the popular cultural product which
goes under the name of the postmodern in our time is actually simply a continuation of
the modern. It is frequently characterized by fragmentation instead of unity, by
intertextuality or autoreferentiality instead of reference, by the prioritization of the
signifier over the signified, and similar tropes and figures as we found in Joyce, Proust,
Mann, Gide, Picasso, Kandinsky, Schoenberg, Stravinsky and others.
There is an important distinction, however. If the allusions and cultural cross-
references made in contemporary popular art are not grasped by an audience, then so be
it. There is nothing to be gained by such knowledge, which would only allow for the self-
satisfying congratulation of narcissistic self-recognition and self-legitimation as a
‘connoisseur’. The fundamental argument here is based upon a rather cheerful
‘degradation’ of knowledge, or at least a degradation of knowledge-as-fact in favour of
knowledge-as-event.
Knowledge here has become nothing more than the next ‘byte’ on the computer screen,
the next 30,000 pixel-image, the next software package. It is important to indicate that
this is as much an effect of the technology of postmodernity as it is of any philosophical
determinants of the cultural practices of postmodernism. For the philosopher or
intellectual who assumes that his or her position is to be that of the critic whose criticisms
are based upon knowledge, enlightenment, the pursuit of truth or at least of the better
arguments in the interests of the construction of a ‘rational society’, this surely provokes
a dismal pessimism.
Yet it would be true to say that this kind of pessimism is, in a sense, rather banal. With
this form of pessimism, there yet remains the hope of Enlightenment, of an enlightenment
possessed by the critic and therefore available to others. What is at stake in
postmodernism is a much more rigorous form of Pessimism, one which will act as a
philosophical counter to the Optimism on which Enlightenment and modernity are
fundamentally grounded. As I indicated earlier, such Optimism projects into the future a
moment of redemption of the present. It suggests the possibility and even the eventual
necessity of a coincidence between intellection and material practice, between aesthetics
and politics, between ‘I’ as the Subject of consciousness and ‘me’ as its Object. Thereby
it suggests the immanence as well as the imminence of a moment of self-presence; and
fundamentally, therefore, such an Optimism can be seen to be predicated upon a
philosophy of Identity. If the postmodern is distinguishable from the modern, the
distinction lies in the willingness of postmodernism to countenance and indeed to
encourage a philosophy of alterity. The Pessimism of the postmodern lies in a realization
that the future will not redeem the present; that the material world may be thoroughly
resistant to consciousness and to our determination to master it by signification; that
history, in short, does not exist for the Subject.

46 Pages 451-460

▲back to top

46.1 Page 451

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 413
Such a Pessimism, of course, has nothing to do with an emotion of sadness. It is,
rather, of the philosophical order of an ethical demand. If the crude formulation of
Optimism is that ‘all is for the best in the best of all possible worlds’, then Pessimism
does not strictly speaking simply or simplistically state the reverse, that ‘all is for the
worst in the worst of all possible worlds’. Rather, it takes as its first step the
acknowledgement, even within modernist Optimism, that there are a number of ‘possible
worlds’. It advances from this that these possible worlds may exist simultaneously (in the
form, say, of ‘first’ world, ‘Third’ world, ‘underdeveloped’ world, and so on), and that
we should bear witness to the differend which constitutes their mutual relations. We
cannot therefore homogenize these worlds, nor can we hierarchize their order of priority
or normativity. We are in no position to speak of the ‘all’, and therefore cannot describe it
as being either ‘for the best’ or ‘for the worst’: the ‘all’ is, in fact, precisely the kind of
homogenizing semantic trope which postmodernism would counter with ‘the local’ or,
better, the ‘singularity of the event’. The singularity of the event always implicates the
Subject in an act of judgment, and such judgments, made without criteria, are best faced
both stoically and ethically.47 Postmodern Pessimism derives from the realization that
‘the just’ can never be formulated; the positive aspect of such Pessimism lies in the
realization that the just must be enacted, invented. History may not exist for the Subject;
but the Subject must ‘just’ exist.
NOTES
1 For a full indication of the scope of these debates, see T.Docherty (ed.), Postmodernism: A
Reader (Hemel Hampstead: Harvester-Wheatsheaf, 1993), and C.Jencks (ed.), The
Postmodern Reader (London: Academy Editions, 1992).
2 F.de Onís (ed.), Antologia de la poesia española e hispanoamericana (Madrid, 1934);
A.Toynbee, A Study of History, vol. 1 (1934; 2nd edn, Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1935), p. 1, note 2, and vol. 5 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1939), p. 43. For a fuller
documentation of the history of the term ‘postmodernism’, see M.Köhler,
‘“Postmodernismus”: Ein begriffsgeschichtlicher Überblick’, Amerikastüdien, 22:1 (1977).
3 H.White, Metahistory (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1973; repr. 1987). pp.
61–2.
4 E.Auerbach, Mimesis (1946; trans. W.R.Trask; repr. Princeton: Princeton University Press,
1974), p. 552. See my comments on what, theoretically, is at stake in this text in T.Docherty,
After Theory (London: Routledge, 1990), pp. 122–3.
5 L.A.Fiedler, ‘The New Mutants’, Partisan Review, 32 (1965):505–6. The distinction between
aesthetic postmodernism as mood and political postmodernity as a periodizing term has often
been seen as a state of affairs productive of a specific ‘schizophrenia’. For more on this, see
F.Jameson, Postmodernism (London: Verso, 1991), pp. 25ff.; and cf. the work of Deleuze
and Guattari and those thinkers usually grouped under the rubric of ‘anti-psychiatry’, such as
Rollo May, David Cooper, R.D.Laing, Norman O.Brown and others.
6 See, e.g., J.Habermas, Theory of Communicative Action, 2 vols, trans. T. McCarthy (London:
Heinemann, 1984); Habermas, Philosophical Discourse of Modernity, trans. F.G.Lawrence
(London: Polity, 1985); F.Jameson, Late Marxism (London: Verso, 1990); E.Mandel, Late
Capitalism (London: Verso, 1978).
7 J.Lyotard, The Postmodern Condition [14.44], xxiv. Lyotard indicates that such a definition

46.2 Page 452

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 414
is ‘simplifying to extremes’; and later, in Le Postmoderne expliqué aux enfants [14.34], 40,
he points out that in this text he overstressed the narrative genre.
8 Lyotard, Postmodern Condition, [14.44], 81.
9 For more on the event, see Lyotard, ‘The Sublime and the avant-garde’, in A. Benjamin (ed.)
[14.47] and cf. G.Bennington, Lyotard: Writing the Event (Manchester: Manchester
University Press, 1988). On justice, see Lyotard, Le Différend [14.30] and Lyotard and J.-
L.Thébaud, Au juste [14.41].
10 T.Adorno and M.Horkheimer, Dialectic of Enlightenment (1944; trans. J. Cumming, London:
Verso, 1986), p. 6.
11 P.Gay, The Enlightenment, vol. 1 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1966), p. xiii.
12 Adorno and Horkheimer, Dialectic, p. 3.
13 Ibid., p. 6.
14 Ibid., p. 7.
15 Ibid., p. 9.
16 Lyotard, ‘Svelte Appendix to the Postmodern Question’, trans. T.Docherty, in R.Kearney
(ed.), Across the Frontiers (Dublin: Wolfhound Press, 1988), p. 265.
17 See, for examples, J.L.Austin, How to do Things with Words 2nd edn, (Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1975); K.Burke, Language as Symbolic Action (Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1966); S.Fish, Self-Consuming Artifacts (Berkeley: University of California
Press, 1972), and Is there a Text in this Class? (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,
1980); W.J.T.Mitchell (ed.), Against Theory (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985),
which includes a ‘more-pragmatist-than-thou’ statement by Richard Rorty, the most
explicitly ‘New Pragmatist’ of current pragmatic theorists.
18 Paul de Man, The Resistance to Theory (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1986), p.
11. See also G.Frege, ‘On Sense and Meaning’, in M.Black and P.T.Geach (eds),
Translations from the Philosophical Writings of Gottlob Frege (Oxford: Blackwell, 1952).
19 On the philosophical deconstruction of such identity, see, e.g., V.Descombes, Modern
French Philosophy, trans. L.Scott-Fox and J.M.Harding (Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press, 1980), p. 38.
20 Adorno and Horkheimer, Dialectic, p. 7.
21 Ibid., p. 13.
22 See M.Foucault, Folie et déraison (Paris: Plon, 1961).
23 Voltaire, Candide (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1968), passim; John Milton, ‘Paradise
Lost’, in B.A.Wright (ed.), Milton: Poems (London: Dent, 1956), p. 218 (Bk iv, line 112) and
p. 164 (Bk i, line 253). Cf. my comments on this in Docherty, On Modern Authority
(Brighton: Harvester Press, 1986), ch. 7.
24 H.Blumenberg, The Legitimacy of the Modern Age (1966), trans. R.M.Wallace (Cambridge,
Mass.: MIT Press, 1983), p. 404.
25 The indebtedness of this mode of thinking to the proto-existentialist Kierkegaard should be
clear: the sense that one was always ‘embarked’ and that the grounds upon which one makes
judgments are constantly shifting was always close to the centre of Kierkegaardian thinking.
26 See, e.g., C.Jencks, Postmodernism (London: Academy Editions, 1987), and P. Portoghesi,
Postmodern (New York: Rizzoli, 1983).
27 See D.Harvey, The Condition of Postmodernity (Oxford: Blackwell, 1989).
28 See K.Frampton, ‘Towards a Critical Regionalism’, in H.Foster (ed.), Postmodern Culture
(London: Pluto Press, 1983).
29 J.-F.Lyotard, The Postmodern Condition [14.44], xxiv. For the suggestion that this is over
stated, see Lyotard, Le Postmoderne expliqué aux enfants [14.34], 40.

46.3 Page 453

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 415
30 W.Benjamin, Illuminations, ed. Hannah Arendt, trans. H.Zohn (Glasgow: Fontana, 1973), p.
258.
31 See, e.g., Lyotard, Rudiments païens [14.27] and Instructions païennes [14.26].
32 Z.Bauman, Modernity and the Holocaust (Oxford: Polity Press, 1979), p. 7.
33 Ibid., p. 8.
34 Ibid., pp 202–3.
35 Ibid., p. 203.
36 J.Baudrillard, Simulations [14.19], 25.
37 See J.Derrida, Margins of Philosophy, trans. A.Bass (Brighton: Harvester, 1982), p. 213.
38 Lyotard and R.Rorty, ‘Discussion’ [14.49], 581–4.
39 See Lyotard, Le Différend [14.30].
40 For a full exploration of this notion of ‘judging without criteria’, see Lyotard and Thébaud,
Au juste [14.41].
41 See G.Debord, La Société du spectacle (Paris: Buchet-Chastel, 1968); P.Virilio, L’Horizon
négatif (Paris: Galilée, 1984), esp. cinquième partie.
42 See J.Baudrillard, La Guerre du golfe n’a pas eu lieu [14.15], and C.Norris, Intellectuals and
the Gulf War (London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1991).
43 A.Badiou, Manifeste pour la philosophie (Paris: Seuil, 1989), p. 17 (trans. T. Docherty).
44 J.Habermas, Legitimation Crisis, trans. T.MacCarthy (London: Heinemann, 1976).
45 E.Levinas, The Levinas Reader, ed. Séan Hand (Oxford: Blackwell, 1989), pp. 82, 83.
46 See F.Jameson, ‘Postmodernism; or, the Cultural Logic of Late Capitalism’, in his
Postmodernism (London: Verso, 1991); and see also the various earlier, and more influential,
forms of Jameson’s essay in Foster (ed.), Postmodern Culture (where it appears as
‘Postmodernism and Consumer Society’) and in New Left Review, 146 (1984):56–93.
47 On such stoicism, see G.Deleuze, Logique du sens (Paris: Minuit, 1969).
SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY
What follows here is a list of titles by Lyotard and by Baudrillard which are relevant to
the theme, concept, practices or philosophies of postmodernism. Given the fact that
postmodernism is explicitly eclectic, it does not comprise a representative selection of the
writings available on postmodernism. For a more detailed bibliography of
postmodernism, as opposed to a list of the writings of Lyotard and Baudrillard, the reader
should consult the following texts: S. Connor, Postmodernist Culture (Oxford: Basil
Blackwell, 1989); T.Docherty, Postmodernism: A Reader (London: Harvester-
Wheatsheaf; New York: Columbia University Press, 1993); L.Hutcheon, A Poetics of
Postmodernism (London: Routledge, 1988).
Baudrillard
Primary texts
4.1 Le Système des objets, Paris: Gallimard, 1968.
4.2 La Société de consommation, Paris: Gallimard, 1970.
4.3 Pour une critique de l’économie politique du signe, Paris: Gallimard, 1972.

46.4 Page 454

▲back to top
Postmodernist theory 416
4.4 Le Miroir de la production, Tournail: Casterman, 1973.
4.5 L’Echange symbolique et la mort, Paris: Gallimard, 1976.
4.6 L’Effet Beaubourg, Paris: Galilée, 1977.
4.7 Oublier Foucault, Paris: Galilée, 1977.
4.8 De la séduction, Paris: Denoël, 1979.
4.9 Simulacres et simulation, Paris: Galilée, 1981.
4.10 Les Stratégies fatales, Paris: Grasset, 1983.
4.11 La Gauche divine, Paris: Grasset, 1985.
4.12 Amérique, Paris: Grasset, 1986.
4.13 L’Autre par lui-même, Paris: Galilée, 1987.
4.14 Cool Memories, Paris: Galilée, 1987.
4.15 La Guerre du golfe n’a pas eu lieu, Paris: Galilée, 1991.
Translations
4.16 The Mirror of Production, trans. M.Poster, St Louis: Telos Press, 1975.
4.17 For a Critique of the Political Economy of the Sign, trans. C.Levin, St Louis: Telos
Press, 1981.
4.18 In the Shadow of the Silent Majorities, trans. P.Foss, P.Patton, and J. Johnston, New
York: Semiotext(e), 1983.
4.19 Simulations, trans. P.Foss, P.Patton, and P.Beitchman, New York: Semiotext(e),
1983.
4.20 The Evil Demon of Images, Sydney: Power Institute Publications, 1987.
4.21 Selected Writings, ed. M.Poster, Cambridge: Polity Press, 1988.
Lyotard
Primary texts
4.22 La Phénoménologie, Paris: PUF, 1954.
4.23 Dérives à partir de Marx et Freud, Paris: Union Générale d’Editions, 10/18, 1970.
4.24 Discours, figure, Paris: Klincksieck, 1971.
4.25 L’Economie libidinale, Paris: Minuit, 1974.
4.26 Instructions païennes, Paris: Galilée, 1977.
4.27 Rudiments païens, Paris: Union Générale d’Editions, 1977.
4.28 La Condition postmoderne, Paris: Minuit, 1979.
4.29 Le Mur du pacifique, Paris: Galilée, 1979.
14.30 Le Différend, Paris: Minuit, 1983
14.31 L’Assassinat de l’expérience par la peinture: Monory, Paris: Le Castor Astral,
1984.
14.32 Le Tombeau de l’intellectuel, Paris: Galilée, 1984.
14.33 L’Enthousiasme: la critique kantienne de l’histoire, Paris: Galilée, 1986.
14.34 Le Postmoderne expliqué aux enfants, Paris: Galilée, 1986.
14.35 ‘Sensus Communis’, Le Cahier du Collége International de Philosophie, 3
(1987):67–87.

46.5 Page 455

▲back to top
Routledge history of philosophy 417
14.36 L’Inhumain, Paris: Galilée, 1988.
14.37 Leçons sur l’analytique du sublime, Paris: Galilée, 1991.
14.38 Lyotard, J.-F. and Chaput, T., Less Immatériaux, Paris: Centre Georges Pompidou,
1985.
14.39 Lyotard, J.-F. and Francken, R., L’Histoire de Ruth, Paris: Le Castor Astral, 1983.
14.40 Lyotard, J.-F. and Monory, J., Récits tremblants, Paris: Galilée, 1977.
14.41 Lyotard, J.-F. and Thébaud, J.-L., Au juste, Paris: Christian Bourgois, 1979.
14.42 Lyotard, J.-F. et al., La Faculté de juger, Paris: Minuit, 1983.
Translations
14.43 ‘One of the Things at Stake in Women’s Struggles’, SubStance, 20 (1978): 9–17.
14.44 The Postmodern Condition: A Report on Knowledge, trans. G.Bennington and
B.Massumi, Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1984.
14.45 The Differend, trans. G.van den Abbeele, Manchester: Manchester University
Press, 1990.
14.46 Peregrinations, New York: Columbia University Press, 1988.
14.47 The Lyotard Reader, ed. A.Benjamin, Oxford: Blackwell, 1989.
14.48 Just Gaming, trans. W.Godzich, Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1985.
14.49 Lyotard, J.-F. and Rorty, R, ‘Discussion’, Critique, 41 (1985):581–4.

46.6 Page 456

▲back to top
Glossary
alterity—a perspective on otherness that goes beyond mere binary opposition. In the
work of Emmanuel Levinas, the other is ethically prior to any projection of self.
apodictic—a term used to refer to that which is absolutely certain and necessarily true.
Husserl introduced the phenomenological method in order to make philosophy a
‘rigorous’ science based on apodictic grounds.
aporia—from the Greek apeiron (boundless, infinite). Term used for a puzzling question
or theme that generates other questions, but has no clear and simple resolution.
apperception—a primary tenet of the philosophy of reflective consciousness that refers
to an awareness of one’s own changing mental states. For Kant transcendental
apperception describes the unity of consciousness (pure ego) that precedes and
synthesizes our perceptions, thus grounding any possibility of experience at all.
binary opposition—a principle first explored in the theory of Ferdinand de Saussure, the
Swiss linguist whose Cours de linguistique générale (1916) pointed out the relational
features of language that later influenced the development of structuralism. It identifies
the ‘phonemic’ differences that allow us to recognize significant contrasts between
words as spoken (e.g., bat/cat), while at the same time ignoring phonemic differences
that are not used to distribute meaning in a particular language (e.g., coat/caught).
categorical imperative—Kant’s ‘moral law’ which is universally binding by self-
legislating reason. One formulation would be: ‘Act only on that maxim through which
you can at the same time will that it should become a universal law.’
critical theory—in its most general application, designates the activity of cultural
critique as philosophical praxis. This would include Kulturkritik as practised by
members of the Frankfurt school (Horkheimer, Marcuse, Adorno, Benjamin and
Habermas), as well as by French and Italian social philosophy represented by Gramsci,
Foucault, Althusser and Lyotard. A broad category encompassing studies using
Marxist and Freudian methods of analysis, as well as works focusing on aesthetics and
mass culture.
Dasein—Heidegger’s term to designate ‘that being for whom Being is an issue’, a
concept most fully developed in Being and Time. Originally a word in German simply
meaning ‘existence’, it takes on a contextualized resonance, and Heidegger stressed
that Dasein was never to be understood simply as the Cartesian ‘subject’.
deconstruction—a term used by Jacques Derrida to describe the strategies and tactics
which can be used to re-examine the presuppositions of texts which are usually read
from a logocentric perspective. It represents a philosophical challenge to the
‘metaphysics of presence’ by including attention to the negative term which is always
left as a trace of supplementary meanings.
différance—more than just the difference (différence) that stands in opposition to
identity, this term is used by Derrida to describe the prior ground upon which such
oppositions are constructed. As such, it always resists binary categories by going

46.7 Page 457

▲back to top
Glossary 419
beyond them.
differend (différend)—a term used by Jean-François Lyotard to emphasize the
incommensurability of different ‘language games’ that usually results in the silencing
of the weaker participant. A persistent heterogeneity that can never be reduced to
sameness.
discourse ethics—a term used by Jürgen Habermas to refer to the linguistic dimension of
his project for communicative action. All speakers have the right to freely argue for
normative claims that possess universal validity.
eidos—Greek term which has been used in various ways to convey the sense of form,
shape, appearance, image or idea. Plato uses this term for his abstract Forms or Ideas
reflecting universal essences. For Husserl eidos is the essence of a noematic content
revealed by the phenomenological method of inquiry. (See also phenomenology.)
epochē—the bracketing or suspension of empirical and metaphysical presuppositions of
the ‘natural attitude’. Husserl proposed such bracketing as the first methodological
move of his phenomenology.
être-en-soi—Sartre’s term for ‘being-in-itself’, a mere thing which is acted upon and
remains passive. For Sartre this entails inauthentic existence, which evades the
responsibility for making choices. Opposed to être-pour-soi, being-for-itself, which
actively makes choices and takes responsibility in living authentically.
existentialism—in the twentieth century, the philosophy of existence developed ideas of
both Kierkegaard (1813–55) and Nietzsche (1844–1900) that stressed the primacy of
individual freedom, choice and responsibility in a world devoid of absolute values.
Significant contributors would be Jean-Paul Sartre, Albert Camus and Simone de
Beauvoir.
Frankfurt school—founded in 1923, the major centre for critical theory during the
1930s, and re-established after the Second World War, when many of its members
were forced to flee to America. (See also critical theory.)
fusion of horizons—a concept used by Hans-Georg Gadamer (Horizontverschmelzung)
to indicate the importance of recognizing historical distance in the activity of
philosophical hermeneutics. Approaching any text necessarily brings together the
historical horizon of the interpreter, which must be taken into account, with that of an
historically distant tradition.
genealogy—a term used first by Nietzsche and later by Foucault to describe the historical
interrogation of discursive practices that produce knowledge and shape institutions.
Neither predictably evolving nor continuous, these discourses reveal the ultimate locus
of power relations that construct the subject.
grammatology—the science of the written sign proposed by Derrida that challenged the
dominance of spoken (phonocentric) discourse which privileges presence. The written
sign is thus left open to alternative interpretations and meanings.
hegemony—a concept developed by Antonio Gramsci that stresses the ideological
importance of cultural institutions in protecting the interests of a dominant class.
Apparent consensus is achieved by a political and cultural leadership that transmits and
legitimates its own values, which remain unexamined as ideologically neutral. The
concept changed the focus of much Marxist theory from the economic base to
superstructure.

46.8 Page 458

▲back to top
Glossary 420
hermeneutics—a term broadly defined by Paul Ricoeur as ‘the art of deciphering
indirect meaning’. This philosophical task of interpretation proceeds via the mediations
of symbol, myth, dream, image, narrative, text and ideology. For Gadamer as well, all
encounters with tradition must be viewed through this structure of interpretation.
hermeneutics of suspicion—the practice of critical or ‘depth’ hermeneutics that reveals
the hidden and often ideological nature of texts, events and social practices. Ricoeur
identifies three ‘masters of suspicion’: Marx, Nietzsche and Freud.
ideal speech situation—a concept suggested by Habermas to describe the required
conditions of equality and free, unencumbered speech for participants to reach a
universally binding consensus in rational discourse.
ideology—For Marx this meant ‘false consciousness’, that is, the complex of abstract
beliefs that ignore historical and material existence by distorting and concealing social
contradictions. The Marxist critiques of religion and German idealism aim to highlight
this contradiction. Expanded by the work of Gramsci who recognized the importance
of the ‘superstructure’ in supporting ideological hegemony through cultural
institutions. Less negatively, for Ricoeur, the natural inclination within any social
grouping to bind itself through foundational myths that appeal to tradition and resist
change.
instrumental rationality—a translation of Max Weber’s concept Zweckrationalität,
which identifies goal-oriented rationality as ‘the iron cage’ from which we cannot
escape. It permeates our lives in the form of increasing bureaucracy and narrowing
expertise. It greatly influenced Horkheimer’s and Adorno’s critique of Enlightenment
rationality, Dialectic of Enlightenment.
intentionality—a concept revived by Franz Brentano from medieval philosophy and later
more fully developed by Edmund Husserl in his phenomenology. His emphasis on
consciousness as always ‘consciousness-of-something’ is the foundation for his noetic-
noematic structure of the intentional act. Consideration must be given to both the
noetic act itself (willing, believing, etc.), as well as to the noematic ‘content’ of this
act. Only in this way is the essence or eidos of what is intended revealed. For Husserl,
the three modes of intentionality (perception, imagination, and signification) are fully
interrelated.
jouissance—While this term is usually translated from the French as ‘pleasure’, it
connotes an orgasmic joy and release that engages the whole body.
life-world (Lebenswelt)—a term used in the late work of Husserl (The Crisis of the
European Sciences, 1937), referring to a shared background of culture, tra-dition and
language that contextualizes subjective experience. The prototype of the life-world can
be found in the life-philosophy and hermeneutic work of Wilhelm Dilthey who
developed Hegel’s concept of life and its domain of internal relations. Dilthey also
greatly influenced Heidegger’s focus on lived, historical experience in Being and Time
(1927). Most recently, the term reemerges in Habermas’s theory of communicative
action.
logocentrism—philosophical thinking that privileges ‘presence’ and attempts to define
reality, truth, and knowledge with a concept of ‘being’ which is rooted in identifiable
binary oppositions.
mauvaise-foi—a term used by Sartre that literally means ‘bad faith’, a mode of living

46.9 Page 459

▲back to top
Glossary 421
inauthentically and passively. A refusal to acknowledge that one always has the freedom
to choose.
Naturwissenschaft—the German for ‘natural philosophy’, the study of nature in general.
Originally used to refer specifically to the science of investigating mechanistic
principles and laws within the field of physics. Opposed to Geisteswissenschaften
(human sciences) in the work of early hermeneutic theorists such as Dilthey.
noema—see phenomenology.
norms—a term referring to the standards or rules invoked to guide human conduct in
determining what ought to be done, or what one is obliged to do, in an ideal and
regulative sense.
ontological difference—for Heidegger, the distinction between ‘Being’ (Siein) and
‘beings’ (Seiende), which emphasizes that merely cataloguing existing beings or
‘entities’ ignores the ontological priority of Being-qua-Being.
ontology—a branch of philosophy that investigates ‘being-as-being’. Questions are
raised regarding topics in the metaphysical domain, such as the nature of reality,
existence, essence and necessity.
ousia—from the Greek for ‘substance’. The term used by Aristotle to indicate the most
important and permanent of his ten categories.
phallocentrism—a form of logocentric thinking in which the phallus takes on the
identity of logos or reason. Women are thereby defined within the context of
patriarchal relations which represents them exclusively from a male perspective.
phenomenology—one of the most influential philosophies of the twentieth century,
developed by Edmund Husserl. He attempted to secure a rigorous method for
describing the vital role of human consciousness in constituting meaning. His project
to go ‘back to the things themselves’ (‘zu den Sachen selbst’), first announced in
Logical Investigations (1900), required a step back from ‘the natural attitude’ of
common sense in an effort to describe the essential contents (noema) of our intending
acts (noesis), Husserl’s ‘eidetic phenomenology’ was later revised by Heidegger into a
‘hermeneutic’ and ‘existential’ phenomenology (Being and Time, 1927), which in turn
influenced numerous philosophers, such as Gadamer, Ricoeur, Merleau-Ponty and
Sartre. (See also intentionality.)
positivism—the view of scientific methodology that privileges ‘neutral’ observation and
control in experimental procedures. First envisioned by Auguste Comte (1798–1857)
as the most developed stage of human development, it is now associated with
technological rationalization and control.
postmodernism—a term used by Jean-François Lyotard (The Postmodern Condition,
1979) to refer to the radical and constant mutability contained within the concept of
modernism itself; not to be understood simply as a ‘stage’ that comes after or replaces
modernism. An influential challenge to the notion of the autonomous subject guided by
the metanarratives of historical consciousness, postmodernism has affected varied
intellectual domains, such as philosophy, literature and an.
poststructuralism—shares with structuralism the rejection of the paradigm of the human
subject as the self-contained cogito or consciousness found in phenomenology and
existentialism. However, it also rejects the static internal relations of the structuralist
model, opting instead for multiple possibilities within the signifier-signified

46.10 Page 460

▲back to top
Glossary 422
combinations. The later work of some French philosophers who began as
‘structuralists’ (e.g., Lacan, Barthes) most closely fits this stance. (See also semiotics.)
readiness-to-hand (Zuhandenheit)—for Heidegger, Dasein’s relationship to entities as
practical comportment and everyday involvement, e.g., just using the hammer and not
consciously articulating the process. Contrasts with the concept of ‘Presence-at-
Hand’ (Vorhandenheit), whereby Dasein regards an ‘object’ with abstract
(circumspective) comportment.
reification—a concept (Verdinglichung) used by Marx to describe the reduction of
human beings and human relations to ‘thing-like’ objects, as well as the alienation of
human labour from the material objects produced by its own work. Later much
developed by Lukács in the longest chapter of History and Class Consciousness.
semiotics—a ‘science of signs’, also known as semiology, developed by Ferdinand de
Saussure in Europe and C.S.Peirce in America. Studies the constitutive-relational
nature of signs and their communicative properties in society. The linguistic sign is a
structural relationship between an acoustic ‘signifier’ and the concept or ‘signified’ it
refers to. Much extended by Roland Barthes in his analyses of social semiotics where
signification is heavily dependent on the connotation or associative powers of the sign,
in popular culture and advertising especially.
signifier, signified—see semiotics.
social imaginary—for Ricoeur, the symbolic discourses which permit the formation of
complex socio-political groupings. Foundational symbols and myths provide the
ideological basis for this identity, which is constantly tested by the potential for change
and the need for change (Utopian possibilities).
structuralism—a movement focusing on internal structural relations rather than content,
based on the linguistic method of analysis developed by Ferdinand de Saussure. He
suggested that language constituted a self-contained system, wherein meaning was
generated within language itself rather than merely reflecting a ‘given’ reality. This
revolutionary claim, and the methodology it entailed, attracted immense interest across
a spectrum of intellectual disciplines. Lévi-Strauss applied de Saussure’s insights to
anthropology, Lacan to psychoanalysis, Althusser to Marxism and Foucault to his
wide-ranging social critique. The exponents of structuralism maintained an adversarial
relation with existentialists and phenomenologists, whose belief in a transcendentally
free human subject was rejected. (See also poststructuralism.)
technē—from the Greek for skill, art, or craft. For Aristotle anything created by humans,
as opposed to physis (nature) which is anything not humanly crafted. This knowledge
of how to reach a desired end can be procedural as well, and would include not only
the fine arts of music, dance, poetry, drama, etc., but also such special skills as rhetoric
and medicine.
Mara Rainwater, University College Dublin

47 Pages 461-470

▲back to top

47.1 Page 461

▲back to top
Index
a priori 35, 298, 496
Abbagnano, Nicola 290, 311–312, 385
Absolute, the 293–294, 295–296, 303–306, 310, 311, 385, 412
action 75, 94, 130, 219, 269–271, 272, 497
Adorno, Theodor 113, 215, 219, 224–226, 476, 482–483, 485, 486
The Adventures of Dialectic (Merleau-Ponty) 77, 78, 88
aesthetics 224–224–226, 230, 314
Against Method (Feyerabend) 166, 251
The Aim and Structure of Physical Theory (Duhem) 154
alienation 192–192, 193, 199, 201
Aliotta, Antonio 290
Alone of All Her Sex (Warner) 422
alterity 506
Althusser, Louis 159, 191, 198, 200–202, 404
ambiguity 97, 110, 162
Analysis of Sensations (Mach) 151
analytic philosophy 1, 2, 5, 144–144, 145, 148, 149, 166 –168
Anderson, Perry 204
anxiety 46 –46
apodictic 506
aporia 506
apperception 10, 506
application 242, 261, 263
appropriation 267, 268, 273
Aquinas, Thomas 289, 304
architecture 489
Archive for the History of Socialism and the Worker’s Movement 213, 215
Ardigo, Roberto 289
Arendt, Hannah 410
Aristotle 9–9, 263, 264, 447;
reappropriation of 40, 42–6
Aron, Raymond 62, 63, 75, 81
art 49–50, 74, 92, 93, 224–226, 292–292, 498 –499
Art de France 88
atheism 132 –132
Auerbach, Erich 475
Austin, J.L. 204, 484
authentic/inauthentic 74
authenticity 70 –72
autobiography 399
Avenarius, Richard 150, 296

47.2 Page 462

▲back to top
Index 424
Babich, B.E. 168
Bachelard, Gaston 144, 145, 155, 159–163, 166
Bahro, Rudolph 477
Balibar, Etienne 202
Banfi, Antonio 289, 290, 308, 385
Barnes, B. 166
Barthes, Roland 267, 390, 392–393, 397 –399486
Baudelaire, Charles 393
Baudrillard, Jean 410, 478, 479, 481–482, 492, 494 –495
Bauer, Bruno 211
Bauman, Zygmunt 490 –491
Beautiful, the 296, 297, 300
behaviourism 89
being 9, 19, 97, 135, 114, 247, 292
Being 299, 300–300, 301, 302, 383, 484, 497;
in Aristotle 45;
in Hegel 354;
in Heidegger 38–9, 40, 42, 43, 46–7, 55, 58–61, 63–4, 67, 68–9, 157, 301, 302, 339, 446–7, 464;
in Husserl 41–2;
in Merleau-Ponty 121;
metaphysics of 372–4
Being and Nothingness (Sartre) 66–69, 71, 75, 76, 411
Being and Time (Heidegger) 2, 35, 36, 39, 46, 47, 54, 246, 248, 446
‘Being-in’ 40 –41
being-in-itself (l’être-en-soi) 66–69, 148, 128, 507
being-in-the-world 39–40, 41, 42–42, 63, 68, 72, 90, 246, 248, 308, 256, 258, 259, 268, 272, 279,
391
Bellarmine, Cardinal 157, 158
Benjamin, Jessica 434
Benjamin, Walter 191, 194, 249, 215, 224–224, 490
Berkeley, George 62, 148, 150, 158, 300
Bernstein, Richard J. 242, 251, 276, 277
Berthelot, Marcellin 154, 170
Betti, Emilio 242, 244, 250
Bhaskar, Roy 159, 161, 204
binary opposition 391–392, 410, 506
biologism 413
Blackmur, R.P. 484
Blanchot, Maurice 465
Bloch, Ernst 191, 194 –195
Bloor, D. 163, 166
Blumenberg, Hans 488
body, the 68, 92, 97, 114–115, 419–420, 423, 424, 427
body-subject 89, 94
Boltzmann 150
Bontadini, Gustavo 307
Bopp 402

47.3 Page 463

▲back to top
Index 425
Bosanquet, B. 313
boundary situations 120 –120
Boyle, Robert 148, 150
Bradley, F.H. 307
Braidotti, Rosi 423, 430
Bréier, Emile 86
Brentano, Franz 7, 8–8, 9, 13, 151, 167
Bridgman 158
Brunschvicg, Léon 86
Bubner, Rudiger 164
Bukharin, Nikolai Ivanovitch 188
Buridan, Jean 191
Burke, Kenneth 484
Butterfield, H. 156 –191
Camus, Albert 450
Canguilhem, Georges 161, 166
Capital (Marx) 200, 212, 213
capitalism 480
Capitalisme et schizophrénie (Deleuze and Guattari) 478
Carabellese, Pantaleo 290, 300–302, 313
care 42 –42
Carlini, Armando 307
Carnap, Rudolp 113, 148
Cartesian, dualism 114, 217, 272;
order 163
Cartesian Meditations (Husserl) 19–19, 86
Castoriadis, Cornelius 274
categorial intuition 14–15, 18, 34–35
categories 296–298, 451
Caudwell, Christopher 204
Chardin, Teillhard de 199
Chodorow, Nancy 434
choice 72, 74, 94
Chomsky, Noam 158, 419
chora 419, 420
Cixous, Hélène 416, 431 –433
class theory 210–211, 217–217, 218
classical theory 227 –228
Cobb-Stevens, R. 167
Code, Lorraine 430
cognition 5, 10, 15, 22, 224, 247;
acts of 10
Cohen, G.A. 204
coherence 309
Cohn-Bendit, Daniel 477
Colletti, Lucio 198, 309
communication 124 –125

47.4 Page 464

▲back to top
Index 426
communicative action 230 –231
Comte, Auguste 152
concepts 17, 65
concrete 292, 294, 301 –302
conscience 37
consciousness 19, 21, 304, 478, 492;
in Carabellese 364–7;
in Gadamer 311, 312;
in Husserl 451, 454, 458–9;
in Levinas 156, 160;
in Sartre 75–6, 80, 82, 83, 87, 89, 403
content/s 6, 8
continental philosophy 1–1;
questioning of foundations 2–3;
responsiveness of ideas 4;
and science 175–206;
style 3–4
contradiction 201
conversation 253, 258–258, 261, 263, 266, 281
Copenhagen school 158
Cornforth, Maurice 204
Course in General Linguistics (Saussure) 390–391, 484
creation 51 –51
creative fidelity 109, 124
The Crisis of European Science and Transcendental Phenomenology (Husserl) 220
critical ontology 300 –304
critical theory 506;
defined 254–9;
in Frankfurt School 265–71;
origins 259–65;
recent developments 272–81
Criticism and Truth (Barthes) 397
critique 228–229, 498
Critique of Dialectical Reason (Sartre) 62, 65, 72, 75, 78
Critique of Instrumental Reason (Horkheimer) 219
Critique of Pure Reason (Kant) 145,485, 495 –496
Croce, Benedetto 195, 289, 300, 313;
absolute historicism 358–64;
works by 360
Crombie, A.C. 148, 156, 164, 166, 169
Culler, Jonathan 161
Cuvier, G. 402
Dasein 35–43, 47–49, 51, 54, 117, 118, 148, 147, 247, 249, 506 –507
Davidson, D. 158
De Beauvoir, Simone 61, 63, 78, 411–414, 415–416, 430, 433, 434
De Man, Paul 467–468, 485
Debord, G. 495

47.5 Page 465

▲back to top
Index 427
Deborin 188
deconstruction 477, 507;
commentary 443–5;
defined 441–3, 464;
double reading 443, 446–8;
problem of closure 448–9
Deleuze, Gilles 403, 410;
and Guattari, F. 478
Della Volpe, Galvano 197, 309, 310
Delphy, Christine 435
Derrida, Jacques 130, 255, 390, 400, 403, 410, 431;
deconstruction 441–9;
Husserl’s influence on 449–60;
publications 460–7
Descartes, René 16, 23, 53, 127
D’Espagnat, Bernard 162 –162
despair 112
The Development of the Monist View of History (Plekhanov) 187
D’Hondt, Jacques 203
Dialectic of Enlightenment (Adorno/Horkheimer) 220–223, 224, 226, 227, 231, 482, 485, 487
Dialectical Materialism (Lefebvre) 199
Die Hermeneutik als allgemeine Methodik der Geiteswissenschaften (Betti) 242
différance 256, 431, 463, 464, 465, 507
differend 507
Dilthey, Wilhelm 192, 240–241, 242
Dingler, Hugo 151, 167
discourse 259, 426
discourse ethics 507
Dissemination (Derrida) 462, 464
distantiation 266–267, 282 –282
Donate, Eugenio 400
Donnici, R. 383
Dostoevsky, Fyodor 136
drama 112 –113
Droysen, J.G. 241
Drummond, John 13
Dubos, René 170
Duchamp, M. 499
Duhem, Pierre 144, 145, 147, 151, 153–158, 165, 166
Dummett, Michael 167
Eagleton, Terry 204
The Ear of the Other 465 –466
Economie libidinale (Lyotard) 478
Ecrits (Lacan) 397
ecstases 43, 55, 68
Eddington, A. 158
effective-history 252 –252

47.6 Page 466

▲back to top
Index 428
Ego 19–20, 291–292, 294, 301, 303, 305, 310, 312, 403
ego-identity 5
eidetic reduction 64–64, 65
eidos 9, 64 –64
Einaudi, Luigi 290
Einstein, Albeit 150, 153
The Elementary Structures Study of Kinship (Lévi-Strauss) 393 –395
Elements of Political Economy (Mills) 211
The Elements of Semiology (Barthes) 392–393, 397 –398
Elkaim, Arlette 61
Ellul, Jacques 146, 170
Elster, Jon 204
emotions 66
empiricism 32
Encompassing 148 –122
engagement, aesthetic and political 486
Engels, Friedrich 194, 214, 289
enjoyment 131
enlightenment 220 –223
Enlightenment, the 220, 475;
and its legacies 481–92
epistemé 402
epoché 507
equality 275, 415
equivalence 137
Erlanger school 152, 167
eros 135 –135
Esprit 87
Essays on the Materialist Conception of History (Labriola) 195
essences 21 –24
ethics 70–73, 137, 277, 422
The Ethics of Ambiguity (De Beauvoir) 78, 411
The Ethics of Sexual Difference (Irigaray) 424 –425
Etre et avoir (Marcel) 86
Euclid 23
event 479–480, 496 –497
evil 109, 135, 487
Evola, Julius 314
existence, in Heidegger 35–56;
in Merleau-Ponty 105–23;
in Sartre 74–100
existentialism 70, 78–79, 116, 117, 132, 311–312, 507
Existenz 117–118–119, 148–122, 124–124, 125, 126
experience 256
Experience and Judgement (Husserl) 20 –24
experiment/s 148, 157, 158
explanation 1, 241–242, 269, 272
expression 93, 134, 135

47.7 Page 467

▲back to top
Eye and Mind (Merleau-Ponty) 88, 93
Index 429
face-to-face 133–134, 135
factical life 34–35
facticity 41, 247, 249
family, and paternity 115
The Family Idiot (Sartre) 62, 78, 79
feminine, the 128, 135, 410–90, 417, 419, 420, 425, 426–428, 429–430, 431
feminism 477, 480
fetishism 212
Feuerbach, Ludwig 200, 212
Feyerabend, Paul 151, 158, 161, 166, 251
Fichte, J.G. 303, 384
fidelity 117 –117
Fiedler, Leslie 476
finality 64
Fish, S. 484, 485
Flaubert, Gustave 63, 64, 65, 66, 73
flesh, the 97 –99
For Marx (Althusser) 200
for-itself/in-itself 68, 100, 271
Formal and Transcendental Logic (Husserl) 16
Foucault, Michel 80, 147, 161, 167, 401–404, 410, 487
foundationalism 2
Franchini, Raffello 299
Frank, Philipp 149
Frankfurt School 191, 210, 224, 476, 482, 507
fraternity 76
free variation 21 –21
freedom 80, 93–106, 275–277, 311, 412, 413, 492
Frege, Gottlob 5, 8, 13, 17, 167
French Communist Party (PCF) 199, 202
Freud, Sigmund 73, 404, 410, 434, 461
Fromm, Erich 215
Fuller, J. 169
Fundamentals of Language (Jakobson) 393
fusion of horizons 253–253, 261–261, 507
Gadamer, Hans-Georg 152, 164, 168, 241, 242, 399;
authorial intention 316;
distantiation 315, 323–4;
fusion of horizons 306–7;
hermeneutics of 295–7, 299, 302–3;
and language 309–13, 314–15;
and prejudice 303–5;
on solidarity 335–6;
text interpretation 315–22
Galileo Galilei 22–24, 53, 148, 150, 156, 191, 158, 289

47.8 Page 468

▲back to top
Index 430
Garaudy, Roger 200
Gasché, Rodolphe 448
Geertz, Clifford 270, 272
genealogy 507 –508
General Psychopathology (Jaspers) 118
Genet, Jean 75, 465
Genette 486
Gentile, Giovanni 195, 289, 313;
actual idealism 353–62;
works by 352–3
geometry 23–23, 451–455, 468
Gerlach, Kurt Albert 214
German Enlightenment 219–219, 220
The German Ideology (Marx) 211
Gestalt psychology 396
Gethmann 167
Girard, René 400
Glas (Derrida) 464 –465
God 116–117, 123, 125–126, 132–133, 136–142, 200, 293–293, 304, 307–308, 383, 455, 475, 493
Godard, Jean-Luc 398
Goldmann, Lucien 193
Good, the 296, 297, 300
Gorz, André 477
Graff, Gerald 443
grammar 12
grammatology 508
Gramsci, Antonio 186, 195–197, 203, 290, 477;
on Marxism 374–7
Gray, Peter 483
Green movement 477
Greimas 486
Grimm 402
Grondin, Jean 279
Grunberg, Carl 241
Gurvitch, Georges 86
Gutting, Gary 147
Guzzo, Augusto 307
Habermas, Jurgen 476, 480, 494, 497;
and critical theory 275–81;
on Marxism 261
Hacking, Ian 147, 152, 158, 164
Halder 164
Hall, Stuart 204
Haller, R. 167
Hanson, N.R. 145, 146, 158, 166
Harré, Rom 144, 149
Harris, Errol 385 –386

47.9 Page 469

▲back to top
Index 431
Hayek, F.A. 284
Heelan, Patrick A. 164, 167, 168
Hegel, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich 46, 50, 54, 129, 277, 291, 294, 302, 303, 402, 410;
criticised 258;
influence on Jaspers 150, 154;
and Marxism 223, 232, 233, 245;
thought and action 254–5
hegemony 197–197, 508
Heidegger, Martin 1–1, 3, 32, 118, 148, 151, 164, 167, 168, 246–248, 311, 410, 446;
analysis of Dasein 47–53;
criticised 159;
deconstructive reappropriation of history of ontology 54–7;
early writings 39;
fundamental ontology 58–63;
on Hölderlin 59–61;
influence on Levinas 157;
and language 311;
and Nietzsche 64, 66;
reappropriation of Aristotle 40, 42–7;
reappropriation of Husserl 39–42;
the ‘turn’ 63–9
Helmholtz, R. 150
Hempel, H.-P. 148
Herbart, Johann Friedrich 10
hermeneutical, circle 47, 248–248;
consciousness 305;
experience 333;
values 333–4
hermeneutics 274, 508;
ethical and political implications 333–8;
legal 320;
methodological 322;
ontological 299, 322;
Romantic 290–5, 317;
text to action 326–33
hermeneutics of suspicion 508
Hertz 158
Hiley, D.R. et al. 169
Hill, Christopher 204
Hipparchia’s Choice (le Doeuff) 430
Hirsch Jr, E.D. 242, 243, 244, 252, 266
historicism 22;
absolute 358–64, 374;
relativistic 363, 382
history 22, 129, 145, 146, 220, 310;
in Althusser 243, 245;
and life-world 27–31;
in Merleau-Ponty 112, 115, 117, 118;

47.10 Page 470

▲back to top
Index 432
in Ricoeur 344–5, 347;
and Sartre 95–6;
zig-zag method 30
History and Class Consciousness (Lukács) 191, 193
Hobbes, Thomas 24, 148
Hobsbawn, Eric 204
Hölderlin, Friedrich 402
Holocaust 3, 490–491, 492
Homer 221
homo viator 111
Homo Viator (Marcel) 115
Hook 150
Horkheimer, Max 214, 482–483, 485, 486;
and development of critical theory 261–5
Hüber, Kurt 147
human rights 275, 276, 285
human sciences 241–241, 269–269, 271 –272
humanism 162–162, 276, 278, 285
Humanism and Terror (Merleau-Ponty) 88
Hume, David 7, 10, 14, 15, 150
Husserl, Edmund 1, 3, 5–6, 62, 63–64, 90, 99, 145, 150, 151, 158, 160–160, 164, 167, 168, 468;
ego and world 23–5;
essences 25–7;
immanence and transcendence 18–23;
influence on Derrida 449–60;
life 7–8;
life-world and history 27–31;
logical investigations 13–18;
phenomenological reduction 297–8;
reappropriation of 40–2;
and science 276–7, 278
Husserl Archive 6, 87
Hyppolite, Jean 400, 450
‘I’ 113, 119, 457, 458
Idea, the 454
ideal speech situation 508
idealism 110, 289;
actual 353–62;
mystical 367–72
ideas 186
Ideas (Husserl) 460
Ideas Pertaining to a Pure Phenomenology (Husserl) 13, 15, 16, 18
The Idea of Phenomenology (Husserl) 15, 19
identity 75, 228, 410, 415, 418–419, 422, 423–424, 434, 487, 498, 500
ideology 211, 508
Ihde, D. 146
imagination 65–66, 81, 274, 284

48 Pages 471-480

▲back to top

48.1 Page 471

▲back to top
Index 433
immanence 6, 15, 18, 38, 62, 128, 130, 220, 303, 413
infinity 132
Institute of Social Research 213, 214, 215
instrumental rationality 220, 225, 230, 508
instrumentalism 158 –158
intellect 9
intentionality 8, 11, 14–14, 34–34, 62 –6291, 128, 508
interpretation 243, 248, 261–262, 265–268, 271–272, 283
intersubjectivity 133
Introduction to Marxist Philosophy (Sève) 203
Introduction to Metaphysics (Heidegger) 48, 49, 54
intuition 8–8–9, 21, 128, 384, 457
Irigaray, Luce 416, 423 –429
Iser, W. 485
Jaki, Stanley L. 147, 155, 191
Jakobson, Roman 393
James, William 150, 151
Jameson, Fredric 204, 476, 477, 484, 498
Jardine, N. 148, 164, 169
Jaspers, Karl 108–108, 117–126;
on communication 151–3;
and Existenz 143–4, 145–6, 148–9, 151–2, 153, 154;
God and Transcendence 153–5;
on philosophy 150–1;
and science 144–7;
and truth 147–8
Jaurès, Jean 198
Jauss 485
Jonas, Hans 145
jouissance 418, 421, 422, 508
The Journal for Social Research 215
judgement/s 9, 13, 496 –497
justice 479, 480–481;
and representation 492–8
Kant, Immanuel 2, 5, 54, 165, 223, 241, 277, 300, 301, 384, 480, 485, 495–496;
influence on Jaspers 145, 147, 148, 152–4;
on women 409
Kant and the Problem of Metaphysics (Heidegger) 45
Kearney, Richard 446
Keynes, J.M. 204
Kierkegaard, Soren 79, 109, 135, 117, 118, 122, 248, 274
kinship 394 –395
Kirchhoff, J. 150, 178
Kisiel, Theodore 168
Klage, Ludwig 222
Kleinpeter, Hans 169

48.2 Page 472

▲back to top
Index 434
Knorr-Cetina, K. 166
knowledge 217, 246, 260, 286, 295, 296, 299, 415, 483–484, 487, 495, 499
Knowledge and Human Interests (Habermas) 229
Kockelmans, J. 167, 168
Kojève, Alexandre 86, 128
Korsch, Karl 191, 193 –194
Koyré 148, 156
Kristeva, Julia 403, 416, 417 –423
Kronecker, Leopold 6
Kuhn, Thomas 145, 146, 152, 158, 165, 166, 245, 251
Kyi, Aung San Suu 285
La Roy 147
La Vie intellectuelle 86
Labica, George 202
Labriola, Antonio 195–195, 289, 297
Lacan, Jacques 161, 163, 258, 396, 399–401, 410, 415, 416–417, 419, 486
Lafargue, Paul 198
language 18, 80, 99, 230, 262, 391, 397, 400–401, 415, 417, 419, 423, 424, 453, 457, 484;
hermeneutics of 309–15;
in Mach 181–2;
in Merleau-Ponty 113–15
language-games 480
Latour, Bruno 147, 163, 169
Lavoie, D. 283
Le Doeuff, Michèle 429 –430
Le Système du monde (Duhem) 154
Lefebvre, Henri 199 –199
The Legitimacy of the Modern Age (Blumenberg) 488
Leibniz, Gottfried Wilhelm 45, 53, 304, 475, 487
Lenin 185, 188, 190
Les Origines de la statique (Duhem) 154
Les Temps modernes 74, 87, 88
Letter on Humanism (Heidegger) 78
Lévi-Strauss, Claude 268, 390, 393–396, 403, 486
Levinas, Emmanuel 108, 127–137, 461, 497–498;
eros 165–6;
face-to-face 163–6;
and God 161–3, 166, 167–8;
influences on 156–9;
Jewishness 158;
master/slave 165;
and metaphysics 159–60, 168;
and the other 161;
on philosophy 159–61;
and representation 160–1;
responsibility 167;
substitution 167–8;

48.3 Page 473

▲back to top
Index 435
time 166
Levy, Benny 63, 70, 73, 76
life-world 22, 24, 89, 145, 246–247, 268, 508 –509
Limited Inc. (Derrida) 466
Lippman, Gabriel 154
literary criticism 485
Lloyd, Genevieve 430
Locke, John 5, 14, 17
logic 12, 32
Logical Investigations (Husserl) 10–16, 33, 34, 455
logocentrism 448, 462, 509
Longuet, Charles 198
Lorenzen 152, 167
Lotze, Hermann 10
Low 170
Lowenthal, Leo 215
Lowit, Alexandre 246
Lukács, Georg 186, 191–193, 214, 262
Lyotard, Jean-François 403, 476, 477, 478, 479–481, 489, 490
McAllester Jones, M. 161, 162
Mach, Ernst 144, 145–146, 147–153, 165, 166, 296;
influences 183;
and language 181–2;
sensationalism 184, 185, 186
MacIntyre, Alasdair 146, 158, 263
Macksey, Richard 400
McMullin, E. 169
Maiocchi, Roberto 155
Mallarmé,Stéphane 403
Mandel, E. 477
Mao Tse-tung 185, 190
Marcel, Gabriel 108, 109–117, 129, 136;
creative fidelity 152;
on God 141–3;
on nature of philosophy 133–9;
on the other 139–41
Marcuse, Herbert 215
Margins of Philosophy (Derrida) 462 –464
Marin, Louis 395
Marine Lover of Friedrich Nietzsche (Irigaray) 427
Maritain, Jacques 155
Martin, R.N.D. 154, 155, 191
Martinetti, Pietro 290, 313;
mystical idealism 367–72
Marx, Karl 184, 185, 289;
and critical theory 255–9;
his daughters 240;

48.4 Page 474

▲back to top
Index 436
Paris Manuscripts 229, 233
Marxism 77, 79, 97–97, 175, 184–187, 213–214, 217, 480;
Café Marx 259;
central European 231–6;
Chinese 230–1;
English-speaking world 247–8;
French 240–6;
future 248–9;
Italian 236–40, 374–7;
and postmodernism 476–8;
Soviet 226–30
Marxism and Philosophy (Korsch) 193
Marxism-Leninism 187–190, 199, 203
master narratives 489
master/slave 115, 128, 129, 134, 210 –210
materialism 309;
mechanistic 76
Materialism and Empiriocriticism (Lenin) 187
maternity 421
mathematics 159
matter 89
Maturana, U. 167
mauvaise-foi 138, 509
meaning 259, 267, 268, 269, 270, 400, 451, 465, 466
Meinong 167
Memoirs of a Dutiful Daughter (De Beauvoir) 86
Mercier-Josa, Solange 203
Merleau-Ponty, Maurice 69, 86–88, 99–100, 191, 246, 257, 271, 277, 390, 395–396;
freedom, history and politics 115–19;
hyperdialectic of the flesh 119–22;
primacy of perception 108–12;
speech, language and art 112–15
metaphor 393, 400, 404
Metaphysical Journal (Marcel) 109
metaphysics 52–53, 120, 130–130, 132, 137, 298, 304, 314
method 243, 259, 265
metonymy 393, 404
Mill, John Stuart 11, 12, 32
Miller, Henry J. 283
Milton, John 487
Mimesis (Auerbach) 475 –476
mind 5
mirror stage 399 –400
mirroring 427 –428
The Mirror of Production (Baudrillard) 478, 481
modernity 490 –491
motion 270
Muller 163

48.5 Page 475

▲back to top
Musil, R. 151
Mussolini, Benito 195
mystery 111
myth 220
Index 437
narrative 273–274, 283
Nathorp, P. 33
natural philosophy 241, 269, 509
naturalism 22
nature 292, 383
Nausea (Sartre) 61
Needham, Rodney 395
negativity 64–65
New Left Review 191, 204
The New School for Social Research 393
Newton, Isaac 53, 148, 150
Nicomachean Ethics 36
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm 47, 52, 110, 112, 117, 122, 151, 163, 167, 221, 223, 403, 465, 466
nihilism 54, 127
Nizan, Paul 88
No Exit (Sartre) 61, 69
noema 16, 19
norms 509
Notebooks for an Ethics (Sartre) 63, 77, 80
notions 65
nuclear arms race 466
numbers 8–8, 11
Object 495, 500
object, the 127, 292, 455
objectivism 245, 249–250, 401
Of Grammatology (Derrida) 398, 442–443, 445, 461
Olgiati, Francesco 307
On the Jewish Question (Marx) 210
On the Manifold Meaning of Being in Aristotle (Brentano) 32
Onis, Federico de 474
ontological difference 509
ontology 509;
defined 159;
fundamental 58–63;
regional 22–3
oppression 494
optimism 487–489, 500
The Order of Things (Foucault) 397, 401
Ordine nuovo 196
origin 402 –403
Origin of Geometry (Husserl) 451 –455
Orth, E.W. 167

48.6 Page 476

▲back to top
Index 438
other, the 112, 114–115, 131, 136, 259
Other, the 68–69, 412, 486, 497 –498
otherness 130, 414, 416, 420, 421
Otherwise than Being or Beyond Essence (Levinas) 127, 135, 136
ousia 509
overdetermination 201
Paci, Enzo 309
pantheistic mysticism 303
Parages (Derrida) 465
Pareto, Vilfredo 290
Pareyson, Luigi 307
parts/wholes 12 –12
Pascal, Blaise 111, 133, 150, 157
perception, in Merleau-Ponty 88 –91
Perelman, Chaim 265
pessimism 489 –490
phallocentrism 424, 509
phenomenological hermeneutics 243–245;
background 297–301;
basic themes 301–15;
text interpretation 315–26
Phenomenological Interpretations of Aristotle (Heidegger) 33
phenomenology 33, 35, 130, 167, 228, 509;
defined 110–12;
how viewed 1–2
Phenomenology of Spirit (Hegel) 46, 67 128, 210
The Phenomenology of Internal Time-consciousness (Husserl) 35, 19–20, 458
The Phenomenology of Perception (Merleau-Ponty) 78, 87, 89 –93
phenomenon 6, 131
The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity (Habermas) 226
The Philosophical Imaginary (Le Doeuff) 429
philosophy 120, 122, 202, 223, 264, 291 488;
activity of 448;
feminist 409–11, 414–17;
German 265, 275–6, 350–1;
history of 461, 462;
and Irigaray 426;
Italian 350–2, 380;
and Le Doeuff 429;
nature of 133–9
Philosophy of Arithmetic (Husserl) 7 –13
Philosophy of Right (Hegel) 210
phonocentrism 456 –458
phronesis 263–263
Pierce, C.S. 150
Plato 44, 52, 114, 130–130, 263, 303, 306, 446, 447, 464
Plaza, Monique 435

48.7 Page 477

▲back to top
Index 439
The Pleasure of the Text (Barthes) 398 –399
Plekhanov, George Valentinov 187 –187
Plotinus 303
poetry 74, 114–114, 314
Poincaré, Henri 148, 152
Pollach, Fredrich 215
Popper, Karl 157, 158, 204, 243
Popular Scientific Lectures (Mach) 151
Positions (Derrida) 464
positivism 2, 152, 169–170, 509
possession 114 –115
postmodernism 80, 238, 474–476, 493, 510;
and Marxism 476–8;
new pessimism 498–501
postructuralism 390, 510
see also structuralism
The Post Card (Derrida) 465
praxis 64, 65, 75–76, 80, 196–196, 199, 210, 213, 214, 258, 278, 484
prejudice 250 –251
presence 460
presence-at-hand/readiness to hand 37, 38, 39, 47, 510
presentation 6
Price, Derek de Solla 146
The Primacy of Perception (Merleau-Ponty) 166
The Principle of Hope (Bloch) 194
Prison Notebooks (Gramsci) 196
problem 111
Promethean legend 48, 49, 50
propositions 11, 13–13, 16 –18
prose 74
The Prose of the World (Merleau-Ponty) 93, 396
Proudhon, P.J. 198
Proust, Marcel 445
Psyché: Inventions de l’autre (Derrida) 466
psychoanalysis 159, 399, 415, 416, 423, 424–425, 478
psychologism 5, 8, 11, 32
Psychology of Imagination (Sartre) 62, 64
Psychology of Weltanschauungen (Jaspers) 118
pupil/teacher 295, 430
question 252
Quine, W.V.O. 147, 157
racism 466, 480, 492
Radical Philosophy 203
rationality 224, 491
Reading Capital (Althusser) 200
real, the 494 –495

48.8 Page 478

▲back to top
Index 440
reality 305, 480 –481
reason 219, 220, 223, 251, 263, 276, 281–282, 306, 483, 484, 491 –493
Redner, Hugh 146
reduction 16–16, 246–246, 257
reflection, primary and secondary 135 –111
reification 262, 510
religion, in Jaspers 125–126;
in Levinas 166–8;
in Marcel 141–3
representation 131–131, 402, 415;
and justice 492–8
responsibility 71, 136
‘ressentiment’ (Scheler) 87
Revolution in Poetic Language (Kristeva) 417
rhetoric 265 –265
Ricardo, D. 402
Ricoeur, Paul 1, 164, 241, 242, 243;
on action 328–9;
on explanation 331;
on freedom 336;
fusion of horizons 307;
hermeneutics 299, 302;
on imagination 333;
and language , 310, 313–15;
text interpretation 322–6, 330, 343;
on understanding 331
Riehl 303
Robbe-Grillet, A. 399
Roland Barthes (Barthes) 399
Rorty, Richard 164, 253, 484
Rose, Jacqueline 416
Rosmini, A. 300
Rossi, Mario 309
Rousseau, Jean-Jacques 213, 443, 444, 446, 447, 462, 467 –468
Royce 109
Ruggiero, Guido de 314
Russell, Bertrand 12
sacrifice 222 –222
Sade, Marquis de 222 –223
St Augustine 44, 126, 133, 289
Saint-Exupéry Antoine de 96
Saitta, Giuseppe 384
salvation 112
Sartre, Jean-Paul 1, 6, 61–61, 86, 88, 128, 134, 191, 278, 403, 410, 411, 430, 433, 450;
‘biographies’ 89, 90, 92;
and the body 140;
contribution 77;

48.9 Page 479

▲back to top
Index 441
development 75–7;
ethics 85–9;
existential phenomenology 96–7;
existential psychoanalysis 89–90;
Marxism 97;
methodology and epistemology 77–9;
ontology 81–5;
philosophy of history 95–6;
philosophy and literature 90–2;
postmodernism 98–100;
psychology 80–1;
social philosophy 92–5;
structuralism 98
Saussure, Ferdinand de 1, 99, 258, 390–393, 403, 419, 484
scepticism 432
Schelling, Friedrich Wilhelm Joseph 109
Schirmacher, W. 146
Schlegel, Friedrich 402
Schleiermacher, Friedrich 240–240, 242
Schlick, M. 148
Schopenhauer, Arthur 112, 303, 409, 465
Sciacca, Michele Federico 291, 307
science 20, 22, 118–120, 227, 228, 251–251, 263–264;
and analytic-style 175–6, 177, 203–6;
and Bachelard 194–200;
continental 175–206;
and Duhem 187–94;
influences 178–9;
and Mach 177–8, 179–87
Search for a Method (Sartre) 63
Searle, John 444
The Second Sex (De Beauvoir) 411 –414
Seebohm, Thomas 168
seeing 44
self, the 133, 152, 220–221, 299, 403, 414
self-consciousness 210, 291, 293, 301, 458 –459
semiotics 1, 391–392, 395, 396, 397–398, 419 486–487, 510
see also sign, the
sensationalism 151
sense 16, 19
Sense and Non-Sense (Merleau-Ponty) 93
Sept 87
Serbati, Antonio Rosmini 289
Sève, Lucien 203
sexual difference 411–414, 415, 418, 423, 424–425, 428, 434, 435, 465
Shapin, S. 166;
and Scheffler, S. 206
A Short Course (Stalinist manual) 189, 190, 199

48.10 Page 480

▲back to top
Index 442
sign, the 11–12, 260, 391–392, 455, 457, 459, 461 –462
see also semiotics
sign-systems 460–461, 462
signifier/signified see semiotics
Signs (Merleau-Ponty) 93, 100
Smith, Ralph 161
Snow, C.P. 163
social imaginary 510
society, and individual 217;
theories concerning 255–8
Socratic dialogue 133
Sokolowski, Robert 17
solidarity 276 –276
sophia 37
Sorel, Georges 198
space 305
Spaventa, Bertrando 289, 291
Speaking/Language is Never Neutral/Neuter (Irigaray) 423
speech 14, 133, 456 –458
Speech and Phenomena (Derrida) 398, 455, 460, 461 –462
Spinoza, Benedictus de 200–201, 303, 383
spirit 294, 296–298, 299, 305
Spirito, Ugo 299, 314
Spurs (Derrida) 465
Stalin, Joseph 185, 188 –189
The Star of Redemption (Rosenzweig) 129
Stegmüller, Wolfgang 145
story-telling 273
Strauss, Leo 263
Stroker, E. 167
structuralism 79, 259, 486, 510;
French 390–404
see also poststructuralism
structure 395
The Structure of Behavior (Merleau-Ponty) 86, 88 –89
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (Kuhn) 244
A Study of History (Toynbee) 474
Stumpf, Karl 6, 10
style 397
sub-humanity 72 –72
Subject 412, 478, 485–486, 487, 495, 500
subject, the 277, 422, 432
subject-in-process 418
subject/object 245–246, 295, 300, 302, 384
subjectivism 6, 243, 245, 250–250, 259, 401, 459
substitution 136 –137
Symbolic, the 417, 418, 419, 420, 421
A System of Logic as a Theory of Knowing (Gentile) 292

49 Pages 481-490

▲back to top

49.1 Page 481

▲back to top
Index 443
The Taming of Chance (Hacking) 168
Taylor, Charles 271
technē 36–36, 37, 48–49, 511
technique 111 –112
Telos 222
text 398–399;
interpretation 315–26
theory 478
The Theory of Communicative Action (Habermas) 226, 230
The Theory of Intuition in Husserl’s Phenomenology (Levinas) 61
thinking 448
Thomism 307, 384
Thompson, E.P. 204 –204
Thompson, John B. 272
Tiles, Mary 147, 150, 161
time 5, 20–20, 301, 305;
in Aristotle 45, 51, 53;
existentiality 47–53;
in Hegel 56;
in Heidegger 68;
in Kant 55–6;
in Levinas 166;
in Sartre 78, 83
Time and Free Will (Bergson) 61
Time and Narrative (Ricoeur) 273–273, 282
Timpanaro, Sebartiano 198 –198
Totality and Infinity (Levinas) 127, 129 130, 132, 135
Toynbee, Arnold 474–475, 476
tradition 130, 253, 262, 281
transcendence 15–19, 38–43, 115–117,
Transcendence of the Ego (Sartre) 403
transcendental argument 2, 32
True, the 296, 297, 300
truth 5, 167, 291, 294, 298–300, 306, 415, 493, 496;
in Aristotle 42–3, 44;
in Gadamer 308, 313, 318, 322, 342;
in Heidegger 55, 62;
in Husserl 12–13, 17, 453;
in Jaspers 147–8;
in Ricoeur 340
Truth and Method (Gadamer) 243–244, 308, 266, 276
The Two Cultures (Snow) 162
unconscious 73, 400, 416, 429, 461
understanding 1, 240–242, 247–248, 249, 251, 253–308, 260, 261, 262–263, 268, 272, 276
The Unhappy Consciousness in the Philosophy of Hegel (Wahl) 86
Unity 304, 305, 307

49.2 Page 482

▲back to top
universal history 490–491, 493
universals/particulars 12
Useful, the 296, 297, 298, 300
Index 444
Valéry, Paul 92–93, 162 –162
validity 229
Validity in Interpretation (Hirsch) 242 –243
values 275–275, 282
Van Breda, Hermann 7
Varisco, Bernardino 383
Vienna Circle 149, 152, 167
violence 76, 285, 494
Virgin Mary 422
Virilio, Paul 495
The Visible and the Invisible (Merleau-Ponty) 97–99, 100
Voltaire 487
Wallace, William 156
War Diaries (Sartre) 77 –78
Warner, Marina 422
Weber, Max 124, 219, 220, 226, 230
Weierstrauss, Karl 6
Weil, Felix 214
Weil, Simone 410
Weinberg, C.B. 158
What is Literature? (Sartre) 93
What is Metaphysics? (Heidegger) 46
White, Haydn 284, 475
will-to-power 53
Willard, Dallas 10
Williams, Raymond 204
Wimmer, L. 145
Winch, Peter 241
Wittgenstein, L. 110, 148, 204, 241
Wittig, Monique 435
The Word (Sartre) 72
world 44
writing 397, 456, 462
Writing Degree Zero (Barthes) 397
Writing and Difference (Derrida) 398 460 –461
Wuketis, F.M. 167
Wundt, Wilhelm 6, 303
Zhdanov, Andrei 189